Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on October 2, 2020.

Registration No. 333-            

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM F-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

 

 

Abcam plc

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)

 

 

 

United Kingdom   2836   Not Applicable

(State or Other Jurisdiction of

Incorporation or Organization)

 

(Primary Standard Industrial

Classification Code Number)

 

(I.R.S. Employer

Identification No.)

Discovery Drive

Cambridge Biomedical Campus

Cambridge, CB2 0AX

United Kingdom

+44 (0) 1223 696000

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of Registrant’s principal executive offices)

 

 

Abcam Inc.

1 Kendall Square

Suite B2304

Cambridge, Massachusetts

02139-1517

(888) 772-2226

(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)

 

 

Copies to:

 

Ian D. Schuman

Nathan Ajiashvili

Latham & Watkins LLP

885 Third Avenue

New York, New York 10022

(212) 906-1200

 

Robbie McLaren

Latham & Watkins (London) LLP

99 Bishopsgate

London EC2M 3XF

United Kingdom

+44 20 7710-1000

 

Marcel R. Fausten

Yasin Keshvargar

Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP

450 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

(212) 450-4000

 

 

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after the effective date of this registration statement.

If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box.  ☐

If this form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ☐

If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ☐

If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ☐

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is an emerging growth company as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act of 1933. Emerging growth company  ☒

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards† provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act.  ☐

† The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

 

 

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

 

Title of Each Class of

Securities to be Registered(1)

 

Proposed

Maximum

Aggregate
Offering Price(2)(3)

  Amount of
Registration Fee

Ordinary shares, nominal value of £0.002

  $100,000,000   $10,910

 

 

(1)

American depositary shares (“ADSs”) issuable upon deposit of the ordinary shares registered hereby will be registered under a separate registration statement on Form F-6. Each ADS represents              ordinary shares.

(2)

Includes the aggregate offering price of additional ordinary shares, represented by ADSs, that the underwriters have the option to purchase.

(3)

Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

 

 

The registrant hereby amends this registration statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this registration statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until the registration statement shall become effective on such date as the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

The information in this preliminary prospectus is not complete and may be changed. These securities may not be sold until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This preliminary prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and we are not soliciting offers to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.

 

PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS (Subject to Completion)

DATED OCTOBER 2 , 2020

                American Depositary Shares

Representing                ordinary shares

 

 

LOGO

Abcam plc

 

 

This is the initial public offering of Abcam plc in the United States. We are offering                  American Depositary Shares, or ADSs, with each ADS representing the right to receive                 ordinary shares. We have applied to have our ADSs listed on the The Nasdaq Global Select Market (“Nasdaq”) under the symbol “ABCM.”

Our ordinary shares trade on AIM, a market of the London Stock Exchange, under the symbol “ABC.” On                 , 2020, the last reported sale price of our ordinary shares on AIM was £                per ordinary share (equivalent to $                per ADS based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.                ).

 

 

Investing in our ADSs involves a high degree of risk. Before buying any ADSs, you should carefully read the discussion of material risks of investing in our ADSs. See “Risk Factors” beginning on page 23.

 

 

We are both an “emerging growth company” and a “foreign private issuer” as defined under the U.S. federal securities laws and, as such, may elect to comply with certain reduced public company reporting requirements. See “Prospectus Summary—Implications of Being an Emerging Growth Company and a Foreign Private Issuer.”

 

 

 

      

Price to

public

      

Underwriting
discounts

and
commissions(1)

      

Proceeds,
before
expenses,

to us

 

Per ADS

       $                              $                              $                      

Total

       $                              $                              $                      

 

(1)

We refer you to “Underwriters” for additional information regarding underwriting compensation.

To the extent that the underwriters sell more than                ADSs, the underwriters have the option to purchase up to an additional                ADSs from us at the initial public offering price. The underwriters may exercise this option at any time within 30 days after the date of the final prospectus.

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

The underwriters expect to deliver the ADSs to purchasers on or about                  , 2020.

 

 

 

MORGAN STANLEY    BOFA SECURITIES
SVB LEERINK
LAZARD    WILLIAM BLAIR

Prospectus dated                  , 2020


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

ABOUT THIS PROSPECTUS

     ii  

MARKET AND INDUSTRY DATA

     ii  

TRADEMARKS

     ii  

PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL AND OTHER INFORMATION

     iii  

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

     1  

RISK FACTORS

     23  

SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

     65  

USE OF PROCEEDS

     67  

DIVIDEND POLICY

     68  

CAPITALIZATION

     69  

DILUTION

     71  

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

     73  

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

     75  

BUSINESS

     94  
     Page  

MANAGEMENT

     124  

PRINCIPAL SHAREHOLDERS

     138  

RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     140  

DESCRIPTION OF SHARE CAPITAL AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

     141  

DESCRIPTION OF AMERICAN DEPOSITARY SHARES

     160  

ORDINARY SHARES AND ADSS ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

     171  

MATERIAL TAX CONSIDERATIONS

     173  

UNDERWRITERS

     181  

EXPENSES OF THE OFFERING

     190  

LEGAL MATTERS

     191  

EXPERTS

     191  

SERVICE OF PROCESS AND ENFORCEMENT OF CIVIL LIABILITIES

     192  

WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     194  
 

 

 

For investors outside the United States: neither we nor the underwriters have done anything that would permit this offering or possession or distribution of this prospectus in any jurisdiction, other than the United States, where action for that purpose is required. Persons outside the United States who come into possession of this prospectus must inform themselves about, and observe any restrictions relating to, the offering of the ADSs and the distribution of this prospectus outside the United States.

Neither we nor the underwriters have authorized anyone to provide you with any information or to make any representations other than those contained in this prospectus, any amendment or supplement to this prospectus, or in any free writing prospectus we have prepared, and neither we nor the underwriters take responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information others may give you. Neither we nor the underwriters are making an offer to sell, or seeking offers to buy, these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. The information contained in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date on the cover page of this prospectus, regardless of the time of delivery of this prospectus or the sale of ADSs. Our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects may have changed since the date on the cover page of this prospectus.

We are incorporated under the laws of England and Wales. Under the rules of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”), we are currently eligible for treatment as a “foreign private issuer.” As a foreign private issuer, we will not be required to file periodic reports and financial statements with the SEC as frequently or as promptly as domestic registrants whose securities are registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”).

 

i


Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS PROSPECTUS

Except where the context otherwise requires or where otherwise indicated, the terms “Abcam,” the “Company,” the “Group,” “we,” “us,” “our company” and “our business” refer to Abcam plc, together with its consolidated subsidiaries as a consolidated entity.

MARKET AND INDUSTRY DATA

We obtained the industry, market and competitive position data in this prospectus from our own internal estimates, surveys and research as well as from publicly available information, industry and general publications and research, surveys and studies conducted by third parties, such as reports by CiteAb, a compiler and provider of citation data to the life science industry that uses its proprietary text mining technology and extensive human validation to search millions of scientific publications, EvaluatePharma, Pharmaprojects, Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services and Pivotal Scientific.

Our estimates of our addressable market include several key assumptions based on our industry knowledge, industry publications, and third-party research, as well as other surveys. Moreover, these estimates of our addressable market are based on analyzing five specific markets, their current market size value and their estimated growth rates. These markets include: (1) Immunohistochemistry (a type of tissue diagnostic), (2) Tissue Diagnostic, (3) Diagnostic Specialty Antibody Market, (4) Research Antibodies and (5) Therapeutic Antibodies. The information and data we have relied on in determining our estimates is obtained from: (i) MarketsandMarkets; (ii) Grand View Research; (iii) Market Data Forecast; (iv) Market Study Report; (v) Future Market Insight; (vi) Transparency Market Research; (vii) Mordor Intelligence; (viii) Nova One Advisor; (ix) Research and Markets; (x) Biospace; and (xi) Polaris Market Research. While we believe that our internal assumptions are reasonable, the sources we have relied on may be based on a small sample size and may fail to accurately reflect market opportunities. Moreover, no independent source has verified such assumptions, and we did not commission any of the market and industry data presented in this prospectus. Industry publications, research, surveys, studies and forecasts generally state that the information they contain has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable but that the accuracy and completeness of such information is not guaranteed. Forecasts and other forward-looking information obtained from these sources are subject to the same qualifications and uncertainties as the other forward-looking statements in this prospectus. These forecasts and forward-looking information are subject to uncertainty and risk due to a variety of factors, including those described under “Risk Factors.” These and other factors could cause results to differ materially from those expressed in the forecasts or estimates from independent third parties and us.

TRADEMARKS

We have proprietary rights to trademarks used in this prospectus that are important to our business, many of which are registered under applicable intellectual property laws. Solely for convenience, trademarks and trade names referred to in this prospectus may appear without the “®” or “” symbols, but such references are not intended to indicate, in any way, that we will not assert, to the fullest extent possible under applicable law, our rights or the rights of the applicable licensor to these trademarks and trade names. We do not intend our use or display of other companies’ trademarks, trade names or service marks to imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship of us by, any other companies. Each trademark, trade name or service mark of any other company appearing in this prospectus is the property of its respective holder.

 

ii


Table of Contents

PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL AND OTHER INFORMATION

This prospectus includes our audited consolidated financial statements as of and for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020 prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”), as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”). We refer to these consolidated financial statements collectively as our “annual consolidated financial statements.” None of our financial statements were prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP.

Our financial information is presented in pounds sterling. For the convenience of the reader, in this prospectus, unless otherwise indicated, translations from pounds sterling into U.S. dollars were made at the rate of £1.00 to $1.2369, which was the noon buying rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York on June 30, 2020. Such U.S. dollar amounts are not necessarily indicative of the amounts of U.S. dollars that could actually have been purchased upon exchange of pounds sterling at the dates indicated. All references in this prospectus to “$” mean U.S. dollars and all references to “£” and “GBP” mean pounds sterling.

Our fiscal year begins on July 1 and ends on June 30 of the following year. All references to fiscal year 2019 relate to the year ended June 30, 2019 and fiscal year 2020 relate to the year ended June 30, 2020.

 

iii


Table of Contents

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary does not contain all the information that you should consider before deciding to invest in our ADSs. You should read the entire prospectus carefully, including the “Risk Factors,” “Business,” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” sections and our consolidated financial statements and notes to those consolidated financial statements before making an investment decision.

Overview

We are a global life science company focused on identifying, developing and distributing high-quality reagents and tools for our customers at the forefront of life science research. Our products are used by researchers to study biological pathways, which is critical for scientific research, diagnostics and drug discovery. Our mission is to provide life science researchers with highly validated products and services to advance biological research and achieve their goals faster. We do this by continuously innovating and providing our customers with high-quality tools, together with expert customer support. Our product offering includes an extensive portfolio of antibodies and related protein research tools that are fundamental to our customers’ research and experimental workflow. Our customers are primarily scientists and researchers in academic institutions, research institutes and pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostics companies. Headquartered in Cambridge, United Kingdom, we operate across 15 locations around the world, supported by our world-class team of approximately 1,500 employees, including over 200 with PhDs, and have served customers in over 130 countries.

Our addressable market can be broadly classified into two categories, based on the application of our products and type of customer they serve:

 

   

Research use only (“RUO”) proteomic tools. We believe the global market for RUO antibodies and reagents is valued at approximately $3 billion as of 2019 and, as of 2019, was expected to grow at around 4% per annum (excluding any impact from COVID). These products include protein binding reagents, such as antibodies and immunoassays, and related reagents. Our research products are used to detect, quantify, visualize and modify proteins in scientific research experiments, which we believe serve as mission critical tools, to enable our customers to develop insights about targets and pathways of interest. Our customers include academic labs for scientific research and clinical labs in pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies. Our catalogue revenue, the substantial majority of which is purchased for RUO, accounted for 93.5% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

 

   

Antibody development for clinical application. Antibodies are a critical component in many in vitro diagnostic (“IVD”) assays and can also be used as therapeutic agents for the treatment of diseases, including cancers and immune-related diseases. In recent years, through the custom development of new antibodies and the out-licensing of our existing antibodies to biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies, we have extended the commercial potential of our products into these markets. The substantial majority of our custom products and licensing revenue (“Custom Products and Licensing revenue”), which includes custom development services, IVD sales and royalty and license income, is generated from these activities, and accounted for 6.5% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

Life science researchers are increasingly seeking higher quality tools and reagents, which deliver consistent, reproducible results, save time, uncover deeper biological insights and advance their research. We believe customers place their trust in Abcam because of our reputation for providing reliable, highly validated products



 

1


Table of Contents

with market leading specificity and high sensitivity, comprehensive and transparent product data, fast delivery and exceptional customer support. According to CiteAb, our products were cited in approximately half of all life science publications in 2019, and we were the most cited company in approximately 40% of the top 2,000 most studied protein targets as of June 30, 2020.

 

LOGO

Figure 1, Information as of June 30, 2020, except as otherwise stated

1)  In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019

2)  CiteAb, for 2019

We have developed an industry leading innovation platform that is informed by data analytics, research area specialists and the relationships we have built with our customers, all of which enable us to anticipate and align our innovation efforts with our customers’ research priorities. Today, approximately two-thirds of our primary antibody innovation pipeline is driven by our proprietary algorithms that interrogate a wide variety of internal and external data sources, including research literature and our web data, to predict product and market demand, which inform our development efforts. We leverage this data to anticipate which tools researchers will need in the future in order to help advance their research, as well as to identify breakthrough opportunities in areas where there is a lack of high-quality products or where we identify custom opportunities in collaboration with our customers. We believe this capability and, in particular, our unique ability to leverage our extensive proprietary data, provides us with strategic advantage and helps us sustain and extend our position as a market leader within the life science tools market.

We offer a large and differentiated portfolio of approximately 100,000 products with over 300,000 SKUs as of June 30, 2020. Our flexible sourcing model enables us to grow our product offering in line with researchers’ needs. This is achieved by developing and manufacturing in-house products, as well as sourcing products from our original equipment manufacturer (“OEM”) suppliers. We demand high product quality standards from our suppliers, and we enhance the utility of these products for our customers by providing additional data and product validation as well as by making them available through our global distribution platform and customer service. Over the last five years, we have increased focus on the development of in-house products for research areas we expect to have high demand. This focus has seen our proprietary product portfolio grow to represent 51% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, compared to 28% of our total revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2012.



 

2


Table of Contents

We are continuously expanding our portfolio to provide our customers with additional solutions and further expand within our addressable markets. Utilizing the foundations laid by our innovation platform and strategic acquisitions, our strategy is to leverage our capabilities to continue expansion into adjacencies and more comprehensive product offerings, including primary conjugated antibodies, singleplex and multiplex immunoassays, proteins and edited cell lines. In addition, through partnerships with biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies, the potential application of our products is being extended into diagnostic and therapeutic markets.

We make our extensive product characterization and validation data available to our customers across our portfolio. This data is sourced by our in-house laboratories, our network of collaborators and independent consumer product reviews. Researchers use this to be able to select the right product for their highly specific needs. Stringent quality control and validation processes are carried out by our global laboratories to check the activity, stability and performance of our products. We are continuing to invest in product validation in order to raise quality standards and differentiate ourselves in the marketplace. For example, our award winning knockout CRISPR gene editing program is one of the most accepted and trusted validation processes for antibody specificity, and we have been recognized for carrying out the largest number of knockout validations for antibodies in the industry, according to CiteAb, who presented us with the award in 2020. Our investment in product validation helps us meet our customers’ increasing demand for higher quality research tools.

Having established one of the first digital platforms in our industry over 20 years ago, our website, search engine optimization and data remain a strategic advantage. As a part of our core strategy, we now aim to build on our position by establishing a highly personalized, cross-platform digital relationship with our customers, wherein we are able to uniquely understand and anticipate their needs. Coupled with greater personalization of the user experience and the creation of a more dynamic and agile content management system, our goal is to provide customers with more relevant products and services to help them achieve their research goals, improve online conversion rates, capture a greater share of business from existing customers and generate business from new customers.

Since 2001, we have sold our products and services to customers in over 130 countries through a variety of channels, including our ecommerce sites, a network of distributors and a targeted field sales team. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our worldwide customer base consisted of approximately 750,000 life science researchers. As of June 30, 2020, we had seven manufacturing facilities and a global distribution network that enables prompt delivery to our customers, with orders generally shipped within 24 to 48 hours of ordering.

We recorded revenue of £260.0 million, profit for the year of £12.5 million and Adjusted Operating Profit of £44.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. Revenue was broadly flat for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, as compared to the same period in the prior year. For the definition of Adjusted Operating Profit and reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit to profit for the year, please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Metrics.”

Large and Growing Addressable Markets

In 2019, we estimated that our capabilities served a total addressable market of approximately $8 billion, which we estimate was comprised of a total addressable market of the research antibody and reagents industry of approximately $3 billion and a total addressable market for the generation of third-party antibodies for diagnostic and therapeutic companies’ applications of approximately $5 billion.

The growing and fragmented proteomic research reagents market currently represents a majority of our sales and is a field where we believe we have established a strong position, with our revenue having grown at a compound annual growth rate (“CAGR”) of 13% over the last six years, compared to an estimated 4% per year



 

3


Table of Contents

long-term growth rate for the proteomics research reagents market. Even as a leader within this market, we believe there is significant headroom for growth, as highlighted by Figure 2 below.

 

 

LOGO

Figure 2

Our Growth Strategies

We aim to support those at the forefront of biological research, and we will continue to capitalize on our platform and competitive strengths as we pursue multiple growth strategies:

Extend Leadership in RUO Antibodies. We are committed to help advance our customers’ research and, in turn, support our market share gains. We seek to do this through the continual addition of product data, knowledge and information that demonstrates performance and increased utility in a broader range of experiments and applications.

This strategy is further enhanced through our focus on in-house proprietary products, including one of the world’s largest portfolios of recombinant rabbit monoclonal antibodies. We continuously innovate to ensure that our portfolio of antibodies is aligned with the targets, research areas and biological pathways in highest demand from our customers.

Remove Innovation Constraints and Launch New Lines. We are developing our innovation capabilities to meet our customers’ needs in adjacent product areas. This enables us to further grow within our addressable markets and at the same time provides us with in-house tools to develop high-quality validated antibodies thereby expanding our product portfolio. Specifically, we are focusing our efforts to expand our portfolio in:

 

   

Antibody-Derived Products for High Value, High Growth Markets. We intend to extend the range of products derived from our catalogue of in-house primary antibodies, including primary antibody conjugates, antibody pairs, our SimpleStep singleplex assays and our in-house Fireplex multiplex products.

 

   

Complementary Product Areas that Simultaneously Enable Faster Antibody Innovation. These product areas include launching a portfolio of highly validated bioactive proteins, as well as a portfolio of disease relevant edited cell lines and associated cell lysates.

 

   

Third-Party Instrumentation Platforms and Multiplex Partners. Our focus is to partner with third parties developing either novel platforms or upgrading their existing platforms to address novel biomarkers and help them develop the right content to offer their users (antibodies and other protein reagents).



 

4


Table of Contents

Be a Leading Discovery Partner for Biopharmaceutical Organizations. Our in-house proprietary product portfolio allows us to have greater flexibility in customizing products to our customers’ specification and needs. We believe this will continue to help us to bring innovative solutions to our global strategic customers in the diagnostic and biopharmaceutical markets, leading to increased opportunities for custom services, partnerships, and collaborations.

Be a Leading Digital Company. Our goal is to significantly enhance our digital channel by establishing a highly personalized digital relationship with our customers, which will be device agnostic, cloud based and driven by artificial intelligence. We believe this will help us to uniquely understand and anticipate researchers’ needs and therefore, capture greater market share from existing customers and generate business from new customers. Our web search position is influenced by a combination of organic web searches by users and some paid advertisements, which drive traffic into our website.

Remove Scalability Constraints and Sustain Value. Our objective is to strengthen our teams, systems and infrastructure while driving operational efficiency. We are focused on increasing our manufacturing capacity, increasing automation at process bottlenecks and optimizing our global network and procurement functions. We are also transforming our systems and processes by implementing Oracle Cloud enterprise resource planning (“ERP”) and other software solutions to replace legacy information technology (“IT”) systems. We also seek to expand our operations in multiple high growth regions, such as China. Additionally, in certain markets where we currently rely on distributors and see growth potential, we intend to explore direct distribution opportunities to enhance our offering and expand our customer base.

Selectively Pursue Acquisitions. We have a strong track record of successfully identifying, completing and integrating strategic acquisitions and investments. Our strong brand, broad platform, global infrastructure and diversified customer base has allowed us to generate growth and operating leverage through acquisitions. We intend to continue to pursue opportunistic acquisitions in our existing and adjacent customer segments to accelerate our growth, expand geographic coverage and augment our capabilities and workflow solutions.

Our Competitive Strengths

Our customer-centric business model, combined with our product innovation capabilities and deep understanding of our customers’ needs, allows us to differentiate ourselves in the marketplace and is at the core of our competitive advantage. We believe the following competitive strengths provide the foundation for our position as a partner of choice for mission critical products and services to our customers.



 

5


Table of Contents

Brand Leadership in Research Use Antibodies. We have established ourselves as a leading brand in research use antibodies, driven by high-quality, reliable products combined with extensive and transparent product data and excellent customer service. Our citations have shown consistent growth year over year since 2010 as demonstrated by Figure 3 below, which we believe demonstrates our influence within the research community. This is because the scientific community faces two key issues: the inability to reproduce experiments efficiently and wasted funds due to purchasing the wrong product. To combat these issues, life scientists rely on citations in peer-reviewed literature to find the most appropriate product for their research and to help reproduce their results. Our antibodies are increasingly cited in peer-reviewed literature, making us more visible to the life sciences research community and increasing the chances that researchers will choose our antibodies. Thus, we believe that as our products have been cited in an increasing number of research publications, our influence within the research community has grown. In addition, we believe that this increase in citations serves as an inherent recurring marketing tool to help sustain our leadership position within the antibodies market.

 

 

LOGO

Figure 3, Source: CiteAb, 2019

Customer-Centric, Data Driven Model

Leading Digital Presence. As one of the first companies to provide a digital platform for antibodies and reagents, we believe our first mover advantage combined with the provision of extensive and transparent product validation data and search engine optimization has led to leading global traffic on our website over time. In the last three fiscal years ended June 30, 2020, the total number of sessions on our website has grown by more than 30%, with over one million user interactions on our website per month for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. A “session” on our website includes page views, ecommerce transactions or other interactions, and we monitor “sessions” to measure the volume of traffic to our website, which is strongly correlated to sales. In June 2020, we maintained the leading web search position for 10,000 of the top primary antibody search terms, appearing on the first page and at the top of users’ search results in approximately one-third of searches, compared to less than 20% for our next closest competitor, according to our internal data. We believe that the significance of “appearing first” in search results means that we are likely to experience greater traffic to our website, which may lead to greater brand recognition and increased sales. Our web search position is influenced by a combination of organic web searches by users and some paid advertisements, which drive traffic into our website.

Data Driven. Our web traffic data, combined with our ability to collect, analyze and interpret customer data, provides us unique insight into the needs of our customers. This in turn enables us to customize our engagement with customers and deliver more relevant, targeted marketing media, with the goal of improving the customer experience.

Differentiated Product Innovation Platform. Today, approximately two-thirds of our primary antibody innovation pipeline is largely driven by data algorithms that are able to analyze market demand and interrogate research literature to help us anticipate which tools researchers will need in the future. The balance is focused on



 

6


Table of Contents

breakthrough innovation opportunities in areas where there are either few or no tools that currently exist for scientific research. We innovate by means of our in-house development efforts, we create new products for partners through our custom solutions teams, and through our channel we help to accelerate the market acceptance and growth of promising, high-quality third-party products to complement our own product offerings.

Product Quality and Customer Service Drives Customer Loyalty. The success of our customers’ work, from basic research to translational science, diagnostics and therapeutic clinical programs, requires rigorous product quality, performance and reliability. We continue to drive our quality standards through a variety of internal initiatives, including extensive product quality assurance programs, manufacturing processes that increase the reliability and consistency of our product performance, notably recombinant antibody production, and ongoing quality management of third-party products offered through our platform. While most of our products are sold as RUO reagents, the high quality of our products allows us to support antibody and assay development for use across the IVD sector, from laboratory-developed tests and rapid assay platforms through to companion diagnostics and clinical trials.

Large, Differentiated Product Offering. We offer an extensive portfolio of antibodies and related protein research reagents that enables us to serve life scientists studying a wide range of research areas. As of June 30, 2020, we offered approximately 100,000 products on our customer website, totaling over 300,000 SKUs. We also offer custom services to certain of our customers seeking access to novel, high-quality and personalized solutions to support the development of specific diagnostic and therapeutic applications. Since 2013, we have undertaken more than 2,000 custom projects with our pharmaceutical and diagnostic partners.

Global Scale, Strategic Locations and Specialized Infrastructure. Since 2001, we have sold our products and services to customers in over 130 countries. We have seven manufacturing facilities and seven distribution centers strategically located across four continents to serve many of the largest clusters of life science research hubs, which enhances supply chain efficiency. Additionally, we have a multi-channel commercial presence through our digital platform, on-ground global sales teams, industry conferences and other events. Our customer and scientific support teams provide highly specialized assistance to ensure that our customers are supported through their research.

Resilient and Growing End Markets and Attractive Financial Profile. We serve the life science research markets, which are supported by significant funding and capital investments from both public and private institutions. We expect the convergence of multiple industry trends to underlie continued growth in our sector, including an increasing global demand for healthcare and strong funding support for biomedical research. Furthermore, while our products are critical to basic research and development, our products often represent a small percentage of the overall cost of our customers’ workflow. Additionally, most of our products are consumable in nature and once established in the marketplace, the demand tends to be stable. We have an attractive business model due to our resilient revenue base (which grew at a CAGR of 13% from 2014 to 2020), high product margins and strong cash flow generation.

Strong Leadership and Global Team with Proven Ability to Execute. Our management team has a proven track record of delivering business growth, executing on investment plans, driving continuous and material improvement of our global enterprise and generating high returns on capital. Our management team is supported by approximately 1,500 employees around the world, including over 200 with PhDs, who have extensive scientific and commercial experience and enable us to provide our customers with tailored expertise and service.

Recent Developments

The COVID-19 pandemic has adversely affected, and is expected to continue to adversely affect, elements of our business (including elements of our operations, supply chains and distribution systems). We are continuing



 

7


Table of Contents

to monitor closely how the pandemic and related response measures are affecting our business. Our production and manufacturing facilities are located around the world, so while certain facilities were shut down or operating at reduced capacity, our other locations were able to continue operating as normal. The pandemic reduced demand during the second half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 as research laboratories globally were temporarily shut down or operating at reduced capacity, resulting in a decline in revenue in the second half of the fiscal year of approximately 10% compared with the second half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Our monthly revenue compared to the same period in the prior year decreased by 37.6% in April, 26.2% in May and 0.2% in June 2020. Although we have seen a reduction in demand due to the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, we have not observed any significant changes in our underlying customer base, and we have been and will continue to serve our customers even at a reduced level until their activities return to normal. In April 2020, we began to see the reopening of laboratories in certain countries in Europe, and we have continued to see a gradual increase in activity across all regions since then. The gradual recovery of revenue we have seen compared with previous levels reflects the underlying factors affecting demand, including the easing of lockdown restrictions and the partial or full reopening of academic and biopharmaceutical research laboratories around the world. While we see demand and revenue returning, there remains significant uncertainty and geographical variation with regards to our outlook, particularly across North America where the number of COVID-19 cases is rising. We expect that our fiscal year 2021 results will be impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic; however, it is not possible to predict the ultimate impact of the developments described above or the full duration and impact of the pandemic.

Our operating expenses increased from the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. Consistent with our previously announced growth strategy, we intend to continue to increase our rate of investment in growth projects and expect our operating expenses will continue to increase in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2021 and the medium term as a result. In particular, we expect such increases in operating expenses relative to prior periods as we (i) continue to increase our investment in research and development, digital marketing and e-commerce, (ii) continue to expand into adjacent markets and build scalability into our operational infrastructure, including through further investment in our IT systems, infrastructure and business processes and (iii) continue to invest in our people and increase our headcount. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our operating profit margin was 4.0% and our adjusted operating profit margin was 17.1%, and we expect our operating profit margins to continue to be lower as a result of the effects of COVID-19 and our investment plans in the short to medium-term.

Risk Factors

Investing in our ADSs involves risks. You should carefully consider the risks described in “Risk Factors” before making a decision to invest in our ADSs. If any of these risks actually occurs, our business, financial condition or results of operations could be materially and adversely affected. In such case, the trading price of our ADSs would likely decline, and you may lose all or part of your investment. The following is a summary of some of the principal risks we face:

 

   

a regional or global health pandemic, including the novel coronavirus (“COVID-19”), which has adversely affected elements of our business, could severely affect our business, including due to impacts on our operations and supply chains;

 

   

challenges in implementing our strategies for revenue growth in light of competitive challenges;

 

   

developing new products and enhancing existing products, adapting to significant technological change and responding to the introduction of new products by competitors to remain competitive;

 

   

failing to successfully identify or integrate acquired businesses or assets into our operations or fully recognize the anticipated benefits of businesses or assets that we acquire;

 

   

if our customers discontinue or spend less on research, development, production or other scientific endeavors;



 

8


Table of Contents
   

failing to successfully use, access and maintain information systems and implement new systems to handle our changing needs;

 

   

cyber security risks and any failure to maintain the confidentiality, integrity and availability of our computer hardware, software and internet applications and related tools and functions;

 

   

failing to successfully manage our current and potential future growth;

 

   

any significant interruptions in our operations;

 

   

if our products fail to satisfy applicable quality criteria, specifications and performance standards;

 

   

failing to maintain our brand and reputation;

 

   

our dependence upon management and highly skilled employees and our ability to attract and retain these highly skilled employees; and

 

   

as a foreign private issuer, we are exempt from a number of rules under the U.S. securities laws and Nasdaq corporate governance rules and are permitted to file less information with the SEC than U.S. companies, which may limit the information available to holders of our ADSs.



 

9


Table of Contents

Corporate Structure

The following diagram illustrates our corporate structure immediately following the consummation of this offering (assuming the underwriters do not exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs in full):

 

LOGO

Corporate Information

We were incorporated as a private limited company with the legal name Tayvin 103 Limited under the laws of England and Wales on February 12, 1998 with the company number 03509322. On March 26, 1998, we changed our company name to Abcam Limited, and on October 26, 2005, we re-registered as a public listed company with the name Abcam plc. Our principal office is located at Discovery Drive, Cambridge Biomedical Campus, Cambridge, United Kingdom, CB2 0AX, and our telephone number is +(44) 1223 696000. Since 2005, our ordinary shares have traded on the AIM market of the London Stock Exchange, under the symbol “ABC.” Our website address is www.abcam.com. The information contained on, or that can be accessed from, our website does not form part of this prospectus. Our agent for service of process in the United States is Abcam Inc., 1 Kendall Square, Suite B2304 Cambridge, Massachusetts 02139-1517, United States of America.



 

10


Table of Contents

Implications of Being an Emerging Growth Company and a Foreign Private Issuer

We qualify as an “emerging growth company” pursuant to the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, as amended (the “JOBS Act”). An emerging growth company may take advantage of specified exemptions from various requirements that are otherwise applicable generally to U.S. public companies. These provisions include:

 

   

an exemption to include in an initial public offering registration statement only two years of audited financial statements and selected financial data and only two years of related disclosure;

 

   

reduced executive compensation disclosure; and

 

   

an exemption from the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (the “Sarbanes-Oxley Act”) in the assessment of the emerging growth company’s internal control over financial reporting (which generally would otherwise be applicable for a non-emerging growth company commencing with its second annual report on Form 20-F following the completion of its initial public offering).

We may choose to take advantage of some but not all of these reduced reporting burdens.

We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest of:

 

   

the last day of our fiscal year during which we have total annual revenue of at least $1.07 billion;

 

   

the last day of our fiscal year following the fifth anniversary of the closing of this offering;

 

   

the date on which we have, during the previous three-year period, issued more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; or

 

   

the date on which we are deemed to be a “large accelerated filer” under the Exchange Act, which would occur if the market value of our ordinary shares that are held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the last business day of our most recently completed second fiscal quarter.

In addition, upon the closing of this offering, we will report under the Exchange Act as a “foreign private issuer.” As a foreign private issuer, we may take advantage of certain provisions under the rules that allow us to follow the laws of the United Kingdom for certain corporate governance matters. Even after we no longer qualify as an emerging growth company, as long as we qualify as a foreign private issuer under the Exchange Act, we will be exempt from certain provisions of the Exchange Act that are applicable to U.S. domestic public companies, including:

 

   

the sections of the Exchange Act regulating the solicitation of proxies, consents or authorizations in respect of a security registered under the Exchange Act;

 

   

the sections of the Exchange Act requiring insiders to file public reports of their share ownership and trading activities and liability for insiders who profit from trades made in a short period of time;

 

   

the rules under the Exchange Act requiring the filing with the SEC of quarterly reports on Form 10-Q containing unaudited financial and other specified information, or current reports on Form 8-K, upon the occurrence of specified significant events; and

 

   

Regulation Fair Disclosure, which regulates selective disclosures of material information by issuers.

Foreign private issuers, like emerging growth companies, also are exempt from certain more stringent executive compensation disclosure rules. Thus, if we remain a foreign private issuer, even if we no longer qualify as an emerging growth company, we will continue to be exempt from the more stringent compensation disclosures required of public companies that are neither an emerging growth company nor a foreign private issuer.



 

11


Table of Contents

We may take advantage of these exemptions until such time as we are no longer a foreign private issuer. We are required to determine our status as a foreign private issuer on an annual basis at the end of our second fiscal quarter. We would cease to be a foreign private issuer, and be required to transition on January 1 of the following year, at such time as more than 50% of our outstanding voting securities are held by U.S. residents and any of the following three circumstances applies:

 

   

the majority of our executive officers or directors are U.S. citizens or residents;

 

   

more than 50% of our assets are located in the United States; or

 

   

our business is administered principally in the United States.



 

12


Table of Contents

THE OFFERING

 

ADSs offered by us

             ADSs, each representing              ordinary shares.

 

Option to purchase additional ADSs

We have granted the underwriters an option to purchase up to additional ADSs from us within 30 days of the date of this prospectus.

 

Ordinary shares to be outstanding after this offering

             ordinary shares (or              ordinary shares if the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs from us in full).

 

American Depositary Shares

The underwriters will deliver ADSs representing our ordinary shares. Each ADS represents              of our ordinary shares.

 

  As an ADS holder, we will not treat you as one of our shareholders. The depositary, Citibank, N.A., will be the holder of the ordinary shares underlying your ADSs. You will have rights as provided in the deposit agreement among us, the depositary and all holders and beneficial owners of ADSs thereunder. You may surrender your ADSs to the depositary and withdraw the underlying ordinary shares pursuant to the limitations set forth in the deposit agreement. The depositary will charge you fees for, among other items, any such surrender for the purpose of withdrawal. As described in the deposit agreement, we and the depositary may amend or terminate the deposit agreement without your consent. Any amendment that imposes or increases fees or charges or which materially prejudices any substantial existing right you have as an ADS holder will not become effective as to outstanding ADSs until 30 days after notice of the amendment is given to ADS holders. If you continue to hold your ADSs, you agree to be bound by the terms of the deposit agreement then in effect. To better understand the terms of the ADSs, you should carefully read the “Description of American Depositary Shares” section of this prospectus. You should also read the deposit agreement, which is an exhibit to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part.

 

Depositary

Citibank, N.A.

 

Custodian

Citibank, N.A. (London)

 

Use of proceeds

We estimate that the net proceeds to us from this offering will be approximately $             million (or approximately $             million if the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs from us in full, after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, based on an assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                     , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.            ).


 

13


Table of Contents
  The principal purposes of this offering are to obtain additional working capital, to create a public market for our ADSs and to facilitate our future access to the public equity markets. We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering for working capital, general corporate purposes and to fund incremental growth, including for possible acquisitions. See “Use of Proceeds.”

 

Dividend policy

In the future, our board of directors may decide, in its discretion, whether dividends may be declared and paid. See “Dividend Policy.”

 

Risk factors

See “Risk Factors” and other information included in this prospectus for a discussion of factors you should carefully consider before deciding to invest in our ADSs.

 

Listing

We have applied to list our ADSs on Nasdaq under the symbol “ABCM.”

 

AIM trading symbol

“ABC”

The number of our ordinary shares to be outstanding after this offering is based on              ordinary shares outstanding as of                     , 2020 and excludes:

 

   

             ordinary shares issuable upon the exercise of options outstanding under our equity incentive plans as of             , 2020 at a weighted average exercise price of $             per share; and

 

   

             ordinary shares reserved for future issuance under our equity incentive plans as described in “Management—Equity Compensation Arrangements.”

Unless otherwise indicated, all information in this prospectus assumes or gives effect to:

 

   

no exercise of the outstanding options described above after                     , 2020; and

 

   

no exercise by the underwriters of their option to purchase up to              additional ADSs in this offering.



 

14


Table of Contents

SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

We prepare our consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. The following summary historical consolidated financial data as of and for the years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements, which are included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our historical results for any prior period are not necessarily indicative of results expected in any future period.

The financial data set forth below should be read in conjunction with, and is qualified by reference to, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus.

We maintain our books and records in pounds sterling, and we prepare our financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. We report our financial results in pounds sterling. For the convenience of the reader, we have translated pound sterling amounts in the tables below as of June 30, 2020 and for the year ended June 30, 2020 into U.S. dollars at the noon buying rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York on June 30, 2020, which was £1.00 to $1.2369. These translations should not be considered representations that any such amounts have been, could have been or could be converted into U.S. dollars at that or any other exchange rate as of that or any other date.

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions, except per share data)  

Consolidated Income Statement:

      

Revenue

   £         259.9     £         260.0   $         321.6

Cost of sales

     (76.7     (79.8     (98.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     183.2       180.2       222.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Selling, general and administrative expenses

      

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (88.9     (118.3     (146.3

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (23.2     (13.1     (16.2

Research and development expenses

      

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (10.7     (17.4     (21.5

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (4.3     (20.9     (25.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     56.1       10.5       13.0

Finance income

     0.6       0.7       0.9

Finance costs

     (0.3     (2.8     (3.5
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before tax

     56.4       8.4       10.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Tax (charge) / credit

     (11.4     4.1       5.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year

   £ 45.0     £ 12.5     $ 15.5  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share

   £ 0.220     £ 0.060     $ 0.074  

Diluted earnings per share

   £ 0.218     £ 0.060     $ 0.074  

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share

     204.9       207.6       207.6  

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

     206.7       209.6       209.6  


 

15


Table of Contents
     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions)  

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement:

                                                                     

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   £ 70.2     £ 63.0     $ 77.9  

Net cash outflow from investing activities

     (49.9     (148.1     (183.2

Net cash (outflow) / inflow from financing activities

     (24.7     184.6       228.3  

(Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

     (4.4     99.5       123.1  

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions, except as otherwise stated)  

Other Data(1):

                                                                     

Total CER revenue growth(2)

           (1.4 )%      (1.4 )% 

Free Cash Flow(2)

   £ 34.3     £ 19.0     $ 23.5  

Adjusted Operating Profit(2)

   £ 83.6     £ 44.5     $ 55.0  

Adjusted Operating Profit Margin(2)

     32.2     17.1     17.1

Return on Capital Employed (“ROCE”)(2)

     20.8     6.8     6.8

Adjusted Diluted earnings per share(2)

   £ 0.326     £  0.166     $ 0.205  

 

     As of June 30, 2020  
     Actual     As Adjusted(3)  
     (in millions)  

Consolidated Balance Sheet items:

                                                   

Cash and cash equivalents

   £ 187.3     $ 231.7     £                       $                    

Total assets

     811.4       1,003.6       

Total liabilities

     (308.8     (382.0     

Share capital and share premium account

     138.6     171.4       

Retained earnings

     255.7     316.3       

Total equity attributable to the equity shareholders of the parent

     502.6     621.7       

 

(1)

See the definitions of key operating and financial metrics in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Key Indicators of Performance and Financial Condition.”

(2)

Total CER revenue growth, Free Cash Flow, Adjusted Operating Profit, Adjusted Operating Profit Margin, ROCE and Adjusted Diluted earnings per share are supplemental measures of our performance that are not required by, or presented in accordance with, IFRS. These measures should not be considered as alternatives to profit for the year as measures of financial performance. See “—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for more information.

(3)

As Adjusted to give effect to the sale by us of             ordinary shares at a public offering price of $             per ADS, the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £            on                     , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.            ), after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

Non-IFRS Financial Measures

We collect and analyze operating and financial data to evaluate the health of our business and assess our performance. In addition to revenue, profit before tax and other results under IFRS, we assess our performance using a number of financial measures that are not defined under IFRS. We use Total CER revenue growth, Free Cash Flow, Adjusted Operating Profit, Adjusted Operating Profit Margin, ROCE and Adjusted Diluted earnings per share, each of which is described below, to evaluate our business, and we have included these non-IFRS financial measures in this prospectus because they are key measures used by our management to evaluate our



 

16


Table of Contents

operating performance. Accordingly, we believe that these non-IFRS financial measures provide useful information to investors and others in understanding and evaluating our operating results in the same manner as our management team. These non-IFRS performance measures exclude certain cash and non-cash items that we believe are not reflective of the normal course of our business. Our calculation of these non-IFRS financial measures may differ from similarly titled non-IFRS measures, if any, reported by other companies. These non-IFRS financial measures should not be considered in isolation from, or as substitutes for, financial information prepared in accordance with IFRS.

Total CER Revenue Growth

Total CER revenue growth is our total revenue growth from one fiscal year to the next on a constant exchange rate basis. We measure CER revenue growth by applying the prior fiscal year’s actual exchange rates for each month to the current fiscal year’s equivalent monthly results. We use this measure to identify the relative year-on-year performance of the business by removing the impact of currency movements that are outside of management’s control. Total CER revenue growth is included in this prospectus because it is a key metric used internally to assess our financial performance. We also believe that Total CER revenue growth is useful to investors, analysts and others in assessing our performance. Management believes that Total CER revenue growth is an appropriate measure of operating performance because it eliminates the impact of currency movements.

Total CER revenue growth is not an IFRS measure of our financial performance and should not be considered as an alternative to profit for the year as a measure of financial performance or as an alternative to any other performance measure derived in accordance with IFRS. Total CER revenue growth should not be construed as an inference that our future results will be unaffected by unusual or other items. Management compensates for these limitations by relying on our IFRS results in addition to using Total CER revenue growth as a supplemental measure. Our measure of Total CER revenue growth is not necessarily comparable to similarly titled captions of other companies due to different methods of calculation.

The following table presents a reconciliation of revenue, the most directly comparable IFRS financial measure, to Total CER revenue growth for the periods indicated:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2020     2020  
     (in millions)  

Fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 revenue

         £ 259.9           $ 321.5  

Fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 revenue at actual exchange rates

     260.0       321.6  

Effect of foreign exchange

     (3.7     (4.6

Fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 revenue at prior year’s exchange rates

     256.3       317.0  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total CER revenue growth

     (1.4 )%      (1.4 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Free Cash Flow

Free Cash Flow is net cash inflow from operating activities less net capital expenditure, transfer of cash from/(to) escrow in respect of future capital expenditure and the principal and interest elements of lease obligations. Free Cash Flow provides an indication of the amount of cash available for discretionary investing or financing after removing capital related items. Free Cash Flow is included in this prospectus because it is a key metric used internally to measure our liquidity. We also believe that Free Cash Flow is useful to investors, analysts and others in assessing our liquidity.

Free Cash Flow is not an IFRS measure of our financial performance and should not be considered as an alternative to net cash inflow from operations as a measure of liquidity, or as an alternative to any other



 

17


Table of Contents

performance measure derived in accordance with IFRS. Free Cash Flow should not be construed as an inference that our future results will be unaffected by unusual or other items. Management compensates for these limitations by relying on our IFRS results in addition to using Free Cash Flow as a supplemental measure. Our measure of Free Cash Flow is not necessarily comparable to similarly titled captions of other companies due to different methods of calculation.

The following table presents a reconciliation of net cash inflow from operating activities, the most directly comparable IFRS financial measure, to Free Cash Flow for the periods indicated:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions)  

Net cash inflow from operating activities

         £ 70.2           £ 63.0           $ 77.9  

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

     (17.7     (12.7     (15.7

Purchase of intangible assets

     (22.7     (23.0     (28.4

Transfer of cash from / (to) escrow in respect of future capital expenditure

     4.5       (0.6     (0.7

Principal element of lease obligations

           (6.8     (8.4

Interest element of lease obligations

           (0.9     (1.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Free Cash Flow

   £ 34.3     £ 19.0     $ 23.5  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted Operating Profit

We define Adjusted Operating Profit as profit for the year before taking account of finance income, finance costs, tax, exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles. Exceptional items consist of certain cash and non-cash items that we believe are not reflective of the normal course of our business. We identify and determine items to be exceptional based on their nature and incidence or by their significance. As a result, the composition of exceptional items may vary from year to year. Exceptional items currently consist of the impairment of intangible assets, systems and process improvement costs, acquisition costs, integration and reorganization costs and amortization of acquisition intangibles. Adjusted Operating Profit is included in this prospectus because it is a key metric used internally to assess our financial performance. We also believe that Adjusted Operating Profit is useful to investors, analysts and others in assessing our performance. We believe that disclosing Adjusted Operating Profit enables a reader to isolate and evaluate the impact of such items on results and allows for a fuller understanding of performance from year to year. Management believes that Adjusted Operating Profit is an appropriate measure of operating performance because it eliminates the impact of expenses that do not relate directly to the performance of the underlying business.

Adjusted Operating Profit is not an IFRS measure of our financial performance and should not be considered as an alternative to profit for the year, or as an alternative to any other performance measure derived in accordance with IFRS. Adjusted Operating Profit should not be construed as an inference that our future results will be unaffected by unusual or other items. Management compensates for these limitations by relying on our IFRS results in addition to using Adjusted Operating Profit as a supplemental measure. Our measure of Adjusted Operating Profit is not necessarily comparable to similarly titled captions of other companies due to different methods of calculation.



 

18


Table of Contents

The following table presents a reconciliation of profit for the year, the most directly comparable IFRS financial measure, to Adjusted Operating Profit for the periods indicated:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions)  

Profit for the year

   £          45.0     £          12.5     $          15.5  

Tax charge / (credit)

     11.4       (4.1     (5.2

Finance income

     (0.6     (0.7     (0.9

Finance costs

     0.3       2.8       3.5  

Impairment of intangible assets(a)

     12.8       14.9       18.4  

System and process improvement costs(b)

     4.5       4.3       5.3  

Acquisition costs(c)

           4.1       5.1  

Integration and reorganization costs(d)

     3.7       2.1       2.6  

Amortization of acquisition intangibles(e)

     6.5       8.6       10.6  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted Operating Profit

   £ 83.6     £ 44.5     $ 55.0  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a)

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, this consisted of the full impairment of the acquisition intangible in respect of an in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology that we acquired from AxioMX, Inc. in 2015 and subsequent post acquisition expenditure, which arose following an appraisal of the ability to utilize this technology at scale. Although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realize material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, this consisted of an impairment of software assets under construction as a result of changes in the scope and nature of the ERP program and the corresponding usability of historical work performed on certain outstanding modules.

(b)

Consisted of costs of our ERP program implementation that do not qualify for capitalization.

(c)

Consisted of legal and other professional fees associated with our acquisition of the proteomics and immunology businesses of Expedeon AG (the “Expedeon Acquisition”), as well as agreed settlements of Expedeon employee share incentive schemes.

(d)

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, this related partly to the integration of the acquired Expedeon business, which consisted mainly of retention and severance costs as well as employee backfill costs for those involved in the integration and consultancy costs, and reorganization costs in respect of alignment of our operational structure and geographical footprint to our strategic goals. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, the reorganization costs consisted of those associated with our new headquarters, including depreciation of assets not yet brought into use prior to occupation of the building.

(e)

Consisted of amortization of acquisition intangibles included within research and development expenses of £6.0 million and £4.3 million for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019, respectively, with the remaining £2.6 million and £2.2 million over the same respective periods included within selling, general and administrative expenses.

Return On Capital Employed (“ROCE”)

We define ROCE as Adjusted Operating Profit divided by capital employed, which is defined as total assets less current liabilities. We believe that ROCE is a key tool in measuring our financial efficiency and ability to create future growth in value. We attempt to maintain ROCE at a level well above our estimated cost of capital. ROCE is included in this prospectus because it is a key metric used internally to assess our financial performance. We also believe that ROCE is useful to investors, analysts and others in assessing our performance.

ROCE is not an IFRS measure of our financial performance and should not be considered as an alternative to profit for the year or as an alternative to any other performance measure derived in accordance with IFRS.



 

19


Table of Contents

ROCE should not be construed as an inference that our future results will be unaffected by unusual or other items. Management compensates for these limitations by relying on our IFRS results in addition to using ROCE as a supplemental measure. Our measure of ROCE is not necessarily comparable to similarly titled captions of other companies due to different methods of calculation.

The following table presents a reconciliation of profit for the year, the most directly comparable IFRS financial measure, to ROCE for the periods indicated:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions)  

Profit for the year

   £          45.0     £          12.5     $          15.5  

Tax charge / (credit)

     11.4       (4.1     (5.2

Finance income

     (0.6     (0.7     (0.9

Finance costs

     0.3       2.8       3.5  

Impairment of intangible assets(a)

     12.8       14.9       18.4  

System and process improvement costs(b)

     4.5       4.3       5.3  

Acquisition costs(c)

           4.1       5.1  

Integration and reorganization costs(d)

     3.7       2.1       2.6  

Amortization of acquisition intangibles(e)

     6.5       8.6       10.6  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted Operating Profit

   £ 83.6     £ 44.5     $ 55.0  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

     446.7       811.4       1,003.6  

Current liabilities

     (45.3     (159.6     (197.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Capital employed

   £ 401.4     £ 651.8     $ 806.2  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

ROCE

     20.8     6.8     6.8
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a)

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, this consisted of the full impairment of the acquisition intangible in respect of an in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology that we acquired from AxioMX, Inc. in 2015 and subsequent post acquisition expenditure, which arose following an appraisal of the ability to utilize this technology at scale. Although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realize material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, this consisted of an impairment of software assets under construction as a result of changes in the scope and nature of the ERP program and the corresponding usability of historical work performed on certain outstanding modules.

(b)

Consisted of costs of our ERP program implementation that do not qualify for capitalization.

(c)

Consisted of legal and other professional fees associated with the acquisition of Expedeon as well as agreed settlements of Expedeon employee share incentive schemes.

(d)

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, this related partly to the integration of the acquired Expedeon business, which consisted mainly of retention and severance costs as well as employee backfill costs for those involved in the integration and consultancy costs, and reorganization costs in respect of alignment of our operational structure and geographical footprint to our strategic goals. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, the reorganization costs consisted of those associated with our new headquarters, including depreciation of assets not yet brought into use prior to occupation of the building.

(e)

Consisted of amortization of acquisition intangibles included within research and development expenses of £6.0 million and £4.3 million for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019, respectively, with the remaining £2.6 million and £2.2 million over the same respective periods included within selling, general and administrative expenses.



 

20


Table of Contents

Adjusted Diluted earnings per share

We define Adjusted Diluted earnings per share as Adjusted profit for the year divided by the weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share. Adjusted profit for the year used in this calculation is defined as profit for the year less system and process improvement costs, costs associated with our new headquarters including depreciation of assets not yet brought into use prior to occupation of the building, acquisition costs, integration and reorganization costs, impairment of software assets, amortization of acquisition intangibles, the tax effect of these items and the net tax effect of new U.S. tax legislation. Adjusted Diluted earnings per share is calculated with an adjustment to the weighted average number of shares outstanding to assume conversion of all potentially dilutive ordinary shares. We use Adjusted Diluted earnings per share to measure underlying profitability and to reflect the other adjusted performance measures used.

Adjusted Diluted earnings per share is included in this prospectus because it is a key metric used internally to assess our financial performance. We also believe that Adjusted Diluted earnings per share is useful to investors, analysts and others in assessing our performance. Management believes that Adjusted Diluted earnings per share is an appropriate measure of operating performance because it eliminates the impact of expenses that do not relate directly to the performance of the underlying business. Adjusted Diluted earnings per share has limitations as a financial measure, should be considered as supplemental in nature, and is not meant as a substitute for earnings per share measures prepared in accordance with IFRS. Adjusted Diluted earnings per share may not be comparable to other similarly titled metrics of others.

The following table presents a reconciliation of profit for the year, the most directly comparable IFRS financial measure, to Adjusted profit for the year for the periods indicated, which is used in the calculation of Adjusted Diluted earnings per share:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions, except as otherwise stated)  

Profit for the year

   £         45.0     £         12.5   $         15.5  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

     206.7       209.6     209.6
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Diluted earnings per share

   £ 0.218     £ 0.060     $ 0.074  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year

   £ 45.0     £ 12.5     $ 15.5  

Impairment of intangible assets(a)

     12.8       14.9       18.4  

System and process improvement costs(b)

     4.5       4.3       5.3  

Acquisition costs(c)

           4.1       5.1  

Integration and reorganization costs(d)

     3.7       2.1       2.6  

Amortization of acquisition intangibles(e)

     6.5       8.6       10.6  

Tax effect of items (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e)

     (5.3     (7.2     (8.9

Tax credit arising from “patent box” claims(f)

           (4.6     (5.7

Net tax effect of new U.S. tax legislation

     0.2              
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted profit for the year

   £ 67.4     £ 34.7     $ 42.9  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

     206.7       209.6       209.6  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted Diluted earnings per share

   £ 0.326     £ 0.166     $ 0.205
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a)

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, this consisted of the full impairment of the acquisition intangible in respect of an in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology that we acquired from AxioMX, Inc. in



 

21


Table of Contents
  2015 and subsequent post acquisition expenditure, which arose following an appraisal of the ability to utilize this technology at scale. Although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realize material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, this consisted of an impairment of software assets under construction as a result of changes in the scope and nature of the ERP program and the corresponding usability of historical work performed on certain outstanding modules.
(b)

Consisted of costs of our ERP program implementation that do not qualify for capitalization.

(c)

Consisted of legal and other professional fees associated with the acquisition of Expedeon as well as agreed settlements of Expedeon employee share incentive schemes.

(d)

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, this related partly to the integration of the acquired Expedeon business, which consisted mainly of retention and severance costs as well as employee backfill costs for those involved in the integration and consultancy costs, and reorganization costs in respect of alignment of our operational structure and geographical footprint to our strategic goals. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, the reorganization costs consisted of those associated with our new headquarters, including depreciation of assets not yet brought into use prior to occupation of the building.

(e)

Consisted of amortization of acquisition intangibles included within research and development expenses of £6.0 million and £4.3 million for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019, respectively, with the remaining £2.6 million and £2.2 million over the same respective periods included within selling, general and administrative expenses.

(f)

Consisted of a credit for historical periods in respect of the initial recognition of benefit from the lower rate of tax applied to profits on patented income under HMRC’s “patent box” regime following successful registration of patents during the year.



 

22


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

An investment in our ADSs involves a high degree of risk. You should carefully consider the risks and uncertainty described below, together with all of the other information in this prospectus, including “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes, before deciding to invest in our ADSs. Additional risks not presently known to us or that we currently deem immaterial may also impair our business operations. Our business, financial condition or results of operations could be materially and adversely affected by any of these risks. The trading price and value of our ADSs could decline due to any of these risks, and you may lose all or part of your investment.

Risks Relating to our Business and Industry

A regional or global health pandemic, including COVID-19, could severely affect our business, operating results and financial condition due to impacts on our operations and supply chains, as well as actions taken to contain the disease or treat its impact and the speed and extent of the recovery.

We engage in business globally, which subjects us to a number of unpredictable or unexpected risks and factors outside our control, including risks associated with public health crises such as epidemics and pandemics. In December 2019, a novel coronavirus (SARS-CoV-2) was reported and in March 2020, the World Health Organization (“WHO”) characterized the COVID-19 outbreak as a pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic has adversely affected global economies, financial markets and the overall environment in which we do business, and the extent to which it may impact our future results of operations and overall financial performance remains uncertain.

The COVID-19 pandemic is adversely affecting, and is expected to continue to adversely affect, elements of our business (including elements of our operations, supply chains and distribution systems) as a result of impacts associated with preventive and precautionary measures that we, other businesses, our communities and governments are taking. Many employers in our primary locations of business, including the United States, United Kingdom and China, temporarily closed sites and required their employees to work from home or not work at all. These site closures included some of our customers’ labs, which have caused and may continue to cause customers to delay or forego purchases of our products. During the pandemic, we have experienced significant and unpredictable reductions or increases in demand for certain of our products and may continue to experience such unpredictability in the future. Further, as the research community began to focus on COVID-19, other types of research were put on hold, which resulted in many of our customers’ research labs being forced to temporarily shut down or to operate at reduced capacity. As a substantial majority of our catalogue revenue is purchased for research use only, these shutdowns and reductions in capacity have negatively impacted the global demand for our products, which has resulted in a decrease in revenue. We also saw a reduction in demand due to the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, particularly in North America where the number of COVID-19 cases is rising in several states with large research lab demand. While many of our customers’ labs have reopened, such labs may be required to continue to operate at reduced capacity, and there can be no assurance that our customers will not be subject to further shutdowns or reductions in capacity in the future, which could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations. As the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic remains uncertain, we may continue to experience decreased sales activity.

In an effort to halt the outbreak of COVID-19, many countries throughout the world have placed significant restrictions on travel, and many jurisdictions may continue to close borders, impose prolonged quarantines and further restrict travel and business activity, which could significantly impact our ability to support our operations and customers, the ability of our employees to get to their workplaces to produce products and provide services and the availability of materials for production of our products, as well as significantly hinder or increase the costs associated with our products from moving through the supply chain. Due to uncertainties that will be dictated by the length of time that the COVID-19 pandemic and related disruptions continue, there can be no assurance that our operations will not continue to be adversely impacted.

 

23


Table of Contents

During the COVID-19 pandemic, we asked that all employees who are able to do so work remotely, and it is possible that widespread remote work arrangements could have a negative impact on our operations, the execution of our business plans and productivity and availability of key personnel and other employees necessary to conduct our business, and of third-party service providers who perform critical services for us, or otherwise cause operational failures due to changes in our normal business practices necessitated by the outbreak and related governmental actions. If a natural disaster, power outage, connectivity issue, or other event occurred that impacted our employees’ ability to work remotely, it may be difficult or, in certain cases, impossible, for us to continue our business for a substantial period of time. The increase in remote working may also result in consumer privacy, IT security and fraud risks, and our understanding of applicable legal and regulatory requirements, as well as the latest guidance from regulatory authorities in connection with the COVID-19 pandemic, may be subject to legal or regulatory challenge, particularly as regulatory guidance evolves in response to future developments.

Further, in connection with the global COVID-19 pandemic and in an effort to increase the wider availability of needed medical and other supplies and products, we may elect to, or governments may require us to (for example pursuant to the U.S. Defense Production Act), allocate our products in a way that adversely affects our regular operations and financial results, results in differential treatment of customers and/or adversely affects our reputation and customer relationships. Although we do not currently elect to, nor have we been required to, allocate our products in this way, there can be no assurance that we will not have to allocate our products in this way in the future. In addition, unpredictable increases in demand for certain of our products could exceed our capacity to meet such demand, which could adversely affect our financial results and customer relationships and result in negative publicity.

The duration and extent of the impact from the COVID-19 pandemic depends on future developments that cannot be accurately predicted at this time, such as the severity and transmission rate of the virus, the extent and effectiveness of containment actions and the impact of these and other factors on our employees, customers, suppliers and partners. Such impact on our business, cash flows and/or financial condition, and results of operations could be material.

To the extent the COVID-19 pandemic adversely affects our business and financial results, it may also have the effect of heightening many of the other risks described in this “Risk Factors” section.

We may face challenges in implementing our strategies for revenue growth in light of competitive challenges.

We face significant competition from a diverse and fragmented base of competitors, many of whom focus on specific regions, customers and/or specific product segments. Competitors range from smaller, specialized companies, which may be able to more quickly respond to customers’ specific needs, to large multinational companies who provide a full suite of products to research labs, which may have greater financial, marketing, operational and research and development resources than we do. Such greater resources may allow our competitors to respond more effectively with new, alternative or emerging technologies. In addition, consolidation trends in the pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostics industries have created concentrated purchasing decisions for some customers, resulting in increased pricing pressure on us. Moreover, customers may believe that consolidated businesses are better able to compete as sole-source vendors and therefore, prefer to purchase from such businesses. New procurement channels, such as e-procurement and aggregators, may prove more attractive to customers through better delivery of products or blocking other channels where we have strength, and a failure by us to sufficiently engage and participate in these channels may lead to a loss of customer relationships. Failure to anticipate and respond to our competitors’ actions may impact our future sales and earnings, in particular failure to react to competitors strengthening their brand, marketing or customer experience may negatively impact our ability to attract and retain customers.

We are pursuing a number of strategies to maintain and improve our revenue growth, including:

 

   

increase usage of our RUO antibodies and grow sales over time;

 

   

grow our product portfolio and expand within adjacent markets;

 

24


Table of Contents
   

expand our product offering for diagnostic and biopharmaceutical companies;

 

   

enhance our digital platform and online presence;

 

   

strengthen our teams, systems and infrastructure to support our growth;

 

   

selectively pursue strategic acquisitions; and

 

   

continuing to produce high-quality innovative tools and solutions for our customers.

We may not be able to successfully implement these strategies, and these strategies may not result in the expected growth of our business. Failure to anticipate and respond to our competitors’ actions may adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We must develop new products and enhance existing products, adapt to significant technological and innovative changes and respond to introductions of new products by competitors to remain competitive.

We sell our products in industries that are characterized by significant technological changes, frequent new product and technology introductions and enhancements and evolving industry standards. As a result, our customers’ needs continue to evolve. If we do not appropriately innovate and invest in new products or technologies, our product offerings may become less desirable in the markets we serve, and our customers could move to new technologies offered by our competitors or even choose to make products themselves. Though we believe customers in our markets display a significant amount of loyalty to a particular product, we also believe that because of the initial time investment required by many of our customers to reach a purchasing decision for a new product, it may be difficult to regain that customer once the customer purchases a product from a competitor. In order to maintain positive relationships with and maintain the trust of our customers, it is crucial that we are able to continue to innovate and create new products that directly support our customers’ research goals in a cost effective, timely and efficient manner. If our competitors are able react more directly and effectively to a customer’s specific demand, this could harm our ability to retain our customers, even if we manufacture a product that is responsive to their needs. There is also a risk that we may invest significant amounts of time and resources into a new product or product enhancement that fails to meet our high quality standards or does not perform in the way that was intended, which could adversely affect our business. Without the timely introduction of new products, services and enhancements to existing products or adequately meeting the changing demands of the industry, our offerings will likely become less competitive over time, in which case our competitive position, sales and operating results could suffer. Further, if a competitor were able to create a product or service that either eliminated or reduced the need for RUO antibodies and the related tools and solutions, or if there were an innovative development in the industry that made the use of antibodies no longer necessary for life science research, this could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations. Accordingly, we focus significant efforts and resources on the research, development and identification of new products and services that are attractive to our customers and gain acceptance in the markets we serve to further broaden our offerings. It can take significant time to identify an unmet customer need and develop a product to meet that need, and to the extent we fail to adequately anticipate or meet our customers’ needs or fail to obtain desired levels of market acceptance, our business, financial condition or results of operations could be adversely affected.

Our estimates of our addressable market include several key assumptions based on our industry knowledge, industry publications, third-party research and other surveys, which may be based on a small sample size and may fail to accurately reflect market opportunities. While we believe that our internal assumptions are reasonable, no independent source has verified such assumptions. Industry publications, research, surveys, studies and forecasts generally state that the information they contain has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable but that the accuracy and completeness of such information is not guaranteed. If any of our assumptions or estimates, or these publications, research, surveys or studies prove to be inaccurate, then the actual market for our products may be smaller than we expect, and as a result, our product revenue may be limited and our business, financial condition or results of operations could be adversely affected.

 

25


Table of Contents

We may not successfully identify or integrate acquired businesses or assets into our operations or be able to fully recognize the anticipated benefits of businesses or assets that we acquire.

A key element of our business strategy is to complement our organic growth with acquisitions. We routinely explore acquiring other businesses and assets, and we have completed five acquisitions in the last two years, including: Marker Gene Technologies, Inc. in March 2020, the gene editing platform and oncology product portfolio of Applied StemCell, Inc. in January 2020, the proteomics and immunology businesses from Expedeon AG in January 2020, the entire live cell line and lysates portfolio of EdiGene Inc. in July 2019 and Calico Biolabs Inc. in January 2019. In addition, we have acquired minority interests in SomaServe Limited and BrickBio Inc.

However, we may be unable to identify or complete promising acquisitions for many reasons, including any misjudgment of the key elements of an acquisition, competition among buyers, the high valuations of businesses in our industry, the need for regulatory and other approvals, lack of internal resources to actively pursue all attractive opportunities and availability of capital. When we do identify and complete acquisitions, we may face financial, managerial and operational challenges, including diversion of management attention and resources needed for existing operations, difficulty with integrating acquired businesses, acquiring business that are not consistent with our long-term strategies, integration of different corporate cultures, increased expenses, potential dilution of our brand, assumption of unknown liabilities, indemnities, potential disputes with the sellers and the need to evaluate the financial systems of and establish internal controls for acquired entities. Further, we seek out acquisitions of companies that maintain the same high quality standards that we maintain, and if we misjudge or overestimate a company’s product quality standards, we may not be able to use these products or implement the strategies that were the primary reason for the acquisition, which would lead to a significant loss both financially and in time spent by our teams trying to integrate the product or implement the strategy. There can be no assurance that we will engage in any additional acquisitions or that we will be able to do so on terms that will result in any expected benefits.

In addition, our ability to realize the benefits we anticipate from our acquisition activities, including any anticipated sales growth, cost synergies and other anticipated benefits, will depend in large part upon whether we are able to integrate such businesses efficiently and effectively. Integration is an ongoing process, and we may not be able to fully integrate such businesses smoothly or successfully, and the process may take longer than expected. Further, the integration of certain operations and the differences in operational culture following such activity will continue to require the dedication of significant management resources, which may distract management’s attention from day-to-day business operations. There may also be unasserted claims or assessments that we failed or were unable to discover or identify in the course of performing due diligence investigations of target businesses. If we are unable to successfully integrate the operations of acquired businesses into our business, we may be unable to realize the sales growth, cost synergies and other anticipated benefits of such transactions, and our business, results of operations and cash flow could be adversely affected.

Our business may be harmed if our customers discontinue or spend less on research, development, production or other scientific endeavors.

A majority of our revenue is derived from consumers who are publicly funded through research grants. We have three primary categories of customers including: academic institutions, research institutions and pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostic companies. Many factors, including public policy spending priorities, available resources and product and economic cycles, have a significant effect on the capital spending policies of these entities. For example, the United Kingdom’s withdrawal from the European Union has caused, and is likely to continue to cause, uncertainty in the European markets regarding the availability of public funding for research, which has had an indirect, but not significant, impact on our U.K. business. Fluctuations in the research and development budgets of our customers could have a significant effect on the demand for our products. Our customers determine their research and development budgets based on several factors, including the need to develop new products, continued availability of governmental and other funding, competition and the

 

26


Table of Contents

general availability of resources. If research and development budgets are reduced, or if any funding source were to influence customer selection toward another supplier, the impact could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business depends on our ability to use and access information systems, and any failure to successfully maintain these systems or implement new systems to handle our changing needs could materially harm our operations.

We depend on standardized procedures and multiple information systems, including our online platform and distribution and ERP systems, for our operations, customer service and quality and safety procedures. Furthermore, we rely on information technology systems to process, transmit, store and protect electronic information, including confidential customer, supplier, employee or other business information. Through our online platform, we collect and store confidential information that customers provide in order to, among other things, purchase products and services and register on our website.

We are currently updating our systems and processes by implementing Oracle Cloud ERP and other software solutions to replace our legacy IT systems on a scale reflecting the increased size, scope and complexity of our operations, and the process of migrating our legacy systems could disrupt our ability to timely and accurately process information. Further, any significant delay, failure, increase in costs of this project, or any issues in transitioning from our legacy systems to new information systems could have a negative impact on our ability to upgrade our information systems and may consequently adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations. We utilize commercially available third-party technology solutions, software and software systems with some proprietary configurations. We also store data using third-party cloud services. Our information systems are subject to damage or interruption from power outages, computer and telecommunications failures, computer viruses, security breaches, vandalism, catastrophic events, natural disasters, terrorist attacks, hackers and other security issues as well as human error. Given the age and lack of support of some of our legacy systems, these risks may be greater. If our information systems are damaged, fail to work properly or otherwise become unavailable, particularly in light of the COVID-19 pandemic, we may incur substantial costs to repair or replace them, and we may experience a loss of critical information, customer disruption and interruptions or delays in our ability to perform essential functions and implement new and innovative services. If the cloud service providers we use were to experience unplanned downtime, delays or other issues delivering data to our information technology systems, including due to increased usage during the COVID-19 pandemic, it could significantly and adversely impact business operations. A compromise of our information systems or those with which we interact could harm our reputation and expose us to regulatory actions and claims from customers and other persons, any of which could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

In addition, we may not have the necessary resources to enhance existing information systems or implement new systems where necessary to handle our increasing volume and/or our changing needs, and we may experience unanticipated delays, complications and expenses in implementing and integrating our systems. Any interruptions in operations would adversely affect our ability to properly allocate resources and timely deliver our products, which could result in customer dissatisfaction. We currently rely on certain legacy systems that are no longer supported by the manufacturers, with only a small number of current employees able to maintain these systems. Any failure of these systems could have a significant business impact. The failure to successfully implement and maintain information systems could have an adverse effect on our ability to obtain new business, retain existing business and maintain or increase our sales and profit margins, any of which could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

27


Table of Contents

Cyber security risks and the failure to maintain the confidentiality, integrity and availability of our computer hardware, software and internet applications and related tools and functions, could result in damage to our reputation, data integrity and/or subject us to costs, fines or lawsuits under data privacy or other laws or contractual requirements.

The integrity and protection of our own data, and that of our customers and employees, is critical to our business. The regulatory environment governing information, security and privacy laws is increasingly demanding and continues to evolve. Implementing and maintaining compliance with applicable security and privacy regulations may increase our operating costs and/or adversely impact our ability to market our products and services to customers. Although our computer and communications hardware are protected through physical and software safeguards, they are still vulnerable to fire, storm, flood, power loss, earthquakes, telecommunications failures, physical or software break-ins, software viruses and similar events. These events could lead to the unauthorized access, disclosure and use of non-public information. We could be subject to risks caused by misappropriation, misuse, leakage, falsification, system malfunction or intentional or accidental release or loss of information maintained in our information systems and networks and those of our OEM suppliers. The techniques used by criminal elements to attack computer systems are sophisticated, change frequently and may originate from less regulated and remote areas of the world. As a result, we may not be able to address these techniques proactively or implement adequate preventative measures. We are also reliant on the quality of our training of employees to allow them to spot and appropriately respond to cyber security threats. We have been subject to a number of phishing attempts and require employees to remain vigilant to ensure that such attempts are unsuccessful. If our computer systems are compromised, we could be subject to fines, damages, litigation and enforcement actions, customers could curtail or cease using its applications, and we could lose trade secrets, the occurrence of which could harm our business.

If we are unable to maintain reliable information technology systems and appropriate controls with respect to global data privacy and security requirements and prevent data breaches, we may suffer regulatory consequences in addition to business consequences. As a global organization, we are subject to data privacy and security laws, regulations, and customer-imposed controls in numerous jurisdictions as a result of having access to and processing confidential, personal and/or sensitive data in the course of our business. There are numerous U.S. federal and state laws and regulations related to the privacy and security of personal information. In particular, regulations promulgated pursuant to the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (“HIPAA”) establish privacy and security standards that limit the use and disclosure of individually identifiable health information (known as “protected health information”) and require the implementation of administrative, physical and technological safeguards to protect the privacy of protected health information and ensure the confidentiality, integrity and availability of electronic protected health information. Determining whether protected health information has been handled in compliance with applicable privacy standards and our contractual obligations can require complex factual and statistical analyses and may be subject to changing interpretation. Although we take measures to protect sensitive data from unauthorized access, use or disclosure, our information technology and infrastructure may be vulnerable to attacks by hackers or viruses or breached due to employee error, malfeasance or other malicious or inadvertent disruptions. Any such breach or interruption could compromise our networks, and the information stored there could be accessed by unauthorized parties, manipulated, publicly disclosed, lost or stolen. Any such access, breach or other loss of information could result in legal claims or proceedings and liability under federal or state laws that protect the privacy of personal information, such as the HIPAA and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health Act (“HITECH”) and may result in regulatory penalties. Notice of breaches must be made to affected individuals, the United States Department of Health and Human Services (“HHS”), and for extensive breaches, notice may need to be made to the media or state Attorneys General. Such a notice could harm our brand and reputation and adversely affect our ability to compete.

Additionally, the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 (along with its implementing regulations) (the “GLBA”) restricts certain collection, processing, storage, use and disclosure by covered companies of certain personal information, requires notice to individuals of privacy practices and provides individuals with certain rights to

 

28


Table of Contents

prevent the use and disclosure of certain non-public or otherwise legally protected information. The GLBA also imposes requirements regarding the safeguarding and proper destruction of personal information through the issuance of data security standards or guidelines. In addition, many U.S. states in which we operate now or may operate in the future have laws that protect the privacy and security of sensitive and personal information. Certain U.S. state laws may be more stringent or broader in scope, or offer greater individual rights, with respect to sensitive and personal information than federal, international or other state laws, and such laws may differ from each other, which may complicate compliance efforts. For example, the California Consumer Privacy Act of 2018 (the “CCPA”), which went into effect on January 1, 2020, imposes stringent data privacy and security requirements and obligations with respect to the personal information of California residents and households. Among other things, it requires covered companies to provide new disclosures to California consumers and provide such consumers new data protection and privacy rights, including the ability to opt-out of certain sales of personal information. The CCPA provides for civil penalties for violations, as well as a private right of action for certain data breaches that result in the loss of personal information that may increase the likelihood of, and risks associated with, data breach litigation. The CCPA was amended in September 2018 and November 2019, and it is possible that further amendments will be enacted. It remains unclear how various provisions of the CCPA will be interpreted and enforced, and multiple states have enacted or are expected to enact similar laws. The effects of the CCPA and other similar state laws on our business are potentially significant and may require us to modify our data processing practices and policies and to incur costs and expenses in an effort to comply. State laws are changing rapidly, and there is discussion in U.S. Congress of a new federal data protection and privacy law to which we may be subject.

In Europe, laws, regulations and standards in many jurisdictions apply broadly to the collection, use, retention, security, disclosure, transfer and other processing of personal information. For example, in the European Economic Area (the “EEA”) and the United Kingdom, the collection and use of personal data is governed by the provisions of the General Data Protection Regulation (the “GDPR”). The GDPR came into effect in May 2018, superseding the European Union Data Protection Directive and imposing more stringent data privacy and security requirements on companies in relation to the processing of personal data of European Union data subjects. The GDPR, together with national legislation, regulations and guidelines of the European Union (the “EU”) member states and the United Kingdom govern the processing of personal data, impose strict obligations and restrictions on the ability to collect, use, retain, protect, disclose, transfer and otherwise process personal data. In particular, the GDPR includes obligations and restrictions concerning the consent and rights of individuals to whom the personal data relates, the transfer of personal data out of the EEA or the United Kingdom, security breach notifications and the security and confidentiality of personal data. The GDPR authorizes fines for certain violations of up to 4% of a company’s global annual revenue or €20 million, whichever is greater. Such fines are in addition to any civil litigation claims by customers and data subjects. European data protection authorities may interpret the GDPR and national laws differently and impose additional requirements, which contributes to the complexity of processing personal data in or from the EEA or United Kingdom. Guidance on implementation and compliance practices is often updated or otherwise revised. Further, while the United Kingdom enacted the Data Protection Act 2018 in May 2018 that supplements the GDPR and has publicly announced that it will continue to regulate the protection of personal data in the same way after the United Kingdom’s withdrawal from the European Union, the withdrawal has created uncertainty with regard to the future of regulation of data protection in the United Kingdom. Several other countries, such as China and Russia, have also passed laws that require personal data relating to their citizens to be maintained on local servers and impose additional data transfer restrictions, which could increase the cost and complexity of delivering our products and services.

We are also reliant on certain manual processes for collecting and processing data, and any failures in these processes or failure to handle the data collected in accordance with relevant regulations could lead to enforcement actions. Complying with all applicable laws, regulations, standards and obligations relating to data privacy, security and transfers may cause us to incur substantial operational costs or require us to modify our data processing practices and processes. Government enforcement actions can be costly and interrupt the regular operation of our business, and data breaches or violations of data privacy laws can result in significant fines,

 

29


Table of Contents

reputational damage and civil lawsuits, any of which may adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations. We may not be able to respond quickly or effectively to regulatory, legislative and other developments, and these changes may in turn impair our ability to commercialize our products or increase our cost of doing business. In addition, if our practices are not consistent or viewed as not consistent with legal and regulatory requirements, including changes in laws, regulations and standards or new interpretations or applications of existing laws, regulations and standards, we may become subject to audits, inquiries, whistleblower complaints, adverse media coverage, investigations, loss of export privileges, severe criminal or civil sanctions or reputational damage. Any of the foregoing could have an adverse effect on our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

Our business may suffer if we do not successfully manage our current and potential future growth.

We have rapidly expanded our operations and anticipate expanding further as we pursue our growth strategies. Such expansion increases the complexity of our business and places a significant strain on our management, operations, technical systems, financial resources and internal control over financial reporting functions. Our current and planned personnel, systems, procedures and controls may not be adequate to support and effectively manage our future operations, especially as we employ personnel and maintain manufacturing facilities and distribution networks in several geographic locations. Across a range of business areas, we currently use systems and processes that are overly manual and reaching the limit of their scalability, and as we continue to grow and expand our business, these systems and processes will become outdated and will need to be replaced with more automated and up-to-date systems to maintain our growth. These systems and processes also interact with our inventory management and demand planning, and any failure in these systems or in the transition to updated systems may make it more likely we do not adequately anticipate and plan for business growth, potentially resulting in increased times for order fulfilment, order backlogs, reduced customer satisfaction and reduced order conversion. In addition, given the rapid growth of our business on these overly manual systems, there may be certain contractual terms, including royalties, that are not properly monitored. We may not be able to manage our expansion effectively, and failure to update and replace these systems and processes may adversely affect our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations.

We are also continuously expanding our product portfolio, and establishing and developing these new products requires significant management time and attention. If these products do not achieve the anticipated success or require greater levels of time and investment to reach the expected levels, it could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations. Failure to appropriately integrate new products and business lines into our existing operations and systems can also affect the success of these products, and failure to adequately anticipate and plan for this integration could affect the success of these products and may also negatively impact our existing product offerings.

Significant interruptions in our operations could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Manufacturing, distribution, service and logistics problems can and do arise, particularly in light of the COVID-19 pandemic, and any such problems could have a significant impact on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Accordingly, any significant disruptions to the operations of our manufacturing or distribution centers or logistics providers for any reason, including labor relations issues, power interruptions, severe weather, fire or other circumstances beyond our control could cause our operating expenses to increase without coverage or compensation or seriously harm our ability to fulfill our customers’ orders or deliver products on a timely basis, or both. We must also maintain sufficient production capacity in order to meet anticipated customer demand, which carries fixed costs that we may not be able to offset if orders slow, which would adversely affect our operating margins. If we are unable to manufacture or source our products consistently, in sufficient quantities and on a timely basis, our sales, gross margins and our other operating results will be materially and adversely affected. Prompt shipment of our products is also very important to our business. We have experienced problems with or delays in our production, shipping and logistics capabilities, including as

 

30


Table of Contents

a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, that resulted in delays in our ability to ship finished products, and there can be no assurance that we will not encounter such problems in the future. If we experience significant delays in our manufacturing, shipping or logistics processes, this could cause disruption to our customers and damage our current and future customer relationships and may adversely affect our business. Such delays may also adversely impact our new product development. For example, if we were to lose one of our sites where new product development is undertaken, we may not be able to transfer or replicate that product development at another site, with the result of a loss of the time and financial costs of development of the new product. We also use small quantities of high-risk chemicals in the manufacture of certain of our products, which are subject to handling risks, and any disruption in our ability to source or appropriately store these chemicals could adversely affect our manufacturing operations.

In addition, as we are reliant on biological processes to manufacture many of our products, any loss or interruption to the systems that allow us to maintain optimal growth or storage conditions for our materials or products could lead to a loss of significant sections of our product portfolio, which may adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations. If a biological contaminant, such as bacteria, mold, yeasts, viruses or mycoplasma, were to affect our materials or our products, or if our materials or products were cross contaminated, it could affect the quality of our products, our inventory levels and disrupt our manufacturing and distribution processes, as well as those of our customers. We have quality control procedures in place to detect and correct such disruptions, but there can be no assurance that these procedures will always function properly. Any disruption to our manufacturing operations would disrupt our ability to serve our customers, which could have a material adverse effect on our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations. Similarly, any contamination of our customers’ laboratories caused by our products could have a material adverse effect on our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our offerings are highly complex, and, if our products do not satisfy applicable quality criteria, specifications and performance standards, we could experience lost sales, delayed or reduced market acceptance of our products, increased costs and damage to our reputation.

The products we offer are highly exacting and complex due to their biological nature and demanding customer specifications. Providing high-quality products in terms of specificity, sensitivity and consistency, together with extensive product validation data is a fundamental driver of customer loyalty and our reputation with life science researchers. Our operating results depend on our ability to execute and, when necessary, improve our global quality control systems, including our ability to effectively train and maintain our employees with respect to quality control. A failure of our global quality control systems could result in problems with facility operations or preparation or provision of defective or non-compliant products. In each case, such problems could arise for a variety of reasons, including equipment malfunction, failure to follow specific protocols and procedures, problems with critical materials and components, or environmental factors and damage to, or loss of, manufacturing operations. Such problems could affect production of a particular batch or series of batches of products, requiring the destruction of such products or a halt of facility production altogether.

Our success depends on our customers’ confidence that we can provide reliable, consistently high-quality products, which includes our ability to provide validated data to support our customers’ use of our products. We believe that customers in our target markets are likely to be particularly sensitive to our products failing to meet the specifications shown on our data sheets. Our reputation and the public image of our products and technologies may be impaired if our products fail to perform as expected or fail to meet applicable quality criteria, specifications or performance standards. High-quality reagents, for example, are necessary for critical research progress; unreliable reagents may impede researchers’ ability to reproduce experiments and can lead to wasted time and money. If our products experience, or are perceived to experience, a material defect or error, this could result in loss or delay of sales, damaged reputation, diversion of development resources and increased insurance or warranty costs, any of which could harm our business. These risks are amplified in respect of our new product lines as we implement appropriate quality control criteria. We are reliant to an extent on customer feedback on the quality of our products, and it may take additional time for new products to meet the desired

 

31


Table of Contents

quality. Such defects or errors could also result in our inability to timely deliver products to our customers, which could in turn cause disruptions to our customers’ ability to obtain results, narrowing the scope of the use of our products and ultimately hindering our or their success in relevant markets. Even after any underlying concerns or problems are resolved, any lingering concerns in our target markets regarding our technology, product defects or performance standards could continue to result in lost sales, delayed market acceptance and damaged reputation, among other things. If problems in preparation or manufacture of a product or failures to meet required quality standards for that product or other product defects are not discovered before such product is released to our customers, we may be subject to adverse legal or regulatory actions, including halting of manufacture and distribution, restrictions on our operations, civil sanctions, including monetary sanctions, and criminal actions. In addition, such problems or failures subject us to other litigation claims, including claims from our customers for reimbursement for the cost of lost or damaged materials. Our customers also require specific information regarding our products and their uses, and any inaccuracies in this information could lead to products being sold for the wrong uses and may result in our having to refund or replace the products in question. Any of the above problems may adversely affect our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations.    

If we fail to maintain and enhance our brand and reputation, our business, results of operations and prospects may be materially and adversely affected.

We believe that maintaining and enhancing our brand and reputation are of significant importance to the success of our business. We work to set a very high standard for the quality of our products and our ethical business practices, and we believe that this has been crucial to our success. We have employed and will continue to employ different types of consumer experience and interaction touchpoints designed to gauge consumer satisfaction with our products, including our customer website, e-sales and digital marketing, and we also engage in rigorous product validation in order to continue to improve our product quality. We cannot assure you, however, that these activities will be successful or that we will be able to continue to maintain our brand and reputation as we expect. If our brand strength deteriorates, or if our brand is no longer associated with high-quality products, it could lead to fewer publication citations for our products, which could in turn further weaken our brand recognition and reputation. Customers often choose the most-cited brand or product, and if another brand were to overtake ours in frequency of citations, our business could be adversely affected. In addition, our competitors may increase the intensity of their consumer interactions or customer feedback processes, which may force us to increase our advertising spend to engage with our customer base and maintain brand and reputational awareness. Our ability to attract and retain customers is also influenced by our prominence in search engines. Any changes to our prominence in search engines, whether as a result of revised algorithms, improved search engine optimization by our competitors or failure to respond to changes in online activity may negatively impact our brand and reputation or to convert customer interactions into sales.

In addition, any negative publicity relating to our products or services, regardless of its veracity, could harm our brand and the perception of our brand in the market. With an increasing global focus on ethical business practices and good corporate behavior, and with such issues directly influencing consumer behavior, any failure to achieve or maintain the levels of corporate governance, social and environmental impact and corporate behaviors expected of us, including demonstrating dedication to the benefits of diversity, could negatively impact our brand and reputation. If our brand is harmed, we may not be able to gain new customers or continue to maintain positive relationships with our customers, and our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations could be materially and adversely affected.

Part of our growth strategy is to increase direct customer interactions in multiple countries. Failure to anticipate and react to particular geographic requirements and sensitivities may have a negative impact on our brand and reputation, which may result in a decrease in sales or sales growth in such countries, which may adversely affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations.

 

32


Table of Contents

The loss of a significant number of customers or a reduction in orders from a significant number of customers could reduce our sales and harm our operating results.

Our operating results could be negatively affected by the loss of revenue from a significant number of our customers. Our sales are widely distributed, and many of our customers typically place smaller value orders in high volumes. We have other customers with whom we maintain close business relationships, working closely to build the specific custom tools they need, which will then become part of our product portfolio. These relationships often present larger commercial opportunities, and our operating results could be adversely affected by the loss of a significant number of these customers, particularly during the product development phase. For the year ended June 30, 2019, no single customer accounted for more than 5% of our revenue.

Though we often offer pricing and volume incentives, our customers are generally not obligated to purchase any fixed quantities of products, and they may stop placing orders with us at any time. If a significant number of customers purchase fewer of our products, defer orders or fail to place additional orders with us for any reason, our sales could decline, and our operating results may not meet our expectations. In addition, if those customers order our products, but fail to pay on time or at all, our liquidity and operating results could be adversely affected.

Our contracts generally do not contain minimum purchase requirements, and the majority of our sales are on a purchase order basis. Therefore, our sales are subject to changes in demand from our customers. The level and timing of orders placed by our customers vary for a number of reasons, including individual customer strategies, the introduction of new technologies, the desire of our customers to reduce their exposure to any single supplier and general economic conditions. If we are unable to anticipate and respond to the demands of our customers, if we have an inadequate supply of products, insufficient capacity in our sites or if we experience any disruptions to our supply chain or distribution network, we may lose customers. Alternatively, we may have excess inventory or excess capacity, and either of these factors may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Though we do generate a portion of our sales from long-term contracts, the majority of these contracts are non-exclusive and do not require a minimum purchase volume. This makes it difficult to estimate our customers’ demand for our products and our critical material and component needs. In addition, though we believe customers in our markets display a significant amount of loyalty to a particular product, we may not be able to renew a contract on favorable pricing terms if our competitors reduce their prices in order to procure business, or if a customer insists that we lower the price charged under the contract being renewed in order to retain the contract. In addition, if we enter into a contract with a customer on unfavorable terms, it may harm our ability to negotiate our future contracts with that customer or with other customers. The loss of sales obtained through long-term contracts or the reduced profitability of such sales could adversely affect our business, financial position and results of operations.

We are subject to risks associated with global operations.

We engage in business globally, with 63% and 61% of our catalogue revenue in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019, respectively, coming from outside the United States. Global operations subject us to a number of risks, many of which are exacerbated by the COVID-19 pandemic, including international economic, political and labor conditions; currency fluctuations; tax laws (including U.S. taxes on foreign subsidiaries); increased financial accounting and reporting burdens and complexities; unexpected changes in, or impositions of, legislative or regulatory requirements; failure of laws to protect intellectual property rights adequately; inadequate local infrastructure and difficulties in managing and staffing international operations; delays resulting from difficulty in obtaining import or export licenses; limitations on repatriation of funds; tariffs, quotas and other trade barriers and restrictions; transportation delays; operating in locations with a higher incidence of corruption and fraudulent business practices; limitations on our ability to enforce legal rights and remedies with third parties and other factors beyond our control, including terrorism, war, natural disasters, climate change and diseases.

 

33


Table of Contents

Overall demand for our products could be reduced as a result of a global economic recession or political unrest, especially in areas such as healthcare, education and research. Customers or suppliers may experience cash flow problems, particularly in light of the COVID-19 pandemic and related response measures, and as a result, customers have and may continue to modify, delay or cancel plans to purchase our products. Any inability of current and/or potential customers to purchase and/or pay for our products due to, among other things, declining economic conditions as a result of inflation, rising interest rates, changes in spending patterns and the effects of governmental initiatives to manage economic conditions may have a negative impact on our financial condition and results of operations.

The U.S. administration has indicated an intention to ask Congress to make significant changes, replacement or elimination of the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, and government negotiation/regulation of drug prices paid by government programs. Changes in U.S. social, political, regulatory and economic conditions or laws and policies governing the healthcare system and drug prices, foreign trade, manufacturing and development and investment in the territories and countries where we or our customers operate could adversely affect our business and our operating results.

The application of laws and regulations implicating global transactions is often unclear and may at times conflict. Compliance with these laws and regulations may involve significant costs or require changes in our business practices that result in reduced revenue and profitability. For example, we may be exposed to any changes in national or international regulations governing the transport of biological products across borders. Non-compliance could also result in fines, damages, criminal sanctions, prohibited business conduct and damage to our reputation. We incur additional legal compliance costs associated with our global operations and could become subject to legal penalties in foreign countries if we do not comply with local laws and regulations, which may be substantially different from those in the United Kingdom or United States. Any such non-compliance, even if prohibited by our internal policies, could have an adverse effect on our business and result in significant fines or penalties.

If relations between China and the United States deteriorate, our business in the United States and China could be materially and adversely affected.

The relationship between China and the United States is subject to periodic tension. Changes in political conditions in the United States and China and changes in the state of China-U.S. relations are difficult to predict and could adversely affect our business. Most recently, on August 6, 2020, the President of the United States signed an executive order that prohibited, beginning 45 days after the date of the order, to the extent permitted under applicable law: any transaction related to WeChat by any person, or with respect to any property, subject to the jurisdiction of the United States, with Tencent Holdings Ltd., Shenzhen, China or any subsidiary of that entity. Our subsidiary in China has historically used social media platforms like WeChat, and during the COVID-19 pandemic it increased its use of WeChat as a service channel to ensure that customer service levels were maintained. Moreover, the U.S. administration has called for substantial changes to trade agreements and is imposing significant increases on tariffs on goods imported into the United States, particularly from China. Other countries have responded similarly, with tariffs on goods entering their countries. We currently sell products in China and have invested, and will continue to invest, in providing localized product support, operations and technology to better serve customers in China, and if the Chinese government makes any changes to its laws or policy concerning foreign ownership of companies or assets located within China, or imposes any significant increases on tariffs on goods imported into or out of China, it could have a significant impact on our business and financial results.

In addition, because of our continuing focus on strategic investment into providing more products to the life science and academic research market in China, any deterioration in political or trade relations might cause a public perception in the United States or elsewhere that may cause our products to become less attractive. We cannot predict what effect any changes in China-U.S. relations may have on our ability to access capital or effectively operate in China, which could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations.

 

34


Table of Contents

The United Kingdom’s withdrawal from the European Union may have a negative effect on global economic conditions, financial markets and our business.

We are a multinational company headquartered in the United Kingdom with worldwide operations, including significant business operations in Europe. Following a national referendum and enactment of legislation by the government of the United Kingdom, the United Kingdom formally withdrew from the European Union on January 31, 2020 and entered into a transition period during which it will continue its ongoing and complex negotiations with the European Union relating to the future trading relationship between the parties. Significant political and economic uncertainty remains about whether the terms of the relationship will differ materially from the terms before withdrawal, as well as about the possibility that a so-called “no deal” separation will occur if negotiations are not completed by the end of the transition period. To prepare for the United Kingdom’s withdrawal, we set up a European distribution hub in The Netherlands to ensure consistent deliveries to our European customers, but there can be no assurance that the uncertainty regarding the United Kingdom’s withdrawal could continue to have an adverse effect on our business.

These developments, or the perception that any of them could occur, have had and may continue to have a material adverse effect on global economic conditions and the stability of global financial markets and could significantly reduce global market liquidity and restrict the ability of key market participants to operate in certain financial markets. Asset valuations, currency exchange rates and credit ratings have been and may continue to be subject to increased market volatility. Lack of clarity about future United Kingdom laws and regulations as the United Kingdom determines which European Union laws to replace or replicate, including free trade agreements, tax and customs laws, intellectual property rights, environmental, health and safety laws and regulations, immigration laws, employment laws and transport laws could increase costs, disrupt supply chains, depress economic activity and restrict our access to capital. Any of these factors could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

As a multinational corporation, we are exposed to fluctuations in currency exchange rates, which could adversely affect our cash flows and results of operations.

International markets contribute a substantial portion of our revenue, and we intend to continue expanding our presence in these regions. The exposure to fluctuations in currency exchange rates takes on different forms. International revenue and costs are subject to the risk that fluctuations in exchange rates could adversely affect our reported revenue and profitability when translated into pounds sterling for financial reporting purposes. The majority of our revenue is denominated in U.S. dollars, and our costs are primarily in British pounds sterling. These fluctuations could also adversely affect the demand for products and services provided by us. As a multinational corporation, our businesses occasionally invoice third-party customers in currencies other than the one in which they primarily do business (the “functional currency”). Movements in the invoiced currency relative to the functional currency could adversely impact our cash flows and our results of operations. As our international sales grow, exposure to fluctuations in currency exchange rates could have a larger effect on our financial results. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, currency translation had a favorable effect of £3.7 million on revenue due to the strengthening of the pound sterling relative to other currencies in which we sell products and services. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk—Currency Risk.”

We are subject to product liability and other claims in the ordinary course of business.

Our business involves risk of product liability, claims related to providing incorrect product information at the time of purchase and other claims in the ordinary course of business arising from the products that we source from various manufacturers or produce ourselves. Furthermore, there may be product liability risks that are unknown or which become known in the future. Substantial, complex or extended litigation on any claim could cause us to incur significant costs and distract our management. For example, lawsuits by governmental authorities, employees, shareholders, suppliers, collaborators, distributors, customers, competitors or others could

 

35


Table of Contents

be very costly and substantially disrupt our business. Our exposure to such claims may increase as we seek to increase the geographic scope of our sourcing and sales activities and to the extent that we expand our manufacturing operations. We maintain insurance policies and in some cases, our suppliers, customers and predecessors of acquired companies have indemnified us against certain claims. We cannot assure you that our insurance coverage or indemnification agreements will be available in all pending or any future cases brought against us. Furthermore, our ability to recover under any insurance or indemnification arrangements is subject to the terms and conditions of such insurance or indemnification agreement, as well as the financial viability of our and such third parties’ insurers, as well as legal enforcement under the local laws governing these arrangements. Insurance coverage in general or coverage for certain types of liabilities, such as product liability in developing markets, may not be readily available for purchase or cost-effective for us to purchase. Furthermore, many of our insurance policies are subject to deductibles and retentions. Accordingly, we could be subject to uninsured and unindemnified future liabilities requiring us to provide additional reserves to address such liabilities. An unfavorable result in a case for which adequate insurance or indemnification is not available could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We are also involved in various disputes, litigation and regulatory matters incidental to and in the ordinary course of our business, including employment matters, commercial disputes, government compliance matters, environmental matters, and other matters arising out of the normal conduct of our business. Where merited, we will vigorously defend ourselves in such matters. While the impact of this litigation has or may be immaterial, there can be no assurance that the impact of the pending and any future claims will not be material to our business, financial condition or results of operations in the future.

Our business, financial condition and results of operations depend upon the availability of critical materials and components.

Our operations depend upon our ability to obtain high-quality third-party products and materials meeting our specifications and other requirements at reasonable prices, including various components, storage and growth media and other materials. Our ability to maintain an adequate supply of such critical materials and components could be impacted by the availability and price of those materials and maintaining relationships with suppliers. While we may seek to minimize the impact of price increases and potential shortages by, among other things, entering into long-term supply agreements, increasing our own prices and implementing cost-saving measures, our earnings and cash flows could be adversely affected in the event these measures are insufficient to cover our costs. Moreover, while we aim to maintain a large network of product suppliers, we are unable to predict any interruption or disruption in service from our key suppliers, particularly in light of the COVID-19 pandemic. Any interruption or disruption in service from particular suppliers of components and materials means that interruptions or stoppages in such deliveries could adversely affect our operations until arrangements with alternate suppliers, to the extent any alternate suppliers acceptable to us and, if applicable, to our customers, even exist. If this occurs, we could expend substantial expense and time in re-establishing relationships with third-party suppliers that meet the appropriate quality, cost and regulatory requirements needed for commercially viable manufacture of our products or in re-designing our products to incorporate different components and materials that are available from third-party suppliers. If we are unable to obtain the materials we need at reasonable prices or at all, we may not be able to produce certain of our products at a marketable price or at all. If our supply of materials and components is adversely affected, including as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, we could impact our customers’ ability to conduct their research, damage our relationship with current and prospective customers and our operating results and financial condition could be adversely affected.

Moreover, we are dependent upon the ability of our suppliers to provide materials and components that meet our specifications, quality standards, other applicable criteria and delivery schedules. Our suppliers’ failure to provide expected materials or components that meet such criteria could adversely affect production schedules and contract profitability.

 

36


Table of Contents

The continued supply of high-quality third-party products and materials from our suppliers is subject to a number of risks, including:

 

   

the destruction of or damage to our suppliers’ facilities or their distribution infrastructure;

 

   

work stoppages or strikes by our suppliers’ employees;

 

   

the failure of our suppliers to provide materials of the requisite quality or in compliance with strict specifications;

 

   

the failure of essential equipment at our suppliers’ plants;

 

   

the failure of our suppliers to satisfy import and export control laws for goods that we purchase from them;

 

   

the failure of our suppliers to meet regulatory standards where applicable;

 

   

the failure, shortage or delay in the delivery of materials to our suppliers;

 

   

contractual amendments and disputes with our suppliers; and

 

   

inability of our suppliers to perform as a result of the weakened global economy, the COVID-19 pandemic or otherwise.

If we experience problems with suppliers, we may not be able to find acceptable alternatives, and any such alternatives could result in increased costs for us and possible forward losses on certain contracts. Even if acceptable alternatives are found, the process of locating and securing such alternatives might be disruptive to our business, might lead to termination of our supply agreements with our customers and might disrupt the operations of our customers leading to potential claims, any of which could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business, financial condition and results of operations depend upon maintaining our relationships with suppliers.

Our ability to sustain our gross margins has been, and will continue to be, dependent in part upon our ability to obtain favorable terms from our suppliers. These terms may change from time to time, and such changes could adversely affect our gross margins over time. In addition, our results of operations and cash flows could be adversely impacted by the acceleration of payment terms to our suppliers and/or the imposition of more restrictive credit terms and other contractual requirements. Further, if for any reason we enter into a contract with a supplier on unfavorable terms, it may harm our ability to negotiate our future contracts with that supplier or with other supplier.

Some of our competitors are increasing their manufacturing operations both internally and through acquisitions of manufacturers, including manufacturers that supply products to us. In addition, we manufacture certain products that may compete directly with products we source from our suppliers. To date, we have not experienced an adverse impact on our ability to continue to source products from manufacturers that have been vertically integrated or otherwise compete with us, although there is no assurance that we will not experience such an impact in the future.

The loss of one or more of our large suppliers, including as a result of consolidation, a material reduction in their supply of products or provision of services to us, extended disruptions or interruptions in their operations or material changes in the terms we obtain from them, could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

37


Table of Contents

We are highly dependent on our management and employees. Competition for our employees is intense, and we may not be able to attract and retain the highly skilled employees that we need to support our business and our intended future growth.

Our success largely depends on the skills, experience and continued efforts of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and our senior leadership. The replacement of certain members of our global leadership team would likely involve the expenditure of significant time and financial resources, and the loss of any such individual may significantly delay or prevent the achievement of our business objectives. As we continue to grow, our success also depends on our ability to attract, motivate and retain highly qualified individuals who will also fit within the Abcam culture. Competition for senior management and other personnel in our industry is intense, and the pool of suitable candidates is limited. If qualified personnel become scarce or difficult to attract or retain in our industry for compensation-related or other reasons, we could experience higher labor, recruiting or training costs. Further, new hires may require significant training and time before they achieve full productivity and may not become as productive as we expect. The failure to attract, retain and properly motivate members of our senior management team and other employees, to find suitable replacements for them in the event of death, illness or their desire to pursue other professional opportunities, or to maintain our corporate culture as we continue to grow, could have a negative effect on our operating results.

We are also reliant on contractors in certain key operational and leadership roles. While we are seeking to replace such contractors with permanent employees, until such appointments are made, we are subject to the risk inherent in the use of contractors, including the risk that they accept an alternative engagement or that they are not sufficiently motivated, incentivized or aligned to our commercial objectives.

We may be required to record a significant charge to earnings if our goodwill and other amortizable intangible assets or other investments become impaired.

We are required under IFRS to test goodwill for impairment at least annually and to review our goodwill, amortizable intangible assets and other investments, including those acquired through acquisition activity, for impairment when events or changes in circumstance indicate the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Factors that could lead to impairment of goodwill, amortizable intangible assets and other investments, including those acquired through acquisitions, include significant adverse changes in the business climate and actual or projected operating results and declines in the financial condition of our business. For example, for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, we experienced an impairment charge of £14.9 million in respect of the full impairment of the acquisition intangible in respect of AxioMx in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology (AxioMx acquired technology) and subsequent post acquisition expenditure is capitalized. This arose following an appraisal of the ability to utilize at scale this technology, whereby, although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realize material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to further pursue active development and substantive utilization of this specific acquired technology. Additionally, in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, we experienced an impairment of software assets under construction of £12.8 million as a result of changes in the scope and nature of our ERP program and the corresponding usability of historical work performed on certain outstanding modules. We may be required in the future to record additional charges to earnings if our goodwill, amortizable intangible assets or other investments become impaired. Any such charge would adversely impact our financial results.

Our reputation, ability to do business and results of operations may be impaired by improper conduct by any of our employees, agents or business partners.

We cannot provide assurance that our internal controls and compliance systems will always protect us from acts committed by employees, agents or business partners of ours (including third-party suppliers, distributors or of businesses we acquire or partner with) that would violate U.S. and/or other national laws, including the laws governing payments to government officials, bribery, fraud, kickbacks and false claims, pricing, sales and marketing practices, conflicts of interest, competition, export and import compliance, money laundering and data privacy. In particular, the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, the U.K. Bribery Act and similar anti-bribery laws

 

38


Table of Contents

in other jurisdictions generally prohibit companies and their intermediaries from making improper payments for the purpose of obtaining or retaining business, and we operate in many parts of the world that have experienced corruption to some degree. All of our employees are required to undertake regular training on topics like anti-bribery, corruption and GDPR legislation, among others. Additionally, we require our suppliers and distributors to sign up and abide by our Supplier and Distributor Codes of Conduct; however, there can be no assurance that our employees, suppliers and distributors will not engage in improper actions. Any such improper actions or allegations of such acts could damage our reputation and subject us to civil or criminal investigations in the United States and in other jurisdictions, and any related shareholder lawsuits could lead to substantial civil and criminal, monetary and nonmonetary penalties and could cause us to incur significant legal and investigatory fees. In addition, a government may seek to hold us liable as a successor for violations committed by companies in which we invest or that we acquire. We also rely on our suppliers to adhere to our supplier standards of conduct, and material violations of such standards of conduct could occur that could have a material effect on our business, reputation, financial condition and results of operations.

The indemnification provisions of acquisition agreements by which we have acquired companies or businesses may not fully protect us, and we may face unexpected liabilities.

Certain of the acquisition agreements by which we have acquired companies or businesses require the former owners to indemnify us against certain liabilities related to the operation of the company or business before we acquired it. In most of these agreements, however, the liability of the former owners is limited, and certain former owners may be unable to meet their indemnification responsibilities. While we have limited escrow and retention agreements in place relating our acquisitions, these may not be enough to cover our exposure if a significant liability arose in connection with any acquisition agreement. We cannot assure you that these indemnification provisions, escrow agreements and retention agreements will protect us fully or at all, and as a result we may face unexpected liabilities that adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Certain aspects of our business rely on relationships with collaborative partners, distributors and other third parties for development, supply and marketing of certain products and potential products, and such collaborative partners or other third parties could fail to perform sufficiently.

We believe that success in penetrating certain geographic markets depends in part on our ability to develop and maintain relationships with key distributors. Relying on distribution relationships is risky because, among other things, our distributors may: not devote sufficient resources to the sales of our products; fail to obtain approvals necessary to distribute our products; be acquired by other companies and terminate our distribution agreements or become insolvent; or decline to renew existing agreements on acceptable terms. Because these and other factors may be beyond our control, the distribution of our products in certain jurisdictions may be delayed or otherwise adversely affected. If we or any of our distributors terminate a distribution agreement, we may be required to devote additional resources to commercialization and distribution, which could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Changes in our tax rates, unavailability of certain tax credits or reliefs or exposure to additional tax liabilities or assessments could affect our profitability, and audits by tax authorities could result in additional tax payments for prior periods.

We are affected by various U.S. and non-U.S. taxes, including direct and indirect taxes imposed on our global activities, such as corporate income, withholding, customs, excise, value-added, sales and other taxes. Significant judgment is required in determining our provisions for taxes, and there are many transactions and calculations where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain.

The amount of income tax we pay is subject to ongoing audits by U.S. federal, state and local tax authorities and by non-U.S. tax authorities. If audits result in payments or assessments different from our reserves, our future results may include unfavorable adjustments to our tax liabilities, and our financial statements could be adversely affected. Any further significant changes to the tax system in the United States or in other jurisdictions (including changes in the taxation of international income as further described below) could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

39


Table of Contents

We carry out extensive research and development activities, and as a result, we benefit in the United Kingdom from HMRC’s research and development expenditure credit (“RDEC”), which provides relief against U.K. corporation tax. Broadly, RDECs provide a tax credit currently equal to 13% of ‘qualifying research and development expenditure’ made from April 1, 2020 (the rate was previously 12% of qualifying research and development expenditure made from January 1, 2018 to March 31, 2020) by certain companies where certain criteria are met. Based on criteria established by HMRC, a portion of expenditures incurred in relation to our research and development and manufacturing development activities are eligible for RDEC relief. Our qualifying research and development expenditures largely consist of employment costs for research staff, consumables and certain internal overhead costs incurred as part of research projects for which we do not receive revenue and are loss generating. To the extent a company cannot utilize the RDEC against U.K. corporation tax then certain rules apply that allow the RDEC to reduce the tax liability of certain specified taxes, and to the extent it is not possible to utilize the RDEC in full, then the net tax credit is repaid to the company by HMRC.

We also benefit from the U.K.’s “patent box” regime, which allows certain profits attributable to revenues from patented products (and other qualifying income) to be taxed at an effective corporation tax rate of 10%.

If, however, there are unexpected adverse changes to the RDEC scheme or the “patent box” regime, or for any reason we are unable to qualify for such advantageous tax legislation, then our business, results of operations and financial condition may be adversely affected.

Changes in tax law relating to multinational corporations could adversely affect our tax position.

The U.S. Congress, government agencies in non-U.S. jurisdictions where we and our affiliates do business, and the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (“OECD”) have recently focused on issues related to the taxation of multinational corporations. One example is in the area of “base erosion and profit shifting,” where profits are claimed to be earned for tax purposes in low-tax jurisdictions, or payments are made between affiliates from a jurisdiction with high tax rates to a jurisdiction with lower tax rates. The OECD has released several components of its comprehensive plan to create an agreed set of international rules for addressing base erosion and profit shifting.

As we operate in numerous taxing jurisdictions, the application of tax laws can be subject to diverging and sometimes conflicting interpretations by tax authorities of these jurisdictions. It is not uncommon for taxing authorities in different countries to have conflicting views, for instance, with respect to, among other things, whether a permanent establishment exists in a particular jurisdiction, the manner in which the arm’s length standard is applied for transfer pricing purposes, or with respect to the valuation of intellectual property. For example, if the taxing authority in one country where we operate were to reallocate income from another country where we operate, and the taxing authority in the second country did not agree with the reallocation asserted by the first country, we could become subject to tax on the same income in both countries, resulting in double taxation. If taxing authorities were to allocate income to a higher tax jurisdiction, subject our income to double taxation or assess interest and penalties, it could increase our tax liability, which could adversely affect our financial position and results of operations.

Due to the potential for changes to tax laws and regulations or changes to the interpretation thereof (including regulations and interpretations pertaining to recent tax reform in the United States), the ambiguity of tax laws and regulations, the subjectivity of factual interpretations, uncertainties regarding the geographic mix of earnings in any particular period, and other factors, our estimates of effective tax rate and income tax assets and liabilities may be incorrect and our financial statements could be adversely affected. The impact of the factors referenced in the first sentence of this paragraph may be substantially different from period-to-period.    

The application of indirect taxes could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

The application of indirect taxes, such as sales and use tax, value-added tax, provincial taxes, goods and services tax, business tax and gross receipt tax, to our business is a complex and evolving issue. Significant

 

40


Table of Contents

judgment is required to evaluate applicable tax obligations. As a result, amounts recorded may be subject to adjustments by the relevant tax authorities. In many cases, the ultimate tax determination is uncertain because it is not clear how new and existing statutes might apply to our business. A number of jurisdictions globally have introduced (or are looking to introduce) additional reporting, record-keeping or value-added tax (or similar taxes) calculation, collection and remittance obligations on businesses like ours that are engaged in ecommerce.

Further, in the United States, states are able to tax their residents on remote sales. Following the U.S. Supreme Court’s decision in 2018 in South Dakota v. Wayfair, a U.S. state may require by way of “economic nexus laws” an online seller to collect sales taxes imposed by that state, even if the seller has no physical presence in that state, thus permitting a wider enforcement of such sales tax collection requirements against non-U.S. companies that have historically not been responsible for state or local tax collection unless they had physical presence in the U.S. customer’s state. Such legislation could require us to incur substantial costs in order to comply, including costs associated with legal advice, tax calculation, collection, remittance and audit requirements, which could make selling in such markets less attractive and could adversely affect our business.

We are required to comply with a wide variety of laws and regulations and are subject to regulation by various federal, state and foreign agencies.

The vast majority of our products are marketed and sold as being for research use only, and as such, they are not generally subject to the extensive laws and regulations that would apply if our products were to marketed and sold for diagnostic or therapeutic use.

RUO products are regulated by the U.S. Federal Drug Administration (the “FDA”) as medical devices, and include in vitro diagnostic products in the laboratory research phase of development that are being shipped or delivered for an investigation that is not subject to the FDA’s investigational device exemption requirements. Although medical devices are subject to stringent FDA oversight, products that are intended for RUO and are labeled as RUO are exempt from compliance with most FDA requirements, including premarket clearance or approval, manufacturing requirements, and others. A product labeled RUO but which is actually intended for clinical diagnostic use may be viewed by the FDA as adulterated and misbranded under the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (“FDCA”), and subject to FDA enforcement action. The FDA has indicated that when determining the intended use of a product labeled RUO, the FDA will consider the totality of the circumstances surrounding distribution and use of the product, including how the product is marketed and to whom. The FDA could disagree with our assessment that our products are properly marketed as RUOs, or could conclude that products labeled as RUO are actually intended for clinical diagnostic use and could take enforcement action against us, including requiring us to stop distribution of our products until we are in compliance with applicable regulations, which would reduce our revenue, increase our costs and adversely affect our business, prospects, results of operations and financial condition. In the event that the FDA requires us to obtain marketing authorization of our RUO products in the future, there can be no assurance that the FDA will grant any clearance or approval requested by us in a timely manner, or at all.

In the event that the applicable laws and regulations were to change such that our products were subject to greater regulatory control, it could have a significant impact on our ability to market and sell our products and could require us to spend significant amounts to ensure and monitor compliance with such laws and regulations such that our business, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected. Similarly, if we fail to appropriately market and sell our products as being for research use only, we may be found to be selling products for diagnostic use and in breach of the appropriate laws and regulations. Though we are careful to ensure that our products are clearly identified as being for research use only and have processes in place to ensure we are not selling our products to customers who may intend to use our products other than for research, including for diagnostic use, we cannot be certain that our customers will not use our products for purposes other than those for which they are manufactured, identified and marketed.

Generally, we are subject to various local, state, federal, foreign and transnational laws and regulations, which include the requirements of the FDA, the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (the “HHS”)

 

41


Table of Contents

and other comparable agencies and, in the future, any changes to such laws and regulations could adversely affect us. In particular, for a very small number of our products which are regulated as non-RUO medical devices, we are subject to laws and regulations concerning current good manufacturing practices and certain other requirements applicable to medical devices. We also maintain certain quality management systems accreditations at our facilities in Cambridge, United Kingdom, Hangzhou, China (ISO9001) and Burlingame, California (ISO13485). Our subsidiaries may be required to register for permits and/or licenses with, and may be required to comply with the laws and regulations of, the FDA, the HHS, foreign agencies and/or comparable state agencies as well as certain accrediting bodies depending upon the type of operations and location of product distribution, manufacturing and sale. The manufacture, distribution and marketing of certain of our products are subject to extensive ongoing regulation by the FDA and other equivalent local, state, federal and non-U.S. regulatory authorities. In addition, we are subject to inspections by these regulatory authorities. Failure by us or by our customers to comply with the requirements of these regulatory authorities or quality accreditation agencies, including without limitation, remediating any inspectional observations to the satisfaction of these regulatory authorities, could result in warning letters, product recalls or seizures, monetary sanctions, injunctions to halt manufacture and distribution, restrictions on our operations, civil or criminal sanctions or withdrawal of existing or denial of pending approvals, including those relating to products or facilities. In addition, such a failure could expose us to contractual or product liability claims, contractual claims from our customers, as well as ongoing remediation and increased compliance costs, any or all of which could be significant.

We are also subject to a variety of federal, state, local and international laws and regulations that govern, among other things, the importation and exportation of products, animal welfare, the handling, transportation and manufacture of substances that could be classified as hazardous, laws governing government contracts and our business practices such as anti-corruption and antitrust laws. Although we believe that we comply in all material respects with applicable laws and regulations, there can be no assurance that a regulatory agency or tribunal would not reach a different conclusion concerning the compliance of our operations with applicable laws and regulations. In addition, there can be no assurance that we will be able to maintain or renew existing permits, licenses or other regulatory approvals or obtain, without significant delay, future permits, licenses or other approvals needed for the operation of our businesses. Furthermore, loss of a permit, license or other approval in any one portion of our business may have indirect consequences in other portions of our business if regulators or customers, for example, cease doing business with such other portion due to fears that such loss is a sign of broader concerns about our ability to deliver products or services of sufficient quality.

Any noncompliance by us with applicable laws and regulations or the failure to maintain, renew or obtain necessary permits and licenses could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Failure to comply with these laws and regulations can lead to agency action, including warning letters, product recalls, product seizures, monetary sanctions, injunctions to halt manufacturing or distribution, restrictions on our operations, withdrawal of existing or denial of future approvals, permits or registrations, including those relating to products or facilities and civil and criminal sanctions. To the extent these agencies were to take enforcement action, such action may be publicly available, and such publicity could harm our ability to sell these regulated products globally and may harm our reputation. In addition, such actions could limit the ability of our customers to obtain regulatory clearance or approval for their products in the United States or abroad and/or our customers may incur significant costs in obtaining or maintaining such regulatory clearances or approvals in the United States or abroad. In addition, any such failure relating to the products we provide exposes us to direct and third-party product liability claims as well as contractual claims from our customers, including claims for reimbursement for lost or damaged products, as well as potential recall liability, which could be significant. Customers may also claim loss of profits due to lost or delayed sales, although our direct contracts with end customers typically place limits on such claims. There can be no assurance that any such contractual limitation will be applicable or sufficient or fully enforced in any given situation.

 

42


Table of Contents

Risks Relating to our Intellectual Property

If we are unable to obtain and maintain patent protection for our technology, products and potential products, or if the scope of the patent protection obtained is not sufficiently broad, we may not be able to compete effectively in our markets.

We rely, and will continue to rely, upon a combination of patents, trade secret protection and confidentiality agreements to protect the intellectual property related to our proprietary technologies, products and potential product. Our success depends in part on our ability to secure and maintain patent protection in the United States and other countries with respect to our technology, current products and potential products, and any future potential products and technology we may develop. We seek to protect our proprietary position by filing or collaborating with our licensors to file patent applications in the United States and abroad related to our proprietary technologies, products and potential products.

The patent prosecution process is expensive, time consuming and complex, and we may not be able to file, prosecute, maintain, defend, enforce or license all necessary or desirable patents at a reasonable cost or in a timely manner in all desirable jurisdictions. As a result, we may not be able to prevent competitors or other third parties from developing and commercializing competitive products in all such fields and jurisdictions.

It is possible that we will fail to identify patentable aspects of our research and development output or fail to take the necessary steps to seek patent protection before it is too late to obtain patent protection. We may not have the right to control the preparation, filing, and prosecution of patent applications, or to maintain the rights to patents licensed from third parties. Therefore, these patents and patent applications may not be prosecuted and enforced in a manner consistent with the best interests of our business. The patent applications that we own or in-license may fail to result in issued patents with claims that cover our relevant proprietary products and technology, including current products, potential products, and any future potential products we may develop in the United States or in other foreign countries, in whole or in part. Our existing patents may have issued with claims that fail to cover our relevant proprietary products and technology, including current products, potential products and any future potential products we may develop in the United States or in other foreign countries, in whole or in part. Alternately, our existing patents and any future patents we obtain may not be sufficiently broad to prevent others from using our technology or from developing competing products and technologies. Patents may not be granted for a number of reasons, including known or unknown prior art, deficiencies in the patent application or the lack of novelty of the underlying invention or technology. In addition, publications of discoveries in scientific literature often lag behind the actual discoveries, and patent applications in the United States and other jurisdictions are typically not published until 18 months after filing, or in some cases, not at all. Therefore, we cannot be certain that we or our licensors were the first to make the inventions claimed in our owned or licensed patents or pending patent applications or that we or our licensors were the first to file for patent protection of such inventions.

Even if patents do successfully issue and even if such patents cover our current products, current potential products and any future potential products we may develop, third parties may challenge their validity, ownership, enforceability or scope thereof, which may result in such patents being narrowed, invalidated, or held unenforceable or circumvented. We may become involved in proceedings challenging our owned or licensed patent rights, including, but not limited to, opposition, derivation, reexamination, inter partes review, post grant review or interference. Any successful challenge to these patents or any other patents owned by or licensed to us could deprive us of rights necessary for the successful commercialization of any of our products and may result in loss of patent rights or freedom to operate, loss of exclusivity, or patent claims being narrowed, invalidated or held unenforceable, any of which could limit our ability to stop others from using or commercializing similar or identical technology and products, or could limit the duration of the patent protection of our technology, products and potential products. Such proceedings also may result in substantial costs and require significant time from our management and employees, even if the eventual outcome is favorable to us. In addition, the issuance of a patent does not give us the right to practice the patented invention. Third parties may have blocking patents that

 

43


Table of Contents

could prevent us from marketing our products, if approved, or practicing our own patented technology. Our competitors may also be able to circumvent our patents by developing similar or alternative potential products in a non-infringing manner.

The patent position of life sciences companies can be uncertain, involves complex legal, scientific and factual questions, and is characterized by the existence of large numbers of patents and litigation based on allegations of patent or other intellectual property infringement, misappropriation, violation or invalidity. As a result, the issuance, scope, validity, enforceability and commercial value of our patent rights are uncertain. If the patent applications we hold or have in-licensed with respect to our technology products and potential products fail to issue, if the validity, breadth or strength of protection of our patents and patent applications with respect to our technology, products and potential products is threatened or if they fail to provide meaningful exclusivity for any of our current or future technology products and potential products, it could dissuade companies from collaborating with us, encourage competitors to develop competing products or technologies and threaten our ability to commercialize future potential products. Any such outcome could harm our business.

In addition, we may in the future be subject to claims by former employees, consultants or other third parties asserting an ownership right in our owned or licensed patents or patent applications. An adverse determination in any such submission or proceeding may result in loss of exclusivity or freedom to operate or in patent claims being narrowed, invalidated or held unenforceable, in whole or in part, which could limit our ability to stop others from using or commercializing similar products, potential products or technology, without payment to us, or could limit the duration of the patent protection covering our products, potential products and technology. Such challenges may also result in our inability to develop, manufacture or commercialize our products, potential products and technologies without infringing third-party patent rights. In addition, if the breadth or strength of protection provided by our owned or licensed patents and patent applications is threatened, it could dissuade companies from collaborating with us to license, develop or commercialize current or future products, potential products or technologies. Any of the foregoing could have an adverse effect on our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

Variability and developments in patent laws or patent jurisprudence could diminish the value of patents in general, thereby impairing our ability to protect our products and potential products.

As is the case with other companies in our industry, our success depends in part on obtaining, maintaining, enforcing and defending intellectual property, particularly patents. Obtaining and enforcing patents in the life science industry involves technological and legal complexity, and obtaining and enforcing life science patents is costly, time-consuming and inherently uncertain. Changes in either the patent laws or their interpretation in the United States or other jurisdictions may increase the uncertainties and costs surrounding the prosecution of our patents, diminish our ability to protect our inventions, obtain, maintain, defend, and enforce our intellectual property rights and, more generally, affect the value of our intellectual property or narrow the scope of our patent rights.

The Leahy-Smith America Invents Act (the “AIA”), which was passed in September 2011, resulted in significant changes to the U.S. patent system. An important change introduced by the AIA is that, as of March 16, 2013, the United States transitioned from a “first-to-invent” to a “first-inventor-to-file” system for deciding which party should be granted a patent when two or more patent applications are filed by different parties claiming the same invention. Under a “first-inventor-to-file” system, assuming the other requirements for patentability are met, the first inventor to file a patent application generally will be entitled to a patent on the invention regardless of whether another inventor had made the invention earlier. A third party that files a patent application in the United States Patent and Trademark Office (the “USPTO”), after March 16, 2013 but before us could therefore be awarded a patent covering an invention similar or indentical to one of ours even if we made our invention before the third party made theirs. This will require us to be cognizant going forward of the time from invention to filing of a patent application and be diligent in filing patent applications, but circumstances could prevent us from promptly filing patent applications on our inventions.

 

44


Table of Contents

Among some of the other changes introduced by the AIA are changes that limit where a patentee may file a patent infringement suit and provide additional opportunities for third parties to challenge any issued patent in the USPTO. This applies to all of our U.S. patents, even those issued before March 16, 2013. Because of a lower evidentiary standard in USPTO proceedings compared to the evidentiary standard in U.S. federal district courts necessary to invalidate a patent claim, a third party could potentially provide evidence in a USPTO proceeding sufficient for the USPTO to hold a claim invalid even though the same evidence would be insufficient to invalidate the claim if first presented in a district court action. Accordingly, a third party may attempt to use the USPTO procedures to invalidate our patent claims that would not have been invalidated if first challenged by the third party as a defendant in a district court action. It is not clear what, if any, impact the AIA will have on the operation of our business. However, the AIA and its implementation could increase the uncertainties and costs surrounding the prosecution of our or our licensors’ patent applications and the enforcement or defense of our or our licensors’ issued patents.

In addition, the United States federal government retains certain rights in inventions produced with its financial assistance under the Bayh-Dole Act. The federal government retains a “nonexclusive, nontransferable, irrevocable, paid-up license” for its own benefit. The Bayh-Dole Act also provides federal agencies with “march-in rights.” March-in rights allow the government, in specified circumstances, to require the contractor or successors in title to the patent to grant a “nonexclusive, partially exclusive, or exclusive license” to a “responsible applicant or applicants.” If the patent owner refuses to do so, the government may grant the license itself. Some of our licensed patents are subject to the provisions of the Bayh-Dole Act. If our licensors fail to comply with the regulations of the Bayh-Dole Act, they could lose title to any patents subject to such regulations, which could affect our license rights under the patents and our ability to stop others from using or commercializing similar or identical technology and products, or limit patent protection for our technology and products.

The United States and many other countries have adopted a doctrine of “patent exhaustion,” which provides that once a patentee sells one of its products, it can no longer exercise control over the specific product. This could limit our ability to rely on our patents to prevent the import of products we have placed into the market in one jurisdiction into another jurisdiction.

Additionally, the U.S. Supreme Court has ruled on several patent cases in recent years either narrowing the scope of patent protection available in certain circumstances or weakening the rights of patent owners in certain situations, and there are other open questions under patent law that courts have yet to decisively address. In addition to increasing uncertainty with regard to our ability to obtain patents in the future, this combination of events has created uncertainty with respect to the value of patents, once obtained. Depending on decisions by Congress, the federal courts and the USPTO, the laws and regulations governing patents could change in unpredictable ways and could weaken our ability to obtain new patents or to enforce our existing patents and patents that we might obtain in the future. In addition, European patent laws can be complex and uncertain, and there could be similar changes in the laws of foreign jurisdictions that may impact the value of our patent rights or our other intellectual property rights. Complying with these laws and regulations could limit our ability to obtain new patents in the future that may be important for our business, and changes in such laws may have an adverse effect on our patent rights and our ability to protect, defend and enforce our patent rights in the future, as well as on our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

Obtaining and maintaining our patent protection depends on compliance with various procedural, document submission, fee payment and other requirements imposed by governmental patent agencies, and our patent protection could be reduced or eliminated for non-compliance with these requirements.

The USPTO, European Patent Office (“EPO”) and other patent agencies require compliance with a number of procedural, documentary, fee payment and other similar provisions during the patent application process. In addition, periodic maintenance and annuity fees on any issued patent are due to be paid to the USPTO, EPO and other patent agencies over the lifetime of the patent. While an inadvertent failure to make timely payment of such

 

45


Table of Contents

fees or to comply with such provisions can in many cases within a reasonable timeframe be cured by additional payment of a late fee or by other means in accordance with the applicable rules, there are situations and time frames in which non-compliance with such provisions will result in the abandonment or lapse of the patent or patent application, and the partial or complete loss of patent rights in the relevant jurisdiction. Non-compliance events that could result in abandonment or lapse of a patent or patent application include failure to respond to official actions within prescribed time limits, non-payment of fees and failure to properly legalize and submit formal documents within prescribed time limits. If we or our licensors fail to maintain the patents and patent applications covering our products and potential products or if we or our licensors otherwise allow our patents or patent applications to be abandoned or lapse, it can create opportunities for competitors to enter the market, which would hurt our competitive position and could impair our ability to successfully commercialize our products.

We enjoy only limited geographical protection with respect to certain patents, and we may not be able to protect our intellectual property rights throughout the world.

Filing, prosecuting and defending patents covering our technology, products and potential products in all countries throughout the world would be prohibitively expensive, and even in countries where we have sought protection for our intellectual property, such protection can be less extensive than those in the United States. The requirements for patentability may differ in certain countries, particularly developing countries, and the breadth of patent claims allowed can be inconsistent. In addition, the laws of some foreign countries do not protect intellectual property rights to the same extent as federal and state laws in the United States. In-licensing patents covering our products and potential products in all countries throughout the world may similarly be prohibitively expensive, if such opportunities are available at all. And in-licensing or filing, prosecuting and defending patents even in only those jurisdictions in which we develop or commercialize our products and potential products may be prohibitively expensive or impractical. Competitors may use our and our licensors’ technologies in jurisdictions where we have not obtained patent protection or licensed patents to develop their own products and, further, may export otherwise infringing products to territories where we and our licensors have patent protection, but where enforcement is not as strong as that in the United States or the European Union. These products may compete with our products, and our or our licensors’ patents or other intellectual property rights may not be effective or sufficient to prevent them from competing.

Many jurisdictions have compulsory licensing laws under which a patent owner may be compelled to grant licenses to third parties. In addition, many jurisdictions limit the enforceability of patents against government agencies or government contractors. In these jurisdictions, the patent owner may have limited remedies, which could materially diminish the value of such patents. If we or any of our licensors are forced to grant a license to third parties with respect to any patents relevant to our business, our competitive position may be adversely impacted, which could have a material adverse effect on our business.

Many companies have encountered significant problems in protecting and defending intellectual property rights in foreign jurisdictions. The legal system in certain foreign jurisdictions, particularly those in certain developing countries, do not favor the enforcement of patents, trade secrets and other intellectual property protection which could make it difficult for us to stop the infringement, misappropriation or other violation of our patents or other intellectual property rights, or the marketing of competing products in violation of our proprietary rights in these jurisdictions. Proceedings to enforce our patent and other intellectual property rights in foreign jurisdictions could result in substantial costs and divert our efforts and attention from other aspects of our business, could put our patents and other intellectual property rights at risk of being invalidated or interpreted narrowly and our patent applications at risk of not issuing and could provoke third parties to assert claims against us. We may not prevail in any lawsuits that we initiate and the damages or other remedies awarded, if any, may not be commercially meaningful. Accordingly, our efforts to enforce our intellectual property rights around the world may be inadequate to obtain a commercial advantage from the intellectual property that we develop or license. Any of the foregoing could have an adverse effect on our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

 

46


Table of Contents

Patent terms may be inadequate to protect our competitive position on our products and potential products for an adequate amount of time.

The term of any individual patent depends on applicable law in the country where the patent is granted. In the United States, provided all maintenance fees are timely paid, a patent generally has a term of 20 years from its application filing date or earliest claimed non-provisional filing date. Extensions and adjustments may be available under certain circumstances, but the life of a patent and, correspondingly, the protection it affords is limited. Even if we or our licensors obtain patents covering our products and potential products, when the terms of all patents covering a product or potential product expire, our business may become subject to competition with respect to that product. As a result, our owned and licensed patent portfolio may not provide us with sufficient rights to exclude others from commercializing products similar or identical to ours for an adequate amount of time.

We may not be able to rely on our patents to stop certain activities by third parties.

The United States and many other countries have provisions that exempt certain activities from patent infringement. For example, in the United States, “safe harbor” provisions shield infringement activities that are reasonably related to obtaining regulatory approval for certain medicinal products. This may limit our ability to stop others from using our technology, products and potential products. Third parties might use our patented technology, make and sell our patented products or otherwise perform an act that infringes one or more of our patents. We may not have sufficient financial or other resources to conduct appropriate litigation or other proceedings to stop such infringing acts. This could diminish the value of our patents.

We depend on proprietary technology licensed from others. If we lose our existing licenses or are unable to acquire or license additional proprietary rights from third parties, we may not be able to continue developing our potential products.

We are a party to certain license agreements for certain intellectual property and proprietary technology, and we may enter into additional agreements, including license agreements, with other parties in the future that impose diligence, development and commercialization timelines, milestone payments, royalties, insurance and other obligations on us. If we fail to comply with our obligations to our licensors or any of our other current or future collaborators, our counterparties may have the right to terminate these agreements, in which event we might not be able to develop, manufacture or market any product, potential product or other technology that is covered by these agreements, which could adversely affect the value of the potential product being developed under any such agreement, or we may face claims for monetary damages or other penalties under these agreements. Termination of these agreements or reduction or elimination of our rights under these agreements may result in us having to negotiate new or reinstated agreements with less favorable terms, or cause us to lose our rights under these agreements, including our rights to important intellectual property or technology. In addition, such an event may cause us to experience significant delays in the development and commercialization of our products, potential products or technologies or incur liability for damages. If any such license is terminated, our competitors or other third parties could have the freedom to seek regulatory approval of, and to market, products and technologies identical or competitive to ours, and we may be required to cease our development and commercialization of certain of our products, potential products or technologies.

We may rely on third parties from whom we license proprietary technology to file and prosecute patent applications and maintain patents and otherwise protect the intellectual property we license from them. We may have limited control over these activities or any other intellectual property that may be related to our in-licensed intellectual property. For example, we cannot be certain that such activities by these licensors will be conducted in compliance with applicable laws and regulations or will result in valid and enforceable patents and other intellectual property rights. We may have limited control over the manner in which our licensors initiate an infringement proceeding against a third-party infringer of the intellectual property rights, or defend certain of the intellectual property that may be licensed to us. It is possible that the licensors’ infringement proceeding or defense activities may be less vigorous than if we conduct them ourselves.

 

47


Table of Contents

The growth of our business may depend in part on our ability to acquire or in-license additional proprietary rights. We may be unable to acquire or in-license any relevant third-party intellectual property rights that we identify as necessary or important to our business operations. We may fail to obtain any of these licenses at a reasonable cost or on reasonable terms, if at all, which would harm our business. In that event, we may be required to expend significant time and resources to redesign our products, potential products or technologies or the methods for manufacturing them or to develop or license replacement technology, all of which may not be feasible on a technical or commercial basis. If we are unable to do so, we may be unable to develop or commercialize the affected products, potential products or technologies, which could adversely impact our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects. Even if we are able to obtain a license under such intellectual property rights, any such license may be non-exclusive, which may allow our competitors access to the same technologies licensed to us.

Disputes may arise regarding intellectual property subject to a license agreement, including:

 

   

the scope of rights granted under the license agreement and other interpretation-related issues;

 

   

our or our licensors’ obligation to obtain, maintain and defend intellectual property and to enforce intellectual property rights against third parties;

 

   

the extent to which our technology, potential products and processes infringe, misappropriate or otherwise violate intellectual property of the licensor that is not subject to the license agreement;

 

   

the sublicensing of patent and other intellectual property rights under our license agreements;

 

   

our diligence, financial or other obligations under the license agreement and what activities satisfy those diligence obligations;

 

   

the inventorship and ownership of inventions and know-how resulting from the joint creation or use of intellectual property by our licensors and us and our partners; and

 

   

the priority of invention of patented technology.

In addition, the agreements under which we license intellectual property or technology from third parties are, and any such future license agreements are likely to be, complex, and certain provisions in such agreements may be susceptible to multiple interpretations. The resolution of any contract interpretation disagreement that may arise could narrow what we believe to be the scope of our rights to the relevant intellectual property or technology, or increase what we believe to be our diligence, financial or other obligations under the relevant agreement, or we may face claims for monetary damages or other penalties under these agreements, any of which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations, and prospects. Moreover, if disputes over intellectual property that we have licensed or any other dispute described above related to our license agreements prevent or impair our ability to maintain our licensing arrangements on commercially acceptable terms, we may be unable to successfully develop and commercialize the affected products, potential products or technologies. Any of the foregoing could have an adverse effect on our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

We may become involved in lawsuits to protect or enforce our intellectual property, which could be expensive, time consuming and unsuccessful and have an adverse effect on the success of our business.

Competitors or other third parties may infringe, misappropriate or otherwise violate our patents or other intellectual property. If we or one of our licensors were to initiate legal proceedings against a third party to enforce a patent covering one of our products or potential products, the defendant could counterclaim that our patent is invalid or unenforceable. In patent litigation in the United States and in European countries, defendant counterclaims alleging invalidity or unenforceability are commonplace. Third parties may initiate invalidity proceedings even in the absence of infringement proceedings. Grounds for a validity challenge could be an alleged failure to meet any of several statutory requirements, for example, lack of novelty, obviousness, lack of

 

48


Table of Contents

written description, non-enablement or lack of entitlement. Third parties might allege unenforceability of our patents in the United States because during prosecution of the patent an individual connected with such prosecution withheld relevant information, or made a misleading statement. Interference or derivation proceedings provoked by third parties or brought by us or declared by the USPTO may be necessary to determine the priority of inventions with respect to our patents or patent applications. The outcome of proceedings involving assertions of invalidity and unenforceability during patent litigation is unpredictable.

If a defendant were to prevail on a legal assertion of invalidity or unenforceability, we would lose at least part, and perhaps all, of the patent protection on our products, potential products and other technology, which may allow third parties to commercialize our technology or products and compete directly with us, without payment to us, or could require us to obtain license rights from the prevailing party in order to be able to manufacture or commercialize our products, potential products or technologies without infringing third-party patent rights. Even if a defendant does not prevail on a legal assertion of invalidity or unenforceability, our patent claims may be construed in a manner that would limit our ability to enforce such claims against the defendant and others. Furthermore, many of our current and potential competitors may have, or may gain, the ability to dedicate substantially greater resources to enforce and defend their intellectual property rights than we can. Accordingly, despite our efforts, we may not be able to prevent third parties from infringing upon, misappropriating or otherwise violating our intellectual property rights. Thus, even if we were to ultimately prevail, or to settle at an early stage, such litigation could burden us with substantial unanticipated costs. Our patents and other intellectual property rights also will not protect our technology, products and potential products if competitors design around our protected technology, products and potential products without infringing our patents or other intellectual property rights.

Third parties may assert claims against us alleging infringement, misappropriations or other violations of their patents and proprietary rights, or we may need to become involved in lawsuits to defend or enforce our patents, either of which could result in substantial costs or loss of productivity, delay or prevent the development and commercialization of our products and potential products, or prohibit our use of proprietary technology or sale of products.

Our commercial success depends, in part, upon our ability to develop, manufacture, market and sell our products and other technologies without alleged or actual infringement, misappropriation or other violation of the patents and proprietary rights of third parties. However, our research, development and commercialization activities may be subject to claims that we infringe, misappropriate or otherwise violate patents or other intellectual property rights owned or controlled by third parties. Litigation relating to infringement or misappropriation of patent and other intellectual property rights in the life science industry is common, including patent infringement lawsuits, interferences, derivation and administrative law proceedings, inter partes review and post-grant review before the USPTO, as well as oppositions and similar processes in foreign jurisdictions. The various markets in which we plan to operate can be subject to litigation regarding patents and other intellectual property rights. Our competitors in both the United States and abroad, many of which have substantially greater resources and have made substantial investments in patent portfolios and competing technologies, may have applied for or obtained or may in the future apply for or obtain, patents that will prevent, limit or otherwise interfere with our ability to make, use and sell our products. In addition, many companies in intellectual property-dependent industries, including the life science industry, have employed intellectual property litigation as a means to gain an advantage over their competitors. Some claimants may have substantially greater resources than we do and may be able to sustain the costs of complex intellectual property litigation to a greater degree and for longer periods of time than we could. In addition, patent holding companies that focus solely on extracting royalties and settlements by enforcing patent rights may target us.

We may be subject to third-party claims including infringement, interference or derivation proceedings, post-grant review and inter partes review before the USPTO or similar adversarial proceedings or litigation in other jurisdictions. Even if we believe such claims are without merit, a court of competent jurisdiction could hold that these third-party patents are valid, enforceable and infringed, and the holders of any such patents may be

 

49


Table of Contents

able to block our ability to commercialize the applicable product or potential product unless we obtained a license under the applicable patents, or until such patents expire or are finally determined to be invalid or unenforceable. Because patent applications can take many years to issue, there may be currently pending patent applications which may later result in issued patents that our products, potential products or technologies may infringe. In addition, third parties may obtain patents in the future and claim that use of our technologies, products and potential products infringes upon these patents. If any third-party patents were held by a court of competent jurisdiction to cover aspects of our products, potential products or technologies, the holders of any such patents may be able to prohibit our commercialization of the applicable product, potential product or technology until such patent expires or is finally determined to be invalid or unenforceable or unless we obtained a license.

In addition, defending such claims would cause us to incur substantial expenses and, if successful, could cause us to pay substantial damages if we are found to be infringing a third party’s patent rights. These damages potentially include royalties, increased damages (possibly treble damages) and attorneys’ fees if we are found to have infringed such rights willfully. Further, if a patent infringement suit is brought against us, our development, manufacturing or sales activities relating to the product, potential product or technology that is the subject of the suit may be delayed or terminated, as parties making claims against us may obtain injunctive or other equitable relief. As a result of patent infringement claims, or in order to avoid potential infringement claims, we may choose to seek, or be required to seek, a license from the third party, which may require payment of substantial royalties or fees, or require us to grant a cross-license under our intellectual property rights. These licenses may not be available on reasonable terms or at all. Even if a license can be obtained on reasonable terms, the rights may be nonexclusive, which would give our competitors access to the same intellectual property rights. If we are unable to enter into a license on acceptable terms, we could be prevented from commercializing one or more of our products, potential products or technologies, or forced to modify such products or potential products, or to cease some aspect of our business operations, which could harm our business significantly. We might also be forced to redesign or modify our products, potential products or technologies so that we no longer infringe the third-party intellectual property rights, which may result in significant cost or delay to us, or which redesign or modification could be impossible or technically infeasible.

Even if we were ultimately to prevail, any of these events could require us to divert substantial financial and management resources that we would otherwise be able to devote to our business. Intellectual property litigation, regardless of its outcome, may cause negative publicity, adversely impact prospective customers, cause product shipment delays, or prohibit us from manufacturing, importing, marketing or otherwise commercializing our products, potential products, services and technology. In addition, because of the substantial amount of discovery required in connection with intellectual property litigation, there is a risk that some of our confidential information could be compromised by disclosure during this type of litigation. There could also be public announcements of the results of hearings, motions or other interim proceedings or developments, and if securities analysts or investors view these announcements in a negative light, the price of our common stock could be adversely affected. Such litigation or proceedings could substantially increase our operating losses and reduce our resources available for development activities. We may not have sufficient financial or other resources to adequately conduct such litigation or proceedings. Some of our competitors may be able to sustain the costs of such litigation or proceedings more effectively than we can because of their substantially greater financial resources. Uncertainties resulting from the initiation and continuation of patent litigation or other proceedings could have an adverse effect on our ability to compete in the marketplace.

Our trade secrets may be misappropriated or disclosed, and confidentiality agreements with employees and third parties may not adequately prevent disclosure of trade secrets and protect other proprietary information.

We consider proprietary trade secrets, confidential know-how and unpatented know-how to be important to our business. We may rely on trade secrets and confidential know-how to protect our technology, especially where patent protection is believed by us to be of limited value. However, trade secrets and confidential know-how are difficult to protect, and we have limited control over the protection of trade secrets and confidential know-how used by our licensors, collaborators and suppliers.

 

50


Table of Contents

To protect this type of information against disclosure or appropriation by competitors, our policy is to require our employees, consultants, contractors and advisors to enter into confidentiality agreements and, if applicable, material transfer agreements, consulting agreements or other similar agreements with us prior to beginning research or disclosing proprietary information. These agreements typically limit the rights of the third parties to use or disclose our confidential information, including our trade secrets. However, current or former employees, consultants, contractors and advisers may unintentionally or willfully disclose our confidential information to competitors, and confidentiality agreements may not provide an adequate remedy in the event of unauthorized disclosure of confidential information. The need to share trade secrets and other confidential information increases the risk that such trade secrets become known by our competitors, are inadvertently incorporated into the technology of others, or are disclosed or used in violation of these agreements. Given that our competitive position is based, in part, on our know-how and trade secrets, a competitor’s discovery of our trade secrets or other unauthorized use or disclosure would impair our competitive position and may have an adverse effect on our business and results of operations. Monitoring unauthorized uses and disclosures is difficult, and we do not know whether the steps we have taken to protect our proprietary technologies will be effective. Enforcing a claim that a third party obtained illegally and is using trade secrets and/or confidential know-how is expensive, time consuming and unpredictable, and the enforceability of confidentiality agreements may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Courts outside the United States are sometimes less willing to protect proprietary information, technology and know-how. Furthermore, if any of our trade secrets and confidential know-how were to be lawfully obtained or independently developed by a competitor or other third party, we would have no right to prevent them from using that technology or information to compete with us, and our competitive position would be harmed.

We may be subject to claims that our employees, consultants or independent contractors have wrongfully used or disclosed confidential information of their former employers or other third parties, and we may be subject to claims asserting ownership of what we regard as our own intellectual property.

We do and may employ individuals who were previously employed at universities or other life science companies, including our licensors, competitors or potential competitors. Although we seek to protect our ownership of intellectual property rights by ensuring that our agreements with our employees, consultants, collaborators, independent contractors and other third parties with whom we do business include provisions requiring such parties to assign rights in inventions to us and to not use the know-how or confidential information of their former employer or other third parties, we may be subject to claims that we or our employees, consultants, collaborators or independent contractors have inadvertently or otherwise used or disclosed know-how or confidential information of their former employers or other third parties. We may also be subject to claims that former employers or other third parties have an ownership interest in our patents. Litigation may be necessary to defend against these claims. There is no guarantee of success in defending these claims, and if we fail in defending any such claims, in addition to paying monetary damages, we may lose valuable personnel or intellectual property rights, such as exclusive ownership of, or right to use, valuable intellectual property, which could result in customers seeking other sources for the technology, or in ceasing from doing business with us. Such intellectual property rights could be awarded to a third party, and we could be required to obtain a license from such third party to commercialize our technology or potential product. Such a license may not be available on commercially reasonable terms or at all. Even if we are successful, litigation could result in substantial cost and reputational loss and be a distraction to our management and other employees. Moreover, any such litigation or the threat thereof may adversely affect our reputation, our ability to form strategic alliances, engage with scientific advisors or hire employees or consultants, each of which would have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

In addition, while we typically require our employees, consultants and contractors who may be involved in the conception or development of intellectual property to execute agreements assigning such intellectual property to us, we may be unsuccessful in executing such an agreement with each party who, in fact, conceives or develops intellectual property that we regard as our own. Furthermore, even when we obtain agreements assigning intellectual property to us, the assignment of intellectual property rights may not be self-executing, or

 

51


Table of Contents

the assignment agreements may be breached, each of which may result in claims by or against us related to the ownership of such intellectual property to determine the ownership of what we regard as our intellectual property. In addition, individuals executing agreements with us may have pre-existing or competing obligations to a third party, such as an academic institution, and thus an agreement with us may be ineffective in perfecting ownership of inventions developed by that individual. If we fail in prosecuting or defending any such claims, in addition to paying monetary damages, we may lose valuable intellectual property rights. Even if we are successful in prosecuting or defending any of the foregoing claims, litigation could result in substantial costs and be a distraction to our management and employees.

If our trademarks and trade names are not adequately protected, we may not be able to build name recognition in our markets of interest and our business may be adversely affected.

If our trademarks and trade names are not adequately protected, we may not be able to build name recognition in our markets of interest and our business may be adversely affected. We currently own issued trademark registrations and have trademark applications pending, any of which may be the subject of a governmental or third-party objection, which could prevent the registration or maintenance of the same. We cannot assure you that any currently pending trademark applications or any trademark applications we may file in the future will be approved. During trademark registration proceedings, we may receive rejections and although we are given an opportunity to respond to those rejections, we may be unable to overcome such rejections. In addition, in proceedings before the USPTO and in proceedings before comparable agencies in many foreign jurisdictions, third parties are given an opportunity to oppose pending trademark applications and to seek to cancel registered trademarks. Opposition or cancellation proceedings may be filed against our trademarks, and our trademarks may not survive such proceedings. If we are unsuccessful in obtaining trademark protection for our primary brand, we may be required to change our brand name, which could adversely affect our business.

We may not be able to protect our rights to these trademarks and trade names, which we need to build name recognition among potential partners or customers in our markets of interest. At times, competitors may adopt trade names or trademarks similar to ours, thereby impeding our ability to build brand identity and possibly leading to market confusion. In addition, there could be potential trade name or trademark infringement claims brought by owners of other registered trademarks or trademarks that incorporate variations of our unregistered trademarks or trade names. Over the long term, if we are unable to successfully register our trademarks and trade names and establish name recognition based on our trademarks and trade names, then we may not be able to compete effectively and our business may be adversely affected. Our efforts to enforce or protect our proprietary rights related to trademarks, trade secrets, domain names, copyrights or other intellectual property may be ineffective and could result in substantial costs and diversion of resources and could adversely impact our financial condition or results of operations.

Intellectual property rights do not necessarily protect us from all potential threats.

The degree of future protection afforded by our intellectual property rights is uncertain because intellectual property rights have limitations and may not adequately protect our business or permit us to maintain our competitive advantage. For example:

 

   

others may be able to make products that are similar to any products and potential products we may develop or utilize similar technology that are not covered by the claims of the patents that we own or license now or in the future;

 

   

we, our licensors or current or future collaboration partners might not have been the first to make the inventions covered by the issued patent or pending patent application that we license or may own in the future;

 

   

we or our licensors or current or future collaboration partners, might not have been the first to file patent applications covering certain of our or their inventions;

 

52


Table of Contents
   

others may independently develop similar or alternative technologies or duplicate any of our technologies without infringing, misappropriating or otherwise violating our owned or licensed intellectual property rights;

 

   

it is possible that our pending owned or licensed patent applications or those that we may own or license in the future will not lead to issued patents;

 

   

issued patents that we hold rights to may not provide us with a competitive advantage, or may be held invalid or unenforceable, including as a result of legal challenges by our competitors or other third parties;

 

   

our competitors or other third parties might conduct research and development activities in jurisdictions where we do not have patent rights and then use the information learned from such activities to develop competitive products for sale in our major commercial markets;

 

   

we may not develop additional proprietary technologies that are patentable;

 

   

the patents of others may harm our business; and

 

   

we may choose not to file a patent for certain trade secrets or know-how, and a third party may subsequently file a patent covering such intellectual property.

Should any of these events occur, they could have an adverse effect on our competitive position, business, financial condition or results of operations.

Risks Relating to Our ADSs and this Offering

The price of our ADSs may be volatile and may fluctuate due to factors beyond our control.

The initial public offering price for the ADSs was determined through negotiations between the underwriters and us, and may vary from the market price of ADSs following this offering. If you purchase ADSs in this offering, you may not be able to resell those ADSs at or above the initial public offering price. The market price of our ADSs may fluctuate significantly due to a variety of factors, including:

 

   

operating results that vary from our financial guidance or the expectations of securities analysts and investors;

 

   

the financial performance of the major end markets that we target;

 

   

the operating and securities price performance of companies that investors consider to be comparable to us;

 

   

announcements of strategic developments, acquisitions and other material events by us or our competitors;

 

   

failure to meet or exceed financial estimates and projections of the investment community or that we provide to the public;

 

   

issuance of new or updated research or reports by securities analysts;

 

   

changes in government regulations;

 

   

financing or other corporate transactions;

 

   

the loss of any of our key personnel;

 

   

sales of our ADSs or ordinary shares by us, our executive officers and board members, holders of our ADSs or our shareholders in the future;

 

53


Table of Contents
   

price and volume fluctuations in the overall stock market, including as a result of trends in the economy as a whole; and

 

   

other events and factors, many of which are beyond our control.

These and other market and industry factors may cause the market price and demand for our ADSs to fluctuate substantially, regardless of our actual operating performance, which may limit or prevent investors from readily selling their ADSs and may otherwise negatively affect the liquidity of our ADSs. In addition, the stock market in general, and pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostics companies in particular, have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations that have often been unrelated or disproportionate to the operating performance of these companies. In the past, when the market price of a stock has been volatile, holders of that stock have sometimes instituted securities class action litigation against the issuer. If any of the holders of our ADSs were to bring such a lawsuit against us, we could incur substantial costs defending the lawsuit and the attention of our senior management would be diverted from the operation of our business. Any adverse determination in litigation could also subject us to significant liabilities.

There has been no public market for our ADSs prior to this offering, and an active market may not develop in which investors can resell our ADSs.

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our ADSs, although our ordinary shares have traded on AIM. We cannot predict the extent to which an active market for our ADSs will develop or be sustained or how the development of such a market might affect the market price for our ADSs. The initial public offering price of our ADSs will be agreed upon between us and the underwriters based on a number of factors, including market conditions in effect at the time of the offering, which may not be indicative of the price at which our ADSs will trade following completion of the offering. Investors may not be able to sell their ADSs at or above the initial public offering price.

If securities or industry analysts do not publish research, or publish inaccurate or unfavorable research, about our business, the price of our ADSs and our trading volume could decline.

The trading market for our ADSs will depend in part on the research and reports that securities or industry analysts publish about us or our business. Securities and industry analysts do not currently, and may never, publish research on us. If no or too few securities or industry analysts commence coverage on us, the trading price for our ADSs would likely be negatively affected. In the event securities or industry analysts initiate coverage, if one or more of the analysts who cover us downgrade our ADSs or publish inaccurate or unfavorable research about our business, the price of our ADSs would likely decline. If one or more of these analysts cease coverage of us or fail to publish reports on us regularly, demand for our ADSs could decrease, which might cause the price of our ADSs and trading volume to decline.

We have broad discretion in the use of the net proceeds from this offering and may not use them effectively.

Our management will have broad discretion in the application of the net proceeds from this offering and could spend the proceeds in ways that do not improve our results of operations or enhance the value of our ADSs. The failure by our management to apply these funds effectively could result in financial losses or cause the price of our ADSs to decline. Pending their use, we may invest the net proceeds from this offering in a manner that does not produce income or that loses value.

The dual listing of our ordinary shares and our ADSs following this offering may adversely affect the liquidity and value of our ordinary shares and ADSs.

Following this offering and after our ADSs begin trading on Nasdaq, our ordinary shares will continue to be admitted to trading on AIM. We cannot predict the effect of this dual listing on the value of our ADSs and

 

54


Table of Contents

ordinary shares. However, the dual listing of our ADSs and ordinary shares may dilute the liquidity of these securities in one or both markets and may adversely affect the development of an active trading market for our ADSs in the United States. The price of our ADSs could also be adversely affected by trading in our ordinary shares on AIM. Although our ordinary shares are currently admitted to trading on AIM, we may decide to cancel the admission of our ordinary shares to trading on AIM. Cancellation of the admission of our ordinary shares to trading on AIM would require the requisite consent of shareholders in a general meeting prescribed by AIM Rules for Companies, unless the London Stock Exchange agrees otherwise. We cannot predict the effect such cancellation would have on the market price of our ADSs or ordinary shares.

We are an “emerging growth company,” and we cannot be certain if the reduced reporting requirements applicable to “emerging growth companies” will make our ADSs less attractive to investors.

We are an “emerging growth company,” as defined in the JOBS Act. For as long as we continue to be an emerging growth company, we may take advantage of exemptions from various reporting requirements that are applicable to other public companies that are not emerging growth companies, including not being required to comply with the auditor attestation requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and shareholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. As an emerging growth company, we are required to report only two years of financial results and selected financial data in our initial public offering registration statement, as compared to three and five years, respectively, for comparable data reported by other public companies. We may take advantage of these exemptions until we are no longer an emerging growth company. We could be an emerging growth company for up to five years, although circumstances could cause us to lose that status earlier, including if the aggregate market value of our ADSs and ordinary shares held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of any December 31 (the end of our second fiscal quarter) before that time, in which case we would no longer be an emerging growth company as of the following June 30 (our fiscal year-end). We cannot predict if investors will find our ADSs less attractive because we may rely on these exemptions. If some investors find our ADSs less attractive as a result, there may be a less active trading market for our ADSs and the price of our ADSs may be more volatile.

We qualify as a foreign private issuer and, as a result, we will not be subject to U.S. proxy rules and will be subject to Exchange Act reporting obligations that, to some extent, are more lenient and less frequent than those of a U.S. domestic public company.

Upon the closing of this offering, we will report under the Exchange Act as a non-U.S. company with foreign private issuer status. Because we qualify as a foreign private issuer under the Exchange Act, we are exempt from certain provisions of the Exchange Act that are applicable to U.S. domestic public companies, including (i) the sections of the Exchange Act regulating the solicitation of proxies, consents or authorizations in respect of a security registered under the Exchange Act; (ii) the sections of the Exchange Act requiring insiders to file public reports of their stock ownership and trading activities and liability for insiders who profit from trades made in a short period of time; and (iii) the rules under the Exchange Act requiring the filing with the SEC of quarterly reports on Form 10-Q containing unaudited financial and other specified information, or current reports on Form 8-K, upon the occurrence of specified significant events. In addition, foreign private issuers are not required to file their annual report on Form 20-F until 120 days after the end of each fiscal year, while U.S. domestic issuers that are accelerated filers are required to file their annual report on Form 10-K within 75 days after the end of each fiscal year. Foreign private issuers also are exempt from Regulation Fair Disclosure, aimed at preventing issuers from making selective disclosures of material information. As a result of the above, you may not have the same protections afforded to shareholders of companies that are not foreign private issuers, some investors may find the ADSs less attractive, and there may be a less active trading market for the ADSs.

 

55


Table of Contents

As a foreign private issuer, we are permitted to adopt certain home country practices in relation to corporate governance matters that differ significantly from Nasdaq corporate governance listing standards. These practices may afford less protection to shareholders than they would enjoy if we complied fully with Nasdaq corporate governance listing standards.

As a foreign private issuer listed on Nasdaq, we will be subject to corporate governance listing standards. However, Nasdaq rules permit a foreign private issuer like us to follow the corporate governance practices of its home country in lieu of certain Nasdaq corporate governance listing standards, provided that we disclose which requirements that we have not complied with in any year and confirm the U.K. corporate governance practices we have complied with. Certain corporate governance practices in the United Kingdom, which is our home country, may differ significantly from Nasdaq corporate governance listing standards. For example, neither the laws of the United Kingdom nor our articles of association (“Articles of Association”) have quorum requirements similar to Nasdaq Rule 5602(c). Although we voluntarily comply with the higher corporate governance standards of the U.K. Corporate Governance Code, we could include non-independent directors as members of our nomination and remuneration committee, and our independent directors would not necessarily hold regularly scheduled meetings at which only independent directors are present. We may in the future elect to follow home country practices in the United Kingdom with regard to other matters. Therefore, our shareholders may be afforded less protection than they otherwise would have under Nasdaq corporate governance listing standards applicable to U.S. domestic issuers. See “Management—Corporate Governance Practices and Foreign Private Issuer Status.”

We may lose our foreign private issuer status, which would then require us to comply with the Exchange Act’s domestic reporting regime and cause us to incur significant legal, accounting and other expenses.

As a foreign private issuer, we are not required to comply with all of the periodic disclosure and current reporting requirements of the Exchange Act applicable to U.S. domestic issuers. We may no longer be a foreign private issuer as of December 31, 2020 (the end of our second fiscal quarter in the fiscal year after this offering), which would require us to comply with all of the periodic disclosure and current reporting requirements of the Exchange Act applicable to U.S. domestic issuers as of July 1, 2021. In order to maintain our current status as a foreign private issuer, either (a) a majority of our ADSs must be either directly or indirectly owned of record by non-residents of the United States or (b)(i) a majority of our executive officers or directors cannot be U.S. citizens or residents, (ii) more than 50 percent of our assets must be located outside the United States and (iii) our business must be administered principally outside the United States. If we lose our status as a foreign private issuer, we would be required to comply with the Exchange Act reporting and other requirements applicable to U.S. domestic issuers, including the requirement to prepare our financial statements in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles, which are more detailed and extensive than the requirements for foreign private issuers. We may also be required to make changes in our corporate governance practices in accordance with various SEC and Nasdaq rules. The regulatory and compliance costs to us under U.S. securities laws if we are required to comply with the reporting requirements applicable to a U.S. domestic issuer may be significantly higher than the cost we would incur as a foreign private issuer. As a result, we expect that a loss of foreign private issuer status would increase our legal and financial compliance costs and would make some activities highly time consuming and costly. If we lose foreign private issuer status and are unable to comply with the reporting requirements applicable to a U.S. domestic issuer by the applicable deadlines, we would not be in compliance with applicable SEC rules or the rules of the Nasdaq, which could cause investors could lose confidence in our public reports and could have a material adverse effect on the trading price of our ADSs. We also expect that if we were required to comply with the rules and regulations applicable to U.S. domestic issuers, it would make it more difficult and expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain coverage. These rules and regulations could also make it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified members of our board of directors.

 

56


Table of Contents

Failure to comply with requirements to design, implement and maintain effective internal control over financial reporting could have a material adverse effect on our business. We have identified a material weakness in our internal control over financial reporting.

As a U.K. public company traded on AIM, we were not required to evaluate our internal control over financial reporting in a manner that meets the standards of publicly traded companies required by Section 404(a) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

As a public company in the United States, we must maintain effective internal control over financial reporting in order to report in an accurate and timely manner the results of our operations and financial condition. In addition, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act will require, among other things, that we assess the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting at the end of each fiscal year. The process of designing and implementing effective internal controls over financial reporting is a continuous effort that requires us to anticipate and react to changes in our business and the economic and regulatory environments and to expend significant resources to maintain a system of internal controls that is adequate to satisfy our reporting obligations as a public company. If we are unable to establish or maintain appropriate internal financial reporting controls and procedures, it could cause us to fail to meet our reporting obligations on a timely basis, result in material misstatements in our consolidated financial statements and harm our results of operations. In addition, we will be required, pursuant to Section 404(a), to furnish a report by management on, among other things, the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting in the second annual report following the completion of this offering. This assessment will need to include disclosure of any material weaknesses identified by our management in our internal control over financial reporting. The rules governing the standards that must be met for our management to assess our internal control over financial reporting are complex and require significant documentation, testing and possible remediation. Testing and maintaining internal controls may divert our management’s attention from other matters that are important to our business. In addition, it is currently anticipated that our independent registered public accounting firm will be required to issue an audit report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting in the fifth annual report following the completion of this offering or the fiscal year following the date upon which we are no longer an emerging growth company, whichever is the sooner.

In connection with the implementation of the necessary procedures and practices related to our internal control over financial reporting, we may identify deficiencies that we may not be able to remediate in time to meet the deadline imposed by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act for compliance with the requirements of Section 404(a). In addition, we may encounter problems or delays in completing the remediation of any deficiencies identified by our independent registered public accounting firm in connection with the issuance of their audit report.

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, we identified a material weakness in our internal control over financial reporting relating to access to program and data controls within one of our key financial systems that we rely upon for certain figures within our consolidated financial statements. This material weakness remained in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. This system is a collection of internally built applications operated by different teams across the business. Access rights within these applications are managed via “Security Groups,” with a designated access owner in each team responsible for managing the users within these Security Groups. There are a number of Security Groups in relation to areas that impact the consolidated financial statements, but there is currently no overall formally documented policy prescribing how often the list of users within the Security Groups should be reviewed. As a result, for a number of the Security Groups, access change reviews were not performed sufficiently and regularly, and there was also no documented evidence that access change controls have been performed to ensure the appropriate individuals have the relevant access to this system.

The data from this system principally impacts two consolidated financial statement line items, namely inventory and Internally Developed Technology (“IDT”). Because the review controls that could act as compensating controls are not performed to the appropriate level of rigor and documented regularity, this has been assessed as a material weakness owing to the risk that unauthorized or inappropriate changes to underlying

 

57


Table of Contents

data in that system could be made, which are then relied upon and could then affect the two consolidated financial statement line items set out above. To date, we have not identified that this control weakness has led to any errors in our consolidated financial statements, however, there can be no assurance that we will not identify any such errors in the future. We are implementing measures designed to improve and remediate the deficiencies that are causing this material weakness through formal documentation of user access review. We expect the documentation for these measures to be in place and functioning soon, and we continue to invest in our IT systems and infrastructure to introduce further enhancements to our internal controls over financial reporting as relevant modules go live. There can be no assurance that such measures will be effective to remediate the material weakness.

Internal review of our internal controls over financial reporting or the subsequent testing of these by our independent registered public accounting firm may reveal other deficiencies in our internal controls over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses that could result in a material misstatement of our consolidated financial statements or disclosures that may not be prevented or detected.

We may not be able to conclude on an ongoing basis that we have effective internal control over financial reporting in accordance with Section 404(a) or our independent registered public accounting firm may not issue an unqualified opinion. If either we are unable to conclude that we have effective internal control over financial reporting or our independent registered public accounting firm is unable to provide us with an unqualified opinion, investors could lose confidence in our reported financial information, which could have a material adverse effect on the trading price of our ADSs.

We will incur increased costs as a result of operating as a public company in the United States, and our management will be required to devote substantial time to new compliance initiatives and corporate governance practices.

As a U.S. public company, and particularly after we no longer qualify as an emerging growth company, we will incur significant legal, accounting and other expenses that we did not incur previously. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act, the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, the listing requirements of Nasdaq and other applicable securities rules and regulations impose various requirements on non-U.S. reporting public companies, including the establishment and maintenance of effective disclosure and financial controls and corporate governance practices. Our management and other personnel will need to devote a substantial amount of time to these compliance initiatives. Moreover, these rules and regulations will increase our legal and financial compliance costs and will make some activities more time consuming and costly. For example, we expect that these rules and regulations may increase the cost of our director and officer liability insurance.

However, these rules and regulations are often subject to varying interpretations, in many cases due to their lack of specificity, and, as a result, their application in practice may evolve over time as new guidance is provided by regulatory and governing bodies. This could result in continuing uncertainty regarding compliance matters and higher costs necessitated by ongoing revisions to disclosure and governance practices.

Pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, or Section 404, we will be required to furnish a report by our senior management on our internal control over financial reporting. However, while we remain an emerging growth company, we will not be required to include an attestation report on internal control over financial reporting issued by our independent registered public accounting firm. To prepare for eventual compliance with Section 404, once we no longer qualify as an emerging growth company, we will be engaged in a process to document and evaluate our internal control over financial reporting, which is both costly and challenging. In this regard, we will need to continue to dedicate internal resources, potentially engage outside consultants and adopt a detailed work plan to assess and document the adequacy of internal control over financial reporting, continue steps to improve control processes as appropriate, validate through testing that controls are functioning as documented and implement a continuous reporting and improvement process for internal control over financial reporting. Despite our efforts, there is a risk that we will not be able to conclude, within the

 

58


Table of Contents

prescribed timeframe or at all, that our internal control over financial reporting is effective as required by Section 404. If we identify one or more material weaknesses, it could result in an adverse reaction in the financial markets due to a loss of confidence in the reliability of our financial statements.

Future sales, or the possibility of future sales, of a substantial number of our ADSs could adversely affect the price of our ADSs.

Future sales of a substantial number of our ADSs, or the perception that such sales will occur, could cause a decline in the market price of our ADSs. Based upon the number of shares outstanding as of                 ,     2020, after giving effect to this offering, we will have              ordinary shares outstanding. ADSs sold in this offering may be resold in the public market immediately without restriction, unless purchased by our affiliates. Upon completion of this offering, we will have              ordinary shares outstanding, approximately              of which will be subject to 90-day, or in the case of Mr. Milner, 45-day, lock-up agreements entered into by our directors and officers and certain of our shareholders described in “Ordinary Shares and ADSs Eligible for Future Sale” and “Underwriters.” The representatives of the underwriters may, in their sole discretion, release all or any portion of the equity securities subject to the lock-up agreements prior to the expiration of the lock-up agreements. If, after the end of such lock-up agreements, these shareholders sell substantial amounts of ADSs in the public market, or the market perceives that such sales may occur, the market price of our ADSs and our ability to raise capital through an issue of equity securities in the future could be adversely affected.

If you purchase ADSs in this offering, you will suffer immediate dilution of your investment.

We expect the initial public offering price of our ADSs in this offering to be substantially higher than the net tangible book value per ADS prior to this offering. Therefore, if you purchase ADSs in this offering, you will pay a price per ADS that substantially exceeds our net tangible book value per ADS after this offering. To the extent outstanding options are exercised for ordinary shares, you may experience further dilution. Based on the assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, which reflects the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.        ), you will experience immediate dilution of $             per ADS, representing the difference between our net tangible book value per ADS and per ordinary share after giving effect to this and the assumed offering price. See “Dilution.”

If we issue shares in future financings, shareholders may experience dilution and, as a result, our ADS price may decline.

We may from time to time issue additional shares at a discount from the trading price of our shares. As a result, our shareholders would experience immediate dilution upon the issuance of any of our shares at such discount. In addition, as opportunities present themselves, we may enter into financing or similar arrangements in the future, including the issuance of debt or equity securities. If we issue shares or securities convertible into shares of our share capital, our shareholders would experience additional dilution and, as a result, our ADS price may decline.

Because we may not pay any cash dividends on our ADSs in the future, capital appreciation, if any, may be your sole source of gains and you may never receive a return on your investment.

Under current U.K. law, a company’s accumulated realized profits, so far as not previously utilized by distribution or capitalization, must exceed its accumulated realized losses so far as not previously written off in a reduction or reorganization of capital duly made (on a non-consolidated basis), before dividends can be paid. Therefore, we must have distributable profits before issuing a dividend. In the future, our board of directors may decide, in its discretion, whether dividends may be declared and paid. As a result, capital appreciation, if any, on our ADSs may be your sole source of gains, and you will suffer a loss on your investment if you are unable to sell your ADSs at or above the offering price. See “Dividend Policy.”

 

59


Table of Contents

Securities traded on AIM may carry a higher risk than securities traded on other exchanges, which may impact the value of your investment.

Our ordinary shares are currently traded on AIM. Investment in equities traded on AIM is sometimes perceived to carry a higher risk than an investment in equities quoted on exchanges with more stringent listing requirements, such as the main market of the London Stock Exchange, New York Stock Exchange or Nasdaq. This is because AIM imposes less stringent corporate governance and ongoing reporting requirements than those other exchanges. In addition, AIM requires only half-yearly, rather than quarterly, financial reporting. You should be aware that the value of our ordinary shares may be influenced by many factors, some of which may be specific to us and some of which may affect AIM-quoted companies generally, including the depth and liquidity of the market, our performance, a large or small volume of trading in our ordinary shares, legislative changes and general economic, political or regulatory conditions, and that the prices may be volatile and subject to extensive fluctuations. Therefore, the market price of our ordinary shares, our ADSs, or of the ordinary shares underlying our ADSs, may not reflect the underlying value of our company.

You may not be able to exercise your right to vote the ordinary shares underlying your ADSs.

ADS holders may only exercise voting rights with respect to the ordinary shares underlying their respective ADSs in accordance with the provisions of the deposit agreement, which provides that a holder may vote the ordinary shares underlying any ADSs for any particular matter to be voted on by our shareholders either by withdrawing the ordinary shares underlying the ADSs or, to the extent permitted by applicable law and as permitted by the depositary, by requesting a temporary registration as shareholder and authorizing the depositary to act as proxy. However, you may not know about the meeting far enough in advance to withdraw those ordinary shares, and after such a withdrawal you would no longer hold ADSs, but rather you would directly hold the underlying ordinary shares. You also may not know about the meeting far enough in advance to request a temporary registration.

The depositary will try, as far as practical, to vote the ordinary shares underlying the ADSs as instructed by the ADS holders. In such an instance, if we ask for your instructions, the depositary, upon timely notice from us, will notify you of the upcoming vote and arrange to deliver our voting materials to you. We cannot guarantee that you will receive the voting materials in time to ensure that you can instruct the depositary to vote your ordinary shares or to withdraw your ordinary shares so that you can vote them yourself. If the depositary does not receive timely voting instructions from you, it may give a discretionary proxy to a person designated by us to vote the ordinary shares underlying your ADSs; provided, however, that no such discretionary proxy shall be given with respect to any matter to be voted upon as to which we inform the depositary that (i) we do not wish such proxy to be given, (ii) substantial opposition exists, or (iii) the rights of holders of ordinary shares may be adversely affected. Voting instructions may be given only in respect of a number of ADSs representing an integral number of ordinary shares or other deposited securities. In addition, the depositary and its agents are not responsible for failing to carry out voting instructions or for the manner of carrying out voting instructions. This means that you may not be able to exercise any right to vote that you may have with respect to the underlying ordinary shares, and there may be nothing you can do if the ordinary shares underlying your ADSs are not voted as you requested. In addition, the depositary is only required to notify you of any particular vote if it receives notice from us in advance of the scheduled meeting.

You will not be directly holding our ordinary shares. Holders of the ADSs will not be able to exercise the preemptive subscription rights related to the ordinary shares that they represent and may suffer dilution of their equity holding in the event of future issuances of our ordinary shares.

English law generally provides shareholders with preemptive rights when new shares are issued for cash. Shareholders’ preemptive subscription rights, in the event of issuances of ordinary shares against cash payment, may be disapplied by a special resolution of the shareholders at a general meeting of our shareholders. On November 13, 2019, our shareholders approved the exclusion of preemptive rights, with such authority expiring

 

60


Table of Contents

at the conclusion of our next annual general meeting or, if earlier, the date 15 months after the date of approval. Such exclusion will need to be renewed upon expiration (i.e., on the conclusion of our next annual general meeting or, if earlier, the date 15 months after November 13, 2019) to remain effective, but may be sought more frequently for additional five-year terms (or any shorter period). The absence of preemptive rights for existing equity holders may cause dilution to such holders.

Furthermore, the ADS holders would not be entitled, even if such rights accrued to our shareholders in any given instance, to receive such preemptive subscription rights related to the ordinary shares that they represent. Rather, the depositary is required to endeavor to sell any such subscription rights that may accrue to the ordinary shares underlying the ADSs and to remit the net proceeds therefrom to the ADS holders pro rata. In addition, if the depositary is unable to sell rights, the depositary will allow the rights to lapse, in which case you will receive no value for these rights. Further, if we offer holders of our ordinary shares the option to receive dividends in either cash or ordinary shares, under the deposit agreement, ADS holders will not be permitted to elect to receive dividends in ordinary shares or cash, but will receive whichever option we provide as a default to shareholders who fail to make such an election.

Purchasers of ADSs in this offering may not receive distributions on our ordinary shares in the form of ADSs or any value for them if it is illegal or impractical to make them available to holders of ADSs.

The depositary for our ADSs has agreed to pay to purchasers of ADSs in this offering the cash dividends or other distributions it or the custodian receives on our ordinary shares or other deposited securities after deducting its fees and expenses. Purchasers of our ADSs will receive these distributions in proportion to the number of our ordinary shares their ADSs represent. However, in accordance with the limitations set forth in the deposit agreement, it may be unlawful or impractical to make a distribution available to holders of ADSs. We have no obligation to take any other action to permit the distribution of our ADSs, ordinary shares, rights or anything else to holders of our ADSs. This means that purchasers of ADSs in this offering may not receive the distributions we make on our ordinary shares or any value from them if it is unlawful or impractical to make them available to them. These restrictions may have a material adverse effect on the value of a purchaser’s ADSs.

Purchasers of ADSs in this offering may be subject to limitations on transfer of their ADSs.

ADSs are transferable on the books of the depositary. However, the depositary may close its transfer books at any time or from time to time when it deems expedient in connection with the performance of its duties. In addition, the depositary may refuse to deliver, transfer or register transfers of ADSs generally when our books or the books of the depositary are closed, or at any time if we or the depositary deems it advisable to do so because of any requirement of law or of any government or governmental body, or under any provision of the deposit agreement, or for any other reason in accordance with the terms of the deposit agreement.

ADS holders may not be entitled to a jury trial with respect to claims arising under the deposit agreement, which could result in less favorable outcomes to the plaintiff(s) in any such action.

The deposit agreement governing the ADSs representing our ordinary shares provides that, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, holders and beneficial owners of ADSs irrevocably waive the right to a jury trial of any claim that they may have against us or the depositary arising from or relating to our ordinary shares, our ADSs or the deposit agreement, including any claim under the U.S. federal securities laws. The waiver continues to apply to claims that arise during the period when a holder holds the ADSs, even if the ADS holder subsequently withdraws the underlying ordinary shares.

However, you will not be deemed, by agreeing to the terms of the deposit agreement, to have waived our or the depositary’s compliance with U.S. federal securities laws and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder. In fact, you cannot waive our or the depositary’s compliance with U.S. federal securities laws and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder. If we or the depositary opposed a demand for jury trial relying on

 

61


Table of Contents

above-mentioned jury trial waiver, it is up to the court to determine whether such waiver was enforceable considering the facts and circumstances of that case in accordance with the applicable state and federal law.

If this jury trial waiver provision is prohibited by applicable law, an action could nevertheless proceed under the terms of the deposit agreement with a jury trial. To our knowledge, the enforceability of a jury trial waiver under the federal securities laws has not been finally adjudicated by a federal court or by the United States Supreme Court. Nonetheless, we believe that a jury trial waiver provision is generally enforceable under the laws of the State of New York, which govern the deposit agreement, by a federal or state court in the City of New York. In determining whether to enforce a jury trial waiver provision, New York courts will consider whether the visibility of the jury trial waiver provision within the agreement is sufficiently prominent such that a party has knowingly waived any right to trial by jury. We believe that this is the case with respect to the deposit agreement and the ADSs. In addition, New York courts will not enforce a jury trial waiver provision in order to bar a viable setoff or counterclaim sounding in fraud or one which is based upon a creditor’s negligence in failing to liquidate collateral upon a guarantor’s demand, or in the case of an intentional tort claim, none of which we believe are applicable in the case of the deposit agreement or the ADSs. If you or any other holders or beneficial owners of ADSs bring a claim against us or the depositary relating to the matters arising under the deposit agreement or our ADSs, including claims under federal securities laws, you or such other holder or beneficial owner may not have the right to a jury trial regarding such claims, which may limit and discourage lawsuits against us or the depositary. If a lawsuit is brought against us or the depositary according to the deposit agreement, it may be heard only by a judge or justice of the applicable trial court, which would be conducted according to different civil procedures and may have different outcomes compared to that of a jury trial, including results that could be less favorable to the plaintiff(s) in any such action.

Moreover, as the jury trial waiver relates to claims arising out of or relating to the ADSs or the deposit agreement, we believe that, as a matter of construction of the clause, the waiver would likely continue to apply to ADS holders who withdraw the ordinary shares from the ADS facility with respect to claims arising before the cancellation of the ADSs and the withdrawal of the ordinary shares, and the waiver would most likely not apply to ADS holders who subsequently withdraw the ordinary shares represented by ADSs from the ADS facility with respect to claims arising after the withdrawal. However, to our knowledge, there has been no case law on the applicability of the jury trial waiver to ADS holders who withdraw the ordinary shares represented by the ADSs from the ADS facility.

ADS holders have limited choice of forum, which could limit your ability to obtain a favorable judicial forum for complaints against us, the depositary or our respective directors, officers or employees.

The deposit agreement governing our ADSs provides that, (i) the deposit agreement and the ADSs will be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of New York, and (ii) as an owner of ADSs, you irrevocably agree that any legal action arising out of the deposit agreement and the ADSs involving us or the depositary may only be instituted in a state or federal court in the city of New York. Any person or entity purchasing or otherwise acquiring any our ADSs, whether by transfer, sale, operation of law or otherwise, shall be deemed to have notice of and have irrevocably agreed and consented to these provisions. This choice of forum provision may increase your cost and limit your ability to bring a claim in a judicial forum that you find favorable for disputes with us, the depositary or our and the depositary’s respective directors, officers or employees, which may discourage such lawsuits against us, the depositary and our and the depositary’s respective directors, officers or employees. However, it is possible that a court could find such choice of forum provisions to be inapplicable or unenforceable. The enforceability of similar choice of forum provisions has been challenged in legal proceedings. It is possible that a court could find this type of provisions to be inapplicable or unenforceable.

To the extent that any such claims may be based upon federal law claims, Section 27 of the Exchange Act creates exclusive federal jurisdiction over all suits brought to enforce any duty or liability created by the Exchange Act or the rules and regulations thereunder. Furthermore, Section 22 of the Securities Act creates concurrent jurisdiction for federal and state courts over all suits brought to enforce any duty or liability created

 

62


Table of Contents

by the Securities Act or the rules and regulations thereunder. Accordingly, actions by our ADS holders to enforce any duty or liability created by the Exchange Act, the Securities Act or the respective rules and regulations thereunder must be brought in a federal court in the city of New York. Our ADS holders will not be deemed to have waived our compliance with the federal securities laws and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

The rights of our shareholders may differ from the rights typically offered to shareholders of a U.S. corporation.

We are incorporated under English law. The rights of holders of ordinary shares and, therefore, certain of the rights of holders of ADSs, are governed by English law, including the provisions of the U.K. Companies Act 2006 (the “Companies Act 2006”), and by our Articles of Association. These rights differ in certain respects from the rights of shareholders in typical U.S. corporations. See “Description of Share Capital and Articles of Association—Differences in Corporate Law” in this prospectus for a description of the principal differences between the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to us and, for example, the Delaware General Corporation Law relating to shareholders’ rights and protections.

Claims of U.S. civil liabilities may not be enforceable against us.

We are incorporated under English law. Substantially all of our assets are located outside the United States. The majority of our management and board of directors reside outside the United States. As a result, it may not be possible for investors to effect service of process within the United States upon such persons or to enforce judgments obtained in U.S. courts against them or us, including judgments predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the U.S. federal securities laws.

The United States and the United Kingdom do not currently have a treaty providing for recognition and enforcement of judgments (other than arbitration awards) in civil and commercial matters. Consequently, a final judgment for payment given by a court in the United States, whether or not predicated solely upon U.S. securities laws, would not automatically be recognized or enforceable in the United Kingdom. In addition, uncertainty exists as to whether U.K. courts would entertain original actions brought in the United Kingdom against us or our directors or senior management predicated upon the securities laws of the United States or any state in the United States. Any final and conclusive monetary judgment for a definite sum obtained against us in U.S. courts would be treated by the courts of the United Kingdom as a cause of action in itself and sued upon as a debt at common law so that no retrial of the issues would be necessary, provided that certain requirements are met. Whether these requirements are met in respect of a judgment based upon the civil liability provisions of the U.S. securities laws, including whether the award of monetary damages under such laws would constitute a penalty, is an issue for the court making such decision. If an English court gives judgment for the sum payable under a U.S. judgment, the English judgment will be enforceable by methods generally available for this purpose. These methods generally permit the English court discretion to prescribe the manner of enforcement.

As a result, U.S. investors may not be able to enforce against us or our executive officers, board of directors or certain experts named herein who are residents of the United Kingdom or countries other than the United States any judgments obtained in U.S. courts in civil and commercial matters, including judgments under the U.S. federal securities laws.

If we are classified as a passive foreign investment company for U.S. federal income tax purposes, U.S. Holders may incur adverse tax consequences.

Based on the nature and composition of our income, assets and operations and the income, assets and operations of our subsidiaries, we do not believe that we are currently a passive foreign investment company for U.S. federal income tax purposes (a “PFIC”), and we do not expect to be a PFIC in the foreseeable future. However, this is a factual determination that depends on, among other things, the nature and composition of our income and assets, and the market value of our shares and assets, including the nature and composition of income

 

63


Table of Contents

and assets and the market value of shares and assets of our subsidiaries, from time to time, and thus the determination can only be made annually after the close of each taxable year. Therefore, no assurance can be given that we will not be classified as a PFIC for the current taxable year or any future taxable year.

If we are considered a PFIC at any time that a U.S. Holder (as defined below under “Material Tax Considerations—Material United States Federal Income Tax Considerations”) holds the ordinary shares or ADSs, U.S. Holders may suffer material adverse tax consequences, including with respect to any “excess distribution” received from us and any gain from a sale or other taxable disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs. U.S. Holders should consult their tax advisors about the potential application of the PFIC rules to an investment in the ordinary shares or ADSs and the potential consequences related thereto. See “Material Tax Considerations—Material United States Federal Income Tax Considerations—Passive Foreign Investment Company Considerations.

If a United States person is treated as owning at least 10% of the ordinary shares or ADSs, such holder may be subject to adverse U.S. federal income tax consequences.

If a United States person (as defined in the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended) is treated as owning (directly, indirectly, or constructively) at least 10% of the value or voting power of the ordinary shares or ADSs, such person may be treated as a “United States shareholder” with respect to each “controlled foreign corporation” (a “CFC”) in our group (if any). Under current law, if our group includes one or more U.S. subsidiaries, certain of our non-U.S. subsidiaries could be treated as CFCs regardless of whether or not we are treated as a CFC (although there is currently a pending legislative proposal to significantly limit the application of these rules). A United States shareholder of a CFC may be required to report annually and include in its U.S. taxable income its pro rata share of “Subpart F income,” “global intangible low-taxed income” and investments in U.S. property by CFCs, regardless of whether the Company makes any distributions. An individual that is a United States shareholder with respect to a CFC generally would not be allowed certain tax deductions or foreign tax credits that would be allowed to a United States shareholder that is a U.S. corporation. Failure to comply with these reporting obligations may subject a United States shareholder to significant monetary penalties and may prevent the statute of limitations with respect to such United States shareholder’s U.S. federal income tax return for the year for which reporting was due from starting. We cannot provide any assurances that we will assist holders of the ordinary shares or ADSs in determining whether we or any of our non-U.S. subsidiaries are treated as a CFC or whether any holder of the ordinary shares or ADSs is treated as a United States shareholder with respect to any such CFC or furnish to any United States shareholders information that may be necessary to comply with the aforementioned reporting and tax paying obligations. The United States Internal Revenue Service has provided limited guidance on situations in which investors may rely on publicly available information to comply with their reporting and taxpaying obligations with respect to foreign-controlled CFCs. A U.S. Holder should consult its advisors regarding the potential application of these rules to an investment in the ordinary shares or ADSs.

 

64


Table of Contents

SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus contains forward-looking statements that are based on our management’s beliefs and assumptions and on information currently available to our management. Some of the statements under “Prospectus Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Use of Proceeds,” “Dividend Policy,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business” and elsewhere in this prospectus contain forward-looking statements. In some cases, you can identify forward-looking statements by the following words: “may,” “might,” “will,” “could,” “would,” “should,” “expect,” “plan,” “anticipate,” “intend,” “seek,” “believe,” “estimate,” “predict,” “potential,” “continue,” “contemplate,” “possible” or the negative of these terms or other comparable terminology, although not all forward-looking statements contain these words.

These statements involve risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause our actual results, levels of activity, performance or achievements to be materially different from the information expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. Although we believe that we have a reasonable basis for each forward-looking statement contained in this prospectus, we caution you that these statements are based on a combination of facts and factors currently known by us and our projections of the future, about which we cannot be certain. Forward-looking statements in this prospectus include, but are not limited to, statements about:

 

   

a regional or global health pandemic, including COVID-19, could severely affect our business, including due to impacts on our operations and supply chains;

 

   

challenges in implementing our strategies for revenue growth in light of competitive challenges;

 

   

developing new products and enhancing existing products, adapting to significant technological change and responding to the introduction of new products by competitors to remain competitive;

 

   

failing to successfully identify or integrate acquired businesses or assets into our operations or fully recognize the anticipated benefits of businesses or assets that we acquire;

 

   

if our customers discontinue or spend less on research, development, production or other scientific endeavors;

 

   

failing to successfully use, access and maintain information systems and implement new systems to handle our changing needs;

 

   

cyber security risks and any failure to maintain the confidentiality, integrity and availability of our computer hardware, software and internet applications and related tools and functions;

 

   

failing to successfully manage our current and potential future growth;

 

   

any significant interruptions in our operations;

 

   

if our products fail to satisfy applicable quality criteria, specifications and performance standards;

 

   

failing to maintain our brand and reputation;

 

   

any losses of a significant number of our customers or reduction in orders from a significant number of customers;

 

   

risks associated with our global operations;

 

   

failing to maintain and enhance our brand;

 

   

our dependence upon management and highly skilled employees and our ability to attract and retain these highly skilled employees; and

 

   

as a foreign private issuer, we are exempt from a number of rules under the U.S. securities laws and Nasdaq corporate governance rules and are permitted to file less information with the SEC than U.S. companies, which may limit the information available to holders of our ADSs.

 

65


Table of Contents

You should refer to the “Risk Factors” section of this prospectus for a discussion of other important factors that may cause our actual results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by our forward-looking statements. As a result of these factors, we cannot assure you that the forward-looking statements in this prospectus will prove to be accurate.

In addition, statements that “we believe” and similar statements reflect our beliefs and opinions on the relevant subject. These statements are based upon information available to us as of the date of this prospectus, and although we believe such information forms a reasonable basis for such statements, such information may be limited or incomplete, and our statements should not be read to indicate that we have conducted a thorough inquiry into, or review of, all potentially available relevant information. These statements are inherently uncertain, and investors are cautioned not to unduly rely upon these statements. Furthermore, if our forward-looking statements prove to be inaccurate, the inaccuracy may be material. In light of the significant uncertainties in these forward-looking statements, you should not regard these statements as a representation or warranty by us or any other person that we will achieve our objectives and plans in any specified time frame, or at all. We undertake no obligation to publicly update any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law.

 

66


Table of Contents

USE OF PROCEEDS

We estimate that the net proceeds to us from this offering will be approximately $             million              (or approximately $             million if the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs from us in full), after deducting the underwriting commission and estimated offering expenses payable by us, based on an assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.        ).

Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us from this offering by approximately $             million, assuming the number of ADSs offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. We may also increase or decrease the number of ADSs we are offering. Each increase (decrease) of 1,000,000 ADSs in the number of ADSs offered by us would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us from this offering by approximately $             million, assuming that the assumed initial public offering price remains the same, and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. We do not expect that a change in the initial public offering price or the number of ADSs by these amounts would have a material effect on our uses of the proceeds from this offering, although it may accelerate the time when we need to seek additional capital.

The principal purposes of this offering are to create a public market for our ADSs, facilitate greater access to the public equity markets, increase our visibility in the marketplace, as well as to obtain additional capital. We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering for working capital, general corporate purposes and to fund incremental growth, including for possible acquisitions. However, we do not currently have any definitive or preliminary plans with respect to the use of proceeds for such purposes.

The amount of what, and timing of when, we actually spend for these purposes may vary significantly and will depend on a number of factors, including our future revenue and cash generated by operations and the other factors described in “Risk Factors.” Accordingly, we will have broad discretion in deploying the net proceeds of this offering.

 

67


Table of Contents

DIVIDEND POLICY

In the future, our board of directors may decide, in its discretion, whether dividends may be proposed (in respect of final dividends) or declared and paid (in respect of interim dividends). Under English law, among other things, we may only pay dividends if we have sufficient distributable reserves (on a non-consolidated basis), which are our accumulated realized profits that have not been previously distributed or capitalized less our accumulated realized losses, so far as such losses have not been previously written off in a reduction or reorganization of capital.

In the years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020, we declared and paid dividends of an aggregate of £24.9 million and £25.0 million, respectively.

 

68


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our cash and cash equivalents and total capitalization as of June 30, 2020, as follows:

 

   

on an actual basis; and

 

   

on an as adjusted basis to reflect the issuance and sale of ADSs in this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $              per ADS, the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.        ), after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

You should read this information in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and the related notes appearing at the end of this prospectus and “Use of Proceeds,” “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and other financial information contained in this prospectus. For the convenience of the reader, we have translated pound sterling amounts in the table below as of June 30, 2020 into U.S. dollars at the noon buying rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York on June 30, 2020, which was £1.00 to $1.2369. These translations should not be considered representations that any such amounts have been, could have been or could be converted into U.S. dollars at that or any other exchange rate as of that or any other date.

 

     As of June 30, 2020  
     Actual     As Adjusted(1)  
     (in millions, except share and per share amounts)  

Cash and cash equivalents

   £ 187.3     $ 231.7     £      $    
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Borrowings(2)

   £ 106.4     $ 131.6     £      $  

Lease liabilities, including current portion(3)

     127.8       158.0       
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total debt, including current portion

   £ 234.2     $ 289.6     £      $  

Shareholders’ equity:

                                                                                             

Share capital

     0.4       0.5       

Share premium account

     138.2       170.9       

Merger reserve

     68.6       84.9       

Own shares

     (2.5     (3.1     

Translation reserve

     42.9       53.1       

Hedging reserve

     (0.7     (0.9     

Retained earnings

     255.7       316.3       
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total equity

     502.6       621.7       
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total capitalization

   £ 736.8     $ 911.3     £      $    
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1)

A $1.00 increase or decrease in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, which reflects the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.        ), would increase or decrease the as adjusted amount of each of cash and cash equivalents, share premium account, total equity and total capitalization by approximately $             million, assuming the number of ADSs offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions. An increase or decrease of 1,000,000 shares in the number of ADSs offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase or decrease the as adjusted amount of each of cash and cash equivalents, share premium account, total equity and total capitalization by approximately $             million, assuming no change in the assumed initial public offering price per ADS and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions.

(2)

Borrowings are comprised of drawings on our revolving credit facility all of which are classified as current.

(3)

Comprises lease liabilities following the adoption of IFRS 16.

 

69


Table of Contents

As adjusted equity amounts shown in the table above exclude the impact of:

 

   

             ordinary shares issuable upon the exercise of options outstanding under our equity incentive plans as of                 , 2020 at a weighted average exercise price of $              per share; and

 

   

             ordinary shares reserved for future issuance under our equity incentive plans as described in “Management—Equity Compensation Arrangements.”

 

70


Table of Contents

DILUTION

If you invest in our ADSs, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per ADS and the as adjusted net tangible book value per share immediately following the consummation of this offering.

At June 30, 2020, we had a historical net tangible book value of $155.4 million, corresponding to a net tangible book value of $             per share or $             per ADS based on an ordinary share to ADS ratio of             . Net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our total assets less our total liabilities, excluding goodwill and other intangible assets, divided by the total number of our ordinary shares outstanding.

After giving effect to the sale by us of              ADSs (representing an aggregate of              ordinary shares) in this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, which reflects the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.         ), after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our as adjusted net tangible book value at June 30, 2020 would have been approximately $             million, representing $             per share or $             per ADS. This represents an immediate increase in net tangible book value of $             per share or $             per ADS to existing shareholders and an immediate dilution in net tangible book value of $             per share or $             per ADS to new investors purchasing ADSs in this offering at the assumed initial public offering price. Dilution in net tangible book value per ADS to new investors is determined by subtracting as adjusted net tangible book value per ADS after this offering from the assumed initial public offering price per ADS paid by new investors.

The following table illustrates this dilution to new investors purchasing ADSs in the offering.

 

Assumed initial public offering price

      $    

Historical net tangible book value per ADS as of June 30, 2020

   $       

Increase in net tangible book value per ADS attributable to this offering

                                               
  

 

 

    

As adjusted net tangible book value per ADS after this offering

     
     

 

 

 

Dilution per ADS to new investors in this offering

      $    
     

 

 

 

If the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs from us in full, our as adjusted net tangible book value per ADS after this offering would be $             per ADS, representing an immediate increase in as adjusted net tangible book value per ADS of $             per ADS to existing shareholders and immediate dilution of $             per ADS in as adjusted net tangible book value per ADS to new investors purchasing ADSs in this offering, based on an assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, which reflects the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.         ).

Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $             per ADS, which reflects the U.S. dollar equivalent of the closing price of our ordinary shares on AIM of £             on                 , 2020 (based on an assumed exchange rate of £1.00 to $1.        ), respectively, would increase (decrease) the as adjusted net tangible book value after this offering by $             per ADS and the dilution per share to new investors in the offering by $             per ADS, assuming that the number of ADSs offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same.

 

71


Table of Contents

The following table summarizes, as of June 30, 2020, the total number of ordinary shares purchased from us, the total consideration paid to us and the average price per share paid by the existing shareholders and by new investors purchasing ADSs in this offering.

 

     ADSs Purchased     Ordinary Shares
Purchased
    Total Consideration     Average
Price Per
Share
     Average
Price Per
ADS
 
     Number      Percent     Number      Percent     Amount      Percent  

Existing shareholders

                                            $                 $        $    

New investors

                                                                                                                                       
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

      

Total

                           $                 $        $    
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

To the extent any of our outstanding options is exercised, there will be further dilution to new investors.

If the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs from us in full:

 

   

the percentage of ordinary shares held by existing shareholders will decrease to approximately         % of the total number of our ordinary shares outstanding after this offering; and

 

   

the number of shares held by new investors will increase to approximately         % of the total number of our ordinary shares outstanding after this offering.

 

72


Table of Contents

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

We prepare our consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. The selected historical consolidated financial data as of and for the years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements, which are included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our historical results for any prior period are not necessarily indicative of results expected in any future period.

The financial data set forth below should be read in conjunction with, and is qualified by reference to, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto included elsewhere in this prospectus.

We maintain our books and records in pounds sterling, and we prepare our financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. We report our financial results in pounds sterling. For the convenience of the reader, we have translated pound sterling amounts in the tables below as of June 30, 2020 and for the year ended June 30, 2020 into U.S. dollars at the noon buying rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York on June 30, 2020, which was £1.00 to $1.2369. These translations should not be considered representations that any such amounts have been, could have been or could be converted into U.S. dollars at that or any other exchange rate as of that or any other date.

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions, except per share data)  

Consolidated Income Statement:

      

Revenue

   £ 259.9     £ 260.0   $ 321.6

Cost of sales

     (76.7     (79.8     (98.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     183.2       180.2       222.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Selling, general and administrative expenses

      

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (88.9     (118.3     (146.3

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (23.2     (13.1     (16.2

Research and development expenses

      

Before amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (10.7     (17.4     (21.5

Amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (4.3     (20.9     (25.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     56.1       10.5       13.0

Finance income

     0.6       0.7       0.9

Finance costs

     (0.3     (2.8     (3.5
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before tax

     56.4       8.4       10.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Tax (charge) / credit

     (11.4     4.1       5.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year

   £ 45.0     £ 12.5     $ 15.5  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share

   £ 0.220     £ 0.060     $ 0.074  

Diluted earnings per share

   £  0.218     £ 0.60     $ 0.074  

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share

     204.9       207.6       207.6  

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

     206.7       209.6       209.6  

 

73


Table of Contents
     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020     2020  
     (in millions)  

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement:

      

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   £        70.2     £        63.0     $        77.9  

Net cash outflow from investing activities

     (49.9     (148.1     (183.2

Net cash (outflow) / inflow from financing activities

     (24.7     184.6       228.3

(Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

     (4.4     99.5       123.1  

 

     As of June 30,  
     2019     2020  
     (in millions)  

Consolidated Balance Sheet items:

      

Cash and cash equivalents

   £        87.1     £        187.3     $        231.7  

Total assets

     446.7       811.4       1,003.6  

Total liabilities

     (61.9     (308.8 )     (382.0

Share capital and share premium account

     27.4       138.6     171.4  

Retained earnings

     260.1       255.7     316.3  

Total equity attributable to the equity shareholders of the parent

     384.8       502.6     621.7  

 

74


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

You should read the following discussion together with “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The statements in this discussion regarding industry outlook, our expectations regarding our future performance, liquidity and capital resources and other non-historical statements in this discussion are forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements are subject to numerous risks and uncertainties, including, but not limited to, the risks and uncertainties described in “Risk Factors” and “Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements.” Our actual results may differ materially from those contained in or implied by any forward-looking statements.

Overview

We are a global life science company focused on identifying, developing and distributing high-quality reagents and tools for our customers at the forefront of life science research. Our products are used by researchers to study biological pathways, which is critical for scientific research, diagnostics and drug discovery. Our mission is to provide life science researchers with highly validated products and services to advance biological research and achieve their goals faster. We do this by continuously innovating and providing our customers with high-quality tools, together with expert customer support. Our product offering includes an extensive portfolio of antibodies and related protein research tools that are fundamental to our customers’ research and experimental workflow. Our customers are primarily scientists and researchers in academic institutions, research institutes and pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostics companies. Headquartered in Cambridge, United Kingdom, we operate across 15 locations around the world, supported by our world-class team of approximately 1,500 employees, including over 200 with PhDs, and have served customers in over 130 countries.

We offer a large and differentiated portfolio of approximately 100,000 products with over 300,000 SKUs as of June 30, 2020. Our flexible sourcing model enables us to grow our product offering in line with researchers’ needs. This is achieved by developing and manufacturing in-house products, as well as sourcing products from our OEM suppliers. We demand high product quality standards from our suppliers, and we enhance the utility of these products for our customers by providing additional data and product validation as well as by making them available through our global distribution platform and customer service. Over the last five years, we have increased focus on the development of in-house products for research areas we expect to have high demand. This focus has seen our proprietary product portfolio grow to represent 51% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, compared to 28% of our total revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2012.

We are continuously expanding our portfolio to provide our customers with additional solutions and further expand within our addressable markets. Utilizing the foundations laid by our innovation platform and strategic acquisitions, our strategy is to leverage our capabilities to continue expansion into adjacencies and more comprehensive product offerings, including primary conjugated antibodies, singleplex and multiplex immunoassays, proteins and edited cell lines. In addition, through partnerships with biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies, the potential application of our products is being extended into diagnostic and therapeutic markets.

Since 2001, we have sold our products and services to customers in over 130 countries through a variety of channels, including our ecommerce sites, a network of distributors and a targeted field sales team. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our worldwide customer base consisted of approximately 750,000 life science researchers. As of June 30, 2020, we had seven manufacturing facilities and a global distribution network that enables prompt delivery to our customers, with orders generally shipped within 24 to 48 hours of ordering.

We recorded revenue of £260.0 million, profit for the year of £12.5 million and Adjusted Operating Profit of £44.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. Revenue was broadly flat for the fiscal year ended

 

75


Table of Contents

June 30, 2020, as compared to the same period in the prior year. For the definition of Adjusted Operating Profit and reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit to profit for the year, please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures.”

We present our results of operations in the same way that we manage our business, evaluate our performance and allocate our resources. We have determined that we only have one reportable segment, which is the sale of antibodies and related products.

Factors Affecting Our Performance

Our financial condition and results of operations have been, and will continue to be, affected by a number of important factors, including the following:

Strategic Acquisitions

We have made, and intend to continue to make, strategic acquisitions in our existing and adjacent customer markets to supplement our organic growth, solidify our current market presence and expand into new markets. We acquired the proteomics and immunology businesses of Expedeon AG (the “Expedeon Acquisition”) in January 2020 for £104.2 million, and we also made other acquisitions for a total consideration of £14.3 million in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020, comprising:

 

   

March 2020: Marker Gene Technologies, Inc., a company specializing in assay kits;

 

   

January 2020: Certain business assets of Applied StemCell, Inc., a gene editing platform and oncology product portfolio;

 

   

July 2019: the entire live cell line and lysates portfolio of EdiGene; and

 

   

January 2019: Calico Biolabs, Inc., a custom antibody company.

Our strategic acquisitions may affect our business growth and the comparability of our financial results. With the exception of the Expedeon Acquisition, the effects that these acquisitions had on our overall revenue and profitability in the fiscal years that they were acquired were relatively small. The Expedeon Acquisition contributed £5.9 million to revenue and £0.3 million to profit before tax for the period from acquisition to June 30, 2020. If the Expedeon Acquisition had been completed at the beginning of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our revenue and profit before tax would have increased by £10.7 million and decreased by £0.3 million, respectively.

We intend to continue to selectively pursue strategic acquisitions to further strengthen our competitiveness. We will evaluate and execute opportunities that complement and scale our business, optimize our profitability, help us expand into adjacent markets and add new capabilities to our business.

Product Mix, Growth and Innovation

We offer a variety of products, and the products in our portfolio are sold at different prices and in different volumes. In any particular period, changes in the volume of particular products sold across our various markets and the prices of those products relative to other products will impact our cost of sales, our gross profit and our gross margin. We continue to increase our focus on our innovation platform to extend and improve our in-house proprietary product offering, which we believe will continue to expand our market share in research use markets and enable us to extend our product offering. Sales of in-house products generate a substantially higher gross margin than OEM product sales, and we also believe that in-house products will support continued market share expansion in research use markets while also enabling us to extend our product offering, through industry partners, to clinical applications. We expect to continue to devote significant resources to developing innovative new products, both as part of our existing portfolio and in complementary and adjacent markets. The acceptance and growth of such new products may vary. The volume of our products sold during a given period in any particular market will depend in part on our successfully introducing new products that generate additional demand as well as the extent to which new products may impact our sales of existing products.

 

76


Table of Contents

Seasonality

We experience modest seasonal customer demand, generally as a result of vacation and academic schedules of our worldwide customer base. We typically see minor slowdowns around the summer and winter holidays and a slight increase during the academic year. We believe that this is caused by factors unique to those particular product markets such as customer manufacturing schedules, inventory levels in the supply chain and government approval processes. As a result, we may see fluctuations across periods as the timing of our customers’ demand for certain products may change.

Currency Exchange Rates

We have substantial global operations whose financial condition and results of operations have been and will continue to be impacted by changes in the exchange rate of the pound sterling into other currencies. See “—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk—Currency Risk” below.

Impact of COVID-19 Pandemic

The COVID-19 pandemic has adversely affected, and is expected to continue to adversely affect, elements of our business (including elements of our operations, supply chains and distribution systems). We are continuing to monitor closely how the pandemic and related response measures are affecting our business. Our production and manufacturing facilities are located around the world, so while certain facilities were shut down or operating at reduced capacity, our other locations were able to continue operating as normal. The pandemic reduced demand during the second half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 as research laboratories globally were temporarily shut down or operating at reduced capacity, resulting in a decline in revenue in the second half of the fiscal year of approximately 10% compared with the second half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Our monthly revenue compared to the same period in the prior year decreased by 37.6% in April, 26.2% in May and 0.2% in June 2020. Although we have seen a reduction in demand due to the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, we have not observed any significant changes in our underlying customer base, and we have been and will continue to serve our customers even at a reduced level until their activities return to normal. In April 2020, we began to see the reopening of laboratories in certain countries in Europe, and we have continued to see a gradual increase in activity across all regions since then. The gradual recovery of revenue we have seen compared with previous levels reflects the underlying factors affecting demand, including the easing of lockdown restrictions and the partial or full reopening of academic and biopharmaceutical research laboratories around the world.

We have not furloughed any of our staff and have not elected to participate in any of the other COVID-19 related government assistance schemes that have been implemented globally. On March 17, 2020, we drew £25 million on our revolving credit facility to provide sufficient flexibility through the COVID-19 pandemic. We have not sought or obtained any other funding as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic.

While we see demand and revenue returning, there remains significant uncertainty and geographical variation with regards to our outlook, particularly in North America where the number of COVID-19 cases is rising in several states with large research lab demand. We expect that our fiscal year 2021 results will be impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic; however, it is not possible to predict the ultimate impact of the developments described above or the full duration and impact of the pandemic.

Operating Expenses

Our operating expenses increased from the fiscal year 2019 to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. Consistent with our previously announced growth strategy, we intend to continue to increase our rate of investment in growth projects and expect our operating expenses will continue to increase in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2021 and the medium term as a result. In particular, we expect such increases in operating expenses relative to prior periods as we (i) continue to increase our investment in research and development, digital marketing and e-commerce, (ii)

 

77


Table of Contents

continue to expand into adjacent markets and build scalability into our operational infrastructure, including through further investment in our IT systems, infrastructure and business processes, and (iii) continue to invest in our people and increase our headcount. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our operating profit margin was 4.0% and our adjusted operating profit margin was 17.1%, and we expect our operating profit margins to continue to be lower as a result of the effects of COVID-19 and our investment plans in the short to medium-term.

Key Indicators of Performance and Financial Condition

The key indicators of performance and financial condition we monitor are set forth below. The following table sets forth our key financial and operating performance indicators for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020.

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020  
     (in millions, except as otherwise
stated)
 

Total CER revenue growth(1)

           (1.4 )% 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   £ 70.2       £63.0  

Free Cash Flow(2)

   £ 34.3     £ 19.0  

Profit for the year

   £ 45.0     £ 12.5  

Adjusted Operating Profit(3)

   £ 83.6     £ 44.5  

Adjusted Operating Profit Margin(4)

     32.2     17.1

ROCE(5)

     20.8     6.8

Diluted earnings per share

   £ 0.218     £ 0.060  

Adjusted Diluted earnings per share(6)

   £ 0.326     £ 0.166  

 

(1)

Total Constant Exchange Rates (“CER”) revenue growth is our total revenue growth from one fiscal year to the next on a constant exchange rate basis. We measure CER revenue growth by applying the prior fiscal year’s actual exchange rates for each month to the current fiscal year’s equivalent monthly results. We use this measure to identify the relative year-on-year performance of the business by removing the impact of currency movements that are outside of management’s control. Please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for a reconciliation of Total CER revenue growth to the most directly comparable IFRS financial performance measure and why we consider it useful.

(2)

Free Cash Flow is defined as net cash inflow from operating activities less net capital expenditure, transfer of cash from/(to) escrow in respect of future capital expenditure and the principal and interest elements of lease obligations. Free Cash Flow provides an indication of the amount of cash available for discretionary investing or financing after removing capital related items. Free Cash Flow may not be comparable to other similarly titled metrics of others. Please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for a reconciliation of Free Cash Flow to the most directly comparable IFRS financial performance measure and why we consider it useful.

(3)

Adjusted Operating Profit is defined as profit for the year before taking account of finance income, finance costs, tax, exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles. Exceptional items consist of certain cash and non-cash items that we believe are not reflective of the normal course of our business. We identify and determine items to be exceptional based on their nature and incidence or by their significance. As a result, the composition of exceptional items may vary from year to year. Exceptional items currently consist of the impairment of intangible assets, systems and process improvement costs, acquisition costs, integration and reorganization costs and amortization of acquisition intangibles. Adjusted Operating Profit may not be comparable to other similarly titled metrics of others. Please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for a reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit to the most directly comparable IFRS financial performance measure and why we consider it useful.

 

78


Table of Contents
(4)

Adjusted Operating Profit Margin is defined as Adjusted Operating Profit calculated as a percentage of revenue. Adjusted Operating Profit Margin may not be comparable to other similarly titled metrics of others. Please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for a reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit Margin to the most directly comparable IFRS financial performance measure and why we consider it useful.

(5)

Return On Capital Employed (“ROCE”) is defined as Adjusted Operating Profit divided by capital employed, which is defined as total assets less current liabilities. We believe that ROCE is a key tool in measuring our financial efficiency and ability to create future growth in value. We aim to maintain ROCE at a level above our estimated cost of capital. ROCE may not be comparable to other similarly titled metrics of others. Please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for a reconciliation of ROCE to the most directly comparable IFRS financial performance measure and why we consider it useful.

(6)

Adjusted Diluted earnings per share is defined as Adjusted profit for the year divided by the weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share. Adjusted profit for the year used in this calculation is defined as profit for the year less system and process improvement costs, costs associated with our new headquarters including depreciation of assets not yet brought into use prior to occupation of the building, which were only applicable to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, acquisition costs, integration and reorganization costs, impairment of intangible assets, amortization of acquisition intangibles, the tax effect of these items, a tax credit arising from “patent box” claims and the net tax effect of new U.S. tax legislation. Adjusted Diluted earnings per share is calculated with an adjustment to the weighted average number of shares outstanding to assume conversion of all potentially dilutive ordinary shares. We use Adjusted Diluted earnings per share to measure underlying profitability and to reflect the other adjusted performance measures used. Adjusted Diluted earnings per share may not be comparable to other similarly titled metrics of others. Please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Measures” for a reconciliation of Adjusted Diluted earnings per share to the most directly comparable IFRS financial performance measure and why we consider it useful.

Components of Our Results of Operations

Revenue. Our revenue primarily consists of catalogue product sales. Revenue from sales of goods, including revenue generated from products sold from our catalogue and IVD, and which represents the significant majority of our revenue, is recognized upon the earlier of delivery to the customer or the point at which the customer takes control of the goods, if this is sooner. We also earn revenue from custom products and licensing, which we call our Custom Products and Licensing revenue. Custom product and service revenue, which can be the provision of a service or the development of products for customers, is recognized at the point at which a milestone, as defined in the contract, has been completed. Every milestone is typically aligned to a customer deliverable, for example, the amount of services provided, a deliverable arising from the services or the number of products successfully developed and provided to the customers, and accordingly is considered to be a performance obligation. Each milestone has a defined transaction price. If it is identified that the costs will be in excess of the contract revenue, the expected loss is recognized as an expense immediately. License fee income is recognized upon delivery of the licensed technology where our continued performance or future research and development services are not required. Royalty revenue is recognized on an accruals basis based on the contractual terms and the substance of the agreements with the counterparty, provided that the amount can be reliably measured and it is probable that the economic benefit will flow to us.

Cost of sales. Cost of sales primarily consists of:

 

   

product costs, which are the costs of inventory associated with a sale, including manufacture costs;

 

   

costs incurred in bringing goods into a position where they can be sold, for example: shipping costs that are necessarily incurred to bring the inventory to be ready for distribution to customers or distributors as well as those shipping costs incurred for onward distribution to customers; packaging

 

79


Table of Contents
 

costs incurred on sales; and expenses incurred in moving inventory from one of our locations to another one of our locations; and

 

   

other components, such as: inventory provisioning and write off expenses; free of charge replacements, which are provided to customers if any problems with the products they ordered were identified; service costs, which are incurred in the provision of custom products or services and are recognized in line with service revenue. Service costs vary depending on whether revenue is recognized at a point in time or over a period of time; if revenue is recognized over time, the costs are recognized as incurred, and when a performance obligation exists and any costs that were deferred have been fulfilled, then these are recognized in cost of sales; and royalty fees payable for products under license.

Gross profit and gross margin. Our gross profit and gross margin may fluctuate from period to period. Such fluctuations may be influenced by changes in product mix and changes in foreign currency exchange rates. Gross margin is impacted by the mix of our products growing at different rates or differing growth rates within different geographic territories, as well as future acquisitions and productivity improvements to our manufacturing sites as we introduce more automation.

Selling, general and administrative. Selling, general and administrative expenses primarily consist of salaries and related benefits, including share-based compensation for all functions other than research and development. Other general and administrative costs include marketing expenses, facility-related costs and professional services fees for auditing, tax and general legal services, as well as expenses associated with the requirements of being a listed public company on AIM. We expect that our general and administrative costs will increase in the future as our business expands and we increase our headcount to support the expected growth in our operating activities. These increases will likely include increased costs related to the hiring of additional personnel and fees to outside consultants, lawyers and accountants, among other expenses. Additionally, we anticipate increased costs associated with being a U.S. public company, including expenses related to services associated with maintaining compliance with stock exchange rules and SEC requirements, director compensation, insurance and investor relations costs.

Research and development expenses. Research activities, which are the early stages of product development, are expensed as incurred up until products reach commercial feasibility, after which point such development costs are capitalized and amortized over the anticipated commercial life of the asset. Such research and development expenses, which are expected to increase in the future, consist of salary-related benefits, including share-based compensation for research and development staff, costs of related facilities, materials and equipment, costs associated with obtaining and maintaining patents and other intellectual property, depreciation of research and development specific assets and amortization of capitalized research, and development projects, and include an offset in respect of research and development tax credits as described further below. Development activities generally relate to creating new products, creating variations of existing products, modifying existing products to meet new applications or developing new technology platforms from which to derive new products, but these costs are only capitalized once commercial feasibility is attained whereby this category of capitalized cost is described as Internally Developed Technology (“IDT”).

As a company that carries out extensive research and development activities, we benefit in the U.K. from the HMRC research and development expenditure credit (“RDEC”) incentive. Based on criteria established by HMRC, a portion of expenditures incurred in relation to our research and development and manufacturing development activities are eligible for the RDEC incentive. Qualifying expenditures largely consist of employment costs for research staff, consumables and certain internal overhead costs incurred as part of research projects for which we do not receive income. The U.K. research and development tax credit of 13% on qualifying costs is received in cash from HMRC and is not dependent on current or future taxable income. Such credits, once obtained, are accounted as reductions in research and development expense in the period in which the expenditures are claimed.

 

80


Table of Contents

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles. Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles is comprised of certain cash and non-cash items that we believe are not reflective of the normal course of our business and where the separate disclosure of such items enables a reader to isolate and evaluate the impact of such items on results and allows for a fuller understanding of underlying performance of the business. We identify and determine items to be exceptional based on their nature and incidence or by their significance. As a result, the composition of exceptional items may vary from year to year. Current components consist of impairment of intangible assets, systems and process improvement costs associated with our strategic ERP implementation which commenced in 2016, acquisition costs and integration and reorganization costs. Amortization of acquisition intangibles relates to the amortization of intangible assets brought onto the balance sheet at a fair value in accordance with IFRS 3 and arising specifically from acquisition activity.

Finance income. Finance income is comprised of interest received or receivable on cash deposits.

Finance costs. Finance costs consist mainly of the amortization of upfront fees incurred in setting up our revolving credit facility and other related facility fees, such as those for non-utilization. Finance costs additionally include interest expense on our revolving credit facility that was drawn down during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 and is treated as short term debt. We have no other borrowings upon which interest could be incurred. Finance costs also include interest expense representing the unwinding of discounted lease liabilities in respect of assets now presented on our balance sheet in accordance with IFRS 16, which became effective for us on July 1, 2019.

Tax. Our tax credit or expense consists of income taxes, with U.K. income being taxed at the U.K. rate of tax and taxation for other jurisdictions calculated at the rates prevailing in each respective jurisdiction. Tax also includes the unwinding of temporary differences caused mainly by the manner in which intangible assets related to acquisitions are recognized, and therefore amortized, in our consolidated financial statements compared to the individual entity financial statements, which is the basis upon which taxation is calculated.

We also benefit from the U.K. “patent box” regime that allows profits attributable to revenue from patents registered in the United Kingdom or European Union or patented products to be taxed at effective rate of 10%, rather than the usual U.K. statutory rate of 19%.

Segment Reporting

We present our results of operations in the same way that we manage our business, evaluate our performance and allocate our resources. We have concluded that we have only one core business activity, and there are no separately identifiable business segments that provide individual products or services or a group of related products and services that would be subject to separate risks and returns. The financial information reported to our Chief Executive Officer, who is considered our chief operating decision maker, for the purposes of resource allocation and assessment of performance is based wholly on our overall activities. Therefore, we have determined that we only have one reportable segment, which is the sale of antibodies and related products.

 

81


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

Fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020

The following tables set forth our results of operations in pounds sterling and as a percentage of revenue for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2019 and 2020:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019      2020  
     (in millions)  

Revenue

   £ 259.9      £ 260.0

Cost of sales

     (76.7      (79.8
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gross profit

             183.2                180.2  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Selling, general and administrative expenses:

     

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (88.9      (118.3

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (23.2      (13.1

Research and development expenses

     

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (10.7      (17.4

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (4.3      (20.9
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Operating profit

     56.1        10.5  

Finance income

     0.6        0.7  

Finance costs

     (0.3      (2.8
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Profit before tax

     56.4        8.4  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax (charge) / credit

     (11.4      4.1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Profit for the year

   £ 45.0      £ 12.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

82


Table of Contents
     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019     2020  
     (as a % of revenue)  

Revenue

                       100.0                       100.0

Cost of sales

     (29.5     (30.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     70.5       69.3  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Selling, general and administrative expenses:

    

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (34.2     (45.6

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (8.9     (5.0

Research and development expenses

    

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (4.1     (6.7

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (1.7     (8.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     21.6       4.0  

Finance income

     0.2       0.3  

Finance costs

     (0.1     (1.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before tax

     21.7       3.2  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Tax (charge) / credit

     (4.4     1.6  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year

     17.3     4.8
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Revenue

Revenue increased by £0.1 million to £260.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £259.9 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. After delivering growth of 10.8% in the first half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, revenue in the second half declined by 9.9%, impacted by the onset and spread of COVID-19, where we saw a reduction in demand as research laboratories globally temporarily shut down or reduced activity. We continued to serve the needs of laboratories that remained open, but due to the demand reduction, monthly reported revenue compared with the equivalent month in the prior fiscal year decreased by 7.2% in March, 37.6% in April, 26.2% in May and 0.2% in June, resulting in the overall second half decline of 9.9% compared to the prior year. The impact on revenue seen in the second half reflects the underlying factors affecting demand, including the easing of lockdown restrictions and the partial or full reopening of academic and biopharmaceutical research laboratories around the world. In addition, the pound sterling was weaker against the basket of foreign currencies in which we trade, which positively impacted our reported revenue.

Including Custom Products and Licensing revenue, discussed in more detail below, total revenue from in-house products and services increased by 6.3% to £131.3 million, compared to £123.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, representing 50.5% of our total revenue, with an equivalent reduction in OEM products of 5.6% to £128.7 million, compared to £136.4 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019.

Our main source of revenue, catalogue product sales, increased by £0.3 million to £243.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £242.8 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 and comprised 93.5% of our total revenue. From a product perspective, our key growth drivers were recombinant antibodies, sales of which grew 7.0% to £63.2 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, and immunoassays, sales of which grew 23.7% to £22.9 million in the same period. Together, these categories contributed 35.4% of catalogue revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 compared with 32.0% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Within catalogue revenue, in-house products delivered a strong relative performance, increasing by 7.5% to £114.4 million or 47.1% of total catalogue revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, as

 

83


Table of Contents

compared to 43.8% in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Regionally, in respect of catalogue revenue, all of our markets were adversely impacted by COVID-19 in the second half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, with the Americas and China seeing the greatest impact, resulting in declines of 4.4% and 1.8% over the full year, respectively. EMEA, Japan and the Rest of Asia Pacific fared better, and overall, these regions delivered reported growth of 3.0%, 11.9% and 8.1% for the full year with these three regions collectively comprising 44.1% of our catalogue revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

Our revenue from Custom Products and Licensing, which accounted for 6.5% of our total revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, and which comprises custom antibody development services, IVD sales and royalty and license income, decreased by £0.2 million to £16.9 million during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 compared with £17.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Custom products and services revenue increased by 16.7% to £6.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, compared with £5.4 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Our royalties and licensing revenue increased 22.9% to £5.9 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 compared with £4.8 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, part of which was a result of the Expedeon Acquisition. IVD sales declined to £4.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, compared with £6.9 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. IVD sales were lower than expected due to the certain purchasing delays of IVD products experienced in the first half of the year and that continued into the second half.

Our revenue is broken down into the following geographical components:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019      2020  
     (in millions)  

The Americas

   £                 117.5      £                 112.4  

EMEA

     67.1        69.3  

China

     39.9        39.5  

Japan

     16.9        18.8  

Rest of Asia Pacific

     18.5        20.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total revenue

   £ 259.9      £ 260.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue by type can be further broken down as follows:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended June 30,  
     2019      2020  
     (in millions)  

Catalogue revenue

   £                 242.8      £                 243.1  

Custom products and services

     5.4        6.3  

IVD

     6.9        4.7  

Royalties and licenses

     4.8        5.9  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Custom Products and Licensing revenue sub-total

   £ 17.1      £ 16.9  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total revenue

   £ 259.9      £ 260.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Catalogue revenue can be further broken down as follows:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended  
     2019      2020  
     (in millions)  

In-house products

   £ 106.4      £ 114.4  

OEM products

                     136.4                        128.7  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Catalogue revenue sub-total

   £ 242.8      £ 243.1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

84


Table of Contents

Cost of sales

Cost of sales increased by £3.1 million, or 4.0%, to £79.8 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £76.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, which was primarily driven by an increase of £2.2 million in costs of custom services provided, but also was influenced by the inclusion of the Expedeon Acquisition since January 2020 and £0.6 million in shipping costs, which was mainly a result of the increase in shipping costs that were not passed on to customers.

Gross profit and gross margin

Gross profit decreased by £3.0 million, or 1.6%, to £180.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £183.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, and gross margin decreased by 120 basis points to 69.3% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from 70.5% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. The decrease was primarily a result of weaker revenue and margins within Custom Product and Licensing, where Custom Products and Services typically generate lower margins, as well as an increase in direct costs, such as packaging and shipping costs arising in part from lower shipping charges passed on to customers. Other impacts included foreign currency headwinds and geographic mix.

Selling, general and administrative expenses before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

Selling, general and administrative expenses before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles increased by £29.4 million, or 33.1%, to £118.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £88.9 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This increase was primarily driven by an increase of £13.7 million in salaries and related costs to £76.7 million, predominantly due to increased headcount as well as increased untaken vacation accrual arising from the impact of COVID-19. The figure also includes an increase in non-cash share-based compensation costs of £1.1 million. Other factors were an increase of £4.0 million in general administrative costs, with a key component being a full year’s software license costs relating to the ERP system, which went live in April 2019; an increase of £11.6 million in depreciation and amortization charges to £17.4 million, which consisted of £6.7 million in respect of the implementation of IFRS 16, £1.3 million in respect of the annualization of depreciation on assets brought into use in our new headquarters and £2.3 million owing to the increase in software amortization costs, reflecting a full years’ contribution from the ERP system modules mentioned above; and a £1.3 million year-on-year foreign exchange related increase owing to the relative weakness of the pound sterling.

Research and development expenses before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

Research and development expenses before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles, net of a tax credit of £1.5 million, increased by £6.7 million, or 62.6%, to £17.4 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £10.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, net of a tax credit of £1.9 million. This increase was primarily due to a £4.3 million increase in salary and related costs, net of an offset for amounts allocated to intangible fixed assets and inventories, with the increase being partly to acquisition related activity during the year, in particular the Expedeon Acquisition, which was purchased in January 2020 and also £1.7 million of increased non-cash share-based compensation. The increase was also due to a £0.9 million increase in depreciation and amortization charges.

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles increased by £6.5 million, or 23.6%, to £34.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £27.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, split into a decrease of £10.1 million in selling, general and administrative expenses, which was more than offset by an increase of £16.6 million in research and development expenses. These expenses consisted of impairment

 

85


Table of Contents

of intangible assets of £14.9 million in respect of AxioMx in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology, where, although technical feasibility had been proved, the scalability has since been determined to not be realistically viable at the current time, as compared to impairment of software assets of £12.8 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 in respect of the full impairment of certain modules of the ERP implementation; systems and process improvement costs of £4.3 million, compared with £4.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, which related to the work performed on the Oracle Cloud ERP project related to upgrading our IT systems and that do not qualify to be capitalized; acquisition costs of £4.1 million related to the Expedeon Acquisition; integration and reorganization costs of £2.1 million, which related partly to the integration of the Expedeon businesses and reorganization costs in respect of the alignment of our operational structure and geographical footprint to our strategic goals. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, reorganization costs were £3.7 million and related to our new headquarters and consisted of costs such as dual rent incurred prior to moving in and depreciation of assets not yet brought into use prior to occupation of the building; and amortization of acquisition intangibles of £8.6 million, compared with £6.5 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, where the increase was mainly due to new acquired intangible assets arising from the Expedeon Acquisition, of which £2.6 million related to selling, general and administration expenses; and the balance of £6.0 million related to research and development expenses and where a significant portion related predominantly to intangible assets acquired with Epitomics Inc. in 2012.

Finance income

Finance income was £0.7 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 and £0.6 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, which consisted of interest receivable on cash deposits during the fiscal year. The benefit of higher overall cash balances during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 was offset by lower interest rates received on these balances.

Finance costs

Finance costs increased by £2.5 million to £2.8 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £0.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This increase was primarily due to lease liability costs of £1.5 million, representing the unwinding of discounted lease liabilities, following the implementation of IFRS 16 as at July 1, 2019 and increased borrowing costs arising as a result of interest payable on drawings on our revolving credit facility, which were not present in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. Other costs that increased in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 were in respect of the amortization of upfront fees incurred in setting up our revolving credit facility and other related facility fees, such as those for non-utilization. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, these costs were only incurred for five months since inception of the facility, whereas for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, these costs covered a full financial year.

Tax expense

Tax expense decreased by £15.5 million, to a credit of £4.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from an expense of £11.4 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This decrease was partially due to a reduction in profit before tax to £8.4 million from £56.4 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 and also from a credit of £6.0 million in respect of the initial recognition of benefit from a lower rate of tax applied to profits on patented income under HMRC’s “patent box” regime following successful registration of patents during the year where the credit consists of an element in respect of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 but also historical years going back to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2016. Exceptional items and the amortization of acquisition intangibles had a beneficial effect of £11.8 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, resulting in an effective tax rate on adjusted profits of 18.0%, compared to 19.7% in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019.

In March 2020, the U.K. government announced that the U.K. corporate tax rate would remain at 19% until April 2022 rather than reduce to 17% as had previously been outlined. As a result, we now anticipate that our effective tax will remain around 18% in the medium term, subject to further changes to the corporate tax rate as a result of the remedial actions taken by the U.K. government to address the deficit caused by COVID-19, as well as equivalent changes that may occur in other in jurisdictions in which we operate.

 

86


Table of Contents

Operating Profit and Adjusted Operating Profit

Operating profit decreased by £45.6 million, or 81.3%, to £10.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £56.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This decrease was primarily driven by a decrease in revenue in the second half of the year as a consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic but where there was no corresponding decrease in a number of our costs and where, in many cases, increases were incurred in line with what had previously been expected to be increases in revenue. We saw increases in the larger components of costs where significant increases were included within selling general and administrative expenses and consisted mainly of salaries and related expenses, premises costs, software costs and depreciation and amortization. These increased costs were partially offset by £12.8 million, representing the absence of an impairment charge incurred in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 in respect of the ERP system and which was treated as an exceptional item. Additional costs in respect of the Expedeon Acquisition and also integration and reorganization costs, both of which are classified as exceptional items, were also incurred. Additionally, we saw increases within research and development, which primarily consisted of salaries and related expenses and the impairment of the acquisition intangible asset of £14.9 million in respect of the AxioMx in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology, which is classified as an exceptional item.

Adjusted Operating Profit was £44.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, representing an Adjusted Operating Profit Margin of 17.1%, compared to Adjusted Operating Profit of £83.6 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, representing an Adjusted Operating Profit Margin of 32.2%, after planned strategic investments made during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This decrease in Adjusted Operating Profit was primarily driven by the factors affecting operating profit, with the exception of exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangible assets, which are excluded from Adjusted Operating Profit and consist of an increase of £2.1 million of impairment charges of intangible assets, which in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 consisted of £14.9 million in respect of an acquisition intangible asset and in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 consisted of £12.8 million in respect of software under construction; a decrease of £0.2 million related to system and process improvement costs of £4.3 million related to the ERP implementation that do not qualify for capitalization, which was consistent from the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019; an increase of £2.5 million across integration and reorganization costs and acquisition costs, with integration and reorganization costs down £1.6 million, to £2.1 million, where in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, costs consisted of £3.7 million in respect of our new headquarters and acquisition costs of £4.1 million, which were £nil in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019; and an increase of £2.1 million in respect of the amortization of acquisition intangibles primarily due to the new Expedeon Acquisition assets acquired during the year.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Since our inception, we have financed our operations primarily through cash generated by our operating activities. Our primary requirements for liquidity and capital are to finance working capital, capital expenditures and general corporate purposes. We believe that our sources of liquidity and capital will be sufficient to meet our existing business needs for at least the next 12 months.

Our primary sources of liquidity are our cash and cash equivalents and our revolving credit facility. As of June 30, 2019 and 2020, we had cash and cash equivalents of £87.1 million and £187.3 million, respectively. In April 2020, we issued new ordinary shares in the aggregate amount of £110.0 million. Our cash and cash equivalents consist of cash in bank accounts and on deposit.

In February 2019, we entered into a revolving credit facility (“RCF”) with HSBC, NatWest, Santander and Royal Bank of Canada for £200 million, with an additional £100 million accordion option, providing us with additional financial flexibility for future acquisitions. We may at any time up to six months of the termination date of the RCF, give prior notice of the wish to exercise this accordion option with a minimum value of £10 million and a maximum of £100 million. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, drawings on the RCF comprised an initial amount of €120.0 million (£103.4 million) to fund the Expedeon Acquisition. In February 2020, a partial repayment was made and the remaining borrowings redenominated into pounds sterling, leaving an outstanding balance of

 

87


Table of Contents

£82.0 million. In March 2020, a subsequent drawing of £25.0 million was made in order to provide us with operational flexibility in light of the COVID-19 pandemic. As of June 30, 2020, we had borrowings on this facility of £107.0 million, which is reflected as £106.4 million on our balance sheet as it is stated net of the unamortized amount of upfront fees incurred on set up of the RCF. The undrawn balance of the facility was £93.0 million as of June 30, 2020. The initial term of this RCF is three years with two extension options of one year each. The interest rate is the aggregate of: (i) a margin, which varies from 0.75% to 1.45%, that is dependent on a debt cover ratio, which for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, was at the minimum level of 0.75%; and (ii) London Inter-bank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) or, in relation to any borrowing in Euro, Euro Inter-bank Offered Rate (“EURIBOR”) or in relation to any non-LIBOR currency, the benchmark rate for that currency. The benchmark rate is the applicable screen rate as of the specified time for the currency of the borrowing. Borrowings under this facility are unsecured but are guaranteed by certain of our material subsidiary companies.

Our capital expenditures consist primarily of property plant and equipment and intangible assets. Our capital expenditures during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 were £12.7 million for property plant and equipment, a £5.0 million decrease compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, which included net cash outflows of £5.1 million in respect of our new headquarters, which consisted of £9.6 million of cash outflow net of amounts held in escrow of £4.5 million from the previous fiscal year, but where the significant items were £7.0 million in respect of laboratory equipment, some of which related to new premises entered into during the year and £4.0 million of cell lines, the majority being related to the live cell line and lysates portfolio of EdiGene; and £23.0 million for intangible assets, which included £11.6 million in respect of our ERP implementation project and £9.0 million with respect to IDT.

We assess our liquidity, in part, through an analysis of our working capital together with our other sources of liquidity. As of June 30, 2020, our working capital balance, which is comprised of inventories, trade and other receivables and trade and other payables, was £43.1 million, an increase of £4.0 million from £37.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019.

The following table presents the summary consolidated cash flow information for the periods presented.

 

     Fiscal Year Ended
June 30,
 
     2019      2020  
     (in millions)  

Net cash inflow from operating activities

   £ 70.2      £ 63.0  

Net cash outflow from investing activities

     (49.9      (148.1

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

     (24.7      184.6  

(Decrease) / increase in cash and cash equivalents

     (4.4      99.5  

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Net cash inflow from operating activities decreased by £7.2 million, or 10.3%, to £63.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £70.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This decrease resulted primarily from a decrease in operating profit for the period of £45.6 million, which predominantly consisted of the cash revenue generated from the sale of goods and services offset by cost of sales, selling, general and administrative costs and research and development expenditure, all of which are described in more detail above, which was partially offset by an increase in impairment of intangible assets of £2.1 million, where a £14.9 million impairment was incurred in respect of AxioMx in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology, as described above, compared with a £12.8 million impairment incurred in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019 that related to certain modules in construction of the ERP system; a depreciation charge of £14.0 million, including of laboratory equipment of £3.4 million, office fixtures, fittings and other equipment of £2.6 million and £6.7 million in respect of right of use assets, which are those assets that have come on to our balance sheet for the first time in fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 following the implementation of IFRS 16 on July 1, 2019; an amortization charge of £15.9 million, comprised of acquired intangibles of £8.6 million,

 

88


Table of Contents

internally developed technology of £3.1 million and software of £4.2 million, where the increase was mainly due to £3.3 million of amortization of the finance and non-stock procurement ERP modules that went live in April 2019 but which resulted in only two months of charge in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019; a share-based payment charge of £9.3 million, with the largest component being £5.7 million in respect of AbShare, our innovative employee share plan, which was launched in September 2018 (see “Management—Equity Compensation Arrangements—AbShare”); and working capital movements of £4.0 million that were comprised of an increase in inventories of £1.1 million, driven mainly by an increase of £1.0 million of finished goods as inventory was expanded in anticipation of future revenue growth, a decrease in receivables of £2.7 million consisting mainly of £2.1 million of trade receivables, which were driven by the addition of receivables from acquired businesses, primarily related to the Expedeon Acquisition offset by a slowing in collections leading up to the end of the fiscal year arising from COVID-19, and an increase in payables of £2.4 million made up mainly of accrued expenditures, which reflects the further investment in growing our business.

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Net cash outflow from investing activities increased by £98.2 million, or 196.8%, to £148.1 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 from £49.9 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, which primarily resulted from an outflow of £104.2 million in respect of the Expedeon Acquisition; £12.7 million outflow on purchase of property, plant and equipment, with the main cost being £7.0 million in respect of laboratory equipment, some of which related to new premises that were entered into during the year and £4.0 million of cell lines, the majority being in respect of the live cell line and lysates portfolio of EdiGene, which was purchased in July 2019, and £23.0 million outflow for intangible assets, which included £11.6 million in respect of our ERP implementation project and £9.0 million with respect to IDT.

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

Net cash inflow from financing activities of £184.6 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 contrasted with an outflow of £24.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. This increase primarily resulted from inflows arising from drawings of £107.0 million on our RCF and £110.0 million received upon the issuance and sale of 10 million new ordinary shares to an investor. These significant inflows were partially offset by outflows of £25.0 million in dividends, which remained broadly consistent with the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, £6.8 million of amounts classified as lease principal payments and £1.7 million of interest payments including £0.9 million of amounts classified as lease interest payments following the implementation of IFRS 16 that were classified as operating lease payments within cash flows from operating activities in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019; and £2.2 million of investments that consisted mainly of the acquisition of a 13% stake in Brickbio, Inc.

Contractual Obligations and Commitments

Contractual commitments

Our significant contractual obligations as of June 30, 2020, which are included as liabilities on our balance sheet, are summarized in the following table:

 

     Payments Due by Period Ending June 30,  
     Within
1 year
     Between
1 to 5 years
     After
more than
5 years
     Total  
     (in millions)  

Lease payments

         9.4            31.9            101.9            143.2  

Finance charges

     (2.1      (5.0      (8.3      (15.4
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Present value of lease liability(1)

   £ 7.3      £ 26.9      £ 93.6      £ 127.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1)

Comprised mainly of operating lease obligations for properties with rental renewal terms ranging between 1 and 19 years. See Note 15 of our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

89


Table of Contents
  Following the adoption of IFRS 16 “Leases” effective from July 1, 2019, the above commitments are reflected as liabilities on our balance sheet, whereas for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, the equivalent amounts were disclosed only as commitments.

Other commitments

Our significant contractual obligations as of June 30, 2020 consisted of capital commitments of £5.9 million mainly in respect of our ERP system. There were no equivalent capital commitments for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019.

There are no other commitments, capital or otherwise, as of June 30, 2020.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

We have no off-balance sheet arrangements.

Recently Adopted Accounting Pronouncements

A description of recently issued accounting pronouncements that may potentially impact our financial position, result of operations or cash flows is disclosed in Note 2 to our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.

Application of Significant Accounting Policies and Estimates

We prepare our consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. In preparing our audited consolidated financial statements, we make assumptions, judgments and estimates that can have a significant impact on amounts reported in our consolidated financial statements. We base our assumptions, judgments and estimates on historical experience and various other factors that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results could differ materially from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions. See “Risk Factors” for a discussion of the possible risks that may affect these estimates. We regularly reevaluate our assumptions, judgments and estimates. Our critical accounting estimates and judgments are described in Note 4 to our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. No critical accounting judgments were identified for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, but one critical accounting judgment was identified in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, which was in relation to the impairment of our ERP system. Despite this, other judgments exist that are considered to be key and in addition, two areas of estimation uncertainty have also been identified (although for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, only one was identified in respect of slow moving or defective inventory). All of these areas of judgment and estimation uncertainty are listed as follows:

Impairment of our ERP System

We have been capitalizing costs associated with our new ERP system since 2016. After an extensive review of business requirements and the current functionality of Oracle Cloud software as well as other best-in-class software providers, a decision was taken to make some changes to the approach and software used to address these areas. The opportunity was also taken to extend the scope of the program to integrate improvements in these functional areas with front-end system enhancements to improve customers’ end-to-end experience through logistics and ultimately into manufacturing.

Taking this into account, a review was undertaken of historical expenditure incurred to date and as part of the impairment review of assets under construction, two impairment indicators were identified: the first being modules that are no longer being utilized or which would require considerable re-work; and the second is the extended timeframe for certain modules resulting in potentially obsolete programming by the time the module goes live. Following the review and assessment of the impairment indicators identified, two modules were impaired in full.

 

90


Table of Contents

Identifying which modules may be impacted was judgmental and technically complex compounded by identifying and in particular, allocating the costs specifically related to each individual module in question. In this respect, we undertook an exercise to allocate historically incurred costs to each module. This exercise involved certain estimations and judgments to determine these allocations by apportioning those costs where there were allocations that were certain (for example, historical time records in respect of labor costs) to those where there was either less specific or no allocation to an individual module.

Capitalization of Intangible Assets

We capitalize internal software development costs, in particular internal staff costs, relating to the enhancement of our core IT systems architecture and developments. Judgment is required in applying the capitalization criteria of IAS 38, differentiating between enhancements and maintenance. Those costs which are not treated as capital but are directly attributable to our system and process improvement project are treated as adjusting items.

In establishing the principles on which costs are capitalized, consideration is given to the nature of work being performed, whether the costs and the activities are incremental and whether the associated deliverables meet the characteristics of an asset. Processes are in place to evaluate this and the same processes are used to confirm whether the expensed costs are related to the system and process improvement project so that classification as an adjusting item is appropriate.

We capitalize internal costs associated with IDT as intangible assets as described further in Notes 3, 4 and 13 to our audited consolidated financial statements. This requires judgment to determine that the characteristics of such assets meet the relevant criteria of IAS 38 for classification as an intangible asset.

IDT Capitalized

Internal costs are capitalized as IDT within intangible assets which are used to generate antibodies and kits. The point at which such internal costs are capitalized as well as their magnitude (whereby the amount capitalized comprises an element of overhead allocation) is a key area of judgment. A key area in respect of the stage of development of IDT is subject to judgment as to when a product’s future economic value justifies capitalization. Our management regularly reviews these factors in order to determine that the costs meet the criteria for capitalization as intangible assets.

Valuation of acquisition intangibles

During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, we completed a number of acquisitions. Accounting for these in line with IFRS 3 (Business Combinations) requires the use of a number of assumptions and estimates in relation to the future cash flows associated with acquisition intangibles and the use of valuation techniques in order to arrive at the fair value of the intangible assets acquired. The assumptions applied were based on the best information available to management, and valuation techniques were supported by third party valuation experts.

Nevertheless, the actual performance of these assets may differ from the valuations derived through this exercise.

In 2020, an assessment of the acquisition intangible in respect of in vitro monoclonal antibody production technology acquired with AxioMx, Inc. in 2015 was undertaken. This also included further smaller amounts in respect of this technology that have been capitalized since the acquisition as certain commercial feasibility milestones had been achieved.

An appraisal of the ability to utilize this technology at scale has been undertaken, and although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realize material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. As a result of this conclusion, the intangible asset in respect of this technology has been fully impaired.

 

91


Table of Contents

Provision for Slow-Moving or Defective Inventory

The provision for slow-moving inventory is based on our directors’ estimation of the future sales of each of our products over the period from the balance sheet date to the expiry date of the product. Estimated future sales are based on historical actual sales and a growth rate assumption, which is derived from the average annual growth over the product life to date.

If actual unit sales growth rates differ from those estimated by management, both the level of provision against existing inventory and the rates of provision applied to inventory in future periods would need to be revised.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk

We are exposed to a variety of risks in the ordinary course of our business, including, but not limited to, currency risk, liquidity risk and credit risk, as discussed below. We regularly assess each of these risks to minimize any adverse effects on our business as a result of those factors. See Note 26 to our audited consolidated financial statements for further discussion of our exposure to these risks.

Currency risk

We have transactions denominated in various currencies, with the principal currency exposure being fluctuations in U.S. Dollars (“USD”), Euros, Japanese Yen and Chinese Renminbi (“RMB”). Collectively, these currencies make up approximately 90% of our revenue and cash inflows. While a large portion of our manufacturing and research and development costs are USD and RMB, giving a natural offset against the currency inflows, the majority of administration costs remain as pound sterling, leaving an overall net currency inflow in our cash flows.

This remaining currency exposure is centrally managed with the objective being to secure a level of certainty of pound sterling value for up to 90% of our future net exposure based on forecast cash flows expected to occur up to 18 months ahead. We use forward currency contracts to achieve this objective and apply hedge accounting where applicable. Foreign currency forward contracts are valued using quoted forward exchange rates and yield curves matching maturities of the contracts.

A decrease of 10% in the USD/pound sterling exchange rate would have decreased our other comprehensive income by £0.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. A decrease of 10% in the Euro/pound sterling exchange rate would have decreased our other comprehensive income by £1.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. If the pound sterling fluctuates significantly against the USD or Euro, it may have a negative impact on our results of operations.

Liquidity risk

We generate funds from operational activities in excess of our operational requirements and have substantial cash balances available for our current investment activities. The Board reviews our funding requirement as part of the budgeting and long-term planning processes and considers as necessary alternative possible sources of funding where the requirement is not satisfied by our forecast operational cash generation.

We manage liquidity risk by maintaining an adequate level of easily accessible cash reserves, in a currency profile representative of our cost base and matching customer and supplier terms where possible. We also have access to daily currency trading facilities, which provides the ability to convert currency within the agreed settlement limits as required.

Credit risk

We are exposed to credit risk on our financial assets; however, there is not deemed to be a significant exposure due to the nature of our customer base and the types of transaction that are undertaken.

 

92


Table of Contents

Trade receivables consist of a large number of customers spread globally with the majority being in economically strong geographies. Our customer base is predominantly government-funded institutions, pharmaceutical companies conducting research and local distributors. The perceived risk of default is deemed to be low.

Further information on our trade receivable ageing and impairment can be found in Note 17 to our audited consolidated financial statements.

We generate significant levels of operational cash. Cash in excess of local operational requirements is remitted and managed centrally. Exposure to counterparty default risk is managed by limiting the concentration of funds and contracts held with individual financial institutions and ensuring funds are only placed with institutions or in products rated BBB- or above by Standard & Poor’s.

Internal Control over Financial Reporting

For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019, we identified a material weakness in our internal control over financial reporting relating to access to program and data controls within one of our key financial systems that we rely upon for certain figures within our consolidated financial statements. While this material weakness remained in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, we are implementing measures designed to improve and remediate the deficiencies that are causing this material weakness through formal documentation of user access review. We expect the documentation for these measures to be in place and functioning soon, and we continue to invest in our IT systems and infrastructure to introduce further enhancements to our internal controls over financial reporting as relevant modules of our ERP program go live. However, there can be no assurance that such measures will be effective to remediate the material weakness. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our ADSs and this Offering—Failure to comply with requirements to design, implement and maintain effective internal control over financial reporting could have a material adverse effect on our business. We have identified a material weakness in our internal control over financial reporting.”

JOBS Act Election

We are an emerging growth company, as defined in the JOBS Act. We intend to rely on certain of the exemptions and reduced reporting requirements provided by the JOBS Act. As an emerging growth company, we are not required to, among other things, (i) provide an auditor’s attestation report on our system of internal controls over financial reporting pursuant to Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and (ii) comply with any requirement that may be adopted by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board regarding mandatory audit firm rotation or a supplement to the auditor’s report providing additional information about the audit and the financial statements (auditor discussion and analysis).

 

93


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

We are a global life science company focused on identifying, developing and distributing high-quality reagents and tools for our customers at the forefront of life science research. Our products are used by researchers to study biological pathways, which is critical for scientific research, diagnostics and drug discovery. Our mission is to provide life science researchers with highly validated products and services to advance biological research and achieve their goals faster. We do this by continuously innovating and providing our customers with high-quality tools, together with expert customer support. Our product offering includes an extensive portfolio of antibodies and related protein research tools that are fundamental to our customers’ research and experimental workflow. Our customers are primarily scientists and researchers in academic institutions, research institutes and pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostics companies. Headquartered in Cambridge, United Kingdom, we operate across 15 locations around the world, supported by our world-class team of approximately 1,500 employees, including over 200 PhDs, and have served customers in over 130 countries.

Our addressable market can be broadly classified into two categories, based on the application of our products and type of customer they serve:

 

   

Research use only proteomic tools. We believe the global market for RUO antibodies and reagents is valued at approximately $3 billion as of 2019 and, as of 2019, was expected to grow at around 4% per annum (excluding any impact from COVID). These products include protein binding reagents, such as primary and secondary antibodies and singleplex and multiplex immunoassays, and related reagents, such as kits, proteins, peptides, lysates, cell lines and biochemicals. Our research products are used to detect, quantify, visualize and modify proteins in scientific research experiments, which we believe serve as mission critical tools, to enable our customers to develop insights about targets and pathways of interest. Our customers include academic labs for scientific research and clinical labs in pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies working in the drug discovery and diagnostic markets. Our catalogue revenue, the substantial majority of which is purchased for RUO, accounted for 93.5% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

 

   

Antibody development for clinical application. Antibodies are a critical component in many IVD assays and can also be used as therapeutic agents for the treatment of diseases, including cancers and immune-related diseases. In recent years, through the custom development of new antibodies and the out-licensing of our existing antibodies to biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies, we have extended the commercial potential of our products into these markets. The substantial majority of our Custom Products and Licensing revenue, which includes custom development services, IVD sales and royalty and license income, is generated from these activities, and accounted for 6.5% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

Life science researchers are increasingly seeking higher quality tools and reagents, which deliver consistent, reproducible results, save time, uncover deeper biological insights and advance their research. We believe customers place their trust in Abcam because of our reputation for providing reliable, highly validated products with market leading specificity and high sensitivity, comprehensive and transparent product data, fast delivery and exceptional customer support. According to CiteAb, our products were cited in approximately half of all life science publications in 2019, and we were the most cited company in approximately 40% of the top 2,000 most studied protein targets as of June 30, 2020.

We aim to sustain and extend our position as a market leader within the life science tools market by utilizing our breadth of product data, knowledge and data analytics to derive consumer insights, which are used to direct our product development pipeline to areas which we believe would be of the highest demand for our customers. We do this by offering a diverse product portfolio while leveraging our differentiated innovation platforms and screening approaches to develop new, high-quality products, enabling experiments that are conclusive, consistent and repeatable. We also provide extensive product performance data, from both internal product validation tests

 

94


Table of Contents

and external customer reviews, to empower our customers to select the right product, together with swift customer service and exceptional customer support globally.

We have developed an industry leading innovation platform that is informed by data analytics, research area specialists and the relationships we have built with our customers, all of which enable us to anticipate and align our innovation efforts with our customers’ research priorities. Today, approximately two-thirds of our primary antibody innovation pipeline is driven by our proprietary algorithms that interrogate a wide variety of internal and external data sources, including research literature and our web data, to predict product and market demand, which inform our development efforts. We leverage this data to anticipate which tools researchers will need in the future in order to help advance their research, as well as to identify breakthrough opportunities in areas where there is a lack of high-quality products or where we identify custom opportunities in collaboration with our customers. We believe this capability and, in particular, our unique ability to leverage our extensive proprietary data, provides us with strategic advantage and helps us sustain and extend our position as a market leader within the life science tools market.

We offer a large and differentiated portfolio of approximately 100,000 products with over 300,000 SKUs as of June 30, 2020. Our flexible sourcing model enables us to grow our product offering in line with researchers’ needs. This is achieved by developing and manufacturing in-house products, as well as sourcing products from our OEM suppliers. We demand high product quality standards from our suppliers, and we enhance the utility of these products for our customers by providing additional data and product validation as well as by making them available through our global distribution platform and customer service. Over the last five years, we have increased focus on the development of in-house products for research areas we expect to have high demand. Notably, over the same period, we have increased our portfolio of proprietary recombinant monoclonal antibodies and assays, which are recognized for their leading specificity, high sensitivity and consistency, from approximately 3,200 as of June 30, 2013 to over 19,000 as of June 30, 2020. Alongside these highly validated protein binders, we offer additional related tools and reagents that customers require to study biological pathways and disease. This focus has seen our proprietary product portfolio grow to represent 51% of our total revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, compared to 28% of our total revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2012. Figure 4 below demonstrates the growth of our in-house products since 2010.

 

LOGO

Figure 4

1) Based on Company data

We are continuously expanding our portfolio to provide our customers with additional solutions and further expand within our addressable markets. Utilizing the foundations laid by our innovation platform and strategic acquisitions, our strategy is to leverage our capabilities to continue expansion into adjacencies and more comprehensive product offerings, including primary conjugated antibodies, singleplex and multiplex

 

95


Table of Contents

immunoassays, proteins and edited cell lines. In addition, through partnerships with biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies, the potential application of our products is being extended into diagnostic and therapeutic markets.

We make our extensive product characterization and validation data available to our customers across our portfolio. This data is sourced by our in-house laboratories, our network of collaborators and independent consumer product reviews. Researchers use this to be able to select the right product for their highly specific needs. Stringent quality control and validation processes are carried out by our global laboratories to check the activity, stability and performance of our products. Whether it is antibodies, kits, proteins or other products, the validation process is continuous, and the data obtained is made available on our product datasheets and in our protocols. We are continuing to invest in product validation in order to raise quality standards and differentiate ourselves in the marketplace. For example, our award winning knockout CRISPR gene editing program is one of the most accepted and trusted validation processes for antibody specificity, and we have been recognized for carrying out the largest number of knockout validations for antibodies in the industry, according to CiteAb, who presented us with the award in 2020. In addition, we have more than doubled the number of applications in which we validate our antibodies from four in 2012 to ten in 2020. Our investment in product validation helps us meet our customers’ increasing demand for higher quality research tools.

Having established one of the first digital platforms in our industry over 20 years ago, our website, search engine optimization and data remain a strategic advantage. As a part of our core strategy, we now aim to build on our position by establishing a highly personalized, cross-platform digital relationship with our customers, wherein we are able to uniquely understand and anticipate their needs. Coupled with greater personalization of the user experience and the creation of a more dynamic and agile content management system, our goal is to provide customers with a seamless and intuitive experience that is integrated and embedded into their workflows. Through this, we hope to provide customers with more relevant products and services to help them achieve their research goals, improve online conversion rates, capture a greater share of business from existing customers and generate business from new customers.

Since 2001, we have sold our products and services to customers in over 130 countries through a variety of channels, including our ecommerce sites, a network of distributors and a targeted field sales team. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our worldwide customer base consisted of approximately 750,000 life science researchers. As of June 30, 2020, we had seven manufacturing facilities and a global distribution network that enables prompt delivery to our customers, with orders generally shipped within 24 to 48 hours of ordering. Our multilingual scientific support team, which is mostly comprised of individuals with PhDs, together with our customer support team are available to help customers around the world with technical and order-related queries.

We recorded revenue of £260.0 million, profit for the year of £12.5 million and Adjusted Operating Profit of £44.5 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. Revenue was broadly flat for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, as compared to the same period in the prior year. For the definition of Adjusted Operating Profit and reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit to profit for the year, please see “Prospectus Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data—Non-IFRS Financial Metrics.”

Our Growth Strategies

We are focused on building upon our success to accelerate our growth over the next five years, underpinned by three key goals: sustaining and extending our antibody and digital leadership; driving continued expansion into complementary market adjacencies; and implementing operational improvements to scale our business and drive sustainable, long-term value creation. We are actively investing in our business to reduce constraints to growth by expanding in-house innovation capabilities, developing a future digital experience that is more intuitive for our customers and reducing friction across all touch points, scaling up operational and IT capacity, strengthening our global teams and pursuing selective acquisitions.

 

96


Table of Contents

We aim to support those at the forefront of biological research, and we will continue to capitalize on our platform and competitive strengths as we pursue multiple growth strategies:

Extend Leadership in RUO Antibodies

We aim to increase the use of our RUO antibodies and grow their sales over time. We are committed to help advance our customers’ research and, in turn, support our market share gains. We seek to do this through the continual addition of product data, knowledge and information that demonstrates performance and increased utility in a broader range of experiments and applications. This information includes validation data, product citation data in research publications and detailed customer reviews, which are valuable to researchers when assessing product choice, resulting in greater purchase confidence. Over time, increased product use results in more customer feedback, data and citations, which further increase a product’s value to customers and expand its use. This process can continue for several years and, as the citation data awareness and use increases, products can become recognized as the “gold standard.”

This strategy is further enhanced through our focus on in-house proprietary products, including one of the world’s largest portfolios of recombinant rabbit monoclonal antibodies. We continuously innovate to ensure that our portfolio of antibodies is aligned with the targets, research areas and biological pathways in highest demand from our customers, including immuno-oncology, neuroscience, epigenetics and infectious diseases, such as COVID-19. We employ a differentiated range of in-house antibody discovery techniques and screening approaches that have been attained through strategic acquisitions and in-house development. Our in-house products are also typically tested and validated in a broader range of applications and species than our OEM products, further increasing their utility and demand from a broader range of existing and new customers.

Remove Innovation Constraints and Launch New Lines

We are developing our innovation capabilities to meet our customers’ needs in adjacent product areas. This enables us to further grow within our addressable markets and at the same time, provides us with in-house tools to develop high-quality validated antibodies thereby expanding our product portfolio. Specifically, we are focusing our efforts to expand our portfolio in:

 

   

Antibody-Derived Products for High Value, High Growth Markets. We intend to extend the range of products derived from our catalogue of in-house primary antibodies, including primary antibody conjugates, antibody pairs, our SimpleStep singleplex assays and our in-house Fireplex multiplex products.

 

   

Complementary Product Areas that Simultaneously Enable Faster Antibody Innovation. We see several new or adjacent product areas in which we can support our customers within the proteomics research tools space. Through product innovation as well as strategic acquisitions, we aim to support our customers’ needs while also providing the in-house tools needed to increase our internal rate of antibody development. These product areas include launching a portfolio of highly validated bioactive proteins, as well as a portfolio of disease relevant edited cell lines and associated cell lysates.

 

   

Third-Party Instrumentation Platforms and Multiplex Partners. With advances in life science research and experimental approaches, new instrument platforms and new biomarkers are constantly being developed. Our focus is to partner with third parties developing either novel platforms or upgrading their existing platforms to address novel biomarkers and help them develop the right content to offer their users (antibodies and other protein reagents). For example, we entered into a commercial partnership with NanoString in 2019, whereby we leverage our collection of recombinant monoclonal antibodies to create bespoke antibody-based content for NanoString’s GeoMx DSP platform. This enables GeoMx DSP users to explore cellular interactions and facilitate discovery of novel biology.

 

97


Table of Contents

Be a Leading Discovery Partner for Biopharmaceutical Organizations

Our in-house proprietary product portfolio allows us to have greater flexibility in customizing products to our customers’ specification and needs. In addition, we maintain control over manufacturing and intellectual property of products developed through our in-house platform, providing our customers with long term access to consistent and high-quality tools. We believe this has helped and will continue to help us to expand our offering to bring innovative solutions to our global strategic customers in the diagnostic and biopharmaceutical markets. Customers in these markets are seeking product development partners with unique antibody and assay development capability, such as ours, to help create products that are ready for clinical development, such as IHC analyte specific reagents, classified clones and FDA-approved antibodies. Our partners can incorporate these antibodies and assays into their clinical and commercial offerings. We commonly refer to the use of our products by third-party instrumentation platforms and multiplex partners or by partners for the potential use in clinical products as “Abcam Inside.” We have a history of supporting these customers through a combination of custom services, partnerships and collaborations, and we see an opportunity to expand our presence in this area. In addition, we are increasing the complexity, precision and value of our offerings by adding more practitioners with expertise in workflows critical to biopharmaceutical and other industries across our commercial organization.

Be a Leading Digital Company

Our digital platform and online presence remains an important differentiator in our markets. Our goal is to significantly enhance our digital channel by establishing a highly personalized digital relationship with our customers, which will be device agnostic, cloud based and driven by artificial intelligence. We believe this will help us to uniquely understand and anticipate researchers’ needs and to provide them with the right set of tools to advance their research. Through faster response to customers and greater personalization of the user experience, we aim to provide our customers with more relevant content to support their work and therefore, capture greater market share from existing customers and generate business from new customers. In addition, through the creation of a more dynamic and agile content management system, we plan to develop enhanced digital tools and marketing programs designed to increase the utility and stickiness of our platform, improve order conversion rates and share better insights with our customers regarding their needs and purchasing behaviors.

Remove Scalability Constraints and Sustain Value

Our objective is to strengthen our teams, systems and infrastructure to ensure we have the appropriate capabilities to scale our business while driving operational efficiency. We are focused on increasing our manufacturing capacity, increasing automation at process bottlenecks and optimizing our global network and procurement functions to eliminate waste and improve efficiencies and productivity. We are also transforming our systems and processes by implementing Oracle Cloud ERP and other software solutions to replace legacy IT systems.

 

98


Table of Contents

We also seek to expand our operations in multiple high growth regions or where we currently rely upon distributors. This involves expanding our local infrastructure in these markets, as well as going direct to market. In particular, we believe that the Chinese market presents a strong opportunity for growth over the medium and long term. Demand for our products and solutions in China is driven by a significant increase in the level of funding and investment to support scientific research. We have invested and will continue to invest in China by providing highly localized product support, operations and technology to better serve customers in this high growth market, and Figure 5 below shows the increase in our number of citations since 2013, which we believe reflects the success of our investments in the Chinese market.

 

LOGO

Figure 5, Source: CiteAb, 2019

While we believe the market opportunity in China is the most significant for our business, we are also focused on further increasing our presence in other markets that we believe to have attractive growth prospects over the medium and long term. Additionally, in certain markets where we currently rely on distributors and see growth potential, we intend to explore direct distribution opportunities to enhance our offering and expand our customer base.

Selectively Pursue Acquisitions

We have a strong track record of successfully identifying, completing and integrating strategic acquisitions and investments. Our strong brand, broad platform, global infrastructure and diversified customer base has allowed us to generate growth and operating leverage through acquisitions. Our deep understanding of our customers’ objectives provides us with the insight to make highly informed decisions on the acquisitions we should pursue. We have developed internal capabilities to source, evaluate and integrate acquisitions. We intend to continue to pursue opportunistic acquisitions in our existing and adjacent customer segments to accelerate our growth, expand geographic coverage and augment our capabilities and workflow solutions.

Our Competitive Strengths

Our customer-centric business model, combined with our product innovation capabilities and deep understanding of our customers’ needs, allows us to differentiate ourselves in the marketplace and is at the core of our competitive advantage. We believe the following competitive strengths provide the foundation for our position as a partner of choice for mission critical products and services to our customers.

Brand Leadership in Research Use Antibodies

We have established ourselves as a leading brand in research use antibodies, driven by high-quality, reliable products combined with extensive and transparent product data and excellent customer service. Our citations have shown consistent growth year over year since 2010, as demonstrated by Figure 6 below, which we believe demonstrates our influence in the research community. This is because we were the most cited company in approximately 40% of the top 2,000 most studied protein targets, according to CiteAb as of June 30, 2020. Furthermore, at least one Abcam product was cited in approximately half of all life science publications in 2019,

 

99


Table of Contents

according to CiteAb. We believe these citation statistics reflect our influence within the research community and also serve as an inherent recurring marketing tool to help sustain our leadership position.

 

LOGO

Figure 6, Source: CiteAb, 2019

Customer-Centric, Data Driven Model

Leading Digital Presence

As one of the first companies to provide a digital platform for antibodies and reagents, we believe our first mover advantage combined with the provision of extensive and transparent product validation data and search engine optimization has led to leading global traffic on our website over time. In the last three fiscal years ended June 30, 2020, the total number of sessions on our website has grown by more than 30%, with over one million user interactions on our website per month for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. A “session” on our website includes page views, ecommerce transactions or other interactions, and we monitor “sessions” to measure the volume of traffic to our website, which is strongly correlated to sales. In June 2020, we maintained the leading web search position for 10,000 of the top primary antibody search terms, appearing on the first page and at the top of users’ search results in approximately one-third of searches, compared to less than 20% for our next closest competitor, according to our internal data. We believe that the significance of “appearing first” in search results means that we are likely to experience greater traffic to our website, which may lead to greater brand recognition and increased sales. Our web search position is influenced by a combination of organic web searches by users and some paid advertisements, which drive traffic into our website.

Data Driven

Our web traffic data, combined with our ability to collect, analyze and interpret customer data, provides us unique insight into the needs of our customers. This in turn enables us to customize our engagement with customers and deliver more relevant, targeted marketing media, with the goal of improving the customer experience.

Differentiated Product Innovation Platform

We employ a differentiated product innovation model that is informed by data analytics, research area specialists and a deep understanding of our customers’ workflows, which enables us to anticipate and align our innovation efforts with our customers’ priorities. Today, approximately two-thirds of our primary antibody innovation pipeline is largely driven by data algorithms that are able to analyze market demand and interrogate research literature to help us anticipate which tools researchers will need in the future. The balance is focused on breakthrough innovation opportunities in areas where there are either few or no tools that currently exist for scientific research, or where we discover new opportunities in discussion with our customers, collaborators or commercial partners. Our innovation efforts span the following areas:

 

   

Proprietary Product Innovations. We utilize a range of technologies to develop antibodies, immunoassays and other proteomic research tools that meet stringent performance specifications. In

 

100


Table of Contents
 

recent years, we have added thousands of new products to our portfolio each year, and we expect to continue to do so through our in-house development efforts both for publication online to our catalogue, including the generation of entirely new products and the delivery of improvements and modifications to existing products. We also create new products for partners through our custom solutions teams.

 

   

Third-Party Product Innovations. We are an important channel for hundreds of antibody and related reagent suppliers. We benefit from significant brand recognition and traffic to our website and are widely used among a broad collection of emerging and established suppliers. This allows us to accelerate the market acceptance and growth of promising, high-quality third-party products to complement our own product offerings.

Product Quality and Customer Service Drives Customer Loyalty

The success of our customers’ work, from basic research to translational science, diagnostics and therapeutic clinical programs, requires rigorous product quality, performance and reliability. Accordingly, our customers rely on us to provide high-performance products that produce reliable and reproducible results. We continue to drive our quality standards through a variety of internal initiatives, including:

 

   

Extensive product quality assurance programs, which include our award-winning knockout CRISPR gene editing program, which as of June 30, 2020, covered almost 3,000 products and we have been recognized for carrying out the largest number of knockout validations for antibodies in the industry, according to CiteAb, who presented us with the award in 2020;

 

   

Manufacturing processes that increase the reliability and consistency of our product performance, notably recombinant antibody production. As of June 30, 2020, approximately 20,000 of our products were manufactured using this technique; and

 

   

Ongoing quality management of third-party products offered through our platform.

While most of our products are sold as RUO reagents, our antibody development expertise, combined with our stringent validation techniques and recombinant manufacturing capability, allow us to support antibody and assay development for use across the IVD sector, from laboratory-developed tests and rapid assay platforms through to companion diagnostics and clinical trials. Our antibodies created using our recombinant monoclonal antibody technology were used in 10 FDA-approved companion diagnostic assays as of August 2020. In addition, our facility located in Burlingame, California has a Medical Device Manufacturing License granted by the California Department of Public Health.

Large, Differentiated Product Offering

We offer an extensive portfolio of antibodies and related protein research reagents that enables us to serve life scientists studying a wide range of research areas. As of June 30, 2020, we offered approximately 100,000 products on our customer website, totaling over 300,000 SKUs, including one of the world’s largest portfolios of recombinant rabbit monoclonal antibodies, which are required by our customers as fundamental components used in their research and experimental workflow. Our portfolio of recombinant antibodies provide high specificity as a result of our RabMab technology, and across our product portfolio, our antibodies are cited tens of thousands of times per year in peer-reviewed research publications. We also offer custom services to certain of our customers seeking access to novel, high-quality and personalized solutions to support the development of specific diagnostic and therapeutic applications. Since 2013, we have undertaken more than 2,000 custom projects with our pharmaceutical and diagnostic partners.

Global Scale, Strategic Locations and Specialized Infrastructure

Since 2001, we have sold our products and services to customers in over 130 countries through a specialized global infrastructure. We have seven manufacturing facilities and seven distribution centers strategically located across four continents in close proximity to many of the largest clusters of life science research hubs, which

 

101


Table of Contents

enhances supply chain efficiency. Our global footprint, combined with a network of distributor partners, allows us to provide our extensive portfolio of products and services to customers almost anywhere in the world, with orders generally shipped within 24 to 48 hours. As of June 30, 2020, our global manufacturing and supply chain platform had over 430 employees and handled an average of over 7,000 products per week with fulfilment accuracy of approximately 99.6%. In addition to an efficient operational infrastructure, we have a multi-channel commercial presence through our digital platform, on-ground global sales teams, industry conferences and other events. Our customer and scientific support teams provide around the clock, multilingual and highly specialized assistance to ensure that our customers are supported through their research, both before and after they purchase our products. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our support teams handled approximately 470,000 inquiries and responded to the vast majority of these inquiries within 24 hours.

Resilient and Growing End Markets and Attractive Financial Profile

We serve the life science research markets, which are supported by significant funding and capital investments from both public and private institutions. We expect the convergence of multiple industry trends to underlie continued growth in our sector, including an increasing global demand for healthcare and strong funding support for biomedical research. Furthermore, while our products are critical to basic research and development, our products often represent a small percentage of the overall cost of our customers’ workflow. Additionally, most of our products are consumable in nature and once established in the marketplace, the demand tends to be stable.

We have an attractive business model due to our resilient revenue base, which grew at a CAGR of 13% from 2014 to 2020, high product margins and strong cash flow generation. Our ROCE has consistently exceeded our cost of capital, maintaining an average of above 20% from 2013 to 2019, and our balance sheet is supported by £187.3 million in cash and cash equivalents for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

Strong Leadership and Global Team with Proven Ability to Execute

Our management team has a proven track record of delivering business growth, executing on investment plans, driving continuous and material improvement of our global enterprise and generating high returns on capital. Our management team is supported by approximately 1,500 employees around the world, including over 200 with PhDs, who have extensive scientific and commercial experience and enable us to provide our customers with tailored expertise and service. The ability to attract excellent talent to our team is a key strength and enabler for growth. For example, in 2020, we were recognized by Glassdoor as the sixth best place to work in the United Kingdom. As we expand our footprint, we will continue to invest in locations that provide access to deep talent pools while building compelling spaces for our teams to work.

Industry Overview

As a global supplier of critical life science research reagents and tools, we help life scientists to advance scientific discovery through their research. The life science industry is experiencing an increase in research funding and capital investment supporting the growth of collaborative and global discovery networks. Our protein binding reagents, tools and solutions are increasingly used by academic, pharmaceutical and biotechnology organizations across a range of major research fields including oncology, cardiovascular, cell biology, epigenetics, infectious diseases, metabolism, developmental biology, immunology, microbiology, neuroscience, signal transduction and stem cell research. The credibility and influence of a life science company, such as ours, is, in part, determined by the number of times their products are cited in scientific papers. The number of times our products are cited has grown consistently year over year since 2010, and we were the most cited company in approximately 40% of the top 2,000 most studied protein targets, according to CiteAb as of June 30, 2020. According to CiteAb, approximately half of all life science publications cited at least one of our products, in 2019.

 

102


Table of Contents

Antibodies are also a critical component in many IVD assays, including companion diagnostics, and can also be used as therapeutic agents for the treatment of diseases, including cancers and immune-related diseases. As well as developing these antibodies internally, biopharmaceutical and diagnostic organizations are increasingly outsourcing the initial discovery and development of antibodies to third-party organizations able to provide these services on a contract basis.

In recent years, we have increased our focus on this area of the market, through both the custom development of new antibodies and the out-licensing of our existing antibodies to biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies, extending the commercial application of our products into these markets. We believe that we are well positioned to leverage our expertise in protein binding reagents to support clinical and instrument platforms, capturing greater market share and driving growth within these markets as a result.

Large and Growing Addressable Markets

In 2019, we estimated that our capabilities served a total addressable market of approximately $8 billion, which we estimate was comprised of a total addressable market of the research antibody and reagents industry of approximately $3 billion and a total addressable market for the generation of third-party antibodies for diagnostic and therapeutic companies’ applications of approximately $5 billion.

 

103


Table of Contents

Our Market Opportunities

The summary below sets out an overview of the key addressable markets for our products, as well as the competitive dynamics and growth prospects for each of these:

 

    

Proteomic Research Reagents

  

Antibody Development for Clinical Application

Abcam Revenue

   Catalogue    Custom products and services, IVD sales and royalty and license income (“CP&L”)

% of Sales (FY19)

   93.5%    6.5%

Estimated

addressable

market size

   $3 billion    $5 billion

Long-term

estimated market

growth trend1

   approximately 4%    approximately 4-8%

Abcam

Products

  

•  In-house and OEM research products, including primary and secondary antibodies, kits and assays, proteins, peptides, cell lines, lysates and biochemicals

  

•  Custom / out-licensed monoclonal antibodies

 

•  Immunoassays

Description

  

•  Provision of catalogue antibodies and associated reagents for customers to detect, quantify and modify proteins in scientific research experiments

  

•  Provision of antibodies or immunoassays (either custom-made or out-licensed from our catalogue) to biopharmaceutical and diagnostic organizations seeking to develop antibody based IVD assays, and/or companion diagnostics, or therapeutic agents

Customers

  

•  Academic labs in universities, higher education and government research institutes

 

•  Clinical labs in pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies working on drug development and diagnostics

 

•  Core facilities in hospitals, research institutes and other large organizations

  

•  Clinical labs in pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies working on drug and diagnostic development

Competition

  

•  Few players have significant global scale and liquidity

 

•  Fragmented and competitive market reflects wide range of technologies and applications for these products

  

•  Companies in diagnostic and therapeutic-use markets include specialist diagnostic businesses, Contract Research Organizations (“CROs”) and in-house teams at biotechnology and biopharmaceutical firms, who may outsource antibody design and development when reaching capacity or when they encounter a problem that requires outside expertise

 

•  We have built a significant network of collaborations across this landscape and are working on many bespoke projects in partnership with large biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies to develop antibodies for these markets

Regulation

  

•  Regulatory approval of research-grade antibodies is not required

  

•  Antibody diagnostics require regulatory approval if they are used in a regulatory environment

 

•  Therapeutic antibodies require high levels of regulatory approvals

 

1)

Excluding the impact from COVID-19

 

104


Table of Contents

Proteomic Research Reagents

The growing and fragmented proteomic research reagents market currently represents a majority of our sales and is a field where we have established a strong position, with our revenue having grown at a CAGR of 13% over the last six years, compared to an estimated 4% per year long-term growth rate for the proteomics research reagents market. Even as a leader within this market, we believe there is significant headroom for growth, as highlighted by Figure 7 below.

 

LOGO

Figure 7

Furthermore, we expect the proteomic research reagents market to grow at a long-term growth rate of approximately 4% per annum (excluding any impact from COVID-19). We believe this growth will be driven primarily by: (i) a growing number of life science researchers and research studies; (ii) an increase in the total available funding for proteomic and other related research, which thereby determines the volume of reagents used by researchers; (iii) technological advancements which increase the throughput, data, efficiency and speed of biological research; and (iv) increases in the pricing for proteomic reagents, broadly in line with inflation. Historical increases in total funding available for proteomic and other related research are shown in Figure 8 below, and we believe this trend will continue.

 

LOGO

Figure 8, Source: National Institute of Health

 

105


Table of Contents

Antibody Development for Clinical Application

Beyond their use as research tools, over the last two decades, antibodies have become a critical component of many diagnostic assays. These assays have the potential to measure key biomarkers and provide clinicians with crucial insight to aid an effective diagnosis. Furthermore, using IVD assays as a companion diagnostic helps to screen patients and ensure that prescribed therapeutic agents will be efficacious for the specific disease variant. This can provide better clinical outcomes for the patient as well a more effective use of healthcare resources. As such IVD assays are an increasingly important part of clinical disease diagnosis, management and treatment selection. This is driving a rapid expansion of the companion diagnostics market, which we believe is expected to reach $6 billion by 2025.

In addition, antibodies themselves are increasingly being used as therapeutics for a wide range of diseases. For example, monoclonal antibody therapies have various advantages compared to traditional chemo and radio therapies, such as fewer treatment-related adverse effects and high target specificity. As a result, biological drugs increasingly represent a larger proportion of drugs in the global research and development pipeline. Globally, the total research and development spend in the pharmaceutical market is projected to grow as demonstrated by Figure 9 below. We believe that because biological drugs are becoming a larger part of the global research and development pipeline, this projected growth in total spend on pharmaceutical research and development will translate into growth in the market for biological drugs.

LOGO

Figure 9, Source: EvaluatePharma, July 2020

We serve this market by leveraging the expertise and content from our proteomic research reagent business as well as our innovation capabilities to provide high-quality reagents to clinical and instrument platform partners. This is realized both through the provision of our in-house catalogue products, which we are able to out license to clinical partners, as well as the custom development of novel products for potential use in these markets. We believe customers are choosing to partner with us as a result of our unique antibody discovery and innovation capabilities, strong IP protection, precise and reliable reagents and our ability to support their needs as they progress through regulatory approvals.

 

106


Table of Contents

We believe the macro environment and dynamics within the diagnostic and biological therapeutics markets are attractive and expect this market to grow at a long-term growth rate of approximately 4% to 8% per annum, driven primarily by: (i) biopharmaceutical research and development spending; (ii) increasing demand for accurate diagnoses to support high-cost therapeutic prescription; (iii) the move from small to large molecule biologics; (iii) the rise of precision medicine; and (iv) the trend toward industry outsourcing. These recent trends are demonstrated by Figures 10 and 11 below, and we believe these trends will continue.

 

 

LOGO

   Figure 10, Source: Pharmaprojects, January 2019        Figure 11, Source: Pharmaprojects, January 2019

Industry Trends Across RUO and Clinical Markets

We expect the convergence of a number of industry trends to support the fundamental market growth drivers across both RUO and clinical markets, resulting in an increased demand for our products and services, including:

 

   

Favorable Demographic and Epidemiologic Trends: Global demand for healthcare is increasing rapidly, which has been driven primarily by rising and ageing populations, an increased prevalence of chronic diseases and a focus on improving access to healthcare. The Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services estimates that in the United Sates, the total healthcare expenditure will increase from representing approximately 17.7% of gross domestic product in 2018 to approximately 19.4% in 2027. In addition to the demographic trends driving the global demand for healthcare, and in turn the demand for biomedical research, there has been a steady rise in the population of the scientific community that forms a large part of our customer base. In the United Kingdom, for example, from 2014 to 2018, there was a 3% increase in the number of individuals who obtained higher education qualifications in Biological Sciences and a 9% increase in postgraduate degrees awarded during this same period.

 

   

Strong Funding Environment for Biomedical Research: Life science research funding continues to grow in many countries around the world, driven by increased investment into biomedical research from a variety of sources, including governments, industry participants and private capital. Increased investment is funding translational research programs associated with the development of next-generation therapies including immuno-oncology and immuno-therapy, treatments for chronic diseases associated with ageing populations, as well as rare and genetic diseases and the ongoing threat from infectious diseases. This trend has also resulted in an increase in funding for industry-academia collaborations. Recent examples include the NIH’s BRAIN initiative and the NCI’s Cancer Moonshot, and we expect to see this trend continue in the future. The increase in government funding for life science research is particularly relevant for us, as a large percentage of our revenue is derived from customers conducting academic studies or from research institutes.

 

   

Focus on Increased Research Reproducibility and Reagent Quality to Reduce Wasted Time and Resources: Beyond their use in therapeutics, antibodies play a vital role in biomedical research across the life science industry. The quality of research reagents is intrinsically linked to the reproducibility of data. High-quality research antibodies, providing high specificity, sensitivity and consistency are

 

107


Table of Contents
 

critical to increasing confidence in research outcomes and reducing the gratuitous expenditure of both time and funding resources. With an estimated $17 billion lost in avoidable experiment expenditure annually, against a backdrop of increased outsourcing of research and development in order to optimize efficiency and reduce lead times, the ability for researchers to source high-quality and validated reagents is increasingly important.

 

   

Growing Significance of Genomics and Proteomics: The pace of technological innovation has significantly reduced the cost of gene sequencing in recent years, rapidly expanding its use and consequently resulting in a commensurate increase in the identification of possible genetic targets and biomarkers for disease diagnosis and treatment. This has led to a proliferation in proteomic research in areas spanning stem cell research, gene editing, epigenetics, neuroscience and oncology. In addition, the market is further benefiting from the increase in the use of instrumentation, which facilitates automation and an increase in the use of technologies such as multiplexing allowing for a comprehensive, quick analysis of proteins. This increases both the efficiency and speed of output of biological research and thus the volume of available data, which in turn drives advances in process design and development in an ongoing cycle. We believe all areas of proteomics research are benefiting from these trends.

 

   

China Expansion: The Chinese market represents a large and attractive growth opportunity. Increasing health needs, driven by an expanding and ageing population, has resulted in a heightened focus on healthcare and innovation. China now ranks second in the world for citations for the number of scientific papers produced, behind the United States, according to the State Council of the People’s Republic of China as of November 2019. The Chinese government has placed scientific and technological innovation at the center of the long-term socio-economic development of the country and is supporting this initiative through funding, reform and societal status. In 2018, China spent approximately $293 billion on research and development, which was 2.1% of the country’s GDP and an 11.6% increase compared to 2017. We expect to see continued growth in research and development spending in China. In March 2019, the government announced the intention to increase research efforts and enhance innovative capabilities as well as encouraging enterprise-led industry-academia research collaborations. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, sales in China contributed to 16% of our catalogue sales, and we believe the Chinese market has the potential to grow to become the same size as the U.S. market for our business over the next 15 years.

Our Products and Services

We offer customers a range of catalogue products and customized solutions. We innovate and manufacture our own products in our specialist facilities worldwide, and we source thousands more from hundreds of quality suppliers. This combination of in-house production and sourcing offers scientists access to the newest high-quality research tools available globally.

In total, we offer approximately 100,000 products in our catalogue as of June 30, 2020. These catalogue products support the research of proteins in biological pathways. Ultimately, findings from this research can translate into treatments for diseases such as cancer and immune deficiency disorders.

Including our Custom Products and Licensing revenue, in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, 51% of our total revenue was derived from our in-house manufactured products, innovation and services, up from 28% in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2012.

 

108


Table of Contents

Catalogue Products:

Antibodies

Research grade antibodies

We are a leading provider of antibodies and research reagents worldwide. According to CiteAb in 2019, approximately half of all life science publications cited at least one of our products, resulting in approximately 30,000 citations. Our ability to provide researchers around the world with products they can trust, that are of high quality, together with the data needed to support and validate their research, is vital to our continued success.

We provide antibodies intended for basic research, or those that are typically used in academic pharmaceutical and biotechnology laboratories to investigate fundamental scientific questions. The human body makes proteins known as antibodies when an unknown foreign substance is introduced into the body, such as bacteria. Each antibody binds to a very specific part of the foreign substance known as an antigen, and different antibodies bind to different antigens. We can artificially generate antibodies to target antigens on molecules that researchers are interested in studying in order to understand where antigens are located within a cell or tissue sample. High-quality research antibodies are critical to scientists’ research and their ability to reproduce experiments, as unreliable research reagents lead to wasted time and money. We strive to offer high-quality antibodies that provide specificity, sensitivity and consistency, which helps to increase confidence in research outcomes and reduce waste across the industry.

In vitro diagnostic antibodies

Antibody-based IVD assays are tools typically used in a clinical setting, such as a hospital or medical institute laboratory, to help diagnose a disease or condition. These tools are used on patient samples (such as blood, urine or tissue) and help clinicians to diagnose or assess the progression of a disease. IVD assays can also provide information on the type of treatment to use and assist with disease prognosis. We sell these products directly and through specialist distributors.

Conjugated antibodies and conjugation kits

Conjugation is the process of attaching a label to an antibody to enable visualization and measurement. Labels come in many forms, such as enzymes, fluorescent molecules and metals. Based on a survey of 347 researchers in North America and Europe conducted on our behalf by a contact services company on September 30, 2019, more than 80% of antibody customers use conjugated antibodies for their research. We offer directly conjugated primary antibodies and antibody conjugation labelling kits for customers to undertake conjugation of their own antibodies. With the Expedeon Acquisition and our investment in BrickBio in the fiscal year 2020, we have expanded our ability to offer more internal labelling and external conjugation products and services.

These products complement our existing suite of antibodies and will allow us to develop a wide range of new products for applications and kits across our product portfolio.

Immunoassays

Singleplex

An immunoassay is a test that uses one or more antibodies to detect and quantify a molecule of interest within a sample. While some researchers prefer to run experiments using all individual components, prepackaged immunoassay kits offer a valuable time-saving resource that minimizes the potential variability between experiments. A researcher provides the sample of interest, and our kits provide the researcher with the reagents needed to conduct the experiment; each kit also provides a protocol to optimize its performance.

 

109


Table of Contents

We offer more than 1,400 ELISA kits, which are based on reliable and optimized matched antibody pairs. In particular, our SimpleStep ELISA kits allow researchers to run a common ELISA experiment in just 90 minutes. Our matched antibody pairs are recombinant, monoclonal antibodies that are developed and optimized for use in relevant sample types like plasma and serum for reliable performance. Our immunoassays portfolio has developed rapidly since 2010, as illustrated by Figure 12 below, showing the growth of our share of global citations for our ELISA kits.

 

LOGO

Figure 12, Source: CiteAb March 2020

Multiplex

Multiplex immunoassays allow researchers to simultaneously quantify multiple analytes within a single test. We offer a range of in-house multiplex immunoassay products that can be used with standard laboratory equipment. We also offer our innovative FirePlex multiplex product, which features customizable multiplex panels that allow the analysis of up to 70 analytes simultaneously per well, with fast and easy readout on standard flow cytometers. FirePlex immunoassays combine our proprietary FirePlex particle technology along with our optimized matched antibody pairs for analyte detection, offering high standards in sensitivity and specificity. Through our acquisition of Firefly Bioworks Inc., we in-licensed from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (“MIT”) certain patents covering the FirePlex products.

Our antibodies and antibody pairs are also made available to a range of third parties developing either novel multiplex platforms or upgrading their existing platforms. For example, we entered into a commercial partnership with NanoString in 2019, whereby we leveraged our portfolio of recombinant monoclonal antibodies to create bespoke content for NanoString’s GeoMx DSP platform. This enables GeoMx DSP users to explore cellular interactions and facilitate discovery of novel biology.

Proteins and peptides

Proteins and peptides are the molecules that carry out almost all of the actions within and between cells. Major types of proteins include cytokines, which can initiate an immune response, growth factors, which help scientists culture cells in a laboratory, or enzymes, which catalyze reactions. Scientists use these proteins and peptides as part of more complex experiments to test how cells and organisms function.

We offer a range of over 15,000 proteins and peptides, the majority of which are currently sourced from third parties. More recently, we have begun building an in-house capability to develop our own range of high-quality, biologically active proteins to complement and enhance our offering.

 

 

110


Table of Contents

Edited cell lines and lysates

Cell lines and lysates are an important emerging tool for antibody validation by both our customers and in our own labs. Based on market research we conducted in March 2018, we believe approximately 70% of our customers utilize gene-edited cell lines in their research. We saw an opportunity to help develop this market to further address our customers’ needs as there was no clear market leader with a comprehensive line of high-quality cell lines and lysates. In 2019, we acquired a portfolio of ready-made edited diploid cell lines available for validation from EdiGene, and as a result, we published an initial range of knockout lysates. As of June 30, 2020, we offer more than 2,800 knockout cell lysates and lines, which are being used for our in-house validation needs and are being made available to our customers for their own research. In 2020, we launched a range of CRISPR edited cell lines, and as of June 30, 2020, we offer approximately 1,400 cell lines.

Other products

We offer a wide variety of other products, including cellular activity kits and miRNA kits, among others and other products such as our agonists, antagonists, activators and inhibitors range, which includes hundreds of different molecules that change how other proteins normally function. By regulating a protein’s activity, scientists can begin to understand its function. We provide a range of ligands, modulators of ligand and voltage-gated ion channels, enzyme inhibitors and cell signaling pathway tools, which help researchers to find molecules needed for their research.

Custom Products and Licensing

We provide comprehensive solutions for custom antibody development, from initial target evaluation through to the delivery of purified, fit-for-purpose antibodies for research, diagnostic or therapeutic application. We have highly experienced teams dedicated to antibody discovery for custom projects. These teams design and execute tailor-made discovery and selection strategies to generate and select binders that meet desired antibody specifications.

Our teams conduct the screens and any application-specific tests to enable identification of the best antibody for their specific requirements in terms of selectivity, sensitivity and application performance. In addition, all our custom antibodies are sequenced, cloned and produced in a recombinant system. This ensures high antibody yields, batch-to-batch consistency and sustainable long-term supply.

In other situations, antibodies that are already available on our online catalogue for research use purposes are requested for potential clinical use. In such case, we work with those customers to provide a license. For example, in 2016, we licensed the use of an antibody from our catalogue to Epic Sciences for diagnostic purposes, including in connection with its prostate cancer diagnostic test.

For newly created antibodies, as well as receiving fees upon successful completion of each project, additional commercial options for these products include (i) making them available for sale to researchers through our online catalogue, (ii) manufacturing and supplying the product to the customer in the required formulation, (iii) licensing the technology to the customer for their own manufacture and (iv) receiving payments from milestones achieved in clinical development and/or royalty payments once products are approved and being prescribed by clinicians.

We have developed over 2,000 custom projects with our partners during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2013 to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, we completed over 140 projects and executed over 50 agreements, across these areas.

 

 

111


Table of Contents

In the ordinary course of our business, we often enter into license agreements with third parties to expand our product portfolio. For example, in January 2018, we entered into a license and asset transfer agreement with Roche for consideration of approximately $17.6 million (£13.0 million). Under the terms of this agreement, we obtained the exclusive rights to the product portfolio of Spring Bioscience Corporation in the RUO field as well as the exclusive RUO rights for all future products developed for an initial period of 10 years. Following the Expedeon Acquisition and our acquisition of the gene editing platform and oncology product portfolio of Applied Stem Cell in 2020, we plan to expand our custom offering to include conjugation and cell editing services.

Innovation and New Product Development

We believe one of the keys to our success is our ability to react rapidly to the needs of our customers and meet general industry demand. In order to anticipate our customers’ needs and to be at the forefront of research and development, we analyze data taken from a variety of sources, including interactions with our customers through our various support teams and other customer touch points, such as trade shows, surveys, focus groups and key opinion leaders, as well as data taken from our website and digital platform. The feedback and insight gained from these interactions is used to inform our innovation process by helping our product development teams better understand our customers’ unmet needs.

We intend to increase our investment in research and development over the next five years across a number of areas. First, we aim to sustain and extend our leadership position as an innovator of antibodies. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our primary and secondary antibodies accounted for approximately 71% of our revenues. We have developed thousands of novel antibody products and line extensions each year and believe that we are well positioned to continue to improve upon the quality and performance of antibodies currently available in the market through our product development efforts.

We have built a differentiated antibody discovery platform over a number of years, which leverages a range of technologies and screening techniques, including RabMAb, B Cell Cloning, NGS and Phage Display. Combined with the significant expertise of our in-house teams, we believe the continued development of this platform has the potential to drive continuous improvement in the success of our new product development pipeline and enable us to generate specific and sensitive antibodies at scale.

 

LOGO

Figure 13

Second, we are focused on continuing to expand our product innovation beyond primary antibodies and into complementary research tools including immunoassays, proteins, edited cell lines and conjugation technologies and labels. We have already demonstrated our commitment to broader innovation by investing in our in-house scientific capabilities, which is evident from the positive impact in-house innovation has had on our revenue. For example, in the seven year period ended June 30, 2019, our in-house product revenue grew by an average of approximately 23%. Further, our total in-house product revenue grew from approximately 28% in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2012 to 51% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020. Further, by transitioning more products from OEM suppliers to innovating in-house provides a better rate of growth per molecule from our own products using our data. As illustrated by Figure 14 below, we benefit from higher gross profits from our in-house products.

 

112


Table of Contents

LOGO

Illustrative average gross profit margin for primary antibodies sold by Abcam during the first six years following launch, on average based on products launched between 2011 to 2015, as compared to OEM products sold by Abcam during the first six years following launch over the same period.

Figure 14

We are constantly searching for new ways to bring more products in house and to improve our internal production capabilities through the use of data analytics, especially where we see that a customer’s needs are not being fulfilled or if there is demand for a higher quality alternative. We believe our commitment to product innovation has allowed us to strengthen our position in core markets, providing greater choice and faster protocols to researchers through the addition of new, more efficient product lines.

Third, we have established various partnerships in which we are positioned to co-create innovative tools and aim to replicate this across more areas of scientific need. For example, we are assisting with advancing research in rare disease areas, which impact fewer than 1 in 2,000 people. In January 2019, we partnered with the Loulou Foundation, a private foundation based in the United Kingdom that is focused on finding a cure for CDKL5 Deficiency Disorder, which involves the mutation of a gene essential for normal brain development and function. The lack of quality research reagents for CDKL5 has been a significant hurdle to the understanding of the biology of this devastating disorder and has been impeding the development of effective therapies. By combining the technical expertise of our teams with the disease-specific expertise of groups like the Loulou Foundation, we are helping to support effective rare disease research through the innovation of precision research tools.

Underpinning our differentiated and innovative product development capability is a strong and dedicated team of experts. We have invested and will continue to invest in our team, who have the skills and know-how that make such innovation possible. As of June 30, 2020, we had 285 employees in our new product development team, who focus on research and development. We believe that it is crucial to the growth of our business to invest in talented people who are committed to our mission of providing high-quality products to our customers. By having a strong, talented and dedicated team, we are able to accelerate the implementation of product development initiatives that will allow us to seize more market opportunities.

Manufacturing Quality

We are committed to maintaining industry leading standards for our manufacturing processes at our global facilities in order to continue to provide our high-quality products to our customers. We follow strict global quality control procedures across all of our manufacturing facilities to ensure consistent lot-to-lot performance for our customers. We also impose the same quality standards on our third-party OEM suppliers, to ensure that our customers receive a consistently high level of quality across products offered in our catalogue.

 

 

113


Table of Contents

Our primary manufacturing site, based in Hangzhou, China, is ISO 9001:2015 certified and all other sites work to these standards. The facility of our IVD group, located in Burlingame, California, is registered as a medical device establishment with the FDA and is subject to the FDA’s Quality System Regulation and in compliance with ISO 13485:2016. This facility has a Device Manufacturing License granted by the California Department of Public Health.

Our Infrastructure

Manufacturing

We are strategically located in close proximity to many of our global customers to drive supply chain efficiency, minimize customer lead times and navigate a complex network of regulatory requirements. Our global footprint consists of seven manufacturing facilities. We have the expertise and government licenses to manage multiple controlled environments globally, enabling us to handle highly regulated chemicals and other materials in a compliant manner. The depth and breadth of our portfolio provides our customers with a comprehensive range of products and services and allows us to create customized and integrated solutions for our customers. As of June 30, 2020, we had over 430 employees dedicated to our supply chain and manufacturing platform, together delivering over 31,000 in-house products and approximately 95,000 products in total, available in over 175,000 configurations.

We continue to focus on delivering scaled growth by investing in our infrastructure, supply chain engineering and technology systems. Investment in infrastructure will include core facility expansions as well as build out our regional infrastructure. Supply chain engineering efforts will be aimed at improving utilization through network optimization and improved material and procurement management. Finally, we aim to improve our technological capabilities in the form of increased automation and enhancement of our business and quality management systems. Our ability to deliver enhancements and scale our business was demonstrated by our ability to increase our average volume of product batches placed into production by approximately 100% from 2018 to 2020 at our manufacturing facility in Hangzhou, China. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, we initiated multiple programs to allow us to further scale the business while achieving efficient economics.

Distribution Network and Facilities

We have seven manufacturing facilities strategically located across four continents in close proximity to many of the largest clusters of life science research hubs, which enhances supply chain efficiency, and allow us to provide our extensive portfolio of products and services to customers nearly anywhere in the world. We have sold our products in over 130 countries through a variety of channels, including both direct customer sales and the use of local distributors. As of June 30, 2020, our global distribution network handled an average of over 7,000 products per week with a fulfilment accuracy of approximately 99.6%, and works to ensure that in many cases, our customers are able to have the product they require for their research within 24 to 48 hours of ordering, depending on where a customer is located. We employ approximately 336 sales and sales support professionals around the world who focus on serving our customers.

Customers

Our customers are life science researchers who seek to understand biological processes and their role in health and disease. Our customers are vitally important to the development and growth of our business; everything we do is anchored in the belief that our customers drive the urgency and direction of our business. We believe it is critical that we listen to our customers and offer products and services that are of the highest quality, are effective and convenient to access to ensure we address our customers’ needs.

 

114


Table of Contents

We have three primary categories of customers including: academic institutions, research institutions, and pharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostic companies. While across all categories our ultimate customers are the same – life science researchers – customer orders are received from individual scientists ordering on their own behalf, laboratory managers ordering on behalf of their lab teams, purchasing managers ordering on behalf of several labs, or central procurement teams ordering on behalf of labs, divisions or entire organizations. Orders can be received directly, through a variety of means, or via one of our distributors. Our customers span the world, however, as of June 30, 2019, a large number were located in the United States, where 44% of our total revenue came from the United States, and 56% of our total revenue came from all other countries in which we operate.

 

   

Researchers and scientists from research laboratories and academic institutions. These customers purchase products based on their individual scientific and/or research requirements, which typically results in lower purchasing requirements. Researchers and scientists in this category tend to order products from our catalogue through our website and other digital and traditional channels. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, the average order value of these customers was approximately $590 which reflects the purchasing habits and product needs of this category of customers.

 

   

Biopharmaceutical and diagnostic companies. These customers typically require larger order sizes and greater customization of their orders. We typically build more personalized relationships with these customers, and we also seek to partner with them to support their research and development efforts over a longer period of time. Through these partnerships, we are able to create new products for their needs that we are ultimately able to add to our catalogue and that we can then offer to other researchers and scientists.

In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our worldwide customer base consisted of approximately 750,000 life science researchers. As of June 30, 2020, approximately 60% of our total revenue was derived from academic institutions, and the remaining approximately 40% was derived from our other customers including research institutes and biopharmaceutical, biotechnology and diagnostics companies. Our sales are widely distributed, and no single customer accounted for more than 5% of our revenue during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2019.

We focus on understanding, anticipating and serving our customers’ needs as quickly as possible, which we accomplish by maintaining regular dialogue with key opinion leaders through a variety of touch points. We also conduct customer surveys and host focus groups in order to continue our interaction with our customers, in addition to using data analytics and insights to gauge customer satisfaction and inform our product pipeline. We believe our scientific support teams and other customer touch points allow us to keep up with market and research trends and gain insights into our customers both in academia and industry.

Another way that we seek to foster positive relationships with our customers is by providing personalized and swift customer service globally. We measure the real-time satisfaction levels of our customers through a transactional Net Promoter Score (“tNPS”), a method that is a widely used, non-proprietary metric. We calculate our tNPS by sending surveys to our customers after certain interactions (for example, we send surveys immediately after a customer places or receives an order or when a customer complaint is closed). At this point, a customer is asked how likely they are to recommend our products and services to a friend or colleague on a scale of 0 to 10. Those who respond with a score of 9 to 10 are called “Promoters,” 0 to 6 are called “Detractors” and 7 to 8 are called “Passives.” The tNPS is calculated by subtracting the percentage of customers who are Detractors from the percentage of customers who are Promoters. For purposes of calculating the tNPS, Passives count towards the total number of respondents. In November 2018, we appointed a new tNPS survey partner, which changed the mechanism by which customer feedback is collected. With this change, response rates increased, and we saw a consistent number of “Promoters,” a decrease in “Passives” and a slight increase in “Detractors.” Because the tNPS measure is sensitive, this resulted in a tNPS outcome that was approximately 10% lower than the score under the previous mechanism. Our tNPS score for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 was 56% compared to 59% for the corresponding period in the preceding year.

 

115


Table of Contents

Sales Channels

We have talented, global sales and marketing teams that work to provide our customers with the products they require to further their research goals. We have invested and will continue to invest in our digital marketing strategy, which continues to grow and enhance our digital footprint by driving increased customer engagement and conversion rates on our digital platform.

We sell our products directly to our customers through our digital platform and other offline channels. These channels provide customers the flexibility to purchase our products quickly and from any location in the world. We continue to focus on ways to improve the ease and efficiency with which customers are able to find and access the products and services they need. In addition to our digital platform, we have an extensive range of offline channels, which include our global sales and customer and scientific support teams and Abcam and other industry hosted conferences, among others.

We also provide support to our customers before and after they purchase our products to ensure that they have what they need to carry out their research. We continue to invest in our scientific and customer support teams, which provide our global customers with multilingual, around the clock support. In 2019, we launched an online “Live Chat” service through our website to make it easier for customers to resolve issues quickly. In the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, our support teams handled approximately 470,000 inquiries and responded to the vast majority of these inquiries within 24 hours.

Suppliers

We maintain a large network of product suppliers and collaborators. We select suppliers that adhere to high-quality and ethical standards, and we monitor their performance through audits, reviewing the progress of any corrective action plans and measuring of key performance indicators. Our product suppliers benefit from our global distribution network, digital platform and recognized brand to support the sales of their products. Our suppliers are widely distributed, with no single OEM supplier accounting for more than 5% of our revenue in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020.

We are transparent about how we work in terms of ethics, quality, the environment and general business principles, and aim to build long-term collaborative relationships based on trust.

Competition

The biotechnology and life science industries are characterized by rapidly advancing technologies, significant change and a strong emphasis on intellectual property. We operate in a highly competitive environment with a diverse and fragmented base of competitors, many of whom focus on specific regions, customers and/or specific product segments. While many customers weigh and balance competitive factors differently in our industry, many focus upon consistency of product quality and performance, service and delivery, breadth of product line, consistency across products, price, customer support, online capabilities and the ability to meet the special and local needs of our customers. Market success is primarily dependent upon product innovation and quality, selection of products, price and reputation. For certain customers, competition is driven not only by the product quality across our industry, but also by the adaptability of the supplier as a developmental and commercial partner. We rely on our scale, expertise, deep customer access, depth of product offering, marketing strategies and sales force, acquisition strategy, financial profile and management team to deliver superior solutions to our customers and provide extensive market channel access to our suppliers.

Although only a few competitors have significant global scale and liquidity, the marketplace for reagents and biological tools, including RUO antibody suppliers, is fragmented and competitive, reflecting the wide range of technologies and applications that use these products and the unregulated status of the market.

The worldwide market for protein related research reagents is supplied by a number of companies, including parts of Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. (U.S.), Merck KGaA (Germany), Becton, Dickinson and Company (U.S.),

 

116


Table of Contents

Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. (U.S.), Cell Signaling Technology, Inc. (U.S.), Bio-Techne Corporation (U.S.), PerkinElmer, Inc. (U.S.), Santa Cruz Biotechnology, Inc. (U.S.) and BioLegend, Inc. (U.S.), among others. We also compete with other smaller, niche competitors and specialized companies that focus on certain areas, including innovators and resellers. Smaller or early-stage companies may also prove to be significant competitors, particularly through collaborative arrangements with large and established companies.

Intellectual Property

Our success depends in part upon our ability to protect our core technologies and intellectual property. To accomplish this, we rely on a combination of intellectual property rights, including patents, trade secrets and trademarks, as well as customary contractual protections.

Patents

As of June 18, 2020, we own approximately 61 issued U.S. patents, 17 pending U.S. patent applications, 150 issued foreign patents and 45 pending foreign patent applications. As of June 18, 2020, we exclusively licensed from MIT, through our acquisition of Firefly Bioworks Inc., five issued U.S. patents and 15 issued foreign patents. These patents include claims relating to the methods and process of making our products including antibodies, immunoassays and conjugation products, as described further below.

Antibodies

Through our acquisition of Epitomics Inc., as of June 18, 2020, we own several patent families related to the generation of antibodies, including, for example: (1) a patent family consisting of six issued U.S. patents related to a fusion partner and the generation of monoclonal rabbit antibodies therefrom, and patents in this family are expected to expire in June 2026, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity; (2) a patent family consisting of one issued U.K. patent and five pending patent applications in Europe, Australia, Canada, China and the United States related to the method of producing a recombinant allotype specific rabbit monoclonal antibody, with the issued U.K. patent expected to expire in December 2034 and any patents issuing from the pending applications (including a U.K. patent which may be obtained through the pending European application) expected to expire in December 2035, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity; and (3) a patent family consisting of three pending applications in the United States, Europe and China, related to methods of generating rabbit monoclonal antibodies by B cell panning and proliferation (without using fusion partner), and any patents issuing from the pending applications are expected to expire in March 2036, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity.

Through our acquisition of AxioMx Inc., as of June 18, 2020, we own several patent families related to the generation of recombinant antibodies, including, for example: (1) one patent family consisting of one issued U.S. patent and five pending applications in Australia, China, Canada, Europe and the United States, related to methods and compositions for producing a chimeric polypeptide, such as converting single-chain variable fragment to properly folded immunoglobulin, with the issued U.S. patent and any patents issuing from the pending applications expected to expire in June 2036, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity; and (2) two patent families derived from two Patent Cooperation Treaty (“PCT”) applications and consisting of 12 pending patent applications in Australia, Canada, China, Europe, Japan and the United States, related to methods of generating antibodies against traditionally difficult targets involving ligand-directed or post-translational modification directed antibody generation, and any patents issuing from these pending applications are expected to expire in August 2038, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity.

Assays

Through our acquisition of Firefly Bioworks, Inc., as of June 18, 2020, we have rights to, through ownership and exclusive license, several patent families related to our Fireplex product, consisting of eight issued U.S.

 

117


Table of Contents

patents, two pending U.S. patent applications, 41 issued foreign patents, and seven pending foreign patent applications, of which five issued U.S. patents and 15 issued foreign patents are exclusively licensed from MIT. The issued patents and any patents issuing from the pending applications in those families are expected to expire between 2026 and 2035, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity.

Through the Expedeon Acquisition, as of June 18, 2020, we own three patent families related to the CaptSure technology utilized in our SimpleStep ELISA kits, consisting of four issued U.S. patents, two pending U.S. patent applications, five issued foreign patents in France, Germany, Netherlands, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom, and six pending foreign patent applications in Australia, Canada, China, Europe and Japan. The issued patents and any patents issuing from the pending applications in those families are expected to expire between 2030 and 2036, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity.

Conjugation

Through the Expedeon Acquisition, as of June 18, 2020, we own four patent families related to our conjugation products, consisting of three issued U.S. patents, one pending U.S. patent application, 39 issued foreign patents, and two pending foreign patent applications. The issued patent and any patents issuing from the pending applications in those families are expected to expire between 2026 and 2034, exclusive of possible patent term adjustments or extensions or other forms of exclusivity.

Individual patents have terms for varying periods depending on the date of filing of the patent application or the date of patent issuance and the legal term of patents in the countries in which they are obtained. Generally, utility patents issued for applications filed in the United States are granted a term of 20 years from the earliest effective filing date of a non-provisional patent application. The duration of foreign patents varies in accordance with provisions of applicable local law, but typically is also 20 years from the earliest effective filing date. All taxes, annuities or maintenance fees for a patent, as required by the USPTO and certain foreign jurisdictions, must be timely paid in order for the patent to remain in force during this period of time.

The actual protection afforded by a patent may vary on a product by product basis, from country to country and can depend upon many factors, including the type of patent, the scope of its coverage, the availability of regulatory-related extensions and the availability of legal remedies in a particular country and the validity and enforceability of the patent. Our patents and patent applications may be subject to procedural or legal challenges by others. We may be unable to obtain, maintain and protect the intellectual property rights necessary to conduct our business, and we may be subject to claims that we infringe or otherwise violate the intellectual property rights of others, which could materially harm our business. For more information, see the section titled “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to our Intellectual Property.”

Trademarks

As of June 18, 2020, we own trademark registrations or registration applications including ABCAM, RABMAB, FIREPLEX, SIMPLESTEP ELISA, and LIGHTNING LINK in the United States and in certain foreign jurisdictions, such as Europe.

Trade Secrets and Proprietary Information

In addition to patents and trademarks, we rely upon unpatented trade secrets and know-how and continuing technological innovation to develop and maintain our competitive position. However, trade secrets and know-how can be difficult to protect. We seek to protect our proprietary information, in part, by executing confidentiality agreements with our collaborators and scientific advisors, and non-competition, non-solicitation, confidentiality, and invention assignment agreements with our employees, consultants, and independent

 

118


Table of Contents

contractors. We have also executed agreements requiring assignment of inventions with selected scientific advisors and collaborators. The confidentiality agreements we enter into are designed to protect our proprietary information and the agreements or clauses requiring assignment of inventions to us are designed to grant us ownership of technologies that are developed through our relationship with the respective counterparty. We cannot guarantee, however, that we have executed such agreements with all applicable counterparties, such agreements will not be breached, or that these agreements will afford us adequate protection of our intellectual property and proprietary rights. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to our Intellectual Property.”

Properties

Our headquarters is located at Discovery Drive, Cambridge Biomedical Campus, Cambridge, CB2 0AX United Kingdom. We also operate from properties in Cambridge, United Kingdom, Shanghai, Beijing and Hong Kong in China, Taipei in Taiwan, Tokyo in Japan, Adelaide in Australia and Branford, Connecticut, Natick and Cambridge, Massachusetts, Pleasanton and Burlingame, California and Eugene, Oregon in the United States

Our People and Culture

We believe that our culture is a strength and key differentiator for our business. We recognize that our people are fundamental to our continued success, as their skill and dedication enable us to fulfill our vision and purpose. We aim to create a safe, fair and dynamic working environment that is collaborative and outcome focused. We will continue to invest in the development of our employees and encourage the sharing of feedback and ideas, as we believe in the importance of listening to our employees and recognizing their achievements. We actively promote our culture, which focuses on earning the trust of all of our employees. Nurturing employee excellence is one of the keys to our success, and we continue to prioritize the ongoing learning, training and development of our staff. In 2019, Glassdoor awarded us the “Glassdoor Employees’ Choice Award,” which is based on feedback from employees about their job, work environment and their employer. Based on employee feedback provided to Glassdoor from October 2018 to October 2019, we were ranked sixth in the “Best Places to Work 2020 Employees’ Choice” in the United Kingdom.

We offer online and offline training programs, across a range of areas including work-based skills, leadership and compliance-related courses. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020, we extended courses to over 1,200 employees. From July 2019 to July 2020, we offered eight different apprenticeship routes at levels two to seven in the United Kingdom and had 32 active apprentices including nine senior leaders masters apprenticeships. As of July 2020, an external employee survey, which measured employee engagement at number of companies, found that Abcam was in the top 25% in three employee development categories including mentoring, learning and career path, and in the top 10% for employee growth.

We aim to create a positive, collaborative culture, and we want to ensure everyone is aware of the contribution they can make across our business. We recognize that the work environment has an impact on productivity, innovation and collaboration, which is why we have dedicated resources to building new facilities. We want employees to be engaged and motivated and have opportunities to develop and progress. We recognize that rewarding employees fairly, equitably and competitively is crucial to attracting and maintaining a motivated workforce.

In September 2018, we launched “AbShare,” an innovative share plan available globally to all of our permanent employees. The plan, which won “Most Innovative & Creative Plan Design” at the GEO 2019 awards, was designed to encourage broad share ownership across our offices around the world, create alignment throughout our organization and help to attract and retain highly talented employees. At its launch, approximately 87% of our global employee base elected to participate in this plan.

For the years ended June 30, 2018, 2019 and 2020, we had 1,054, 1,155 and 1,492 employees, respectively. As of June 30, 2020, over 200 of our employees hold PhDs.

 

119


Table of Contents

The table below sets out the number of employees by geography as of June 30, 2020:

 

Geography

   As of June 30,
2020
 

United States

     388  

EMEA(1)

     672  

APAC(2)

     432  
  

 

 

 

Total

                 1,492  
  

 

 

 

 

  (1)

The significant majority of our EMEA employees are in Cambridge, United Kingdom.

  (2)

APAC includes employees in Shanghai, Hangzhou and Hong Kong in China, Tokyo, Japan and Sydney, Australia.

The table below sets out the number of employees by category as of June 30, 2020:

 

Department

   As of June 30,
2020
 

New Product Development

     285  

Logistics

     106  

Customer Services

     77  

Quality and Operational Excellence

     18  

Other(1)

     1,006  
  

 

 

 

Total

                 1,492  
  

 

 

 

 

  (1)

Other employees includes departments such as Regional Sales and Marketing, Data & Analytics, Scientific Support, In-House Manufacturing, Core Finance and Facilities Health & Safety.

We believe that we maintain a good relationship with our employees. Currently, none of our employees belong to unions.

Information Technology

Data Privacy and Security

Numerous state, federal and foreign laws, including consumer protection laws and regulations, govern the collection, dissemination, use, access to, confidentiality and security of critical or sensitive personal information. In the United States, numerous federal and state laws and regulations, including state data breach notification laws, federal and state consumer protection laws and regulations (for example, Section 5 of the Federal Trade Commission Act and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (“HIPAA”)), govern the collection, use, disclosure, and protection of personal information could apply to our operations or the operations of our partners. In particular, regulations promulgated pursuant to HIPAA establish privacy and security standards that limit the use and disclosure of individually identifiable health information (known as “protected health information” or “PHI”) and require the implementation of administrative, physical and technological safeguards to protect the privacy of protected health information and ensure the confidentiality, integrity and availability of electronic protected health information. Determining whether protected health information has been handled in compliance with applicable privacy standards and our contractual obligations can require complex factual and statistical analyses and may be subject to changing interpretation. State laws may be more stringent, broader in scope or offer greater individual rights with respect to PHI than HIPAA, and state laws may differ from each other, which may complicate compliance efforts. Entities that are found to be in violation of HIPAA as the result of a breach of unsecured PHI, a complaint about privacy practices, or an audit by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (“HHS”), may be subject to significant civil, criminal and administrative fines and penalties and/or additional reporting and oversight obligations, as well as significant reputational harm, if required to enter into a resolution agreement and corrective action plan with HHS to settle allegations of HIPAA non-compliance.

 

120


Table of Contents

California recently enacted the California Consumer Privacy Act (the “CCPA”), which creates new individual privacy rights for California consumers, as defined in the law, and places increased privacy and security obligations on entities handling certain personal data of consumers or households. The CCPA requires covered companies to provide new disclosures to consumers about such companies’ data collection, use and sharing practices, provide such consumers new ways to opt out of certain sales or transfers of personal information. The CCPA also provides for civil penalties for violations, as well as a private right of action for certain data breaches that result in the loss of personal information that may increase the likelihood of, and risks associated with, data breach litigation. The CCPA went into effect on January 1, 2020, and the California Attorney General may bring enforcement actions for violations as of July 1, 2020. The CCPA was recently amended, and it remains unclear what, if any, further modifications will be made to this legislation or how it will be interpreted. Additionally, a new California ballot initiative, the California Privacy Rights Act, appears to have garnered enough signatures to be included on the November 2020 ballot in California, and if voted into law by California residents, would impose additional data protection obligations on companies doing business in California, including additional consumer rights processes and opt outs for certain uses of sensitive data. It would also create a new California data protection agency specifically tasked to enforce the law, which would likely result in increased regulatory scrutiny of California businesses in the areas of data protection and security. Similar laws have been proposed in other states and at the federal level, and if passed, such laws may have potentially conflicting requirements that would make compliance challenging.

EU member states, Switzerland and other countries have also adopted data protection laws and regulations that impose significant compliance obligations. For instance, the collection and use of personal health data in the EEA is governed by the provisions of the General Data Protection Regulation (“GDPR”). The GDPR became effective on May 25, 2018 and imposes strict obligations and restrictions on the ability to collect, analyze, and transfer personal data. In particular, these obligations and restrictions concern the consent of the individuals to whom the personal data relates, the information provided to the individuals, the transfer of personal data out of the EEA, security breach notifications, security and confidentiality of the personal data, and the imposition of substantial potential fines for breaches of the data protection obligations. Data protection authorities from the different EU member states may interpret the GDPR and national laws differently and impose additional requirements, which add to the complexity of processing personal data in the EU. In addition, the United Kingdom leaving the EU could also lead to further legislative and regulatory changes. It remains unclear how the United Kingdom data protection laws or regulations will develop in the medium to longer term and how data transfer to the United Kingdom from the EU will be regulated, especially following the United Kingdom’s departure from the EU on January 31, 2020. However, the United Kingdom has transposed the GDPR into domestic law with the Data Protection Act 2018, which remains in force following the United Kingdom’s departure from the EU. Compliance with these and any other applicable privacy and data security laws and regulations is a rigorous and time-intensive process, and we may be required to put in place additional mechanisms to ensure compliance with the new data protection rules. See “Risk Factors – Risks Relating to our Business and Industry—Cyber security risks and the failure to maintain the confidentiality, integrity and availability of our computer hardware, software and internet applications and related tools and functions, could result in damage to our reputation, data integrity and/or subject us to costs, fines or lawsuits under data privacy or other laws or contractual requirements.”

Regulatory Matters

U.S. Regulation

Our products and operations may be subject to regulation by the FDA and other federal, state, or local authorities, as well as foreign regulatory authorities. The FDA regulates, among other things, the research, development, testing, manufacturing, clearance, approval, labeling, storage, recordkeeping, advertising, promotion, marketing, distribution, post-market monitoring and reporting, and import and export of medical devices. The vast majority of our products are currently marketed as research use only medical devices.

 

121


Table of Contents

Pursuant to its authority under the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act (“FDCA”), the FDA has jurisdiction over medical devices, which are defined to include, among other things, IVD devices. IVD devices that are marketed as RUO are not intended for use in a clinical investigation or for clinical diagnostic use outside an investigation and must be labeled “For Research Use Only. Not for use in diagnostic procedures.” Products that are intended for RUO and are properly labeled as RUO are exempt from compliance with the FDA’s requirements applicable to medical devices more generally, including the requirements for clearance or approval and compliance with manufacturing requirements known as the Quality System Regulation (“QSR”). A product labeled RUO but intended to be used diagnostically may be viewed by the FDA as adulterated and misbranded under the FDCA and is subject to FDA enforcement. The FDA may consider the totality of the circumstances surrounding distribution and use of an RUO product, including how the product is marketed, when determining its intended use.

RUO products cannot make any claims related to safety, effectiveness or diagnostic utility, and they cannot be intended for human clinical diagnostic use. In November 2013, the FDA issued a final guidance on products labeled RUO, which, among other things, reaffirmed that a company may not make any clinical or diagnostic claims about an RUO product. If the FDA were to determine, based on the totality of circumstances, that our products labeled and marketed for RUO are intended for diagnostic purposes, they would be considered medical devices that could require clearance or approval prior to commercialization.

European Union Regulation

A limited number of our products are classified as IVD medical devices in the European Union. Commercialization of IVD medical devices in the EEA (comprised of the 27 EU Member States plus Iceland, Liechtenstein and Norway, and the United Kingdom, until the end of the transition period on December 31 provided for in the withdrawal agreement between the European Union and the United Kingdom), is regulated by the European Union. The EU requires that all IVD medical devices placed on the market in the EEA must meet the relevant essential requirements laid down in Annex I of Directive 98/79/EC (the “In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices Directive” or “IVDD”). The most fundamental essential requirement is that an in vitro medical device must be designed and manufactured in such a way that it will not compromise the clinical condition or safety of patients or the safety and health of users and others. In addition, the device must achieve the performances intended by the manufacturer and be designed, manufactured, and packaged in a suitable manner. To demonstrate compliance with the essential requirements laid down in Annex I to the IVDD, manufacturers must undergo a conformity assessment procedure, which varies according to the type of in-vitro diagnostic medical device and its classification. Except for low-risk IVD medical devices, where the manufacturer can self-declare the conformity of its products with the essential requirements, a conformity assessment procedure requires the intervention of a so-called Notified Body. The Notified Body would typically audit and examine a product’s technical dossiers and the manufacturers’ quality system. If satisfied that the relevant product conforms to the relevant essential requirements, the Notified Body issues a certificate of conformity, which the manufacturer uses as a basis for its own declaration of conformity. The manufacturer may then apply the required “CE Mark” to the device, which allows the device to be placed on the market throughout the EEA.

In April 2017, the European Parliament passed the In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices Regulation (Regulation 2017/746), which repeals and replaces the IVDD. Unlike directives, which must be implemented into the national laws of the EU member States, the regulations would be directly applicable, i.e., without the need for adoption of EU member State laws implementing them, in all EU member States and are intended to eliminate current differences in the regulation of medical devices among EU member States. The In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices Regulation, among other things, is intended to establish a uniform, transparent, predictable and sustainable regulatory framework across the EEA for medical devices and ensure a high level of safety and health while supporting innovation. The In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices Regulation will become applicable five years after publication (in May 2022). Once applicable, the In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices Regulation will among other things:

 

   

strengthen the rules on placing devices on the market and reinforce surveillance once they are available;

 

122


Table of Contents
   

establish explicit provisions on manufacturers’ responsibilities for the follow-up of the quality, performance and safety of devices placed on the market;

 

   

improve the traceability of IVD medical devices throughout the supply chain to the end-user or patient through a unique identification number;

 

   

set up a central database to provide patients, healthcare professionals and the public with comprehensive information on products available in the EU; and

 

   

strengthen rules for the assessment of certain high-risk devices which may have to undergo an additional check by experts before they are placed on the market.

Legal Proceedings

We are not subject to any material legal proceedings.

Insurance

We maintain commercial insurance programs with third parties in the areas of property and business interruption, employers’ liability, product liability and cyber security, among others. In addition, we hold warrant indemnity insurance in respect of the Expedeon Acquisition. We self-insure certain risks inherent in our business which, taken together with the deductible levels and exclusions contained within our third-party programs, results in our recording of accruals for incurred claims. Our ultimate exposure may be mitigated by amounts we expect to recover from third parties associated with such claims.

 

123


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Board Members

The following table sets forth the name and position of each of our executive officers and board members as of the date of this prospectus:

 

Name

   Age     

Position

Executive officers

     

Alan Hirzel

     51      Chief Executive Officer and Director

Michael Baldock

     54      Chief Financial Officer and Director

Non-executive board members

     

Peter Allen(2)(3)

     62      Chairman of the Board

Mara Aspinall(1)(2)(3)

     56      Director

Giles Kerr(1)(2)(3)

     59      Director

Louise Patten(1)(2)(3)

     64      Director

 

(1)

Audit and Risk Committee member

(2)

Remuneration Committee member

(3)

Nomination Committee member

The current business addresses for our executive officers and board members is c/o Abcam plc, Discovery Drive, Cambridge Biomedical Campus, Cambridge CB2 0AX, United Kingdom.

Executive Officers

The following is a brief summary of the business experience of our executive officers.

Alan Hirzel has served as our Chief Executive Officer since September 2014 and as a member of our board since January 2014. Prior to joining Abcam, Mr. Hirzel was a partner at Bain & Company where he advised global executives and private equity investors on growth strategy, performance improvement and acquisitions. Early in his career, Mr. Hirzel worked in a variety of roles from life science researcher at Cornell University to new product development research at Kraft Foods. Mr. Hirzel holds BS, MS, and MBA degrees from Cornell University.

Michael Baldock has served as our Chief Financial Officer since February 2020 and as a member of our board since February 2020. From November 2008 to January 2020, Mr. Baldock was a founding partner at Ondra Partners, an independent financial advisory firm. Prior to that, from 2004 to 2007, he was a Managing Director, Global Head of Healthcare and Head of Investment Banking, Americas for HSBC plc, a global universal bank. From 2000 to 2004, he was a Partner of Lazard Frères & Co. LLC, a financial advisory and asset management firm. Mr. Baldock also serves as a non-executive director of Jaws Acquisition Corp. Mr. Baldock received an A.B. in Social Studies from Harvard College.

Non-executive Board Members

The following is a brief summary of the business experience of our non-executive board members.

Peter Allen has served as a member of our board since June 2018. Mr. Allen is currently Non-Executive Chairman of Advanced Medical Solutions plc, Clinigen plc and privately owned Oxford Nanopore Technologies Ltd. He is a Non-Executive Director of Istesso Ltd. Mr. Allen has over 20 years’ experience as an executive director, non-executive director and chairman in a wide range of life science companies. From 2015 to 2009, Mr. Allen served as the Chairman of Diurnal Group plc. From 2009 to 2012, Mr. Allen served as Chairman of Proximagen Neurosciences plc, from 2007 to 2013 he served as Chairman of ProStrakan Group plc, including as interim CEO from 2010 to 2011, and he served as CFO and Deputy CEO of Celltech Group plc from 1992 to 2004. Mr. Allen holds a B.A. in Accountancy and Law from the University of Kent.

 

124


Table of Contents

Mara Aspinall has served as a member of our board since September 2015. Ms. Aspinall is a Director of Allscripts Healthcare Solutions Inc., Castle Biosciences Inc., Blue Cross Blue Shield Arizona Inc., OraSure Technologies Inc., Strateos (previously 3Scan Inc.), RainBird and Paradigm Diagnostics. Ms. Aspinall is a co-founder and Managing Director of BlueStone Venture Partners and CEO of Health Catalysts Group. Previously, Ms. Aspinall was President and CEO of Ventana Medical Systems/Roche Tissue Diagnostics. Ms. Aspinall spent twelve years at Genzyme Corporation (now part of Sanofi) as President of Genzyme Genetics and Genzyme Pharmaceuticals. Ms. Aspinall is co-founder of the International School of Biomedical Diagnostics at Arizona State University, the only institution dedicated to the study of diagnostics as an independent discipline. Ms. Aspinall is also a Fellow of the American Institute for Medical and Biological Engineering. Ms. Aspinall holds a B.A. in International Relations from Tufts University and an M.B.A. from Harvard Business School.

Giles Kerr has served as a member of our board since December 2018. Mr. Kerr is currently a Non-Executive Director of Arix Bioscience plc, Senior plc and Oxford Sciences Innovation and is the Chairman of Paypoint plc. Since 1990, Mr. Kerr has served in a variety of increasingly senior roles at Amersham plc, including Chief Financial Officer and a board member from 1997 to 2004, when the company was acquired by GE Healthcare. Prior to his role at Amersham, Mr. Kerr was a National Partner with Arthur Andersen & Co. Mr. Kerr was Director of Finance of the University of Oxford from 2005 until 2018 and was previously a Director of Victrex plc, BTG plc, Quanta Dialysis Technologies and Elan Corporation Inc. Mr. Kerr holds a B.A. in Economics from the University of York.

Louise Patten has served as a member of our board since March 2014. Ms. Patten is currently a Senior Advisor to Bain & Company and a Non-Executive Director of Arthur J Gallagher (UK) Limited, Arthur J Gallagher Holdings (UK) Limited and Arthur J Gallagher Insurance Brokers Limited. Having started her career in corporate and investment banking, Ms. Patten moved into management consultancy and became a Board Director of the Hilton Group. Since then, Ms. Patten has served on a succession of multi-national listed company boards for more than 20 years as a non-executive director, a senior independent director, a remuneration committee chairman and a company chairman at organizations including the retailers Marks & Spencer plc, GUS plc and Somerfield plc. Ms. Patten holds a M.A. from Oxford University.

Corporate Governance Practices and Foreign Private Issuer Status

As a public company incorporated in England and Wales and that has shares admitted to AIM, we are not required to have regard to the U.K. Corporate Governance Code. Our board is, however, committed to maintaining high standards of corporate governance, and we intend to apply the U.K. Corporate Governance Code and comply with its principles and provisions so far as is practicable and appropriate given our size and status as an AIM-traded company.

As a “foreign private issuer,” as defined by the SEC, we will be permitted to follow home country corporate governance practices instead of certain corporate governance practices required by Nasdaq applicable to U.S. domestic issuers. We intend to voluntarily follow most Nasdaq corporate governance rules. However, we intend to follow U.K. corporate governance practices in lieu of the Nasdaq corporate governance rules as follows:

 

   

We do not intend to follow Nasdaq Rule 5620(c) regarding quorum requirements applicable to meetings of shareholders. Such quorum requirements are not required under English law. In accordance with generally accepted business practice, our Articles of Association provide alternative quorum requirements that are generally applicable to meetings of shareholders.

 

   

We do not intend to follow Nasdaq Rule 5605(b)(2), which requires that independent directors regularly meet in executive session, where only independent directors are present. Our independent directors may choose to meet in executive session at their discretion.

 

   

We do not intend to follow Nasdaq Rule 5635(c), which requires shareholder approval for the establishment of or any material amendments to equity compensation or purchase plans or other equity

 

125


Table of Contents
 

compensation arrangements. We will follow English law with respect to any requirement to obtain shareholder approval in connection with equity compensation or purchase plans or other equity compensation arrangements.

 

   

We do not intend to follow Nasdaq Rule 5635(d), which requires shareholder approval in order to enter into any transaction, other than a public offering, involving the sale, issuance or potential issuance by the Company of ordinary shares (or securities convertible into or exercisable for ordinary shares) equal to 20% or more of the outstanding share capital of the Company or 20% or more of the voting power outstanding before the issuance for less than the greater of book or market value of the ordinary shares. We will follow English law with respect to any requirement to obtain shareholder approval in connection with any private placements of equity securities.

We may in the future decide to use other foreign private issuer exemptions with respect to some or all of the other Nasdaq corporate governance rules.

Although we may rely on certain home country corporate governance practices, we will be required to comply with the Notification of Noncompliance requirement (Nasdaq Rule 5625) and the Voting Rights requirement (Nasdaq Rule 5640). Further, we will be required to have an audit committee that satisfies Nasdaq Rule 5605(c)(3), which addresses audit committee responsibilities and authority, and consists of committee members that meet the independence requirements of Nasdaq Rule 5605(c)(2)(A)(ii).

If we cease to be a “foreign private issuer” under the Nasdaq rules and the Exchange Act, as applicable, we will take all action necessary to comply with applicable Nasdaq corporate governance rules.

Because we are a foreign private issuer, our directors and senior management are not subject to short-swing profit and insider trading reporting obligations under Section 16 of the Exchange Act. They will, however, be subject to the obligations to report changes in share ownership under Section 13 of the Exchange Act and related SEC rules.

Composition of our Board of Directors

Our board of directors currently consists of, and will consist of following this offering, six members. We expect our board to determine that four of our six directors, Mr. Allen, Ms. Aspinall, Mr. Kerr and Ms. Patten, do not have a relationship that would interfere with the exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the responsibilities of a director and that each of these directors is “independent” as that term is defined under the rules of Nasdaq. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.

In accordance with our Articles of Association, the following directors will retire from office and be eligible for re-election:

 

   

any director who was not elected or re-elected at either of the two preceding annual general meetings and any director who wishes to retire and offer himself for re-election (whether by reason of the U.K. Corporate Governance Code or for any other reason); and

 

   

such number of the directors (excluding any director who is required to retire under our Articles of Association) as would, when added to the number of directors (if any) retiring in accordance with the above bullet point represent one third of the directors. If one third is not a whole number then the number of directors to retire is the number nearest to one third.

We intend to continue to comply with the requirements of provision 18 of the U.K. Corporate Governance Code that all directors be subject to annual re-election.

Retiring directors are eligible for re-election. See “Description of Share Capital and Articles of Association—Articles of Association—Directors—Rotation of Directors.”

 

126


Table of Contents

Committees of our Board of Directors

Our board has three standing committees: an Audit and Risk Committee, a Remuneration Committee and a Nomination Committee. Each of these committees will be governed by a charter that is consistent with applicable U.K. law and SEC and Nasdaq corporate governance rules, effective upon the effectiveness of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part, and which will be available on the Investors section of our website at www.abcamplc.com. The information contained on, or that can be accessed through, our website does not form part of this prospectus.

Audit and Risk Committee

Our Audit and Risk Committee consists of Mara Aspinall, Giles Kerr and Louise Patten. Mr. Kerr serves as the chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee. We expect our board to determine that all members of our Audit and Risk Committee meet the requirements for financial literacy under the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC and the Nasdaq corporate governance rules. We expect our board to determine that Mr. Kerr is an audit committee financial expert as defined by the SEC rules and has the requisite financial experience as defined by the Nasdaq corporate governance rules.

We expect our board to determine that each member of our audit committee is “independent” as such term is defined in Rule 10A-3(b)(1) under the Exchange Act, which is different from the general test for independence of board and committee members.

The Audit and Risk Committee will be responsible for, among other things:

 

   

recommending the appointment of the independent auditor to the general meeting of shareholders;

 

   

the appointment, remuneration, retention and oversight of any independent auditor engaged for the purpose of preparing or issuing an audit report or performing other audit services;

 

   

pre-approving the audit services and non-audit services to be provided by our independent auditor before the auditor is engaged to render such services;

 

   

evaluating the independent auditor’s qualifications, performance and independence, and presenting its conclusions to the full board on at least an annual basis;

 

   

reviewing and discussing with the executive officers, the board and the independent auditor our financial statements and our financial reporting process;

 

   

approving or ratifying any related party transaction (as defined in our related party transaction policy) in accordance with our related party transaction policy;

 

   

reviewing and overseeing the adequacy and effectiveness of our financial reporting and internal control policies and systems, covering all material controls, including financial, operational and compliance controls, and the procedures for the identification, assessment, management and reporting of risks;

 

   

periodically reviewing with management and the independent auditor our code of conduct and reviewing and reassessing the adequacy of the procedures in place to enforce the code of conduct; and

 

   

developing and recommending to the board our corporate governance guidelines, reviewing and reassessing the adequacy of such corporate governance guidelines and recommending any proposed changes to the board.

The Audit and Risk Committee will meet at least four times per year and at such other times as the chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee shall think fit. The Audit and Risk Committee will meet at least once per year with our independent auditor, without our management being present.

 

127


Table of Contents

Remuneration Committee

Our Remuneration Committee consists of Peter Allen, Mara Aspinall, Giles Kerr and Louise Patten. Ms. Patten serves as chairman of the committee. We expect our board to determine that each member of our Remuneration Committee is independent under the Nasdaq corporate governance rules, including the additional independence requirements applicable to the members of a remuneration committee.

The Remuneration Committee will be responsible for, among other things:

 

   

identifying, reviewing and proposing policies relevant to, and setting of individual remuneration packages for, the Chairman, the executive members of the board and senior management (the remuneration of non-executive directors shall be a matter for Chairman and the executive members of the board);

 

   

evaluating each executive leadership team member’s performance in light of such policies and reporting to the board;

 

   

analyzing the possible outcomes of the variable remuneration components and how they may affect the remuneration of the executive leadership team;

 

   

recommending any equity long-term incentive component of each executive leadership team member’s compensation in line with the remuneration policy and reviewing our executive officer compensation and benefits policies generally; and

 

   

reviewing and assessing risks arising from our compensation policies and practices.

The Remuneration Committee will meet at least twice each year, and at such other times as the chairman of the Remuneration Committee shall think fit.

Nomination Committee

Our Nomination Committee consists of Peter Allen, Mara Aspinall, Giles Kerr and Louise Patten. Mr. Allen serves as chairman of the committee.

The Nomination Committee will be responsible for, among other things:

 

   

drawing up selection criteria and appointment procedures for board members;

 

   

regularly reviewing and evaluating the structure, size and composition of our board and making recommendations to the board with regard to any adjustments that are deemed necessary or advisable;

 

   

identifying and nominating, for the approval of our board, candidates to fill vacancies on the Board and its corresponding committees;

 

   

assessing the functioning of our board and individual members and reporting the results of such assessment to the Board; and

 

   

keeping under review the leadership needs of the Company, both executive and non-executive, and planning the orderly succession of such appointments.

 

The Nomination Committee will meet at least once each year, and at such other times as the chairman of the Nomination Committee shall think fit.

Code of Conduct

We have adopted a Code of Conduct, which covers a broad range of matters including the handling of conflicts of interest, compliance issues and other corporate policies such as equal opportunity and non-discrimination standards. This Code of Conduct applies to all of our executive officers, board members and employees.

 

128


Table of Contents

We intend to disclose on our website any amendment to, or waiver from, a provision of our Code of Conduct that applies to our directors or executive officers to the extent required under the rules of the SEC or Nasdaq. Following this offering, a current copy of the Code of Conduct will be available on the Investors section of our website at www.abcamplc.com. The information contained on, or that can be accessed through, our website does not form part of this prospectus.

Executive Officer Remuneration

The following table presents the individual compensation and benefits provided to our current executive officers during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020:

 

Name

   Salary      Bonus(1)      All Other
Compensation(2)
     Total(3)  
     (in £)  

Executive officers

           

Alan Hirzel

     615,000        890,150        90,373        1,595,523  

Michael Baldock

     167,000        215,488        36,265        418,753  

 

(1)

Amounts shown reflect bonuses awarded, both in cash and shares, following the achievement of performance goals.

(2)

Amounts shown represent the value of benefits paid by us, including health benefit payments and pension contributions.

(3)

Total compensation set out in this table does not include the value of options to acquire our ordinary shares or awards granted to or held by our current executive officers, which is described in “—Equity Compensation Arrangements” below.

Executive Officer Service Agreements

Alan Hirzel

We entered into a service agreement with Alan Hirzel, which became effective on September 9, 2014. This agreement entitles Mr. Hirzel to receive an initial annual base salary of £320,000 (which, following a number of increases, was increased to £629,760 on July 1, 2020) and an opportunity to earn an annual discretionary performance-based bonus, subject to the achievement of performance goals determined in accordance with our annual bonus plan. Mr. Hirzel is also enrolled in our defined contribution pension scheme at a contribution rate of at least 8% of his annual base salary, with at least 5% of which Mr. Hirzel must contribute and at least 3% of which we will contribute on Mr. Hirzel’s behalf. However, we provide Mr. Hirzel with an allowance equal to 5% of his annual base salary, which will be applied to Mr. Hirzel’s contribution to the pension scheme or may instead be applied towards other benefits within our flexible benefits scheme. If the annual and/or lifetime ceiling for pension contributions has already been reached, Mr. Hirzel can take this allowance as additional compensation. Additionally, Mr. Hirzel is entitled to the following benefits: (i) eligibility to participate in our life insurance scheme with coverage equal to at least five times his annual base salary, (ii) private medical insurance coverage for himself, his partner and his children (while under age 18 or pursuing full-time education) at our expense, (iii) an annual health screening and (iv) annual tax compliance support for his statutory filings in the United Kingdom or United States.

Either party may terminate the service agreement by giving the other party at least 12 months’ written notice, unless Mr. Hirzel is terminated for cause (as described in Mr. Hirzel’s service agreement) or we terminate Mr. Hirzel and make a payment in lieu of notice equal to his base salary and any benefits to which he would otherwise be entitled for any remaining notice period. Mr. Hirzel is obliged to seek alternative income during this period (subject to the restrictive covenants referenced below), and such payment in lieu of notice will be reduced by the amount of any alternative income Mr. Hirzel receives. Mr. Hirzel’s service agreement also contains restrictive covenants pursuant to which he has agreed to refrain from competing with us or soliciting our key employees or customers for a period of six months following his termination of employment.

 

129


Table of Contents

Michael Baldock

We entered into a service agreement with Michael Baldock, which became effective on February 3, 2020. This agreement entitles Mr. Baldock to receive an initial annual base salary of £400,000 (which was subsequently increased to £408,000 on July 1, 2020) and an opportunity to earn an annual discretionary performance-based bonus of up to 150% of his annual base salary (with an initial target of 75% of his annual base salary), subject to the achievement of performance goals determined in accordance with our annual bonus plan. Of any bonus earned, at least 30% of such bonus amount will be paid in the form of a deferred share award that is expected to vest in full on the second anniversary of the date of grant. Under this agreement, Mr. Baldock is also entitled to receive an initial equity award under the Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “LTIP”) with a value of £500,000, which is scheduled to vest in three annual installments, subject to the achievement of performance goals determined in accordance with the LTIP. Mr. Baldock will also be eligible to receive additional annual equity awards under the LTIP.

Mr. Baldock will be enrolled in our defined contribution pension scheme at a contribution rate of at least 8% of his annual base salary, at least 5% of which Mr. Baldock must contribute and at least 3% of which we will contribute on Mr. Baldock’s behalf. In addition, we will provide Mr. Baldock with an allowance equal to 5% of his annual base salary, which will be applied to Mr. Baldock’s contribution to the pension scheme or may instead be applied towards other benefits within our flexible benefit scheme. If the annual and/or lifetime ceiling for pension contributions has already been reached, Mr. Baldock can take this allowance as additional compensation. Additionally, Mr. Baldock is entitled to the following benefits: (i) eligibility to participate in our life insurance scheme with coverage equal to at least five times his annual base salary, (ii) private medical insurance coverage for himself, his partner and his children (while under age 18 or pursuing full-time education) at our expense, (iii) certain relocation expenses, (iv) an annual health screening and (v) annual tax compliance support for his U.K. and U.S. statutory filings.

Either party may terminate the service agreement by giving the other party at least 12 months’ written notice (provided that Mr. Baldock’s employment term will not expire before February 3, 2022), unless Mr. Baldock is terminated for cause (as described in Mr. Baldock’s service agreement) or we place Mr. Baldock on garden leave for all or part of the applicable notice period (up to 26 weeks). However, we will provide Mr. Baldock with an allowance equal to 5% of his annual base salary, which will be applied to Mr. Baldock’s contribution to the pension scheme or may instead be applied towards other benefits within our flexible benefits scheme. If the annual and/or lifetime ceiling for pension contributions has already been reached, Mr. Baldock can take this allowance as additional compensation. In the event of Mr. Baldock’s termination without cause or voluntary resignation (other than as would constitute constructive dismissal), Mr. Baldock will remain eligible to receive a prorated portion of his annual bonus in cash, and his unvested equity awards will remain outstanding and vest in full on the relevant vesting dates and, if applicable, subject to the relevant performance conditions, with certain awards under the LTIP subject to proration for the portion of the applicable performance period that has elapsed prior to termination. Mr. Baldock’s service agreement also contains restrictive covenants pursuant to which he has agreed to refrain from competing with us or soliciting our key employees or customers for a period of six months following his termination of employment.

Equity Compensation Arrangements

We have granted or may grant equity-based awards under the following six share schemes: (i) AbShare; (ii) the Annual Bonus Plan; (iii) the Company Share Option Plan; (iv) the Share Incentive Plan; (v) the Long-Term Incentive Plan and (vi) the Share Option Scheme (as defined below). As a foreign private issuer, we may follow our home country corporate governance rules instead of certain corporate governance requirements of Nasdaq, and we intend to be exempt from Nasdaq regulations that require a listed U.S. company to seek shareholder approval for the implementation of certain equity compensation plans and issuances of ordinary shares.

 

130


Table of Contents

AbShare

Our Remuneration Committee adopted AbShare on September 4, 2018.

Eligibility, Awards, and Administration

AbShare provides for the grant of our fully paid ordinary shares to our employees who are employed on a permanent contract or equivalent basis. The enrollment window for AbShare ran from September 12 to October 12, 2018 and was the only chance for current employees at that time to join AbShare. Subsequently, new permanent employees (and those moving from temporary to permanent contracts) are eligible to participate in AbShare on a pro-rated basis. However, employees commencing permanent employment after April 1, 2021 will not be eligible to participate. Our executive directors, Alan Hirzel and Michael Baldock, are not eligible to participate in AbShare. Participants in AbShare contribute 5% of their base salary over three years (1.67% per annum), which is used to buy our ordinary shares at the end of the three-year savings period. In return, we match this investment by the employee at a ratio of ten shares for every one share purchased, subject to financial performance criteria being satisfied and continuous employment. We may not grant awards under AbShare if such awards would cause the number of ordinary shares under AbShare and any other Company employee share plan to exceed 10% of our ordinary shares. AbShare is administered by our board of directors who has authority to adopt any regulations necessary for administering AbShare and has final authority to interpret and construe AbShare provisions.

Vesting and Holding

Awards that are purchased with employee contributions fully vest at the end of the savings period, subject to any applicable share dealing restrictions. Matching awards that we grant vest at the end of the savings period only to the extent that our board of directors has determined the financial performance criteria has been met. While shares that are purchased with employee contributions are not subject to any holding period, 50% of the matching shares that we grant are subject to a holding period of one year (unless otherwise specified by the board of directors) during which such shares may not be sold, transferred, or otherwise encumbered.

Leavers

Generally, participants may not withdraw from AbShare before the end of the savings period except in cases of extreme hardship, in which case the participant’s AbShare award will immediately lapse and contributions already made will be returned to the participant as soon as reasonably practicable. Upon a termination of employment, AbShare awards will lapse and contributions will be returned, unless such termination of employment is due to death, illness, injury, retirement, disability, redundancy, certain changes to the participant’s employing entity, certain transferences or any other reason our board of directors may determine. Upon such a termination, participants will cease making contributions and contributions already made will be used to purchase ordinary shares at the end of the savings period (at which time such participants will also receive a proportional number of matching shares from us).

Certain Transactions

Upon certain change of control and other corporate events, as described in the AbShare plan rules, any unvested purchased awards will immediately vest on a pro-rated basis and any matching awards will immediately vest in full. Upon other corporate events that may materially impact the value of our ordinary shares, such as a wind-up, demerger, delisting, or special dividend, our board of directors will determine whether unvested AbShare awards will vest upon the occurrence of such event. The number of shares and/or the purchase price of shares subject to outstanding awards may also be adjusted by our board of directors in the event of certain corporate transactions.

 

131


Table of Contents

Amendment and Termination

Our board of directors may, at any time, amend the AbShare plan rules, except that no amendment may be made that would disadvantage the existing rights of participants, unless consent from a majority of the affected participants is obtained. Additionally, our board of directors may pass a resolution at any time terminating AbShare, provided such termination does not prejudice the existing rights of participants.

Annual Bonus Plan

Our board of directors adopted The Abcam plc Annual Bonus Plan (the “Annual Bonus Plan”) on September 18, 2012, which has been subsequently amended.

Eligibility, Awards, and Administration

All employees who devote substantially all of their working hours to us are eligible to receive awards under the Annual Bonus Plan. However, we typically only grant Annual Bonus Plan awards to employees in executive and senior management positions. Under the Annual Bonus Plan, each participant has a target bonus that is based on a percentage of the employee’s base salary. The extent to which target bonus amounts are paid out depends on whether certain performance targets are achieved. These performance targets currently involve financial, strategic and individual criteria, and bonuses awarded under the Annual Bonus Plan can be up to twice the target bonus amounts. Under the Annual Bonus Plan, our Remuneration Committee may pay bonuses in the form of cash awards and/or deferred share awards. Our current policy is to grant 70% of each bonus as a cash award and 30% of each bonus as a deferred share award. Deferred share awards may be in the form of either a conditional right to acquire our ordinary shares or nil cost options, which convey a right to acquire a certain number of our ordinary shares for no payment or nominal payment. We may not grant awards under the Annual Bonus Plan if such awards would cause the number of ordinary shares committed under the Annual Bonus Plan and any other Company employee share plan in the preceding 10 year period to exceed 10% of our ordinary shares. The Annual Bonus Plan is administered by our Remuneration Committee, which may make, amend, or rescind regulations for the administration of the Annual Bonus Plan.

Vesting, Exercise, and Clawback

Cash awards granted under the Annual Bonus Plan are fully vested upon grant. Deferred share awards generally vest on the second anniversary of the date that is ten business days from the date on which we announce our preliminary results for the relevant fiscal year, subject to applicable share dealing restrictions and the achievement of performance targets. Our Remuneration Committee may, in its discretion, settle any deferred share awards in cash instead of ordinary shares. Furthermore, our Remuneration Committee may require the forfeiture of any unpaid cash award or the reduction or cancellation of certain deferred share awards in the event there is (i) a material adverse adjustments to our audited consolidated accounts for any accounting period ending before the vesting of the award or (ii) reasonable evidence of fraud or other gross misconduct or, for awards granted after July 1, 2015, material dishonesty, risk management failure or material wrongdoing on the part of the award recipient.

Upon termination of employment, all unvested awards and unexercised nil cost options shall lapse, unless such termination of employment is due to illness, permanent disability, redundancy, retirement (by way of mutual agreement with us), certain changes to the employee’s employing entity or any other reason our Remuneration Committee may determine. Upon such a termination and unless our Remuneration Committee determines otherwise, deferred shares awards shall remain outstanding with vested nil cost options remaining exercisable for 12 months following such termination, unless the award recipients are U.S. tax residents, in which case deferred share awards shall become fully vested.

Certain Transactions

Upon certain change in control events such as takeovers, compulsory acquisitions, reconstructions, amalgamations and wind-ups, all deferred share awards that are not substituted shall fully vest on the date of the

 

132


Table of Contents

applicable event. Furthermore, if our Remuneration Committee becomes aware that we will be affected by a demerger, distribution (other than an ordinary dividend) or other transaction, it may accelerate vesting of all or a portion of unvested and outstanding deferred share awards.

Amendment and Termination

Our Remuneration Committee may, at any time, amend the Annual Bonus Plan, except that no amendment may be made that would adversely affect the existing rights of award recipients, unless the affected award recipients have approved such amendment.

Company Share Option Plan

Our board of directors adopted the Company Share Option Plan 2009 (the “CSOP”) on November 5, 2009, which was subsequently amended. As of June 30, 2019 and 2020, we had no ordinary shares authorized for issuance under the CSOP. We do not intend to grant equity awards under the CSOP in the future.

Long-Term Incentive Plan

Our board of directors adopted the LTIP on November 3, 2008, which was subsequently amended.

Eligibility, Awards, and Administration

All our employees are eligible to participate in the LTIP. Under the LTIP, our Remuneration Committee may grant share-based incentive awards to attract, motivate and retain the talent for which we compete. LTIP awards can be in the form of conditional rights to acquire our ordinary shares (typically for non-U.K. tax residents), or nil cost options (typically for U.K. tax residents), which convey a right to acquire a certain number of our ordinary shares for no payment or nominal payment. LTIP awards vest based on achievement of certain performance targets, which may involve financial and strategic criteria. We may not grant awards under the LTIP if such awards would cause the number of ordinary shares committed under the LTIP and any other Company employee share plan in the preceding 10 year period to exceed 10% of our ordinary shares. The LTIP is administered by our Remuneration Committee, which may make and amend regulations for the implementation and administration of the LTIP.

Vesting, Exercise, and Clawback

LTIP awards typically vest on the third anniversary of the date on which they are granted. The portion of the LTIP award that vests depends on how we perform as a company over a three-year performance period (starting with the fiscal year in which the LTIP award is granted), as measured against predefined performance requirements. Upon vesting, shares are immediately transferred to employees who hold conditional rights to acquire our ordinary shares and nil cost options become exercisable. Nil cost options generally remain exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the grant date, subject to earlier termination upon a cessation of employment. Our Remuneration Committee may impose post-exercise retention requirements on shares received by a participant. Our Remuneration Committee may reduce or cancel any unvested LTIP award in the event there is a material adverse adjustment to our audited consolidated accounts for any accounting period ending before the vesting of the award. Additionally, our Remuneration Committee may reduce or reclaim any LTIP award in the event there is a material adverse adjustment to our audited consolidated accounts due to fraud or other gross misconduct, material dishonesty, material failure of risk management or material wrongdoing on the part of the employee for a period of two years following the vesting of the award or throughout any period that the employee is subject to a work related criminal investigation.

Upon termination of employment, all unvested awards and unexercised nil cost options shall lapse, unless our Remuneration Committee determines otherwise for reasons including illness, disability, injury, death, redundancy or retirement. Upon such a termination and unless our Remuneration Committee determines otherwise, LTIP awards shall vest as to a prorated portion of the award based on the time elapsed between the

 

133


Table of Contents

grant date and the termination date and the achievement of the predefined performance requirements as of the termination date.

Certain Transactions

Upon certain change in control events described in the LTIP plan rules, our Remuneration Committee will notify each LTIP participant of the event and determine, in its absolute discretion, what portion of the LTIP awards will become vested, taking into account considerations such as the time elapsed from the grant date and the achievement level of the predetermined performance requirements. Alternatively, LTIP awards may be cancelled and substituted with replacement awards of equivalent value covering shares of the new controlling entity. In the event of our voluntary winding up, all LTIP awards will fully vest. Upon a merger or demerger that does not constitute a change in control, our Remuneration Committee will have discretion regarding whether to vest or adjust any portion of outstanding LTIP awards. Our Remuneration Committee has the discretion to adjust the exercise period for nil cost options in light of the previously described events.

Amendment and Termination

Our Remuneration Committee may, at any time, amend the regulations for implementing and administering the LTIP, except that no amendment may be made that would materially affect the subsisting rights of award recipients unless a majority of affected award recipients have consented to and sanctioned such amendment. Certain amendments to the LTIP rules require our approval in a general meeting, including the limit on the aggregate number of shares over which awards can be made and the the price at which shares may be acquired under an award. The LTIP will terminate on the earlier of the fifth anniversary of the LTIP’s adoption or renewal or another termination date determined by our Remuneration Committee.

Share Incentive Plan

We adopted the Abcam plc Share Incentive Plan (the “SIP”) on September 26, 2008, which was subsequently amended.

Eligibility, Awards, and Administration

The SIP is an HMRC approved plan, which we maintained until October 2018 and under which all U.K.-based employees were eligible to participate and purchase our ordinary shares. These shares are referred to as “partnership shares” and are held in trust on behalf of the employees. For every partnership share bought by the employee up to a limit of £1,800 per tax year, we award the employee one matching share, provided the employee remained employed with us for a period of at least three years. Additionally, until October 2018, we awarded “free shares” to employees with a value of up to £3,600 per tax year, and we also awarded “dividend shares” to employees that were equivalent to the cash dividends paid in respect of shares held on behalf of SIP participants.

No employees will receive awards under the SIP while AbShare is in operation (with the exception of dividend reinvestments). The SIP is administered by our board of directors, which may make and amend regulations for the implementation and administration of the SIP.

Vesting and Holding

Partnership shares that are purchased with employee contributions are fully vested upon acquisition by the employee. Matching shares and free shares that we grant are subject to a holding period of at least three years (but no more than five years). At our board of directors’ discretion, granting of free shares may be conditioned upon the achievement of certain performance targets that it specifies.

Upon a termination of employment, any shares held on behalf of such employee will be removed from the SIP and all contributions made by such employee will be returned as soon as practicable following the termination date. Any matching shares or free shares held on behalf of such employee (whether during the

 

134


Table of Contents

accumulation period or the holding period) shall be forfeited upon such employee’s termination, unless such termination is due to death, injury, disability, retirement, redundancy, certain changes to the participant’s employing entity, or certain transferences. Upon such a termination, the participant is entitled to retain any matching shares and free shares held on his or her behalf.

Amendment and Termination

Our board of directors may, at any time, amend the SIP plan rules, except that no amendment may be made which would materially affect the subsisting rights of award recipients unless a majority of affected award recipients have consented to and sanctioned such amendment and except in other limited circumstances (including where such amendment would cause the SIP to cease to be a qualified share incentive plan under applicable U.K. law).

Share Option Scheme

Our board of directors adopted the 2005 Share Option Scheme, which was subsequently amended, and 2015 Share Option Plan (ISO/Unapproved) (together, the “Share Option Scheme” or “SOS”) on October 31, 2005 and November 5, 2015, respectively. Under the SOS, we grant options to our employees who reside in the state of California. Participants generally make monthly contributions during a specified savings period and are eligible to receive a “market value option” with an exercise price no less than fair market value (which corresponds to the monthly contributions made during the savings period) and a “matching option,” which is a right to obtain an additional number of shares at no cost to the participant. The options may be subject to vesting. Upon a termination of employment due to death, illness, injury, retirement, disability, redundancy, certain changes to the participant’s employing entity, certain employee transfers or any other reason our board of directors may determine (other than a summary dismissal) that participants will cease making contributions, and the number of shares as to which the option will be exercisable shall be pro-rated. Upon any other termination of employment, options will generally lapse and contributions will be returned. Upon certain change of control and other corporate events, as described in the SOS plan rules, any unvested options will generally immediately vest on a pro-rated basis. The maximum number of our ordinary shares that may be subject to options granted to eligible California employees under the SOS is 5,000,000 shares.

 

 

135


Table of Contents

The following table summarizes the number of outstanding shares and options granted to executive officers and non-employee directors, as of June 30, 2020:

 

Name

   Ordinary
Shares
     Ordinary
Shares
Underlying
Options
     Exercise
Price Per
Ordinary
Share (in £)
     Grant Date      Expiration
Date (if
applicable)
    

Plan Name

Executive officers

                 

Alan Hirzel

     180,255        60,294               11/03/2017        12/03/2020     

LTIP

        194,647               11/07/2018        12/07/2021      LTIP
        193,547               11/14/2019        12/14/2022      LTIP
        10,308               10/26/2018        10/24/2020      ABP
        13,026               10/25/2019        10/23/2021      ABP
        345               11/03/2017        N/A     

SIP - Free Shares

        185               12/07/2017        N/A     

SIP - Matching Shares

        42               12/08/2017        N/A     

SIP - Dividend

        16               04/12/2018        N/A     

SIP - Dividend

        45               11/30/2018        N/A     

SIP - Dividend

        18               04/12/2019        N/A     

SIP - Dividend

        39               11/29/2019        N/A     

SIP - Dividend

        19               04/17/2020        N/A     

SIP - Dividend

Total

     180,255        472,531              

Michael Baldock

            62,942               03/09/2020        12/14/2022     

LTIP

        13,578               03/09/2020        03/05/2021      LTIP
        13,578               03/09/2020        03/05/2022      LTIP
        13,578               03/09/2020        03/05/2023      LTIP

Total

            104,216               LTIP

Non-executive board members

                 

Peter Allen

     14961                                 

Mara Aspinall

     12,922                                 

Giles Kerr

     460                                 

Louise Patten

     53,716                                 

Non-Employee Director Remuneration

The following table presents the individual compensation and benefits provided to our current non-employee directors during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020:

 

Name

   Fees Delivered in
Cash
     Fees Delivered in
Shares
     Total Fees  
            (in £)         

Non-executive board members

        

Peter Allen

     150,000        75,000        225,000  

Mara Aspinall(1)

     49,212        23,333        72,545  

Giles Kerr(2)

     51,955        25,978        77,933  

Louise Patten

     55,000        27,500        82,500  

 

(1)

Ms. Aspinall received tax compliance support in the preparation of her tax returns relating to the director’s fees for which £2,545 was paid by us in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 and is included in the total fee figures for each year.

(2)

Mr. Kerr began receiving a £12,500 supplemental fee following his appointment as Chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee on November 13, 2019.

 

 

136


Table of Contents

Non-Employee Director Letter Agreements

We review our fee structure for non-executive directors on an annual basis and determine remuneration based on, among other things, a review of current practices in other companies. We have entered into letter agreements with our non-employee directors for their services, which are subject to a one-month notice period, provided that, following a change in control of the Company, we may only terminate Mr. Allen upon three months’ prior notice.

In 2016, we introduced a fee structure whereby a portion of non-employee director fees would be delivered as a fixed number of fully paid ordinary shares. These shares are not granted under any of our equity incentive plans. Currently, one-third of non-employee director fees are delivered as fully paid ordinary shares and the remainder of such fees are delivered as cash. Shares delivered to non-employee directors are awarded at the beginning of the first open period following the announcement of the annual results. Applicable taxes are deducted from the share component of the annual fees and the net amount is used to purchase the actual shares delivered to each non-employee director. Each non-employee director has committed not to sell or transfer these shares during the term of their directorship. Effective as of July 1, 2018, our non-executive directors receive a supplemental allowance of £12,500 per annum for service as Chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee and Chairman of the Remuneration Committee.

Pension, Retirement or Similar Benefits

We operate a flexible benefits scheme, which includes a defined contribution pension plan, in which all of our employees are eligible to participate. We generally make payments of up to 8% of annual base salary for all U.K. participants. Our executive officers also receive a range of other benefits such as life insurance, private medical cover and annual health screens, as described in “—Executive Officer Service Agreements” above.

The total amount set aside or accrued by us in respect of pension, retirement or similar benefits to our current directors and our executive officers in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 was £85,000, which represents contributions made by us in respect of a defined contribution scheme in which our executive officers who served throughout the fiscal year ended June 30, 2020 participated.

Insurance and Indemnification

To the extent permitted by the Companies Act 2006, we are empowered to indemnify our directors against any liability they incur by reason of their directorship. We maintain directors’ and officers’ insurance to insure such persons against certain liabilities. We expect to enter into a deed of indemnity with each of our directors and executive officers.

In addition to such indemnification, we provide our directors and executive officers with directors’ and officers’ liability insurance.

Insofar as indemnification of liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to our board, executive officers or persons controlling us pursuant to the foregoing provisions, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

 

137


Table of Contents

PRINCIPAL SHAREHOLDERS

The following table sets forth information relating to the beneficial ownership of our ordinary shares as of August 31, 2020 and after this offering by:

 

   

each person, or group of affiliated persons, known by us to beneficially own 3% or more of our outstanding ordinary shares;

 

   

each of our board members and executive officers individually; and

 

   

all of our board members and executive officers as a group.

The number of ordinary shares beneficially owned by each entity, person, executive officer or board member is determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC, and the information is not necessarily indicative of beneficial ownership for any other purpose. Under such rules, beneficial ownership includes any shares over which the individual has sole or shared voting power or investment power as well as any shares that the individual has the right to acquire within 60 days of August 31, 2020 through the exercise of any option. Except as otherwise indicated, and subject to applicable community property laws, the persons named in the table have sole voting and investment power with respect to all ordinary shares held by that person.

The percentage of shares beneficially owned before the offering is computed on the basis of 216,173,277 of our ordinary shares as of August 31, 2020. The percentage of shares beneficially owned after the offering is based on the number of our ordinary shares to be outstanding after this offering and assumes no exercise of the option to purchase additional ADSs from us. Ordinary shares that a person has the right to acquire within 60 days of August 31, 2020 are deemed outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage ownership of the person holding such rights, but are not deemed outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage ownership of any other person, except with respect to the percentage ownership of all executive officers and management and supervisory board members as a group. Unless otherwise indicated below, the address for each beneficial owner listed is c/o Abcam plc, Discovery Drive, Cambridge Biomedical Campus, Cambridge CB2 0AX, United Kingdom.

A description of any material relationship that our principal shareholders have had with us or any of our affiliates within the past three years is included under “Related Party Transactions.” The principal shareholders listed below do not have voting rights with respect to their ordinary shares that are different from the voting rights of other holders of our ordinary shares.

 

Name of beneficial owner

   Number of
ordinary
shares
beneficially
owned
before the
offering
     Percentage of
ordinary shares
beneficially owned
 
   Before
offering
    After
offering
 

5% or greater shareholders

       

T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.(1)

     20,583,612        9.5     %  

Jonathan Milner(2)

     18,358,841        8.5    

Durable Capital Partners LP(3)

     14,375,076        6.7    

Harding Loevner(4)

     11,521,339        5.3    

Standard Life Aberdeen(5)

     10,579,075        4.9    

Baillie Gifford & Co. Ltd.(6)

     9,847,737        4.6    

Invesco Advisors Inc.(7) .

     8,188,757        3.8    

BlackRock Inc.(8)

     7,370,806        3.4    

 

138


Table of Contents

Name of beneficial owner

   Number of
ordinary
shares
beneficially
owned
before the
offering
     Percentage of
ordinary shares
beneficially owned
 
   Before
offering
     After
offering
 

Executive officers and board members

        

Alan Hirzel

     *        *     

Michael Baldock

     *        *     

Peter Allen

     *        *     

Mara Aspinall

     *        *     

Giles Kerr

     *        *     

Louise Patten

     *        *     

All executive officers and board members as a group (6 persons)

     *        *     
 

            

 
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

*

Indicates ownership of less than 1%.

(1)

Represents 15,322,784 ordinary shares held by T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc. and 5,260,828 ordinary shares held by T. Rowe Price International Ltd. T. Rowe Price International Ltd. may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc., and the address for T. Rowe Price Associates Inc. is 100 East Pratt Street Baltimore, Maryland 21202, United States. Beneficial ownership information is based on information known to us and a Form TR-1 provided to us on April 21, 2020. The percentage ownership of T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc. and T. Rowe Price International Ltd. increased from 8.54% in August 2017 to 9.52% in August 2020.

(2)

The percentage ownership of Mr. Milner decreased from 10.84% in August 2017 to 8.49% in August 2020.

(3)

Durable Capital Master Fund LP may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by Durable Capital Partners LP, and the address for Durable Capital Master Fund LP is Maples Corporate Services Limited, PO Box 209, Ugland House, Grand Cayman, KY1-1104, Cayman Islands, Cayman Islands. Durable Capital Master Fund LP was founded by Henry Ellenbogen, whom we believe maintains voting and investment control of the shares held by Durable Capital Master Fund LP. Beneficial ownership information is based on information known to us and a Form TR-1 provided to us on April 20, 2020. Durable Capital Master Fund LP did not own any ordinary shares in August 2017.

(4)

Harding Loevner LLC may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by Harding Loevner, and the address for Harding Loevner LLC is 400 Crossing Blvd, 4th Floor, Bridgewater, New Jersey 08807, United States. The percentage ownership of Harding Loevner increased from 3.46% in August 2017 to 5.33% in August 2020.

(5)

Represents 7,828,184 ordinary shares held by Aberdeen Standard Investments, 2,442,191 ordinary shares held by Aberdeen Standard Capital Limited, 295,600 ordinary shares held by Aberdeen Asset Management Ltd. and 13,100 ordinary shares held by Aberdeen Asset Management Inc. Standard Life Aberdeen plc may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by Aberdeen Standard Investments, Aberdeen Standard Capital Limited, Aberdeen Asset Management Ltd. and Aberdeen Asset Management Inc., and the address for Standard Life Aberdeen plc is 1 George Street, Edinburgh, EH2 2LL, United Kingdom. The percentage ownership of Standard Life Aberdeen increased from 4.72% in August 2017 to 4.90% in August 2020.

(6)

Baillie Gifford & Co. Ltd. may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by Baillie Gifford, and the address for Baillie Gifford & Co. Ltd. is Calton Square, 1 Greenside Row, Edinburgh, EH1 3AN, United Kingdom. The percentage ownership of Baillie Gifford decreased from 6.78% in August 2017 to 4.56% in August 2020.

(7)

Invesco Advisors Inc. may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by Invesco Advisors, and the address for Invesco Advisors Inc. is Two Peachtree Pointe, 1555 Peachtree Street, N.E. Suite 1800, Atlanta, Georgia 30309, United States. The percentage ownership of Invesco Advisors increased from 3.76% in August 2017 to 3.79% in August 2020.

(8)

Represents 4,116,863 ordinary shares held by BlackRock Advisors LLC and 3,253,943 ordinary shares held by BlackRock Investment Management Ltd. BlackRock Inc. may be deemed to have beneficial ownership over the ordinary shares held by BlackRock Advisors LLC and BlackRock Investment Management Ltd., and the address for BlackRock Inc. is 52 East 52nd Street, New York, New York 10055, United States. The percentage ownership of BlackRock Advisors LLC and BlackRock Investment Management Ltd. increased from 1.60% in August 2017 to 3.41% in August 2020.

 

139


Table of Contents

RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

The following is a description of our related party transactions since July 1, 2017.

Agreements with Board Members and Executive Officers

For a description of our other agreements with our board members and executive officers, please see “Management—Executive Officer Service Agreements” and “Management—Non-Employee Director Letter Agreements.”

Indemnification Agreements

We have indemnification provisions in the letters of appointment and employment agreements with our board members and executive officers. Our Articles of Association allow us to indemnify our board members and executive officers to the fullest extent permitted by law, subject to certain exceptions. See “Management—Insurance and Indemnification” for a description of these indemnification agreements.

Related Party Transaction Policy

Our board has adopted a written related party transaction policy to set forth the policies and procedures for the review and approval or ratification of related party transactions.

 

140


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF SHARE CAPITAL AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

The following is a description of the material terms of our Articles of Association as they will be in effect upon the closing of this offering. The following description may not contain all of the information that is important to you, and we therefore refer you to our Articles of Association, a copy of which is filed with the SEC as an exhibit to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

General

We were incorporated as a private limited company with the legal name Tayvin 103 Limited under the laws of England and Wales on February 12, 1998 with the company number 03509322. On March 26, 1998, we changed our company name to Abcam Limited, and on October 26, 2005, we re-registered as a public listed company with the name Abcam plc. Our registered office is Discovery Drive, Cambridge Biomedical Campus, Cambridge, United Kingdom, CB2 0AX. The principal legislation under which we operate and our shares are issued is the Companies Act 2006.

As of June 30, 2020, our issued share capital was £432,346.55 (216,173,277 ordinary shares in issue) and as of             , 2020, being the latest date practicable prior to the publication of this prospectus, our share capital was £             (            ordinary shares in issue). The nominal value of our ordinary shares is £0.002 per share. Each issued ordinary share is fully paid.

In the past five years, we have not issued any shares for assets other than cash.

We do not have any shares that do not represent capital.

As of             , 2020, being the latest practicable date prior to the publication of this prospectus,              of our ordinary shares are held by the Equiniti Share Plan Trustees Limited in order to satisfy the vesting of equity awards granted under our incentive plans.

There are no warrants, convertible instruments or other outstanding equity-linked securities or subscription rights granted over or convertible into our ordinary shares.

On November 13, 2019, our shareholders authorized us to allot and issue ordinary shares with up to an aggregate nominal value of £137,157 (being 68,578,500 ordinary shares), with such authority expiring at the conclusion of our next annual general meeting or, if earlier, the date 15 months after the date of approval.

Ordinary Shares

In accordance with our Articles of Association, the following summarizes the rights of holders of our ordinary shares:

 

   

each holder of our ordinary shares is entitled to one vote per ordinary share on all matters to be voted on by shareholders generally; and

 

   

holders of our ordinary shares are entitled to receive such dividends as are recommended by our directors and declared by our shareholders.

Registered Shares

We are required by the Companies Act 2006 to keep a register of our shareholders. Under English law, the ordinary shares are deemed to be issued when the name of the shareholder is entered in our share register. The share register therefore is prima facie evidence of the identity of our shareholders and the shares that they hold. The share register generally provides limited, or no, information regarding the ultimate beneficial owners of our ordinary shares. Our share register is maintained by our registrar, Equiniti Limited.

 

141


Table of Contents

Holders of our ADSs will not be treated as one of our shareholders, and their names will therefore not be entered in our share register. The depositary, the custodian or their nominees will be the holder of the shares underlying our ADSs. For discussion on our ADSs and ADS holder rights see “Description of American Depositary Shares” in this prospectus. Holders of our ADSs have a right to receive the ordinary shares underlying their ADSs as discussed in “Description of American Depositary Shares” in this prospectus.

Under the Companies Act 2006, we must enter an allotment of shares in our share register as soon as practicable and in any event within two months of the allotment. We will perform all procedures necessary to update the share register to reflect the ordinary shares being sold in this offering, including updating the share register with the number of ordinary shares to be issued to the depositary upon the closing of this offering. We also are required by the Companies Act 2006 to register a transfer of shares (or give the transferee notice of and reasons for refusal) as soon as practicable and in any event within two months of receiving notice of the transfer.

We, any of our shareholders or any other affected person may apply to the court for rectification of the share register if:

 

   

the name of any person, without sufficient cause, is wrongly entered in or omitted from our register of members; or

 

   

there is a default or unnecessary delay in entering on the register the fact of any person having ceased to be a member or on which we have a lien, provided that such refusal does not prevent dealings in the shares taking place on an open and proper basis.

Preemptive Rights

English law generally provides shareholders with preemptive rights when new shares are issued for cash; however, it is possible for a company’s articles of association, or shareholders by special resolution, to exclude preemptive rights. Such an exclusion of preemptive rights may be for a maximum period of up to five years from the date of adoption of the articles of association, if the exclusion is contained in the articles of association, or from the date of the shareholder resolution, if the exclusion is by shareholder resolution. In either case, this exclusion would need to be renewed by the company’s shareholders upon its expiration (i.e., at least every five years).

On November 13, 2019, our shareholders approved the exclusion of preemptive rights, with such authority expiring at the conclusion of our next annual general meeting or, if earlier, the date 15 months after the date of approval. Such exclusion will need to be renewed upon expiration (i.e., on the conclusion of our next annual general meeting or, if earlier, the date 15 months after November 13, 2019) to remain effective, but may be sought more frequently for additional five-year terms (or any shorter period).

Options

As of June 30, 2020, there are outstanding options granted under our incentive plans to purchase 1,215,659 ordinary shares outstanding with a weighted average exercise price of £5.86 per share. The vesting period for these options range from one to four years after grant and will lapse after ten years from the grant date.

Capital Reorganization

On November 15, 2010, we effected a one-for-five share sub-division in which we sub-divided every one existing ordinary shares of nominal value £0.01 each in our issued share capital into five ordinary shares of nominal value £0.002 each.

History of Share Capital

Over the past three years, we have issued 1,605,452 number of shares in connection with the vesting of equity awards granted under our incentive plans, and a further 49,416 shares in connection with certain M&A transactions that we have undertaken during this period.

 

142


Table of Contents

Articles of Association

Shares and Rights Attaching to Them

Objects

The objects of our Company do not restrict the manner in which we conduct our business as described herein.

Share Rights

Without prejudice to any special rights conferred on shareholders or holders of a class of shares, the Company may, by ordinary resolution, determine that any shares are allotted with special rights, privileges or restrictions.

Voting Rights

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and any restrictions imposed in our Articles of Association and any rights or restrictions attached to any class of shares of our share capital, on a resolution, on a show of hands:

 

   

every shareholder present in person shall have one vote;

 

   

each proxy present who has been duly appointed by one or more shareholders entitled to vote on the resolution has one vote unless the proxy has been appointed by more than one shareholder entitled to vote on the resolution in which case: (i) where the proxy has been instructed by one or more of such members to vote for the resolution and by one or more of such members to vote against the resolution the proxy has one vote for and one vote against the resolution; or (ii) where the proxy has been instructed by one or more of such members as to how he should vote on the resolution and all those instructions are to vote the same way, and one or more other members have given the proxy discretion as to how to vote, he may cast one vote “for” or one vote “against” in accordance with those instructions and may cast a second discretionary vote the other way; and

 

   

each person authorized by a corporation to exercise voting powers on behalf of the corporation is entitled to exercise the same voting powers as the corporation would be entitled to unless a corporation authorizes more than one person, in which case: (i) if more than one person authorized by the same corporation purport to exercise the power to vote on a show of hands in respect of the same shares in the Company and exercise the power in the same way as each other, the power is treated as exercised in that way; or (ii) if more than one person authorized by the same corporation purports to exercise the power to vote on a show of hands in respect of the same shares in the Company, and they do not exercise the power in the same way as each other, the power is treated as not exercised.

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and any restrictions imposed by our Articles of Association and any rights or restrictions attached to any class of shares of our share capital, on a vote on a resolution on a poll, every shareholder present shall have one vote for every ordinary share in our share capital held by him or his appoint, or and if entitled to more than one vote need not, if he votes, use all his votes or cast all his votes in the same way.

At any general meeting, a resolution put to the vote of the meeting shall be decided on a show of hands unless a poll is (before or on the declaration of the result of show of hands) demanded by the chairman of the meeting or by those shareholders entitled under the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 to demand a poll. Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, as described in “Differences in Corporate Law—Voting Rights” below, a poll may be demanded by:

 

   

a chairman of the meeting;

 

   

at least five shareholders present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote;

 

143


Table of Contents
   

any shareholder(s) present in person or by proxy and representing in the aggregate not less than 10% of the total voting rights of all shareholders having the right to attend and vote at the meeting (excluding the shares held in treasury); or

 

   

any shareholder(s) present in person or by proxy and holding shares conferring a right to attend and vote at the meeting on which there have been paid up sums in the aggregate equal to not less than 10% of the total sums paid up on all shares conferring that right (excluding the shares held in treasury).

Restrictions on Voting

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, no shareholder shall, unless the directors otherwise determine, be entitled (save as a proxy for another member) to be present or vote at any general meeting either personally or by proxy or to exercise any other right in relation to meetings of the Company in respect of either the share he holds or (with effect from allotment) of any additional shares allotted in respect of the share which is the subject of a notice under Article 85 of our Articles of Association (including without limitation any share allotted under a rights issue or capitalization issue) if:

 

   

any call or other sum presently payable by him to the Company in respect of the shares remained unpaid;

 

   

he or any other person who appears to be interested in the shares has been served, under section 793 of this Companies Act 2006 concerning the disclosure of interests in voting shares, with a notice which: (i) lawfully requires the provision of information regarding the shares to the Company within the period specified in such notice (being not less than 14 days from the date of service of such notice) (ii) contains a warning of the consequences of failing to comply with such notice; and (iii) (whether or not he is aware of the identity of the beneficial owner(s) of the share) he or such other person is in default in complying with such notice; or

 

   

he has been duly served with a notice which: (i) requires him to provide or to procure that there is provided to the Company within the period specified in the notice (being not less than 14 days from the service of notice), a statement in writing authenticated by him or any other person or persons stating that he (if the statement is authenticated by him) or (as the case may be) the other person or persons who has/have authenticated the statement is/are the beneficial owner(s) of the shares and providing any additional information regarding the shares; (ii) contains a warning of the consequences under Article 85 of our Articles of Association of failing to comply with such notice; and (iii) (whether or not he is aware of the identity of the beneficial owner(s) of the share) he is in default in complying with such notice.

The board may from time to time make calls upon the shareholders in respect of any money unpaid on their shares, and each shareholder shall (subject to at least seven days’ notice specifying the time and place of payment) be liable to pay at the time and place so specified the amount called on his shares.

Dividends

We may, by ordinary resolution of shareholders, declare dividends. No dividend will be payable except out of profits of the Company available for distribution in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, or in excess of the amount recommended by the directors. If, in the opinion of the directors, the profit of the Company justifies such payments, the directors may: (i) pay the fixed dividends on any class of shares carrying a fixed dividend expressed to be payable on fixed dates on the half-yearly or other dates prescribed for payment; and (ii) pay interim dividends of such amounts and on such dates as they think fit.

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and except as otherwise provided by our Articles of Association or by the rights or privileges attached to any shares carrying a preferential or special rights to dividends, Company profits will be used to pay dividends on shares and all dividends shall be declared and paid according to the amounts paid up on the shares and shall be apportioned and paid pro rata according to the amounts paid up on the shares during any part of the period in respect of which the dividend is paid.

 

144


Table of Contents

No dividend or other moneys payable by us on or in respect of any share shall bear interest against us. Any dividend unclaimed or retained in accordance with our Articles of Association after a period of 12 years from the date such dividend became due for payment will be forfeited and revert to us.

Dividends may be declared or paid in any currency, and the board may agree with a shareholder that dividends declared or that become due on his shares in one currency will be paid or satisfied in another currency, the basis of conversion to be applied, how and when the amount to be paid in the other currency will be calculated and paid, and whether the Company or any other person will bear the costs of conversion.

With the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company, all or any part of the dividend can be paid by the distribution of specific assets and the directors must give effect to such ordinary resolution. With the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company, the directors may offer any holders of ordinary shares the right to elect to receive in lieu of a dividend an allotment of ordinary shares credited as fully paid up, instead of or part of a cash dividend, subject to such exclusions or arrangements as the board may deem necessary or expedient.

The directors may deduct from any dividend or other moneys payable to any member on or in respect of a share any money payable by him to the Company on account of calls or otherwise in relation to shares in the Company.

Change of Control

There is no specific provision in our Articles of Association that would have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing a change of control.

Distributions on Winding Up

If the Company is wound up (whether the liquidation is voluntary, under supervision or by the court) the liquidator may, with the authority of a special resolution, divide among the shareholders whose names are entered on the register of members of the Company at the date of winding up, in specie or kind the whole or any part of the assets of the Company. Whether or not the assets consist of property of one kind or of different kinds the liquidator can set such value as he deems fair upon any one or more class or classes of property and can determine how such division is carried out as between such members or different classes of members. If any such division shall be other than in accordance with the existing rights of such members, every member shall have the same right of dissent and other ancillary rights as if the resolution were a special resolution passed in accordance with section 110 of the Insolvency Act 1986. The liquidator may also, with the authority of a special resolution, vest any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of such members as the liquidator thinks fit. The liquidation of the Company may then be closed and the Company dissolved, but no contributory shall be compelled to accept any shares or other property in respect of which there is a liability.

Variation of Rights

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, whenever the share capital is divided into different classes of shares, all or any of the rights and restrictions attached to any class (unless otherwise provided by the terms of issue of the shares of that class) may, whether or not the Company is being wound up, be modified, varied, extended, abrogated or surrendered either in the manner provided by such rights or (in the absence of such provision) with the written consent of the shareholders of at least three-fourths in nominal value of the issued shares of that class (excluding any shares held as treasury shares) or by special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of such shares. The Companies Act 2006 provides a right to object to the variation of the share capital by the shareholders who did not vote in favor of the variation. Should an aggregate of 15% of the shareholders of the issued shares in question apply to the court to have the variation cancelled, the variation shall have no effect unless and until it is confirmed by the court.

 

145


Table of Contents

Alteration to Share Capital

We may, by ordinary resolution of shareholders, consolidate and divide all or any of our share capital into shares of larger nominal value than our existing shares, or sub-divide our shares or any of them into shares of a smaller nominal value. We may, by special resolution of shareholders, confirmed by the court, reduce our share capital or any capital redemption reserve or any share premium account in any manner authorized by the Companies Act 2006. We may redeem or purchase all or any of our shares as described in “—Other U.K. Law Considerations—Purchase of Own Shares.”

Preemption Rights

In certain circumstances, our shareholders may have statutory preemption rights under the Companies Act 2006 in respect of the allotment of new shares as described in “—Preemptive Rights” and “—Differences in Corporate Law—Preemptive Rights” in this section.

Transfer of Shares

Any certificated shareholder may transfer all or any of his shares by an instrument of transfer in writing in any usual or common form or in any other manner approved by the board. Any written instrument of transfer shall be executed by or on behalf of the transferor and (in the case of a partly paid share) the transferee.

All transfers of uncertificated shares shall be made in accordance with and subject to the provisions of the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 and the facilities and requirements of its relevant system. The Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 permit shares to be issued and held in uncertificated form and transferred by means of a computer-based system.

The board may decline to register any transfer of any share held in certificated form:

 

   

if the Company has a lien on a partly paid share unless to do so would prevent dealings in partly paid shares from taking place on an open and proper basis;

 

   

if a notice has been duly served in respect of a share pursuant to section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 and: (i) the share or shares that were the subject of that notice represented in aggregate at least 0.25 percent of that class of shares (calculated exclusive of any treasury shares of that class); and (ii) the person or persons on whom the notice was served failed to comply with the requirements of the notice within the period for compliance specified in the notice (being not less than 14 days from the date of service of the notice) and remains in default in complying with the notice, unless the transfer in question is to a bona fide unconnected third party such as a sale through a recognized investment exchange or an overseas exchange or as a result of an acceptance of a takeover offer; or

 

   

if the transfer is of a share or shares (whether fully paid or not) in favor of more than 4 persons jointly.

If the board declines to register a transfer it shall, as soon as practicable and in any event within two months after the date on which a transfer form, a letter of allotment (if applicable) is lodged, send to the transferee notice of the refusal, together with reasons for the refusal.

CREST

To be traded on AIM, securities must be able to be transferred and settled through the CREST system. CREST is a computerized paperless share transfer and settlement system that allows securities to be transferred by electronic means, without the need for a written instrument of transfer. Our Articles of Association are consistent with CREST membership and, among other things, allow for the holding and transfer of shares in uncertificated form.

 

146


Table of Contents

Shareholder Meetings

Annual General Meetings

In accordance with the Companies Act 2006, we are required in each year to hold an annual general meeting in addition to any other general meetings in that year and to specify the meeting as such in the notice convening it. The annual general meeting shall be convened whenever and wherever the board sees fit, subject to the requirements of the Companies Act 2006, as described in “—Differences in Corporate Law—Annual General Meeting” and “—Differences in Corporate Law—Notice of General Meetings” below.

Notice of General Meetings

The arrangements for the calling of general meetings are described in “—Differences in Corporate Law—Notice of General Meetings” below.

Quorum of General Meetings

No business shall be transacted at any general meeting unless a quorum is present. At least two shareholders present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote shall be a quorum for all purposes. If within 15 minutes from the time appointed for the holding of a general meeting (or such longer time as the chairman of the meeting may decide) a quorum is not present, the meeting, if convened on the requisition of members, shall be dissolved. In any other case it shall be adjourned to a day (at least 10 clear days after the meeting), time and place decided by the chairman. If at an adjourned meeting a quorum is not present within 15 minutes from the time appointed for holding the meeting, the member or members present in person or by proxy or (in the case of a corporation) by a representative and entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted shall be a quorum and shall have power to decide upon all matters that could properly have been disposed of at the meeting from which the adjournment took place.

Class Meetings

The provisions in our Articles of Association relating to general meetings apply to every separate general meeting of the holders of a class of shares except that:

 

   

the quorum for such class meeting shall be two holders in person or by proxy representing not less than one-third in nominal value of the issued shares of the class (excluding any shares held in treasury);

 

   

at the class meeting, a holder of shares of the class present in person or by proxy may demand a poll and shall on a poll be entitled to one vote for every share of the class held by him; and

 

   

if at any adjourned meeting of such holders a quorum is not present at the meeting, one holder of shares of the class present in person or by proxy at an adjourned meeting constitutes a quorum.

Directors

Number of Directors

We may not have less than three and not more than 12 directors on the board of directors.

Appointment of Directors

A single resolution for the appointment of two or more persons as directors is void unless a resolution that it shall be moved has first been agreed to by the meeting without any vote being given against it.

At any general meeting, no person other than a director retiring at the meeting shall, unless recommended by the directors for election, be eligible for appointment as a director unless not less than 28 nor more than 35

 

147


Table of Contents

days before the date of the meeting: (i) a notice in writing, authenticated by a member (other than the person to be proposed) who is qualified to attend and vote at that meeting, containing his intention to propose the person for election; and (ii) a notice in writing authenticated by the person proposed as a director of his willingness to be elected; have both been left at the registered office or sent to the Company secretary.

Without prejudice to the power to appoint any person to be a director by shareholder resolution, the board has power to appoint any person to be a director, either to fill a casual vacancy or as an addition to the existing board but so that the total number of directors does not exceed the maximum number fixed by or in accordance with our Articles of Association.

Any director appointed by the board shall retire from office at the next annual general meeting. Such a director is eligible for election at that meeting but shall not be taken into account in determining the directors or the number of directors who are to retire by rotation at such meeting.

Rotation of Directors

At each annual general meeting, the following directors will retire from office and be eligible for re-election:

 

   

any director who was not elected or re-elected at either of the two preceding annual general meetings and any director who wishes to retire and offer himself for re-election (whether by reason of the U.K. Corporate Governance Code or for any other reason); and

 

   

such number of the directors (excluding any director who is required to retire under our Articles of Association) as would, when added to the number of directors (if any) retiring in accordance with the above bullet point represent one third of the directors. If one third is not a whole number then the number of directors to retire is the number nearest to one third.

If at any annual general meeting the total number of directors to be considered for retirement by rotation is less than three and the one third calculation above would result in a number which is less than one, then: (i) if the total number is two, one of those directors shall retire; and (ii) if the total number is one, that director shall retire.

The directors to retire on each occasion shall include (so far as necessary to obtain the number required) any director who wishes to retire and not offer himself for re-election. Any further directors to retire shall be those of the other directors who are subject to retirement by rotation for the purposes of the meeting in question and who have at the date of the meeting been longest in office since their last re-election or appointment. In the case of persons who became or were last re-elected directors on the same day those to retire shall (unless they otherwise agree among themselves) be determined by lot.

A director who retires at the annual general meeting shall be eligible for re-election.

The shareholders may, at the meeting at which a director retires, fill the vacated office by electing a person and in default the retiring director shall, if willing to continue to act, be deemed to have been re-elected, unless at such meeting it is expressly resolved not to fill such vacated office or unless a resolution for the re-election of such director shall have been put to the meeting and lost or unless the default is due to the moving of a resolution in contravention of Article 114 of our Articles of Association or unless such director has attained any applicable retiring age.

Directors’ Interests

A director may hold any other office or employment with the Company (other than the office of auditor) in conjunction with his office of director for such period and on such terms as the directors may determine. A director or intending director may enter into any contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal with the Company relating to the tenure of any other office or employment. Any such contract, arrangement, transaction

 

148


Table of Contents

or proposal entered into or authorized by the directors cannot be avoided and the director is not liable to account to the Company for any benefit realized from any such contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal by reason of either holding office as a director or because of the fiduciary relationship established by the office if the director has declared his interest in accordance with the Companies Act 2006. In accordance with the Companies Act 2006, a director who is in any way, whether directly or indirectly, interested in a proposed or existing transaction or arrangement with us shall declare the nature of his interest.

In the case of interests arising where a director is in any way, directly or indirectly, interested in (i) a proposed transaction or arrangement with us or (ii) a transaction or arrangement that has been entered into by us and save as otherwise provided by our Articles of Association, such director shall not vote at a meeting of the board or of a committee of the board on any resolution concerning such matter in which he has any interest that conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company as defined in Article 102 of our Articles of Association (otherwise than by virtue of his interest in shares, debentures or other securities of, or otherwise in or through, us) unless his interest or duty arises only because the resolution relates to one or more of the following paragraphs:

 

   

the giving of any security, guarantee or indemnity in respect of money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of or for the benefit of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings; or

 

   

the giving of any security, guarantee or indemnity in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings for which the director himself has assumed responsibility in whole or in part under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security; or

 

   

the granting of any indemnity or provision of funding pursuant to Article 190 of our Articles of Association unless the terms of such arrangement confer upon such director a benefit not generally available to any other director; or

 

   

an offer of shares or debentures or other securities of or by the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings for subscription or purchase in which offer he is or is to be or may be entitled to participate as a holder of securities or as an underwriter or sub-underwriter; or

 

   

any matters involving or relating to any other company in which he or any person connected with him has a direct or indirect interest (whether as an officer or shareholder or otherwise), provided that he and any persons connected with him are not to his knowledge the holder (otherwise than as a nominee for the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings) of or beneficially interested in one percent or more of any class of the equity share capital of such company (or of any third company through which his interest is derived) or of the voting rights available to members of the relevant company (any such interest being deemed for the purpose of this paragraph to be a material interest in all circumstances); or

 

   

an arrangement for the benefit of the employees of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings that does not award him any privilege or benefit not generally awarded to the employees to whom the arrangement relates; or

 

   

the purchase and/or maintenance of any insurance policy for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons including directors.

A director shall not be counted in the quorum present at a meeting in relation to a resolution on which he is not entitled to vote.

If a question arises at a meeting of the board or of a committee of the board as to the right of a director to vote, and such question is not resolved by his voluntarily agreeing to abstain from voting, the question shall be referred to the Chairman of the meeting, and his ruling in relation to any director other than himself shall be final and conclusive except in a case where the nature or extent of the interest of the director concerned has not been fairly disclosed.

 

149


Table of Contents

Directors’ Fees and Remuneration

Each director may be paid his traveling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred in and about the business of the Company, including expenses of attending and returning from meetings of the board or committees of the board or general meetings. Any director who performs special or extra services which in the opinion of the board go beyond the ordinary duties of a director may be paid such extra remuneration as the board or a committee appointed by the board may determine.

An executive director shall receive such remuneration as the board or a committee appointed by the board may determine and may (without limitation) be by way of fixed salary, lump sum, commission on dividends or profits of the Company (or of any other company in which the Company is interested) or other participation in any such profits by any combination of them.

A non-executive director may be paid a fee at such rate as may from time to time be determined by the board.

Borrowing Powers

The board may exercise all the powers to borrow money and to mortgage or charge our undertaking, property and assets and uncalled capital or any part thereof and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as collateral security for any debt, liability or obligation of us or of any third party.

Indemnity

Every director, alternate director, secretary or other officer (other than any person (whether an officer or not) engaged by the Company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against all costs, charges, expenses, losses and liabilities incurred by him in the execution and discharge of his duties or the exercise of his powers or otherwise in relation to or in connection with his duties, powers or office as a director of the Company for any other member of the Group, including any liability which may attach to him in respect of any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust by him in relation to anything done or omitted to be done or alleged to have been done or omitted to be done by him as a director.

Other U.K. Law Considerations

Notification of Voting Rights

A shareholder in a public company incorporated in the United Kingdom whose shares are admitted to trading on AIM is required pursuant to Rule 5 of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority to notify us of the percentage of his voting rights if the percentage of voting rights that he holds as a shareholder or through his direct or indirect holding of financial instruments (or a combination of such holdings) reaches, exceeds or falls below 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10% and each 1% threshold thereafter up to 100% as a result of an acquisition or disposal of shares or financial instruments.

Mandatory Purchases and Acquisitions

Pursuant to Sections 979 to 991 of the Companies Act 2006, where a takeover offer has been made for us and the offeror has acquired or unconditionally contracted to acquire not less than 90% in value of the shares to which the offer relates and not less than 90% of the voting rights carried by those shares, the offeror may give notice to the holder of any shares to which the offer relates which the offeror has not acquired or unconditionally contracted to acquire that he wishes to acquire, and is entitled to so acquire, those shares on the same terms as the general offer. The offeror would do so by sending a notice to the outstanding minority shareholders telling them that it will compulsorily acquire their shares. Such notice must be sent within three months of the last day on which the offer can be accepted in the prescribed manner. The squeeze-out of the minority shareholders can be completed at the end of six weeks from the date the notice has been given, subject to the minority shareholders

 

150


Table of Contents

failing to successfully lodge an application to the court to prevent such squeeze-out any time prior to the end of those six weeks following which the offeror can execute a transfer of the outstanding shares in its favor and pay the consideration to us, which would hold the consideration on trust for the outstanding minority shareholders. The consideration offered to the outstanding minority shareholders whose shares are compulsorily acquired under the Companies Act 2006 must, in general, be the same as the consideration that was available under the takeover offer.

Sell Out

The Companies Act 2006 also gives our minority shareholders a right to be bought out in certain circumstances by an offeror who has made a takeover offer for all of our shares. The holder of shares to which the offer relates, and who has not otherwise accepted the offer, may require the offeror to acquire his shares if, prior to the expiry of the acceptance period for such offer, (i) the offeror has acquired or unconditionally agreed to acquire not less than 90% in value of the voting shares, and (ii) not less than 90% of the voting rights carried by those shares. The offeror may impose a time limit on the rights of minority shareholders to be bought out that is not less than three months after the end of the acceptance period. If a shareholder exercises his rights to be bought out, the offeror is required to acquire those shares on the terms of this offer or on such other terms as may be agreed.

Disclosure of Interest in Shares

Pursuant to Part 22 of the Companies Act 2006, we are empowered by notice in writing to any person whom we know or have reasonable cause to believe to be interested in our shares, or at any time during the three years immediately preceding the date on which the notice is issued has been so interested, within a reasonable time to disclose to us particulars of that person’s interest and (so far as is within his knowledge) particulars of any other interest that subsists or subsisted in those shares.

Under our Articles of Association, the directors may in their absolute discretion refuse to register or authorize the registration of the transfer of a share held in certificated form if a notice has been served in respect of a share pursuant to section 793 of the Companies Act concerning the disclosure of interests in voting shares and (i) the share or shares which were the subject of that notice represented in aggregate at least 0.25 percent of that class of shares (calculated exclusive of any treasury shares of that class); and (ii) the person or persons on whom the notice was served failed to comply with the requirements of the notice within the period for compliance specified in the notice (being not less than 14 days from the date of service of the notice) and remains in default in complying with the notice, unless the transfer in question is to a bona fide unconnected third party such as a sale through a recognized investment exchange or an overseas exchange or as a result of an acceptance of a takeover offer.

Purchase of Own Shares

Under English law, a limited company may only purchase its own shares out of the distributable profits of the company or the proceeds of a fresh issue of shares made for the purpose of financing the purchase, provided that they are not restricted from doing so by their articles. A limited company may not purchase its own shares if, as a result of the purchase, there would no longer be any issued shares of the company other than redeemable shares or shares held as treasury shares. Shares must be fully paid in order to be repurchased.

Subject to the above, we may purchase our own shares in the manner prescribed below. We may make a market purchase of our own fully paid shares pursuant to an ordinary resolution of shareholders. The resolution authorizing the purchase must:

 

   

specify the maximum number of shares authorized to be acquired;

 

   

determine the maximum and minimum prices that may be paid for the shares; and

 

   

specify a date, not being later than five years after the passing of the resolution, on which the authority to purchase is to expire.

 

151


Table of Contents

We may purchase our own fully paid shares other than on a recognized investment exchange pursuant to a purchase contract authorized by resolution of shareholders before the purchase takes place. Any authority will not be effective if any shareholder from whom we propose to purchase shares votes on the resolution and the resolution would not have been passed if he had not done so. The resolution authorizing the purchase must specify a date, not being later than five years after the passing of the resolution, on which the authority to purchase is to expire.

Distributions and Dividends

Under the Companies Act 2006, before a company can lawfully make a distribution or dividend, it must ensure that it has sufficient distributable reserves (on a non-consolidated basis). The basic rule is that a company’s profits available for the purpose of making a distribution are its accumulated, realized profits, so far as not previously utilized by distribution or capitalization, less its accumulated, realized losses, so far as not previously written off in a reduction or reorganization of capital duly made. The requirement to have sufficient distributable reserves before a distribution or dividend can be paid applies to us and to each of our subsidiaries that has been incorporated under English law.

It is not sufficient that we, as a public company, have made a distributable profit for the purpose of making a distribution. An additional capital maintenance requirement is imposed on us to ensure that the net worth of the company is at least equal to the amount of its capital. A public company can only make a distribution:

 

   

if, at the time that the distribution is made, the amount of its net assets (that is, the total excess of assets over liabilities) is not less than the total of its called up share capital and undistributable reserves; and

 

   

if, and to the extent that, the distribution itself, at the time that it is made, does not reduce the amount of the net assets to less than that total.

City Code on Takeovers and Mergers

As a public company incorporated in England and Wales with our registered office in England and Wales and that has shares admitted to AIM, we are subject to the U.K. City Code on Takeovers and Mergers (the “City Code”), which is issued and administered by the U.K. Panel on Takeovers and Mergers (the “Panel”). The City Code provides a framework within which takeovers of companies subject to it are conducted. In particular, the City Code contains certain rules in respect of mandatory offers. Under Rule 9 of the City Code, if a person:

 

   

acquires an interest in our shares which, when taken together with shares in which he or persons acting in concert with him are interested, carries 30% or more of the voting rights of our shares;

 

   

who, together with persons acting in concert with him, is interested in shares that in the aggregate carry not less than 30% and not more than 50% of the voting rights of our shares, and such persons, or any person acting in concert with him, acquires additional interests in shares that increase the percentage of shares carrying voting rights in which that person is interested; or

 

   

the acquirer and depending on the circumstances, its concert parties, would be required (except with the consent of the Panel) to make an offer for our outstanding shares in cash or be accompanied by a cash alternative at a price not less than the highest price paid for any interests in the shares by the acquirer or its concert parties during the previous 12 months.

Exchange Controls

There are no governmental laws, decrees, regulations or other legislation in the United Kingdom that may affect the import or export of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by us, or that may affect the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments by us to non-resident holders of our ordinary shares or ADSs, other than withholding tax requirements. There is no limitation imposed by English law or in our Articles of Association on the right of non-residents to hold or vote shares.

 

152


Table of Contents

Differences in Corporate Law

The applicable provisions of the Companies Act 2006 differ from laws applicable to U.S. corporations and their shareholders. Set forth below is a summary of certain differences between the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to us and the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware relating to shareholders’ rights and protections. This summary is not intended to be a complete discussion of the respective rights.

 

    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

Number of Directors

   Under the Companies Act 2006, a public limited company must have at least two directors, and the number of directors may be fixed by or in the manner provided in a company’s articles of association, provided that such number does not fall below two directors.    Under Delaware law, a corporation must have at least one director, and the number of directors shall be fixed by or in the manner provided in the bylaws.

Removal of Directors

   Under the Companies Act 2006, shareholders may remove a director without cause by an ordinary resolution (which is passed by a simple majority of those voting in person or by proxy at a general meeting) irrespective of any provisions of any service contract the director has with the company, provided 28 clear days’ notice of the resolution has been given to the company and its shareholders. On receipt of notice of an intended resolution to remove a director, the company must forthwith send a copy of the notice to the director concerned. Certain other procedural requirements under the Companies Act 2006 must also be followed, such as allowing the director to make representations against his or her removal either at the meeting or in writing.    Under Delaware law, any director or the entire board of directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares then entitled to vote at an election of directors, except (i) unless the certificate of incorporation provides otherwise, in the case of a corporation whose board of directors is classified, shareholders may effect such removal only for cause, or (ii) in the case of a corporation having cumulative voting, if less than the entire board of directors is to be removed, no director may be removed without cause if the votes cast against his removal would be sufficient to elect him if then cumulatively voted at an election of the entire board of directors, or, if there are classes of directors, at an election of the class of directors of which he is a part.

Vacancies on the Board of Directors

   Under English law, the procedure by which directors, other than a company’s initial directors, are appointed is generally set out in a company’s articles of association, provided that where two or more persons are appointed as directors of a public limited company by resolution of the shareholders, resolutions appointing each director must be voted on individually unless a resolution that a single resolution for the appointment of two or more persons as directors has first been agreed to by the meeting without any vote being given against it.    Under Delaware law, vacancies and newly created directorships may be filled by a majority of the directors then in office (even though less than a quorum) or by a sole remaining director unless (i) otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation or bylaws of the corporation or (ii) the certificate of incorporation directs that a particular class of stock is to elect such director, in which case a majority of the other directors elected by such class, or a sole remaining director elected by such class, will fill such vacancy.

 

153


Table of Contents
    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

Annual General Meeting

   Under the Companies Act 2006, a public limited company must hold an annual general meeting in each six-month period following the company’s annual accounting reference date.    Under Delaware law, the annual meeting of stockholders shall be held at such place, on such date and at such time as may be designated from time to time by the board of directors or as provided in the certificate of incorporation or by the bylaws.

General Meeting

  

Under the Companies Act 2006, a general meeting of the shareholders of a public limited company may be called by the directors.

 

Shareholders holding at least 5% of the paid-up capital of the company carrying voting rights at general meetings (excluding any paid up capital held as treasury shares) can require the directors to call a general meeting, and, if the directors fail to do so within a certain period, may themselves convene a general meeting.

   Under Delaware law, special meetings of the stockholders may be called by the board of directors or by such person or persons as may be authorized by the certificate of incorporation or by the bylaws.

Notice of General Meetings

   Under the Companies Act 2006, subject to a company’s articles of association providing for a longer period, 21 clear days’ notice must be given for an annual general meeting and any resolutions to be proposed at the meeting. Subject to a company’s articles of association providing for a longer period, at least 14 clear days’ notice is required for any other general meeting. In addition, certain matters, such as the removal of directors or auditors, require special notice, which is 28 clear days’ notice. The shareholders of a company may in all cases consent to a shorter notice period, the proportion of shareholders’ consent required being 100% of those entitled to attend and vote in the case of an annual general meeting and, in the case of any other general meeting, a majority in number of the members having a right to attend and vote at the meeting, being a majority who together hold not less than 95% in nominal value of the shares giving a right to attend and vote at the meeting.    Under Delaware law, unless otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation or bylaws, written notice of any meeting of the stockholders must be given to each stockholder entitled to vote at the meeting not less than ten nor more than 60 days before the date of the meeting and shall specify the place, date, hour, and purpose or purposes of the meeting.

 

154


Table of Contents
    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

Proxy

   Under the Companies Act 2006, at any meeting of shareholders, a shareholder may designate another person to attend, speak and vote at the meeting on their behalf by proxy.    Under Delaware law, at any meeting of stockholders, a stockholder may designate another person to act for such stockholder by proxy, but no such proxy shall be voted or acted upon after three years from its date, unless the proxy provides for a longer period. A director of a Delaware corporation may not issue a proxy representing the director’s voting rights as a director.

Preemptive Rights

   Under the Companies Act 2006, “equity securities,” being (i) shares in the company other than shares that, with respect to dividends and capital, carry a right to participate only up to a specified amount in a distribution (“ordinary shares”) or (ii) rights to subscribe for, or to convert securities into, ordinary shares, proposed to be allotted for cash must be offered first to the existing equity shareholders in the company in proportion to the respective nominal value of their holdings, unless an exception applies or a special resolution to the contrary has been passed by shareholders in a general meeting or the articles of association provide otherwise, in each case in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.    Under Delaware law, shareholders have no preemptive rights to subscribe to additional issues of stock or to any security convertible into such stock unless, and except to the extent that, such rights are expressly provided for in the certificate of incorporation.

Authority to Allot

   Under the Companies Act 2006, the directors of a company must not allot shares or grant of rights to subscribe for or to convert any security into shares unless an exception applies or an ordinary resolution to the contrary has been passed by shareholders in a general meeting or the articles of association provide otherwise, in each case in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.    Under Delaware law, if the corporation’s charter or certificate of incorporation so provides, the board of directors has the power to authorize the issuance of stock. It may authorize capital stock to be issued for consideration consisting of cash, any tangible or intangible property or any benefit to the corporation or any combination thereof. It may determine the amount of such consideration by approving a formula. In the absence of actual fraud in the transaction, the judgment of the directors as to the value of such consideration is conclusive.

 

155


Table of Contents
    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

Liability of Directors and Officers

  

Under the Companies Act 2006, any provision, whether contained in a company’s articles of association or any contract or otherwise, that purports to exempt a director of a company, to any extent, from any liability that would otherwise attach to him in connection with any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to the company is void.

 

Any provision by which a company directly or indirectly provides an indemnity, to any extent, for a director of the company or of an associated company against any liability attaching to him in connection with any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to the company of which he is a director is also void except as permitted by the Companies Act 2006, which provides exceptions for the company to (i) purchase and maintain insurance against such liability; (ii) provide a “qualifying third-party indemnity” (being an indemnity against liability incurred by the director to a person other than the company or an associated company and must not provide any indemnity against, amongst others, any liability in defending criminal proceedings in which he is convicted); and (iii) provide a “qualifying pension scheme indemnity” (being an indemnity against liability incurred in connection with the company’s activities as trustee of an occupational pension plan).

  

Under Delaware law, a corporation’s certificate of incorporation may include a provision eliminating or limiting the personal liability of a director to the corporation and its stockholders for damages arising from a breach of fiduciary duty as a director. However, no provision can limit the liability of a director for:

 

•   any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders;

 

•   acts or omissions not in good faith or that involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

 

•   intentional or negligent payment of unlawful dividends or stock purchases or redemptions; or

 

•   any transaction from which the director derives an improper personal benefit.

Voting Rights

   Under English law, unless a poll is demanded by the shareholders of a company or is required by the chairman of the meeting or the company’s articles of association, shareholders shall vote on all resolutions on a show of hands. Under the Companies Act 2006, a poll may be demanded by (i) not fewer than five shareholders having the right to vote on the resolution; (ii) any shareholder(s) representing not less than 10% of the total voting rights of all the shareholders having the right to vote on the resolution (excluding any voting rights attaching to treasury shares); or (iii) any shareholder(s)    Delaware law provides that, unless otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation, each stockholder is entitled to one vote for each share of capital stock held by such stockholder.

 

156


Table of Contents
    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

   holding shares in the company conferring a right to vote on the resolution (excluding any voting rights attaching to treasury shares) being shares on which an aggregate sum has been paid up equal to not less than 10% of the total sum paid up on all the shares conferring that right. A company’s articles of association may provide more extensive rights for shareholders to call a poll.   
   Under English law, an ordinary resolution is passed on a show of hands if it is approved by a simple majority (more than 50%) of the votes cast by shareholders present (in person or by proxy) and entitled to vote. If a poll is demanded, an ordinary resolution is passed if it is approved by holders representing a simple majority of the total voting rights of shareholders present, in person or by proxy or in advance, who, being entitled to vote, vote on the resolution.   
   Special resolutions require the affirmative vote of not less than 75% of the votes cast on a show of hands by shareholders present, in person or by proxy, at the meeting and entitled to vote. If a poll is demanded, a special resolution is passed if it is approved by shareholders representing not less than 75% of the total voting rights of shareholders who, being entitled to vote, vote in person, by proxy or in advance.   

Shareholder Vote on Certain Transactions

  

The Companies Act 2006 provides for schemes of arrangement, which are arrangements or compromises between a company and any class of shareholders or creditors and used in certain types of reconstructions, amalgamations, capital reorganizations or takeovers. These arrangements require:

 

•   the approval at a shareholders’ or creditors’ meeting convened by order of the court, of a majority in number of shareholders or creditors representing 75% in value of the capital held by, or debt owed to, the class of shareholders or creditors, or class thereof present and voting, either in person or by proxy; and

 

•   the approval of the court.

  

Generally, under Delaware law, unless the certificate of incorporation provides for the vote of a larger portion of the stock, completion of a merger, consolidation, sale, lease or exchange of all or substantially all of a corporation’s assets or dissolution requires:

 

•   the approval of the board of directors; and

 

•   approval by the vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding stock or, if the certificate of incorporation provides for more or less than one vote per share, a majority of the votes of the outstanding stock of a corporation entitled to vote on the matter.

 

157


Table of Contents
    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

Standard of Conduct for Directors

  

Under English law, a director owes various statutory and fiduciary duties to the company, including:

 

•   to act in the way he considers, in good faith, would be most likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole;

 

•   to avoid a situation in which he has, or can have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly conflicts, with the interests of the company;

 

•   to act in accordance with the company’s constitution and only exercise his powers for the purposes for which they are conferred;

 

•   to exercise independent judgment;

 

•   to exercise reasonable care, skill and diligence;

 

•   not to accept benefits from a third party conferred by reason of his being a director or doing, or not doing, anything as a director; and

 

•   a duty to declare any interest that he has, whether directly or indirectly, in a proposed or existing transaction or arrangement with the company.

  

Delaware law does not contain specific provisions setting forth the standard of conduct of a director. The scope of the fiduciary duties of directors is generally determined by the courts of the State of Delaware. In general, directors have a duty to act without self-interest, on a well-informed basis and in a manner they reasonably believe to be in the best interest of the stockholders.

 

Directors of a Delaware corporation owe fiduciary duties of care and loyalty to the corporation and to its stockholders. The duty of care generally requires that a director act in good faith, with the care that an ordinarily prudent person would exercise under similar circumstances. Under this duty, a director must inform himself of all material information reasonably available regarding a significant transaction. The duty of loyalty requires that a director act in a manner he reasonably believes to be in the best interests of the corporation. He must not use his corporate position for personal gain or advantage. In general, but subject to certain exceptions, actions of a director are presumed to have been made on an informed basis, in good faith and in the honest belief that the action taken was in the best interests of the corporation. However, this presumption may be rebutted by evidence of a breach of one of the fiduciary duties. Delaware courts have also imposed a heightened standard of conduct upon directors of a Delaware corporation who take any action designed to defeat a threatened change in control of the corporation.

 

In addition, under Delaware law, when the board of directors of a Delaware corporation approves the sale or break-up of a corporation, the board of directors may, in certain circumstances, have a duty to obtain the highest value reasonably available to the stockholders.

 

158


Table of Contents
    

England & Wales

  

Delaware

Stockholder Suits

   Under English law, generally, the company, rather than its shareholders, is the proper claimant in an action in respect of a wrong done to the company or where there is an irregularity in the company’s internal management. Notwithstanding this general position, the Companies Act 2006 provides that (i) a court may allow a shareholder to bring a derivative claim (that is, an action in respect of and on behalf of the company) in respect of a cause of action arising from a director’s negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust and (ii) a shareholder may bring a claim for a court order where the company’s affairs have been or are being conducted in a manner that is unfairly prejudicial to its shareholders generally or of some of its shareholders, or that an actual or proposed act or omission of the company is or would be so prejudicial.   

Under Delaware law, a stockholder may initiate a derivative action to enforce a right of a corporation if the corporation fails to enforce the right itself. The complaint must:

 

•   state that the plaintiff was a stockholder at the time of the transaction of which the plaintiff complains or that the plaintiff’s shares thereafter devolved on the plaintiff by operation of law; and

 

•   allege with particularity the efforts made by the plaintiff to obtain the action the plaintiff desires from the directors and the reasons for the plaintiff’s failure to obtain the action; or

 

•   state the reasons for not making the effort.

 

Additionally, the plaintiff must remain a stockholder through the duration of the derivative suit. The action will not be dismissed or compromised without the approval of the Delaware Court of Chancery.

Listing

We have applied to have our ADSs listed on Nasdaq under the symbol “ABCM.”

 

159


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF AMERICAN DEPOSITARY SHARES

American Depositary Shares

Citibank, N.A. (“Citibank”) has agreed to act as the depositary for our American Depositary Shares. Citibank’s depositary offices are located at 388 Greenwich Street, New York, New York 10013. American Depositary Shares are frequently referred to as “ADSs” and represent ownership interests in securities that are on deposit with the depositary. ADSs may be represented by certificates that are commonly known as “American Depositary Receipts” or “ADRs.” The depositary typically appoints a custodian to safekeep the securities on deposit. In this case, the custodian is Citibank, N.A. (London), located at Citigroup Centre, Canary Wharf, London, E14 5LB, United Kingdom.

We have appointed Citibank as depositary pursuant to a deposit agreement. A copy of the deposit agreement will be filed with the SEC under cover of a Registration Statement on Form F-6. You may obtain a copy of the deposit agreement from the SEC’s website (www.sec.gov). Please refer to Registration Number 333-             when retrieving such copy.

We are providing you with a summary description of the material terms of the ADSs and of your material rights as an owner of ADSs. Please remember that summaries by their nature lack the precision of the information summarized and that the rights and obligations of an owner of ADSs will be determined by reference to the terms of the deposit agreement and not by this summary. We urge you to review the deposit agreement in its entirety. The portions of this summary description that are italicized describe matters that may be relevant to the ownership of ADSs but that may not be contained in the deposit agreement.

Each ADS represents the right to receive, and to exercise the beneficial ownership interests in,              ordinary shares that are on deposit with the depositary and/or custodian. An ADS also represents the right to receive, and to exercise the beneficial interests in, any other property received by the depositary or the custodian on behalf of the owner of the ADS but that has not been distributed to the owners of ADSs because of legal restrictions or practical considerations. We and the depositary may agree to change the ADS-to-Share ratio by amending the deposit agreement. This amendment may give rise to, or change, the depositary fees payable by ADS owners. The custodian, the depositary and their respective nominees will hold all deposited property for the benefit of the holders and beneficial owners of ADSs. The deposited property does not constitute the proprietary assets of the depositary, the custodian or their nominees. Beneficial ownership in the deposited property will under the terms of the deposit agreement be vested in the beneficial owners of the ADSs. The depositary, the custodian and their respective nominees will be the record holders of the deposited property represented by the ADSs for the benefit of the holders and beneficial owners of the corresponding ADSs. A beneficial owner of ADSs may or may not be the holder of ADSs. Beneficial owners of ADSs will be able to receive, and to exercise beneficial ownership interests in, the deposited property only through the registered holders of the ADSs, the registered holders of the ADSs (on behalf of the applicable ADS owners) only through the depositary, and the depositary (on behalf of the owners of the corresponding ADSs) directly, or indirectly, through the custodian or their respective nominees, in each case upon the terms of the deposit agreement.

If you become an owner of ADSs, you will become a party to the deposit agreement and therefore will be bound to its terms and to the terms of any ADR that represents your ADSs. The deposit agreement and the ADR specify our rights and obligations as well as your rights and obligations as owner of ADSs and those of the depositary. As an ADS holder, you appoint the depositary to act on your behalf in certain circumstances. The deposit agreement and the ADRs are governed by New York law. However, our obligations to the holders of ordinary shares will continue to be governed by the laws of England and Wales, which may be different from the laws in the United States.

In addition, applicable laws and regulations may require you to satisfy reporting requirements and obtain regulatory approvals in certain circumstances. You are solely responsible for complying with such reporting requirements and obtaining such approvals. Neither the depositary, the custodian, us nor any of their or our respective agents or affiliates shall be required to take any actions whatsoever on your behalf to satisfy such reporting requirements or obtain such regulatory approvals under applicable laws and regulations.

 

160


Table of Contents

As an owner of ADSs, we will not treat you as one of our shareholders, and you will not have direct shareholder rights. The depositary will hold on your behalf the shareholder rights attached to the ordinary shares underlying your ADSs. As an owner of ADSs you will be able to exercise the shareholders rights for the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs through the depositary only to the extent contemplated in the deposit agreement. To exercise any shareholder rights not contemplated in the deposit agreement you will, as an ADS owner, need to arrange for the cancellation of your ADSs and become a direct shareholder.

The manner in which you own the ADSs (e.g., in a brokerage account vs. as registered holder, or as holder of certificated vs. uncertificated ADSs) may affect your rights and obligations, and the manner in which, and extent to which, the depositary’s services are made available to you. As an owner of ADSs, you may hold your ADSs either by means of an ADR registered in your name, through a brokerage or safekeeping account, or through an account established by the depositary in your name reflecting the registration of uncertificated ADSs directly on the books of the depositary (commonly referred to as the “direct registration system” or “DRS”). The direct registration system reflects the uncertificated (book-entry) registration of ownership of ADSs by the depositary. Under the direct registration system, ownership of ADSs is evidenced by periodic statements issued by the depositary to the holders of the ADSs. The direct registration system includes automated transfers between the depositary and The Depository Trust Company (“DTC”), the central book-entry clearing and settlement system for equity securities in the United States. If you decide to hold your ADSs through your brokerage or safekeeping account, you must rely on the procedures of your broker or bank to assert your rights as ADS owner. Banks and brokers typically hold securities such as the ADSs through clearing and settlement systems such as DTC. The procedures of such clearing and settlement systems may limit your ability to exercise your rights as an owner of ADSs. Please consult with your broker or bank if you have any questions concerning these limitations and procedures. All ADSs held through DTC will be registered in the name of a nominee of DTC. This summary description assumes you have opted to own the ADSs directly by means of an ADS registered in your name and, as such, we will refer to you as the “holder.” When we refer to “you,” we assume the reader owns ADSs and will own ADSs at the relevant time.

The registration of the ordinary shares in the name of the depositary or the custodian shall, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, vest in the depositary or the custodian the record ownership in the applicable ordinary shares with the beneficial ownership rights and interests in such ordinary shares being at all times vested with the beneficial owners of the ADSs representing the ordinary shares. The depositary or the custodian shall at all times be entitled to exercise the beneficial ownership rights in all deposited property, in each case only on behalf of the holders and beneficial owners of the ADSs representing the deposited property.

Dividends and Distributions

As a holder of ADSs, you generally have the right to receive the distributions we make on the securities deposited with the custodian. Your receipt of these distributions may be limited, however, by practical considerations and legal limitations. Holders of ADSs will receive such distributions under the terms of the deposit agreement in proportion to the number of ADSs held as of the specified record date, after deduction of the applicable fees, taxes and expenses.

Distributions of Cash

Whenever we make a cash distribution for the securities on deposit with the custodian, we will deposit the funds with the custodian. Upon receipt of confirmation of the deposit of the requisite funds, the depositary will arrange for the funds received in a currency other than U.S. dollars to be converted into U.S. dollars and for the distribution of the U.S. dollars to the holders, subject to the laws and regulations of England and Wales.

The conversion into U.S. dollars will take place only if practicable and if the U.S. dollars are transferable to the United States. The depositary will apply the same method for distributing the proceeds of the sale of any property (such as undistributed rights) held by the custodian in respect of securities on deposit.

 

161


Table of Contents

The distribution of cash will be made net of the fees, expenses, taxes and governmental charges payable by holders under the terms of the deposit agreement. The depositary will hold any cash amounts it is unable to distribute in a non-interest bearing account for the benefit of the applicable holders and beneficial owners of ADSs until the distribution can be effected or the funds that the depositary holds must be escheated as unclaimed property in accordance with the laws of the relevant states of the United States.

Distributions of Shares

Whenever we make a free distribution of ordinary shares for the securities on deposit with the custodian, we will deposit the applicable number of ordinary shares with the custodian. Upon receipt of confirmation of such deposit, the depositary will either distribute to holders new ADSs representing the ordinary shares deposited or modify the ADS-to-ordinary shares ratio, in which case each ADS you hold will represent rights and interests in the additional ordinary shares so deposited. Only whole new ADSs will be distributed. Fractional entitlements will be sold and the proceeds of such sale will be distributed as in the case of a cash distribution.

The distribution of new ADSs or the modification of the ADS-to-ordinary shares ratio upon a distribution of ordinary shares will be made net of the fees, expenses, taxes and governmental charges payable by holders under the terms of the deposit agreement. In order to pay such taxes or governmental charges, the depositary may sell all or a portion of the new ordinary shares so distributed.

No such distribution of new ADSs will be made if it would violate a law (e.g., the U.S. securities laws) or if it is not operationally practicable. If the depositary does not distribute new ADSs as described above, it may sell the ordinary shares received upon the terms described in the deposit agreement and will distribute the proceeds of the sale as in the case of a distribution of cash.

Distributions of Rights

Whenever we intend to distribute rights to subscribe for additional ordinary shares, we will give prior notice to the depositary, and we will assist the depositary in determining whether it is lawful and reasonably practicable to distribute rights to subscribe for additional ADSs to holders.

The depositary will establish procedures to distribute rights to subscribe for additional ADSs to holders and to enable such holders to exercise such rights if it is lawful and reasonably practicable to make the rights available to holders of ADSs, and if we provide all of the documentation contemplated in the deposit agreement (such as opinions to address the lawfulness of the transaction). You may have to pay fees, expenses, taxes and other governmental charges to subscribe for the new ADSs upon the exercise of your rights. The depositary is not obligated to establish procedures to facilitate the distribution and exercise by holders of rights to subscribe for new ordinary shares other than in the form of ADSs.

The depositary will not distribute the rights to you if:

 

   

We do not timely request that the rights be distributed to you or we request that the rights not be distributed to you;

 

   

We fail to deliver satisfactory documents to the depositary; or

 

   

It is not reasonably practicable to distribute the rights.

The depositary will sell the rights that are not exercised or not distributed if such sale is lawful and reasonably practicable. The proceeds of such sale will be distributed to holders as in the case of a cash distribution. If the depositary is unable to sell the rights, it will allow the rights to lapse.

Elective Distributions

Whenever we intend to distribute a dividend payable at the election of shareholders either in cash or in additional shares, we will give prior notice thereof to the depositary and will indicate whether we wish the elective distribution to be made available to you. In such case, we will assist the depositary in determining whether such distribution is lawful and reasonably practicable.

 

162


Table of Contents

The depositary will make the election available to you only if it is reasonably practicable and if we have provided all of the documentation contemplated in the deposit agreement. In such case, the depositary will establish procedures to enable you to elect to receive either cash or additional ADSs, in each case as described in the deposit agreement.

If the election is not made available to you, you will receive either cash or additional ADSs, depending on what a shareholder in England and Wales would receive upon failing to make an election, as more fully described in the deposit agreement.

Other Distributions

Whenever we intend to distribute property other than cash, ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for additional ordinary shares, we will notify the depositary in advance and will indicate whether we wish such distribution to be made to you. If so, we will assist the depositary in determining whether such distribution to holders is lawful and reasonably practicable.

If it is reasonably practicable to distribute such property to you and if we provide to the depositary all of the documentation contemplated in the deposit agreement, the depositary will distribute the property to the holders in a manner it deems practicable.

The distribution will be made net of fees, expenses, taxes and governmental charges payable by holders under the terms of the deposit agreement. In order to pay such taxes and governmental charges, the depositary may sell all or a portion of the property received.

The depositary will not distribute the property to you and will sell the property if:

 

   

We do not request that the property be distributed to you or if we request that the property not be distributed to you;

 

   

We do not deliver satisfactory documents to the depositary; or

 

   

The depositary determines that all or a portion of the distribution to you is not reasonably practicable.

The proceeds of such a sale will be distributed to holders as in the case of a cash distribution.

Redemption

Whenever we decide to redeem any of the securities on deposit with the custodian, we will notify the depositary in advance. If it is practicable and if we provide all of the documentation contemplated in the deposit agreement, the depositary will provide notice of the redemption to the holders.

The custodian will be instructed to surrender the shares being redeemed against payment of the applicable redemption price. The depositary will convert into U.S. dollars upon the terms of the deposit agreement the redemption funds received in a currency other than U.S. dollars and will establish procedures to enable holders to receive the net proceeds from the redemption upon surrender of their ADSs to the depositary. You may have to pay fees, expenses, taxes and other governmental charges upon the redemption of your ADSs. If less than all ADSs are being redeemed, the ADSs to be retired will be selected by lot or on a pro rata basis, as the depositary may determine.

Changes Affecting Ordinary Shares

The ordinary shares held on deposit for your ADSs may change from time to time. For example, there may be a change in nominal or par value, split-up, cancellation, consolidation or any other reclassification of such ordinary shares or a recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation or sale of assets of the Company.

If any such change were to occur, your ADSs would, to the extent permitted by law and the deposit agreement, represent the right to receive the property received or exchanged in respect of the ordinary shares held on deposit. The depositary may in such circumstances deliver new ADSs to you, amend the deposit agreement,

 

163


Table of Contents

the ADRs and the applicable Registration Statement(s) on Form F-6, call for the exchange of your existing ADSs for new ADSs and take any other actions that are appropriate to reflect as to the ADSs the change affecting the ordinary shares. If the depositary may not lawfully distribute such property to you, the depositary may sell such property and distribute the net proceeds to you as in the case of a cash distribution.

Issuance of ADSs Upon Deposit of Ordinary Shares

Upon completion of the offering, the ordinary shares being offered hereby will be deposited by us with the custodian. Upon receipt of confirmation of such deposit, the depositary will issue ADSs to the underwriters named herein. After the completion of the offering, the ordinary shares that are being offered for sale hereby will be deposited by us with the custodian. Upon receipt of confirmation of such deposit, the depositary will issue ADSs to the underwriters named herein.

After the closing of the offering, the depositary may create ADSs on your behalf if you or your broker deposit ordinary shares with the custodian. The depositary will deliver these ADSs to the person you indicate only after you pay any applicable issuance fees and any charges and taxes payable for the transfer of the ordinary shares to the custodian. Your ability to deposit ordinary shares and receive ADSs may be limited by U.S. and England and Wales legal considerations applicable at the time of deposit.

The issuance of ADSs may be delayed until the depositary or the custodian receives confirmation that all required approvals have been given and that the ordinary shares have been duly transferred to the custodian. The depositary will only issue ADSs in whole numbers.

When you make a deposit of ordinary shares, you will be responsible for transferring good and valid title to the depositary. As such, you will be deemed to represent and warrant that:

 

   

The ordinary shares are duly authorized, validly issued, fully paid, non-assessable and legally obtained.

 

   

All preemptive (and similar) rights, if any, with respect to such ordinary shares have been validly waived or exercised.

 

   

You are duly authorized to deposit the ordinary shares.

 

   

The ordinary shares presented for deposit are free and clear of any lien, encumbrance, security interest, charge, mortgage or adverse claim, and are not, and the ADSs issuable upon such deposit will not be, “restricted securities” (as defined in the deposit agreement).

 

   

The ordinary shares presented for deposit have not been stripped of any rights or entitlements.

If any of the representations or warranties are incorrect in any way, we and the depositary may, at your cost and expense, take any and all actions necessary to correct the consequences of the misrepresentations.

Transfer, Combination and Split Up of ADRs

As an ADR holder, you will be entitled to transfer, combine or split up your ADRs and the ADSs evidenced thereby. For transfers of ADRs, you will have to surrender the ADRs to be transferred to the depositary and also must:

 

   

ensure that the surrendered ADR is properly endorsed or otherwise in proper form for transfer;

 

   

provide such proof of identity and genuineness of signatures as the depositary deems appropriate;

 

   

provide any transfer stamps required by the State of New York or the United States; and

 

   

pay all applicable fees, charges, expenses, taxes and other government charges payable by ADR holders pursuant to the terms of the deposit agreement, upon the transfer of ADRs.

To have your ADRs either combined or split up, you must surrender the ADRs in question to the depositary with your request to have them combined or split up, and you must pay all applicable fees, charges and expenses payable by ADR holders, pursuant to the terms of the deposit agreement, upon a combination or split up of ADRs.

 

164


Table of Contents

Withdrawal of Ordinary Shares Upon Cancellation of ADSs

As a holder, you will be entitled to present your ADSs to the depositary for cancellation and then receive the corresponding number of underlying ordinary shares at the custodian’s offices. Your ability to withdraw the ordinary shares held in respect of the ADSs may be limited by U.S. and England and Wales legal considerations applicable at the time of withdrawal. In order to withdraw the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs, you will be required to pay to the depositary the fees for cancellation of ADSs and any charges and taxes payable upon the transfer of the ordinary shares. You assume the risk for delivery of all funds and securities upon withdrawal. Once canceled, the ADSs will not have any rights under the deposit agreement.

If you hold ADSs registered in your name, the depositary may ask you to provide proof of identity and genuineness of any signature and such other documents as the depositary may deem appropriate before it will cancel your ADSs. The withdrawal of the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs may be delayed until the depositary receives satisfactory evidence of compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. Please keep in mind that the depositary will only accept ADSs for cancellation that represent a whole number of securities on deposit.

You will have the right to withdraw the securities represented by your ADSs at any time except for:

 

   

Temporary delays that may arise because (i) the transfer books for the ordinary shares or ADSs are closed, or (ii) ordinary shares are immobilized on account of a shareholders’ meeting or a payment of dividends.

 

   

Obligations to pay fees, taxes and similar charges.

 

   

Restrictions imposed because of laws or regulations applicable to ADSs or the withdrawal of securities on deposit.

The deposit agreement may not be modified to impair your right to withdraw the securities represented by your ADSs except to comply with mandatory provisions of law.

Voting Rights

As a holder, you generally have the right under the deposit agreement to instruct the depositary to exercise the voting rights for the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs. The voting rights of holders of ordinary shares are described in “Description of Share Capital and Articles of Association.”

At our request, the depositary will distribute to you any notice of shareholders’ meeting received from us together with information explaining how to instruct the depositary to exercise the voting rights of the securities represented by ADSs. In lieu of distributing such materials, the depositary may distribute to holders of ADSs instructions on how to retrieve such materials upon request.

If the depositary timely receives voting instructions from a holder of ADSs, it will endeavor to vote the securities (in person or by proxy) represented by the holder’s ADSs in accordance with such voting instructions as follows:

 

   

In the event of voting by show of hands, the depositary will vote (or cause the custodian to vote) all ordinary shares held on deposit at that time in accordance with the voting instructions received from a majority of holders of ADSs who provide timely voting instructions.

 

   

In the event of voting by poll, the depositary will vote (or cause the custodian to vote) the ordinary shares held on deposit in accordance with the voting instructions received from the holders of ADSs.

Securities for which no voting instructions have been received will not be voted (except as otherwise contemplated in the deposit agreement). Please note that the ability of the depositary to carry out voting instructions may be limited by practical and legal limitations and the terms of the securities on deposit. We cannot assure you that you will receive voting materials in time to enable you to return voting instructions to the depositary in a timely manner.

 

165


Table of Contents

Fees and Charges

As an ADS holder, you will be required to pay the following fees under the terms of the deposit agreement:

 

Service

   Fees

•  Issuance of ADSs (e.g., an issuance of ADS upon a deposit of ordinary shares, upon a change in the ADS(s)-to-ordinary share(s) ratio, or for any other reason, excluding ADS issuances as a result of distributions of ordinary shares)

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS issued
   

•  Cancellation of ADSs (e.g., a cancellation of ADSs for delivery of deposited property, upon a change in the ADS(s)-to-ordinary share(s) ratio, or for any other reason)

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS cancelled
   

•  Distribution of cash dividends or other cash distributions (e.g., upon a sale of rights and other entitlements)

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS held
   

•  Distribution of ADSs pursuant to (i) stock dividends or other free stock distributions, or (ii) exercise of rights to purchase additional ADSs

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS held
   

•  Distribution of securities other than ADSs or rights to purchase additional ADSs (e.g., upon a spin-off)

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS held
   

•  ADS Services

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS held on the applicable record date(s) established by the depositary
   

•  Registration of ADS transfers (e.g., upon a registration of the transfer of registered ownership of ADSs, upon a transfer of ADSs into DTC and vice versa, or for any other reason)

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS (or fraction thereof) transferred
   

•  Conversion of ADSs of one series for ADSs of another series (e.g., upon conversion of Partial Entitlement ADSs for Full Entitlement ADSs, or upon conversion of Restricted ADSs (each as defined in the Deposit Agreement) into freely transferable ADSs, and vice versa).

   Up to U.S. 5¢ per ADS (or fraction thereof) converted

 

166


Table of Contents

As an ADS holder, you will also be responsible to pay certain charges such as:

 

   

taxes (including applicable interest and penalties) and other governmental charges;

 

   

the registration fees as may from time to time be in effect for the registration of ordinary shares on the share register and applicable to transfers of ordinary shares to or from the name of the custodian, the depositary or any nominees upon the making of deposits and withdrawals, respectively;

 

   

certain cable, telex and facsimile transmission and delivery expenses;

 

   

the fees, expenses, spreads, taxes and other charges of the depositary and/or service providers (which may be a division, branch or affiliate of the depositary) in the conversion of foreign currency;

 

   

the reasonable and customary out-of-pocket expenses incurred by the depositary in connection with compliance with exchange control regulations and other regulatory requirements applicable to ordinary shares, ADSs and ADRs; and

 

   

the fees, charges, costs and expenses incurred by the depositary, the custodian, or any nominee in connection with the ADR program.

ADS fees and charges for (i) the issuance of ADSs, and (ii) the cancellation of ADSs are charged to the person for whom the ADSs are issued (in the case of ADS issuances) and to the person for whom ADSs are cancelled (in the case of ADS cancellations). In the case of ADSs issued by the depositary into DTC, the ADS issuance and cancellation fees and charges may be deducted from distributions made through DTC, and may be charged to the DTC participant(s) receiving the ADSs being issued or the DTC participant(s) holding the ADSs being cancelled, as the case may be, on behalf of the beneficial owner(s) and will be charged by the DTC participant(s) to the account of the applicable beneficial owner(s) in accordance with the procedures and practices of the DTC participants as in effect at the time. ADS fees and charges in respect of distributions and the ADS service fee are charged to the holders as of the applicable ADS record date. In the case of distributions of cash, the amount of the applicable ADS fees and charges is deducted from the funds being distributed. In the case of (i) distributions other than cash and (ii) the ADS service fee, holders as of the ADS record date will be invoiced for the amount of the ADS fees and charges and such ADS fees and charges may be deducted from distributions made to holders of ADSs. For ADSs held through DTC, the ADS fees and charges for distributions other than cash and the ADS service fee may be deducted from distributions made through DTC, and may be charged to the DTC participants in accordance with the procedures and practices prescribed by DTC and the DTC participants in turn charge the amount of such ADS fees and charges to the beneficial owners for whom they hold ADSs. In the case of (i) registration of ADS transfers, the ADS transfer fee will be payable by the ADS Holder whose ADSs are being transferred or by the person to whom the ADSs are transferred, and (ii) conversion of ADSs of one series for ADSs of another series, the ADS conversion fee will be payable by the Holder whose ADSs are converted or by the person to whom the converted ADSs are delivered.

In the event of refusal to pay the depositary fees, the depositary may, under the terms of the deposit agreement, refuse the requested service until payment is received or may set off the amount of the depositary fees from any distribution to be made to the ADS holder. Certain depositary fees and charges (such as the ADS services fee) may become payable shortly after the closing of the ADS offering. Note that the fees and charges you may be required to pay may vary over time and may be changed by us and by the depositary. You will receive prior notice of such changes. The depositary may reimburse us for certain expenses incurred by us in respect of the ADR program, by making available a portion of the ADS fees charged in respect of the ADR program or otherwise, upon such terms and conditions as we and the depositary agree from time to time.

Amendments and Termination

We may agree with the depositary to modify the deposit agreement at any time without your consent. We undertake to give holders 30 days’ prior notice of any modifications that would materially prejudice any of their substantial rights under the deposit agreement. We will not consider to be materially prejudicial to your

 

167


Table of Contents

substantial rights any modifications or supplements that are reasonably necessary for the ADSs to be registered under the Securities Act or to be eligible for book-entry settlement, in each case without imposing or increasing the fees and charges you are required to pay. In addition, we may not be able to provide you with prior notice of any modifications or supplements that are required to accommodate compliance with applicable provisions of law.

You will be bound by the modifications to the deposit agreement if you continue to hold your ADSs after the modifications to the deposit agreement become effective. The deposit agreement cannot be amended to prevent you from withdrawing the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs (except as permitted by law).

We have the right to direct the depositary to terminate the deposit agreement. Similarly, the depositary may in certain circumstances on its own initiative terminate the deposit agreement. In either case, the depositary must give notice to the holders at least 30 days before termination. Until termination, your rights under the deposit agreement will be unaffected.

Termination

After termination, the depositary will continue to collect distributions received (but will not distribute any such property until you request the cancellation of your ADSs) and may sell the securities held on deposit. After the sale, the depositary will hold the proceeds from such sale and any other funds then held for the holders of ADSs in a non-interest bearing account. At that point, the depositary will have no further obligations to holders other than to account for the funds then held for the holders of ADSs still outstanding (after deduction of applicable fees, taxes and expenses).

In connection with any termination of the deposit agreement, the depositary may make available to owners of ADSs a means to withdraw the ordinary shares represented by ADSs and to direct the depositary of such ordinary shares into an unsponsored American depositary share program established by the depositary. The ability to receive unsponsored American depositary shares upon termination of the deposit agreement would be subject to satisfaction of certain U.S. regulatory requirements applicable to the creation of unsponsored American depositary shares and the payment of applicable depositary fees.

Books of Depositary

The depositary will maintain ADS holder records at its depositary office. You may inspect such records at such office during regular business hours but solely for the purpose of communicating with other holders in the interest of business matters relating to the ADSs and the deposit agreement.

The depositary will maintain in New York facilities to record and process the issuance, cancellation, combination, split-up and transfer of ADSs. These facilities may be closed from time to time, to the extent not prohibited by law.

Limitations on Obligations and Liabilities

The deposit agreement limits our obligations and the depositary’s obligations to you. Please note the following:

 

   

We and the depositary are obligated only to take the actions specifically stated in the deposit agreement without negligence or bad faith.

 

   

The depositary disclaims any liability for any failure to carry out voting instructions, for any manner in which a vote is cast or for the effect of any vote, provided it acts in good faith and in accordance with the terms of the deposit agreement.

 

168


Table of Contents
   

The depositary disclaims any liability for any failure to determine the lawfulness or practicality of any action, for the content of any document forwarded to you on our behalf or for the accuracy of any translation of such a document, for the investment risks associated with investing in ordinary shares, for the validity or worth of the ordinary shares, for any tax consequences that result from the ownership of ADSs, for the credit-worthiness of any third party, for allowing any rights to lapse under the terms of the deposit agreement, for the timeliness of any of our notices or for our failure to give notice.

 

   

We and the depositary will not be obligated to perform any act that is inconsistent with the terms of the deposit agreement.

 

   

We and the depositary disclaim any liability if we or the depositary are prevented or forbidden from or subject to any civil or criminal penalty or restraint on account of, or delayed in, doing or performing any act or thing required by the terms of the deposit agreement, by reason of any provision, present or future of any law or regulation, or by reason of present or future provision of any provision of our Articles of Association, or any provision of or governing the securities on deposit, or by reason of any act of God or war or other circumstances beyond our control.

 

   

We and the depositary disclaim any liability by reason of any exercise of, or failure to exercise, any discretion provided for in the deposit agreement or in our Articles of Association or in any provisions of or governing the securities on deposit.

 

   

We and the depositary further disclaim any liability for any action or inaction in reliance on the advice or information received from legal counsel, accountants, any person presenting ordinary shares for deposit, any holder of ADSs or authorized representatives thereof, or any other person believed by either of us in good faith to be competent to give such advice or information.

 

   

We and the depositary also disclaim liability for the inability by a holder to benefit from any distribution, offering, right or other benefit that is made available to holders of ordinary shares but is not, under the terms of the deposit agreement, made available to you.

 

   

We and the depositary may rely without any liability upon any written notice, request or other document believed to be genuine and to have been signed or presented by the proper parties.

 

   

We and the depositary also disclaim liability for any consequential or punitive damages for any breach of the terms of the deposit agreement.

 

   

No disclaimer of any Securities Act liability is intended by any provision of the deposit agreement.

 

   

Nothing in the deposit agreement gives rise to a partnership or joint venture, or establishes a fiduciary relationship, among us, the depositary and you as an ADS holder.

 

   

Nothing in the deposit agreement precludes Citibank (or its affiliates) from engaging in transactions in which parties adverse to us or the ADS owners have interests, and nothing in the deposit agreement obligates Citibank to disclose those transactions, or any information obtained in the course of those transactions, to us or to the ADS owners, or to account for any payment received as part of those transactions.

Taxes

You will be responsible for the taxes and other governmental charges payable on the ADSs and the securities represented by the ADSs. We, the depositary and the custodian may deduct from any distribution the taxes and governmental charges payable by holders and may sell any and all property on deposit to pay the taxes and governmental charges payable by holders. You will be liable for any deficiency if the sale proceeds do not cover the taxes that are due.

The depositary may refuse to issue ADSs, to deliver, transfer, split and combine ADRs or to release securities on deposit until all taxes and charges are paid by the applicable holder. The depositary and the

 

169


Table of Contents

custodian may take reasonable administrative actions to obtain tax refunds and reduced tax withholding for any distributions on your behalf. However, you may be required to provide to the depositary and to the custodian proof of taxpayer status and residence and such other information as the depositary and the custodian may require to fulfill legal obligations. You are required to indemnify us, the depositary and the custodian for any claims with respect to taxes based on any tax benefit obtained for you.

Foreign Currency Conversion

The depositary will arrange for the conversion of all foreign currency received into U.S. dollars if such conversion is practical, and it will distribute the U.S. dollars in accordance with the terms of the deposit agreement. You may have to pay fees and expenses incurred in converting foreign currency, such as fees and expenses incurred in complying with currency exchange controls and other governmental requirements.

If the conversion of foreign currency is not practical or lawful, or if any required approvals are denied or not obtainable at a reasonable cost or within a reasonable period, the depositary may take the following actions in its discretion:

 

   

Convert the foreign currency to the extent practical and lawful and distribute the U.S. dollars to the holders for whom the conversion and distribution is lawful and practical.

 

   

Distribute the foreign currency to holders for whom the distribution is lawful and practical.

 

   

Hold the foreign currency (without liability for interest) for the applicable holders.

Governing Law/Waiver of Jury Trial

The deposit agreement, the ADRs and the ADSs will be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of New York. The rights of holders of ordinary shares (including ordinary shares represented by ADSs) are governed by the laws of England and Wales.

As an owner of ADSs, you irrevocably agree that any legal action arising out of the Deposit Agreement, the ADSs or the ADRs, involving the Company or the Depositary, may only be instituted in a state or federal court in the city of New York and actions by ADS holders to enforce any duty or liability created by the Exchange Act, the Securities Act or the respective rules and regulations thereunder must be brought, in certain circumstances, in a federal court in the city of New York.

AS A PARTY TO THE DEPOSIT AGREEMENT, YOU IRREVOCABLY WAIVE, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOUR RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY LEGAL PROCEEDING ARISING OUT OF THE DEPOSIT AGREEMENT OR THE ADRs AGAINST US AND/OR THE DEPOSITARY.

The deposit agreement provides that, to the extent permitted by law, ADS holders waive the right to a jury trial of any claim they may have against us or the depositary arising out of or relating to our ordinary shares, the ADSs or the Deposit Agreement, including any claim under U.S. federal securities laws. The waiver continues to apply to claims that arise during the period when a holder holds the ADSs, whether the ADS holder purchased the ADSs in this offering or secondary transactions, even if the ADS holder subsequently withdraws the underlying ordinary shares. If we or the depositary opposed a jury trial demand based on the waiver, the court would determine whether the waiver was enforceable in the facts and circumstances of that case in accordance with applicable case law. However, you will not be deemed, by agreeing to the terms of the deposit agreement, to have waived our or the depositary’s compliance with U.S. federal securities laws and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

 

170


Table of Contents

ORDINARY SHARES AND ADSS ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market in the United States for our ordinary shares or the ADSs, and we cannot assure you that there will be an active public market for our ADSs following this offering. We cannot predict what effect sales of ADSs in the public market or the availability of ADSs for sale will have on the market price of our ADSs. Future sales of substantial amounts of our ADSs in the public market, including ordinary shares issued upon exercise of options, or the perception that such sales may occur, however, could adversely affect the market price of our ADSs and also could adversely affect our future ability to raise capital through the sale of ADSs or other equity-related securities at times and prices we believe appropriate.

Upon completion of this offering, based on              ADSs outstanding as of                 , 2020,                 ADSs representing                ordinary shares, or              ADSs representing                  ordinary shares if the underwriters exercise their option to purchase additional ADSs in full, will be outstanding. All of the ADSs expected to be sold in this offering will be freely tradable without restriction or further registration under the Securities Act, except for ADSs held by our “affiliates,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act, who are subject to lock-up restrictions or are restricted from selling shares by Rule 144. The remaining outstanding ADSs will be deemed “restricted securities” as that term is defined under Rule 144. Restricted securities may be sold in the public market only if their offer and sale is registered under the Securities Act or if the offer and sale of those securities qualify for an exemption from registration, including exemptions provided by Rules 144 and 701 under the Securities Act, which are summarized below.

As a result of the lock-up agreements described below and the provisions of Rules 144 or 701, and assuming no extension of the lock-up period and no exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase additional ADSs, the ADSs that will be deemed “restricted securities” will be available for sale in the public market following the completion of this offering as follows:

 

   

                 ADSs or ordinary shares, as applicable, will be eligible for sale on the date of this prospectus; and

 

   

                 ADSs or ordinary shares, as applicable, will be eligible for sale upon expiration of the lock-up agreements described below, beginning more than 90 days, or in the case of Mr. Milner, 45 days, after the date of this prospectus.

Rule 144

In general, a person who has beneficially owned our ordinary shares or ADSs that are restricted securities for at least six months would be entitled to sell such securities, provided that (1) such person is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates at the time of, or at any time during the 90 days preceding, a sale and (2) we are subject to the Exchange Act periodic reporting requirements for at least 90 days before the sale. Persons who have beneficially owned our ordinary shares or ADSs that are restricted securities for at least six months but who are our affiliates at the time of, or any time during the 90 days preceding, a sale, would be subject to additional restrictions, by which such person would be entitled to sell within any three month period only a number of securities that does not exceed the greater of either of the following:

 

   

1% of the number of our ordinary shares then outstanding, in the form of ADSs or otherwise, which will equal approximately                  ordinary shares immediately after completion of this offering based on the number of ordinary shares outstanding as of                 , 2020; or

 

   

the average weekly trading volume of our ADSs on Nasdaq during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to the sale;

provided, in each case, that we are subject to the Exchange Act periodic reporting requirements for at least 90 days before the sale. Such sales both by affiliates and by non-affiliates must also comply with the manner of sale, current public information and notice provisions of Rule 144 to the extent applicable.

 

171


Table of Contents

Rule 701

In general, under Rule 701, any of our employees, board members, officers, consultants or advisors who purchases ordinary shares from us in connection with a compensatory share or option plan or other written agreement before the effective date of this offering is entitled to resell such shares 90 days after the effective date of this offering in reliance on Rule 144, without having to comply with the holding period requirements or other restrictions contained in Rule 701.

The SEC has indicated that Rule 701 will apply to typical share options granted by an issuer before it becomes subject to the reporting requirements of the Exchange Act, along with the shares acquired upon exercise of such options, including exercises after the date of this prospectus. Securities issued in reliance on Rule 701 are restricted securities and, subject to the contractual restrictions described below, beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, may be sold by persons other than “affiliates,” as defined in Rule 144, subject only to the manner of sale provisions of Rule 144 and by “affiliates” under Rule 144 without compliance with its one-year minimum holding period requirement.

Regulation S

Regulation S provides generally that sales made in offshore transactions are not subject to the registration or prospectus-delivery requirements of the Securities Act.

Lock-up Agreements

We, our directors and officers and certain of our shareholders, have agreed, subject to certain exceptions, not to offer, pledge sell, contract to sell, transfer, lend or otherwise dispose of, directly or indirectly, any ADSs, ordinary shares or securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for ADSs or ordinary shares, for 90 days, or in the case of Mr. Milner, 45 days, after the date of this prospectus without first obtaining the written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc., on behalf of the underwriters. These agreements are described below under the section captioned “Underwriters.”

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc. have advised us that they have no present intent or arrangement to release any ADSs, ordinary shares or other securities subject to a lock-up with the underwriters and will consider the release of any lock-up on a case-by-case basis. Upon a request to release any ADSs, ordinary shares or other securities subject to a lock-up, Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc. would consider the particular circumstances surrounding the request, including, but not limited to, the length of time before the lock-up expires, the number of ADSs, ordinary shares or other securities requested to be released, reasons for the request, the possible impact on the market for ADSs and whether the holder of our ordinary shares requesting the release is an officer, director or other affiliate of ours.

Share Options

We intend to file one or more registration statements on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register the offer and sale of any ordinary shares issued or reserved for issuance under our share plans. We expect to file the registration statement covering these ordinary shares after the date of this prospectus, which will permit the resale of such shares by persons who are non-affiliates of ours in the public market without restriction under the Securities Act, subject, with respect to certain of the ordinary shares, to the provisions of the lock-up agreements described above.

 

172


Table of Contents

MATERIAL TAX CONSIDERATIONS

The following summary contains a description of certain United Kingdom and U.S. federal income tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ADSs, but it does not purport to be a comprehensive description of all the tax considerations that may be relevant to a decision to purchase ADSs. The summary is based upon the tax laws of the United Kingdom and regulations thereunder and on the tax laws of the United States and regulations thereunder as of the date hereof, which are subject to change.

Material United Kingdom Tax Considerations

The following statements are of a general nature and do not purport to be a complete analysis of all potential U.K. tax consequences of acquiring, holding and disposing of the ADSs. They are based on current U.K. tax law and on the current published practice of HMRC (which may not be binding on HMRC), as of the date of this prospectus, all of which are subject to change, possibly with retrospective effect. They are intended to address only certain U.K. tax consequences for holders of ADSs who are tax resident in (and only in) the United Kingdom, and in the case of individuals, domiciled in (and only in) the United Kingdom (except where expressly stated otherwise) who are the absolute beneficial owners of the ADSs and any dividends paid on them and who hold the ADSs as investments (other than in an individual savings account or a self-invested personal pension). They do not address the U.K. tax consequences which may be relevant to certain classes of ADS holders such as traders, brokers, dealers, banks, financial institutions, insurance companies, investment companies, collective investment schemes, tax-exempt organizations, trustees, persons connected with the Company or the Group, persons holding their ADSs as part of hedging or conversion transactions, ADS holders who have (or are deemed to have) acquired their ADSs by virtue of an office or employment, and ADS holders who are or have been officers or employees of the Company or a company forming part of the Group. The statements do not apply to any ADS holder who either directly or indirectly holds or controls 10% or more of the Company’s share capital (or class thereof), voting power or profits.

The following is intended only as a general guide and is not intended to be, nor should it be considered to be, legal or tax advice to any particular prospective subscriber for, or purchaser of, any ADSs. Accordingly, prospective subscribers for, or purchasers of, any ADSs who are in any doubt as to their tax position regarding the acquisition, ownership or disposition of any ADSs or who are subject to tax in a jurisdiction other than the United Kingdom should consult their own tax advisers.

U.K. Taxation of dividends

Withholding tax

The Company will not be required to withhold U.K. tax at source when paying dividends. The amount of any liability to U.K. tax on dividends paid by the Company will depend on the individual circumstances of an ADS holder.

Income tax

An individual ADS holder who is resident for tax purposes in the United Kingdom may, depending on his or her particular circumstances, be subject to U.K. tax on dividends received from the Company. An individual ADS holder who is not resident for tax purposes in the United Kingdom should not be chargeable to U.K. income tax on dividends received from the Company unless he or she carries on (whether solely or in partnership) any trade, profession or vocation in the United Kingdom through a branch or agency to which the ADSs are attributable. There are certain exceptions for trading in the United Kingdom through independent agents, such as some brokers and investment managers.

All dividends received by a U.K. tax resident individual holder of any ADSs from the Company or from other sources will form part of the ADS holder’s total income for income tax purposes and will constitute the top

 

173


Table of Contents

slice of that income. A nil rate of income tax will apply to the first £2,000 of taxable dividend income received by the ADS holder in a tax year. Income within the nil rate band will be taken into account in determining whether income in excess of the nil rate band falls within the basic rate, higher rate or additional rate tax bands. Where the dividend income is above the £2,000 dividend allowance, the first £2,000 of the dividend income will be charged at the nil rate and any excess amount will be taxed at 7.5% to the extent that the excess amount falls within the basic rate tax band, 32.5% to the extent that the excess amount falls within the higher rate tax band and 38.1% to the extent that the excess amount falls within the additional rate tax band.

Corporation tax

Corporate ADS holders which are resident for tax purposes in the United Kingdom should not be subject to U.K. corporation tax on any dividend received from the Company so long as the dividends qualify for exemption (as is likely) and certain conditions are met (including anti-avoidance conditions). If the conditions for exemption are not met or cease to be satisfied, or such an ADS holder elects for an otherwise exempt dividend to be taxable, the ADS holder will be subject to U.K. corporation tax on dividends received from the Company, at the rate of corporation tax applicable to that ADS holder (the main rate of U.K. corporation tax is currently 19%).

Corporate ADS holders who are not resident in the United Kingdom will not generally be subject to U.K. corporation tax on dividends unless they are carrying on a trade, profession or vocation in the United Kingdom through a permanent establishment in connection with which the ADSs are used, held, or acquired.

A Shareholder who is resident outside the United Kingdom may be subject to non-U.K. taxation on dividend income under local law.

U.K. Taxation of capital gains

U.K. resident ADS holders

A disposal or deemed disposal of ADSs by an individual or corporate ADS holder who is tax resident in the United Kingdom may, depending on the ADS holder’s circumstances and subject to any available exemptions or reliefs, give rise to a chargeable gain or allowable loss for the purposes of U.K. taxation of chargeable gains.

Any chargeable gain (or allowable loss) will generally be calculated by reference to the consideration received for the disposal of the ADSs less the allowable cost to the ADS holder of acquiring any such ADSs.

The applicable tax rates for individual ADS holders realizing a gain on the disposal of ADSs is, broadly, 10% for basic rate taxpayers and 20% for higher and additional rate taxpayers. For corporate ADS holders, Corporation tax is generally charged on chargeable gains at the rate applicable to the relevant corporate ADS holder (the main rate of U.K. corporation tax is currently 19%).

Non-U.K. ADS holders

ADS holders who are not resident in the United Kingdom and, in the case of an individual ADS holder, not temporarily non-resident, should not be liable for U.K. tax on capital gains realized on a sale or other disposal of ADSs unless (i) such ADSs are used, held or acquired for the purposes of a trade, profession or vocation carried on in the United Kingdom through a branch or agency or, in the case of a corporate ADS holder, through a permanent establishment or (ii) where certain conditions are met, the Company derives 75% or more of its gross value from U.K. land (which is not expected to be the case). ADS holders who are not resident in the United Kingdom may be subject to non-U.K. taxation on any gain under local law.

Generally, an individual ADS holder who has ceased to be resident in the United Kingdom for U.K. tax purposes for a period of five years or less and who disposes of any ADSs during that period may be liable on their return to the United Kingdom to U.K. taxation on any capital gain realized (subject to any available exemption or relief).

 

174


Table of Contents

U.K. stamp duty (“stamp duty”) and U.K. stamp duty reserve tax

The following statements apply to all ADS holders, regardless of their jurisdiction of tax residence.

It is assumed for the purposes of the following statements that all transfers of, or agreements to transfer, the Company’s ordinary shares are only made at times when (i) the Company’s ordinary shares are admitted to trading on AIM but are not listed on any market (with the term “listed” being construed in accordance with section 99A of the Finance Act 1986); and (ii) AIM continues to be accepted as a “recognised growth market” (as construed in accordance with section 99A of the Finance Act 1986).

No stamp duty is payable on the issue of the Company’s ordinary shares into a depositary receipt system (such as that operated by Citibank) or a clearance service (such as DTC). No stamp duty reserve tax (“SDRT”) should be payable on the issue of the Company’s ordinary shares into a depositary receipt system or a clearance service. Accordingly, no stamp duty or SDRT should be payable on the creation and issue of the ADSs pursuant to the issue of the Company’s ordinary shares to the Custodian.

No stamp duty or SDRT should be payable on transfers of, or agreements to transfer, the Company’s ordinary shares into a depositary receipt system or a clearance service.

No stamp duty or SDRT should be payable on paperless transfers of, or agreements to transfer, the ADSs through the facilities of DTC.

No stamp duty should be payable on a written instrument transferring, or a written agreement to transfer, ADSs provided the instrument or agreement is executed and remains at all times outside the U.K. No SDRT should be payable in respect of agreements to transfer ADSs.

No stamp duty or SDRT should be payable on transfers of, or agreements to transfer, the Company’s ordinary shares outside of a depositary receipt system or a clearance service.

No stamp duty or SDRT should be payable on a repurchase by the Company of the Company’s ordinary shares.

Material United States Federal Income Tax Considerations

The following summary describes certain material U.S. federal income tax considerations generally applicable to U.S. Holders (as defined below), and solely to the extent described below under the heading “U.S. Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act,” to persons other than U.S. Holders, of an investment in the ordinary shares or ADSs. This summary applies only to U.S. Holders that hold the ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), that have acquired the ordinary shares or ADSs in this offering and that have the U.S. dollar as their functional currency.

This discussion is based on the tax laws of the United States, including the Code, as in effect on the date hereof and on U.S. Treasury regulations as in effect or, in some cases, as proposed, on the date hereof, as well as judicial and administrative interpretations thereof available on or before such date. All of the foregoing authorities are subject to change or differing interpretations, which change or differing interpretation could apply retroactively and could affect the tax consequences described below. No ruling will be requested from the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”) regarding the tax consequences of this offering and there can be no assurance that the IRS will agree with the discussion set out below. This summary does not address any estate or gift tax consequences, the alternative minimum tax, the Medicare tax on net investment income or any state, local or non-U.S. tax consequences.

This summary also does not address the tax consequences that may be relevant to persons in special tax situations such as:

 

   

banks;

 

175


Table of Contents
   

certain financial institutions;

 

   

insurance companies;

 

   

regulated investment companies;

 

   

real estate investment trusts;

 

   

individual retirement accounts and other tax-deferred accounts;

 

   

broker-dealers;

 

   

traders that elect to mark to market;

 

   

U.S. expatriates;

 

   

tax-exempt entities;

 

   

persons that own the ordinary shares or ADSs as part of a “straddle,” “hedge,” “conversion transaction” or integrated transaction;

 

   

persons that actually or constructively own 10% or more of the Company’s share capital (by vote or value);

 

   

persons that are resident or ordinarily resident in or have a permanent establishment in a jurisdiction outside the United States;

 

   

persons who acquired the ordinary shares or ADSs pursuant to the exercise of any employee share option or otherwise as compensation;

 

   

persons subject to special tax accounting rules as a result of any item of gross income with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs being taken into account in an applicable financial statement; or

 

   

pass-through entities or arrangements, or persons holding ordinary shares or ADSs through pass-through entities or arrangements.

THE SUMMARY OF U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS SET OUT BELOW IS FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. ALL PROSPECTIVE PURCHASERS SHOULD CONSULT THEIR TAX ADVISORS AS TO THE APPLICATION OF THE U.S. FEDERAL TAX RULES TO THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES AS WELL AS THE STATE, LOCAL, NON-U.S. AND OTHER TAX CONSEQUENCES TO THEM OF THE PURCHASE, OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION OF THE ORDINARY SHARES OR ADSS.

As used herein, the term “U.S. Holder” means a beneficial owner of the ordinary shares or ADSs that is, for U.S. federal income tax purposes:

 

   

an individual who is a citizen or resident of the United States;

 

   

a corporation (or other entity taxable as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes) created or organized in the United States or under the laws of the United States, any state thereof or the District of Columbia;

 

   

an estate, the income of which is subject to U.S. federal income taxation regardless of its source; or

 

   

a trust that (1) is subject to the primary supervision of a court within the United States and the control of one or more U.S. persons for all substantial decisions or (2) has a valid election in effect under applicable U.S. Treasury regulations to be treated as a U.S. person.

If an entity or other arrangement treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes holds ordinary shares or ADSs, the tax treatment of a partner will generally depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership and certain determinations made at the partnership level. A person that would be a U.S. Holder if it held ordinary shares or ADSs directly and that is a partner of a partnership holding ordinary shares or ADSs is urged to consult its tax advisor.

 

176


Table of Contents

The discussion below assumes that the representations contained in the deposit agreement are true and that the obligations in the deposit agreement and any related agreement will be complied with in accordance with their terms. Generally, a holder of an ADS should be treated for U.S. federal income tax purposes as holding the ordinary shares represented by the ADS. Accordingly, no gain or loss will generally be recognized upon an exchange of ADSs for ordinary shares.

Taxation of Dividends and Other Distributions on the Ordinary Shares or ADSs

Subject to the passive foreign investment company rules discussed below, the gross amount of any distributions the Company makes to a U.S. Holder (including the amount of any tax withheld) with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs generally will be includible in a U.S. Holder’s gross income as dividend income on the date of receipt, but only to the extent the distribution is paid out of the Company’s current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles). The dividends will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction allowed to corporations in respect of dividends received from other U.S. corporations. To the extent the amount of the distribution exceeds the Company’s current and accumulated earnings and profits (as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles), such excess amount will be treated first as a tax-free return of a U.S. Holder’s tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs, and then, to the extent such excess amount exceeds such holder’s tax basis in such ordinary shares or ADSs, as capital gain. The Company currently does not, and it does not intend to, calculate its earnings and profits under U.S. federal income tax principles. Therefore, a U.S. Holder should expect that a distribution will generally be reported as a dividend even if that distribution would otherwise be treated as a non-taxable return of capital or as capital gain under the rules described above.

With respect to certain non-corporate U.S. Holders, including individual U.S. Holders, dividends may be taxed at the lower capital gain rates applicable to “qualified dividend income,” provided that (i) the ordinary shares or ADSs, as applicable, are readily tradable on an established securities market in the United States, (ii) certain holding period and at-risk requirements are met and (iii) the Company is not a passive foreign investment company (as discussed below) with respect to the relevant U.S. Holder for either the taxable year in which the dividend was paid or the preceding taxable year. In this regard, the ordinary shares or ADSs will generally be considered to be readily tradable on an established securities market in the United States if they are listed on Nasdaq, as it is expected that the ADSs will be. However, based on existing guidance, it is not entirely clear whether any dividends a U.S. Holder receives with respect to the ordinary shares will be taxed as qualified dividend income, because the ordinary shares will not themselves be listed on a securities market in the United States for trading purposes. U.S. Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the availability of the reduced tax rate on dividends with respect to distributions on the ordinary shares or ADSs in light of their particular circumstances.

The amount of any distribution paid in foreign currency that will be included in the gross income of a U.S. Holder will be the U.S. dollar value of the distribution payment based on the exchange rate in effect on the date such distribution is included in such holder’s income, whether or not the payment is converted into U.S. dollars at that time. The amount of any distribution of property other than cash will be the fair market value of such property on the date of distribution.

Any dividends paid by the Company with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs will constitute foreign source income for foreign tax credit limitation purposes. If the dividends are taxed as qualified dividend income (as discussed above), the amount of the dividend taken into account for purposes of calculating the foreign tax credit limitation will, in general, be limited to the gross amount of the dividend, multiplied by the reduced tax rate applicable to qualified dividend income and divided by the highest tax rate normally applicable to dividends. The limitation on foreign taxes eligible for credit is calculated separately with respect to specific classes of income. Dividends paid by the Company with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs will generally constitute “passive category income” for purposes of the foreign tax credit.

 

177


Table of Contents

Taxation of Disposition of the Ordinary Shares or ADSs

Subject to the passive foreign investment company rules discussed below, upon a sale or other taxable disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs, a U.S. Holder will generally recognize capital gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realized (including the amount of any tax withheld) and such holder’s adjusted tax basis in such ordinary shares or ADSs.

If the consideration received upon the sale or other taxable disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs is paid in foreign currency, the amount realized will be the U.S. dollar value of the payment received, translated at the spot rate of exchange on the date of taxable disposition. If the ordinary shares or ADSs are treated as traded on an established securities market for U.S. federal income tax purposes and the relevant U.S. Holder is either a cash-basis taxpayer or an accrual-basis taxpayer who has made a special election (which must be applied consistently from year to year and cannot be changed without the consent of the IRS), such holder will determine the U.S. dollar value of the amount realized in foreign currency by translating the amount received at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date of the taxable disposition. An accrual-basis taxpayer that does not make the special election will recognize exchange gain or loss to the extent attributable to the difference between the exchange rates on the date of disposition and the settlement date, and such exchange gain or loss generally will constitute U.S.-source ordinary income or loss.

A U.S. Holder’s initial tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs generally will equal the cost of such ordinary shares or ADSs. If a U.S. Holder used foreign currency to purchase the ordinary shares or ADSs, the cost of such ordinary shares or ADSs will be the U.S. dollar value of the foreign currency purchase price on the date of purchase, translated at the spot rate of exchange on that date. If the ordinary shares or ADSs are treated as traded on an established securities market for U.S. federal income tax purposes and the relevant U.S. Holder is either a cash-basis taxpayer or an accrual-basis taxpayer who has made the special election described above, the U.S. Holder will determine the U.S. dollar value of the cost of such ordinary shares or ADSs by translating the amount paid at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date of the purchase.

Any gain or loss on the sale or other taxable disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs will generally be treated as U.S. source income or loss, and treated as long-term capital gain or loss if the U.S. Holder’s holding period in the ordinary shares or ADSs at the time of the disposition exceeds one year. Accordingly, in the event any United Kingdom tax (including withholding tax) is imposed upon the sale or other taxable disposition, a U.S. Holder may not be able to utilize foreign tax credits unless such holder has foreign source income or gain in the same category from other sources. Long-term capital gain of non-corporate U.S. Holders generally will be subject to U.S. federal income tax at reduced tax rates. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to significant limitations.

Passive Foreign Investment Company Considerations

The Company will be classified as a PFIC for any taxable year if either: (a) at least 75 per cent of its gross income is “passive income” for purposes of the PFIC rules or (b) at least 50 per cent of the value of its assets (determined on the basis of a quarterly average) is attributable to assets that produce or are held for the production of passive income. For this purpose, the Company will be treated as owning a proportionate share of the assets and earning a proportionate share of the income of any other entity treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes in which the Company owns, directly or indirectly, 25 per cent or more (by value) of the stock.

Under the PFIC rules, if the Company were considered a PFIC at any time that a U.S. Holder holds the ordinary shares or ADSs, the Company would continue to be treated as a PFIC with respect to such investment unless (i) it ceased to be a PFIC and (ii) the U.S. Holder made a “deemed sale” election under the PFIC rules. If such election is made, a U.S. Holder will be deemed to have sold its ordinary shares or ADSs at their fair market value on the last day of the last taxable year in which the Company is classified as a PFIC, and any gain from

 

178


Table of Contents

such deemed sale would be subject to the consequences described below. After the deemed sale election, the ordinary shares or ADSs with respect to which the deemed sale election was made will not be treated as shares in a PFIC unless the Company subsequently becomes a PFIC.

Based on the nature and composition of the Company’s income, assets and operations and the income, assets and operations of the Company’s subsidiaries, the Company does not believe that it is currently a PFIC and it does not expect to be a PFIC in the foreseeable future. However, this is a factual determination that depends on, among other things, the nature and composition of the Company’s income and assets, and the market value of the Company’s shares and assets, including the nature and composition of income and assets and the market value of shares and assets of the Company’s subsidiaries, from time to time, and thus the determination can only be made annually after the close of each taxable year. Therefore, no assurance can be given that the Company will not be classified as a PFIC for the current taxable year or any future taxable year.

If the Company is considered a PFIC at any time that a U.S. Holder holds the ordinary shares or ADSs, any gain recognized by the U.S. Holder on a sale or other disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs, as well as the amount of any “excess distribution” (as defined below) received by the U.S. Holder, would be allocated ratably over the U.S. Holder’s holding period for the ordinary shares or ADSs. The amounts allocated to the taxable year of the sale or other disposition (or the taxable year of receipt, in the case of an excess distribution) and to any year before the Company became a PFIC would be taxed as ordinary income. The amount allocated to each other taxable year would be subject to tax at the highest rate in effect for individuals or corporations, as appropriate, for that taxable year, and an interest charge would be imposed. For the purposes of these rules, an excess distribution is the amount by which any distribution received by a U.S. Holder on the ordinary shares or ADSs exceeds 125% of the average of the annual distributions on the ordinary shares or ADSs received during the preceding three years or the U.S. Holder’s holding period, whichever is shorter. In addition, if the Company is a PFIC and any of the Company’s subsidiaries is also a PFIC, a U.S. Holder may also be subject to the adverse tax consequences described above with respect to any gain or “excess distribution” realized or deemed realized in respect of such subsidiary PFIC.

Certain elections may be available that would result in alternative treatments (such as mark-to-market treatment or treatment as a qualified electing fund (“QEF”)) of the ordinary shares or ADSs if the Company is considered a PFIC. However, the Company does not expect to furnish U.S. Holders of the ordinary shares or ADSs with the tax information necessary to enable a U.S. Holder to make a QEF election. In addition, an election for mark-to-market treatment is unlikely to be available to mitigate any adverse tax consequences with respect to a subsidiary that is also a PFIC. If the Company is considered a PFIC, a U.S. Holder will also be subject to annual information reporting requirements. U.S. Holders should consult their tax advisors about the potential application of the PFIC rules to an investment in the ordinary shares or ADSs and the potential consequences related thereto.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

Distributions on the ordinary shares or ADSs and proceeds from the sale, exchange or redemption of the ordinary shares or ADSs may be subject to information reporting to the IRS and possible U.S. backup withholding. Backup withholding will not apply, however, to a U.S. Holder that furnishes a correct taxpayer identification number and certifies that it is not subject to backup withholding or that is otherwise exempt from backup withholding. U.S. Holders that are required to establish their exempt status generally must provide such certification on IRS Form W-9.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts withheld as backup withholding may be credited against a U.S. Holder’s U.S. federal income tax liability, and such holder may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules by filing the appropriate claim for refund with the IRS and furnishing any required information in a timely manner. U.S. Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the application of the U.S. information reporting and backup withholding rules.

 

179


Table of Contents

Foreign Financial Asset Reporting

Certain U.S. Holders may be required to report information relating to an interest in the ordinary shares or ADSs, subject to certain exceptions (including an exception for ordinary shares or ADSs held in accounts maintained by certain financial institutions). Penalties can apply if U.S. Holders fail to satisfy such reporting requirements. U.S. Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the effect, if any, of this requirement on their ownership and disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs.

U.S. Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act

Certain provisions of the Code and U.S. Treasury regulations (commonly collectively referred to as “FATCA”) generally impose 30 percent withholding on certain “withholdable payments” and, in the future, may impose such withholding on “foreign passthru payments” made by a “foreign financial institution” (as defined under FATCA) (an “FFI”) that has entered into an agreement with the IRS to perform certain diligence and reporting obligations with respect to the FFI’s U.S.-owned accounts. If the Company were to be treated as an FFI, (i) such withholding may be imposed on such payments to any other FFI (including an intermediary through which an investor may hold the ordinary shares or ADSs) that is not a “participating FFI” (as defined under FATCA) or any other investor who does not provide information sufficient to establish that the investor is not subject to withholding under FATCA, unless such other FFI or investor is otherwise exempt from FATCA and (ii) the Company may be required to report certain information regarding investors to the relevant tax authorities, which information may be shared with taxing authorities in the United States. Under current guidance, the term “foreign passthru payment” is not defined, and it is therefore not clear whether or to what extent payments on the ordinary shares or ADSs would be considered foreign passthru payments. Withholding on foreign passthru payments would not be required with respect to payments made before the date that is two years after the date of publication in the Federal Register of final U.S. Treasury regulations defining the term “foreign passthru payment.” The United States has entered into an intergovernmental agreement, or IGA, with the United Kingdom (the “U.K. IGA”), which modifies the FATCA withholding regime described above. If the Company was treated as an FFI under the U.K. IGA, it would be subject to these diligence, withholding and reporting obligations under FATCA. Prospective investors should consult their tax advisors regarding the potential impact of FATCA, the U.K. IGA and any non-U.S. legislation implementing FATCA on the investment in the ordinary shares or ADSs.

THE SUMMARY OF U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS SET OUT ABOVE IS FOR GENERAL INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY. INVESTORS ARE URGED TO CONSULT THEIR TAX ADVISORS ABOUT THE APPLICATION OF THE U.S. FEDERAL TAX RULES TO THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES AS WELL AS THE STATE, LOCAL, NON-U.S. AND OTHER TAX CONSEQUENCES TO THEM OF THE PURCHASE, OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION OF THE ORDINARY SHARES OR ADSS.

 

180


Table of Contents

UNDERWRITERS

Under the terms and subject to the conditions in an underwriting agreement dated the date of this prospectus, the underwriters named below, for whom Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc. are acting as representatives, have severally agreed to purchase, and we have agreed to sell to them, severally, the number of ADSs indicated below:

 

Name

  

Number of
ADSs

 

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC

  

BofA Securities, Inc.

  

SVB Leerink LLC

  

Lazard Frères & Co. LLC

  

William Blair & Company, L.L.C.

  
  

 

 

 

Total:

                       
  

 

 

 

The underwriters and the representatives are collectively referred to as the “underwriters” and the “representatives,” respectively. The underwriters are offering the ADSs subject to their acceptance of the ADSs from us and subject to prior sale. The underwriting agreement provides that the obligations of the several underwriters to pay for and accept delivery of the ADSs offered by this prospectus are subject to the approval of certain legal matters by their counsel and to certain other conditions. The underwriters are obligated to take and pay for all of the ADSs offered by this prospectus if any such ADSs are taken. However, the underwriters are not required to take or pay for the ADSs covered by the underwriters’ option to purchase additional ADSs described below.

The underwriters initially propose to offer part of the ADSs directly to the public at the offering price listed on the cover page of this prospectus and part to certain dealers at a price that represents a concession not in excess of $                 per ADS under the public offering price. After the initial offering of the ADSs, the offering price and other selling terms may from time to time be varied by the representatives.

We have granted to the underwriters an option, exercisable for 30 days from the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to                  additional ADSs at the public offering price listed on the cover page of this prospectus, less underwriting discounts and commissions. To the extent the option is exercised, each underwriter will become obligated, subject to certain conditions, to purchase about the same percentage of the additional ADSs as the number listed next to the underwriter’s name in the preceding table bears to the total number of ADSs listed next to the names of all underwriters in the preceding table.

The following table shows the per ADS and total public offering price, underwriting discounts and commissions, and proceeds before expenses to us. These amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase up to an additional                  ADSs.

 

            Total  
     Per
ADS
     No Exercise      Full
Exercise
 

Public offering price

   $                        $                        $                    

Underwriting discounts and commissions to be paid by us

   $        $        $    

Proceeds, before expenses, to us

   $        $        $    

The estimated offering expenses payable by us, exclusive of the underwriting discounts and commissions, are approximately $                . We have agreed to reimburse the underwriters for expenses relating to clearance of this offering with the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority up to $40,000.

 

181


Table of Contents

The underwriters have informed us that they do not intend sales to discretionary accounts to exceed 5% of the total number of ADSs offered by them.

We have applied to have our ADSs listed on Nasdaq under the trading symbol “ABCM.” Our ordinary shares are listed on AIM, a market of the London Stock Exchange, under the trading symbol “ABC.”

We have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc. on behalf of the underwriters, we will not, and will not publicly disclose an intention to, during the period ending 90 days after the date of this prospectus (the “restricted period”): (i) offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend, or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any ordinary shares, ADSs or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for ordinary shares or ADSs, (ii) enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of the ordinary shares or ADSs, whether any such transaction described in clause (i) or (ii) above is to be settled by delivery of ordinary shares, ADSs or such other securities, in cash or otherwise, or (iii) file any registration statement with the SEC (or the equivalent thereof in any non-U.S. jurisdiction) relating to the offering of any ordinary shares, ADSs or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for ordinary shares or ADSs, other than (a) the ADSs to be sold in this offering, (b) the issuance of ordinary shares upon the exercise of an option or warrant or the conversion of a security outstanding on the date of, and as described in, this prospectus, (c) the issuance of ordinary shares upon any award or vesting event pursuant to the Long-Term Incentive Plan described in this prospectus, (d) facilitating the establishment of a trading plan on behalf of a shareholder, officer or director of the Company pursuant to Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act for the transfer of ordinary shares or ADSs, provided that (1) such plan does not provide for the transfer of ordinary shares or ADSs during the restricted period and (2) to the extent a public announcement or filing under the Exchange Act (or the equivalent thereof in any non-U.S. jurisdiction), if any, is required of or voluntarily made by the Company regarding the establishment of such plan, such announcement or filing shall include a statement to the effect that no transfer of ordinary shares or ADSs may be made under such plan during the restricted period, (e) the filing of any registration statement on Form S-8 (or any successor form) with the SEC, (f) sales of ordinary shares on behalf of our executive officers named in this prospectus to satisfy the withholding taxes payable upon the vesting of such officer’s equity awards pursuant to employee benefit plans described in this prospectus or (g) the issuance of up to 15% of our ordinary shares, including in the form of ADSs, outstanding immediately following the completion of this offering in connection with mergers, acquisitions, joint ventures, strategic alliances, commercial relationships or other collaborations, provided that each recipient of ordinary shares, ADSs or securities convertible into or exercisable for ordinary shares or ADSs pursuant to this clause (g) shall, on or prior to such issuance, execute a lock-up agreement with respect to the remaining portion of the restricted period.

All of our directors and executive officers and certain of our shareholders have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc. on behalf of the underwriters, they will not, and will not publicly disclose an intention to, during the restricted period, which in the case of Mr. Milner ends 45 days after the date of this prospectus:

 

   

offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any ordinary shares or ADSs or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for ordinary shares or ADSs; or

 

   

enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of the ordinary shares or ADSs,

whether any such transaction described above is to be settled by delivery of ordinary shares or ADSs or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. In addition, each such person agrees that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc. on behalf of the underwriters, such person will not, during the restricted period, make any demand for, or exercise any right with respect to, the registration of any

 

182


Table of Contents

ordinary shares or ADSs or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for ordinary shares or ADSs.

The restrictions described in the immediately preceding paragraph are subject to certain specified exceptions, including the following:

 

  (A)   transfers of ordinary shares, ADSs or any security convertible into ordinary shares or ADSs as a bona fide gift, pursuant to a will, other testamentary document or intestate succession to the legal representatives, heirs, beneficiaries or immediate family members of the lock-up party, or to any immediate family member or other dependent of the lock-up party;

 

  (B)   transfers to any trust, partnership, limited liability company or other entity for the direct or indirect benefit of the lock-up party or an immediate family member of the lock-up party;

 

  (C)   distributions of ordinary shares, ADSs or any security convertible into ordinary shares or ADSs to limited partners or stockholders of the lock-up party;

 

  (D)   transfers to the lock-up party’s affiliates or to any investment fund or other entity controlled or managed by the lock-up party;

 

  (E)   transfers to a nominee or custodian of a person or entity to whom a disposition or transfer would be permissible under clauses (A) through (D) above;

 

  (F)   transfers pursuant to an order of a court or regulatory agency, including a domestic relations order or negotiated divorce settlement, or to comply with any regulations related to the lock-up party’s ownership of ordinary shares or ADSs;

 

  (G)   transfers to the Company or its affiliates upon death, disability or termination of employment, in each case, of the lock-up party;

 

  (H)   transfers (including transfers on the open market) for the primary purpose of paying taxes (including estimated taxes) due as a result of the vesting of ordinary shares or ADSs under equity awards, in each case pursuant to employee benefit plans disclosed in this prospectus;

 

  (I)   transfers pursuant to a bona fide third-party tender offer, merger, consolidation or other similar transaction made to all holders of the Company’s ordinary shares or ADSs involving a change of control of the Company following the consummation of this offering that has been approved by the Company’s board of directors, provided that in the event that such tender offer, merger, consolidation or other such transaction is not completed, the lock-up party’s ordinary shares or ADSs shall remain subject to the provisions of the lock-up agreement;

 

  (J)   transfers of ordinary shares or ADSs to the Company in connection with the repurchase of ordinary shares or ADSs issued pursuant to an employee benefit plan, in connection with any contractual arrangement in effect on the date of the lock-up agreement and disclosed in the Registration Statement that provides for the repurchase of ordinary shares or ADSs by the Company, or in connection with the termination of employment with the Company;

 

  (K)   transactions relating to ordinary shares, ADSs or other securities acquired in open market transactions after the completion of this offering; and

 

  (L)   the establishment of a trading plan on behalf of a shareholder, officer or director of the Company pursuant to Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act for the transfer of ordinary shares or ADSs, provided that such plan does not provide for the transfer of ordinary shares or ADSs during the restricted period,

provided, further, that:

 

   

in the case of any transfer or distribution pursuant to clauses (A) through (F) above, each donee, trustee, distributee or transferee shall sign and deliver a lock-up agreement,

 

   

in the case of any transfer or distribution pursuant to clauses (F) through (H), (J) and (L) above, any filing required by the Exchange Act or under the applicable rules and regulations of AIM, if any (the

 

183


Table of Contents
 

“AIM Rules”), shall include a statement that the such transfer or distribution is being made pursuant to the circumstances described in the applicable clause, and

 

   

in the case of any transfer or distribution pursuant to clauses (A) through (H), (J) and (L) above, no filing under the Exchange Act or under the AIM Rules shall be required or shall be voluntarily made during the restricted period, other than as provided above.

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC and BofA Securities, Inc., in their sole discretion, may release the ordinary shares, ADSs and other securities subject to the lock-up agreements described above in whole or in part at any time.

In order to facilitate the offering of the ADSs, the underwriters may engage in transactions that stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the price of the ADSs. Specifically, the underwriters may sell more ADSs than they are obligated to purchase under the underwriting agreement, creating a short position. A short sale is covered if the short position is no greater than the number of ADSs available for purchase by the underwriters under the option to purchase additional ADSs. The underwriters can close out a covered short sale by exercising the option to purchase additional ADSs or purchasing ADSs in the open market. In determining the source of ADSs to close out a covered short sale, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the open market price of ADSs compared to the price available under the option to purchase additional ADSs. The underwriters may also sell ADSs in excess of the option to purchase additional ADSs, creating a naked short position. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing ADSs in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of the ADSs in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in this offering. As an additional means of facilitating this offering, the underwriters may bid for, and purchase, ADSs in the open market to stabilize the price of the ADSs. These activities may raise or maintain the market price of the ADSs above independent market levels or prevent or retard a decline in the market price of the ADSs. The underwriters are not required to engage in these activities and may end any of these activities at any time.

We and the underwriters have agreed to indemnify each other against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.

A prospectus in electronic format may be made available on websites maintained by one or more underwriters, or selling group members, if any, participating in this offering. The representatives may agree to allocate a number of ADSs to underwriters for sale to their online brokerage account holders. Internet distributions will be allocated by the representatives to underwriters that may make Internet distributions on the same basis as other allocations.

The underwriters and their respective affiliates are full service financial institutions engaged in various activities, which may include securities trading, commercial and investment banking, financial advisory, investment management, investment research, principal investment, hedging, financing and brokerage activities. Certain of the underwriters and their respective affiliates have, from time to time, performed, and may in the future perform, various financial advisory and investment banking services for us, for which they received or will receive customary fees and expenses.

In addition, in the ordinary course of their various business activities, the underwriters and their respective affiliates may make or hold a broad array of investments and actively trade debt and equity securities (or related derivative securities) and financial instruments (including bank loans) for their own account and for the accounts of their customers and may at any time hold long and short positions in such securities and instruments. Such investment and securities activities may involve our securities and instruments. The underwriters and their respective affiliates may also make investment recommendations or publish or express independent research views in respect of such securities or instruments and may at any time hold, or recommend to clients that they acquire, long or short positions in such securities and instruments.

 

184


Table of Contents

Pricing of the Offering

Prior to this offering, there has been only limited over-the-counter trading in the ordinary shares in the United States. The initial public offering price will be determined by negotiations between us and the representatives. Among the factors considered in determining the initial public offering price will be the trading price of our ordinary shares on AIM, future prospects and those of our industry in general, our sales, earnings and certain other financial and operating information in recent periods, and the price-earnings ratios, price-sales ratios, market prices of securities, and certain financial and operating information of companies engaged in activities similar to ours.

Selling Restrictions

Other than in the United States, no action has been taken by us or the underwriters that would permit a public offering of the securities offered by this prospectus in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required. The securities offered by this prospectus may not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, nor may this prospectus or any other offering material or advertisements in connection with the offer and sale of any such securities be distributed or published, in any jurisdiction, except under circumstances that will result in compliance with the applicable rules and regulations of that jurisdiction. Persons into whose possession this prospectus comes are advised to inform themselves about and to observe any restrictions relating to the offering and the distribution of this prospectus. This prospectus does not constitute an offer to sell or a solicitation of an offer to buy any securities offered by this prospectus in any jurisdiction in which such an offer or a solicitation is unlawful.

Australia

No placement document, prospectus, product disclosure statement or other disclosure document has been lodged with the Australian Securities and Investments Commission in relation to the offering. This prospectus does not constitute a prospectus, product disclosure statement or other disclosure document under the Corporations Act, and does not purport to include the information required for a prospectus, product disclosure statement or other disclosure document under the Corporations Act.

Any offer in Australia of the ADSs may only be made to persons, or to the Exempt Investors, who are “sophisticated investors” (within the meaning of section 708(8) of the Corporations Act), “professional investors” (within the meaning of section 708(11) of the Corporations Act) or otherwise pursuant to one or more exemptions contained in section 708 of the Corporations Act so that it is lawful to offer the ADSs without disclosure to investors under Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act.

The ADSs applied for by Exempt Investors in Australia must not be offered for sale in Australia in the period of 12 months after the date of allotment under the offering, except in circumstances where disclosure to investors under Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act would not be required pursuant to an exemption under section 708 of the Corporations Act or otherwise or where the offer is pursuant to a disclosure document which complies with Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act. Any person acquiring ADSs must observe such Australian on-sale restrictions.

This prospectus contains general information only and does not take into account the investment objectives, financial situation or particular needs of any particular person. It does not contain any securities recommendations or financial product advice. Before making an investment decision, investors need to consider whether the information in this prospectus is appropriate for their needs, objectives and circumstances, and, if necessary, seek expert advice on those matters.

Canada

The ADSs may be sold in Canada only to purchasers purchasing, or deemed to be purchasing, as principal that are accredited investors, as defined in National Instrument 45-106 Prospectus Exemptions or subsection

 

185


Table of Contents

73.3(1) of the Securities Act (Ontario), and are permitted clients, as defined in National Instrument 31-103 Registration Requirements, Exemptions and Ongoing Registrant Obligations. Any resale of the ADSs must be made in accordance with an exemption from, or in a transaction not subject to, the prospectus requirements of applicable securities laws.

Securities legislation in certain provinces or territories of Canada may provide a purchaser with remedies for rescission or damages if this prospectus (including any amendment thereto) contains a misrepresentation, provided that the remedies for rescission or damages are exercised by the purchaser within the time limit prescribed by the securities legislation of the purchaser’s province or territory. The purchaser should refer to any applicable provisions of the securities legislation of the purchaser’s province or territory for particulars of these rights or consult with a legal advisor.

Pursuant to section 3A.3 of National Instrument 33-105 Underwriting Conflicts (NI 33-105), the underwriters are not required to comply with the disclosure requirements of NI 33-105 regarding underwriter conflicts of interest in connection with this offering.

European Economic Area and the United Kingdom

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area and the United Kingdom (each, a “Relevant State”), no securities have been offered or will be offered pursuant to this offering to the public in that Relevant State prior to the publication of a prospectus in relation to the securities which has been approved by the competent authority in that Relevant State or, where appropriate, approved in another Relevant State and notified to the competent authority in that Relevant State, all in accordance with the Prospectus Regulation, except that offers of securities may be made to the public in that Relevant State of any of our ADSs at any time under the following exemptions under the Prospectus Regulation:

 

  (a)   to any legal entity which is a qualified investor as defined in the Prospectus Regulation;

 

  (b)   to fewer than 150 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Regulation), subject to obtaining the prior consent of the representatives for any such offer; or

 

  (c)   in any other circumstances falling within Article 1(4) of the Prospectus Regulation,

provided that no such offer of ADSs shall require us or any underwriter to publish a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Regulation or supplement a prospectus pursuant to Article 23 of the Prospectus Regulation.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression an “offer to the public” in relation to any of our ADSs in any Relevant State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and any of our ADSs to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase any of our ADSs, and the expression “Prospectus Regulation” means Regulation (EU) 2017/1129.

United Kingdom

Each underwriter has represented and agreed that:

 

  (a)   it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (“FSMA”) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of our ADSs in circumstances in which Section 21(1) of the FSMA does not apply to us; and

 

  (b)   it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to our ADSs in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

 

186


Table of Contents

Dubai International Financial Centre

This prospectus relates to an Exempt Offer in accordance with the Offered Securities Rules of the Dubai Financial Services Authority (“DFSA”). This prospectus is intended for distribution only to persons of a type specified in the Offered Securities Rules of the DFSA. It must not be delivered to, or relied on by, any other person. The DFSA has no responsibility for reviewing or verifying any documents in connection with Exempt Offers. The DFSA has not approved this prospectus nor taken steps to verify the information set forth herein and has no responsibility for the prospectus. The ADSs to which this prospectus relates may be illiquid and/or subject to restrictions on their resale. Prospective purchasers of the ADSs offered should conduct their own due diligence on the ADSs. If you do not understand the contents of this prospectus you should consult an authorized financial advisor.

Hong Kong

The ADSs may not be offered or sold in Hong Kong by means of any document other than (1) in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong); (2) to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap.571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder; or (3) in other circumstances which do not result in the document being a “prospectus” within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), and no advertisement, invitation, or document relating to the ADSs may be issued or may be in the possession of any person for the purpose of issue (in each case whether in Hong Kong or elsewhere), which is directed at, or the contents of which are likely to be accessed or read by, the public in Hong Kong (except if permitted to do so under the laws of Hong Kong) other than with respect to ADSs which are or are intended to be disposed of only to persons outside Hong Kong or only to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap.571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder.

Israel

In the State of Israel this prospectus shall not be regarded as an offer to the public to purchase ADSs under the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968, which requires a prospectus to be published and authorized by the Israel Securities Authority, if it complies with certain provisions of Section 15 of the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968, including, inter alia, if: (i) the offer is made, distributed or directed to not more than 35 investors, subject to certain conditions (the “Addressed Investors”); or (ii) the offer is made, distributed or directed to certain qualified investors defined in the First Addendum of the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968, subject to certain conditions (the “Qualified Investors”). The Qualified Investors shall not be taken into account in the count of the Addressed Investors and may be offered to purchase securities in addition to the 35 Addressed Investors. The company has not and will not take any action that would require it to publish a prospectus in accordance with and subject to the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968. We have not and will not distribute this prospectus or make, distribute or direct an offer to subscribe for our ADSs to any person within the State of Israel, other than to Qualified Investors and up to 35 Addressed Investors.

Qualified Investors may have to submit written evidence that they meet the definitions set out in of the First Addendum to the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968. In particular, we may request, as a condition to be offered common stock, that Qualified Investors will each represent, warrant and certify to us and/or to anyone acting on our behalf: (i) that it is an investor falling within one of the categories listed in the First Addendum to the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968; (ii) which of the categories listed in the First Addendum to the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968 regarding Qualified Investors is applicable to it; (iii) that it will abide by all provisions set forth in the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968 and the regulations promulgated thereunder in connection with the offer to be issued common stock; (iv) that the ADSs that it will be issued are, subject to exemptions available under the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968: (a) for its own account; (b) for investment purposes only; and (c) not issued with a view to resale within the State of Israel, other than in accordance with the provisions of the Israeli Securities Law, 5728—1968; and (v) that it is willing to provide further evidence of its Qualified Investor

 

187


Table of Contents

status. Addressed Investors may have to submit written evidence in respect of their identity and may have to sign and submit a declaration containing, inter alia, the Addressed Investor’s name, address and passport number or Israeli identification number.

Japan

No registration pursuant to Article 4, paragraph 1 of the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law of Japan (Law No. 25 of 1948, as amended) (the “FIEL”) has been made or will be made with respect to the solicitation of the application for the acquisition of the ADSs.

Accordingly, the ADSs have not been, directly or indirectly, offered or sold and will not be, directly or indirectly, offered or sold in Japan or to, or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan (which term as used herein means any person resident in Japan, including any corporation or other entity organized under the laws of Japan) or to others for re-offering or re-sale, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to, or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan except pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements, and otherwise in compliance with, the FIEL and the other applicable laws and regulations of Japan.

For Qualified Institutional Investors (“QII”)

Please note that the solicitation for newly issued or secondary securities (each as described in Paragraph 2, Article 4 of the FIEL) in relation to the ADSs constitutes either a “QII only private placement” or a “QII only secondary distribution” (each as described in Paragraph 1, Article 23-13 of the FIEL). Disclosure regarding any such solicitation, as is otherwise prescribed in Paragraph 1, Article 4 of the FIEL, has not been made in relation to the ADSs. The ADSs may only be transferred to QIIs.

For Non-QII Investors

Please note that the solicitation for newly issued or secondary securities (each as described in Paragraph 2, Article 4 of the FIEL) in relation to the ADSs constitutes either a “small number private placement” or a “small number private secondary distribution” (each as is described in Paragraph 4, Article 23-13 of the FIEL). Disclosure regarding any such solicitation, as is otherwise prescribed in Paragraph 1, Article 4 of the FIEL, has not been made in relation to the ADSs. The ADSs may only be transferred en bloc without subdivision to a single investor.

Singapore

This prospectus has not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, this prospectus and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of the ADSs may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the ADSs be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of Singapore (the “SFA”), (ii) to a relevant person pursuant to Section 275(1), or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions specified in Section 275, of the SFA, or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA.

Where the ADSs are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 of the SFA by a relevant person which is:

 

  (a)   a corporation (which is not an accredited investor (as defined in Section 4A of the SFA)) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or

 

  (b)   a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary of the trust is an individual who is an accredited investor,

 

188


Table of Contents

securities (as defined in Section 239(1) of the SFA) of that corporation or the beneficiaries’ rights and interest (howsoever described) in that trust shall not be transferred within six months after that corporation or that trust has acquired the ADSs pursuant to an offer made under Section 275 of the SFA except:

 

  (a)   to an institutional investor or to a relevant person defined in Section 275(2) of the SFA, or to any person arising from an offer referred to in Section 275(1A) or Section 276(4)(i)(B) of the SFA;

 

  (b)   where no consideration is or will be given for the transfer;

 

  (c)   where the transfer is by operation of law;

 

  (d)   as specified in Section 276(7) of the SFA; or

 

  (e)   as specified in Regulation 37A of the Securities and Futures (Offers of Investments) (Securities and Securities-based Derivatives Contracts) Regulations 2018 of Singapore.

Singapore Securities and Futures Act Product Classification: Solely for the purposes of our obligations pursuant to sections 309B(1)(a) and 309B(1)(c) of the SFA, we have determined, and hereby notify all relevant persons (as defined in Section 309A of the SFA), that the ADSs are “prescribed capital markets products” (as defined in the Securities and Futures (Capital Markets Products) Regulations 2018) and Excluded Investment Products (as defined in MAS Notice SFA 04-N12: Notice on the Sale of Investment Products and MAS Notice FAA-N16: Notice on Recommendations on Investment Products).

Switzerland

This document is not intended to constitute an offer or solicitation to purchase or invest in the ADSs described herein. The ADSs may not be publicly offered, directly or indirectly, in Switzerland within the meaning of the Swiss Financial Services Act (“FinSA”) and will not be listed or admitted to trading on the SIX Swiss Exchange or on any trading venue (exchange or multilateral trading facility) in Switzerland. Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the ADSs constitutes a prospectus as such term is understood pursuant to the FinSA, and neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the ADSs may be publicly distributed or otherwise made publicly available in Switzerland.

 

189


Table of Contents

EXPENSES OF THE OFFERING

We estimate that our expenses in connection with this offering, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, will be as follows:

 

      Amount 

SEC registration fee

   $ 10,910  

FINRA filing fee

     15,500  

Stock Exchange listing fee

         

AIM listing fee

         

Transfer agent’s fee

         

Printing and engraving expenses

         

Legal fees and expenses

         

Accounting fees and expenses

         

Miscellaneous costs

         
  

 

 

 

Total

                 
  

 

 

 

 

  *

To be filed by amendment.

All amounts in the table are estimates except the SEC registration fee, the FINRA filing fee and the listing fee. We will pay all of the expenses of this offering.

 

190


Table of Contents

LEGAL MATTERS

The validity of our ADSs and ordinary shares and certain other matters of English law and U.S. federal law will be passed upon for us by Latham & Watkins LLP. Legal counsel to the underwriters in connection with this offering are Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP, New York, New York.

EXPERTS

The consolidated financial statements as of June 30, 2020 and 2019 and for the years then ended included in this prospectus have been so included in reliance on the report of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, given on the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting. The current address of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP is The Maurice Wilkes Building, St John’s Innovation Park, Cowley Rd, Cambridge CB4 0DS.

 

191


Table of Contents

SERVICE OF PROCESS AND ENFORCEMENT OF CIVIL LIABILITIES

We are incorporated and currently existing under the laws of England and Wales. In addition, certain of our directors and officers reside outside the United States, and most of the assets of our non-U.S. subsidiaries are located outside the United States. As a result, it may be difficult for investors to effect service of process on us or those persons in the United States or to enforce in the United States judgments obtained in United States courts against us or those persons based on the civil liability or other provisions of the United States securities laws or other laws. In addition, uncertainty exists as to whether the courts of England and Wales would:

 

   

recognize or enforce judgments of United States courts obtained against us or our directors or officers predicated upon the civil liabilities provisions of the securities laws of the United States or any state in the United States; or

 

   

entertain original actions brought in England and Wales against us or our directors or officers predicated upon the securities laws of the United States or any state in the United States.

We have been advised by Latham & Watkins LLP that there is currently no treaty between (i) the United States and (ii) England and Wales providing for reciprocal recognition and enforcement of judgments of United States courts in civil and commercial matters (although the United States and the United Kingdom are both parties to the New York Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards) and that a final judgment for the payment of money rendered by any general or state court in the United States based on civil liability, whether or not predicated solely upon the United States securities laws, would not be automatically enforceable in England and Wales. We have also been advised by Latham & Watkins LLP that any final and conclusive monetary judgment for a definite sum obtained against us in United States courts would be treated by the courts of England and Wales as a cause of action in itself and sued upon as a debt at common law so that no retrial of the issues would be necessary, provided that:

 

   

the relevant U.S. court had jurisdiction over the original proceedings according to English conflicts of laws principles at the time when proceedings were initiated;

 

   

England and Wales courts had jurisdiction over the matter on enforcement and we either submitted to such jurisdiction or were resident or carrying on business within such jurisdiction and were duly served with process;

 

   

the U.S. judgment was final and conclusive on the merits in the sense of being final and unalterable in the court that pronounced it and being for a definite sum of money;

 

   

the judgment given by the courts was not in respect of penalties, taxes, fines or similar fiscal or revenue obligations (or otherwise based on a U.S. law that an English court considers to relate to a penal, revenue or other public law);

 

   

the judgment was not procured by fraud;

 

   

recognition or enforcement of the judgment in England and Wales would not be contrary to public policy or the Human Rights Act 1998;

 

   

the proceedings pursuant to which judgment was obtained were not contrary to natural justice;

 

   

the U.S. judgment was not arrived at by doubling, trebling or otherwise multiplying a sum assessed as compensation for the loss or damages sustained and not being otherwise in breach of Section 5 of the U.K. Protection of Trading Interests Act 1980, or is a judgment based on measures designated by the Secretary of State under Section 1 of that Act;

 

   

there is not a prior decision of an English court or the court of another jurisdiction on the issues in question between the same parties; and

 

   

the English enforcement proceedings were commenced within the limitation period.

 

192


Table of Contents

Whether these requirements are met in respect of a judgment based upon the civil liability provisions of the United States securities laws, including whether the award of monetary damages under such laws would constitute a penalty, is an issue for the court making such decision.

Subject to the foregoing, investors may be able to enforce in England and Wales judgments in civil and commercial matters that have been obtained from U.S. federal or state courts. Nevertheless, we cannot assure you that those judgments will be recognized or enforceable in England and Wales.

If an English court gives judgment for the sum payable under a U.S. judgment, the English judgment will be enforceable by methods generally available for this purpose. These methods generally permit the English court discretion to prescribe the manner of enforcement. In addition, it may not be possible to obtain an English judgment or to enforce that judgment if the judgment debtor is or becomes subject to any insolvency or similar proceedings, or if the judgment debtor has any set-off or counterclaim against the judgment creditor. Also note that, in any enforcement proceedings, the judgment debtor may raise any counterclaim that could have been brought if the action had been originally brought in England unless the subject of the counterclaim was in issue and denied in the U.S. proceedings.

 

193


Table of Contents

WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

We have filed with the SEC a registration statement (including amendments and exhibits to the registration statement) on Form F-1 under the Securities Act. This prospectus, which is part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement. The rules and regulations of the SEC allow us to omit certain information from this prospectus that is included in the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement. For further information, we refer you to the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules filed as part of the registration statement.

Statements made in this prospectus concerning the contents of any contract, agreement or other document are not complete descriptions of all terms of these documents. If a document has been filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, we refer you to the copy of the document that has been filed for a complete description of its terms. Each statement in this prospectus relating to a document filed as an exhibit is qualified in all respects by the filed exhibit. You should read this prospectus and the documents that we have filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part completely.

Upon the closing of this offering, we will become subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act. Accordingly, we will be required to file reports and other information with the SEC, including annual reports on Form 20-F and reports on Form 6-K. The SEC maintains an internet website that contains reports and other information about issuers, like us, that file electronically with the SEC. The address of that website is www.sec.gov.

As a foreign private issuer, we are exempt under the Exchange Act from, among other things, the rules prescribing the furnishing and content of proxy statements, and our officers, directors and principal shareholders are exempt from the reporting and short-swing profit recovery provisions contained in Section 16 of the Exchange Act. In addition, we will not be required under the Exchange Act to file periodic reports and financial statements with the SEC as frequently or as promptly as U.S. companies whose securities are registered under the Exchange Act.

 

194


Table of Contents

ABCAM PLC

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

   

Page

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

    F-2  

Consolidated income statement for the years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019

    F-3  

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019

    F-4  

Consolidated balance sheet as at June 30, 2020 and 2019

    F-5  

Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019

    F-6  

Consolidated cash flow statement for the years ended June 30, 2020 and 2019

    F-7  

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

    F-8  

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Abcam plc

Opinion on the Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of Abcam plc and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of June 30, 2020 and 2019, and the related consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity and the consolidated cash flow statement for the years then ended, including the related notes (collectively referred to as the “consolidated financial statements”). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of June 30, 2020 and 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the years then ended in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

Change in Accounting Principle

As discussed in note 2 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed the manner in which it accounts for leases as of July 1, 2019.

Basis for Opinion

These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud.

Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Cambridge, United Kingdom

16 September 2020

We have served as the Company’s auditor since 2013 which includes periods before the Company became subject to SEC reporting requirements.

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Consolidated income statement

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
    Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Revenue

     5                260.0               259.9  

Cost of sales

        (79.8     (76.7
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

        180.2       183.2  

Selling, general and administrative expenses

       

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

        (118.3     (88.9

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     7        (13.1     (23.2

Research and development expenses

       

Before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

        (17.4     (10.7

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     7        (20.9     (4.3
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     6        10.5       56.1  

Finance income

     9        0.7       0.6  

Finance costs

     9        (2.8     (0.3
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before tax

        8.4       56.4  

Tax

     10        4.1       (11.4
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year

        12.5       45.0  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Earnings per share

       

Basic earnings per share

     11        6.0p       22.0p  

Diluted earnings per share

     11        6.0p       21.8p  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020

£m
    Year ended
30 June 2019

£m
 

Profit for the year

                12.5               45.0  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Items that may be reclassified to the income statement in subsequent years

       

Movement on cash flow hedges

     26        0.7       (1.7

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

        9.6       7.0  

Movement in fair value of investments

        4.0       (0.1

Tax relating to components of other comprehensive income

        (1.5     0.3  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income for the year

        12.8       5.5  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income for the year

        25.3       50.5  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Consolidated balance sheet

As at 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

     Note      30 June 2020
£m
    30 June 2019
£m
 

Non-current assets

       

Goodwill

     12                192.8               120.9  

Intangible assets

     13        154.4       106.7  

Property, plant and equipment

     14        43.3       37.1  

Right of use assets

     15        121.4        

Investments

     16        7.0       0.8  

Deferred tax asset

     17        13.7       9.4  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        532.6       274.9  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Current assets

       

Inventories

     18        40.7       36.0  

Trade and other receivables

     19        44.4       43.1  

Current tax receivable

        6.4       5.4  

Derivative financial instruments

     20              0.2  

Cash and cash equivalents

        187.3       87.1  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        278.8       171.8  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

        811.4       446.7  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Current liabilities

       

Trade and other payables

     21        (43.8     (41.8

Derivative financial instruments

     20        (1.2     (2.0

Lease liabilities

     15        (7.3      

Borrowings

     22        (106.4      

Current tax liabilities

        (0.9     (1.5
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        (159.6     (45.3
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net current assets

        119.2       126.5  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-current liabilities

       

Deferred tax liability

     17        (28.7     (16.5

Lease liabilities

     15        (120.5      

Derivative financial instruments

     20              (0.1
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        (149.2     (16.6
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

        (308.8     (61.9
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net assets

        502.6       384.8  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Equity

       

Share capital

     23        0.4       0.4  

Share premium account

        138.2       27.0  

Merger reserve

     23        68.6       68.1  

Own shares

     23        (2.5     (2.8

Translation reserve

     23        42.9       33.3  

Hedging reserve

     23        (0.7     (1.3

Retained earnings

        255.7       260.1  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity attributable to the equity shareholders of the parent

        502.6       384.8  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

          Share
capital
    Share
premium
account
    Merger
reserve
    Own
shares
    Translation
reserve
    Hedging
reserve
    Retained
earnings
    Total
equity
 
    Note     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Balance as at 1 July 2018

          0.4           25.6         68.1       (3.2             26.3           0.1         234.4       351.7  

Profit for the year

                                          45.0       45.0  

Other comprehensive income

                              7.0       (1.4     (0.1     5.5  
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

                              7.0       (1.4     44.9       50.5  

Issue of ordinary shares

            1.4             0.4                   (0.4     1.4  

Share-based payments inclusive of deferred tax

                                          6.3       6.3  

Purchase of own shares

                                          (0.2     (0.2

Equity dividends

    24                                           (24.9     (24.9
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as at 30 June 2019, as previously reported

      0.4       27.0       68.1       (2.8     33.3       (1.3     260.1       384.8  

Implementation of IFRS 16

                                          (1.5     (1.5
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as at 30 June 2019, as adjusted

      0.4       27.0       68.1       (2.8     33.3       (1.3     258.6       383.3  

Profit for the year

                                          12.5       12.5  

Other comprehensive income

                              9.6       0.6       2.6       12.8  
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

                              9.6       0.6       15.1       25.3  

Issue of ordinary shares

            111.2       0.5       0.3                   (0.3     111.7  

Share-based payments inclusive of deferred tax

                                          7.4       7.4  

Purchase of own shares

                                          (0.1     (0.1

Equity dividends

    24                                           (25.0     (25.0
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as at 30 June 2020

      0.4       138.2       68.6       (2.5     42.9       (0.7     255.7       502.6  
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Consolidated cash flow statement

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

            Note    Year ended
30 June 2020

£m
    Year ended
30 June 2019

£m
 

Cash generated from operations

      25                65.4                 83.7  

Net income taxes paid

           (2.4     (13.5
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

           63.0       70.2  
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Investing activities

          

Interest received

           0.7       0.6  

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

           (12.7     (17.7

Purchase of intangible assets

           (23.0     (22.7

Transfer of cash (to) / from escrow in respect of future capital expenditure

           (0.6     4.5  

Purchase of investments

           (2.2      

Net cash outflow arising from acquisitions

      29      (110.3     (14.6
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash outflow from investing activities

           (148.1     (49.9
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Financing activities

          

Dividends paid

      24      (25.0     (24.9

Principal element of lease obligations

           (6.8      

Interest element of lease obligations

           (0.9      

Interest paid

           (0.8     (0.1

Proceeds on issue of shares

           111.2       1.4  

Facility arrangement fees

                 (0.9

Utilization of revolving credit facility

     (i)      22      127.0        

Repayment of revolving credit facility

     (i)      22      (20.0      

Purchase of own shares

           (0.1     (0.2
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from financing activities

           184.6       (24.7
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

           99.5       (4.4

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

           87.1       90.2  

Effect of foreign exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

           0.7       1.3  
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     (ii)           187.3       87.1  
        

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(i)

During the year, drawings on the RCF comprised an initial amount of €120.0m (£103.4m) to fund the purchase of Expedeon (as set out in note 29). In February 2020, a partial repayment amounting to £20.0m was made and the remaining borrowings redenominated into Sterling, leaving an outstanding balance of £82.0m. In March 2020, a subsequent drawing of £25.0m was made in order to provide operational flexibility in light of the COVID-19 pandemic bringing amounts drawn to £107.0m. The maximum amount drawn under the RCF during the year was £107.0m.

(ii)

Within cash and cash equivalents is £0.8m of cash relating to employee contributions to the Group’s share scheme ‘AbShare’, which is reserved for the purpose of purchasing shares upon vesting.

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

1. Presentation of the financial statements

a) General information

Abcam plc (the Company) is a public limited company whose shares are listed on the Alternative Investment Market (AIM) of the London Stock Exchange, is incorporated and domiciled in the UK and is registered in England under the Companies Act 2006.

b) Basis of preparation and consolidation

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

The consolidated financial statements have been presented in Sterling, the functional currency of the Company, and on the historical cost basis, except for the revaluation of certain financial instruments.

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities under its control. Control is achieved when the Company has power to control the financial and operating policies of an entity either directly or indirectly and the ability to use that power to affect the returns it receives from its involvement with the entity.

Consolidation of a subsidiary begins when the Group obtains control over the subsidiary and ceases when the Group loses control of the subsidiary. Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies in line with those used by the Group. All intra-group transactions, balances, equity, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation.

These consolidated financial statements were authorised by the Board of Directors on 16 September 2020.

c) Going concern

The Group meets its day-to-day working capital requirements from the cash surpluses generated as a result of normal trading. In considering going concern, the Directors have reviewed the Group’s forecasts and projections, taking account of reasonably possible changes in trading performance, including the effects of COVID-19. These show that the Group should be able to operate within the limits of its available resources.

Accordingly, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operation for the foreseeable future and at least one year from the date of approval of the financial statements. For this reason, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing its consolidated financial statements.

2. New accounting standards, amendments and interpretations

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’

IFRS 16 supersedes IAS 17 ‘Leases’. The most significant changes are in relation to lessee accounting. Under IFRS 16 the lessee recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability for all leases currently accounted for as operating leases, with the exception of leases for a short period (less than 12 months) where recognition exemption applies or where the underlying asset value is low.

Right-of-use assets are measured at cost, less any accumulated depreciation and lease incentives received. Unless the Group is reasonably certain to obtain ownership of the leased assets at the end of the lease term, the recognised right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or lease term. Right-of-use assets are also subject to impairment testing.

 

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

2. New accounting standards, amendments and interpretations continued

 

At the commencement of a lease, the Group recognises lease liabilities at the present value of lease payments to be made over the lease term. The lease payments include fixed payments less any lease incentives receivable and variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate. In calculating the present value of lease payments, the Group uses the incremental borrowing rate at either the transition date or lease commencement date, if later, if the interest rate implicit in the lease is not readily determinable. After the transition or commencement date, the amount of lease liabilities is increased to reflect the accretion of interest and reduced by payments made. The carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there is a modification or a change to the lease.

Before the adoption of IFRS 16, the Group classified its leases at the inception date as either a finance lease or an operating lease. A lease was classified as a finance lease if it transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the leased asset to the Group; otherwise it was classified as an operating lease. Historically, all of the Group’s leases have been classified as operating leases whereby the leased asset was not capitalized, and the lease payments were recognised as rent expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Any prepaid rent and accrued rent were recognized under Prepayments and Trade and other payables, respectively. The Group has taken advantage of the practical expedient not to perform reassessments of whether a contract is, or contains, a lease.

The Group has taken advantage of the modified retrospective transition method whereby on transition, a lease liability is recognised as the present value of future payments and an asset is recognised as the present value of the total lease payments at the lease inception and then depreciated on a straight-line basis from the transition date or lease commencement date if later. The income statement and balance sheet for prior periods have not been restated. A transition adjustment of £1.5m is generated due to the difference between the value of the asset and liability.

The Group’s income statement is impacted by the change in accounting standard as the fixed rental expense is replaced by a depreciation charge and an interest expense.

For the year ended 30 June 2020 theses changes increased operating profit by £2.4m comprising an increase in depreciation of £6.7m offset by the reduction in rent expense of £9.1m relating to the previous treatment as operating leases. Finance costs increased by £1.5m relating to the additional lease liabilities recognised, resulting in an overall increase in profit before tax of £0.9m.

Based on its current lease portfolio, the long-term impact to the Group’s reported profit after tax is expected to be immaterial with a net decrease in the initial years after transition which will reverse in later years as the leases in existence at transition come closer to ending.

On transition the weighted average incremental borrowing rate was 1.6%, which in turn takes advantage of the practical expedient on transition to apply a single discount rate to groups of leases with similar risk profiles. As such a single discount rate has been applied to leases in each country in which the Group operates.

The Group has no material lessor arrangements but does sublet space in multiple locations. Subleases are recognised by a reduction in the right of use asset and recognition of a lease receivable.

 

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

2. New accounting standards, amendments and interpretations continued

 

The impact of transitioning to IFRS 16 on the 1 July 2019 to each balance sheet line item is as follows:

 

     30 June 2019
as previously
reported

£m
    IFRS 16
adjustments

£m
    1 July 2019
as adjusted

£m
 

Right of use assets

           70.8       70.8  

Trade and other receivables

     43.1       0.3       43.4  

Current lease liabilities

           (6.5     (6.5

Trade and other payables

     (41.8     3.6       (38.2

Non-current lease liabilities

           (69.7     (69.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Retained earnings

     260.1       (1.5     258.6  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total attributable to equity shareholders of the parent

     384.8       (1.5     383.3  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

3. Principal accounting policies

Revenue and income recognition

Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable and represents amounts receivable for goods and services, net of discounts, VAT and other sales-related taxes.

Revenue from sales of goods, including revenue generated from products sold from the Group’s catalogue and IVD and which represents the significant majority of the Group’s revenue, is recognized upon delivery to the customer or the point at which the customer takes control of the goods if this is sooner.

Custom product and service revenue, which can be the provision of a service or the development of products for customers, is recognised at the point at which a milestone, as defined in the contract, has been completed. Each milestone is typically aligned to a customer deliverable, for example, the amount of services provided, a deliverable arising from the services or the number of products successfully developed and provided to customers, and accordingly is considered to be a performance obligation. Every milestone has a defined transaction price. If it is identified that the costs will be in excess of the contract revenue, the expected loss is recognised as an expense immediately.

Licence fee income is recognized upon delivery of the licensed technology where the Group’s continued performance or future research and development services are not required. Royalty revenue is recognised on an accruals basis based on the contractual terms and the substance of the agreements with the counterparty, provided that the amount can be reliably measured and it is probable that the economic benefit will flow to the Group.

Leasing

Accounting policy applied until 30 June 2019

To the extent that the terms of a lease transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the lessee, leases were classified as finance leases. All other leases were classified as operating leases.

Rentals payable under operating leases were charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the fixed term of the relevant lease. Benefits received and receivable as an incentive to enter into an operating lease were also spread on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

 

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

3. Principal accounting policies continued

 

Accounting policy applied from 1 July 2019 (IFRS 16)

Leased assets are capitalized on inception of the lease as right of use assets. A corresponding lease liability, representing the present value of the lease payments is also recognized and split between current and non-current liabilities accordingly.

The lease liability includes; fixed payments, variable lease payments dependent on an index or rate (initially measured using the index or rate on the lease commencement date) and in substance fixed payments. The variable aspect of variable payments are recognized when the rate or index takes effect resulting in an adjustment to the liability and right of use asset. Currently the Group’s lease portfolio does not contain variable or in substance lease payments.

The discounted lease liability is calculated where possible using the interest rate implicit in the lease or where this is not attainable the incremental borrowing rate is utilized. The incremental borrowing rate is the rate the Group would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to obtain a similar asset under similar conditions. The Group calculates the incremental borrowing rate using risk free rate of the country where the asset is held, adjusted for length of the lease and a risk premium.

Lease payments are allocated against the principal and finance cost. Finance costs, representing the unwinding of the discount on the lease liability are charged to the income statement to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining liability.

Right of use assets are measured at cost including; the discounted initial lease liability, lease payments made at or before the commencement date, any initial direct costs reduced any lease incentives received.

Right of use assets are depreciated over the shorter of the non-cancellable lease period and any extension options that are considered reasonably certain to be taken or the useful life of the asset. The Group’s current leases run from 1-18 years.

Modifications to lease agreements result in remeasurement of the lease liability and right of use asset.

Short term leases, defined as less than one year, and also of low value are recognised on a straight-line basis in the income statement.

There are no material lease agreements where the Group acts as a lessor.

Contracts may contain both lease and non-lease components. The Group allocates the contract consideration based on the relative stand alone selling prices or if this is not readily determinable based on the best estimates of the stand alone selling prices.

Foreign currencies

Foreign currency transactions are booked at the exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currency are retranslated at the rates of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. Exchange differences arising on settlement or retranslation of monetary assets and liabilities are included in the income statement.

The results of overseas subsidiaries are translated into Sterling using the average exchange rates during the year. Assets and liabilities are translated at the rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Goodwill arising on the

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

3. Principal accounting policies continued

 

acquisition of a foreign operation is treated as an asset of that foreign operation and as such is translated at the relevant foreign exchange rate at the balance sheet date. Exchange differences arising on this translation are recognised in the translation reserve.

Other exchange differences are recognised in the income statement in the period in which they arise except for where items are designated as hedging instruments or where there is a net investment hedge.

Retirement benefit costs

Payments to defined contribution retirement benefit schemes are charged as an expense as they fall due. The Group has no further obligations once the contributions have been paid.

Taxation

Current tax payable is based on taxable profit for the year using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the income statement because it excludes certain items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. Where the current tax deduction in respect of share option exercises exceeds the share option accounting charge for the period, the excess is recorded in equity rather than the income statement.

The benefit of UK research and development is recognised under the UK’s Research and Development Expenditure Credit (RDEC) scheme. The benefit is recorded as income included in profit before tax, netted against research and development expenses, as the RDEC is of the nature of a government grant.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amount of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be utilized. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the initial recognition of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting profit.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognized for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. The Group’s liability for deferred tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the income statement, except where it relates to items charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income or reserves, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt with in other comprehensive income or reserves respectively.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities, they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle on a net basis.

 

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

3. Principal accounting policies continued

 

Business combinations

Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. On the acquisition of a business, fair values are attributed to the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities unless the fair value cannot be reliably measured in which case the value is subsumed into goodwill.

If the initial accounting for a business combination is incomplete by the end of the reporting period in which the combination occurs, the Group reports provisional amounts for the items for which the accounting is incomplete. Those provisional amounts are adjusted during the measurement period or additional assets or liabilities are recognised to reflect new information obtained about facts and circumstances that existed as at the acquisition date that, if known, would have affected the amounts recognised as of that date. The measurement period is the period from the date of acquisition to the date the Group obtains complete information about facts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition date – and is subject to a maximum of one year.

Acquisition-related costs are expensed to the consolidated income statement in the period they are incurred.

Goodwill

Goodwill represents the excess of the fair value of the consideration over the fair value of the net assets acquired. Where the fair value of the consideration is less than the fair value of the acquired net assets, the deficit is recognized immediately in the income statement as a bargain purchase.

Goodwill is not amortised, but is subject to an impairment review at least annually and is carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Any impairment is recognised immediately in the income statement and is not subsequently reversed.

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to cash generating units (CGUs). The CGUs to which goodwill has been allocated is tested for impairment annually, or more frequently when there is an indication that the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Intangible assets

Acquisition intangibles:

Acquisition intangibles comprise licence fees, customer relationships and distribution rights, patents, technology and know-how and trade names. These are capitalized at cost and amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives. The principal expected useful lives are as follows:

 

Licence fees

     Term of licence  

Customer relationships and distribution rights

     2 to 10 years  

Patents, technology and know-how

     5 to 15 years  

Trade names

     8 to 11 years  

Patents, technology and know-how assets are only amortised once the development is complete and being utilized for their intended purpose; until this point the assets are deemed to be in progress.

Other intangibles:

These comprise software and expenditure on capitalized internally developed technology. Internally developed technology costs are recognised as an asset if and only if they meet the recognition criteria set out in IAS 38 Intangible Assets which are that

 

   

the project must be technically feasible;

 

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

3. Principal accounting policies continued

 

   

there must be the intention to complete the project and adequate resources to be able to do so;

 

   

the ability to use or sell the asset or product is secure; and

 

   

the future economic benefits must exceed the costs

Intangible assets under construction are not amortised.

The principal expected useful lives are as follows:

 

Software

     3 to 5 years  

Internally developed technology

     3 to 16 years  

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and, where appropriate, provision for impairment in value. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is charged so as to write off the cost of assets over their estimated useful lives, using the straight-line method, as follows:

 

Laboratory equipment

     2 to 5 years  

Cell Line assets

     10 years  

Office fixtures, fittings and other equipment

     2 to 5 years  

Leasehold improvements

     Term of lease  

The gain or loss arising on the disposal or retirement of an asset is determined as the difference between the sales proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in the income statement. Residual values of assets and their useful lives are assessed on an ongoing basis and adjusted, if appropriate, at each balance sheet date. Assets under the course of construction are not depreciated.

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets excluding goodwill

A review is undertaken upon the occurrence of events or circumstances which indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable.

The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset for which the estimates of future cash flows have not been adjusted.

Inventories

Inventories and work in progress are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials and, where applicable, direct labour costs and an attributable portion of production overheads that have been incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. The valuation methodology is on a first in first out basis and net realisable value represents the estimated selling price less all estimated costs of completion and costs to be incurred in marketing, selling and distribution. Provision is made for obsolete, slow-moving or defective items where appropriate.

 

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

3. Principal accounting policies continued

 

Financial assets

Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised on the Group’s balance sheet when the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. The Group’s financial assets comprise cash and cash equivalents, receivables which involve a contractual right to receive cash from external parties, and investments.

Investments

Investments in shares are held at fair market value, with any revaluation gain or loss recorded through other comprehensive income.

Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables (excluding derivative financial assets) are recognised at cost less allowances for the expected credit loss to align their cost to fair value. The provision is based on the Group’s expected credit loss.

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and demand deposits and other short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.

Financial liabilities

Financial liabilities are those which involve a contractual obligation to deliver cash to external parties at a future date.

Trade and other payables

Trade payables (excluding derivative financial liabilities) are non-interest bearing and are stated at cost which equates to their fair value.

Equity instruments

Equity instruments issued by the Group are recorded as the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative financial instruments

The Group uses forward contracts to manage the exposure to fluctuating foreign exchange rates in relation to forecast future transactions.

Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value at the date a contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value at each balance sheet date. The resulting gain or loss is recognised in the income statement immediately unless the derivative is designated and effective as a hedging instrument, in which event the timing of the recognition in the income statement depends on the nature of the hedge relationship.

 

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

3. Principal accounting policies continued

 

Hedge accounting

At the inception of a hedge relationship, the Group documents the relationship between the hedging instrument and the hedged item, its effectiveness along with its risk management objectives, and its strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. The effectiveness is repeated on an ongoing basis during the life of the instrument to ensure that the instrument remains effective.

Cash flow hedges

The Group designates certain derivatives as cash flow hedges of highly probable forecast foreign currency transactions.

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives which are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is deferred in other comprehensive income. Gains or losses relating to the ineffective portion are recognised immediately in the income statement.

Amounts deferred in other comprehensive income are recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item is recognised in the income statement.

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the Group revokes the hedging relationship, the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or it no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. Any cumulative gain or loss in other comprehensive income at that time remains in other comprehensive income and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss in other comprehensive income is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Share-based payments

Equity settled share-based payments are measured at fair value (excluding the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions) at the date of grant and is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of the number of shares that will eventually vest.

Share-based payments where vesting is by reference to external performance criteria (such as growth in an external index) are measured using the Monte Carlo simulation. Those which are subject only to internal performance criteria or service conditions are measured using the Black-Scholes model.

For all schemes, the number of options expected to vest is recalculated at each balance sheet date based on expectations of leavers prior to vesting. The number of options expected to vest for schemes with internal performance criteria is also adjusted based on expectations of performance against targets. No adjustments are made for expected performance against external or ‘market-based’ targets. Charges made to the income statement in respect of equity settled share-based payments are credited to equity.

For cash settled share-based payments, the Group recognises a liability for the services acquired, measured initially at the fair value of the liability. This liability is remeasured at each balance sheet date and at the date of settlement, with any changes in fair value recognised in the income statement.

Own shares

No gain or loss is recognised in the income statement on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Group’s own shares. Any difference between the carrying amount and the consideration is recognised in equity.

 

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

4. Critical accounting judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty

The preparation of financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions about the application of its accounting policies which affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses. Actual amounts and results may differ from those estimates.

Judgements and estimates are evaluated regularly and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Any revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised.

Only one critical accounting judgement has been identified but other judgements exist which are considered to be key.

a) Critical accounting judgements

Valuation of intangible assets

2020: No critical accounting judgements have been identified

2019: The Group has been capitalising costs associated with the new ERP system since 2016 as outlined in the key accounting judgements below. After an extensive review of business requirements and the functionality of Oracle Cloud software as well as other best in class software providers, a decision was taken to make some changes to the approach and software used to address these areas. The opportunity was also taken to extend the scope of the programme to integrate improvements in these functional areas with front-end system enhancements to improve customers’ end-to-end experience through logistics and ultimately into manufacturing.

Taking this into account, a review was undertaken of historical expenditure incurred to date and as part of the impairment review of assets under construction, two impairment indicators were identified: the first being modules that are no longer being utilized or which would require considerable re-work; and the second is the extended timeframe for certain modules resulting in potentially obsolete programming by the time the module goes live. Following the review and the assessment of the impairment indicators identified, two modules were impaired in full.

Identifying which modules may be impacted was judgemental and technically complex compounded by identifying and in particular, allocating the costs specifically related to each individual module in question. In this respect, an exercise to allocate historically incurred costs to each module was undertaken. This involved certain estimations and judgments to determine these allocations by apportioning those costs where there were allocations which were certain (for example, historical time records in respect of labor costs) to those where there was either less specific or no allocation to an individual module.

b) Key accounting judgements

Capitalisation of intangible assets

The Group capitalises internal software development costs, in particular internal staff costs, relating to the enhancement of the Group’s core IT systems architecture and developments. Judgement is required in applying the capitalisation criteria of IAS 38, differentiating between enhancements and maintenance.

In establishing the principles on which costs are capitalized, consideration is given to the nature of work being performed, whether the costs and the activities are incremental and whether the associated deliverables meet the characteristics of an asset. Processes are in place to evaluate this and the same processes are used to confirm whether the expensed costs are related to the system and process improvement project so that classification as an adjusting item is appropriate.

 

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

4. Critical accounting judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty continued

 

The Group capitalises internal costs associated with internally developed technology as intangible assets as described further in notes 3 and 13. This requires judgement to determine that the characteristics of such assets meet the relevant criteria of IAS 38 for classification as an intangible asset.

Internally developed technology capitalized

Internal costs are capitalized as internally developed technology within intangible assets which are used to generate antibodies and kits. The point at which such internal costs are capitalized as well as their magnitude (whereby the amount capitalized comprises mainly of attributable salary costs and consumables used in the manufacture process) is a key area of judgement. A key area in respect of the stage of development of internally developed technology is subject to judgement as to when a product’s future economic value justifies capitalisation. Management reviews regularly these factors in order to determine that the costs meet the criteria for capitalisation as intangible assets.

c) Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Valuation of acquisition intangible assets

During the year the Group has made a number of acquisitions. (See note 29 for further details). Accounting for these in line with IFRS 3 (Business Combinations) requires the use of a number of assumptions and estimates in relation to the future cash flows associated with acquisition intangibles and the use of valuation techniques in order to arrive at the fair value of the intangible assets acquired. The assumptions applied were based on the best information available to management and valuation techniques were supported by third party valuation experts.

Nevertheless, the actual performance of these assets may differ from the valuations derived through this exercise.

In 2020, an assessment of the acquisition intangible in respect of In Vitro monoclonal antibody production technology acquired with AxioMx, Inc. in 2015 was undertaken. This also included further smaller amounts in respect of this technology which have been capitalized since acquisition as certain commercial feasibility milestones had been achieved.

An appraisal of the ability to utilise at scale this technology has been undertaken whereby although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realise material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. As a result of this, the intangible asset in respect of this technology has been fully impaired.

Provision for slow-moving or defective inventory

The provision for slow-moving inventory is based on the Directors’ estimation of the future sales of each of the Group’s products over the period from the balance sheet date to the expiry date of the product. Estimated future sales are based on historical actual sales and a growth rate assumption which is derived from the average annual growth over the product life to date.

If actual unit sales growth rates differ from those estimated by management, both the level of provision against existing inventory and the rates of provision applied to inventory in future periods would need to be revised.

 

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

5. Operating segments

Products and services from which reportable segments derive their revenues

The Directors consider that there is only one core business activity and there are no separately identifiable business segments which are engaged in providing individual products or services or a group of related products and services which are subject to separate risks and returns. The information reported to the Group’s Chief Executive Officer, who is considered the chief operating decision maker, for the purposes of resource allocation and assessment of performance is based wholly on the overall activities of the Group. The Group has therefore determined that it has only one reportable segment, which is ‘sales of antibodies and related products’. The Group’s revenue and assets for this one reportable segment can be determined by reference to the Group’s income statement and balance sheet.

The Group has no individual product or customer which contributes more than 10% of its revenues.

Geographical information

Revenues are attributed to regions based primarily on customers’ location. Historically, the Group has reported its revenues by country, however, in order to align to the manner in which the Group now reports its geographical splits internally, revenues are now presented more regionally, but with China and Japan still reported as countries to reflect the manner in which these are managed and reported. Comparative figures have been re-presented accordingly. The Group’s revenue from external customers and information about its non-current segment assets (excluding deferred tax) is set out below:

 

     Revenue      Non-current assets  
   Year ended
30 June 2020
     Year ended
30 June 2019
     As at
30 June 2020
     As at
30 June 2019
 
     £m      £m      £m      £m  

The Americas

     112.4        117.5        224.8        169.9  

EMEA

     69.3        67.1        224.4        91.6  

China

     39.5        39.9        0.6        3.8  

Japan

     18.8        16.9        7.4        0.1  

Rest of Asia Pacific

     20.0        18.5        61.7        0.1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     260.0        259.9        518.9        265.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue by type is shown below:

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Catalogue revenue

     243.1        242.8  

Custom products and services

     6.3        5.4  

IVD

     4.7        6.9  

Royalties and licenses

     5.9        4.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Custom products and licensing

     16.9        17.1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total reported revenue

     260.0        259.9  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Because all custom products and services projects within a contract had an original expected duration of one year or less, the Group has taken advantage of the exemption not to disclose outstanding amounts in respect of uncompleted contracts.

 

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

5. Operating segments continued

 

The information reported to the Group’s Chief Executive Officer, who as described above is considered the chief operating decision maker, includes a number of measures which are considered non-IFRS financial information and a key such measure is adjusted operating profit which comprises operating profit before exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles.

The following table presents the reconciliation of this measure to profit for the year:

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
    Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Profit for the year

        12.5       45.0  

Tax

        (4.1     11.4  

Finance income

        (0.7     (0.6

Finance costs

        2.8       0.3  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

        10.5       56.1  

Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

     7        34.0       27.5  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 
        44.5       83.6  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

6. Operating profit

Operating profit for the year is stated after charging/(crediting):

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Cost of inventories recognized as an expense

     56.2        59.3  

Write down of inventories recognised as an expense

     2.8        1.4  

R&D expenditure (excluding UK tax credits)

     24.9        16.9  

UK R&D tax credits

     (1.5      (1.9

Movements arising on financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss

            0.4  

Other net foreign exchange differences (including cash flow hedge movements reclassified from other comprehensive income)

     (0.6      (0.1
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Auditor’s remuneration comprised the following:

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
£000
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£000
 

Audit services—Group and parent company

     279        178  

—Assurance services in respect of controls work for US compliance

     200         

—subsidiary companies pursuant to legislation

     8        8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total audit fees

     487        186  

Audit related assurance services—interim review

     22        22  

—services in respect of the Group’s prospective US Listing

     76         

Other services

     1        1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total auditor remuneration

     586        209  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

6. Operating profit continued

 

Fees in respect of controls work for US compliance relate to additional controls work required to comply with the US Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) in preparation for a secondary listing in the US.

Audit related assurance services in respect of the Group’s prospective secondary listing in the US relate to preparatory work on documents which will be required for the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) where further fees are expected to be incurred in the year ending 30 June 2021 reflecting the timing of when the listing is expected to occur.

7. Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles

 

 

            Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Included within selling, general and administrative expenses

        (13.1      (23.2

Included within research and development costs

        (20.9      (4.3
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Affecting operating profit and profit before tax

        (34.0      (27.5
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Analyzed as:

        

Impairment of intangible assets

     (i)        (14.9      (12.8

System and process improvement costs

     (ii)        (4.3      (4.5

Acquisition costs

     (iii)        (4.1       

Integration and reorganization costs

     (iv)        (2.1      (3.7

Amortization of acquisition intangibles

     (v)        (8.6      (6.5
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Affecting operating profit and profit before tax

        (34.0      (27.5
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax effect of adjusting items

        7.2        5.3  

Credit arising from patent box claims

     (vi)        4.6         

Net tax effect of new US tax legislation

               (0.2
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Affecting tax

        11.8        5.1  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

        (22.2      (22.4
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(i)

Comprises the full impairment of the acquisition intangible in respect of AxioMx in Vitro monoclonal antibody production technology and subsequent post acquisition expenditure capitalized. This has arisen following an appraisal of the ability to utilise at scale this technology whereby although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realise material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. The impairment charge is included within research and development expenses. The appraisal in respect of this technology was part of a wider review and appraisal of all acquisition intangible assets which were considered for any potential indicators of impairment, such as any underperformance against previous forecasts. In respect of the Firefly BioWorks Multiplex and assay technology, although the target set out in the prior year had been exceeded, this was by a relatively small margin and as a result, further scrutiny was applied to acknowledge this. A value in use (VIU) assessment was performed and it was concluded that with a surplus of VIU over the carrying value representing 77% of the carrying value, that no impairment was present. However, achieving the forecasts is important in maintaining this surplus and in considering in particular the high growth in revenues assumed, to the extent that actual results adversely differ from this, this could cause the VIU to fall below the carrying value. An assessment of acquisition intangible assets of Applied StemCell which was acquired during the year are set out in note 29 (2018/19: The strategic ERP project is a complex, multi year

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

7. Exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles continued

 

  global business transformation with numerous phases extending across multiple Group functions. Following achievement of an implementation milestone in April 2019, a review was undertaken of historical expenditure incurred to that point on outstanding modules to assess whether each element remained appropriate to the business’s needs. Following the review, it was concluded that as a result of changes in the scope and nature of the programme and the corresponding usability of historical work performed, software assets of £12.8m were impaired. The charge was included within selling, general and administrative expenses).
(ii)

Comprises costs of the strategic ERP implementation which do not qualify for capitalisation. Such costs are included within selling, general and administrative expenses.

(iii)

Comprises legal and other professional fees associated with the acquisition of Expedeon as well as agreed settlements of Expedeon employee incentive schemes. Such costs are included within selling, general and administrative expenses.

(iv)

Integration and reorganization costs relate partly to the integration of the acquired Expedeon business as described in note 29 (comprising mainly retention and severance costs as well as employee backfill costs for those involved in the integration and consultancy costs) and reorganization costs in respect of alignment of the Group’s operational structure and geographical footprint to its strategic goals (2018/19: Related to costs associated with major office fit outs, including the new Group headquarters, including dual running costs and depreciation prior to the building being occupied). Such costs are included within selling, general and administrative expenses.

(v)

£6.0m (2018/19: £4.3m) of amortization of acquisition intangibles is included within research and development expenses, with the remaining £2.6m (2018/19: £2.2m) included within selling, general and administrative expenses.

(vi)

Comprises a credit for historical periods in respect of the initial recognition of benefit from the lower rate of tax applied to profits on patented income under HMRC’s ‘patent box’ regime following successful registration of patents during the year.

8. Employees

The average monthly number of employees (including Executive Directors) was:

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
number
     Year ended
30 June 2019
number
 

Management, administrative, marketing and distribution

     879        784  

Laboratory

     575        371  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
             1,454                1,155  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Their aggregate remuneration comprised:

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Wages and salaries

     69.5        56.0  

Social security costs

     7.1        6.8  

Other pension costs

     4.5        3.5  

Share-based payments charge

     9.3        6.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total staff costs

             90.4                72.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

9. Finance income and costs

 

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Interest receivable

       0.7          0.6  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Finance income

     0.7        0.6  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Interest expense on lease liabilities*

     (1.5       

Borrowing costs

     (1.3      (0.3
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Finance costs

     (2.8      (0.3
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net finance (costs) / income

     (2.1                0.3  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

*

On 1 July 2019, the Group adopted IFRS 16: ‘Leases’ using the modified retrospective transition method and as a result, prior year comparative figures have not been restated.

10. Tax

 

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Current tax

        

Current income tax charge

                  4.8                  9.7  

Adjustment in respect of prior years

        (0.9      0.2  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        3.9        9.9  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deferred tax

        

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

        (9.1      0.6  

Adjustment in respect of prior years

        0.9        1.1  

Effect of tax rate change

        0.2        (0.2
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
     17        (8.0      1.5  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total income tax (credit) / charge

        (4.1      11.4  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group reported a net tax credit of £4.1m (2018/19: charge of £11.4m). This decrease was partially due to a reduction in profit before tax to £8.4m (2018/19: £56.4m) and also from a credit of £6.0m representing the initial recognition ‘patent box’ benefit where a lower rate of tax is applied to profits on patented income and also includes a historical element of £4.6m for years 2016 to 2019 which is shown within exceptional items. Tax on exceptional items and amortization of acquisition intangibles also have a beneficial effect of £11.8m on the tax charge.

The UK corporation tax rate for the year was 19.0% (2018/19: 19.0%). Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the respective jurisdictions.

In line with Finance Act 2016, from April 2020, the UK corporate tax rate was to reduce to 17.0%. The Government announced in the Budget on 11 March 2020, that the rate applicable from 1 April 2020 would remain at 19.0% rather than reduce to 17.0% and this was enacted on 17 March 2020. This 19% rate has been applied in the deferred tax valuations based on the expected timing of when such assets and liabilities will be recovered.

 

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

10. Tax continued

 

The charge for the year can be reconciled to the profit per the income statement as follows:

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020

£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019

£m
 

Profit before tax

               8.4                  56.4  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax at the UK corporation tax rate of 19.0% (2018/19: 19.0%)

     1.6        10.7  

Adjustment in respect of overseas tax rates

     (1.3      1.4  

Adjustments in respect of prior years

            1.3  

Effect of ‘patent box’ benefit

     (6.0       

Tax effect of non-taxable income

     1.4        (0.9

Relief in relation to overseas entities

            (0.3

Overseas R&D tax credit uplift

     (0.5      (0.6

Overseas withholding tax

     0.5         

Effect of tax rate change on deferred tax balances

     0.2        (0.2
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax (credit) / expense for the year

     (4.1      11.4  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

11. Earnings per share

The calculations of earnings per ordinary share (EPS) are based on profit after tax and the weighted number of shares in issue during the year.

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Earnings

        

Profit for the year

                  12.5                  45.0  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        Million        Million  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Number of shares

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue

        208.0        205.4  

Less ordinary shares held by Equiniti Share Plan Trustees Limited

        (0.4      (0.5
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic EPS

        207.6        204.9  

Effect of potentially dilutive ordinary shares—share options and awards

        2.0        1.8  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted EPS

        209.6        206.7  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit after tax by the weighted average number of shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS is calculated on the same basis as basic EPS but with a further adjustment to the weighted average number of shares outstanding to assume conversion of all potentially dilutive ordinary shares. Such potentially dilutive ordinary shares comprise share options and awards granted to employees where the exercise price is less than the average market price of the Company’s ordinary shares

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

11. Earnings per share continued

 

during the year and any unvested shares which have met, or are expected to meet, the performance conditions at the end of the year.

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
     Year ended
30 June 2019
 

Basic EPS

     6.0p        22.0p  

Diluted EPS

     6.0p        21.8p  

Adjusted basic EPS

     16.7p        32.9p  

Adjusted diluted EPS

     16.6p        32.6p  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

12. Goodwill

 

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Cost and carrying amount

        

At beginning of year

        120.9        114.2  

Additions

     29        66.1        2.8  

Exchange differences

        5.8        3.9  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

At end of year

        192.8        120.9  
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Goodwill is converted at the exchange rate on the date of acquisition and retranslated at the balance sheet date.

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated at acquisition to the Cash Generating Unit (CGU) which is expected to benefit from that business combination. The Directors consider there to be one CGU as acquisitions are integrated into the Group’s operations and product portfolio (as described in note 5).

Goodwill is subject to an annual impairment review or more frequently if there are any indications that goodwill might be impaired. The reviews are carried out using the following criteria:

 

   

The recoverable amount of the CGU is determined from value in use (VIU) calculations;

 

   

The VIU is calculated by applying discounted cash flow modelling to management’s own projections covering a five year period;

 

   

Cash flows beyond the five year period are extrapolated using a long-term growth rate equivalent to the expected inflationary increases of the economies in which the Group predominantly trades.

The key assumptions considered most sensitive for the VIU calculations are:

 

   

The Directors’ five year projections;

 

   

The growth rate after five years; and

 

   

The pre-tax adjusted discount rate.

The Directors have projected cash flows based on strategic financial forecasts over a period of five years and take account of relative performance of competitors, knowledge of the current market, together with the Directors’ views on the future achievable growth in market share and the impact of growth initiatives.

A growth rate of 2.3% has been used in the extrapolation of cash flows beyond the five years and has been based on third party long-term growth rate forecasts which are based on GDP growth rates.

 

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

12. Goodwill continued

 

A pre-tax discount rate of 6.9% has been estimated using pre-tax rates that reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the CGU.

Based on the results of this analysis, management is satisfied that the recoverable amount of goodwill exceeds its carrying amount.

Management has performed a sensitivity analysis on each of the key base case assumptions mentioned above. Due to the significant headroom which exists between the recoverable amount and the carrying value, the Directors have concluded that there are no reasonable possible changes in any of these key assumptions which would cause the goodwill to exceed its VIU.

13. Intangible assets

 

 

    Acquisition intangibles                    
    Customer
relationships
and
distribution
rights

£m
    Patents,
technology
and know-how

£m
    Licence
fees

£m
    Trade
names

£m
    Sub-total
£m
    Software
£m
    Internally
developed
technology

£m
    Total
£m
 

Cost

               

At 1 July 2018

    7.3       65.6       15.5       2.5       90.9       45.3       19.7       155.9  

Additions

          0.6                   0.6       13.4       8.0       22.0  

Disposals

    (0.6                       (0.6     (6.9           (7.5

Exchange differences

    0.2       2.3       0.2       0.1       2.8             0.2       3.0  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2019

    6.9       68.5       15.7       2.6       93.7       51.8       27.9       173.4  

Additions

                                  15.0       9.0       24.0  

Acquisition

    1.8       48.0       0.4       1.1       51.3       0.1             51.4  

Exchange differences

    0.2       3.5       0.2       0.1       4.0             0.2       4.2  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

            8.9               120.0         16.3         3.8           149.0           66.9           37.1       253.0  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated amortization

               

At 1 July 2018

    4.8       17.9       4.7       1.9       29.3       13.0       7.3       49.6  

Charge for the year

    0.8       4.2       1.2       0.3       6.5       1.9       2.2       10.6  

Impairment

                                  12.8             12.8  

Disposals

    (0.6                       (0.6     (6.9           (7.5

Exchange differences

    0.1       0.8       0.1       0.1       1.1             0.1       1.2  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2019

    5.1       22.9       6.0       2.3       36.3       20.8       9.6       66.7  

Charge for the year

    0.8       6.3       1.2       0.3       8.6       4.2       3.1       15.9  

Impairment

          14.7                   14.7             0.2       14.9  

Exchange differences

    0.1       0.8       0.1       0.1       1.1                   1.1  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

    6.0       44.7       7.3       2.7       60.7       25.0       12.9       98.6  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount

               

At 30 June 2019

    1.8       45.6       9.7       0.3       57.4       31.0       18.3       106.7  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

    2.9       75.3       9.0       1.1       88.3       41.9       24.2       154.4  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in carrying amount—Assets under construction

               

At 30 June 2019

                                  14.7       3.9       18.6  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

                                  28.7       7.2       35.9  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

13. Intangible assets continued

 

Amortization of £8.2m (2018/19: £6.2m) is included within Research and development expenses and £7.7m (2018/19: £4.4m) is included within Selling, general and administrative expenses.

A full impairment has been made of the acquisition intangible in respect of AxioMx in Vitro monoclonal antibody production technology and subsequent post acquisition expenditure. This has arisen following an appraisal of the ability to utilise at scale this technology whereby although technical feasibility remains valid, the challenges to realise material commercial returns have resulted in the conclusion not to pursue further active development and substantive utilization of this technology. This expense is included within Research and development expenses. (2019: following achievement of a milestone in April 2019, the ERP implementation project, a review was undertaken of historical expenditure incurred to that date on outstanding modules included within software. It was concluded that as a result of changes in the scope and nature of the programme, assets of £12.8m were impaired. This expense was included within Selling, general and administrative expenses.). Further information is shown in note 7.

Capital commitments at 30 June 2020 amounted to £4.1m (2019: £nil).

Individually material intangible assets

The Group’s new ERP system is considered to be an individually material intangible asset. £11.3m is included within software which is being amortised over a five year period with a remaining amortization period of four years with the remainder shown as software assets under construction.

Patents, technology and know-how and Licence fees includes amounts which are considered individually material to the financial statements and are set out as follows:

 

     Carrying
amount
£m
     Remaining
amortization
period Years
 

Expedeon CaptSure technology

     28.5        15  

Expedeon antibody labelling and conjugation technology

     20.8        15  

Epitomics RabMAb® technology

     12.6        6  

Firefly BioWorks Multiplex and assay technology

             14.7                  9  

Roche licence agreement

     7.9        8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

14. Property, plant and equipment

 

 

     Laboratory
equipment

£m
    Office fixtures,
fittings and
other
equipment

£m
    Cell line
assets

£m
     Leasehold
improvements

£m
     Total
£m
 

Cost

            

At 1 July 2018

     16.0       13.5              15.2        44.7  

Additions

     7.2       4.7              4.9        16.8  

Disposals

     (0.4     (3.3                   (3.7

Exchange differences

     0.2       0.2                     0.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As 30 June 2019

     23.0       15.1              20.1        58.2  

Additions

     7.0       1.3       4.2               12.5  

Acquisitions

     0.3       0.1              0.2        0.6  

Reclassification*

     (1.4           1.4                

Disposals

           (1.4                   (1.4

Exchange differences

     0.4       0.4                     0.8  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

             29.3                 15.5                 5.6                  20.3            70.7  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accumulated depreciation

            

At 1 July 2018

     10.4       9.2                     19.6  

Charge for the year

     2.4       2.0              0.4        4.8  

Disposals

     (0.4     (3.3                   (3.7

Exchange differences

     0.2       0.2                     0.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2019

     12.6       8.1              0.4        21.1  

Charge for the year

     3.4       2.6       0.3        1.0        7.3  

Disposals

           (1.4                   (1.4

Exchange differences

     0.1       0.2              0.1        0.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

     16.1       9.5       0.3        1.5        27.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net book value

            

At 30 June 2019

     10.4       7.0              19.7        37.1  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

     13.2       6.0       5.3        18.8        43.3  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Included in net book value—Assets under construction

            

At 30 June 2019

                                
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

                 1.2               1.2  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

*

Cell line assets were previously categorised within Laboratory equipment. Following the addition during the year of £4.2m of cell line assets, these assets are now separately disclosed owing to scale of the balance.

Capital commitments at 30 June 2020 amounted to £1.8m (2019: £nil).

 

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

15. Leases

Right of use assets

 

     Land and
Buildings

£m
    Other
£m
     Total
£m
 

Cost

       

At 1 July 2019

                   

IFRS 16 transition adjustment

     70.6       0.2        70.8  

Additions

     58.7              58.7  

Disposals and other adjustments

     (2.3            (2.3

Exchange differences

     0.9              0.9  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

     127.9       0.2        128.1  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accumulated amortization

       

At 1 July 2019

                   

Charge for the year

     6.6       0.1        6.7  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

     6.6       0.1        6.7  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Carrying amount

       

At 30 June 2020

             121.3               0.1                121.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Lease liabilities

Maturity analysis of lease liabilities:

 

     Lease
payments

£m
     Finance
charges

£m
    Present value
of lease
liability

£m
 

Amounts falling due within

       

One year

     9.4        (2.1     7.3  

Between one and five years

     31.9        (5.0     26.9  

Later than five years

     101.9        (8.3     93.6  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     143.2        (15.4     127.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The interest expense incurred on lease liabilities included within finance costs was £1.5m and income recognised from subleases was £0.8m. The lease expense relating to short term leases and low value assets (that are not shown in the tables above) was £0.3m. Cash outflows in respect of right of use assets were £7.7m.

The reconciliation between operating lease commitments previously reported for the year ended 30 June 2019, discounted at the Group’s incremental borrowing rate, and the lease liabilities recognized in the balance sheet on initial application of IFRS 16 is as follows:

 

     £m  

Commitments disclosed at 30 June 2019

               83.6  

Non lease commitments

     (4.4

Effect of discounting at incremental borrowing rate

     (8.9

Extension options reasonably certain to be taken

     2.5  

Lease incentives

     3.4  
  

 

 

 

Lease liability recognised at 1 July 2019

     76.2  
  

 

 

 

 

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

16. Investments

 

 

     30 June 2020      30 June 2019  
     £m      £m  

Investments

             7.0                0.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The movement in the year comprises £4.0m in respect of the revaluation of investments to fair market value as described in note 3 and additions of £2.2m which were mainly in respect of a 13% stake in Brickbio, Inc. a company specializing in site-specific protein modification with a proprietary platform for introducing conjugation-ready sites into antibodies and other proteins in both mammalian and bacterial expression systems.

17. Deferred tax assets and liabilities

 

 

     Accelerated
capital
allowances

£m
    Cash flow
hedges
£m
    Share
-based
payments
£m
    Acquired
intangible
assets
£m
    Losses
£m
    Other
temporary
differences
£m
    Total
£m
 

At 30 June 2018

     (0.8           3.6       (13.2     1.4       3.4       (5.6

(Charge)/credit to income

     (3.3           0.3       1.4       (0.3     0.4       (1.5

Credit to equity

           0.3       0.1                         0.4  

Exchange differences

                       (0.6     0.2             (0.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2019

     (4.1     0.3       4.0       (12.4     1.3       3.8       (7.1

(Charge)/credit to income

     (4.6           2.0       5.6       4.0       1.0       8.0  

Credit to equity

           (0.1     (1.8                 (1.4     (3.3

Reclassification

     (0.5                             0.5        

Arising on acquisition

                       (12.0                 (12.0

Exchange differences

                       (0.7           0.1       (0.6
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020

     (9.2     0.2       4.2       (19.5     5.3       4.0       (15.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where the Group has a legally enforceable right to do so.

Deferred tax balances are comprised as follows:

 

     30 June 2020     30 June 2019  
     £m     £m  

Deferred tax assets to be recovered

    

Within 12 months

     10.1       6.9  

After more than 12 months

     3.6       2.5  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     13.7       9.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred tax liabilities to be recovered

    

Within 12 months

     (3.5     (1.4

After more than 12 months

     (25.2     (15.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     (28.7     (16.5
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred tax liabilities (net)

     (15.0     (7.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred tax is calculated using tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability or asset is expected to be realised based on rates enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date.

 

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

18. Inventories

 

 

     30 June 2020      30 June 2019  
     £m      £m  

Raw materials

     8.0        5.7  

Work in progress

     4.5        3.1  

Finished goods and goods for resale

     28.2        27.2  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     40.7        36.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Inventories are stated net of provision for slow moving or defective inventory of £12.5m (2019: £11.2m). Cost of inventories recognized as an expense and write down of inventories recognized as an expense (and which are included as part of cost of sales) are set out in note 6.

19. Trade and other receivables

 

 

     30 June 2020     30 June 2019  
     £m     £m  

Amounts receivable for the sale of goods and services

     31.7       29.4  

Less provision for bad and doubtful debts

     (0.3     (0.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     31.4       29.3  

Other receivables

     8.3       9.4  

Prepayments

     4.7       4.4  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     44.4       43.1  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Ageing of trade receivables:

 

     30 June 2020      30 June 2019  
   Gross      Provision     Net      Gross      Provision     Net  
     £m      £m     £m      £m      £m     £m  

Not past due

     21.2              21.2        23.0              23.0  

Past due

               

0 to 30 days

     4.4              4.4        3.8              3.8  

30 to 60 days

     1.0              1.0        1.3              1.3  

More than 60 days

     5.1        (0.3     4.8        1.3        (0.1     1.2  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     10.5        (0.3     10.2        6.4        (0.1     6.3  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     31.7        (0.3     31.4        29.4        (0.1     29.3  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Movement in provision for bad and doubtful debts

 

     30 June 2020     30 June 2019  
     £m     £m  

Balance at beginning of year

     (0.1     (0.1

Impairment losses recognised in the income statement

     (0.2      
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at end of year

     (0.3     (0.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The average credit period taken for sales is 41 days (2019: 35 days). Trade and other receivables are non-interest bearing and generally on terms between 30 to 90 days. Trade receivables are provided for based on

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

19. Trade and other receivables continued

 

estimated irrecoverable amounts determined either by specific circumstances or by reference to historical default experience as described in note 2.

The Group does not hold any collateral or other credit enhancements over its trade receivables, nor do they have a legal right to offset against any amounts owed to the counterparty.

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates their fair value.

20. Derivative financial instruments

30 June 2020

 

     Current     Non-current      Total  
   Asset      Liability     Liability  
     £m      £m     £m      £m  

Derivatives carried at fair value through profit and loss

          

Forward exchange contracts that are not designated in hedge accounting relationships

            (0.4            (0.4

Derivatives that are designated and effective as hedging instruments carried at fair value

          

Forward exchange contracts

            (0.8            (0.8
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
            (1.2            (1.2
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

30 June 2019

 

     Current     Non-current     Total  
   Asset      Liability     Liability  
     £m      £m     £m     £m  

Derivatives carried at fair value through profit and loss

         

Forward exchange contracts that are not designated in hedge accounting relationships

            (0.4           (0.4

Derivatives that are designated and effective as hedging instruments carried at fair value

         

Forward exchange contracts

     0.2        (1.6     (0.1     (1.5
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     0.2        (2.0     (0.1     (1.9
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Further details of derivative financial instruments are provided in note 26

21. Trade and other payables

 

 

     30 June 2020      30 June 2019  
     £m      £m  

Amounts falling due within one year

     

Trade payables

     9.4        7.0  

Accruals and deferred income

     30.9        31.7  

Other taxes and social security

     1.0        1.0  

Other payables

     2.5        2.1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     43.8        41.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

21. Trade and other payables continued

 

At 30 June 2020, the Group had an average of 34 days of purchases (30 June 2019: 28 days) outstanding in trade payables (excluding accruals and deferred income). The Group has financial risk management policies in place to ensure that all payables are paid within the credit timetable. The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates to their fair value.

Deferred income includes contract liabilities of £4.4m (2019: £4.0m) which represent consideration received for performance obligations not yet satisfied, in delivering products or services to customers. All deferred income is to be recognised within the next financial year.

Other payables includes £0.2m (2019: £0.7m) of deferred consideration payable on acquisitions.

 

22.   Borrowings

 

 

     30 June 2020     30 June 2019  
     £m     £m  

Amounts falling due within one year

    

Loan

     (106.4      
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The loan comprises drawings on the Group’s three year £200m Revolving Credit Facility (RCF) which was entered into in February 2019 and is shown net of unamortised facility arrangement fees. The RCF has a £100m accordion option which may be requested with prior notice at any time up to six months of the termination date. The initial term of this RCF has two extension options of one year each. The interest rate is the aggregate of a margin, which varies from 0.75% to 1.45% dependent on a debt cover ratio, over LIBOR or, in relation to any borrowing in Euro, EURIBOR, or in relation to any non-LIBOR currency, the benchmark rate for that currency. A non-utilization fee is payable for any amounts available but undrawn and a utilization fee is also payable for amounts drawn. Borrowings under this facility are unsecured.

During the year, drawings on the RCF comprised an initial amount of €120.0m (£103.4m) to fund the purchase of Expedeon (as set out in note 29). In February 2020, a partial repayment amounting to £20.0m was made and the remaining borrowings redenominated into Sterling, leaving an outstanding balance of £82.0m. In March 2020, a subsequent drawing of £25.0m was made in order to provide operational flexibility in light of the COVID-19 pandemic bringing amounts drawn to £107.0m. The maximum amount drawn under the RCF during the year was £107.0m.

23. Share capital and reserves

Share capital

 

     30 June 2020
£m
     30 June 2019
£m
 

Authorised, issued and fully paid:

     

216,173,277 (2019: 205,671,564) ordinary shares of 0.2 pence each

     0.4        0.4  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carries no right to fixed income.

On 9 April 2020, the Company issued 10,000,000 new ordinary shares of 0.2 pence each to Durable Capital Partners LP at an issue price of £11.00 per share, raising £110.0m. Other share capital issued during the year arose from the exercise of share options and the issue of shares to the Equiniti Share Plan Trustees Limited.

 

 

F-33


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

23. Share capital and reserves continued

 

Other reserves

Merger reserve

Comprises the premium on shares issued as consideration for acquisitions where conditions for merger relief have been satisfied.

Own shares

Represents shares in the Company held by the Equiniti Share Plan Trustees Limited. These shares are held in order to satisfy the Free Shares and Matching Shares elements of the SIP, further details of which are set out in note 26.

 

     30 June 2020      30 June 2019  
   Nominal value
£’000
     Number      Nominal value
£’000
     Number  

Own shares

     1        434,268        1        484,811  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Translation reserve

Represents exchange differences on translation of overseas operations.

Hedging reserve

Comprises gains and losses recognised on cash flow hedges and the associated deferred tax assets.

 

24.   Dividends

 

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
     Year ended
30 June 2019
 
     £m      £m  

Amounts recognised as distributions to the equity shareholders in the year:

     

Final dividend for the year ended 30 June 2018 of 8.58 pence per share

            17.6  

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 June 2019 of 3.55 pence per share

            7.3  

Final dividend for the year ended 30 June 2019 of 8.58 pence per share

     17.7         

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 June 2020 of 3.55 pence per share

     7.3         
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total distributions to owners of the parent in the period

     25.0        24.9  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

F-34


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

 

25. Notes to the cash flow statement

 

 

     Note      Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
    Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Operating profit

        10.5       56.1  

Adjustments for:

       

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

     14        7.3       4.8  

Depreciation of right of use assets

     15        6.7        

Amortization of intangible assets

     13        15.9       10.6  

Impairment of intangible assets

     13        14.9       12.8  

Derivative financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss

     6              0.4  

Research and development expenditure credit

     6        (1.5     (1.9

Share-based payments charge

     27        9.3       6.5  

Unrealised currency translation gains

        (1.7     (1.1
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital

        61.4       88.2  

Increase in inventories

        (1.1     (6.1

Decrease / (increase) in receivables

        2.7       (6.1

Increase in payables

        2.4       7.7  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash generated from operations

        65.4       83.7  
     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Analysis of changes in net cash / (debt)

 

            At
1 July 2019

£m
     IFRS 16
implement

-ation
£m
    Additions
to leases

£m
    Cash
flow

£m
    Foreign
exchange
and other
non-cash
movements

£m
    At
30 June 2020
£m
 

Cash and cash equivalents

        81.7                    99.5       0.7       187.3  

Lease liabilities

     *               (76.2     (58.6     7.7       (0.7     (127.8

Borrowings

     *                           (107.0     0.6       (106.4
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash / (debt)

        81.7        (76.2     (58.6     0.2       0.6       (46.9
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities included within net debt comprise those items marked * and amount to £234.2m (2019: £nil).

Liabilities arising from financing activities comprise the Group’s RCF (as set out in note 22) and lease liabilities (as set out in note 15).

26. Financial instruments

Capital risk management

The capital structure of the Group comprises of cash and cash equivalents, a Revolving Credit Facility of £200m (with a £100m additional accordion option and an initial term of three years which was entered into in February 2019) and total equity attributable to the owners of the parent. The Group maintains a capital structure with the following objectives:

 

   

to protect the ability of the Group to continue as a going concern and maintain sufficient available resources as protection for unforeseen events;

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

26. Financial instruments continued

 

   

to provide flexibility of resource for strategic growth and investment where opportunities arise; and

 

   

to provide reasonable returns to shareholders whilst maintaining a limited level of risk.

As part of achieving these objectives the Group identifies the principal financial risk exposures that are created by the Group’s financial instruments and monitors them on a regular basis. These are considered to be foreign currency risk (a component of market risk), credit risk and liquidity risk.

Where appropriate the Group uses financial derivatives to help mitigate the key risks, the use of which is governed by the Group’s policies approved by the Board of Directors. The Group does not enter into or trade financial instruments, including derivative financial instruments, for speculative purposes.

Foreign currency risk

This is the risk that a change in currency rates causes an adverse impact on the Group’s performance or financial position.

The Group has transactions denominated in various currencies with the principal currency exposure being fluctuations in US Dollars (USD), Euros, Japanese Yen and Chinese Renminbi (RMB). Collectively these currencies make up approximately 90% of the Group’s revenue and cash inflows. Whilst a large portion of the manufacturing and research and development costs are USD and RMB, giving a natural offset against the currency inflows, the majority of administration costs remain as Sterling leaving an overall net currency inflow in the Group’s cash flows.

This remaining currency exposure is centrally managed with the objective being to secure a level of certainty of Sterling value for up to 90% of the future net exposure based on forecast cash flows expected to occur up to 18 months ahead. The Group uses forward currency contracts to achieve this objective and applies hedge accounting where applicable. Foreign currency forward contracts are valued using quoted forward exchange rates and yield curves matching maturities of the contracts.

The Group’s open forward currency contracts and their maturity profile as at the year end is as follows:

 

F-36


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

26. Financial instruments continued

 

Outstanding contracts

   30 June 2020
Average
rate
     30 June 2020
Foreign currency

million
     30 June 2019
Average
rate
     30 June 2019
Foreign currency

million
 

Sell US Dollars

           

Less than 3 months

     1.29      $ 3.1        1.34      $ 8.9  

3 to 6 months

     1.31      $ 2.0        1.32      $ 11.5  

7 to 12 months

     1.24      $ 0.1        1.33      $ 8.3  

13 to 18 months

                           
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1.30      $ 5.2        1.33      $ 28.7  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Sell Euros

           

Less than 3 months

     1.14      8.1        1.11      11.8  

3 to 6 months

     1.15      6.5        1.11      13.2  

7 to 12 months

     1.12      3.4        1.11      17.4  

13 to 18 months

                   1.14      1.4  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1.14      18.0        1.11      43.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Sell Yen

           

Less than 3 months

     139.13      ¥ 373.4        145.26      ¥ 430.7  

3 to 6 months

     138.02      ¥ 219.4        143.23      ¥ 484.8  

7 to 12 months

     135.36      ¥ 268.7        141.58      ¥ 954.5  

13 to 18 months

     131.73      ¥ 6.4        141.99      ¥ 241.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     137.60      ¥ 867.9        142.74      ¥ 2,111.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Sell Chinese Renminbi

           

Less than 3 months

     9.11      ¥ 19.4        8.91      ¥ 34.1  

3 to 6 months

     8.99      ¥ 7.5        8.96      ¥ 27.0  

7 to 12 months

     8.90      ¥ 6.0        9.02      ¥ 54.6  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     9.05      ¥ 32.9        8.97      ¥ 115.7  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

At 30 June 2020, the fair value of contracts held as cash flow hedges is a liability of £0.8m (2019: net liability of £1.5m).

The movement recognised in other comprehensive income in the period:

 

     30 June 2020      30 June 2019  

Gain/(loss) in the year

     0.7        (2.1

Recycled to profit and loss

            0.4  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gain/(loss) recognised in other comprehensive income

     0.7        (1.7
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Currency risk sensitivity analysis

The following table shows the sensitivity of the Group’s financial instruments to changes in exchange rates by detailing the impact on profit and other comprehensive income of a 10% change in the Sterling exchange rate against the relevant foreign currencies.

 

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

26. Financial instruments continued

 

10% represents management’s assessment of a reasonably possible change in foreign exchange rates over a 12 month period.

The sensitivity analysis below only includes financial instruments denominated in non-functional currency and forward currency contracts outstanding at the reporting date and represents the impact of an immediate change in Sterling against other currencies.

 

     US Dollar
currency impact
    Euro
currency impact
    Yen
currency impact
    RMB
currency impact
 
   +10%      -10%     +10%      -10%     +10%      -10%     +10%      -10%  
     £m      £m     £m      £m     £m      £m     £m      £m  

30 June 2020

                    

Income statement

     0.3        (0.4     1.0        (1.3     0.4        (0.5     0.2        (0.2

Other comprehensive income

     0.4        (0.5     0.9        (1.2     0.3        (0.4     0.3        (0.4
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

30 June 2019

                    

Income statement

            (0.2     0.7        (0.8     0.1        (0.5         0.5        (0.7

Other comprehensive income

         1.2        (3.1         2.8        (3.7         0.6        (1.9     0        (0.1
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

The sensitivity analysis is limited to the year end exposure and therefore does not reflect the exposure and inherent risk during the year.

Liquidity risk

This is the risk that the Group will have insufficient funds available in the right currency to settle its obligations as they fall due.

The Group generates funds from operational activities in excess of its operational requirements and has substantial cash balances available for its current investment activities.

The Board reviews the funding requirement of the Group as part of the budgeting and long-term planning processes and considers as necessary alternative possible sources of funding where the requirement is not satisfied by the Group’s forecast operational cash generation.

The Group manages liquidity risk by maintaining an adequate level of easily accessible cash reserves, in a currency profile representative of the Group’s cost base and matching customer and supplier terms where possible. The Group also has access to daily currency trading facilities which provides the ability to convert currency within the agreed settlement limits as required.

 

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

26. Financial instruments continued

 

The maturity profile of financial liabilities shown below represents the Group’s gross expected contractual cash flows.

 

     Less than
1 year
     Between
2 and 5 years
     Over
five years
     Total  
     £m      £m      £m      £m  

30 June 2020

           

Trade and other payables

     33.8                      33.8  

Borrowings

     107.0                      107.0  

Lease liabilities

     9.3              32.0          101.9        143.2  

Derivative financial instruments

             30.8                      30.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     Less than
six months
     Between
six months
and one year
     Over
one year
     Total  
     £m      £m      £m      £m  

30 June 2019

           

Trade and other payables

     30.6        0.4               31.0  

Derivative financial instruments

             52.1        35.4        3.0        90.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group holds sufficient funds to meet these commitments as they fall due.

Credit risk

This refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Group.

The Group is exposed to credit risk on its financial assets; however, there is not deemed to be a significant exposure due to the nature of its customer base and the types of transaction that are undertaken.

Trade receivables consist of a large number of customers spread globally with the majority being in economically strong geographies. The Group’s customer base is predominantly government-funded institutions, pharmaceutical companies conducting research, and local distributors. The perceived risk of default is deemed to be low.

Further information on the Group’s trade receivable ageing and impairment can be found in note 19.

The Group generates significant levels of operational cash. Cash in excess of local operational requirements is remitted and managed centrally. Exposure to counterparty default risk is managed by limiting the concentration of funds and contracts held with individual financial institutions and ensuring funds are only placed with institutions or in products rated BBB- or above by Standard & Poor’s.

 

 

F-39


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

26. Financial instruments continued

 

Categories of financial instruments

 

     Carrying and fair value  
   30 June 2020     30 June 2019  
     £m     £m  

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

    

Trade receivables

     31.4       29.3  

Other receivables

     3.9       2.5  

Cash and cash equivalents

     187.3       87.1  

Trade and other payables

     (33.8     (31.0

Borrowings

     (107.0      

Lease liabilities

     (127.8      
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Financial instruments held at fair value

    

Derivative financial instruments

     (1.2     (1.9

Investment

     6.7       0.8  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Directors consider there to be no material difference between the carrying value and the fair value of the financial instruments classified as held at amortised cost. For the items classified as held at fair value, the fair value is recognised on the balance sheet as the carrying amount.

Financial instruments held at fair value

Financial instruments that are measured at fair value are classified using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the source of inputs used in deriving the fair value. The three classification levels are:

 

   

Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

 

   

Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and

 

   

Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable market inputs).

The following table presents the Group’s assets and liabilities carried at fair value by valuation method.

 

30 June 2020

   Level 1
£m
     Level 2
£m
    Level 3
£m
     Total
£m
 

Assets

          

Derivative financial instruments

                          

Investment

     4.8              1.9        6.7  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
     4.8              1.9        6.7  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities

          

Derivative financial instruments

            (1.2            (1.2
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
            (1.2            (1.2
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

26. Financial instruments continued

 

30 June 2019

   Level 1
£m
     Level 2
£m
    Level 3
£m
     Total
£m
 

Assets

          

Derivative financial instruments

            0.2              0.2  

Investment

     0.8                     0.8  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
     0.8        0.2              1.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities

          

Derivative financial instruments

            (2.1            (2.1
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
            (2.1            (2.1
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Level 2 derivative financial instruments comprise forward foreign exchange contracts. The fair value is remeasured on a monthly basis with reference to available forward market rates and comparative instrument pricing.

Level 3 investments comprise non-listed equity securities in respect of a 13% stake in Brickbio, Inc. The fair value is determined to be equal to the carrying amount of the investment and is reviewed periodically based on information available about the performance of the underlying business.

27. Share-based payments

 

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Expense arising from share-based payment transactions:

     

Included in Selling, general and administrative expenses

     6.6        5.5  

Included in Research and Development expenses

     2.7        1.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     9.3        6.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Equity settled share-based payment expense

     9.2        6.2  

Cash settled share-based payment expense*

     0.1        0.3  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     9.3        6.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

*

The total liability as at 30 June 2020 was £0.3m (2019: £0.6m) of which less than £0.1m (2019: £nil) relates to options which have vested.

Equity settled share option schemes

The Group operates a number of share schemes for certain employees of the Group as follows:

 

   

2005 and 2015 Share Option Scheme (ISO/Unapproved) (SOS)

 

   

Company Share Option Plan 2009 (CSOP);

 

   

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP);

 

   

Annual bonus plan—deferred share award (DSA);

 

   

Share Incentive Plan (SIP);

 

   

Non-Executive Directors (NED) share award; and

 

   

2018 and 2019 Employee Share Scheme (AbShare);

 

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

27. Share-based payments continued

 

Options or conditional share grants under each scheme have been aggregated.

The vesting period ranges from one to four years. Options which remain unexercised after a period of 10 years from the date of grant expire. Options are forfeited if the employee leaves the Group before they vest, save where the employee is deemed to be a ‘good leaver’ in which case options awarded are pro-rated to the leaving date.

Discretionary awards

Share option plans: SOS and CSOP

 

     Year ended 30 June 2020      Year ended 30 June 2019  
   Number     Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
     Number     Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 

Outstanding at beginning of year

     947,948       640.1        1,386,655       644.3  

Forfeited

     (72,526     1,259.1        (164,220     866.6  

Exercised

     (174,150     706.4        (274,487     525.6  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding at end of year

     701,272       559.7        947,948       640.1  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Number of options exercisable at end of year

     519,442       661.7        281,438       536.7  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Analysed by range of exercise price:

   Grant year      Year ended 30 June 2020      Year ended 30 June 2019  
   Number
outstanding
     Weighted
average

remaining
contractual life
     Number
outstanding
     Weighted
average
remaining
contractual life
 

180.8p–464.0p

     prior to 2016        197,901        3.4 years        256,955        4.3 years  

598.0p

     2016        111,033        5.3 years        155,327        6.3 years  

851.0p

     2017        161,372        6.3 years        214,798        7.4 years  

1,020.0p

     2018        230,966        7.3 years        320,868        8.4 years  
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
        701,272        5.7 years        947,948        6.7 years  
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     Year ended
30 June 2020
     Year ended
30 June 2019
 

Weighted average fair value of options granted

             

Weighted average share price at date of exercise

     1,329.2p        1,310.5p  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Options issued under the SOS carry market-based performance conditions, whereby they will vest where the percentage growth in Abcam plc shares over the vesting period is equal or greater than the percentage growth of the FTSE AIM All-Share Index.

 

 

F-42


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

27. Share-based payments continued

 

There were not any grants issued under the SOS in the years ended 30 June 2020 and 30 June 2019. The inputs into the Monte Carlo model for options issued during the prior year were as follows:

The volatility of the options is based on the average of standard deviations of historical daily continuous returns on Abcam plc shares, looking back over the same period as the expected life of the option. The dividend yield is based on Abcam plc’s actual dividend yield in the past. The risk-free rate is the yield on UK government gilts at each date of grant.

Share award plans: LTIP and DSA

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
    Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Outstanding at beginning of year

     988,127       1,022,757  

Granted

     470,834       483,339  

Forfeited

     (121,127     (141,797

Exercised

     (252,672     (376,172
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding at end of year

     1,085,162       988,127  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Number of options exercisable at end of year

     72,760       63,996  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
     Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Weighted average fair value of awards granted

     1,208.3p        1,245.1p  

Weighted average share price at date of exercise

     1,185.2p        1,304.4p  

Weighted average remaining contractual life

     3.3 years        4.3 years  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Fair values of the awards with a performance condition based on non-market condition, for example EPS, are calculated using the Black-Scholes model. The inputs into the models for awards granted in the current and prior year were as follows:

 

     Year ended 30 June 2020     Year ended 30 June 2019  
   LTIP     LTIP     LTIP     LTIP     DSA     LTIP     DSA  
     14 Nov
2019
    9 March
2020
    9 March
2020
    9 March
2020
    25 October
2019
    7 Nov
2018
    26 October
2018
 

Share price at grant (pence)

     1,245.0       1.157.0       1,157.0       1,157.0       1,152.0       1,251.0       1,337.0  

Expected volatility

     30     37     35     31     30     26     24

Contractual life (years)

     3 years       1 years       2 years       3 years       3 years       3 years       3 years  

Expected dividend yield

     0.82     0.88     0.88     0.88     0.88     0.81     0.81

Risk-free interest rate

     0.47     0.17     0.11     0.09     0.44     0.91     0.75
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The inputs to the Black-Scholes model, such as expected volatility, are based on the same calculation as those for the Monte Carlo simulation.

LTIP: All awards are subject to achievement of the performance conditions over a three year period and can be exercised over the following seven years. Save as permitted in the LTIP rules, awards lapse on an employee leaving the Company.

 

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

27. Share-based payments continued

 

DSA: For those employees entitled to participate in the annual bonus plan, a portion of the bonus is awarded in the form of shares for which there is a compulsory holding period of two years and a requirement for continued employment before these fully vest to the employees (deferred shares). The number of deferred shares granted is dependent on certain performance criteria, comprising a one-year profit target and achievement of strategic and personal objectives.

All employee share schemes: AbShare, SIPs

AbShare

In Autumn 2018, the Company launched a new share scheme (AbShare) where all employees globally, excluding Executive Directors, are eligible to participate. Each employee who participates is required to contribute 5% of their salary spread across three years (therefore equating to 1.67% per annum). Upon vesting in November 2021, and subject to certain performance conditions being met, the funds contributed will be used as consideration for the issue of the predetermined number of shares to the employee with the Company issuing a further 10 shares for each share issued.

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
    Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Outstanding at beginning of year

     1,564,167        

Granted

     348,425       1,694,429  

Forfeited

     (187,715     (130,262

Exercised

     (1,694      
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding at end of year

     1,723,183       1,564,167  
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Number of options exercisable at end of year

            
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
     Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Weighted average fair value of awards granted

     1,137.8p        1,131.4p  

Weighted average remaining contractual life

     1.4 years        2.4 years  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Fair values of the awards are calculated using the Black-Scholes model. The inputs into the models for awards granted in the current year were as follows:

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
    Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Share price at grant (pence)

     1,244.6       1,251.0  

Expected volatility

     34     26

Contractual life (years)

     2 years       3 years  

Expected dividend yield

     0.82     0.81

Risk-free interest rate

     0.52     0.91
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The inputs to the Black-Scholes model, such as expected volatility, are based on the same calculation as those for other schemes.

 

 

F-44


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

27. Share-based payments continued

 

SIP

Up until October 2018, all UK-based employees were eligible to participate in the SIP whereby employees could purchase shares in the Company. These shares are referred to as Partnership Shares and are held in trust on behalf of the employee. For every Partnership Share bought by the employee up to a limit of £1,800 per tax year the Company will give the employee one share (Matching Shares), provided the employee remains employed by the Company for a period of at least three years.

Employees must withdraw their shares from the plan upon leaving the Company and will not be entitled to the Matching Shares if they leave within three years of purchasing the Partnership Shares.

In addition to this, also up until October 2018, the Company also awarded shares to employees (Free Shares) with a value of up to £3,600 per tax year. There are no vesting conditions attached to the Free Shares, other than being continuously employed by the Company for three years from the date of grant.

The fair value of Matching Shares and Free Shares is determined as the market value of the shares at the date of grant. No valuation model is required to calculate the fair value of awards under the SIP. The fair value of an equity-based payment under the SIP is the face value of the award on the date of grant because the participants are entitled to receive the full value of the shares and there are no market-based performance conditions attached to the awards.

 

     Number of Free Shares     Number of Matching Shares  
   Year ended
30 June
2020
    Year ended
30 June
2019
    Year ended
30 June
2020
    Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Outstanding at beginning of year

     351,187       447,841       88,539       115,928  

Granted during year

                       7,323  

Forfeited during year

     (7,423     (18,982     (2,203     (7,227

Exercised during year

     (41,741     (77,672     (8,802     (27,485
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding at end of year

     302,023       351,187       77,534       88,539  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exercisable at end of year

     215,268       167,425       72,009       48,333  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
     Year ended
30 June
2019
 

Weighted average fair value of options granted

            1,042.0p  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Other awards: NED share award

A component of the Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration is delivered as a fixed number of fully paid ordinary shares in the first open period following the announcement of annual results of the financial year to which the award relates.

28. Retirement benefit schemes

 

     Year ended
30 June
2020
     Year ended
30 June
2019
 
     £m      £m  

Total charge to income statement in respect of defined contribution schemes

     4.5        3.5  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

28. Retirement benefit schemes continued

 

Defined contribution schemes

The UK-based employees of the Group have the option to join a defined contribution pension scheme managed by a third party pension provider. For each member the Company contributes a fixed percentage of salary to the scheme.

Employees of the Group’s subsidiaries in the US, Japan, China and Hong Kong are members of state-managed retirement benefit schemes. Depending on location, the subsidiaries are required to contribute a specified percentage of payroll costs to the retirement benefit schemes to fund the benefits.

As at 30 June 2020 contributions of £0.5m (2019: £0.3m) due in respect of the current reporting period had not been paid over to the schemes.

29. Business combinations

Year ended 30 June 2020

The Group made a number of acquisitions during the year. Had all of the acquisitions been completed and consolidated on 1 July 2019, the Group revenue would have been £265.6m, the profit before tax would have been £7.5m and the adjusted profit before tax would have been £45.2m. Acquisitions are set out below.

Expedeon

On 1 January 2020, the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of Expedeon Holdings Limited, including certain subsidiaries and certain other assets from Expedeon AG. This represented the proteomics and immunology business of Expedeon and was for total cash consideration of €122.5m (£104.2m) and acquisition expenses of £4.1m which are described in note 7.

This acquisition accelerates Abcam’s ambitions within the complementary antibody conjugation and labelling market and provides opportunities to combine technologies to create new value adding products to support customer needs.

The provisional fair value of identifiable assets acquired was as follows:

 

     £m  

Non-current assets

  

Intangible assets

     47.7  

Other non-current assets

     0.8  

Net current assets

     5.9  

Non-current liabilities

  

Deferred tax on intangibles

     (11.9
  

 

 

 

Total identifiable assets acquired

     42.5  

Goodwill

     61.7  
  

 

 

 

Total consideration

     104.2  
  

 

 

 

 

     £m  

Net cash outflow on acquisition

  

Consideration paid in cash

     104.2  

Acquired cash and cash equivalents

     (2.3
  

 

 

 
     101.9  
  

 

 

 

 

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

29. Business combinations continued

 

Other net current assets comprised inventory of £2.8m, cash of £2.3m, trade and other receivables of £1.9m and trade payables of £1.1m. The goodwill recognized is attributable to the expertise of the assembled workforce, potential future relationships with customers and potential new technology.

Since the date of acquisition to 30 June 2020 the acquisition contributed £5.9m to the Group’s revenue and a profit before tax of £0.3m. The effect on adjusted profit before tax was £2.0m which is before taking into account the effects of the amortization of acquisition intangibles as described in note 7.

Gene editing and oncology business

On 30 January 2020, the Group acquired certain assets and employees comprising the gene editing and oncology business of Applied StemCell, Inc. (ASC) for a total cash consideration of US $ 9.4m (£7.1m).

Abcam intends to expand the ASC platform to become its discovery engine for developing novel edited cell lines, building upon its existing portfolio of knockout cell lines.

The provisional fair value of identifiable assets acquired was as follows:

 

     £m  

Non-current assets

  

Intangible assets

     3.3  

Current assets

     0.2  
  

 

 

 

Total identifiable assets acquired

     3.5  

Goodwill

     3.6  
  

 

 

 

Total consideration

     7.1  
  

 

 

 

 

     £m  

Cash outflow on acquisition

  

Consideration paid in cash

     7.1  
  

 

 

 

Other current assets comprised inventory of £0.2m. The goodwill recognised is attributable to the expertise of the assembled workforce and potential new technology.

Since the date of acquisition to 30 June 2020 the acquisition contributed £0.4m to the Group’s revenue and a profit before tax of £0.1m over the same period. The effect on adjusted profit before tax was £0.2m which is before taking into account the effects of the amortization of acquisition intangibles as described in note 7.

As also referenced in note 7, an appraisal of all acquisition intangible assets was undertaken for consideration of any potential indicators of impairment, for example, any underperformance against previous forecasts. The post acquisition results of the ASC were below those set out at the date of acquisition and accordingly, the recoverable amount of the acquisition intangible assets was assessed for impairment. The recoverable amount was determined by applying discounted cash flow modelling to management’s own projections, covering a five year period to determine a value in use (VIU). A growth rate of 2.3% was applied to extrapolate cash flows beyond the five year period out to the end of the assets’ expected useful economic lives and the cash flows were discounted at a pre-tax rate of 11%. Based on the results of this analysis, management is satisfied that the VIU exceeds the carrying value. However, the surplus of 17% of the VIU over the carrying value of the assets could be affected by a reasonably possible adverse change in the assumptions used in the cash flow projections where for example, a consistent 1% underperformance in revenues in each year of the five year

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

29. Business combinations continued

 

forecast, without recovery, would cause the surplus to erode to £nil and subsequently cause the VIU to be below the carrying value.

Marker Gene Technologies, Inc.

On 4 March 2020, the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of Marker Gene Technologies, Inc. (MGT) for total consideration of $2.2m (£1.7m), of which $0.3m (£0.2m) is deferred for 18 months from the acquisition date, $0.7m (£0.6m) in new ordinary shares and $1.2m (£0.9m) in cash.

MGT has expertise in the areas of biology, organic synthesis and fluorescence chemistry and the team is experienced in the creation of detection tools that enable enhanced understanding of biological processes. This acquisition brings additional proprietary assay development technologies and labelling capabilities.

The provisional fair value of identifiable assets acquired was as follows:

 

     £m  

Non-current assets

  

Intangible assets

     0.4  

Net current assets

     0.6  

Non-current liabilities

  

Deferred tax on intangibles

     (0.1
  

 

 

 

Total identifiable assets acquired

     0.9  

Goodwill

     0.8  
  

 

 

 

Total consideration

     1.7  
  

 

 

 

 

     £m  

Net cash outflow on acquisition

  

Consideration paid in cash

     0.9  

Acquired cash and cash equivalents

     (0.3
  

 

 

 
     0.6  
  

 

 

 

Net current assets comprised inventory of £0.3m, cash £0.3m trade receivables of £0.1m and trade payables of £0.1m. The goodwill recognised is attributable to the expertise of the assembled workforce.

Since the date of acquisition to 30 June 2020 the acquisition contributed £0.1m to the Group’s revenue and a profit before tax of £0.1m over the same period. The effect on adjusted profit before tax was also £0.1m.

Year ended 30 June 2019

On 24 January 2019, the Group completed the acquisition of 100% of the share capital of Calico Biolabs, Inc. (Calico), a developer of recombinant rabbit monoclonal antibodies for diagnostic and biopharmaceutical companies, for total cash consideration of $4.6m (£3.6m), of which $0.9m (£0.7m) was deferred for 12 months from the acquisition date and paid during the year ended 30 June 2020.

The acquisition strategically expanded Abcam’s leading position in rabbit monoclonal antibodies, bringing a small catalogue of ready-made antibodies for immunohistochemistry (IHC) applications in addition to custom development services.

 

 

F-48


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

For the years ended 30 June 2020 and 2019

29. Business combinations continued

 

The fair value of identifiable assets acquired was as follows:

 

     £m  

Non-current assets

  

Intangible assets

     0.6  

Net current assets

     0.2  
  

 

 

 

Total identifiable assets acquired

     0.8  

Goodwill

     2.8  
  

 

 

 

Total consideration

     3.6  
  

 

 

 

Net current assets comprised cash of £0.1m, trade receivables of £0.2m and trade payables of £0.1m. The goodwill recognised is attributable to the expertise of the assembled workforce.

Since the date of acquisition to 30 June 2019, the acquisition contributed £0.3m to the Group’s revenue and a loss before tax of £0.1m over the same period. The effect on adjusted profit before tax was also a loss of £0.1m. Had Calico been consolidated from 1 July 2018, Group revenues and profit before tax for the year ended 30 June 2019 would have been £260.5m and £56.0m, respectively.

30. Related party transactions

Remuneration of Directors and key management personnel

Key management personnel is comprised of the Non-Executive Directors, the Executive Directors and the Executive Leadership Team.

The Non-Executive Directors’ fees represent amounts received in cash and an element receivable in shares.

 

     Directors’ remuneration      Key management personnel
(including Directors)
 
   Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2020
£m
     Year ended
30 June 2019
£m
 

Short-term employee benefits and fees

     1.6        1.6        4.3        4.3  

Post-employment benefits

     0.1        0.1        0.2        0.2  

Share-based payments

     1.8        1.6        2.3        2.1  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     3.5        3.3        6.8        6.6  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Directors’ transactions

During the year, the Group made purchases from companies related to Directors of £nil (2018/19: less than £0.1m) of which the balance outstanding at 30 June 2020 was £nil (2019: £0.1m). Total sales to companies related to the Directors was less than £0.1m (2018/19: less than £0.1m), of which less than £0.1m (2019: less than £0.1m) was outstanding as at 30 June 2020.

 

F-49


Table of Contents

 

LOGO

Abcam plc

Through and including                 , 2020 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers that effect transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers’ obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.


Table of Contents

PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

Item 6. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

Members of the registrant’s board of directors and its officers have the benefit of the following indemnification provisions in the registrant’s Articles of Association:

 

  (a)   every director, alternate director, secretary or other officer of the Company (other than any person (whether an officer or not) engaged by the Company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against all costs, charges, losses, expenses and liabilities incurred in relation to the execution of his or her duties in relation to the registrant, or the exercise of his or her powers or otherwise in relation to or in connection with his or her duties, powers or office as a director of the registrant for any associated company, including any liability which may attach to him or her in respect of any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to anything done or omitted to be done or alleged to have been done or omitted to be done by him or her as a director provided that such indemnity shall not apply in respect of any liability incurred by such director or officer; and

 

  (b)   the Company may fund the expenses of every director, alternate director, secretary or other officer of the Company incurred or to be incurred in defending any criminal, civil proceedings or regulatory proceedings in connection with any alleged negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust by such director, secretary or other officer in relation to any member of the registrant, or in connection with any application under section 1157 or section 661(3) or (4) of the Companies Act 2006.

There shall be no entitlement to indemnification as referred to above for (i) any liability incurred to the registrant or any associated company, (ii) the payment of a fine imposed in any criminal proceeding, (iii) a penalty imposed by a regulatory authority for non-compliance with any requirement of a regulatory nature, (iv) the defense of any criminal proceeding if the member of the registrant’s board of directors is convicted, (v) the defense of any civil proceeding brought by the registrant or an associated company or any in which judgment is given against the director, and (vi) in connection with any application for relief under section 1157 or section 661(3) or (4) of the Companies Act 2006 in which the court refuses to grant relief to the director.

In addition, any director or alternate director who has received payment from the registrant under these indemnification provisions must repay the amount he received no later than: (i) in the event of the director or alternate director being convicted in the proceedings, the date when the conviction becomes final; (ii) in the event of judgment being given against him in proceedings, the date when the judgment becomes final; or (iii) in the event of the court refusing to grant him relief on the application, the date when the refusal of relief becomes final.

The underwriting agreement the registrant will enter into in connection with the offering of ADSs being registered hereby provides that the underwriters will indemnify, under certain conditions, the registrant’s board of directors and its officers against certain liabilities arising in connection with this offering.

Item 7. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

During the past three years, we issued securities that were not registered under the Securities Act as set forth below. We believe that each of such issuances was exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance on Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act, Rule 701 and/or Regulation S under the Securities Act.

The following is a summary of transactions during the preceding three fiscal years involving sales of our securities that were not registered under the Securities Act.

In April 2020, we issued 10.0 million ordinary shares for an aggregate price of £110 million to Durable Capital Partners LP at an issue price of 1,100 pence per share.

 

II-1


Table of Contents

In March 2020, we issued 49,416 ordinary shares as a portion of the consideration for the acquisition of Marker Gene Technologies, Inc.

Additionally, since January 1, 2017, we issued an aggregate of 3,026,553 equity awards under the LTIP and AbShare to employees, including certain directors and executive officers. As of June 30, 2020, 411,555 of such equity awards had been cancelled or forfeited back to us, 1,694 had been released to “good leavers” and 2,613,304 remained outstanding.

These issuances were exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act pursuant to Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act, Rule 701 and/or Regulation S under the Securities Act.

No underwriter or underwriting discount or commission was involved in any of the transactions set forth in Item 7.

Item 8. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

 

  (a)   The Exhibit Index is hereby incorporated herein by reference.

 

  (b)   Financial Statement Schedules.

All schedules have been omitted because they are not required, are not applicable or the information is otherwise set forth in the Consolidated Financial Statements and related notes thereto.

Item 9. Undertakings.

 

  (a)   The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

 

  (b)   Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”) may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction, the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

 

  (c)   The undersigned registrant hereby further undertakes that:

 

  (1)

For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

 

  (2)

For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-2


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
No.

  

Description

1.1*    Form of Underwriting Agreement
3.1    Articles of Association of the Registrant
4.1*    Form of Deposit Agreement
4.2*    Form of American Depositary Receipt (included in Exhibit 4.1)
5.1*    Opinion of Latham & Watkins (London) LLP, counsel to the Registrant, as to the validity of the ordinary shares (including consent)
10.1    Long-Term Incentive Plan
10.2    AbShare
10.3    Share Incentive Plan
10.4    Annual Bonus Plan
10.5    Company Share Option Plan 2009
10.6    2005 and 2015 Share Option Scheme
10.7    2015 Share Option Plan
21.1    List of subsidiaries of the Registrant
23.1    Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP an independent registered public accounting firm
23.2*    Consent of Latham & Watkins (London) LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)
24.1    Power of Attorney (included in signature page to Registration Statement)

 

*

To be filed by amendment.


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the registrant certifies that it has reasonable grounds to believe that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form F-1 and has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in Cambridge, United Kingdom on October 2, 2020.

 

ABCAM PLC
By:   /s/ Alan Hirzel
Name:   Alan Hirzel
Title:   Chief Executive Officer


Table of Contents

KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that each person whose signature appears below hereby constitutes and appoints Alan Hirzel and Michael Baldock and each of them, his or her true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, with full power to act separately and full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him or her and in his or her name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments (including post-effective amendments) to this registration statement and all additional registration statements pursuant to Rule 462(b) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto each said attorney-in-fact and agent full power and authority to do and perform each and every act in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys-in-fact and agents or either of them or his or her or their substitute or substitutes may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons on October 2, 2020 in the capacities indicated:

 

Name

  

Title

/s/ Alan Hirzel    Chief Executive Officer and Director
Alan Hirzel    (Principal Executive Officer)
/s/ Michael Baldock    Chief Financial Officer and Director
Michael Baldock    (Principal Financial Officer and Principal Accounting Officer)
/s/ Peter Allen    Chairman and Director
Peter Allen   
/s/ Mara Aspinall    Director
Mara Aspinall   
/s/ Giles Kerr    Director
Giles Kerr   
/s/ Louise Patten    Director
Louise Patten   


Table of Contents

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED U.S. REPRESENTATIVE OF REGISTRANT

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the undersigned, the duly authorized representative in the United States of Abcam plc has signed this registration statement on October 2, 2020.

 

By:   /s/ Alex Bladel
Name:   Alex Bladel
Title:   Assistant Secretary

Exhibit 3.1

Company No. 3509322

THE COMPANIES ACT 2006

A PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES

 

 

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

of

ABCAM PLC

(adopted by special resolution passed on 1st November 2010)

 

 

 

Eversheds LLP    Tel 0845 497 9797   
One Wood Street    Fax +44 (0) 20 7919 4919   
London    Int  +44 (0) 20 7919 4500   
EC2V 7WS    www.eversheds.com   


CONTENTS

 

Article        Page  
  PRELIMINARY      1  
1   DISAPPLICATION OF TABLE A      1  
2   INTERPRETATION      1  
  REGISTERED OFFICE      6  
3   LOCATION OF REGISTERED OFFICE      6  
  SHARE CAPITAL      6  
4   AMOUNT AND COMPOSITION OF SHARE CAPITAL      6  
5   AUTHORITY TO INCREASE CAPITAL      6  
6   STATUS OF NEW SHARES      6  
7   CONSOLIDATION, CANCELLATION AND SUB-DIVISION OF CAPITAL      6  
8   FRACTIONS OF SHARES      7  
9   REDUCTION OF CAPITAL AND PURCHASE OF OWN SHARES      7  
10   CONDITIONS CONCERNING REDUCTION OF CAPITAL AND PURCHASE OF OWN SHARES      7  
  CLASS RIGHTS AND MEETINGS      8  
11   CONSENT REQUIREMENTS AND CLASS MEETINGS GENERALLY      8  
12   SHARES WITH PREFERENTIAL RIGHTS      9  
13   FURTHER ISSUES OF SHARES      9  
  SHARES      9  
14   COMMISSIONS      9  
15   UNISSUED SHARES      10  
16   POWER TO ALLOT SHARES      10  
17   EXCLUSION OF PRE-EMPTION RIGHTS      10  
18   RENUNCIATION OF ALLOTMENTS      11  
19   NON-RECOGNITION OF TRUSTS      11  
  SHARE CERTIFICATES AND UNCERTIFICATED HOLDINGS      11  
20   ISSUE AND EXECUTION OF SHARE CERTIFICATES      11  
21   UNCERTIFICATED HOLDINGS      13  
  CALLS ON SHARES      14  
22   POWER TO MAKE CALLS      14  
23   LIABILITY OF JOINT HOLDERS      14  
24   POWER OF CHARGEE TO MAKE CALLS      14  
25   INTEREST ON UNPAID CALLS      14  
26   WHEN CALL DULY MADE AND PAYABLE      15  
27   DIFFERENTIATION OF CALLS      15  
28   PAYMENTS IN ADVANCE OF CALLS      15  
  LIEN ON SHARES      15  
29   COMPANY’S LIEN ON PARTLY PAID SHARES      15  
30   POWER OF DIRECTORS TO SELL SHARES SUBJECT TO A LIEN      16  
31   APPLICATION OF SALE PROCEEDS      16  
32   REGISTRATION OF PURCHASER AS THE HOLDER OF THE SHARES      16  
  FORFEITURE OF SHARES      16  


33   NOTICE REQUIRING PAYMENT OF UNPAID CALLS      16  
34   CONTENTS OF NOTICE REQUIRING PAYMENT      17  
35   FORFEITURE ON NON-COMPLIANCE WITH NOTICE      17  
36   FORFEITURE TO INCLUDE DIVIDENDS      17  
37   NOTICE OF FORFEITURE      17  
38   POWER TO DEAL WITH FORFEITED SHARES      17  
39   CANCELLATION OF FORFEITURE      18  
40   LIABILITY TO PAY ALL CALLS MADE PRIOR TO FORFEITURE      18  
41   EFFECT OF FORFEITURE ON CLAIMS AGAINST THE COMPANY IN RESPECT OF THOSE SHARES      18  
42   STATUTORY DECLARATION CONCLUSIVE OF FORFEITURE      18  
43   SURRENDER IN LIEU OF FORFEITURE      19  
  TRANSFER OF SHARES      19  
44   FORM OF TRANSFER      19  
45   SUSPENSION OF REGISTRATION OF TRANSFERS      19  
46   DIRECTORS’ POWER TO DECLINE TO REGISTER TRANSFERS      20  
47   FURTHER DISCRETION NOT TO RECOGNISE A SHARE TRANSFER DOCUMENT      21  
48   DIRECTORS’ DISCRETION TO REGISTER UNCERTIFICATED SHARES      21  
49   RETENTION OF SHARE TRANSFER DOCUMENTS BY THE COMPANY      21  
50   NO FEE PAYABLE FOR REGISTRATION      21  
  TRANSMISSION OF SHARES      22  
51   TRANSMISSION ON DEATH      22  
52   NOTICE OF ELECTION FOR REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER      22  
53   RIGHTS OF PERSON ENTITLED TO A SHARE      22  
  MEETINGS      23  
54   ANNUAL GENERAL MEETINGS      23  
55   GENERAL MEETINGS      23  
56   POWER TO CALL GENERAL MEETINGS      23  
  NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS      23  
57   PERIODS OF NOTICE FOR GENERAL MEETINGS AND PERSONS ENTITLED TO NOTICE      23  
58   CONTENTS OF NOTICE      25  
59   MEANING OF ORDINARY BUSINESS      26  
60   QUESTIONS AT GENERAL MEETINGS      27  
61   CIRCULATION OF RESOLUTIONS AND OTHER MATTERS ON REQUISITION OF MEMBERS      27  
  PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS      28  
62   QUORUM      28  
63   ADJOURNMENT IF QUORUM NOT PRESENT      28  
64   GENERAL POWER OF ADJOURNMENT      28  
65   NOTICE OF ADJOURNED MEETING      29  
66   CHAIRMAN OF MEETING      29  
67   SECURITY PROCEDURES      30  
68   VOTING AND DEMANDS FOR A POLL      30  
69   DECLARATION OF THE RESULT OF VOTING      31  
70   CONDUCT OF A POLL      31  


71   TIME FOR TAKING A POLL      31  
72   RESULTS OF A POLL      32  
73   AMENDMENTS TO RESOLUTIONS      32  
  VOTING RIGHTS      32  
74   VOTING RIGHTS OF MEMBERS      32  
75   VOTING RIGHTS OF PERSONS UNDER DISABILITY      34  
76   VOTING RIGHTS OF JOINT HOLDERS      34  
77   OBJECTIONS TO AND ERRORS IN VOTING      34  
78   PROXY VOTES      34  
79   APPOINTMENT OF PROXIES      35  
80   DEPOSIT OF PROXY      35  
81   TIME LIMIT ON VALIDITY OF PROXY      37  
82   AUTHORITY CONFERRED BY PROXY      37  
83   POWER TO APPOINT ATTORNEY      37  
84   VALIDITY OF VOTES CAST BY PROXY OR POWER OF ATTORNEY      37  
  DISENFRANCHISEMENT      38  
85   CIRCUMSTANCES IN WHICH SHARES DISENFRANCHISED      38  
86   DISENFRANCHISEMENT MAY APPLY TO ONLY PART OF A MEMBER’S HOLDING      40  
87   SIGNATURE OF STATEMENTS ON BEHALF OF BODY CORPORATE      40  
88   RIGHT TO REQUIRE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION      40  
89   WHEN DISENFRANCHISEMENT CEASES TO APPLY      40  
90   REGISTRATION OF INFORMATION RECEIVED      41  
91   CANCELLATION OF NOTICES      41  
  EXERCISE OF MEMBERS’ RIGHTS      41  
92   NOMINATION NOTICES      41  
93   EFFECT OF NOMINATION NOTICES      42  
94   REPRESENTATION OF CORPORATE MEMBERS      43  
  DIRECTORS      43  
95   NUMBER OF DIRECTORS      43  
96   SHARE QUALIFICATION AND RIGHTS CONCERNING GENERAL MEETING      43  
97   FEES OF NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS      44  
98   REIMBURSEMENT OF EXPENSES      44  
99   PAYMENT OF ADDITIONAL REMUNERATION IN SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES      44  
100   A DIRECTOR’S INTERESTS IN CONTRACTS WITH THE COMPANY      44  
101   RESTRICTIONS ON A DIRECTOR’S POWER TO VOTE WHERE HE HAS AN INTEREST      44  
102   DIRECTORS’ AUTHORISATION OF SITUATIONS IN WHICH A DIRECTOR HAS AN INTEREST      46  
103   DECLARATION OF DIRECTOR’S INTERESTS IN CONTRACTS      47  
104   SHARES HELD BY THE COMPANY      48  
  MANAGING AND EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS      48  
105   APPOINTMENT OF DIRECTORS TO EXECUTIVE OFFICE      48  
106   REMUNERATION ETC. OF DIRECTORS APPOINTED TO EXECUTIVE OFFICE      48  


107   APPLICATION OF RETIREMENT BY ROTATION PROVISIONS TO CHIEF EXECUTIVE      48  
108   APPLICATION OF RETIREMENT BY ROTATION PROVISIONS TO ALL OTHER EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS      49  
109   DELEGATION TO DIRECTORS HOLDING EXECUTIVE OFFICE      49  
  APPOINTMENT AND RETIREMENT OF DIRECTORS      49  
110   VACATION OF OFFICE OF A DIRECTOR      49  
111   NUMBER OF DIRECTORS SUBJECT TO RETIREMENT BY ROTATION      50  
112   SELECTION OF DIRECTORS TO RETIRE BY ROTATION      51  
113   RE-ELECTION OR REPLACEMENT OF RETIRING DIRECTORS      51  
114   RESOLUTIONS FOR THE APPOINTMENT OF DIRECTORS      52  
115   POWER TO ALTER LIMITS ON THE NUMBER OF DIRECTORS      52  
116   REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS BY SPECIAL OR ORDINARY RESOLUTION      52  
117   DIRECTORS’ POWER TO APPOINT ADDITIONAL DIRECTORS OR TO FILL CASUAL VACANCIES      53  
  ALTERNATE DIRECTORS      53  
118   POWER TO APPOINT ALTERNATE DIRECTORS AND THEIR STATUS      53  
  PROCEEDINGS OF DIRECTORS      54  
119   DIRECTORS’ MEETINGS      54  
120   QUORUM FOR A BOARD MEETING      55  
121   RESOLUTIONS IN WRITING      55  
122   POWERS OF DIRECTORS TO ACT NOTWITHSTANDING REDUCTION BELOW MINIMUM NUMBER      56  
123   APPOINTMENT OF CHAIRMAN      56  
124   APPOINTMENT OF AND DELEGATION OF POWERS TO COMMITTEES      56  
125   PROCEEDINGS OF COMMITTEES      56  
126   VALIDITY OF ACTS OF DIRECTORS      57  
  BORROWING POWERS      57  
127   GENERAL POWER OF DIRECTORS TO EXERCISE THE COMPANY’S BORROWING POWERS      57  
128   RESTRICTIONS ON BORROWING POWERS OF DIRECTORS      57  
129   MEANING OF BORROWINGS      57  
130   PROTECTION OF THIRD PARTIES IF RESTRICTIONS ON BORROWING POWERS BREACHED      62  
  GENERAL POWERS OF DIRECTORS      62  
131   MANAGEMENT OF THE BUSINESS      62  
132   POWER TO ESTABLISH LOCAL BOARDS ETC      62  
133   APPOINTMENT OF ATTORNEYS      63  
134   SIGNATURE OF CHEQUES, BILLS ETC      63  
135   ESTABLISHMENT OF PENSION OR BENEFIT SCHEMES, CLUBS, FUNDS ETC      63  
  SECRETARY      64  
136   APPOINTMENT OF SECRETARY      64  
137   APPOINTMENT OF ASSISTANT OR DEPUTY SECRETARY      64  
138   RESTRICTIONS WHERE DIRECTOR AND SECRETARY ARE ONE AND THE SAME      65  
  THE SEAL      65  


139   FORMALITIES CONCERNING USE OF THE SEAL      65  
  RESERVES      65  
140   POWER TO CARRY PROFITS TO RESERVE      65  
  DIVIDENDS      65  
141   POWER TO DECLARE DIVIDENDS      65  
142   APPORTIONMENT OF DIVIDENDS      66  
143   DIVIDENDS PAYABLE IN ANY CURRENCY      66  
144   POWER TO PAY INTERIM AND FIXED DIVIDENDS      66  
145   SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNT      67  
146   DIVIDENDS NOT TO BEAR INTEREST      67  
147   DEDUCTION OF DEBTS DUE TO COMPANY      67  
148   RETENTION OF DIVIDENDS AND BONUSES PAYABLE ON SHARES OVER WHICH THE COMPANY HAS A LIEN      67  
149   RETENTION OF DIVIDENDS AND BONUSES WHERE A SECTION 793 NOTICE HAS NOT BEEN COMPLIED WITH      67  
150   WHEN RIGHT OF RETENTION UNDER ARTICLE 149 CEASES      68  
151   UNCLAIMED AND RETAINED DIVIDENDS      68  
152   PAYMENT OF DIVIDENDS IN SPECIE      69  
153   RECEIPTS BY JOINT HOLDERS      69  
154   METHOD OF PAYMENT OF CASH DIVIDENDS      69  
155   PAYMENT AS GOOD DISCHARGE      69  
156   CHEQUES ETC TO BE AT SOLE RISK      70  
157   RIGHT TO STOP SENDING DIVIDEND WARRANTS BY POST      70  
158   POWER TO SPECIFY RECORD DATES      70  
  SHARES IN LIEU OF DIVIDEND      71  
159   POWER TO OFFER SHARES IN LIEU OF CASH DIVIDENDS      71  
  CAPITALISATION OF PROFITS AND RESERVES      72  
160   POWER TO CAPITALISE PROFITS AND RESERVES      72  
  MINUTES AND BOOKS      73  
161   REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING MINUTES      73  
162   REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING REGISTERS      74  
163   FORM OF REGISTERS      74  
  ACCOUNTS      74  
164   COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTES      74  
165   RIGHTS TO INSPECT BOOKS      74  
166   PRESENTATION OF ACCOUNTS ETC. TO MEMBERS      75  
167   RIGHTS TO RECEIVE COPIES OF ACCOUNTS      75  
  AUDITORS      75  
168   COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTES      75  
169   VALIDITY OF ACTS OF AUDITORS      75  
170   AUDITORS’ ENTITLEMENT CONCERNING GENERAL MEETINGS      76  
  NOTICES AND DOCUMENTS      76  
171   SERVICE OF NOTICES AND DOCUMENTS      76  
  DOCUMENTS SENT IN ELECTRONIC FORM OR BY MEANS OF A WEBSITE      77  
172   DOCUMENTS SENT BY THE COMPANY IN ELECTRONIC FORM      77  
173   DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATED BY THE COMPANY BY MEANS OF A WEBSITE      77  


174   RIGHT TO HARD COPIES      78  
175   DOCUMENTS SENT TO THE COMPANY      78  
176   DOCUMENTS SENT TO JOINT HOLDERS      78  
177   DEATH OR BANKRUPTCY OF A MEMBER      78  
178   MEMBERS WITH ADDRESSES OUTSIDE THE UK      79  
179   ATTENDANCE AT MEETING TO SIGNIFY RECEIPT OF NOTICE      79  
180   SUSPENSION OF POSTAL SERVICES      79  
181   NOTICE BY ADVERTISEMENT      79  
182   RECORD DATES FOR SERVICE      79  
183   SIGNATURE OF NOTICE      80  
  UNTRACED SHAREHOLDERS      80  
184   MEMBERS ETC WITH NO VALID REGISTERED ADDRESS NEED NOT BE SENT NOTICES ETC.      80  
185   POWER OF COMPANY TO SELL SHARES OF UNTRACED MEMBERS      81  
  WINDING UP      82  
186   DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS BY LIQUIDATOR      82  
187   POWERS OF LIQUIDATOR      82  
  DESTRUCTION OF DOCUMENTS      82  
188   CIRCUMSTANCES IN WHICH COMPANY MAY DESTROY CERTAIN DOCUMENTS      82  
  SECRECY      84  
189   MEMBERS NOT ENTITLED TO INFORMATION WHICH THE DIRECTORS CONSIDER WOULD BE INAPPROPRIATE TO COMMUNICATE TO THE PUBLIC      84  
  INDEMNITY      84  
190   INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OTHER OFFICERS      84  


THE COMPANIES ACT 1985 AND 2006

PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

OF

ABCAM PLC (the “Company”)

(adopted by special resolution passed on 1st November 2010)

 

 

PRELIMINARY

 

1.

DISAPPLICATION OF TABLE A

The regulations contained in Table A of The Companies (Tables A to F) Regulations 1985 shall not apply to the Company and these Articles alone shall constitute the regulations of the Company.

 

2.

INTERPRETATION

 

2.1

In these Articles, the following words have the following meanings unless inconsistent with the context:

 

  “AIM”    a market of that name operated by the London Stock Exchange
  “these Articles”    these Articles of Association, whether as originally adopted or as from time to time altered by special resolution
  “associated company”    has the meaning given in section 256 of the Companies Act 2006
  “Auditors”    the auditors for the time being of the Company
  “authenticated”    has the meaning given in section 1146 of the Companies Act 2006
  “Company”    Abcam plc
  “Companies Act 2006”    the Companies Act 2006 (as amended from time to time)
  “connected”    in relation to a director of the Company has the meaning given in section 252 of the Companies Act 2006

 

1


  “Directors”    the directors for the time being of the Company or any of them duly acting as the board of directors of the Company
  “electronic address”    any address or number used for the purposes of sending or receiving documents or information by electronic means
  “electronic copy”, “electronic form” and “electronic means”    have the meaning given in section 1168 of the Companies Act 2006
  “FSA”    the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as the competent authority for the purposes of Part VI of the FSMA
  “FSMA”    the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (as amended from time to time)
  “Group”    the Company and its subsidiaries
  “hard copy” and “hard copy form”    have the meaning given in section 1168 of the Companies Act 2006
  “Listing Rules”    the rules made under Part VI of FSMA in relation to admission to listing and continuing obligations, and set out in “The Listing Rules”, as amended
  “London Stock Exchange”    London Stock Exchange plc
  “member”    has the meaning given in section 122 of the Companies Act 2006 and includes, where relevant and subject to section 145 of the Companies Act 2006 and to the provisions of these Articles any person nominated in accordance with these Articles to enjoy or exercise a member’s rights in relation to the Company
  “month”    calendar month
  “ordinary resolution”    has the meaning given in section 282 of the Companies Act 2006

 

2


  “participating security”    a share, class of share, right of allotment of a share or other security, title to units of which is permitted to be transferred by means of a relevant system in accordance with the Uncertificated Securities Regulations
  “Register”    the register of members of the Company
  “Registered Office”    the registered office of the Company
  “relevant system”    as defined in the Uncertificated Securities Regulations, being a computer-based system and procedures which enable title to units of a security to be evidenced and transferred without a written instrument
  “Seal”    the common seal (if any) of the Company
  “special resolution”    has the meaning given in section 283 of the Companies Act 2006
  “Statutes”    the Companies Acts as defined in section 2 of the Companies Act 2006 and every other statute, order, regulation, instrument or other subordinate legislation for the time being in force relating to companies and affecting the Company
  “takeover offer”    an offer to all of the holders, or to all the holders other than the offeror and his nominee of shares in the Company, to acquire such shares or a specified proportion or number of shares, or to all of the holders, or to all of the holders other than the offeror and his nominee of a particular class of those shares, to acquire the shares of that class or a specified proportion or number of that class
  “Transfer Office”    the place where the Register is situated
  “Uncertificated Securities Regulations”    the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 (as amended from time to time)
  “United Kingdom”    Great Britain and Northern Ireland
  “in writing”    hard copy form or to the extent agreed (or deemed to be agreed by a provision of the Statutes) and as permitted by any applicable rules or regulations electronic form or website communication
 

“year”

   calendar year.

 

3


2.2

The expression “clear days” in relation to the period of a notice means the number of days referred to excluding:

 

  2.2.1

the day when the notice is given; and

 

  2.2.2

the day of the meeting.

For the purposes of this Article 2.2 “given” means served or delivered in accordance with Article 171;

 

2.3

The expression “working day” in relation to a period of a notice means any day other than Saturday, Sunday and Christmas Day, Good Friday or any day that is a bank holiday under the Banking and Financial Dealing Act 1971 in the part of the UK where the company is registered;

 

2.4

The expressions “debenture” and “debenture-holder” respectively include “debenture stock” and “debenture stockholder”;

 

2.5

The expression “duly certified copy” when used in relation to a power of attorney means a copy of the power which complies with the provisions of section 3 of the Powers of Attorney Act 1971 or any other certification method or procedure the Directors accept;

 

2.6

The expression “dividend” includes bonus;

 

2.7

The expression “executed” includes any mode of execution recognised by law in respect of the document in question;

 

2.8

The expression “paid up” includes credited as paid up;

 

2.9

The expressions “recognised clearing house” and “recognised investment exchange” have the meanings given to them by section 285 of FSMA;

 

2.10

The expression “secretary” includes (subject to the Statutes) any assistant or deputy secretary of the Company appointed pursuant to Article 137 and any person duly appointed by the Directors to perform any of the duties of the secretary of the Company and, where 2 or more persons are duly appointed to act as joint secretaries, or as joint assistant or deputy secretaries, of the Company, includes any one of those persons;

 

4


2.11

The expression “transfer” includes any procedure authorised by the Statutes or the Uncertificated Securities Regulations and approved or adopted by the Directors for transferring title to securities without a written instrument;

 

2.12

All of the provisions of these Articles which apply to paid up shares shall apply to stock and to securities as defined by the Uncertificated Securities Regulations and the words “share” and “shareholder” shall be construed accordingly;

 

2.13

Words signifying the singular number only shall include the plural number, and vice versa;

 

2.14

Words signifying the masculine gender only shall include the feminine gender;

 

2.15

Words signifying persons shall include corporations;

 

2.16

References to any statute or statutory provision include, unless the context otherwise requires, a reference to that statute or statutory provision as modified, replaced, re-enacted or consolidated and in force from time to time and any subordinate legislation made under the relevant statute or statutory provision;

 

2.17

References to a share being in uncertificated form are references to that share being an uncertificated unit of a security;

 

2.18

Subject to the above, any words or expressions defined in the Companies Act 2006 or the Uncertificated Securities Regulations shall, provided they are consistent with the subject or context, have the same meaning in these Articles;

 

2.19

The provisions of the Companies Act 2006 relating to sending documents apply where any provision in these Articles uses the words ‘sent’, ‘supplied’, ‘delivered’, ‘provided’, ‘given’, ‘produced’, ‘circulated’ or any derivation of those words;

 

2.20

The marginal notes (if any) and headings are inserted for convenience only and shall not form part of, or affect the construction of, these Articles;

 

2.21

The word “address” where it appears in these Articles includes postal address and electronic address and “registered address” and “address for service” shall be construed accordingly;

 

2.22

Where the word “proxy” appears in these Articles it is deemed to include any proxy or proxies appointed in accordance with Articles 78 and 79.

 

5


REGISTERED OFFICE

 

3.

LOCATION OF REGISTERED OFFICE

The Registered Office shall be at such place in England or Wales as the Directors shall from time to time decide.

SHARE CAPITAL

 

4.

AMOUNT AND COMPOSITION OF SHARE CAPITAL

The authorised share capital of the Company at the time of the adoption of these Articles is £1,000,000 divided into 100,000,000 ordinary shares of 1 pence each.

 

5.

AUTHORITY TO INCREASE CAPITAL

The Company may by ordinary resolution, whether or not all the shares for the time being authorised have been issued, or all the issued shares have been fully paid up, increase its capital by the creation of new shares. The increase will be the aggregate amount, and be divided into shares of the respective amounts, provided for in the ordinary resolution.

 

6.

STATUS OF NEW SHARES

Any capital raised by the creation of new shares will be treated as part of the original capital and will be subject to the same provisions of these Articles with reference to the payment of calls, transfer, transmission, forfeiture, lien and otherwise as if it had been part of the original capital.

 

7.

CONSOLIDATION, CANCELLATION AND SUB-DIVISION OF CAPITAL

Subject to the provisions of Article 10 and the Companies Act 2006, the Company may by ordinary resolution:

 

7.1

consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into shares of a larger nominal value than its existing shares; or

 

7.2

cancel any shares which at the date of the passing of the relevant resolution have not been taken or agreed to be taken by any person and diminish the amount of its share capital by the nominal amount of the cancelled shares; or

 

7.3

subdivide its existing shares, or any of them, into shares of a smaller nominal value than is fixed by its constitution or was fixed by the resolution creating the shares. In any subdivision the proportion between the amount paid and the amount, if any, unpaid on each share of a smaller amount shall be the same as it was in the case of the share from which the share of a smaller amount was derived. The resolution to effect any subdivision may determine that as between

 

6


  the holders of the resulting shares (but subject and without prejudice to any rights for the time being attached to the shares of any special class) one or more of such shares may be given a preference, advantage, restriction or disadvantage as regards dividend, capital, voting or otherwise over the others or any other of such shares.

 

8.

FRACTIONS OF SHARES

If as a result of any consolidation and division or sub-division of shares, members of the Company are entitled to any issued shares of the Company in fractions, the Directors may decide how to deal with such fractions. In particular the Directors may sell the shares to which members have fractional entitlements for the best price reasonably obtainable and pay and distribute to and amongst the members having such entitlement in due proportions the net proceeds of sale. For the purpose of giving effect to any such sale the Directors may appoint some person to execute or otherwise effect a transfer of the shares to the purchaser and may enter the purchaser’s name in the Register as the holder. The purchaser will not be obliged to see how the purchase money is applied and his title to the shares will not be affected if the sale was irregular or invalid in any way.

 

9.

REDUCTION OF CAPITAL AND PURCHASE OF OWN SHARES

Subject to the provisions of Article 10 and the Companies Act 2006, the Company may from time to time:

 

9.1

by special resolution reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve or any share premium account in any manner authorised, and subject to any restrictions in the Companies Act 2006; and

 

9.2

purchase its own shares (including any redeemable shares) and may hold such shares as treasury shares or cancel them.

 

10.

CONDITIONS CONCERNING REDUCTION OF CAPITAL AND PURCHASE OF OWN SHARES

 

10.1

Anything done in accordance with Article 7, 8 or 9 shall be done in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and this Article 10 insofar as they apply, in accordance with the terms of the resolution which authorises the alteration of capital. If the terms of the resolution do not specify how a thing is to be done, it shall be done in the manner the Directors deem most expedient.

 

10.2

The Company shall not enter into any contract for the purchase of shares in its own equity share capital unless the purchase has previously been sanctioned by a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of any class of securities issued by the Company which are convertible into, exchangeable for

 

7


  or carry a right to subscribe for, equity shares in the capital of the Company which are of the same class as those proposed to be purchased. The provisions of Article 11 shall apply for the purpose of any separate class meeting.

 

10.3

The Company can select which shares it will purchase in its own equity capital and purchase them by whatever method it sees fit.

CLASS RIGHTS AND MEETINGS

 

11.

CONSENT REQUIREMENTS AND CLASS MEETINGS GENERALLY

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, whenever the share capital is divided into different classes of shares, all or any of the rights attached to any class (unless otherwise provided by the terms of issue of the shares of that class) may, whether or not the Company is being wound up, be modified, varied, extended, abrogated or surrendered either in the manner provided by such rights or (in the absence of any such provision) with the written consent of the holders of at least three-fourths in nominal value of the issued shares of that class (excluding any shares of that class held as treasury shares) or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of shares of that class. The provisions of these Articles relating to general meetings apply to every separate general meeting of the holders of any class of shares, except that:

 

11.1

no member shall be entitled to receive notice of such meeting or to attend it unless he is a holder of shares of the class in question and no vote shall be given except in respect of a share of that class;

 

11.2

the necessary quorum shall be 2 persons at least present in person and holding or representing by proxy at least one-third in nominal value of the issued shares of the class in question (excluding any shares of that class held as treasury shares);

 

11.3

if any such meeting is adjourned by reason of there being no quorum present and at the adjourned meeting a quorum as defined in Article 11.2 is not present within 15 minutes after the time appointed for the adjourned meeting, one holder of shares (other than treasury shares) of the class in question present in person or by proxy shall be a quorum;

 

  11.3.1

any holder of shares of the class in question who is present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote may demand a poll; and

 

  11.3.2

on a poll every holder of shares of the class in question who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of that class which he holds.

 

8


12.

SHARES WITH PREFERENTIAL RIGHTS

The following will not be deemed to be variations of the rights attached to any class of shares unless either the rights attached to the class expressly provide so or it is expressly provided by these Articles:

 

12.1

the creation or allotment of other shares having rights to either dividend or return of capital which rank either pari passu with, or after, a class with any preferential right to dividend or return or capital; or

 

12.2

any lawful purchase by the Company of its own shares of any class.

 

13.

FURTHER ISSUES OF SHARES

 

13.1

Without prejudice to any special rights conferred on shareholders or holders of a class of shares, the Company by ordinary resolution may determine that any shares are allotted with special rights, privileges or restrictions.

 

13.2

The ordinary resolution referred to in Article 13.1 must be passed before the shares are allotted and the allotment is subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and these Articles.

 

13.3

Shares can be allotted:

 

  13.3.1

with a preferential, deferred or qualified right to dividends or to the distribution of assets;

 

  13.3.2

with a special or qualified or without any right of voting or with restrictions on the right to vote; or

 

  13.3.3

subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, on terms that they are redeemable or at the option of the Company or the shareholder are to be liable to be redeemed and the Directors may determine the terms, conditions and manner of redemption of any such shares.

SHARES

 

14.

COMMISSIONS

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and to any relevant Listing Rules or rules of AIM made by the London Stock Exchange, the Company may exercise the power conferred by section 553 of the Companies Act 2006 to pay commissions.

 

9


15.

UNISSUED SHARES

All unissued shares shall (if and to the extent authorised or permitted by the Companies Act 2006, these Articles and any resolution of the Company and subject to any directions by the Company by ordinary resolution) be at the disposal of the Directors who may (subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, these Articles and any such resolution or directions) allot, grant options over, offer or otherwise deal with or dispose of such shares to such persons, at such times and generally on such terms and conditions as they may determine.

 

16.

POWER TO ALLOT SHARES

The Company may at any time pass an ordinary resolution which authorises the Directors to allot shares in the Company or grant rights to subscribe for or to convert any security into shares and, upon the passing of the ordinary resolution, the Directors shall be generally and unconditionally authorised to exercise all the powers of the Company to allot shares or grant rights to subscribe for or to convert any security into such shares provided that:

 

16.1

the maximum amount of shares that may be allotted under such authority shall be the amount specified in the ordinary resolution; and

 

16.2

any such authority shall, unless it is (prior to its expiry) revoked, varied or renewed, expire either on the date immediately prior to the fifth anniversary of the date on which the ordinary resolution is passed or on such earlier date specified in the ordinary resolution. The Company shall be entitled, before the authority expires, to make an offer or agreement which would or might require shares to be allotted or rights to be granted after such expiry.

 

17.

EXCLUSION OF PRE-EMPTION RIGHTS

 

17.1

Subject to the provisions of this Article 17 and where the Directors have general authority under Article 16, the Company may pass a special resolution authorising the Directors to allot equity securities (as defined in section 560 of the Companies Act 2006) for cash. Upon the passing of the special resolution the Directors shall be authorised to allot such equity securities for cash as if section 561(1) of the Companies Act 2006 did not apply to any such allotment, provided that the power shall be limited to:

 

  17.1.1

allotments made for the purpose of, or in connection with an offer (by any person) of equity securities to the holders of the issued ordinary shares in the capital of the Company (excluding any shares of that class held as treasury shares), where the securities respectively attributable to the interests of such holders are proportionate (as nearly as may be) to the respective numbers of ordinary shares held

 

10


  by such holders. Such allotments may be made subject to such exclusions or other arrangements as the Directors consider appropriate, necessary or expedient to deal with any fractional entitlements or with any legal or practical difficulties arising under the laws of any territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or recognised investment exchange or otherwise; and

 

  17.1.2

the allotment (otherwise than pursuant to Article 17.1.1) of equity securities having an aggregate nominal value not exceeding the sum specified in the special resolution. If no sum is specified, the special resolution shall be ineffective for the purposes of this Article 17.1.2.

 

17.2

The power to allot equity securities in accordance with this Article 17 shall expire on the date specified in the special resolution save that the Company will be entitled, before the date of expiry, to make an offer or agreement that would or might require equity securities to be allotted after such expiry.

 

18.

RENUNCIATION OF ALLOTMENTS

Notwithstanding any other provisions of these Articles the Directors may at any time after the allotment of any share but before any person has been entered in the Register as the holder, recognise a renunciation of any share by the allottee in favour of some other person. The Directors may allow an allottee to renounce the share upon and subject to such terms and conditions as the Directors may impose and the Directors may refuse to register any renunciation in favour of more than 4 persons jointly.

 

19.

NON-RECOGNITION OF TRUSTS

Except as required by these Articles or by law or by order of a court of competent jurisdiction and notwithstanding any information received by the Company pursuant to any provision of these Articles or any statutory provision relating to the disclosure of interests in voting shares or otherwise, no person shall be recognised by the Company as holding any share upon any trust. The Company shall not be bound by or be compelled in any way to recognise (even when having notice) any equitable, contingent, future or partial interest in any share or any interest in any fractional part of a share or any other right in respect of any share except a holder’s absolute right to the whole of the share.

SHARE CERTIFICATES AND UNCERTIFICATED HOLDINGS

 

20.

ISSUE AND EXECUTION OF SHARE CERTIFICATES

 

20.1

Every share certificate shall be issued under the Seal or an official seal kept by the Company under section 50 of the Companies Act 2006 or otherwise executed by the Company in accordance with the Statutes. Any such certificate which is

 

11


  executed otherwise than under seal may, if the Directors so determine, bear signatures affixed by some mechanical or other method or system of applying facsimile signatures. No certificate shall be issued representing shares of more than one class.

 

20.2

Every share certificate must specify the number and class and the distinguishing numbers (if any) of the shares to which it relates and the amount paid up on those shares.

 

20.3

Where the Company sends share certificates to shareholders or their agents by post, such share certificates shall be sent at the shareholders’ risk.

 

20.4

In the case of a share held jointly by several persons the Company shall not be bound to issue more than one certificate and delivery of a certificate to any one of the joint holders shall be sufficient delivery to all.

 

20.5

Subject to the provisions of this Article 20, the Companies Act 2006 and the Uncertificated Securities Regulations, any person who is registered as the holder of the shares of any one class is entitled without payment to a share certificate for them within the period specified in the Companies Act 2006. This entitlement arises when shares of any one class are allotted or transferred in certificated form. It does not apply to those persons who the Uncertificated Securities Regulations or the Companies Act 2006 say are not entitled to a share certificate.

 

20.6

The Company does not have to issue a share certificate to a recognised clearing house or to its nominee or to the nominee of a recognised investment exchange.

 

20.7

If any shares are converted from uncertificated into certificated form in accordance with the Uncertificated Securities Regulations, any person whose name is entered in the Register shall be entitled without payment to a certificate for them within the period specified by the Uncertificated Securities Regulations.

 

20.8

Where part only of the shares comprised in a certificated holding are transferred, the certificate for the shares shall be cancelled and a new certificate for the balance of the shares issued in its place without payment.

 

20.9

Any 2 or more certificates representing shares of any one class held by any member may at his request be cancelled and a single new certificate for the shares issued in its place without charge.

 

20.10

A member may surrender a share certificate representing shares he holds and request the Company to cancel it and to issue in its place 2 or more share certificates for such shares in such proportions as he may specify. The Directors may, if they think fit and upon payment of such reasonable out-of-pocket expenses as they shall determine, comply with such request.

 

12


20.11

If a share certificate is worn out, damaged or defaced or alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed a new certificate shall be issued to the holder upon request. If the share certificate is worn out, damaged, or defaced the Company can require delivery up of the old certificate. If the share certificate is alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, the Company can require compliance with such conditions as to evidence and indemnity as the Directors may think fit and, if the Directors think fit, reimbursement of any exceptional out of pocket expenses incurred by the Company in connection with the request. In the case of shares held jointly by several persons any such request may be made by any one of the joint holders.

 

21.

UNCERTIFICATED HOLDINGS

 

21.1

Subject to the Uncertificated Securities Regulations and the requirements of the relevant system, the Directors have the power to make arrangements, as they think fit, for any class of shares to be a participating security.

 

21.2

If the Directors decide to implement the arrangements referred to in Article 21.1 and if the operator of the relevant system permits the class of shares to be a participating security, the following provisions will apply. These Articles will apply to any class of shares which is at any time a participating security to the extent that they are consistent with:

 

  21.2.1

the holding of shares of that class in uncertificated form;

 

  21.2.2

the transfer of title to shares of that class by means of a relevant system; and

 

  21.2.3

the Uncertificated Securities Regulations.

 

21.3

Subject to the Uncertificated Securities Regulations, if any class of shares is at any time a participating security:

 

  21.3.1

the Register relating to that class shall be maintained at all times in the United Kingdom;

 

  21.3.2

such shares may be issued in uncertificated form;

 

  21.3.3

unless the Directors decide otherwise such shares held by the same or joint holders in certificated and uncertificated form will be treated as separate holdings; and

 

  21.3.4

such shares may be changed from uncertificated to certificated form and from certificated to uncertificated form.

 

13


CALLS ON SHARES

 

22.

POWER TO MAKE CALLS

 

22.1

The Directors may, subject to the provisions of these Articles and to any relevant terms of allotment, from time to time make calls upon the members in respect of all moneys unpaid on their shares (whether on account of the nominal value of the shares or by way of premium) as they think fit.

 

22.2

7 days’ notice at least must be given of each call, and each member to whom the call has been made will be liable to pay the amount of each call to the person and at the time and place specified by the Directors in the notice. A call may be made payable by instalments. A call shall be deemed to have been made as soon as the resolution of the Directors authorising the call has been passed.

 

22.3

A call may, at any time before the Company receives the money due in respect of the call, be partly or wholly revoked or postponed by the Directors. A person on whom a call is made will remain liable for all calls made upon him notwithstanding the subsequent transfer of the shares in respect of which the call was made.

 

23.

LIABILITY OF JOINT HOLDERS

Joint holders of a share shall be jointly and severally liable to pay all instalments and calls and any one of such persons may give a receipt for any return of capital payable in respect of such share.

 

24.

POWER OF CHARGEE TO MAKE CALLS

If any uncalled capital of the Company is included in or charged by any mortgage or other security, the Directors may delegate to the person in whose favour such mortgage or security is executed, or to any other person in trust for him, the power to make calls on the members in respect of the uncalled capital and to sue in the name of the Company or otherwise for the recovery of moneys (including any moneys due under Articles 25 or 26) becoming due in respect of calls so made and to give valid receipts for such moneys. The power so delegated may (if so expressed) be assignable.

 

25.

INTEREST ON UNPAID CALLS

If any member is liable to pay any call or instalment and has not paid it by the specified due date, he shall (unless the Directors otherwise determine) pay interest on the unpaid amount from the specified date for payment to the time of actual payment. The rate may be fixed by the terms of issue of the share or, if the rate is not fixed, the rate may be determined by the Directors but shall not exceed any maximum rate fixed by the Companies Act 2006. The Directors have

 

14


the discretion to require a member to pay all costs, charges and expenses which the Company has incurred or become liable for in procuring payment of, or in consequence of the non payment of, any call or instalment but also have the discretion to remit all or part of any interest, costs, charges or expenses.

 

26.

WHEN CALL DULY MADE AND PAYABLE

If the terms of issue of a share make any sum payable on allotment or at any fixed date, that sum and any instalment of a call shall, for the purposes of these Articles, be deemed to be a call duly made and payable on the date fixed for payment. In case of non-payment, the provisions of these Articles as to payment of interest and expenses and forfeiture, and all the other relevant provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and these Articles shall apply as if such sum or instalment were a call duly made.

 

27.

DIFFERENTIATION OF CALLS

The Directors may from time to time on the issue of shares differentiate between the holders with regard to the number of calls to be paid on those shares and the times of payment.

 

28.

PAYMENTS IN ADVANCE OF CALLS

 

28.1

The Directors may accept from any member all or any part of the money payable on his shares in advance of any calls made under Article 22. The Directors can agree to pay interest on the money paid in advance, at a rate agreed between the Directors and the member which must not exceed, without the consent of the Company by ordinary resolution, the appropriate rate (as defined in section 592 of the Companies Act 2006) from the date of the advance until the date the call would become payable.

 

28.2

In determining a member’s dividend entitlement, payments made in advance of calls shall be disregarded until, and to the extent that, a call is actually made.

LIEN ON SHARES

 

29.

COMPANY’S LIEN ON PARTLY PAID SHARES

The Company shall have a first and paramount lien and charge on every partly paid share for all moneys (whether presently payable or not) called or payable at a fixed time in respect of such share. The Company’s lien will extend to all dividends or other moneys payable on a share. The registration of a transfer of shares will, unless otherwise agreed between the Directors on behalf of the Company and the person to whom the shares have been so transferred, operate as a waiver of the Company’s lien (if any) on such shares. The Directors may at any time declare any share to be wholly or partly exempt from the provisions of this Article.

 

15


30.

POWER OF DIRECTORS TO SELL SHARES SUBJECT TO A LIEN

For the purpose of enforcing the lien referred to in Article 29 the Directors may sell all or any of the shares subject to the lien in such manner as they think fit, but only:

 

30.1

if some sum in respect of which the lien exists is presently payable; and

 

30.2

the sum has not been paid within 14 days after a notice in writing stating the amount due, demanding payment, and giving notice of intention to sell in default, has been served on the holder of the shares or the persons (if any) entitled by transmission to the shares.

 

31.

APPLICATION OF SALE PROCEEDS

The net proceeds of any such sale, after payment of costs of sale shall be used in or towards paying the amount due. Any balance shall (on surrender of the share certificate to the Company for cancellation in respect of shares held in certificated form) be paid to the member or the persons (if any) entitled by transmission to the shares. The Company’s lien will also apply to any balance to cover any moneys due to the Company but not then payable. The Company will have the same rights over such balance as it had over the shares immediately before the sale.

 

32.

REGISTRATION OF PURCHASER AS THE HOLDER OF THE SHARES

If the Directors sell any shares in accordance with Article 30, they may authorise some person to execute an instrument of transfer or otherwise effect a transfer of the shares to the purchaser in the name and on behalf of the holder of the shares or the persons (if any) entitled by transmission to the shares. The Directors may enter the purchaser’s name in the Register as holder, and the purchaser will not be obliged to see how the purchase money is applied and his title to the shares will not be affected if the sale was irregular or invalid in any way. After the purchaser’s name has been entered in the Register the validity of the sale cannot be questioned by any person, and the remedy of any person aggrieved by the sale shall be in damages only and against the Company exclusively.

FORFEITURE OF SHARES

 

33.

NOTICE REQUIRING PAYMENT OF UNPAID CALLS

If any member fails to pay the whole or any part of any call or instalment on or before the day specified for payment, the Directors may, at any time while the

 

16


whole or any part of the call or instalment remains unpaid, serve a notice on the member demanding that he pays the same together with any accrued interest and any costs, charges and expenses incurred by the Company by reason of such non-payment.

 

34.

CONTENTS OF NOTICE REQUIRING PAYMENT

The notice shall:

 

34.1

name a date (being not less than 14 days after the date of service of the notice) on or before which the sum demanded is to be paid;

 

34.2

name the place where payment is to be made; and

 

34.3

state that in the event of non-payment on or before the date and at the place specified, the shares in respect of which the call was made or instalment is payable will be liable to be forfeited.

 

35.

FORFEITURE ON NON-COMPLIANCE WITH NOTICE

If the requirements of the notice referred to in Article 34 are not complied with, the shares to which the notice relate may be forfeited at any time before payment of all calls or instalments, interest, costs, charges and expenses due in respect of the shares has been made. The Directors must pass a resolution stating that the shares have been forfeited.

 

36.

FORFEITURE TO INCLUDE DIVIDENDS

A forfeiture of shares under Article 35 will include all dividends declared in respect of the forfeited shares and not actually paid before the forfeiture.

 

37.

NOTICE OF FORFEITURE

When any share has been forfeited in accordance with these Articles, notice of the forfeiture must be given to the person whose shares have been forfeited. An entry recording the giving of the notice and the date of the forfeiture, (which shall be the same date as the date of the Directors’ resolution forfeiting the shares), must be made in the Register opposite to the entry of the share. Failure to give the notice of forfeiture or to make the required entry in the Register will not invalidate the forfeiture.

 

38.

POWER TO DEAL WITH FORFEITED SHARES

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 every share which is forfeited shall become the property of the Company. No voting rights shall be exercised in respect of a forfeited share and the Directors may within three years after the forfeiture sell, re-allot or otherwise dispose of it, to any person, upon

 

17


such terms and in such manner as the Directors shall think fit, and whether with or without all or any part of the amount previously paid on the share being credited as paid. The Directors may authorise some person to transfer a forfeited share to any other person. Any share not disposed of in the manner set out above within a period of 3 years from the date of its forfeiture shall at the end of that period be cancelled in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

 

39.

CANCELLATION OF FORFEITURE

The Directors may, at any time before a forfeited share has been sold, re-allotted or otherwise disposed of or cancelled, permit the forfeiture to be cancelled upon the payment of all calls and interest due upon and costs, charges and expenses incurred in respect of the share, and upon any further or other terms they may think fit.

 

40.

LIABILITY TO PAY ALL CALLS MADE PRIOR TO FORFEITURE

A member whose shares have been forfeited is liable to pay to the Company all unpaid calls and instalments, interest and expenses owing on or in respect of such shares at the time of forfeiture, with interest from the time of forfeiture to the date of payment at such rate and in the same manner as if the shares had not been forfeited. The member must also satisfy whatever claims and demands which the Company might have enforced in respect of the shares at the time of forfeiture without any deduction or allowance for the value of the shares at the time of forfeiture.

 

41.

EFFECT OF FORFEITURE ON CLAIMS AGAINST THE COMPANY IN RESPECT OF THOSE SHARES

The forfeiture of a share will result in the cancellation of all interest in, and all claims and demands against the Company in respect of, the share and all other rights and liabilities connected with the share as between the member whose share is forfeited and the Company. This does not apply to those rights and liabilities expressly preserved by these Articles, or given to or imposed on past members by the Statutes.

 

42.

STATUTORY DECLARATION CONCLUSIVE OF FORFEITURE

A statutory declaration in writing by a director of the Company that a share has been forfeited on a specified date shall, as against all persons claiming to be entitled to the share, be conclusive evidence of the facts stated in it. Such statutory declaration together with (in the case of a share held in certificated form) a share certificate issued in accordance with these Articles (subject to the execution or other implementation of any necessary transfer) shall constitute a good title to the share. The purchaser or allottee shall be discharged from all calls made prior to the purchase or allotment and will not be obliged to see how

 

18


the purchase money is paid. His title to the share will not be affected by any omission, irregularity, or invalidity concerning the forfeiture, sale, re-allotment or disposal of the share.

 

43.

SURRENDER IN LIEU OF FORFEITURE

The Directors may accept the surrender of any share which they are in a position to forfeit. The same consequences shall flow from the surrender of such a share as if the share had been effectively forfeited by the Directors; in particular, any share so surrendered may be disposed of in the same manner as a forfeited share.

TRANSFER OF SHARES

 

44.

FORM OF TRANSFER

Unless these Articles say otherwise:

 

44.1

a share held in certificated form may be transferred by an instrument of transfer in writing in any usual or common form or in any other form acceptable to the Directors (“share transfer”). The instrument of transfer must be executed by or on behalf of the transferor and (except in the case of a fully paid share) by or on behalf of the transferee and must be left at the Transfer Office, or at such other place in England and Wales as the Directors may from time to time decide, accompanied by the certificate of the share to be transferred and such further evidence (if any) the Directors may require to prove the title of the transferor. The transferor shall be treated as the holder of the share transferred until the name of the transferee is entered in the Register; and

 

44.2

a share held in uncertificated form may only be transferred through a relevant system in accordance with the Uncertificated Securities Regulations and the facilities and requirements of the relevant system.

 

45.

SUSPENSION OF REGISTRATION OF TRANSFERS

In the case of a share held in uncertificated form the Register may only be closed in accordance with Regulation 26 of the Uncertificated Securities Regulations.

 

19


46.

DIRECTORS’ POWER TO DECLINE TO REGISTER TRANSFERS

 

46.1

The Directors may in their absolute discretion refuse to register or authorise the registration of the transfer of a share held in certificated form in any of the following circumstances:

 

  46.1.1

if the Company has a lien on a partly paid share unless to do so would prevent dealings in partly paid shares from taking place on an open and proper basis;

 

  46.1.2

if a notice has been duly served in respect of a share pursuant to section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 or any other provision of the Statutes concerning the disclosure of interests in voting shares and:

 

  46.1.2.1

the share or shares which were the subject of that notice represented in aggregate at least 0.25 per cent. of that class of shares (calculated exclusive of any treasury shares of that class); and

 

  46.1.2.2

the person or persons on whom the notice was served failed to comply with the requirements of the notice within the period for compliance specified in the notice (being not less than 14 days from the date of service of the notice) and remains in default in complying with the notice, unless the transfer in question is to a bona fide unconnected third party such as a sale through a recognised investment exchange or an overseas exchange or as a result of an acceptance of a takeover offer; or

 

  46.1.3

if the transfer is of a share or shares (whether fully paid or not) in favour of more than 4 persons jointly.

If the Directors refuse to register or authorise the registration of a transfer they shall send notice of refusal to the transferee together with reasons for the refusal as soon as practicable and in any event within 2 months after the date on which a transfer form or, if Article 46.2 applies, a letter of allotment is lodged with the Company or its registrars.

 

46.2

If, and for the time that, a person fails to comply with the notice referred to in Article 46.1.2, the consequences of default under that Article will also apply (with effect from allotment) to any additional share allotted to that person after service of the notice in right of the shares which were the subject of the notice (including, without limitation, any share allotted pursuant to a rights issue or a bonus issue) as if such additional share had also been the subject of the notice.

 

46.3

A person shall be deemed to be in default in complying with a notice referred to in Article 46.1.2 if he fails or refuses to give all the information required by the notice to the satisfaction of the Directors or if he gives information which he knows to be false or if he recklessly gives information which is false.

 

20


47.

FURTHER DISCRETION NOT TO RECOGNISE A SHARE TRANSFER DOCUMENT

 

47.1

In addition and without prejudice to their rights under Article 46 the Directors may decline to recognise any share transfer document unless:

 

  47.1.1

it is in respect of only one class of share and is deposited at the Transfer Office (or at such other place in England and Wales as the Directors may from time to time decide);

 

  47.1.2

it is accompanied by the relevant share certificate(s) and such other evidence as the Directors may reasonably require to show the right of the transferor to make the transfer and, if the share transfer document is executed by another person on behalf of the transferor, the authority of that person so to do.

 

47.2

Subject to the provisions of this Article 47 and to the provisions of Article 46 the Directors shall register any share transfer document submitted to them unless forbidden to do so by law. In the case of a transfer by a recognised clearing house or a nominee of a recognised clearing house or of a recognised investment exchange, share certificates do not need to be lodged, unless certificates must by law have been issued in respect of the shares in question.

 

48.

DIRECTORS’ DISCRETION TO REGISTER UNCERTIFICATED SHARES

In respect of a share held in uncertificated form the Directors may only register or refuse to register the transfer of such a share in accordance with the Uncertificated Securities Regulations.

 

49.

RETENTION OF SHARE TRANSFER DOCUMENTS BY THE COMPANY

All share transfer documents which are registered may be retained by the Company. Any share transfer document which the Directors refuse to register shall (except in the case of fraud) be returned to the person lodging it when notification of the refusal is given.

 

50.

NO FEE PAYABLE FOR REGISTRATION

No fee shall be charged by the Company in respect of the registration of any transfer or probate or letters of administration or certificate of marriage or death or stop notice or power of attorney or other document relating to or affecting the title to any shares or otherwise for making any entry in the Register affecting the title to any shares.

 

21


TRANSMISSION OF SHARES

 

51.

TRANSMISSION ON DEATH

In the case of the death of a member the survivors or survivor where the deceased was a joint holder, and the executors or administrators of the deceased where he was a sole or only surviving holder, shall be the only persons recognised by the Company as having any title to his interest in his shares. Nothing in this Article shall release the estate of a deceased holder (whether sole or joint) from any liability in respect of any share solely or jointly held by him.

 

52.

NOTICE OF ELECTION FOR REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER

 

52.1

A person who becomes automatically entitled to a share as a result of the death or bankruptcy of a member may:

 

  52.1.1

elect by notice in writing to be registered as the holder of the share; or

 

  52.1.2

transfer the share to some other person;

provided in either case he supplies to the Company such evidence of his entitlement to the share as the Directors may reasonably require.

 

52.2

The provisions of these Articles relating to the right to transfer a share and the registration of transfers of shares apply to the election or transfer provided for in this Article 52 as they would have applied to the person originally entitled to the share before his death or bankruptcy.

 

53.

RIGHTS OF PERSON ENTITLED TO A SHARE

 

53.1

A person who becomes automatically entitled to a share as a result of the death or bankruptcy of a member:

 

  53.1.1

(subject to the provisions of this Article 53) is entitled to receive and may give an effective receipt for any dividends or other moneys payable on the share provided that he supplies to the Company such evidence of his title to the share as the Directors may reasonably require;

 

  53.1.2

is not entitled to receive notice of or attend or vote at general meetings of the Company or to exercise or enjoy any right or privilege conferred by membership of the Company (except the rights given by Article 53.1.1) until he is registered as a holder of the share.

 

53.2

The Directors may at any time give notice requiring any such person to elect either to be registered himself or to transfer the share and, if the notice is not complied with within 60 days of service, the Directors may withhold payment of all dividends and other moneys payable on or in respect of the share until the requirements of the notice have been complied with.

 

22


MEETINGS

 

54.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETINGS

An annual general meeting shall be held in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and at such time and in such place as the Directors determine.

 

55.

GENERAL MEETINGS

All meetings other than annual general meetings shall be called general meetings.

 

56.

POWER TO CALL GENERAL MEETINGS

The Directors may call a general meeting whenever they think fit and shall do so if the Companies Act 2006 so requires. If there are not enough directors within the United Kingdom to form a quorum for a meeting of the Directors, any director or any 2 members of the Company may convene a general meeting in the same manner as nearly as possible as the Directors could have done.

NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS

 

57.

PERIODS OF NOTICE FOR GENERAL MEETINGS AND PERSONS ENTITLED TO NOTICE

 

57.1

An annual general meeting or (save as provided by the Companies Act 2006) any general meeting at which it is proposed to pass a resolution of which special notice has been given to the Company, shall be called by at least 21 clear days’ notice in writing. Any other general meeting shall be called by at least 21 clear days’ notice in writing. Notice of every general meeting shall be given in the manner referred to in this Article 57 to all members or where relevant to those people nominated by such a member under Article 92 to enjoy or exercise nomination rights, entitled under these Articles or the terms of issue of the shares they hold to receive notice and whose names are entered on the Company’s Register at the close of business on a day to be decided by the Directors (but in any case not more than 21 days before the date the notice is given), to the Auditors and to every director.

 

57.2

Where required by these Articles, the accidental omission to give notice or to send a form of proxy with a notice to, or the non-receipt of such notice or form of proxy by, any person entitled to it shall not invalidate any resolutions passed or proceedings at any general meeting.

 

23


57.3

For the purposes of this Article 57 a notice of meeting must be given in accordance with the Companies Act 2006, that is in hard copy form, electronic form or by means of a website.

 

57.4

Electronic Communication

 

  57.4.1

If notice of meeting is sent in electronic form the Company must have complied with all applicable regulatory requirements and the person entitled to receive such notice must have agreed that the notice can be sent to him in that way and not revoked that agreement or, in the case of a company, be deemed to have agreed to receive notice in that way by a provision in the Companies Act 2006; and

 

  57.4.2

the notice must be sent to the address specified by the person entitled to receive such notice or, in the case of notice sent to a company, an address which is deemed to have been specified by any provision of the Companies Act 2006.

 

57.5

Notice of meeting on a website

Provided that the Company has complied with all applicable regulatory requirements the Company must send or supply a notice of meeting by making it available on a website that is maintained by or on behalf of the Company and identifies the Company and where the Company makes that notice of meeting available on a website, the Company must:

 

  57.5.1

comply with the provisions of sections 311A and 340A of the Companies Act 2006;

 

  57.5.2

comply with the provisions of Article 173;

 

  57.5.3

notify persons entitled to receive such notice that the notice of meeting has been published on the website, such notification to state that it concerns a notice of meeting, to specify the place, date and time of the meeting and whether the meeting will be an Annual General Meeting; and

 

  57.5.4

ensure that the notice and the matters required to be made available by section 311A of the Companies Act 2006 are available on the website throughout the period beginning with the first date on which the notice of meeting is given and for the following 2 years.

 

57.6

A notice which is treated as given to a person by virtue of Article 57.3 is treated as given at the same time as the notification referred to in Article 57.5.2.

 

24


58.

CONTENTS OF NOTICE

 

58.1

Every notice calling a general meeting shall:

 

  58.1.1

specify the place, the day and time of the meeting;

 

  58.1.2

state with reasonable prominence that a member entitled to attend and vote or a person nominated pursuant to the Company’s Articles is entitled to appoint a proxy or proxies to attend, speak and vote instead of him and that a proxy need not be a member of the Company;

 

  58.1.3

in the case of an annual general meeting, specify the meeting as such and where notice of such annual general meeting is given more than 6 weeks before the date of the meeting, the notice must include:

 

  58.1.3.1

a statement of the right under section 338 of the Companies Act 2006 to require the company to give notice of a resolution to be moved at the meeting; and

 

  58.1.3.2

a statement of the right under section 338A of the Companies Act 2006 to require the Company to include a matter in the business to be dealt with at the meeting;

 

  58.1.4

in the case of any general meeting at which directors are retiring and offering themselves for re-election in accordance with Articles 112 and 113, specify the names of the directors who are offering themselves for re-election;

 

  58.1.5

state the general nature of the business to be dealt with at the meeting, including any ordinary business and if any resolution is to be proposed as a special resolution contain a statement to that effect and the text of the resolution;

 

  58.1.6

include the address of the website on which the information required by section 311A Companies Act 2006 is published;

 

  58.1.7

state the procedures with which members must comply in order to be able to attend and vote at the meeting (including the date by which they must comply);

 

  58.1.8

provide details of any forms to be used for the appointment of a proxy;

 

  58.1.9

state the procedures for voting by electronic means; and

 

  58.1.10

state that a member has the right to ask questions at the meeting in accordance with section 319A Companies Act 2006.

 

25


58.2

Every notice calling a meeting of any class of members of the Company shall:

 

  58.2.1

specify the place, the day and time of the meeting;

 

  58.2.2

state with reasonable prominence that a member entitled to attend and vote or a person nominated pursuant to the Company’s Articles is entitled to appoint a proxy or proxies to attend, speak and vote instead of him and that a proxy need not be a member of the Company;

 

  58.2.3

state the general nature of the business to be dealt with at the meeting and if any resolution is to be proposed as a special resolution a statement to that effect and the text of the resolution.

 

58.3

In the case of any general meeting the notice must contain a statement that a member is not entitled to attend and vote unless his name is entered on the Register at a time specified in the notice of meeting but which is not more than 48 hours before the time fixed for the meeting.

 

58.4

In calculating the period mentioned in Article 58.3 no account shall be taken of any part of a day that is not a working day.

 

59.

MEANING OF ORDINARY BUSINESS

 

59.1

Ordinary business shall mean business transacted at an annual general meeting which is stated to be “ordinary business” and which includes the following:

 

  59.1.1

declaring dividends;

 

  59.1.2

receiving and adopting the annual accounts of the Company, the reports of the Directors and the Auditors and other documents required by law to be attached or annexed or to be comprised in the accounts and reports;

 

  59.1.3

appointing the Auditors (except when special notice of the resolution for their appointment is required by the Companies Act 2006) and fixing the remuneration of the Auditors or determining the manner in which such remuneration is to be fixed;

 

  59.1.4

appointing or re-appointing directors to fill vacancies arising at the meeting either on retirement by rotation or under Article 117 or otherwise;

 

  59.1.5

the voting of fees to the Directors; and

 

  59.1.6

approving the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

 

26


60.

QUESTIONS AT GENERAL MEETINGS

 

60.1

At any general meeting the Company must cause to be answered any question relating to the business being dealt with at the meeting put by a member attending the meeting.

 

60.2

The Company does not need to give an answer to any such question if;

 

  60.2.1

to do so would interfere unduly with the preparation for the meeting or would involve the disclosure of confidential information;

 

  60.2.2

if the answer has already been given on a website in the form of an answer to a question; or

 

  60.2.3

it is undesirable in the interests of the Company or the good order of the meeting that the question be answered.

 

61.

CIRCULATION OF RESOLUTIONS AND OTHER MATTERS ON REQUISITION OF MEMBERS

 

61.1

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, the Directors shall on the requisition of members and, where relevant, those entitled under section 153 of the Companies Act 2006, “the requisitionists”:

 

  61.1.1

give to the members entitled to receive notice of the next annual general meeting, notice of any resolution which may properly be moved and is intended to be moved at that meeting and of any matter that may properly be included in the business of that meeting;

 

  61.1.2

circulate to the members entitled to have notice of any general meeting, any statement of not more than one thousand words with respect to a matter referred to in any proposed resolution or other business to be dealt with at that meeting.

 

61.2

Members and requisitionists who requisition the Company to circulate the resolution or statement or any other matter to be included in the business of the meeting must meet the expenses of circulation (“the costs”) unless either:

 

  61.2.1

in the case of an annual general meeting the request to circulate the resolution or statement or any matter to be included in the business of the meeting is received by the Company before the end of the Company’s financial year preceding the meeting; or

 

  61.2.2

the members have resolved that the Company will meet the costs.

In cases where the members and requisitionists have to meet the costs, the Company will, unless it has otherwise resolved, not be bound to circulate the

 

27


resolution or statement or matter to be included in the business of the meeting unless there is deposited with it or tendered to it a sum or sums reasonably sufficient to meet the costs. The costs must, in the case of the resolution or matter to be included in the business of the meeting, be deposited or tendered not later than 6 weeks before the date of the annual general meeting to which the request relates or, if later, the time at which the notice of the meeting is given or, in the case of the statement, be deposited or tendered not later than one week before the date of the meeting to which it relates.

PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS

 

62.

QUORUM

No business shall be transacted at any general meeting unless a quorum is present. Subject to the provisions of Article 63 two members present in person or by proxy (or, being a corporation, present by a representative duly appointed under Article 94) and entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted shall be a quorum.

 

63.

ADJOURNMENT IF QUORUM NOT PRESENT

 

63.1

If within 15 minutes from the time appointed for the holding of a general meeting (or such longer time as the chairman of the meeting may decide) a quorum is not present, the meeting, if convened on the requisition of members, shall be dissolved. In any other case it shall be adjourned to a day (at least 10 clear days after the meeting), time and place decided by the chairman. Notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given in accordance with Article 65.

 

63.2

If at an adjourned meeting a quorum as defined in Article 62 is not present within 15 minutes from the time appointed for holding the meeting, the member or members present in person or by proxy or (in the case of a corporation) by a representative and entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted shall be a quorum and shall have power to decide upon all matters which could properly have been disposed of at the meeting from which the adjournment took place.

 

64.

GENERAL POWER OF ADJOURNMENT

 

64.1

The chairman may at any time without the consent of the meeting adjourn any meeting (whether or not it has commenced or a quorum is present) to another time or place where it appears to him that:

 

  64.1.1

the members wishing to attend cannot be conveniently accommodated in the place appointed for the meeting; or

 

  64.1.2

the conduct of persons present prevents or is likely to prevent the orderly continuation of business; or

 

  64.1.3

an adjournment is otherwise necessary so that the business of the meeting may be properly conducted.

 

28


64.2

Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 64.1 the chairman of the meeting may with the consent of any general meeting at which a quorum is present (and shall if so directed by the meeting) adjourn the meeting from time to time (or indefinitely) and from place to place.

 

64.3

No business shall be transacted at any adjourned meeting (whether adjourned for lack of quorum or otherwise) except business that might properly have been transacted at the meeting from which the adjournment took place and the general nature of which was stated in the notice of meeting from which the adjournment took place. Where a meeting is adjourned indefinitely, the time and place for the adjourned meeting shall be fixed by the Directors.

 

65.

NOTICE OF ADJOURNED MEETING

When a meeting is adjourned for 30 days or more or indefinitely, not less than 7 days’ notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given. When a meeting is adjourned pursuant to Article 63 the shorter notice required by this Article 65 can only be given if the business to be dealt with at the adjourned meeting was set out in the original notice of meeting and the adjourned meeting is to be held at least 10 days after the original meeting.

 

65.1

Notice of the adjourned meeting must be given in like manner as in the case of the original meeting .

 

65.2

If a meeting is adjourned pursuant to Article 63 the notice shall state that the quorum which applies to the adjourned meeting is the quorum specified by Article 63.

 

66.

CHAIRMAN OF MEETING

The chairman (if any) of the Directors, failing whom the deputy chairman (if any) of the Directors, shall preside as chairman at each general meeting. If there is no such chairman or deputy chairman, or if at any meeting neither are present within 5 minutes after the time appointed for holding the meeting or are present but are not willing to act, the directors present shall choose one of their number to be chairman of the meeting. If there is no director present or if all the directors present fail to agree which of their number should take the chair or if each of them declines to take the chair, the members present and entitled to vote shall (whether or not they constitute a quorum) choose one of their number to be chairman of the meeting.

 

29


67.

SECURITY PROCEDURES

 

67.1

In their absolute discretion and notwithstanding anything in the notice of general meeting the Directors may, in respect of members or their proxies or their corporate representatives who wish to attend any general meeting:

 

  67.1.1

direct that the members or proxies or representatives submit to searches;

 

  67.1.2

direct that the members or proxies comply with any security arrangements or restrictions imposed by the Directors;

 

  67.1.3

arrange for members or proxies or representatives to attend and participate simultaneously in the meeting at places other than the one specified in the notice of meeting as the place where the meeting will take place (“Principal Place”);

 

  67.1.4

fix the level of attendance at the Principal Place and any other places provided that if members or proxies or representatives are excluded from the Principal Place they are able to attend the meeting at one of the other places. (For the purpose of these Articles any such meeting will be treated as being held at the Principal Place); and

 

  67.1.5

make arrangements for the issue of tickets or impose a random means of selection or by any other means they think appropriate, to facilitate the organisation and administration of a general meeting. The Directors may vary these arrangements or make new arrangements in their place.

 

67.2

The rights of members or proxies or representatives to attend a meeting at the Principal Place is subject to any arrangements in force, whether contained in the notice of that meeting and said to apply to that meeting, or notified to the members after the notice of meeting has been provided.

 

68.

VOTING AND DEMANDS FOR A POLL

 

68.1

At any general meeting a resolution put to the vote of the meeting shall be decided on a show of hands unless a poll is (before or on the declaration of the result of the show of hands) demanded by the chairman of the meeting or by those members entitled under the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 to demand a poll.

 

68.2

For the purposes of this Article 68, a demand by a proxy under Article 82 shall be deemed to be a demand by the person appointing the proxy.

 

30


68.3

A demand for a poll may be withdrawn with the consent of the chairman of the meeting. Any demand so withdrawn shall not be taken to have invalidated any result of a show of hands made before the demand was made.

 

68.4

On a poll, votes may be given in person or by proxy (or, being a corporation, present by a duly appointed representative) and a person entitled to more than one vote need not use all his votes or cast all the votes he uses in the same way.

 

69.

DECLARATION OF THE RESULT OF VOTING

Unless a poll is demanded, a declaration by the chairman of the meeting that a resolution has been carried, or carried unanimously or by a particular majority, or lost, or not carried by a particular majority, which is entered in the minute book will be conclusive evidence of that fact.

 

70.

CONDUCT OF A POLL

If a poll is demanded, the chairman of the meeting may:

 

70.1

decide the manner in which it is taken (including the use of a ballot or voting papers or tickets);

 

70.2

appoint scrutineers (and if directed to do so by the meeting he must appoint scrutineers); and

 

70.3

fix the day, time and place of an adjourned meeting at which the result of the poll will be declared.

 

71.

TIME FOR TAKING A POLL

A poll demanded by the chairman of a general meeting or on a question of adjournment shall be taken immediately. A poll demanded on any other question shall be taken either immediately or at such subsequent time (not being more than 30 days from the date of the meeting) and place as the chairman of the meeting may direct. No notice need be given of a poll not taken immediately provided that the time and place at which it is to be taken was announced at the meeting at which it was demanded. The demand for a poll shall not prevent the meeting continuing in order to transact any business other than the question on which the poll has been demanded.

 

31


72.

RESULTS OF A POLL

 

72.1

Where a poll is taken at any general meeting of the Company, the Company must publish as soon as reasonably practicable and in any case at the latest by the end of 16 days beginning with the day of the meeting or if later the end of the first working day after the day on which the results of the poll are declared on a website which identifies the Company and is maintained by or on behalf of the Company:

 

  77.1.1

the date of the meeting;

 

  77.1.2

the text of the resolution or, as the case may be a description of the subject matter of the poll;

 

  77.1.3

the number of votes validly cast;

 

  77.1.4

the proportion of the Company’s issued share capital (determined at the time at which the right to vote is determined under section 360B(2)) of the Companies Act 2006 represented by those votes;

 

  77.1.5

the number of votes cast in favour;

 

  77.1.6

the number of votes cast against; and

 

  77.1.7

the number of abstentions (if counted).

 

72.2

The Company must keep the information available for a period of two years beginning with the date on which it is first made available on the website.

 

72.3

Members entitled by section 342 of the Companies Act 2006 and those to whom rights are given by section 153 of the Companies Act 2006 may require the Directors to obtain an independent report on any poll taken, or to be taken, at a general meeting of the Company.

 

73.

AMENDMENTS TO RESOLUTIONS

Amendments can be proposed to any ordinary resolution under consideration if the chairman decides that the amendment is appropriate for consideration by the meeting. If the amendment is in good faith ruled out of order by the chairman, any error in that ruling shall not invalidate the resolution. In the case of a special resolution, no amendments other than amendments to correct an obvious error may be proposed.

VOTING RIGHTS

 

74.

VOTING RIGHTS OF MEMBERS

 

74.1

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and any restrictions imposed by these Articles and any rights or restrictions attached to any class of shares in the capital of the Company, on a resolution, on a show of hands;

 

  74.1.1

every member present in person shall have one vote;

 

32


  74.1.2

every proxy present who has been duly appointed by one or more members entitled to vote on the resolution has one vote unless the proxy has been appointed by more than one member entitled to vote on the resolution in which case:

 

  74.1.2.1

where the proxy has been instructed by one or more of such members to vote for the resolution and by one or more of such members to vote against the resolution the proxy has one vote for and one vote against the resolution;

 

  74.1.2.2

where the proxy has been instructed by one or more of such members as to how he should vote on the resolution and all those instructions are to vote the same way , and one or more other members have given the proxy discretion as to how to vote , he may cast one vote “for” or one vote “against” in accordance with those instructions and may cast a second discretionary vote the other way;

 

  74.1.3

each person authorised by a corporation to exercise voting powers on behalf of the corporation is entitled to exercise the same voting powers as the corporation would be entitled to. Where a corporation authorises more than one person, this is subject to Articles 74.1.3.1 and 74.1.3.2:

 

  74.1.3.1

if more than one person authorised by the same corporation purport to exercise the power to vote on a show of hands in respect of the same shares in the Company and exercise the power in the same way as each other, the power is treated as exercised in that way;

 

  74.1.3.2

if more than one person authorised by the same corporation purport to exercise the power to vote on a show of hands in respect of the same shares in the Company and do not exercise the power in the same way as each other, the power is treated as not exercised.

 

74.2

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and any restrictions imposed by these Articles and any rights or restrictions attached to any class of shares in the capital of the Company, on a vote on a resolution on a poll every member present in person or by proxy or (being a corporation) present by a duly appointed representative shall have one vote for every ordinary share in the capital of the Company held by him or his appointor and if entitled to more than one vote need not, if he votes, use all his votes or cast all his votes he uses in the same way.

 

33


75.

VOTING RIGHTS OF PERSONS UNDER DISABILITY

If a court having jurisdiction (whether in the United Kingdom or elsewhere) in matters concerning mental disorder has made an order appointing a person to act on behalf of a member, that person may vote in person or by proxy, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, on behalf of the member. The right to vote is only exercisable if evidence, satisfactory to the Directors, of the authority of the person claiming to exercise the right to vote is deposited at the Transfer Office not less than 48 hours before the time appointed for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting at which the right to vote is to be exercised. In calculating the time period in this Article 75 no account shall be taken of any part of a day that is not a working day.

 

76.

VOTING RIGHTS OF JOINT HOLDERS

In the case of joint holders of a share the vote of the person whose name appears before the names of the other joint holder(s) on the Register in respect of the share and who tenders a vote, whether in person or by proxy, shall be accepted to the exclusion of the votes of the other joint holders.

 

77.

OBJECTIONS TO AND ERRORS IN VOTING

 

77.1

Any objections raised as to the qualification of any voter, or any error whereby votes have been counted which ought not to have been counted or which might have been rejected, or whereby any votes have not been counted which ought to have been counted, shall not vitiate the decision of a meeting or adjourned meeting on any resolution or any poll unless:

 

  77.1.1

the objection or error is raised or pointed out at the meeting or adjourned meeting in question; and

 

  77.1.2

the chairman decides that the same may have affected the decision of the meeting or the poll.

 

77.2

Any such objection or error shall be referred to the chairman of the meeting, unless the objection or error is in connection with a resolution for the election, re-election or removal of the chairman of the meeting whether as chairman or as a director of the Company. The decision of the chairman will be final and conclusive.

 

78.

PROXY VOTES

A member may appoint more than one proxy to attend and to speak and vote on the same occasion, provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise the rights attached to a different share or shares held by the member. A proxy must vote in accordance with any instructions given by the member by whom the proxy is appointed.

 

34


79.

APPOINTMENT OF PROXIES

 

79.1

The appointment of a proxy (“proxy appointment”) must be in writing and can be in any form that the Directors accept. A proxy need not be a member of the Company.

 

79.2

Subject to Article 80, in the case of an individual appointing a proxy, the proxy appointment must be given by the appointor or his attorney who is authorised in writing to do so. In the case of a corporation the proxy appointment must be given under its common seal or otherwise executed by it in accordance with the Statutes or signed on its behalf by an attorney or a duly authorised officer of the corporation. The Directors may, but are not bound to, require reasonable evidence of the authority of any such attorney or officer. Signatures need not be witnessed.

 

79.3

If the Directors in their discretion decide, and provided the Company complies with all applicable regulatory requirements a proxy appointment may be sent in electronic form.

 

79.4

If more than one proxy is appointed in accordance with this Article 79 in respect of a different share or shares held by a member but the proxy appointment does not specify to which share or shares the appointment or appointments relate or the total number of shares in respect of which appointments are made exceeds the total holding of the member the Directors in their absolute discretion shall decide which of the proxies so appointed shall be entitled to attend and vote and be counted in the quorum at any general meeting of the Company.

 

80.

DEPOSIT OF PROXY

 

80.1

A proxy appointment that is not being sent in electronic form must be deposited at the place specified either in, or by way of note to, the notice convening the meeting or in the proxy appointment, or if no place is specified, at the Transfer Office not less than 48 hours before the time of the meeting or adjourned meeting at which the person named in the proxy form proposes to vote or, in the case of a poll taken more than 48 hours after it is demanded, not less than 24 hours before the poll is taken at which the proxy appointment is to be used.

 

80.2

A proxy appointment which is being sent in electronic form must be received at an address specified by the Company for the purpose of receiving communications in electronic form:

 

  80.2.1

in (or by way of a note to) the notice convening the meeting; or

 

35


  80.2.2

in any form of proxy appointment sent out by the Company; or

 

  80.2.3

in any invitation contained in an electronic form to appoint a proxy issued by the Company;

in each case not less than 48 hours before the time of the meeting or adjourned meeting at which the person named in the proxy form proposes to vote or in the case of a poll taken not more than 48 hours after it is demanded, not less than 24 hours before the poll is taken at which the proxy appointment is to be used.

 

80.3

In the case of a poll, where the poll is not taken during or immediately following the meeting at which it was demanded, but is taken less than 48 hours after it is demanded, the proxy appointment must (unless already deposited or received in accordance with Article 80.1 or 80.2) be delivered at the meeting at which the poll was demanded either to the chairman of such meeting or to the Secretary or to any one of the directors.

 

80.4

In calculating the time periods in Articles 80.1, 80.2 and 80.3 no account shall be taken of any part of a day that is not a working day.

 

80.5

If a proxy appointment is not deposited, delivered or received in accordance with this Article 80 it will be invalid and if two or more apparently valid forms of proxy are deposited in respect of the same share the one which was deposited last in accordance with this Article 80 (regardless of its date or the date it was executed) will be the only one which is acceptable to the Directors in accordance with Article 79.

 

80.6

Unless a proxy appointment says otherwise, if a proxy appointment relates to more than one meeting or adjournment and is deposited, delivered or received in accordance with this Article 80, it does not need to be deposited, delivered to or received at any subsequent meeting and is valid both for any adjourned meeting and any poll demanded at that adjourned meeting.

 

80.7

The deposit, delivery or receipt of a proxy appointment shall not prevent a member who is entitled to attend and vote from attending and voting in person or on a poll at the meeting or any adjourned meeting.

 

80.8

The provisions of this Article 80 apply to the deposit, delivery or receipt of any power of attorney or authority under which the proxy appointment is given, or to a duly certified copy of the power of attorney or authority, or, in the case of a power of attorney or authority executed outside the United Kingdom to a notarially authenticated copy, as they do to the proxy appointment.

 

36


81.

TIME LIMIT ON VALIDITY OF PROXY

A proxy appointment will only remain valid for 12 months from the date stated in it as the date of its execution or, if undated, the date of its receipt by the Company. The only exception to this is where an adjourned meeting is held or a poll demanded at a meeting or adjourned meeting after the 12 months’ period has expired if the original meeting was held or demand for a poll was made within that period. If during the 12 months period the authority of a person to act as proxy is terminated the termination must be notified to the Company in writing.

 

82.

AUTHORITY CONFERRED BY PROXY

A proxy appointment, including one sent in electronic form, gives authority for the proxy to demand or join in demanding a poll and generally to act at the meeting for the member making the appointment.

 

83.

POWER TO APPOINT ATTORNEY

Any member residing out of or absent from the United Kingdom may execute a power of attorney, either before or after leaving the United Kingdom, appointing any person to be his attorney either for the purpose of voting at any meeting or to give a general power extending to all meetings at which the member is entitled to vote. Every such power or a duly certified copy or (if such power was executed outside the United Kingdom) a notarially authenticated copy of such power shall be produced at the Transfer Office and left there for at least 48 hours before being acted upon.

 

84.

VALIDITY OF VOTES CAST BY PROXY OR POWER OF ATTORNEY

 

84.1

A vote given in accordance with the terms of a proxy appointment or power of attorney will be valid notwithstanding:

 

  84.1.1

the prior death or insanity of the person who appointed the proxy or attorney;

 

  84.1.2

the proxy appointment or power of attorney having been revoked;

 

  84.1.3

the authority of the person appointed as proxy or attorney having been revoked; or

 

  84.1.4

a transfer of the share in respect of which the vote is given.

The above provisions will not apply if notice in writing of the death, insanity, revocation or transfer has in the case of a notice not in electronic form been deposited at the Transfer Office (or in the case of a proxy form at any other place specified for depositing the proxy form) , or in the case of a notice in

 

37


electronic form received at an address specified by the Company for the purpose of receiving such communications in electronic form in either case not less than 48 hours before the date of the meeting, or not less than 24 hours before the date fixed for the taking of the poll at which the proxy is to be used.

 

84.2

The Company shall be under no obligation to check whether a person appointed as a proxy for one or more members has voted in accordance with the instructions of such member or members and the vote or votes of such proxy shall not be invalidated should any such instructions not have been followed.

 

84.3

In calculating the time periods for the purposes of this Article 84, no account shall be taken of any part of a day that is not a working day.

DISENFRANCHISEMENT

 

85.

CIRCUMSTANCES IN WHICH SHARES DISENFRANCHISED

 

85.1

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, no holder of a share in the Company shall, unless the Directors otherwise determine (any such determination being for such period and subject to such terms and conditions (if any) as the Directors may, in their absolute discretion, decide), be entitled (save as proxy for another member) to be present or vote at a general meeting either personally or by proxy or to exercise any other right in relation to meetings of the Company in respect of either the share he holds or (with effect from allotment) of any additional shares allotted in respect of the share which is the subject of a notice pursuant to this Article 85 (including without limitation any share allotted under a rights issue or capitalisation issue) (together “shares”) if:

 

  85.1.1

any call or other sum presently payable by him to the Company in respect of the shares remains unpaid; or

 

  85.1.2

he or any other person who appears to be interested in the shares has been served, under section 793 of this Companies Act 2006 or any other provision of the Statutes concerning the disclosure of interests in voting shares, with a notice which:

 

  85.1.2.1

lawfully requires the provision of information regarding the shares to the Company within the period specified in such notice (being not less than 14 days from the date of service of such notice); and

 

  85.1.2.2

contains a warning of the consequences under this Article 85 and under the provisions of Articles 46.1.2 and 149.1 of failing to comply with such notice; and

 

38


(whether or not he is aware of the identity of the beneficial owner(s) of the share) he or such other person is in default in complying with such notice; or

 

  85.1.3

he has been duly served with a notice which:

 

  85.1.3.1

requires him to provide or to procure that there is provided to the Company within the period specified in the notice (being not less than 14 days from the service of notice), a statement in writing authenticated by him or any other person or persons stating that he (if the statement is authenticated by him) or (as the case may be) the other person or persons who has/have authenticated the statement is/are the beneficial owner(s) of the shares and providing any additional information regarding the shares required by Article 88; and

 

  85.1.3.2

contains a warning of the consequences under this Article 85 of failing to comply with such notice and

(whether or not he is aware of the identity of the beneficial owner(s) of the share) he is in default in complying with such notice.

 

85.2

For the purposes of this Article 85 a person shall be treated as appearing to be interested in a share:

 

  85.2.1

where the member holding the share has informed the Company that he is, or may be, so interested; or

 

  85.2.2

where the person has given the Company a notification pursuant to Article 85.1.2 which fails to establish the identity of the person or persons interested in such share and (after taking into account the notification and any other relevant information given to them) the Directors know or have reasonable cause to believe that the person in question is or may be interested in such share. References to “persons interested in shares” and to “interests in shares” respectively shall be construed as they are for the purposes of section 793 of the Companies Act 2006.

 

85.3

For the purposes of this Article 85, a person shall be deemed to be in default in complying with a notice referred to in this Article if he fails or refuses to give all the information required by the notice to the satisfaction of the Directors or if he gives information which he knows to be false or if he recklessly gives information which is false.

 

39


86.

DISENFRANCHISEMENT MAY APPLY TO ONLY PART OF A MEMBER’S HOLDING

Where a person holds more than one share in the Company or more than one share of a particular class, any notice given pursuant to Article 85 may relate either to all such shares or to such lesser number of them as is described or stated in the notice.

 

87.

SIGNATURE OF STATEMENTS ON BEHALF OF BODY CORPORATE

Any statement provided to the Company pursuant to Article 85 shall, for the purposes of that Article, be deemed to have been signed by a body corporate if signed by a duly authorised officer who is described in the statement as signing it on behalf of that body corporate.

 

88.

RIGHT TO REQUIRE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Any notice served on the holder of a share pursuant to Article 85.1.3 may require that, where the statement to be provided to the Company reveals that the beneficial owner of that share is a body corporate (“corporate owner”), the statement shall also provide the following information:

 

88.1

whether any other body corporate is a holding company (within the meaning of section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006) or a parent company (within the meaning of section 1162 and 1173 of the Companies Act 2006) of the corporate owner and, if so, the name and address of each such holding or parent company; and

 

88.2

whether any body corporate or other person (other than any such holding or parent company) is entitled to exercise or control the exercise of one-third or more of the voting power at general meetings of the corporate owner and, if so, the name and address of each such person.

 

89.

WHEN DISENFRANCHISEMENT CEASES TO APPLY

 

89.1

Where the disenfranchisement provisions of Article 85 apply to a particular share, they shall cease to apply to that share:

 

  89.1.1

when the call or such other sum referred to in Article 85.1.1 has been paid in respect of that share and received by the Company; or

 

  89.1.2

when the information and/or statement requested in respect of that share by the notice(s) referred to in Articles 85.1.2 and/or 85.1.3 have been provided to the Company to the satisfaction of the Directors; or

 

40


  89.1.3

from the date as on and from which the Directors determine (pursuant to Article 85) that such provisions shall cease to apply to that share; or

 

  89.1.4

when a period of 7 days has expired which commences on the date the Company receives a notice that the share has been sold either through a recognised investment exchange or overseas exchange, or as a result of an acceptance of a takeover offer.

 

89.2

The disenfranchisement provisions will cease to apply when whichever of the matters referred to in Articles 89.1.2 to 89.1.4 occurs first.

 

90.

REGISTRATION OF INFORMATION RECEIVED

For the purposes of section 808 of the Companies Act 2006 any information received by the Company following the service of a notice on a member pursuant to Article 85.1.2 is deemed to have been received by the Company as though the member had been required to provide the information under section 793 of the Companies Act 2006.

 

91.

CANCELLATION OF NOTICES

Any notice issued under Articles 85.1.2 or 85.1.3 may be cancelled by the Company at any time.

EXERCISE OF MEMBERS’ RIGHTS

 

92.

NOMINATION NOTICES

 

92.1

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 a member may send to the Company notice in writing (a “nomination notice”) that another person or persons is entitled to enjoy or exercise the following rights in respect of the shares held by such member which are the subject of the notice:

 

  92.1.1

the right to require the Directors to call a general meeting of the Company;

 

  92.1.2

the right to receive a copy of all communications that the Company sends to its members generally or to any class of its members (which includes the member making the nomination) including a copy of notice of any general meeting of the Company and the Company’s annual accounts and reports for each financial year;

 

  92.1.3

the right to require circulation of a statement and resolution or any matter to be included in the business of a meeting in accordance with Article 61;

 

41


  92.1.4

the right to appoint a proxy to attend and speak and vote at any general meeting of the Company; and

 

  92.1.5

the right to ask any questions at any general meeting of the Company.

 

92.2

The rights specified above are to be exercised or enjoyed only by the person nominated and not by the member unless and until the nomination ceases to have effect in accordance with these Articles.

 

92.3

A nomination will cease to have effect on the death or bankruptcy of the member or when he is disenfranchised in accordance with Article 85 or when the member ceases to hold the shares to which the nomination relate (by transfer, transmission or otherwise) and if relevant in the circumstances referred to in the nomination notice.

 

92.4

The Company may prescribe the form and content of nomination notices. Unless the Company prescribes otherwise, a nomination notice must:

 

  92.4.1

state whether it relates to all the shares which the member concerned holds, or only some of them (and, if so, to which shares it relates);

 

  92.4.2

state the name and address of the person nominated;

 

  92.4.3

specify whether the Company is to send communications in hard copy to the person nominated and include any further information which the Company will need in order to send such communications;

 

  92.4.4

specify whether the person nominated is to be entitled to enjoy or exercise all of the rights set out in Article 92.1 in relation to the Company, and, if not, which rights the person nominated is to be entitled to enjoy or exercise;

 

  92.4.5

specify the date from which the nomination notice is to take effect;

 

  92.4.6

specify when, other than in the circumstances set out in Article 92.3, the nomination notice is to cease to have effect; and

 

  92.4.7

be executed by or on behalf of the member and the person or persons nominated.

 

93.

EFFECT OF NOMINATION NOTICES

 

93.1

Subject to these Articles of Association if the Company receives a nomination notice, the Company must give effect to that notice in accordance with its terms.

 

93.2

A nomination notice ceases to have effect in accordance with these Articles and, if relevant, its terms.

 

42


93.3

The Company must not give effect to a nomination notice to the extent that it is expressed to take effect before the date on which it is received by the Company.

 

93.4

If the Company receives a document which purports to be a nomination notice but which does not contain the information required by Article 92.4 or which is not given in the form prescribed by the Company, the Company:

 

  93.4.1

may not give effect to it; and

 

  93.4.2

may notify the registered member that it is defective (and in what respect it is defective) and that the Company cannot give effect to it in its present form.

 

94.

REPRESENTATION OF CORPORATE MEMBERS

 

94.1

Any corporation that is a member of the Company may, by resolution of its directors or other governing body, authorise any person or persons to act as its representative(s) at any meeting of the Company or of any class of members. The representative(s) will be entitled to exercise the same powers on behalf of the corporation as if each such representative had been an individual shareholder. The Directors may, but shall not be bound to, require evidence of the authority of any person purporting to act as the representative of any such corporation.

 

94.2

The Company shall be under no obligation to check whether any person or persons authorised to act as the representative(s) of a corporation that is a member of the Company has voted in accordance with the instructions of such member and the vote or votes of such representative (s) shall not be invalidated should any such instructions not have been followed.

DIRECTORS

 

95.

NUMBER OF DIRECTORS

Subject to the provisions of Article 115 the Company must have not less than 3 and not more than 12 directors.

 

96.

SHARE QUALIFICATION AND RIGHTS CONCERNING GENERAL MEETING

A director need not be a shareholder of the Company but a director who is not a shareholder of the Company is entitled to receive notice of and to attend and speak at all general and class meetings of the Company.

 

43


97.

FEES OF NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

Fees may be paid out of the funds of the Company to directors who are not managing or executive directors at such rates as the Directors may from time to time determine.

 

98.

REIMBURSEMENT OF EXPENSES

The directors (including alternate directors) are entitled to be paid out of Company funds all their travelling, hotel, and other expenses properly incurred by them respectively in and about the business of the Company, including their expenses of travelling to and from Directors’ meetings, committee meetings or general meetings.

 

99.

PAYMENT OF ADDITIONAL REMUNERATION IN SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES

Any director who devotes special attention to the business of the Company, or otherwise performs services which in the opinion of the Directors are outside the scope of the ordinary duties of a director, may be paid additional remuneration to be determined by the Directors or any committee appointed by the Directors.

 

100.

A DIRECTOR’S INTERESTS IN CONTRACTS WITH THE COMPANY

 

100.1

A director may hold any other office or employment with the Company (other than the office of auditor) in conjunction with his office of director for such period and on such terms as the Directors may determine.

 

100.2

Subject to the provisions of the Statutes, a director or intending director may enter into any contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal with the Company relating to the tenure of any other office or employment referred to in Article 100.1.

 

100.3

Any contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal entered into pursuant to Article 100.2 or authorised by the Directors under Article 102 cannot be avoided and a director is not liable to account to the Company for any benefit realised from any such contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal by reason of either holding office as a director or because of the fiduciary relationship established by that office if the director has declared his interest in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

 

101.

RESTRICTIONS ON A DIRECTOR’S POWER TO VOTE WHERE HE HAS AN INTEREST

 

101.1

Save as provided in this Article 101, or by the terms of any authorisation given by the Directors under Article 102 a director shall not vote as a director in respect of any contract, transaction or arrangement or proposed contract,

 

44


  transaction or arrangement or any other proposal in which he has any interest which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company as defined in Article 102 (other than an interest in shares or debentures or other securities of or otherwise in or through the Company). If he does vote his vote shall not be counted. A director shall not be counted in the quorum present at the meeting in relation to any resolution of the Directors or of a committee of the Directors on which he is debarred from voting.

 

101.2

For the purposes of Article 102.1 interests of a person connected with the director are aggregated with the director’s interest but interests in shares or debentures or other securities of or connected with the Company are to be disregarded.

 

101.3

Provided that a director has no other interest save for that referred to in this Article 101 he shall be entitled to vote as a director and be counted in the quorum in respect of any resolution of the Directors or of a committee of the Directors relating to any of the following matters:

 

  101.3.1

the giving of any security, guarantee or indemnity in respect of money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of or for the benefit of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings; or

 

  101.3.2

the giving of any security, guarantee or indemnity in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings for which the director himself has assumed responsibility in whole or in part under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security; or

 

  101.3.3

the granting of any indemnity or provision of funding pursuant to Article 190 unless the terms of such arrangement confer upon such director a benefit not generally available to any other director; or

 

  101.3.4

an offer of shares or debentures or other securities of or by the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings for subscription or purchase in which offer he is or is to be or may be entitled to participate as a holder of securities or as an underwriter or sub-underwriter; or

 

  101.3.5

any matters involving or relating to any other company in which he or any person connected with him has a direct or indirect interest (whether as an officer or shareholder or otherwise), provided that he and any persons connected with him are not to his knowledge the holder (otherwise than as a nominee for the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings) of or beneficially interested in one per cent. or more of any class of the equity share capital of such company (or of any third company through which his interest is derived) or of the

 

45


  voting rights available to members of the relevant company (any such interest being deemed for the purpose of this Article to be a material interest in all circumstances); or

 

  101.3.6

an arrangement for the benefit of the employees of the Company or any of its subsidiary undertakings which does not award him any privilege or benefit not generally awarded to the employees to whom the arrangement relates; or

 

  101.3.7

the purchase and/or maintenance of any insurance policy for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons including directors.

 

101.4

A director shall not vote as a director or be counted in the quorum on any resolution concerning his own appointment as the holder of any office or employment with the Company or any company in which the Company is interested including fixing or varying the terms, or the termination of, his appointment.

 

101.5

Where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment (including fixing or varying the terms of appointment) of 2 or more directors to offices or employment with the Company or any company in which the Company is interested, such proposals may be divided and considered in relation to each director separately and in such cases each of the directors concerned (if not debarred from voting under the proviso to Article 101.3.5) shall be entitled to vote (and be counted in the quorum) in respect of each resolution except that concerning his own appointment.

 

101.6

If any question arises at any meeting as to the materiality of a director’s interest or the entitlement of any director to vote and the director does not voluntarily agree to abstain from voting, the question shall be referred to the chairman of the meeting and his ruling in relation to any director (other than himself) will be final and conclusive unless the nature or extent of the director’s interests has not been fairly disclosed. If any such question arises in respect of the chairman, it shall be determined by the Directors (other than the chairman). The Directors’ resolution will be final and conclusive unless the nature or extent of the chairman’s interest has not been fairly disclosed.

 

102.

DIRECTORS’ AUTHORISATION OF SITUATIONS IN WHICH A DIRECTOR HAS AN INTEREST

 

102.1

The Directors may, subject to the provisions of this Article 102 and Article 103, at any time authorise a director to be involved in a situation in which the director has or may have a direct or indirect interest which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company (“a conflict of interest”) provided that:

 

  102.1.1

in the case of a proposed appointment of a person as a director, the Directors authorise the conflict of interest before or at the time the director is appointed to office;

 

46


  102.1.2

in the case of any other director the Directors authorise the conflict of interest at the time the conflict is declared to them in accordance with Article 103;

 

  102.1.3

the director subject to the conflict of interest or any other interested director shall not vote and shall not be counted in the quorum in respect of the authorisation given under this Article 102 and if he or any other interested director does vote, those votes shall not be counted;

 

  102.1.4

the Directors may in their absolute discretion impose such terms or conditions on the grant of the authorisation as they think fit and in doing so the Directors will act in such a way in good faith they consider will be most likely to promote the success of the Company;

 

  102.1.5

a director will not be in breach of his duty under sections 172,174 and 175 of the Companies Act 2006 or the authorisation given by this Article 102 by reason only that he receives confidential information from a third party relating to the conflict of interest which has been authorised by this Article 102 and either fails to disclose it to the Directors or fails to use it in relation to the Company’s affairs and neither will he be in breach of his duty under the said section 175 for anything done or omitted to be done by him in accordance with the provisions of Articles 100 and 101; and

 

  102.1.6

where approval to a transaction which falls within Chapter 4 of Part 10 of the Companies Act 2006 is given by members in accordance with that Chapter further authorisation for that transaction by the Directors under this Article 102 is not necessary.

 

102.2

For the purposes of this Article 102, ‘conflict of interest’ includes a conflict of interest and a conflict of duty and a conflict of duties.

 

103.

DECLARATION OF DIRECTOR’S INTERESTS IN CONTRACTS

A director who is in any way, whether directly or indirectly and whether for himself or through a person connected with him, interested in a contract, transaction or arrangement or proposed contract, transaction or arrangement with the Company and where relevant as a consequence of any situation arising from a conflict of interest within the meaning of Article 102, shall declare the nature of his interest in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

 

47


104.

SHARES HELD BY THE COMPANY

The Directors may exercise the voting powers conferred by shares in any company held or owned by the Company or exercisable by them as directors of any other company as they think fit. This includes exercising voting powers in favour of a resolution appointing any or all of them directors of, or holders of any office or employment in, that other company, or voting or providing for the payment of remuneration to the directors of, or holders of any such office or employment in, such company.

MANAGING AND EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

 

105.

APPOINTMENT OF DIRECTORS TO EXECUTIVE OFFICE

The Directors or any committee appointed by the Directors may for any period and on such terms as they think fit appoint any director to any executive office or employment (other than the office of auditor) in the Company (including, but without limitation, that of chief executive or managing director). They may also authorise any person appointed to be a director to continue in any executive office or employment held by him before he was appointed as director, but no service contract or contract for services shall be granted by the Company to any director or proposed director except in accordance with the Statutes.

 

106.

REMUNERATION ETC. OF DIRECTORS APPOINTED TO EXECUTIVE OFFICE

The remuneration and other terms and conditions of appointment of a director appointed to any executive office or employment under the Company shall from time to time (without prejudice to the provisions of any agreement between him and the Company) be fixed by the Directors or by any committee appointed by the Directors. The remuneration may (without limitation) be by way of fixed salary, lump sum, commission on the dividends or profits of the Company (or of any other company in which the Company is interested) or other participation in any such profits or by any combination of them.

 

107.

APPLICATION OF RETIREMENT BY ROTATION PROVISIONS TO CHIEF EXECUTIVE

The chief executive for the time being of the Company (whether described as chief executive, managing director or by any other title) is subject to the same provisions as to retirement by rotation, resignation and removal as the other directors. If for any reason he ceases to hold the office of director, he will immediately cease to be chief executive but this will not prejudice any claim he may have for compensation or damages for breach of any agreement he may have with the Company.

 

48


108.

APPLICATION OF RETIREMENT BY ROTATION PROVISIONS TO ALL OTHER EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

A director holding any other executive office or employment in the Company shall not be exempt from retirement by rotation. His executive office or employment shall not come to an end by reason only of him ceasing to be a director, but (regardless of any claim he may have for compensation or damages for breach of any agreement he may have with the Company and subject to the provisions of any such agreement) may be ended at any time after he ceases to be a director by resolution of the Directors.

 

109.

DELEGATION TO DIRECTORS HOLDING EXECUTIVE OFFICE

The Directors may, on such terms and conditions as they think fit, give a director appointed to any executive office or employment any of the powers exercisable under these Articles by the Directors, other than the power to make calls, forfeit shares, borrow money or issue debentures. They may give such powers collaterally with, or to the exclusion of, and in substitution for all or any of the powers of the Directors in that regard, and may from time to time revoke, withdraw, alter or vary all or any of such powers.

APPOINTMENT AND RETIREMENT OF DIRECTORS

 

110.

VACATION OF OFFICE OF A DIRECTOR

 

110.1

A director will automatically cease to hold office as a director if:

 

  110.1.1

he is prohibited by law from being or acting as a director or if he ceases to be a director by virtue of any provision of the Companies Act 2006; or

 

  110.1.2

he resigns in writing and his resignation is left at the Registered Office or delivered to a meeting of the Directors or to the Secretary or if he offers in writing to resign and the Directors resolve to accept his resignation; or

 

  110.1.3

he becomes bankrupt or applies for an interim order pursuant to section 253 of the Insolvency Act 1986 or enters into any voluntary arrangement within the definition contained in that section or has an interim receiver appointed under section 286 of that Act of all or any part of his property; or

 

  110.1.4

he is admitted to hospital as a result of an application for admission for treatment under the Mental Health Act 1983 or, in Scotland, an application for admission under the Mental Health (Scotland) Act 1960; or

 

49


  110.1.5

a court claiming jurisdiction in matters concerning mental disorder makes an order for his detention or for the appointment of a guardian or for the appointment of a receiver, curator bonis or other person (by whatever name called) to exercise powers with respect to his property or affairs; or

 

  110.1.6

he is absent from meetings of the Directors for 6 successive months without permission from the Directors and his alternate director (if any) has not during such period attended in his place and the Directors have resolved that his office be vacated; or

 

  110.1.7

he is removed from office in accordance with Article 116; or

 

  110.1.8

he is removed from office by notice in writing served upon him and authenticated by all of the other directors; or

 

  110.1.9

his conduct (whether or not concerning the affairs of the Company) is the subject of an investigation by an inspector appointed by the Secretary of State or by the Serious Fraud Office and the Directors resolve that it is undesirable in the interests of the Company that he remains a director; or

 

  110.1.10

he is convicted of an indictable offence and the Directors resolve that it is undesirable in the interests of the Company that he remains a director.

 

111.

NUMBER OF DIRECTORS SUBJECT TO RETIREMENT BY ROTATION

 

111.1

At each annual general meeting the following directors will retire from office and be eligible for re-election:

 

  111.1.1

any Director who was not elected or re-elected at either of the two preceding annual general meetings and any director who wishes to retire and offer himself for re-election (whether by reason of the UK Corporate Governance Code or for any other reason); and

 

  111.1.2

such number of the Directors (excluding any director who is required to retire by Article 117) as would, when added to the number of directors (if any) retiring in accordance with Article 111.1.1 represent one third of the Directors. If one third is not a whole number then, subject to Article 111.2, the number of directors to retire is the number nearest to one third.

 

50


111.2

If at any annual general meeting the total number of directors to be considered for retirement by rotation (“the total number”) is less than 3 and the one third calculation in Article 111.1.2 would result in a number which is less than one then the following applies:

 

  111.2.1

if the total number is two, one of those directors shall retire; and

 

  111.2.2

if the total number is one, that director shall retire.

 

112.

SELECTION OF DIRECTORS TO RETIRE BY ROTATION

The directors to retire for the purposes of Article 111.1.2 shall include (so far as necessary to obtain the number required) any director who wishes to retire and not offer himself for re-election. Any further directors to retire for the purposes of Article 111.1.2 shall be those of the other directors who are subject to retirement by rotation pursuant to the provisions of that Article for the purposes of the meeting in question and who have at the date of the meeting been longest in office since their last re-election or appointment. In the case of persons who became or were last re-elected directors on the same day those to retire shall (unless they otherwise agree among themselves) be determined by lot.

 

113.

RE-ELECTION OR REPLACEMENT OF RETIRING DIRECTORS

At the meeting at which a director retires the members may pass an ordinary resolution to fill the office being vacated by electing the retiring director or some other person eligible for appointment to that office. In default the retiring director shall be deemed to have been elected or re-elected (as the case may be) unless:

 

113.1

at the meeting it is expressly resolved not to fill the vacated office or a resolution for the election or re-election of such director is put to the meeting and lost; or

 

113.2

such director has given notice in writing to the Company that he is unwilling to be elected or re-elected; or

 

113.3

the default is due to the moving of a resolution in contravention of Article 114; or

 

113.4

such director has attained any retiring age applicable to him as a director.

The retirement shall not have effect until the conclusion of the meeting except where a resolution is passed to elect some other person in the place of the retiring director or a resolution for his election or re-election is put to the meeting and lost. A retiring director who is elected or re-elected or deemed to have been elected or re-elected will continue in office without a break.

 

51


114.

RESOLUTIONS FOR THE APPOINTMENT OF DIRECTORS

 

114.1

A single resolution for the appointment of 2 or more persons as directors is void unless a resolution that it shall be moved has first been agreed to by the meeting without any vote being given against it.

 

114.2

At any general meeting no person other than a director retiring at the meeting shall, unless recommended by the Directors for election, be eligible for appointment as a director unless not less than 28 nor more than 35 days before the date of the meeting:

 

  114.2.1

a notice in writing, authenticated by a member (other than the person to be proposed) who is qualified to attend and vote at that meeting, containing his intention to propose the person for election; and

 

  114.2.2

a notice in writing authenticated by the person proposed as a director of his willingness to be elected;

have both been left at the Registered Office or sent to the Secretary.

 

115.

POWER TO ALTER LIMITS ON THE NUMBER OF DIRECTORS

The Company may by ordinary resolution from time to time increase or reduce any limits on the number of directors specified in Article 95 and may also determine in what rotation such increased or reduced number is to go out of office and may make any appointments required for making any such increase.

 

116.

REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS BY SPECIAL OR ORDINARY RESOLUTION

 

116.1

The Company may by special resolution, or in accordance with and subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, by ordinary resolution at a meeting of which special notice has been given, remove any director from office.

 

116.2

The right to remove a director may be exercised notwithstanding any agreement between the Company and the director, but will not affect any claim the director may have for damages for breach of such agreement.

 

116.3

The Company may appoint a substitute in place of the director removed from office. The substitute shall, for the purposes of Article 111, be treated as if he became a director on the same day as the director in whose place he is appointed was last elected or re-elected. If the Company does not appoint another person, the vacancy may be filled in accordance with Article 117.

 

52


117.

DIRECTORS’ POWER TO APPOINT ADDITIONAL DIRECTORS OR TO FILL CASUAL VACANCIES

 

117.1

The Directors may appoint any person to be a director either to fill a vacancy or as an additional director but the total number of directors shall not at any time exceed the maximum number (if any) fixed by or in accordance with Article 95. Any director appointed under the provisions of this Article 117 by the Directors shall retire from office at the next annual general meeting and shall then be eligible for election by the members. He shall not be taken into account in determining the number of directors who are to retire by rotation at such meeting but shall be deemed to have retired at the meeting for the purposes of Article 112.

 

117.2

Without prejudice to Article 117.1 or Article 122 but subject to the provisions of Article 115, the Company may by ordinary resolution appoint any person to be a director of the Company either to fill a vacancy or as an additional director.

ALTERNATE DIRECTORS

 

118.

POWER TO APPOINT ALTERNATE DIRECTORS AND THEIR STATUS

 

118.1

Any director may at any time appoint any other director or any other person approved by the Directors to be his alternate director and may at any time terminate such appointment. Any such appointment or termination shall be in writing and shall be effective when it is delivered to the Registered Office or to a meeting of the Directors.

 

118.2

Any person’s appointment as an alternate director ceases if and when the director appointing him vacates his office as director (otherwise than by retirement and re-election at the same meeting). It also ceases upon the happening of any event that, if he were a director, would cause him to vacate such office.

 

118.3

An alternate director is:

 

  118.3.1

subject to providing to the Company an address within the United Kingdom at which notices may be served on him, entitled to receive notice of all meetings of the Directors and, if the Directors decide, of all meetings of any committee of which the director appointing him is a member;

 

  118.3.2

entitled to attend and vote as a director at any such meeting at which the director appointing him is not personally present;

 

  118.3.3

generally at any such meeting entitled to perform all functions of the director appointing him as a director; and

 

53


  118.3.4

at any such meeting entitled to one vote for each director for whom he acts as alternate director (in addition to his own vote if he is himself a director) but can be counted only once for the purpose of determining whether a quorum is present.

For the purposes of the proceedings at any such meeting the provisions of these Articles shall apply as if the alternate director were a director. If the director appointing him is either absent from the United Kingdom or temporarily unable to act through ill health or disability, an alternate director’s authentication or approval of any resolution in writing of the Directors or of a committee appointed by the Directors shall be as effective as the authentication of or approval by the director appointing him.

Except as provided for in this Article 118 an alternate director shall not have power to act as a director nor shall he be deemed to be a director for the purpose of these Articles.

 

118.4

An alternate director is entitled to hold any office or place of profit or to contract and be interested in and benefit from contracts or arrangements and to be repaid expenses and to be indemnified to the same extent as if he were a director. He shall not be entitled to receive from the Company as alternate director any remuneration except only such part (if any) of the remuneration otherwise payable to the director appointing him as the director may by notice in writing to the Company from time to time direct. An alternate director shall not be required to hold any shares in the Company by way of qualification.

 

118.5

Every person acting as an alternate director is an officer of the Company, and shall alone be responsible to the Company for his own acts and defaults, and he shall not be deemed to be the agent of or for the appointor.

PROCEEDINGS OF DIRECTORS

 

119.

DIRECTORS’ MEETINGS

 

119.1

The Directors may meet to despatch business and adjourn and otherwise regulate their meetings as they think fit. A meeting may be called by any director and must be called by the Secretary if a director requests a meeting.

 

119.2

Meetings are called by serving a notice on all the directors. It is not necessary to serve notice on a director who is absent from the United Kingdom but an alternate director acting in his place must, subject to the provisions of Article 118.3, be served with notice. A director may prospectively or retrospectively waive his right to receive notice of any meeting.

 

54


119.3

Notice is deemed to be served if it is given to the director personally or by word of mouth or sent in writing to the director’s last known address or any other address given to the Company for this purpose.

 

119.4

Questions arising at any meeting shall be determined by a majority vote. If votes are equal the chairman of the meeting shall have a second or casting vote.

 

119.5

All or any of the Directors or members of any committee appointed by the Directors can participate in a Directors or committee meeting by means of conference telephone, video teleconference or similar equipment whereby all persons participating can hear each other. Any person participating in a meeting in this way will be deemed to be present in person and, subject to the provisions of these Articles and the Statutes, will be entitled to vote and be counted in a quorum. A meeting taking place by conference telephone, video teleconference or similar will be deemed to take place either where the largest group of those participating is assembled or, if there is no such group, where the chairman of the meeting is.

 

120.

QUORUM FOR A BOARD MEETING

The quorum necessary for the transaction of the business of the Directors may be fixed by the Directors and unless so fixed at any other number shall be 2 of whom one may be an alternate director provided that he is not also a director. A duly convened meeting of the Directors at which a quorum is present shall be competent to exercise all or any of the authorities, powers and discretions for the time being vested in or exercisable by the Directors.

 

121.

RESOLUTIONS IN WRITING

 

121.1

A resolution of the Directors may be in writing provided that:

 

  121.1.1

it is authenticated or approved by all the Directors (or by all the members of a committee appointed by the Directors) who are in each case entitled to vote on the resolution and present in the United Kingdom;

 

  121.1.2

the approval is in writing; and

 

  121.1.3

the number of Directors (or of the committee) referred to in Article 121.1.1 is sufficient to form a quorum.

 

121.2

A resolution in writing of the Directors will be as effective as a resolution passed at a duly convened Directors’ or committee meeting.

 

121.3

A resolution in writing of the Directors can consist of several copies of a document, each copy authenticated or approved by one or more of the Directors or committee members.

 

55


121.4

If a director is not present in the United Kingdom or is temporarily unable to act through ill health or disability, but has appointed an alternate director who is in the United Kingdom, the alternate director must authenticate or approve the resolution.

 

122.

POWERS OF DIRECTORS TO ACT NOTWITHSTANDING REDUCTION BELOW MINIMUM NUMBER

The continuing directors may act notwithstanding any vacancy in their body, but if and so long as the number of directors is reduced below the minimum number fixed by or in accordance with these Articles the continuing directors or director may act for the purpose of filling such vacancies or of summoning general meetings, but not for any other purpose. If there are no directors or director able or willing to act, then any 2 members may summon a general meeting for the purpose of appointing directors.

 

123.

APPOINTMENT OF CHAIRMAN

The Directors may elect a chairman of their meetings and one or more deputy chairmen and determine the period for which each is to hold office. If no chairman or deputy chairman has been elected, or if at any meeting neither the chairman nor a deputy chairman is present within 5 minutes after the time appointed for holding the meeting, the directors present may choose one of their number to be chairman of the meeting.

 

124.

APPOINTMENT OF AND DELEGATION OF POWERS TO COMMITTEES

The Directors may appoint committees consisting of such directors as they think fit, and may delegate any of their powers to any such committee (with power to sub-delegate), and may from time to time revoke any such delegation and discharge any such committee wholly or in part. The Directors may co-opt onto any such committee persons who are not directors of the Company and may give such persons voting rights on that committee. The number of co-opted members shall be less than one-half of the total membership of the committee and a resolution of any committee shall not be effective unless a majority of the members of the committee present at the meeting are directors of the Company. Any committee appointed by the Directors shall, in the exercise of delegated powers, conform to any regulations imposed upon it by the Directors.

 

125.

PROCEEDINGS OF COMMITTEES

The meetings and proceedings of any committee consisting of 2 or more directors shall be governed by the provisions of these Articles regulating the meetings and proceedings of the Directors, so far as these Articles apply and are not superseded by or inconsistent with any regulations made by the Directors under Article 124.

 

56


126.

VALIDITY OF ACTS OF DIRECTORS

All acts done by the Directors or by a committee appointed by the Directors or by any person held out by the Company to be a director will be valid even though:

 

126.1

there was some defect in their appointment or continuance in office;

 

126.2

any of them were disqualified from acting as a director;

 

126.3

any of them have vacated office; or

 

126.4

any of them were not entitled to vote on the matter in question.

In any of the above circumstances and in favour only of persons dealing in good faith with the Company, all acts will be as valid as if there were no such defects or irregularities of the kind referred to in this Article.

BORROWING POWERS

 

127.

GENERAL POWER OF DIRECTORS TO EXERCISE THE COMPANY’S BORROWING POWERS

Subject to the provisions of Article 128 the Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow or raise money, to mortgage or charge all or any of its undertaking, property, assets and uncalled capital, to issue debentures and other securities, and to give security whether outright or as collateral security for any debt, liability or obligation of the Company, any subsidiary of the Company or of any third party.

 

128.

RESTRICTIONS ON BORROWING POWERS OF DIRECTORS

The Directors shall restrict the borrowings of the Company and exercise all voting and other rights or powers of control exercisable by the Company in relation to its subsidiaries (if any) so as to secure (as regards subsidiaries so far as by such exercise they can secure) that the aggregate amount for the time being remaining undischarged of all moneys borrowed by the Group and for the time being owing to persons outside the Group shall not, without the previous sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company, exceed an amount equal to 3 times the Adjusted Capital and Reserves. The certificate of the Auditors for the time being as to the amount of the Adjusted Capital and Reserves at any time shall be conclusive and binding upon all concerned.

 

129.

MEANING OF BORROWINGS

 

129.1

For the purposes of Article 128 the expression “Adjusted Capital and Reserves” shall mean at any material time a sum equal to the aggregate of:

 

  129.1.1

the amount paid up or credited as paid up (excluding any premium) on the issued share capital of the Company; and

 

57


  129.1.2

the aggregate amount standing to the credit of the consolidated capital and revenue reserves of the Company and its subsidiaries whether distributable or undistributable (including, without limitation, any share premium account, capital redemption reserve, property revaluation reserve and profit and loss account) all as shown by the then latest audited accounts of those companies but after:

 

  129.1.2.1

excluding any sums set aside for taxation (including deferred taxation);

 

  129.1.2.2

making such adjustments as may be appropriate in respect of any variation in the amount of such paid up share capital or any such reserves subsequent to the relevant balance sheet date. For this purpose share capital allotted or unconditionally agreed to be allotted shall be deemed to have been issued and share capital already called up or payable at any fixed future date within the following 6 months shall be treated as already paid up. If any issue or proposed issue of shares by the Company for cash has been underwritten such shares shall be deemed to have been issued and the amount (including any premium) of the subscription moneys payable in respect of the shares issued (not being moneys payable later than 6 months after the date of allotment) shall, to the extent so underwritten, be deemed to have been paid up on the date when the issue of such shares was underwritten (or, if such underwriting was conditional, on the date when it became unconditional);

 

  129.1.2.3

making such adjustments as may be appropriate in respect of any distributions declared, recommended or made by the Company or its subsidiaries (otherwise than attributable directly or indirectly to the Company) out of profits earned up to and including the date of the latest audited balance sheet of the Company or subsidiary (as the case may be) to the extent that such distribution is not provided for in such balance sheet;

 

  129.1.2.4

making such adjustments as may be appropriate in respect of any variation in the interests of the Company in its subsidiaries since the date of the latest audited balance sheet of the Company;

 

58


  129.1.2.5

(if the calculation is required for the purposes of or in connection with a transaction under or in connection with which any company is to become or cease to be a subsidiary), making all such adjustments as would be appropriate if such transaction had been carried into effect;

 

  129.1.2.6

excluding minority interests in subsidiaries;

 

  129.1.2.7

eliminating all amounts (if any) attributable to goodwill or otherwise attributable to intangible assets shown as such on consolidation;

 

  129.1.2.8

excluding such part of the interests of the Company or a subsidiary in an Associated Company (as defined below), which is not a subsidiary of the Company, attributable to any post-acquisition undistributed profits and reserves but including such interests at original cost or, if lower, book value; and

 

  129.1.2.9

after making such other adjustments (if any) as the Auditors may consider appropriate.

For the purpose of the above, “Associated Company” means any company or partnership which shall be treated by the Auditors as an associated company or partnership for the purpose of any Statement of Standard Accounting Practice for the time being in issue relating to accounting for the results of associated companies published by the Accounting Standards Board or other relevant regulatory body.

 

129.2

Borrowings for the purpose of Article 128 are deemed to include (to the extent that the same would not otherwise fall to be taken into account):

 

  129.2.1

the principal amount of all debentures of any member of the Group which are not for the time being beneficially owned within the Group;

 

  129.2.2

the outstanding amount of the acceptances (not being acceptances of trade bills in respect of the purchase or sale of goods in the ordinary course of trading) by any member of the Group or by any bank or accepting house under any acceptance credit opened on behalf of and in favour of any member of the Group;

 

  129.2.3

the nominal amount of any issued and paid up share capital (other than equity share capital) of any subsidiary of the Company not for the time being beneficially owned by other members of the Group;

 

59


  129.2.4

the nominal amount of any other issued and paid up share capital and the principal amount of any other debentures or other borrowed moneys (not being shares or debentures which, or borrowed moneys the indebtedness in respect of which, is for the time being beneficially owned within the Group) the redemption or repayment of which is guaranteed or wholly or partly secured by any member of the Group; and

 

  129.2.5

any fixed or minimum premium payable on final redemption or repayment of any debentures, share capital or other borrowed moneys falling to be taken into account;

but do not include:

 

  129.2.6

any amounts borrowed by any member of the Group for the purpose of repaying or redeeming (with or without premium) the whole or part of any borrowings falling to be taken into account provided it is intended they will be applied for such purpose within 6 months of being borrowed and only to the extent that they have been applied for that purpose;

 

  129.2.7

any amounts borrowed by any member of the Group from bankers or others for the purpose of financing any contract up to an amount not exceeding that part of the price receivable under such contract which is guaranteed or insured by the Export Credits Guarantee Department of the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills or by any other governmental department or non-governmental successor fulfilling a similar function or other like institution carrying on a similar business;

 

  129.2.8

any amounts borrowed which are for the time being deposited with HM Revenue & Customs or other body designated by any relevant legislation or order in connection with import deposits or any similar governmental scheme; or

 

  129.2.9

moneys borrowed by a company at the time it becomes a subsidiary of the Company for a period of 6 months from the date of its becoming a subsidiary.

 

129.3

Any amounts borrowed by a partly-owned subsidiary and not owing to another member of the Group shall be taken into account subject to the exclusion of an amount equal to the minority proportion, and moneys borrowed and owing to a partly-owned subsidiary by another member of the Group shall be taken into account to the extent of an amount equal to the minority proportion. For the purposes of this Article 129.3 minority proportion” means the proportion of the issued equity share capital of the partly-owned subsidiary which is not attributable to the Company.

 

60


129.4

Borrowed moneys of any member of the Group expressed in or calculated by reference to a currency other than sterling shall be converted for the purpose of calculating the sterling equivalent either:

 

  129.4.1

at the rate of exchange specified in a forward purchase contract, currency option, back-to-back loan, swap or other arrangement taken out or entered into to reduce the risk associated with fluctuations in rates of exchange in respect of repayment of those moneys (“hedging agreement”); or

 

  129.4.2

if repayment of those moneys has not been covered by a hedging agreement, at the more favourable to the Company:

 

  129.4.2.1

of the rate of exchange used for the conversion of that currency in the relevant balance sheet; or

 

  129.4.2.2

if no rate was used, the middle-market rate of exchange quoted by the Company’s principal bankers at the close of business in London on the date of the relevant balance sheet; or

 

  129.4.2.3

if it would result in a lower figure the middle-market rate of exchange quoted by the Company’s principal bankers at the close of business in London on the business day immediately preceding the day on which the calculation falls to be made.

 

  129.5

If, immediately prior to a general meeting the restriction on borrowing powers set out in Article 128 has not been exceeded by reference to the immediately preceding audited consolidated balance sheet, the Directors will not be in breach of Article 128 if the restriction on borrowing powers is exceeded immediately after, and as a result of, any new consolidated balance sheet being laid before the members in general meeting. In such circumstances the Directors must ensure that no later than 6 months after the date of the general meeting, the Company has, by ordinary resolution, sanctioned the excess borrowing or that the aggregate amount of outstanding borrowed moneys has been reduced to an amount not exceeding the borrowing restriction.

 

  129.6

Notwithstanding any other provision of Article 128, the Directors may act in reliance on a bona fide estimate of the amount of the Adjusted Capital and Reserves at any time and if in consequence the limit imposed by this Article is inadvertently exceeded, an amount of borrowings equal to the excess may be disregarded until the expiration of 6 months after the date on which, by reason of a determination of the Auditors of otherwise, the Directors become aware that the said limit has been inadvertently exceeded as aforesaid.

 

61


130.

PROTECTION OF THIRD PARTIES IF RESTRICTIONS ON BORROWING POWERS BREACHED

No person dealing with the Company or any of its subsidiaries shall by reason of the provisions of Article 128 be concerned to see or inquire whether the limit referred to in Article 128 is observed. No debt incurred or security given in excess of such limit shall be invalid or ineffectual unless the lender or the recipient of the security had express notice at the time the debt was incurred or the security was given that the limit imposed had been or would be exceeded by the incurring of the debt or giving of the security.

GENERAL POWERS OF DIRECTORS

 

131.

MANAGEMENT OF THE BUSINESS

The business of the Company shall be managed by the Directors. They may exercise all the powers of the Company and do on behalf of the Company all acts which could be exercised and done by the Company, and which are not by the Statutes or by these Articles required to be exercised or done by the Company in general meeting. The Directors, in managing the Company, are subject to the provisions of the Statutes and of these Articles and to regulations prescribed by the Company by ordinary resolution provided that the regulations are not inconsistent with the provisions of the Statutes and these Articles. No regulation so made by the Company will invalidate any prior act of the Directors which would have been valid if such regulation had not been made. The general powers given by this Article are not limited or restricted by any special authority or power given to the Directors by any other Article.

 

132.

POWER TO ESTABLISH LOCAL BOARDS ETC.

The Directors may establish any local boards or agencies for managing any of the affairs of the Company, either in the United Kingdom or elsewhere. They may appoint any persons to be members of such local boards, or any managers or agents, and may fix their remuneration, and may delegate to any local board, manager or agent any of the powers, authorities and discretions vested in the Directors (other than their power to make calls, forfeit shares, borrow money or issue debentures) with power to sub-delegate, and may authorise the members of any local boards, or any of them, to fill any vacancies on the boards, and to act notwithstanding vacancies. Any such appointment or delegation may be made upon such terms and subject to such conditions as the Directors may think fit. The Directors may remove any person so appointed, and may annul or vary any such delegation, but no person dealing in good faith will be affected if they have no notice of the annulment or variation. The Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company under sections 49 and 129 of the Companies Act 2006 and the obligations and conditions imposed by both section 49 and section 129 shall be duly observed.

 

62


133.

APPOINTMENT OF ATTORNEYS

The Directors may by power of attorney or otherwise appoint any company, firm, person or group of persons, to be the attorney or attorneys of the Company for such purposes and with such powers, authorities and discretions (not exceeding those vested in or exercisable by the Directors under or pursuant to these Articles) and for such period and subject to such conditions as the Directors may think fit. A power of attorney may contain such provisions the Directors may decide on for the protection and convenience of persons dealing with the attorney and may also authorise any such attorney to sub-delegate all or any of the powers, authorities and discretions vested in him. The Directors may remove any person appointed under this Article and may revoke or vary the delegation but no person who deals in good faith and without notice of the revocation or variation shall be affected by it.

 

134.

SIGNATURE OF CHEQUES, BILLS ETC.

All cheques, promissory notes, drafts, bills of exchange, and other negotiable or transferable instruments, and all receipts for moneys paid to the Company, shall be signed, drawn, accepted, endorsed, or otherwise executed, as the case may be, in such manner as the Directors shall from time to time by resolution determine.

 

135.

ESTABLISHMENT OF PENSION OR BENEFIT SCHEMES, CLUBS, FUNDS ETC.

 

135.1

The Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company to provide as follows for employees of the Company, and of its subsidiaries and companies with which it is associated (together “associated companies”):

 

  135.1.1

to establish, concur or join in establishing with associated companies, schemes or funds for providing pensions, annuities, sickness or compassionate allowance, life assurance benefits, donations, gratuities or other benefits for employees and to make contributions out of the Company’s money to such schemes or funds;

 

  135.1.2

to pay, agree to pay or make grants (revocable or irrevocable and whether subject or not to any terms or conditions) of pensions or other retirement, superannuation, death or disability benefits to employees including pensions or benefits in addition to those to which the employees are or may become entitled under any scheme or fund referred to in Article 135.1.1. Any pension or benefit may be granted to an employee either before or in anticipation of or on or at any time after his actual retirement as the Directors in their absolute discretion consider to be desirable;

 

63


  135.1.3

to procure the establishment and subsidy of or subscription to and support of any institutions, associations, clubs, funds or trusts calculated to be for the benefit of employees or otherwise to advance the interests and well-being of the Company, its members, or associated companies; and

 

  135.1.4

to procure the making of payments for or towards the insurance of any employees.

 

135.2

For the purposes of this Article 135 employees” include any director who holds or held office or employment with the Company, ex-employees of the Company and their spouse, civil partner, widow, widower or surviving civil partner, relatives, families or dependants or any class or classes of such persons.

 

135.3

The Directors may also sanction the exercise of any power conferred upon the Company by section 247 of the Companies Act 2006.

 

135.4

The Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company to subscribe or guarantee money for charitable or benevolent objects, or for any exhibition or for any public, general or useful object.

SECRETARY

 

136.

APPOINTMENT OF SECRETARY

Subject to section 10(2) of the Companies Act 1985, the Secretary shall be appointed by the Directors for such term, at such remuneration and upon such conditions as they may think fit and any Secretary so appointed may be removed by them. If thought fit, 2 or more persons may be appointed as joint secretaries.

 

137.

APPOINTMENT OF ASSISTANT OR DEPUTY SECRETARY

The Directors may appoint any person to be an assistant or deputy Secretary of the Company. Anything authorised or required by these Articles or by law to be done by or to the Secretary may be done by or to any such assistant or deputy Secretary. Any assistant or deputy Secretary so appointed may be removed by the Directors.

 

64


138.

RESTRICTIONS WHERE DIRECTOR AND SECRETARY ARE ONE AND THE SAME

Where the Companies Act 2006 or these Articles require or authorise something to be done by or to a director and the Secretary, it must not be done by or to one person acting both as director and as, or in place of, the Secretary.

THE SEAL

 

139.

FORMALITIES CONCERNING USE OF THE SEAL

The Directors must provide for the safe custody of the Seal. The seal must only be used by the authority of the Directors or of a committee appointed and authorised by the Directors. Every instrument to which the Seal is affixed must be signed by one director whose signature must be attested in the presence of a witness or by one director and the Secretary or some other person appointed by the Directors for the purpose or by 2 directors. As regards any certificates for shares or debentures or other securities of the Company the Directors may by resolution determine that the signatures referred to in this Article shall be dispensed with or fixed by some mechanical or other method or system of applying facsimile signatures.

RESERVES

 

140.

POWER TO CARRY PROFITS TO RESERVE

Subject to the Statutes, the Directors may from time to time set aside out of the profits of the Company and carry to reserve such sums as they think proper. At the discretion of the Directors, the reserve shall be applied for any purpose to which the profits of the Company may properly be applied and pending such application may either be employed in the business of the Company or be invested. The Directors may divide the reserve into such special funds as they think fit and may consolidate into one fund any special funds or any parts of any special funds into which the reserve may have been divided. The Directors may also carry forward any profits without placing them to reserve.

DIVIDENDS

 

141.

POWER TO DECLARE DIVIDENDS

The Company may by ordinary resolution declare dividends. No dividend will be payable except out of the profits of the Company available for distribution in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, or in excess of the amount recommended by the Directors.

 

65


142.

APPORTIONMENT OF DIVIDENDS

 

142.1

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, and except as otherwise provided by these Articles or by the rights or privileges attached to any shares carrying a preferential or special right to dividends, Company profits will be used to pay dividends on shares in proportion to the amount paid up on each share and will be apportioned and paid pro rata based on the amount paid up in any part of the period when the dividend is paid.

 

142.2

No dividends will be paid except out of profits that the Company has determined should be distributed.

 

142.3

The provisions of Article 142.1 will not apply to payments made on each share in advance of calls.

 

142.4

Notwithstanding Article 142.1 if the terms of issue of a share provide that it will rank for dividend as from or after a particular date, or be entitled to dividends declared after a particular date, that share will rank for or be entitled to the dividend on that basis.

 

143.

DIVIDENDS PAYABLE IN ANY CURRENCY

Unless the terms of issue of a share provide otherwise, dividends may be paid or declared in any currency. The Directors may agree with a member:

 

143.1

that dividends declared or which become due on his shares in one currency will be paid or satisfied in another currency;

 

143.2

the basis of conversion to be applied;

 

143.3

how and when the amount to be paid in the other currency will be calculated and paid; and

 

143.4

whether the Company or any other person will bear the costs of conversion.

 

144.

POWER TO PAY INTERIM AND FIXED DIVIDENDS

If, in the opinion of the Directors the profits of the Company justify such payments, the Directors may:

 

144.1

pay the fixed dividends on any class of shares carrying a fixed dividend expressed to be payable on fixed dates on the half-yearly or other dates prescribed for payment; and

 

144.2

pay interim dividends of such amounts and on such dates as they think fit. If the Directors act in good faith, they shall not incur any liability to the holders of shares conferring preferred rights for any loss they may suffer in consequence of the payment of any interim dividend on any shares having non-preferred or deferred rights.

 

66


145.

SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNT

Subject to the provisions of and save as provided by the Companies Act 2006, if the Company issues shares at a premium, whether for cash or otherwise, the Directors must transfer a sum equal to the aggregate amount or value of the premiums to an account to be called the share premium account and any amount for the time being standing to the credit of such account shall not be applied in the payment of dividends.

 

146.

DIVIDENDS NOT TO BEAR INTEREST

No dividend or other moneys payable on or in respect of a share shall bear interest as against the Company.

 

147.

DEDUCTION OF DEBTS DUE TO COMPANY

The Directors may deduct from any dividend or other moneys payable to any member on or in respect of a share any money payable by him to the Company on account of calls or otherwise in relation to shares in the Company.

 

148.

RETENTION OF DIVIDENDS AND BONUSES PAYABLE ON SHARES OVER WHICH THE COMPANY HAS A LIEN

The Directors may retain any dividend or other moneys payable on or in respect of a share on which the Company has a lien, and may apply the same in or towards satisfaction of the debts, liabilities or engagements in respect of which the lien exists.

 

149.

RETENTION OF DIVIDENDS AND BONUSES WHERE A SECTION 793 NOTICE HAS NOT BEEN COMPLIED WITH

 

149.1

Subject to the provisions of Article 150 the Directors may also retain any dividend or other moneys otherwise payable on or in respect of shares if:

 

  149.1.1

a notice has been duly served in respect of the shares pursuant to section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 or any other provision of the Companies Act 2006 concerning the disclosure of interests in voting shares; and

 

  149.1.2

the share or shares which were the subject of that notice represented in aggregate at least 0.25 per cent. of that class of shares (calculated exclusive of any treasury shares of that class); and

 

67


  149.1.3

the person or persons on whom the notice was served failed to comply with the requirements of that notice within the period for compliance specified in the notice (being not less than 14 days from the date of service of the notice) and remains in default in complying with such notice.

 

150.

WHEN RIGHT OF RETENTION UNDER ARTICLE 149 CEASES

 

150.1

If any right of retention has arisen under the provisions of Article 149, it shall cease to apply to those shares if:

 

  150.1.1

the person or persons on whom the notice referred to in Article 149 was served ceases to be in default in complying with such notice; or

 

  150.1.2

the Directors decide (in their absolute discretion) that the right of retention has ceased to apply to those shares; or

 

  150.1.3

a period of 7 days has expired which commences on the date the Company receives a notice that the share has been sold either through a recognised investment exchange or overseas exchange, or as a result of an acceptance of a takeover offer.

 

150.2

If and for as long as a person is in default in complying with a notice referred to in Article 149, the consequences of default set out in that Article will also apply (with effect from allotment) to any additional share allotted to that person after service of the notice in right of the shares that were the subject of the notice (including shares allotted on a rights issue or capitalisation issue) as if such additional share had also been the subject of the notice.

 

150.3

For the purposes of Article 149 and the provisions of this Article 150, a person shall be deemed to be in default in complying with a notice referred to in those Articles if he fails or refuses to give all the information required by the notice to the satisfaction of the Directors or if he gives information which he knows to be false or if he recklessly gives information which is false.

 

151.

UNCLAIMED AND RETAINED DIVIDENDS

All unclaimed and retained dividends may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Directors as they shall think fit for the benefit of the Company until such dividends are claimed or cease to be liable to retention under these Articles and if the Directors do so the Company will not be constituted a trustee of any such retained dividends. Any dividend remaining unclaimed or retained in accordance with these Articles for twelve years from the date the dividend becomes due for payment will, after that date, be forfeited and will revert to the Company.

 

68


152.

PAYMENT OF DIVIDENDS IN SPECIE

With the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company all or any part of a dividend can be paid by the distribution of specific assets, and the Directors must give effect to such ordinary resolution. If any difficulty arises on such a distribution the Directors can settle it as they think fit and in particular they can:

 

152.1

issue fractional certificates;

 

152.2

fix the value of all or part of the assets for distribution purposes;

 

152.3

determine that cash payments are made to members based on the value of the assets in order to adjust the rights of members; and

 

152.4

vest any assets in trustees.

 

153.

RECEIPTS BY JOINT HOLDERS

If 2 or more persons are registered as joint holders of any share, or are entitled jointly to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of the holder, any one of them may give an effective receipt for any dividend or other moneys payable on or in respect of the share, and payment of dividends in accordance with Article 154 may be made to any one of them. The provisions of this Article 153 are, in the case of persons entitled jointly to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of the holder, subject to Article 53.

 

154.

METHOD OF PAYMENT OF CASH DIVIDENDS

 

154.1

Any dividend or other moneys payable in cash on or in respect of a share may be paid by cheque, warrant, similar financial instrument or by such bank or other funds transfer system as the Directors consider appropriate or in the case of shares held in uncertificated form by means of a relevant system.

 

154.2

A cheque, warrant or similar financial instrument must be sent by post to a member at his registered address, or to any other person or persons entitled to the share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of the holder and/or to any other address which the member or person authorises in writing. The cheque, warrant or similar financial instrument must be made payable to, or to the order of, the person to whom it is sent, or to any person nominated in writing by the holder, joint holders, or the person or persons entitled to it.

 

155.

PAYMENT AS GOOD DISCHARGE

Payment of a cheque, warrant or similar financial instrument by the banker upon whom it is drawn or debiting of the Company’s account in respect of a bank or funds transfer or, in the case of shares in uncertificated form, the making of payment in accordance with the facilities and requirements of a relevant system shall be a good discharge to the Company.

 

69


156.

CHEQUES ETC TO BE AT SOLE RISK

Every cheque, warrant, bank or funds transfer or payment made by any other method will be sent at the sole risk of the person entitled.

 

157.

RIGHT TO STOP SENDING DIVIDEND WARRANTS BY POST

 

157.1

Not withstanding Article 154 or any authorisation given to the Company, the Company may stop sending dividend cheques or warrants by post in relation to a share if:

 

  157.1.1

dividend cheques or warrants have been sent by post and returned undelivered or left uncashed during the periods for which the same are valid on 2 consecutive occasions; or

 

  157.1.2

a dividend cheque or warrant has been sent by post to the registered address of the member or other person entitled to the dividend on that share and returned undelivered or left uncashed during the period for which the same are valid and reasonable enquiries have failed to establish any new address for such member or person.

 

157.2

The Company must recommence sending cheques or warrants (or using another method of payment) in respect of dividends if the member or other person entitled to the dividend claims the arrears of dividend and does not instruct the Company to pay future dividends in some other way.

 

158.

POWER TO SPECIFY RECORD DATES

Any resolution which declares or resolves to pay a dividend on shares of any class, whether a resolution of the Company in general meeting or a resolution of the Directors, may specify that the dividend is payable to the persons registered as the holders of the shares at the close of business on a particular date. That date can be prior to the date on which the resolution is passed. In that case the dividend will be payable in accordance with the respective registered shareholdings notwithstanding any subsequent transfer or transmission of the shares. The provisions of this Article do not prejudice the rights to dividends or other benefits as between the transferors and transferees of any such shares. The provisions of this Article will also apply to capitalisations that are effected under Article 160.

 

70


SHARES IN LIEU OF DIVIDEND

 

159.

POWER TO OFFER SHARES IN LIEU OF CASH DIVIDENDS

 

159.1

With the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company, the Directors may offer holders of ordinary shares the right to elect to receive additional ordinary shares (“new ordinary shares”) which are fully paid up, instead of all or part of a cash dividend.

 

159.2

The ordinary resolution may specify:

 

  159.2.1

the terms and conditions on which the offer is made;

 

  159.2.2

the method by which the shareholders elect to receive the new ordinary shares; and

 

  159.2.3

that the right to elect to receive the new ordinary shares is in respect of a particular dividend and/or the whole or part of all or any dividends declared or paid in a specified period which must not end later than the end of the fifth annual general meeting following the date on which the ordinary resolution is passed.

 

159.3

The Directors must provide the ordinary shareholders with a form of election approved by the Directors and notify them in writing:

 

  159.3.1

of their right to elect to receive the new ordinary shares;

 

  159.3.2

of the procedure to be followed in order to exercise the right; and

 

  159.3.3

of the place at which and the latest date and time by which completed forms of election have to be lodged in order to be effective.

 

159.4

The holders of ordinary shares who elect to receive the new ordinary shares will be entitled to such whole number of new ordinary shares as is, as nearly as possible, equal in value to the amount of the cash dividend they would otherwise have received. The value of each new ordinary share will be calculated on the basis of its market value.

For the purposes of this Article 159 market value” means the middle market quotation for ordinary shares as derived from the AIM Appendix to the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange plc on the last practicable business day before the notice is sent to shareholders.

Following an election in accordance with this Article 159, the dividend, or part of a dividend, will not be payable on the ordinary shares for which the holder has elected to receive new ordinary shares. Instead, the Directors shall capitalise a sum equal to the aggregate nominal value of the new ordinary shares to be

 

71


allotted. The sum to be capitalised can be taken from the Company’s undivided profits not required for paying preferential dividends (whether or not they are available for distribution) or from any sum in the Company’s share premium account or capital reserves (including capital redemption reserves). The capitalised sum shall be used to pay up the new ordinary shares in full and the new ordinary shares will then be allotted and distributed to the holders on the basis set out in this Article 159.4. The provisions of this Article 159 will be subject to any right the Directors may have under these Articles to retain any dividends or any other moneys payable on or in respect of any particular share or shares.

 

159.5

The Directors’ right to capitalise under Article 159.4 applies notwithstanding any other rights to capitalise any sums given to them by these Articles.

 

159.6

The Directors may at their discretion make any rights of election offered pursuant to this Article subject to such exclusions or arrangements as they may consider necessary or expedient to deal with any legal or other difficulties which would or may otherwise arise under the laws of, or the requirements of any recognised investment exchange, recognised regulatory body or any stock exchange in, any territory.

 

159.7

The new ordinary shares will, at the time they are issued, rank equally in all respects with the existing issued fully paid ordinary shares except that they will not be entitled to share in the dividend in relation to which the relevant election was made.

 

159.8

The Directors may provide as they think fit for any fractions of new ordinary shares, including provisions to retain and accumulate them on behalf of any holder of ordinary shares and to use the retained fractions either for the allotment of fully paid ordinary shares by way of capitalisation to the holder or for a cash subscription of fully paid ordinary shares on behalf of the holder.

CAPITALISATION OF PROFITS AND RESERVES

 

160.

POWER TO CAPITALISE PROFITS AND RESERVES

 

160.1

With the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company, the Directors may:

 

  160.1.1

resolve to capitalise any undistributed profits (whether available for distribution or not) of the Company which are not required for paying any preferential dividend or any sum in the Company’s share premium account or capital reserves (“capitalised sum”);

 

  160.1.2

appropriate the capitalised sum to the members who would have been entitled to it if it were distributed by way of dividend and in proportion to the amount of dividend to which they would have been entitled;

 

72


  160.1.3

apply the capitalised sum either to pay amounts unpaid on members’ partly paid shares or to pay up in full any unissued shares or debentures and allot the shares or debentures credited as fully paid to the members in proportion to their existing holdings or partly in one way and partly in the other;

 

  160.1.4

resolve that any shares allotted in respect of any partly paid ordinary shares shall, so long as the shares remain partly paid, rank for dividends only to the extent that the partly paid ordinary shares rank for dividend;

 

  160.1.5

make provision by the issue of fractional certificates or by payment in cash or otherwise for shares or debentures which become distributable under this Article 160 in fractions;

 

  160.1.6

authorise any person to enter into an agreement with the Company on behalf of the members which provides for the allotment to the members of fully paid shares or debentures in accordance with Article 160.1.3. The Directors’ authorisation is binding on all members; and

 

  160.1.7

generally do anything which is required to give effect to such ordinary resolution of the Company.

 

160.2

The share premium account, the capital redemption reserves and any reserves not available for distribution may, for the purposes of this Article 160 only, be applied to pay up unissued shares which are to be allotted to members as fully paid.

MINUTES AND BOOKS

 

161.

REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING MINUTES

The Directors shall cause minutes to be made in books to be provided for the purpose:

 

161.1

of all appointments of officers made by the Directors;

 

161.2

of the names of the directors present at each meeting of the Directors and of any committee appointed by the Directors; and

 

161.3

of all resolutions and proceedings at all meetings of the Company and of any class of members of the Company and of the Directors and of committees appointed by the Directors. Minutes of proceedings of the Directors shall be kept for at least ten years from the date of the meeting.

Any such minutes purportedly signed either by the chairman of the meeting at which the appointments were made, or Directors were present, or resolutions

 

73


were passed or proceedings held (as the case may be), or by the chairman of the next succeeding meeting of the Company or the Directors or committee (as the case may be), shall be sufficient evidence (without any further proof) of what is stated in the minutes.

 

162.

REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING REGISTERS

The Directors shall ensure that the Company complies with the provisions of the Statutes with regard to:

 

162.1

the registration of charges;

 

162.2

the keeping of a register of members, a register of directors and secretaries, a register of charges, a register of director’s interests and a register for recording information relating to interests in the share capital of the Company;

 

162.3

the production and furnishing of copies of or extracts from the registers referred to in Article 162.2; and

 

162.4

keeping and making available for inspection copies and memoranda of directors’ service contracts.

 

163.

FORM OF REGISTERS

Any register, index, minute book, book of account or other book required by these Articles or the Statutes to be kept by or on behalf of the Company may be kept either by making entries in bound books or by recording them in any other manner. In any case in which bound books are not used, the Directors shall take adequate precautions for guarding against falsification and for facilitating its discovery.

ACCOUNTS

 

164.

COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTES

The Directors shall ensure that the Company complies with the provisions of the Statutes with regard to the keeping of accounting records.

 

165.

RIGHTS TO INSPECT BOOKS

The accounting records will be kept at the Registered Office, or at any other place within Great Britain that the Directors decide on. The accounting records will always be open to the inspection of the Directors. No member (other than a director) shall have any right to inspect any account or book or document of the Company unless the right is conferred by statute or authorised by the Directors.

 

74


166.

PRESENTATION OF ACCOUNTS ETC. TO MEMBERS

The Directors shall from time to time in accordance with the provisions of the Statutes cause to be prepared and to be laid before a general meeting of the Company such profit and loss accounts, balance sheets, group accounts (if any) and reports which by law must be attached to them (together, for the purposes of this Article and Article 167, “accounts”) as may be necessary.

 

167.

RIGHTS TO RECEIVE COPIES OF ACCOUNTS

 

167.1

A copy of the accounts must be sent to every member and debenture holder of the Company and to every other person who is entitled to receive notices of meetings under the requirements of the Statutes or these Articles.

 

167.2

The copies of the accounts must be sent not less than 21 clear days before the date of the meeting.

 

167.3

The copies of the accounts do not need to be sent to:

 

  167.3.1

more than one of joint holders;

 

  167.3.2

holders who are sent a summary financial statement in accordance with section 456 of the Companies Act 2006; or

 

  167.3.3

a person for whom the Company does not have an address;

but any of the above are entitled to receive free copies of the accounts if they apply to the Registered Office.

 

167.4

If any of the Company’s shares, debentures or other securities are listed, quoted or dealt in any recognised investment exchange, sufficient copies of the accounts must be sent to the appropriate officer of the relevant recognised investment exchange, as may for the time being be required under its regulations or practice.

AUDITORS

 

168.

COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTES

The provisions of the Statutes as to the appointment, powers, rights, remuneration and duties of the Auditors shall be complied with.

 

169.

VALIDITY OF ACTS OF AUDITORS

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006, all acts done by any person acting as an auditor shall, as regards all persons dealing in good faith with the Company, be valid even though there may have been some defect in his appointment or he was at the time of his appointment not qualified for appointment.

 

75


170.

AUDITORS’ ENTITLEMENT CONCERNING GENERAL MEETINGS

The Auditors shall be entitled to attend any general meeting and to receive all notices of and other communications relating to any general meeting which any member is entitled to receive, and to be heard at any general meeting on any part of the business of the meeting which concerns them as auditors and the provisions of Article 57 relating to the sending of notices in electronic form or by means of a website apply to notices of meeting sent under this Article 170.

NOTICES AND DOCUMENTS

 

171.

SERVICE OF NOTICES AND DOCUMENTS

 

171.1

Subject to the provisions of the Statutes, and provided that the Company has complied with all applicable regulatory requirements any notice or document may be served on, or delivered to, any member by the Company:

 

  171.1.1

personally; or

 

  171.1.2

by post addressed to the member at his registered address, or (if he has no registered address within the United Kingdom) to the address, if any, within the United Kingdom supplied by him to the Company as his address for the service of notices or documents; or

 

  171.1.3

in electronic form; or

 

  171.1.4

by making them available on a website.

If a notice or other document is sent by post, it shall be deemed to be served or delivered 24 hours after posting as first class post or 48 hours after posting as second-class post. In proving service or delivery it shall be sufficient to prove that the cover containing the notice or document was properly addressed, stamped and posted.

 

171.2

Any notice or document sent in electronic form shall be deemed to be served or delivered on the day of transmission. Proof that a notice or other document sent in electronic form was sent in accordance with guidance issued by the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators shall be conclusive evidence that notice was given.

 

171.3

Any notice or document served or delivered by making it available on a website, shall be deemed to be served or delivered when it is first made available on the website or, if later, when the member received or was deemed to have received notice of the fact that the document or notice was available on the website.

 

76


DOCUMENTS SENT IN ELECTRONIC FORM OR BY MEANS OF A WEBSITE

 

172.

DOCUMENTS SENT BY THE COMPANY IN ELECTRONIC FORM

 

172.1

Subject to any requirement of the Companies Act 2006 and provided that the Company has complied with all applicable regulatory requirements, the Company may send any documents or notices to its members in electronic form and such documents or notices will be validly sent provided that:

 

  172.1.1

the member has agreed (generally or specifically) (or in the case of a company is deemed to have agreed by a provision in the Statutes) that documents or notices can be sent in electronic form;

 

  172.1.2

the documents are documents to which the agreement applies; and

 

  172.1.3

copies of the documents are sent in electronic form to the address notified by the member to the Company for that purpose.

 

173.

DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATED BY THE COMPANY BY MEANS OF A WEBSITE

 

173.1

Subject to any requirement of the Companies Act 2006 and provided that the Company has complied with all applicable regulatory requirements, the Company may send documents or notices to its members by means of a website and any such documents or notices will be validly sent provided that:

 

  173.1.1

the member has expressly agreed (generally or specifically) that documents or notices may be sent by means of a website to him or he has been asked (individually) to agree that documents and notices can be sent by means of a website and the Company has received no response to that request within 28 days from the date on which the request was sent; and

 

  173.1.2

the documents are documents to which the agreement applies; and

 

  173.1.3

the member is notified of the presence of the documents on the website, the address of the website, the place on the website where the documents may be accessed and how they may be accessed.

 

173.2

Documents must be available on the website for a period of not less than 28 days from the date of notification unless the Statutes make provision for any other time period.

 

173.3

If the documents are published on the website for a part only of the period of time referred to in Article 173.2, they will be treated as being published throughout the period if the failure to publish throughout that period is wholly attributable to circumstances which it would not be reasonable to have expected the Company to prevent or avoid.

 

77


174.

RIGHT TO HARD COPIES

Where the Company sends documents to members otherwise than in hard copy form, any member can require the Company to send him a hard copy version and the Company must do so free of charge and within 21 days of the date of the member’s request.

 

175.

DOCUMENTS SENT TO THE COMPANY

 

175.1

Where the Statues permit documents to be sent to the Company only such, documents as are specified by the Company may be sent to the Company in electronic form to the address specified by the Company for that purpose.

 

175.2

If the document in electronic form is sent by hand or by post, it must be sent to the Company’s Registered Office.

 

175.3

A document sent to the Company in electronic form is sufficiently authenticated if the identity of the sender is confirmed in the way the Company has specified.

 

176.

DOCUMENTS SENT TO JOINT HOLDERS

In the case of joint holders of a share all documents shall be sent to the joint holder (if any) described in the Register as having an address for service in the United Kingdom and who is named first in the Register. Notice so sent shall be treated as sufficient notice to all the joint holders. Where the Statutes or these articles require agreement of a member to electronic means of communication or website communication, the holder who is named first in the Register may give agreement on behalf of both joint holders.

 

177.

DEATH OR BANKRUPTCY OF A MEMBER

 

177.1

Subject to the provisions of Article 53 and 178 a person entitled to a share as a result of the death or bankruptcy of a member is entitled to service or delivery of any notice or document to which the member would have been entitled provided that he has supplied to the Company:

 

  177.1.1

evidence, reasonably required by the Directors, to show his title to the shares; and

 

  177.1.2

an address for service within the United Kingdom.

 

177.2

Service or delivery in accordance with Article 177.1 will be deemed to be sufficient service on or delivery to any person who is interested in the shares whether jointly with or claiming through or under the person entitled under Article 177.1.

 

78


177.3

Except as provided for in Articles 177.1 and 177.2 any notice or document delivered or sent by post or in electronic form to or left at the registered address of any member named on the Register shall be deemed to have been duly served or delivered despite the member’s death or bankruptcy and whether or not the Company had notice of his death or bankruptcy.

 

178.

MEMBERS WITH ADDRESSES OUTSIDE THE UK

A member who has no registered address within the United Kingdom and has not supplied to the Company an address within the United Kingdom for service of notices or an address to which notices may be sent in electronic form shall not be entitled to receive notices or documents from the Company.

 

179.

ATTENDANCE AT MEETING TO SIGNIFY RECEIPT OF NOTICE

Any member present, either personally or by proxy, at any meeting of the Company or class of members of the Company is deemed to have received notice of such meeting and, if required, of the purposes for which the meeting was called.

 

180.

SUSPENSION OF POSTAL SERVICES

If at any time postal services in the United Kingdom are suspended or curtailed for whatever reason and the Company is unable effectively to convene a general meeting, a general meeting may be convened by a notice advertised in at least one national daily newspaper. The notice in the national newspaper shall be deemed to have been duly served on all members at noon on the day when the advertisement appears. In any such case the Company must send confirmatory copies of the notice in writing at least 7 days before the meeting, if it becomes practicable to do so.

 

181.

NOTICE BY ADVERTISEMENT

Any notice which must be given to members and which is not expressly provided for by these Articles or the Statutes shall be sufficiently given if given by advertisement. The notice shall be advertised once in at least one national daily newspaper and shall be deemed to have been duly served on all members at noon on the day when the advertisement appears.

 

182.

RECORD DATES FOR SERVICE

Any notice or other document may be served or delivered by the Company by reference to the Register as it stands at any time not more than 21 days before the date of service or delivery. No change in the Register after that time will

 

79


invalidate that service or delivery. If any notice or other document is served on or delivered to any person in respect of a share in accordance with these Articles, a person deriving any title or interest in that share shall not be entitled to any further service or delivery of that notice or document. That person will be bound by every notice (unless otherwise provided by these Articles) in respect of such shares which before his name and address are entered in the Register has been duly given to the person from whom he derives his title.

 

183.

SIGNATURE OF NOTICE

The signature to any notice to be given by the Company may be written or printed.

UNTRACED SHAREHOLDERS

 

184.

MEMBERS ETC WITH NO VALID REGISTERED ADDRESS NEED NOT BE SENT NOTICES ETC.

 

184.1

Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 157, if any member’s registered address or the registered address of a person given information rights by virtue of section 146 of the Companies Act 2006, or (if he has no registered address within the United Kingdom) the address, if any, supplied by him to the Company as his address for service in the United Kingdom (“address for service”) appears to the Directors to be incorrect or out of date:

 

  184.1.1

the Directors may resolve to treat the member or the person given information rights referred to in Article 184.1 as if he had no registered address or address for service if notices or other documents sent to his registered address or address for service (as the case may be) have been returned undelivered on at least 2 consecutive occasions or if following one such occasion reasonable enquiries have failed to establish his new address for service; and

 

  184.1.2

subject to the passing of the Directors’ resolution, the Company will not be obliged to send the member or the person given information rights referred to in Article 184.1 notices of meetings or copies of the documents referred to in Article 167 until he has supplied a new registered address or address for service.

 

184.2

The provisions of this Article 184 also apply to any address, number or location supplied by a member or a person given information rights referred to in Article 184.1 for the purposes of documents or notices sent in electronic form.

 

80


185.

POWER OF COMPANY TO SELL SHARES OF UNTRACED MEMBERS

 

185.1

Subject to the Statutes, the Company may sell at the best price reasonably obtainable any share provided that:

 

  185.1.1

for a period of 12 years no cheque or warrant sent by the Company through the post in a prepaid envelope addressed to the member or to a person entitled by transmission to the share to either his address on the Register or his last known address, has been cashed, and no communication has been received by the Company from the member or the person entitled by transmission; and

 

  185.1.2

no less than 3 dividend warrants have been sent by post to the address referred to in Article 185.1.1 in the 12 year period referred to in that Article; and

 

  185.1.3

the Company has at the end of the 12 year period given notice of its intention to sell the share by advertising in both a national daily newspaper and in a newspaper circulating in the area in which the address referred to in Article 185.1.1 is located; and

 

  185.1.4

the Company has not during the further period of 3 months after the date of the advertisement and prior to the exercise of the power of sale received any communication from the member or person entitled by transmission.

 

185.2

If, during the 12 year period referred to in Article 185.1.1, further shares have been allotted in right of those held at the beginning of the period or of any previously allotted during such period and all the requirements of Articles 185.1.1 to 185.1.4 inclusive have been satisfied in regard to the further shares, the Company may also sell those further shares.

 

185.3

If any share referred to in Article 185.1.3 is sold, the Directors may appoint some person to execute or otherwise effect a transfer of the share or shares in the name and on behalf of the registered holder or the person (if any) entitled by transmission to the share or shares. The Directors may enter the purchaser’s name in the Register as holder. The purchaser will not be obliged to see how the purchase money is applied and his title to the shares will not be affected if the transfer was irregular or invalid in any way. After the purchaser’s name is entered in the Register the validity of the sale cannot be impeached by any person, and the remedy of any person aggrieved by the sale will be in damages only and only against the Company. The Company must account to the member or other person entitled to the share for the net proceeds of sale and will be deemed to be his debtor and not a trustee for him in respect of the sale. Any moneys not accounted for must be transferred to a separate account and will be a permanent debt of the Company, but may either be employed in the business of the Company or invested in such investments (other than shares of the Company or its holding company if any) as the Directors may from time to time think fit.

 

81


WINDING UP

 

186.

DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS BY LIQUIDATOR

Subject to the provisions of the Statutes and to any special rights for the time being attached to any class of shares, on a return of assets on liquidation or otherwise the surplus assets of the Company remaining after payment of its liabilities shall be distributed in proportion to the amounts paid up or deemed to be paid up on the ordinary shares of the Company then in issue.

 

187.

POWERS OF LIQUIDATOR

If the Company is wound up (whether the liquidation is voluntary, under supervision or by the court) the liquidator may, with the authority of a special resolution, divide among the members whose names are entered on the Register at the date of winding up, in specie or kind the whole or any part of the assets of the Company. Whether or not the assets consist of property of one kind or of different kinds the liquidator can set such value as he deems fair upon any one or more class or classes of property and can determine how such division is carried out as between such members or different classes of members. If any such division shall be other than in accordance with the existing rights of such members, every member shall have the same right of dissent and other ancillary rights as if the resolution were a special resolution passed in accordance with section 110 of the Insolvency Act 1986. The liquidator may also, with the authority of a special resolution, vest any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of such members as the liquidator thinks fit. The liquidation of the Company may then be closed and the Company dissolved, but no contributory shall be compelled to accept any shares or other property in respect of which there is a liability.

DESTRUCTION OF DOCUMENTS

 

188.

CIRCUMSTANCES IN WHICH COMPANY MAY DESTROY CERTAIN DOCUMENTS

 

188.1

Subject to the Statutes, the Company may destroy:

 

  188.1.1

all forms of transfer which have been registered, at any time after 6 years from the date of registration;

 

82


  188.1.2

all dividend mandates and any variations or cancellations of the mandates and all notifications of change of address, at any time after 2 years from the date they are recorded;

 

  188.1.3

all share certificates which have been cancelled, at any time after one year from the date of cancellation;

 

  188.1.4

all paid dividend warrants and cheques, at any time after one year from the date of actual payment;

 

  188.1.5

all proxy appointments which have been used for the purpose of a poll, at any time after one year from the date of such use. In the case of proxy appointments which are used for the purpose of a poll at an adjourned meeting as well as at the original meeting, the period of one year shall commence on the date they are last used;

 

  188.1.6

all proxy appointments which have not been used for the purpose of a poll, at any time after one month from the end of the meeting (or any adjournment ) to which the proxy appointments relates; and

 

  188.1.7

any other document on the basis of which any entry in the Register has been made, at any time after 6 years from the date on which an entry in the Register was first made in respect of it.

 

188.2

If the Company destroys a document in accordance with Article 188.1, it will be conclusively presumed in favour of the Company that:

 

  188.2.1

every entry in the Register which is purported to have been made on the basis of a destroyed document was properly made;

 

  188.2.2

every destroyed instrument of transfer was a properly registered, valid and effective instrument;

 

  188.2.3

every destroyed share certificate was valid and effective and properly cancelled;

 

  188.2.4

every other document referred to in Article 188.1 was a valid and effective document and in accordance with its recorded particulars in the books or records of the Company; and

 

  188.2.5

every destroyed paid dividend warrant and cheque was duly paid.

 

188.3

The provisions of this Article 188 shall apply only to documents destroyed in good faith and if the Company has not been given express notice of any claim to which the document might be relevant.

 

83


188.4

Nothing contained in this Article 188 shall impose any liability on the Company if documents are destroyed before the times set out in Article 188.1 or in any case where the conditions of Article 188.3 are not fulfilled.

 

188.5

References in this Article 188 to the destruction of any document include references to its disposal in any manner.

SECRECY

 

189.

MEMBERS NOT ENTITLED TO INFORMATION WHICH THE DIRECTORS CONSIDER WOULD BE INAPPROPRIATE TO COMMUNICATE TO THE PUBLIC

If the Directors think it would not be expedient in the interests of the Company to communicate information to the public, no member or general meeting or other meeting of members is entitled to require discovery of or any information relating to the Company’s trading or the trading of any of its subsidiaries or any matter that is or may be in the nature of a trade secret or secret process, or that may relate to the conduct of the business of the Company or any of its subsidiaries.

INDEMNITY

 

190.

INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OTHER OFFICERS

 

190.1

Subject to the provisions of, and so far as may be permitted by, the Statutes but without prejudice to any indemnity to which the person concerned may be otherwise entitled, every director, alternate director, secretary or other officer of the Company (other than any person (whether an officer or not) engaged by the Company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against all costs, charges, losses, expenses and liabilities incurred by him in the execution and discharge of his duties or the exercise of his powers or otherwise in relation to or in connection with his duties, powers or office as a director of the Company for any other member of the Group, including any liability which may attach to him in respect of any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to anything done or omitted to be done or alleged to have been done or omitted to be done by him as a director provided that such indemnity shall not apply in respect of any liability incurred by such director or alternate director:

 

  190.1.1

to any member of the Group; or

 

  190.1.2

to pay a fine imposed in criminal proceedings; or

 

  190.1.3

to pay a sum payable to a regulatory authority by way of a penalty in respect of non-compliance with any requirement of a regulatory nature (however arising); or

 

84


  190.1.4

in defending any criminal proceedings in which he is convicted; or

 

  190.1.5

in defending any civil proceedings brought by any member of the Group or any in which judgement is given against him; or

 

  190.1.6

in connection with any application under any of the following provisions in which the court refuses to grant him relief, namely

 

  (a)

section 661(3) or (4) of the Companies Act 2006 (acquisition of shares by an innocent nominee); or

 

  (b)

section 1157 of the Companies Act 2006 (general power to grant relief in case of honest and reasonable conduct).

 

190.2

The Directors may purchase and maintain at the cost of the Company insurance cover for or for the benefit of every director, alternate director, secretary or other officer of any member of the Group against any liability which may attach to him in respect of any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust by him in relation to any member of the Group, including anything done or omitted to be done or alleged to have been done or omitted to be done by him as a director, alternate director, secretary or other officer of any member of the Group.

 

190.3

Subject to the provisions of, and so far as may be permitted by, the Companies Act 2006, the Company shall be entitled to fund the expenditure of every director, alternate director, secretary or other officer of the Company incurred or to be incurred:

 

  190.3.1

in defending any criminal, civil or regulatory proceedings in connection with any alleged negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust by such director, secretary or other officer in relation to any member of the Group; or

 

  190.3.2

in connection with any application under section 1157 of the Companies Act 2006 or section 661(3) or (4) of the Companies Act 2006

provided that any director or alternate director will be obliged to repay such amounts no later than:

 

  190.3.3

in the event of the director or alternate director being convicted in the proceedings, the date when the conviction becomes final; or

 

  190.3.4

in the event of judgment being given against him in proceedings, the date when the judgment becomes final; or

 

85


  190.3.5

in the event of the court refusing to grant him relief on the application, the date when the refusal of relief becomes final.

 

190.4

For the purposes of this Article 190 the reference to any conviction, judgement or refusal of relief is a reference to the final decision in proceedings. A conviction, judgement or refusal of relief becomes final:

 

  190.4.1

if not appealed against, at the end of the period for bringing an appeal; or

 

  190.4.2

if appealed against, at the time when the appeal (or any further appeal) is disposed of (ie if it is determined and the period for bringing a further appeal has ended or if it is abandoned or otherwise ceases to have effect).

 

86

Exhibit 10.1

Abcam plc

Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)

 

Approved by Shareholders:    3rd November 2008   
Adopted by Company:    3rd November 2008   
Renewed by Shareholders:    8th November 2013   
Amended by Company:    3rd November 2014   
Amended by Company:    11th September 2015   
Amended by Company:    6th November 2018   


Index

 

1   Grant of Awards      1  
2   Rights of Participants During the Holding Period      1  
3   Release and/or Exercise of Awards      1  
4   Lapse of Awards      3  
5   Taxation      3  
6   Cessation of Employment      4  
7   Take-over, Reconstruction, Amalgamation, Winding up, Merger and Demerger of the Company      5  
8   Limits & Restrictions      6  
9   Adjustments & Amendments      6  
10   Shares      7  
11   Administration      8  
12       Definitions      9  
SCHEDULE 1      12  
1.   DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION      12  
2.   CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT      12  
3.   SHARES      12  


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

1

Grant of Awards

 

1.1

The Committee may in its absolute discretion grant Awards to Eligible Employees at any time except during a Close Period.

 

1.2

The Committee shall determine in respect of each grant of Awards:-

 

  (a)

the Date of Grant;

 

  (b)

those Eligible Employees who shall receive an Award;

 

  (c)

the number of Shares subject to each Award granted;

 

  (d)

the Holding Period in respect of each Award;

 

  (e)

whether a Retention Requirement is to apply, and if so, details of the Retention Requirement and the applicable Retention Period;

 

  (f)

the Performance Requirements applicable to each Award; and

 

  (g)

any other terms and conditions applying to each Award including in the case of Awards granted in the form of Nil Cost Options, the Exercise Price.

 

1.3

The Committee shall issue an Award Certificate to each Participant setting out the Committee’s determinations under Rule 1.2 in respect of that Participant’s Award.

 

2

Rights of Participants During the Holding Period

 

2.1

A Participant shall have no voting rights or rights to receive dividends in respect of Shares subject to his Award during the applicable holding period:

 

  (a)

prior to the Release of the Award in the case of a conditional entitlement to Shares,

 

  (b)

prior to the Exercise of the Award in the case of a Nil Cost Option.

 

3

Release and/or Exercise of Awards

 

3.1

Subject to Rules 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 or 3.7 and 5.31 Awards shall be Released:

 

  (a)

at the end of the Holding Period;

 

  (b)

subject to the terms of any applicable Retention Requirement;

 

  (c)

subject to the satisfaction of any Performance Requirements or other terms and conditions imposed pursuant to Rules 1.2(f) and 1.2(g) respectively; and

 

  (d)

subject to the Participant entering into such election as the Committee requires under Chapter 2 of Part 7 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003.

 

3.2

Awards may be Released without fully satisfying the requirements of Rule 3.1 in accordance with Rule 62 and Rule 73.

 

3.3

In the case of Awards in the form of Nil Cost Options which have been Released in accordance with Rule 3.1 or 3.2, a Participant may Exercise his Awards from the date of Release to the earliest of the following dates:-

 

  (a)

the tenth anniversary of the Date of Grant; and

 

  (b)

the end of the periods set out in Rule 6 and Rule 7.

 

3.4

Notwithstanding any other provision of these Rules, the Committee may reduce or cancel any Award that has not been Released if:

 

 

1 

Taxation – Release of Shares may be prohibited if the Eligible Employee has not made a Tax Payment or agreed to sell sufficient Shares to meet this Tax Payment.

2 

On cessation of employment.

3 

On Take-over, Reconstruction, Amalgamation and Winding up of the Company.

 

 

Pg.1


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

  (a)

there has been a material adverse adjustment to the audited consolidated accounts of the Company for any accounting period ending before the Release of the Award; or

 

  (b)

there is reasonable evidence of fraud or other gross misconduct and. in relation to any Award granted following 1 July 2015, material dishonesty, material failure of risk management and/or material wrong-doing on the part of or by the Participant.

 

3.5

In relation to any Award made following 1 July 2015, and notwithstanding any other provision of these Rules, the Committee may at any time prior to the second anniversary of the date on which any Award has been Released:

 

  (a)

reduce the number of Shares under another Award which has not been Released;

 

  (b)

cancel another Award which has not been Released;

 

  (c)

impose further terms or conditions on another Award which has not been Released;

 

  (d)

reduce or cancel awards made to the Participant following 1 July 2015 under other share incentive plans operated by the Company;

 

  (e)

reduce or cancel any bonus or other cash payment due to a Participant; or

 

  (f)

require a Participant to make a cash payment to, or to the order of, a Group Company

if:-

 

  (g)

there has been a material adverse adjustment to the audited consolidated accounts of the Company for any accounting period; or

 

  (h)

there is reasonable evidence of fraud or other gross misconduct, material dishonesty, material failure of risk management and/or material wrong-doing on the part of or by the Participant.

 

3.6

In relation to any Award made following 1 July 2015, the Committee may take any of the actions referred to in Rules 3.53.5(a) to 3.53.5(f) (inclusive) throughout any such period that a Participant is subject to a work-related criminal investigation.

 

3.7

In relation to any Award made following 1 July 2015, the Committee may decide at any time that an Award which has not been Released shall be reduced or cancelled to give effect to a clawback provision of any form contained in any other share incentive plan or bonus plan operated by any Group Company. The reduction or cancellation of the Award shall be in accordance with the terms of the clawback provision in the relevant plan or, in the absence of any such term, on such basis as the Committee considers appropriate.

 

3.8

The Committee shall act in good faith and treat all Participants fairly, reasonably and equitably when taking any step under any of Rules 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 or 3.7 and shall notify any affected Participant as soon as possible.

 

3.9

The Committee may in its discretion make any alteration or amendment to Rules 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 or 3.7 as is necessary or desirable to take account of local laws affecting any Group Company or any Participant.

 

 

Pg.2


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

4

Lapse of Awards

 

4.1

All subsisting Awards shall lapse on the earliest of the following events:-

 

  (a)

the date on which the Award lapses pursuant to Rule 64 or Rule 75;

 

  (b)

when it has been determined by the Committee that the conditions of Rule 3.1 (c) cannot be satisfied;

 

  (c)

the tenth anniversary of the Date of Grant; or

 

  (d)

the date on which the Participant is adjudicated bankrupt.

 

5

Taxation

 

5.1

The grant of an Award to an Eligible Employee under the Plan shall be conditional upon the agreement of that Eligible Employee to indemnify his employing Group Company for any Tax Payment, such agreement to be deemed by the failure of the Eligible Employee to renounce the Award in accordance with Rule 11.5.

 

5.2

The Participant shall pay all expenses and Taxes which arise or result from the grant, Release or Exercise of an Award, provided that the Company in its absolute discretion and subject to any statutory prohibition may meet any stamp duty or liability for any other Taxes or expenses arising which it deems appropriate.

 

5.3

In a case where a Group Company by virtue of the grant, Release or Exercise of an Award shall be obliged to make a Tax Payment, the grant, Release or Exercise shall not take place, unless:-

 

  (a)

the Group Company has received payment prior to the grant, Release or Exercise from the Participant of an amount not less than the Tax Payment; or

 

  (b)

authority from the Participant to deduct the Tax Payment from his Emoluments has been received; or

 

  (c)

that Participant giving irrevocable instructions to the Company’s brokers (or any person acceptable to the Company) for the sale of sufficient Shares on the Release or Exercise to realise an amount equal to the Tax Payment and authority to pay the proceeds of such sale to the employing Group Company.

 

5.4

The Committee may determine that any Award granted under the Plan shall be subject to additional and/or modified terms and conditions relating to the grant, Release or Exercise of an Award as may be necessary to comply with or take account of any securities, exchange control or taxation laws, regulations, practice or other laws of any territory which may apply to the relevant Eligible Employee, Participant or Group Company.

 

5.5

In exercising its discretion under Rule 5.4 above the Committee may:-

 

  (a)

require an Eligible Employee and/or a Participant to make such declarations or take such other action as may be required for the purpose of any securities, exchange control or taxation laws, regulations, practice or other laws of any territory which may be applicable to him at the Date of Grant, Release or Exercise; and

 

  (b)

adopt any supplemental rules or procedures governing the grant, Release or Exercise of an Award as may be required for the purpose of any securities, exchange control or taxation laws, regulations, practice or other laws of any territory which may be applicable to an Eligible Employee or Participant.

 

5.6

The Committee may in its discretion determine whether the Participant shall be liable for the employers’ national insurance contributions payable on the Release or Exercise of an Award.

 

 

4 

On cessation of employment.

5 

On Take-over, Reconstruction, Amalgamation and Winding up of the Company.

 

 

Pg.3


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

6

Cessation of Employment

 

6.1

Subject to Rule 6.2, if a Participant ceases to be employed by a Group Company for any reason an Award that has not been Released shall lapse unless the Committee in its absolute discretion determines otherwise for reasons including, amongst others, injury, disability, ill health, retirement, redundancy and death.

 

6.2

If the Committee, in accordance with its discretion under Rule 6.1, determines that an Award shall not lapse on cessation, the proportion of the Award which shall be Released (subject to any adjustment pursuant to any of Rules 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 or 3.7) will be calculated based upon the amount of the relevant Holding Period completed on the date of cessation and on the satisfaction of the Performance Requirements relating to the Award.

 

6.3

For the purposes of calculating the number of Awards which shall be Released in accordance with Rule 6.2 the Committee shall:-

 

  (a)

firstly, pro-rate the number of Awards based on the amount of the relevant Holding Period completed on the date of cessation; and

 

  (b)

secondly, determine when the Performance Requirements shall be measured and when the Awards are Released, which shall be either:

 

  6.3.1

at the date of cessation of employment; or

 

  6.3.2

the end of the relevant Holding Period.

 

6.4

Where a Participant who ceases to be employed by a Group Company is subject to a Retention Requirement, the Retention Requirement shall continue to apply after the Participant has ceased to be employed by a Group Company, unless the Committee determines otherwise.

 

6.5

It shall be a condition of participation in the Plan that a Participant shall not be entitled to any compensation in the event of cessation, lapse or alteration of any actual or prospective rights under the Plan or under any Award granted thereunder. No provisions of the Plan form part of any contract of employment between any Group Company and a Participant.

 

6.6

Nothing in the Plan or in any document issued pursuant thereto shall confer upon any person any right to continue in the employ of any Group Company or shall affect the right of any Group Company to terminate the employment of any person, or shall impose upon any Group Company or employees of such Group Company, the Committee or their respective servants or agents any liability for the loss of any rights under the Plan which may result if that person’s employment is so terminated (whether such termination is in breach of the relevant terms and conditions of employment or otherwise). In no circumstances shall any Participant, by reason of ceasing to be employed by any Group Company be entitled to any compensation for any loss of any actual or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which he might otherwise have enjoyed, whether such compensation is claimed by way of damages for wrongful or unfair dismissal or other breach of contract or by way of compensation for loss of office or otherwise.

 

6.7

For the purposes of Rule 6, no Participant shall be treated as ceasing to be employed by a Group Company until he ceases to hold office or employment in any Group Company.

 

6.8

No benefit under the Plan shall be pensionable.

 

6.9

In the case of Awards granted in the form of Nil Cost Options, the Participant shall have, such period as is determined by the Committee in its discretion, from his date of cessation of employment to Exercise all Released Awards including those Awards Released as a result of the operation of Rule 6, at the end of which period any Awards that have not been Exercised shall lapse.

 

 

Pg.4


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

7

Take-over, Reconstruction, Amalgamation, Winding up, Merger and Demerger of the Company

 

7.1

If any company or person acting alone or in concert with another or others obtains Control of the Company (“Control Change”), the Committee on becoming aware thereof shall notify each Participant.

 

7.2

If the Court sanctions a scheme of arrangement or compromise under Section 899 of the Companies Act 2006 which amounts to a Control Change, the Committee on becoming aware thereof shall notify each Participant.

 

7.3

If any company or person becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares under Sections 979 to 982 or 983 to 985 of the Companies Act 2006, the Committee on becoming aware thereof shall notify each Participant.

 

7.4

Subject to Rule 7.5, on the occurrence of any of the events set out in Rule 7.1, Rule 7.2 and Rule 7.3, a proportion of the Award shall be Released (subject to any adjustment pursuant to any of the Rules 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 or 3.7) and any Retention Requirement shall cease to apply, unless the Committee determines otherwise. The proportion of the Award which shall be Released shall be determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion. In exercising its discretion the Committee shall take account of whatever factors it considers appropriate, including the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Requirements on such date and the amount of the relevant Holding Period completed.

 

7.5

For the purposes of Rule 7.1, Rule 7.2 and Rule 7.8 a Control Change shall only occur where there is a Control Change of the ultimate Holding Company of the Company.

 

7.6

If a voluntary winding up of the Company is proposed or if an order is made for the compulsory winding up of the Company, the Committee, in its absolute discretion, shall notify each Participant. On the occurrence of such event all Awards shall be Released.

 

7.7

If, as a result of events specified in Rule 7.1 or Rule 7.2 above, a company has obtained Control of the Company or if a company has become bound or entitled as stated in Rule 7.3 above (such company referred to as the “Acquiring Company”), the Participant may, by agreement with the Acquiring Company, cancel each subsisting Award (the “Old Award”) in exchange for a replacement award (the “New Award”) provided that the New Award:-

 

  (a)

is over shares in the Acquiring Company or some other company which has Control of the Acquiring Company or is a member of a consortium owning either the Acquiring Company or having Control of the Acquiring Company;

 

  (b)

is a right over such number of shares as have an aggregate Market Value equal to those Shares subject to the Old Award at the date of exchange and is otherwise upon identical terms to the Old Award.

The New Award shall for all purposes of the Plan be treated as having been acquired on the same Date of Grant as the Old Award and thereafter references in these Rules to the Company, Shares and Awards, where appropriate, shall be construed as references to the Acquiring Company and its shares and New Awards.

 

7.8

In the event that the Company merges with another company, or any of the businesses of the Group are demerged (whether such merger or demerger is effected by way of sale, distribution or in any other manner) the Committee shall have the discretion whether or not to take any action pursuant to this Rule 7.8 and, if they decide to do so, shall notify each Participant whether any Award shall be Released and/or adjustments be made to the number of Shares comprised in an Award in such manner and with effect from such date as the Committee shall determine to be appropriate and the advisors of the Company confirm to be fair and reasonable provided that should the merger or demerger amount to a Control Change then the Committee shall apply the provisions of Rule 7.4.

 

 

Pg.5


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

7.9

The Committee shall notify Participants as soon as reasonably practicable of any adjustments made pursuant to Rule 7.8 and may call in Award Certificates for endorsement or replacement.

 

7.10

In the case of Awards granted in the form of Nil Cost Options, the participants shall have such period as determined by the Committee in its discretion from the date of the occurrence of any of the events set out in Rules 7.1 to 7.4 (inclusive), Rule 7.7 and Rule 7.8 to Exercise all Nil Cost Options including those Options Released as a result of the operation of this Rule 7, at the end of which period any Options not exercised shall lapse.

 

8

Limits & Restrictions

 

8.1

An Award shall be personal to a Participant and neither the Award nor any rights under the Award may be transferred, assigned, pledged, charged or otherwise disposed of by a Participant to any other person (except in accordance with these Rules) and if a Participant shall do, suffer or permit any such act or thing whereby he would or might be deprived of the legal and/or beneficial ownership of an Award that Award shall lapse forthwith.

 

8.2

In respect of Awards which shall be satisfied by the subscription of Shares, the total number of Shares over which such Awards may be granted as determined on any Date of Grant, when added to the number of Shares issued or remaining issuable pursuant to rights to subscribe for Shares granted under the Plan and Any Other Share Plan during the preceding 10 years shall not exceed 10% of the number of Shares in issue on the relevant Date of Grant. For the purposes of this Rule 8.2, there shall be ignored Awards to subscribe for Shares:-

 

  (a)

granted under Any Other Share Plan which were granted prior to the Company’s first listing of Shares on the Exchange; or

 

  (b)

granted under the Plan or Any Other Share Plan which have lapsed, become void, been cancelled or which otherwise become incapable of being Released.

For the purposes of this Rule 8.2 where Awards are intended to be satisfied or are satisfied by the transfer and/or re-issue of Treasury Shares these Shares shall be deemed to count against the limits set out in this Rule.

 

8.3

The maximum level of Award (being the aggregate Market Value of Shares subject to the Award at the date of grant) that can be granted to an Eligible Employee under this Plan in any financial year shall be limited to 400% of such Eligible Employee’s Emoluments. For the purposes of this Rule 8.3, there shall be ignored Awards granted under the Plan or awards under Any Other Share Plan which have lapsed, become void, been cancelled or which otherwise become incapable of being Released.

 

8.4

The Plan shall terminate on the earlier of the following dates:

 

  (a)

any date determined by the Committee to be the date of termination of the Plan; and

 

  (b)

the fifth anniversary of the Adoption Date or Date of Renewal.

 

8.5

Following termination of the Plan pursuant to this Rule no further Awards shall be granted, but the subsisting rights and obligations of Participants at that time shall continue in force as if the Plan had not been terminated.

 

9

Adjustments & Amendments

 

9.1

If a variation of the issued share capital of the Company by way of a bonus issue or rights issue, sub-division, consolidation, reduction or otherwise shall take place then the number of Shares subject to an Award and the terms and conditions

 

 

Pg.6


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

  applying to such Award shall be adjusted in such manner and with effect from such date as the Committee may determine to be appropriate and as the advisors of the Company shall have confirmed in writing to be, in their opinion, fair and reasonable.

 

9.2

The Committee shall have the power from time to time to make and amend such regulations for the implementation and administration of the Plan in a manner consistent with the Plan as it thinks fit including (without limitation) to interpret and apply the Rules so as to give effect to the intention of any Retention Requirement, and to make any amendments to these Rules.

 

9.3

Without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting, an amendment may not be made for the benefit of existing or future Participants to the Rules relating to:

 

  (a)

the basis for determining an Eligible Employee’s entitlement (or otherwise) to be made an Award and/or to acquire Shares on the exercise of an Nil Cost Option and/or the Release of an Award (as the case may be) under the Plan;

 

  (b)

the persons to whom an Award may be made;

 

  (c)

the limit on the aggregate number of Shares over which Awards may be made;

 

  (d)

the limit on the number of Shares over which Awards may be made to any one Eligible Employee;

 

  (e)

the price at which Shares may be acquired under an Award;

 

  (f)

this Rule 9.3

except for:

 

  (g)

an amendment which is of a minor nature and benefits the administration of the Plan; or

 

  (h)

an amendment which is of a minor nature and is necessary or desirable in order to take account of a change of legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for Participants, the Company or some other Group Company.

 

9.4

No alteration shall be made which would materially affect any subsisting rights of Participants granted prior to the date of the alteration without the prior consent or sanction of the majority of that number of Participants who responded to the notification by the Company of such proposed alteration except in accordance with Rules 5.4 and 5.5.

 

9.5

Any matters pertaining or pursuant to the Plan which are not dealt with by these Rules and any uncertainty or dispute as to the meaning of these Rules shall be determined or resolved by decision of the Committee which shall be binding on the Company and all Participants.

 

9.6

In the application of Rule 1.2(f), if events subsequently occur which cause the Committee to consider that the existing Performance Requirements have become unfair or impractical it may, in its discretion (provided such discretion is exercised fairly and reasonably) amend the relevant Performance Requirements so that in the reasonable opinion of the Committee they shall be no more or less difficult to abide by or satisfy as when they were originally imposed or last amended.

 

10

Shares

 

10.1

Subject to Rule 10.2 below, any Shares to be issued pursuant to the Release or Exercise of an Award shall be allotted and issued, and any Shares to be transferred shall be transferred to the relevant Participant or a nominee nominated by a Participant not later than 30 days after the date of Release or Exercise of the Award. Such Shares shall rank pari passu in all respects with other Shares of the same class save that the Participant shall have no entitlement in relation to rights

 

 

Pg.7


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

  attaching to the Shares until the date of such allotment or transfer. Shares to be allotted shall not rank for any dividend or other distribution to be paid by reference to a record date before the date of allotment.

 

10.2

Any allotment and issue or transfer of Shares pursuant to this Plan shall be subject to such consents (if any) of HM Treasury and/or other authorities as may from time to time be required.

 

10.3

The Company shall apply to the relevant Exchange on which the Shares are listed for Shares issued pursuant to the Release of Awards to be admitted to trading on such Exchange on or as soon as practicable after allotment.

 

10.4

The Release of Awards may be satisfied by the subscription of Shares by the Trustees of the Trust and/or the transfer of Shares held by the Trustees of the Trust and/or the issue of Shares and/or the transfer of Treasury Shares by the Company pursuant to section 727 of the Companies Act 2006 or any combination thereof. The Committee may determine which method or combination thereof shall be used to satisfy the Release or Exercise of Awards.

 

10.5

The Trustees may determine in their discretion to undertake the responsibility of satisfying Awards on behalf of the Company.

 

10.6

Shares that are issued may not be subscribed for at less than their nominal value.

 

10.7

The Company shall:-

 

  (a)

when necessary keep available for issue sufficient authorised and unissued Shares to satisfy all rights to subscribe for Shares from time to time subsisting under Awards granted pursuant to the Plan, taking account of any other obligations of the Company to allot and issue Shares; and/or

 

  (b)

ensure when necessary that it is in a position to satisfy or procure the satisfaction of all rights to acquire Shares from time to time subsisting under the Plan, taking account of other obligations of the Company in relation to the provision of Shares.

 

11

Administration

 

11.1

Notices or documents under the Plan required to be given by the Company to an Eligible Employee or a Participant shall be properly given if delivered to him at his normal place of work or sent to him by first class post at his last known address and any notice or document required to be given to the Company shall be properly given if delivered or sent by first class post to the registered office of the Company from time to time addressed to the Company Secretary.

 

11.2

Participation in the Plan shall not entitle a Participant to receive copies of any notice or other document sent by the Company to its shareholders prior to the Release and/or Exercise of the Award.

 

11.3

The Company shall bear the costs of establishing and administering the Plan.

 

11.4

The Company shall maintain or cause to be maintained all necessary accounts and records relating to the Plan.

 

11.5

A Participant may at any time prior to the Release and/or Exercise of an Award renounce the Award (in whole or in part) by serving notice in writing on the Company of such intention. The renunciation shall be effective from the date of receipt of such notice by the Company.

 

11.6

The Rules and the operation of the Plan shall be governed and construed in accordance with English Law.

 

 

Pg.8


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

12

Definitions

 

12.1

In these Rules the following words and expressions have the following meanings:-

 

  “Act”    The Corporation Tax Act 2010.
  “Adoption Date”    3rd November 2008
  “Any Other Share Plan”    any “employees’ share scheme” (as such term is defined in section 1166 of the Companies Act 2006) (other than this Plan) which provides for the subscription of Shares by or on behalf of employees of the Company, or any associated company (within the meaning of Section 449 of the Act).
  “Award”    a conditional entitlement to Shares or a Nil Cost Option over Shares.
  “Award Certificate”    a document evidencing an Award issued by the Company in such form as the Committee may from time to time prescribe.
  “Close Period”    such time as Eligible Employees of the Company are prohibited from dealing in Shares, for whatever reason, in accordance with rule 21 of the Alternative Investment Market Rules or the relevant provision in any regulations governing an Exchange (as replaced, amended or re-enacted from time to time) and/or such code as the Company may have established from time to time or such other statutory, regulatory or other prohibition from dealing in Shares or rights over Shares.
  “Committee”    the remuneration committee of the Company.
  “Company”    Abcam plc (registered number 03509322).
  “Control”    control within the meaning of Section 1124 of the Act (and “Controlled” shall be construed accordingly).
  “Date of Grant”    the date on which an Award is granted under Rule 1.
  “Date of Renewal”    8th November 2013
  “Eligible Employee”    any employee of a Group Company with a minimum period of continuous service with a Group Company, such minimum period to be determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion, or a trustee acting on behalf of such employee.
  “Emoluments”    base salary or notional base salary provided to an Eligible Employee.
  “Exchange”    the Alternative Investment Market or any other recognised exchange on which the Company’s Shares are listed from time to time.
  “Group”    the Company, any “Subsidiary” of the Company, any “Holding Company” of the Company and any Subsidiary of any such Holding Company (as such terms are defined in section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006) and the term “Group Company” shall be construed accordingly.
  “Exercise”    the payment of the Exercise Price and the resulting purchase of the Shares subject to the Released Award.
  “Exercise Price”    such value determined by the Committee in its discretion which must be paid by the Participant to acquire the Shares subject to his Released Award. The Committee may determine an Exercise Price for each Share subject to an Award or a single Exercise Price to Exercise some or all of the Shares subject to an Award.
  “Financial Year”    the accounting reference period of the Company as defined in section 291 of the Companies Act 2006.

 

 

Pg.9


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

  “Holding Period”    the period set by the Committee in accordance with Rule 1.2(d) which shall be three years from the Date of Grant of the Award or such other period set by the Committee in its discretion.
  “Market Value”    on any dealing day means an amount equal to the closing price quoted for a Share on the Exchange.
  “Nil Cost Option”    a right to purchase a number of Shares subject to the satisfaction of the conditions and the payment of the Exercise Price.
  “Participant”    an Eligible Employee who has been granted and still has a subsisting Award. Reference to a Participant shall include, where the context so admits or requires, his personal representatives.
  “Plan”    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan as established by the Rules.
  “Performance Requirements”    such performance requirements or conditions (if any) as the Committee shall determine which must normally be satisfied before an Award may be Released.
  “Released”    shall mean:-
      

•  where an Award has been granted in the form of a conditional share entitlement the point when the beneficial and legal ownership of the Shares subject to an Award transfer to the Participant; and

      

•  where an Award has been granted in the form of a Nil Cost Option the point at which the Award can be Exercised.

       “Release” shall be construed accordingly.
  “Retention Period”    the period or periods of up to three years beginning on the first day immediately after Shares subject to an Award have been Released, as the Committee may determine
  “Retention Requirement”    a requirement imposed on a Participant in relation to an Award made following 1 July 2015 to retain a specified percentage (as determined by the Committee and in accordance with such arrangements as the Committee shall determine) of the Shares subject to an Award which has been Released throughout the Retention Period, subject to the Participant being permitted to sell such Shares as may be required to satisfy the indemnity in Rule 5.1.
  “Rules”    these rules and the Schedules as amended from time to time in accordance with the amendment provisions of these rules.
  “Schedule”    the schedule to the Rules.
  “Shares”    ordinary shares in the capital of the Company.
  “Tax”    includes any present or future tax, levy, impost, duty, charge, fee, deduction or withholding of any nature, made by any competent authority and interest or penalties in respect thereof.
  “Tax Payment”    an amount of Tax paid or payable by the Participant or the Group Company where the liability for such Tax is the Participant’s in respect of the grant or Release or Exercise of an Award.
  “Trust”    any employee benefit trust which falls within section 86 of the Inheritance Tax Act 1984 and “Trustees” shall be construed accordingly.

 

12.2

Where the context so admits or requires words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa and words importing the masculine shall include the feminine and neuter.

 

 

Pg.10


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

12.3

Any reference to a statute or a statutory provision shall be construed as if it referred also to that statute or provision as the same may from time to time be consolidated, replaced, amended or re-enacted and to any related statutory instrument or other subordinate legislation in force from time to time.

 

12.4

Wherever the Rules refer to the Committee having the ability to determine, decide or change matters howsoever this shall mean that the Committee shall be entitled to do so in its absolute and unfettered discretion and no person shall have any right to challenge, dispute or appeal whatsoever against the Committee’s determination, decision or change howsoever made.

 

12.5

Headings, notes and footnotes to these Rules are included for convenience only and shall not affect the interpretation or construction of these Rules.

 

12.6

Reference to a “company” shall be construed so as to include any company, corporation or other body corporate, wherever and however incorporated or established.

 

12.7

References to a “person” shall be construed so as to include any individual, firm, company, government, state or agency of a state, local or municipal authority or government body or any joint venture, association or partnership (whether or not having a separate legal personality).

 

 

Pg.11


Abcam plc    Abcam plc Long-Term Incentive Plan  

 

SCHEDULE 1

The rules of the Abcam plc Executive Long-Term Incentive Plan (“Plan”) will apply to Awards held by Participants, who are or who may become, subject to any US tax or social security contributions liability in connection with an Award, except as set out in this Schedule 1. Where there is any conflict between the rules of the Plan and this Schedule 1, the terms of this Schedule 1 will prevail.

 

1.

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

  1.1.

“Awards” granted in accordance with this Schedule 1 may only be made in the form of conditional entitlements to Shares and the rules of the Plan, as amended by this Schedule 1, will be construed accordingly;

 

2.

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

  2.1.

The following words will be deleted from rule 6.1:

“retirement”.

 

3.

SHARES

 

  3.1.

The first sentence in Rule 10.1 will be deleted and replaced with the following wording:

“Subject to Rule 10.2 below, any Shares:

 

  3.1.1

to be issued (including from treasury) pursuant to the Release of an Award, shall be allotted and issued to the Participant by the later of:

 

   

15th March following the end of the calendar year in which the date of Release of the Award occurred; and

 

   

the 15th day of the third month in the Financial Year following the Financial Year in which the date of the Release of the Award occurred.

 

  3.1.2

to be transferred pursuant to the Release of an Award, shall be transferred to the relevant Participant or a nominee nominated by a Participant by the later of:

 

   

31 December in the calendar year in which the date of Release of the Award occurred; and

 

   

the 15th day of the third month in the Financial Year following the Financial Year in which the date of the Release of the Award occurred.

 

 

Pg.12

Exhibit 10.2

 

LOGO

AbShare

Approved by the Remuneration Committee on behalf of the Board of Directors on 4 September 2018

 


CONTENTS

 

1.

 

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

     3  

2.

 

INVITATION

     5  

3.

 

ENROLING IN THE PLAN

     6  

4.

 

GRANT OF AWARDS

     6  

5.

 

PERFORMANCE CONDITION

     6  

6.

 

PLAN LIMITS

     6  

7.

 

VESTING OF THE PURCHASED SHARE AWARD

     7  

8.

 

VESTING OF THE MATCHING SHARE AWARD

     7  

9.

 

THE HOLDING PERIOD

     7  

10.

 

TAXATION AND REGULATORY ISSUES

     8  

11.

 

CASH EQUIVALENT

     8  

12.

 

WITHDRAWAL FROM THE PLAN

     8  

13.

 

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     8  

14.

 

CORPORATE EVENTS

     9  

15.

 

ADJUSTMENTS

     10  

16.

 

AMENDMENTS

     11  

17.

 

LEGAL ENTITLEMENT

     11  

18.

 

GENERAL

     11  

SCHEDULE 1—CHINA

     13  

1.

 

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     13  

SCHEDULE 2—USA

     14  

1.

 

VESTING OF AWARDS

     14  

2.

 

CASH EQUIVALENT

     14  

3.

 

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     14  

4.

 

ADJUSTMENTS

     15  

5.

 

AMENDMENTS

     15  

 

2


AbShare

 

1.

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Plan, unless otherwise stated, the words and expressions below have the following meanings:

 

“AIM”    AIM, a market operated by the London Stock Exchange;
“AIM Rules”    the AIM Rules for companies published by the London Stock Exchange, as amended from time to time;
“Award”    a Purchased Share Award and/or a Matching Share Award;
“Board”    the Board of Directors of the Company, any duly authorised committee of the board or any delegate of the board;
“Company”    Abcam plc, a company incorporated in England and Wales under number 03509322;
“Control”    the meaning given by section 1124 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010;
“Dealing Day”    any day on which AIM, or any other successor body, is open for business;
“Dealing Restrictions”    restrictions imposed by MAR, the Company’s share dealing code, the AIM Rules or any applicable laws or regulations which impose restrictions on share dealing;
“Eligible Employee”    an employee of the Company (excluding executive directors) or any of its Subsidiaries who, on the date on which the Board makes its determination pursuant to rule 2.1, are employed on a permanent contract or equivalent basis;
“Enrolment Period”    the period during which Eligible Employees may enter into a Share Purchase Agreement to participate in the Plan pursuant to rule 3;
“Exchange Rate”    the exchange rate determined by the Board on any particular day, which will usually be the spot rate as quoted in the Financial Times for the immediately preceding Dealing Day, or such other source as the Board may determine;
“GDPR”    the EU General Data Protection Regulation 2016/679, as amended from time to time;
“Grant Date”    the date on which an Award is granted;
“Group Member”    the Company, or any Participating Subsidiary of the Company or any company which is the Company’s holding company or a Subsidiary of the Company’s holding company;
“Holding Period”    a period of one year or any other period as determined by the Board, starting on the Vesting Date;
“Internal Reorganisation”    where immediately after any event described in rule 14, all or substantially all of the issued share capital of the acquiring company is owned directly or indirectly by the persons who were shareholders in the Company immediately before such event;

 

3


“Invitation”    an invitation to enrol in the Plan during the Enrolment Period;
“Matching Share Award”    a conditional right to acquire Shares in accordance with the rules of the Plan at no cost to the Participant;
“MAR”    the EU Market Abuse Regulation 596/2014, as amended from time to time;
“Abcam Award Share Ratio”    the ratio of Shares comprised in a Matching Share Award to the number of Shares comprised in the related Purchased Share Award;
“Monthly Contribution”    the payments made by or on behalf of a Participant, usually each month in the Participant’s local currency in respect of the Participant’s Plan Percentage pursuant to a Share Purchase Agreement;
“Participant”    an Eligible Employee who has entered in to Share Purchase Agreement to participate in the Plan pursuant to rule 3, or their estate following the Participant’s death;
“Performance Condition”    a condition or conditions imposed under rule 2.1.5b) which relates to performance;
“Performance Period”    the period over which a Performance Condition will be measured which, unless the Board determines otherwise, will be the Savings Period applicable to the Participant’s related Purchased Share Award;
“Plan”    the rules of AbShare, in its present form or as from time to time amended;
“Plan Percentage”    the percentage of base salary before deductions for income tax and/or social security contributions to be contributed to the Plan by Participants over the Savings Period, to be applied in the acquisition of Shares pursuant to a Purchased Share Award;
“Purchase Price”    the price payable for the Shares comprised in a Participant’s Awards, which, will be the sterling equivalent of the Participant’s aggregate Monthly Contributions at the end of the Savings Period;
“Purchased Share Award”    a conditional right to acquire Shares in accordance with the rules of the Plan at the Purchase Price;
“Savings Period”    a period, determined by the Board, over which Monthly Contributions are made by a Participant;
“Share”    a fully paid ordinary share in the capital of the Company;
“Share Purchase Agreement”    the agreement pursuant to which a Participant enrols in the Plan and agrees to make Monthly Contributions pursuant to rule 3.1.2;
“Subsidiary”    the meaning given by section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006;
“Tax Liability”    any tax or social security contributions liability in any jurisdiction in connection with the Plan for which the Participant is liable and for which any Group Member or former Group Member is obliged to account to any relevant authority;

 

4


“Vest”   

the point at which a Participant becomes entitled to receive the Shares pursuant to their Awards; and

 

Vesting” and “Vested” will be construed accordingly; and

“Vesting Date”    the date on which an Award Vests.

 

1.2

Unless the context otherwise requires, references in the Plan to:

 

  1.2.1

the singular include the plural and vice versa; and

 

  1.2.2

the masculine include the feminine and vice versa.

 

1.3

Headings and explanatory wording do not form part of the Plan.

 

2.

INVITATION

 

2.1

When the Board operates the Plan, it will determine:

 

  2.1.1

the Eligible Employees to be invited to participate in the Plan;

 

  2.1.2

the Enrolment Period;

 

  2.1.3

the Plan Percentage;

 

  2.1.4

in respect of a Purchased Share Award:

 

  a)

the Savings Period;

 

  b)

the method by which the Purchase Price will be calculated; and

 

  c)

the method by which the number of Shares to be comprised in the Purchased Share Award will be calculated;

 

  2.1.5

in respect of a Matching Share Award:

 

  a)

the Matching Share Award Ratio;

 

  b)

the Performance Condition; and

 

  2.1.6

any Holding Period and to which Matching Share Awards it will apply.

 

2.2

Following its determination pursuant to rule 2.1, the Board will invite the Eligible Employees referred to in rule 2.1.1 to enrol in the Plan. The invitation will include the information set out in rule 2.1 and be in such form as the Board determines.

 

2.3

Where an individual who is not an Eligible Employee is subsequently employed on a permanent contract, the Board may invite them to enrol in the Plan, notwithstanding that the Enrolment Period has ended. The Board will make the determinations as set out in rules 2.1.3 to 2.1.6, save that the Savings Period and the Plan Percentage will be pro-rated to reflect the proportion of the original Savings Period remaining at the time of their enrolment in the Plan.

 

5


3.

ENROLING IN THE PLAN

 

3.1

During the Enrolment Period, an Eligible Employee who chooses to participate in the Plan must enter into a Share Purchase Agreement, by which they agree to:

 

  3.1.1

participate in the Plan in accordance with its rules;

 

  3.1.2

permit Monthly Contributions to be made by or on their behalf by deductions from salary or otherwise for the duration of the Savings Period, with the first Monthly Contribution being made as soon as practicable following the end of the Enrolment Period; and

 

  3.1.3

acquire Shares at the end of the Savings Period at the Purchase Price.

 

4.

GRANT OF AWARDS

 

4.1

Subject to rule 4.2, as soon as practicable following the end of the Enrolment Period the Board will grant a Purchased Share Award and a Matching Share Award to each of those Eligible Employees who have entered into a Share Purchase Agreement pursuant to rule 3.

 

4.2

Awards will be granted subject to obtaining any approval or consent required by the AIM Regulation (or other relevant authority), any Dealing Restrictions and any other applicable laws or regulations (whether in the UK or overseas).    

 

4.3

Awards must be granted by deed (or in such other written form as the Board determines) and, as soon as reasonably practicable after the Grant Date, Participants must be notified of the terms of their Award.

 

4.4

Before the Shares to which Awards relate are issued or transferred to a Participant following Vesting, each Participant will have no rights in respect of those Shares.

 

5.

PERFORMANCE CONDITION

 

5.1

Unless the Board determines otherwise, Matching Share Awards will be subject to the satisfaction of a Performance Condition and subject to rules 13 and 14, the Performance Condition will be measured over the Performance Period.

 

5.2

The Board may amend or substitute a Performance Condition if one or more events occur which cause the Board to consider that a substituted or amended Performance Condition would be more appropriate and would not be materially less difficult to satisfy.

 

6.

PLAN LIMITS

 

6.1

The Board must not grant an Award which would cause the number of Shares allocated under the Plan and under any other employee share plan adopted by the Company to exceed such number as represents ten per cent of the ordinary share capital of the Company in issue.

 

6.2

Subject to rules 6.3 and 6.4, in determining the limit set out in rule 6.1, Shares are treated as allocated if, on any day, they have been newly issued by the Company or transferred from treasury to satisfy an option, award or other right granted during the ten years prior to that day (an “award”), or in the case of such an award in respect of which Shares are yet to be delivered, if the Board intends that new Shares will be issued or that Shares from treasury will be transferred and for these purposes the number of Shares allocated includes:

 

  6.2.1

Shares which have been issued or may be issued to any trustee;

 

  6.2.2

Shares which have been or may be transferred from treasury to any trustee; and

 

  6.2.3

in either case for the trustee to then transfer to satisfy an award (unless these Shares have already been counted under this rule).

 

6


6.3

The Board may determine that Shares transferred from treasury will cease to count as allocated for the purposes of rule 6.3 if guidelines published by institutional investor representative bodies no longer require such Shares to be counted.

 

6.4

The number of Shares allocated does not include:

 

  6.4.1

Shares that were allocated to satisfy awards to the extent that such awards have lapsed or been relinquished;

 

  6.4.2

existing Shares (other than treasury Shares) which have been transferred to satisfy awards or which have been allocated to satisfy awards; and

 

  6.4.3

Shares allocated in respect of awards which are then satisfied in cash.

 

6.5

If the Board purports to grant one or more Awards which are inconsistent with the limits in this rule 6, each such Award will be reduced as determined by the Board and will take effect from the Grant Date over the maximum number of Shares permitted by those limits.

 

6.6

The Board may make such adjustments to the method of assessing the limit set out in rule 6.1 as it considers appropriate in the event of any variation of the Company’s share capital.    

 

6.7

No Award may be granted under the Plan after the tenth anniversary of the date on which the Plan was adopted by the Board.

 

7.

VESTING OF THE PURCHASED SHARE AWARD

 

7.1

Subject to rules 10, 12, 13 and 14, as soon as practicable following the end of the Savings Period, the Purchased Share Award will Vest and the Purchase Price payable by the Participant will be applied in the acquisition of Shares, unless a Dealing Restriction applies to the Participant, in which case Shares will be acquired on the date on which such Dealing Restriction lifts.

 

7.2

Monthly Contributions are made in a currency other than the currency in which Shares are traded, they will be converted into Sterling at the prevailing exchange rate before being used to acquire Shares.

 

7.3

Subject to rules 10 and 11, the number of Shares to be acquired pursuant to rule 7.1 will be issued or transferred to the Participant or as the Participant may direct within 30 days thereafter.

 

8.

VESTING OF THE MATCHING SHARE AWARD

 

8.1

Following the end of the Performance Period relating to a Matching Share Award, the Board will determine the extent to which the Performance Condition has been satisfied and the extent to which the Matching Share Award will Vest.

 

8.2

Subject to rules 10, 12, 13 and 14, a Matching Share Award will Vest to the extent determined pursuant to rule 8.1 on the date on which the Participant’s Shares are acquired pursuant to rule 7.1, unless on that date a Dealing Restriction applies to the Participant, in which case a Matching Share Award will Vest on the date on which such Dealing Restriction lifts.

 

8.3

Subject to rules 9, 10 and 11, the number of Shares to be acquired pursuant to rule 8.1 will be issued, transferred or paid (as applicable) to the Participant or as the Participant may direct within 30 days thereafter.

 

9.

THE HOLDING PERIOD

 

9.1

Fifty per cent (or such other percentage as the Board may determine at the Grant Date) of the Shares comprised in a Matching Share Award will be subject to a Holding Period on Vesting, provided that sufficient of the Shares comprised in that fifty per cent may be sold to meet a Participant’s Tax Liability.

 

9.2

Shares that are subject to the Holding Period may not be sold, transferred or otherwise encumbered prior to the day immediately following the last day of the Holding Period.

 

7


10.

TAXATION AND REGULATORY ISSUES

 

10.1

A Participant will be responsible for and indemnifies each relevant Group Member against any Tax Liability. Any Group Member may withhold an amount to settle such Tax Liability from any amounts due to the Participant (to the extent such withholding is not in breach of any applicable laws) and/or make any other arrangements as it considers appropriate to ensure recovery of such Tax Liability including, without limitation, the sale of sufficient Shares acquired subject to one or more Awards or otherwise to realise an amount to settle the Tax Liability. A Participant will also be responsible for all taxes and social security liabilities which they are obliged to account for directly to any tax authority in any jurisdiction in connection with the Plan.

 

10.1

The Company, the Eligible Employees and the Participants are obliged to comply with any applicable laws and regulations on insider dealing and any Company insider policies.

 

11.

CASH EQUIVALENT

 

11.1

At any time prior to Vesting of an Award, the Board may determine that in substitution for their right to acquire some or all of the relevant Shares, the Participant will instead receive a cash sum. The cash sum will be equal to the market value on the Vesting Date of that number of the Shares which would otherwise have been issued or transferred less the Purchase Price.

 

11.2

The cash sum will be paid to the Participant as soon as practicable thereafter, net of any deductions (including but not limited to any Tax Liability or similar liabilities) as may be required by local law.

 

12.

WITHDRAWAL FROM THE PLAN

 

12.1

Save as set out in this rule 12, Participants may not withdraw from the Plan prior to the end of the Savings Period.

 

12.2

If a Participant is suffering from extreme hardship, they may apply to the Board, in such form as the Board may determine from time to time, to withdraw from the Plan.    

 

12.3

Within 14 days of receipt of an application pursuant to rule 12.2, the Board will consider the Participant’s application and determine whether or not they may withdraw from the Plan. The Board will then communicate the outcome of such determination to the Participant.

 

12.4

Where the Board has determined that the Participant is not suffering from extreme hardship, the Board will communicate the rationale for its determination to the Participant and the Participant’s Monthly Contributions will continue.

 

12.5

Where the Board has determined that the Participant is suffering from extreme hardship, the Board will communicate its decision to the Participant as soon as reasonably practicable and the Participant’s Award will lapse immediately. The Participant will cease to make Monthly Contributions and the Participants aggregate Monthly Contributions will be returned to them as soon as reasonably practicable.

 

13.

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

13.1

Subject to rule 13.3, where a Participant ceases to hold office or employment with a Group Member before the Vesting Date, their Awards will lapse.

 

13.2

Where Awards lapse pursuant to rule 13.1, a Participant’s aggregate Monthly Contributions will be returned to them as soon as practicable after the date of such cessation.

 

13.3

Where a Participant ceases to hold office or employment with a Group Member before the Vesting Date as a result of:

 

  13.3.1

death, ill-health, injury, retirement or disability as established to the satisfaction of the Board;

 

  13.3.2

redundancy;

 

8


  13.3.3

the Participant’s employing company ceasing to be a Group Member or the transfer of an undertaking or part of an undertaking (in which the Participant is employed) to a person who is not a Group Member; or

 

  13.3.4

any other reason at the Board’s discretion, except where a Participant is summarily dismissed, the Participant’s Awards will not lapse.

Instead:

 

  13.3.5

the Participant will make no further Monthly Contributions to the Plan;

 

  13.3.6

the number of Shares comprised in the Participant’s Awards will be pro-rated to reflect the aggregate Monthly Contributions that have been made at the date of cessation, and

 

  13.3.7

the Participant’s Purchased Share Award will Vest in accordance with rule 7 and the Participant’s Matching Share Award will Vest in accordance with rule 8.

 

13.4

For the purposes of the Plan, a person will be treated as ceasing to hold office or employment with a Group Member on the last day of employment.

14. CORPORATE EVENTS

 

14.1

Where any of the events described in rule 14.2 occur, all Awards which have not yet Vested will Vest at the time of such event:

 

  14.1.1

in respect of the Purchased Share Award, on a pro-rata basis to reflect the aggregate Monthly Contributions that have been made at the date of the event which will be applied to the acquisition of Shares; and

 

  14.1.2

in respect of the Matching Share Award, in full.    

 

14.2

The events referred to in rule 14.1 are:

 

  14.2.1

General offer

If any person (either alone or together with any person acting in concert with him):

 

  a)

obtains Control of the Company as a result of making a general offer to acquire Shares; or

 

  b)

already having Control of the Company, makes an offer to acquire all of the Shares other than those which are already owned by him

and such offer becomes wholly unconditional.

 

  14.2.2

Scheme of arrangement

A compromise or arrangement in accordance with section 899 of the Companies Act 2006 for the purposes of a change of Control of the Company is sanctioned by the Court.

 

14.3

Winding-up

 

  14.3.1

On the passing of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up or the making of an order for the compulsory winding up of the Company, the Board will determine whether Awards which have not yet Vested will Vest at the time of the event.

 

  14.3.2

If the Board determines that Awards will Vest:

 

  (a)

Purchased Share Awards will Vest on a pro-rata basis to reflect the aggregate Monthly Contributions that have been made at the date of the event, which will be applied to the acquisition of Shares; and

 

  (b)

Matching Share Awards will Vest in full.

 

9


  14.3.3

If the Board determines that Awards will not Vest, Awards will lapse and each Participant’s Monthly Contributions will be returned to them.

 

14.4

Other events

 

  14.4.1

If the Company is or may be affected by a demerger, delisting, special dividend or other event which, in the opinion of the Board, may affect the current or future value of Shares to a material extent, the Board will determine whether Awards which have not yet Vested will Vest at the time of the event.

 

  14.4.2

If the Board determines that Awards will Vest:

 

  (a)

Purchased Share Awards will Vest on a pro-rata basis to reflect the aggregate Monthly Contributions that have been made at the date of the event, which will be applied to the acquisition of Shares; and

 

  (b)

Matching Share Awards will Vest in full.

 

  14.4.3

If the Board determines that Awards will not Vest, Awards will lapse and each Participant’s Monthly Contributions will be returned to them.

 

14.5

Exchange

An Award will not Vest under rule 14.1 but will be exchanged on the terms set out in rule 14.6 to the extent that there is an Internal Reorganisation, unless the Board determines that an Award should Vest under rule 14.1.

 

14.6

Exchange terms

If this rule 14.6 applies, the Award will not Vest but will be exchanged in consideration of the grant of a new award (the “New Award”) which, in the opinion of the Board, is equivalent to the Award, but relates to shares in a different company (whether the acquiring company or a different company). The rules of this Plan will be construed in relation to the New Award as if:

 

  14.6.1

the New Award was an Award granted under the Plan at the same time as the Award;

 

  14.6.2

references to any Performance Conditions were references to such new performance conditions relating to the business or shares of the company whose shares are subject to the New Award (or any member of its group as the Board may consider appropriate in the circumstances;

 

  14.6.3

references to the Company were references to the company whose shares are subject to the New Award; and

 

  14.6.4

references to Shares were references to shares in the company whose shares are the subject of the New Award.

 

14.7

Meaning of Board

Any reference to the Board in this rule 14 means the members of the Board immediately prior to the relevant event.

 

15.

ADJUSTMENTS

 

15.1

The number of Shares subject to an Award and/or the Purchase Price of those Shares may be adjusted in such manner as the Board determines, in the event of:

 

  15.1.1

any variation of the share capital of the Company; or

 

10


  15.1.2

a demerger, delisting, special dividend or other event which may, in the opinion of the Board, affect the current or future value of Shares.

 

16.

AMENDMENTS

 

16.1

The Board may at any time amend the rules of the Plan, provided that no amendment to the material disadvantage of existing rights of Participants will be made unless:

 

  16.1.1

every Participant who may be affected by such amendment has been invited to indicate whether or not they approve the amendment; and

 

  16.1.2

the amendment is approved by a majority of those Participants who have so indicated.

 

17.

LEGAL ENTITLEMENT

 

17.1

This rule 17 applies during a Participant’s employment with any Group Member and after the termination of such employment.

 

17.2

Nothing in the Plan or its operation forms part of the terms of employment of a Participant and the rights and obligations arising from a Participant’s employment with any Group Member are separate from, and are not affected by, the Participant’s participation in the Plan. Participation in the Plan does not create any right to continued employment for any Participant.

 

17.3

The grant of an Award or the acquisition of Shares on behalf of a Participant does not create any right for that Participant to be offered participation in the Plan in future or to be granted any additional Awards on any particular terms, including the number of Shares to which a Matching Share Award relates.

 

17.4

By Participating in the Plan, a Participant waives all rights to compensation for any loss in relation to the Plan, including:

 

  17.4.1

any loss or reduction of any rights or expectations under the Plan in any circumstances or for any reason;

 

  17.4.2

any exercise of a discretion or a decision taken in relation to any Awards and/or to the Plan, or any failure to exercise a discretion or take a decision;

 

  17.4.3

the operation, suspension, termination or amendment of the Plan.

 

18.

GENERAL

 

18.1

The Plan will terminate by the passing of a resolution by the Board. Termination of the Plan will be without prejudice to the existing rights of Participants.

 

18.2

Participants shall not be entitled to any dividends or have any voting rights or other shareholder rights until the Shares have been issued or transferred to the Participant.

 

18.3

The personal data of any Eligible Employee and of any person who holds or who has held an Award may be processed in connection with the operation of the Plan in accordance with the Group’s prevailing data protection policy and as notified to Eligible Employees in accordance with GDPR. By participating in the Plan, a Participant consents (otherwise than for the purposes of GDPR) to the processing of their personal data in connection with the operation of the Plan.

 

18.4

The Plan will be administered by the Board. The Board will have full authority, consistent with the Plan, to administer the Plan, including authority to interpret and construe any provision of the Plan and to adopt regulations for administering the Plan. Decisions of the Board will be final and binding on all parties.

 

18.5

Any notice or other communication in connection with the Plan may be delivered personally or sent by electronic means or post, in the case of a company to their registered office (for the attention of the company secretary or a person in a similar position), and in the case of an individual to their last known address, or, where the individual is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to the director or employee’s last known address or to the address of the place of business at which the director or employee performs the

 

11


  whole or substantially the whole of the duties of the director or employee’s office or employment. Where a notice or other communication is given by post, it will be deemed to have been received 72 hours after it was put into the post properly addressed and stamped, and if by electronic means, when the sender receives electronic confirmation of delivery or if not available, 24 hours after sending the notice.

 

18.6

The rules of the Plan will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales. Any person referred to in the Plan submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

12


Schedule 1

Awards to Participants who are residents of the People’s Republic of China (“PRC”)

The rules of the Plan will apply to Awards granted to Eligible Employees who are residents of the PRC, save as set out in this Schedule.

 

1.

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

1.1

Rule 13 will be deleted and replaced with the following new rule 13:

 

  “13.1

Subject to rule 13.3, where a Participant ceases to hold office or employment with a Group Member before the Vesting Date, their Awards will lapse.

 

  13.2

Where Awards lapse pursuant to rule 13.1, a Participant’s aggregate Monthly Contributions will be repaid to them as soon as practicable after the date of such cessation.

 

  13.3

Where a Participant ceases to hold office or employment with a Group Member before the Vesting Date as a result of:

 

  13.3.1

death, ill-health, injury, retirement or disability as established to the satisfaction of the Board;

 

  13.3.2

redundancy;

 

  13.3.3

the Participant’s employing company ceasing to be a Group Member or the transfer of an undertaking or part of an undertaking (in which the Participant is employed) to a person who is not a Group Member; or

 

  13.3.4

any other reason at the Board’s discretion, except where a Participant is summarily dismissed,

the Participant’s Awards will not lapse. Instead:

 

  13.3.5

the Participant will make no further Monthly Contributions to the Plan and the number of Shares comprised in the Participant’s Awards will be pro-rated to reflect the aggregate Monthly Contributions that have been made at the date cessation;

 

  13.3.6

the Board will determine the extent to which the Performance Condition relating to the Matching Share Award has been satisfied at that time, and

 

  13.3.7

the Participant’s Purchased Share Award will Vest as soon as practicable following the date of cessation in accordance with rule 7 and the Participant’s Matching Share Award will Vest as soon as practicable following the date of cessation in accordance with rule 8.    

 

  13.4

For the purposes of the Plan, a person will be treated as ceasing to hold office or employment with a Group Member on the last day of employment.”

 

13


Schedule 2

Awards to Participants who are tax resident in the US

The rules of the Plan will apply to Awards held by Participants, who are or who may become, subject to US tax or social security contributions liability in connection with an Award, except as set out in this Schedule 2. Where there is any conflict between the rules of the Plan and this Schedule 2, the terms of this Schedule 2 will prevail.

 

1.

VESTING OF AWARDS

 

1.1

The following wording in rules 7.3 and 8.3 will be deleted: “within 30 days thereafter” and be replaced with “no later than 31 December of the year in which Vesting occurs”.

 

2.

CASH EQUIVALENT

 

2.1

Rule 11.2 will be deleted and replaced with the following new rule 11.2:

 

  “11.2

The cash sum will be paid to the Participant as soon as practicable thereafter, and in any event, no later than 31 December of the year in which Vesting occurs, net of any deductions (including but not limited to any Tax Liability or similar liabilities) as may be required by local law.”

 

3.

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

3.1

Rule 13 will be deleted and replaced with the following new rule 13:

 

  “13.1

Subject to rule 13.3, where a Participant ceases to hold office or employment with a Group Member before the Vesting Date, their Awards will lapse.

 

  13.2

Where Awards lapse pursuant to rule 13.1, a Participant’s aggregate Monthly Contributions will be repaid to them as soon as practicable after the date of such cessation.

 

  13.3

Where a Participant ceases to hold office or employment with a Group Member before the Vesting Date as a result of:

 

  13.3.1    death,

ill-health, injury, retirement or disability as established to the satisfaction of the Board;

 

  13.3.2

the Participant’s employing company ceasing to be a Group Member or the transfer of an undertaking or part of an undertaking (in which the Participant is employed) to a person who is not a Group Member; or

 

  13.3.3

any other reason at the Board’s discretion, except where a Participant is summarily dismissed,

the Participant’s Awards will not lapse. Instead:

 

  13.3.4

the Participant will make no further Monthly Contributions to the Plan and the number of Shares comprised in the Participant’s Awards will be pro-rated to reflect the aggregate Monthly Contributions that have been made at the date cessation;

 

  13.3.5

the Board will determine the extent to which the Performance Condition relating to the Matching Share Award has been satisfied at that time, and

 

  13.3.6

the Participant’s Purchased Share Award will Vest as soon as practicable following the date of cessation in accordance with rule 7 and the Participant’s Matching Share Award will Vest as soon as practicable following the date of cessation in accordance with rule 8.    

 

14


  13.4

For the purposes of the Plan, a person will be treated as ceasing to hold office or employment with a Group Member on the last day of employment.”

 

4.

ADJUSTMENTS

 

4.1

The following rule 15.2 will be added to rule 15:

“Notwithstanding the provisions of this rule 15, any such adjustment will only be effective to the extent that it complies with s.409A of the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986 as amended from time to time.”

 

5.

AMENDMENTS

 

5.1

The following rule 16.2 will be added to rule 16:

“Notwithstanding the provisions of this rule 16, any such amendment will only be effective to the extent that it complies with s.409A of the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986 as amended from time to time.”

 

15


LOGO

Our new global share plan


LOGO

Our new global share plan Over a year ago, what started as an idea to further share the success of Abcam with our people, is now made real. Welcome to AbShare Our new global share plan which we hope you will find as exciting as we do. Why are we so excited about AbShare? Share in our success Our success as a company relies on us attracting The opportunity to become an Abcam shareholder is open to all and retaining great talent and AbShare allows permanent Abcam employees, globally. us do this by offering a generous employee shareholder plan. By us all delivering our mission Invest in Abcam Under the plan, you invest 1.67% of your base (gross) salary a year, split together – to serve life scientists to achieve their into monthly instalments, for three years, to buy Abcam shares. This is a mission, faster – we all contribute to, and share total of 5% of your base salary over three years. In return, you will in, the success of the company. receive a x10 match from the company, subject to satisfaction of performance conditions. The better that we perform, the better the benefits for everyone, including our customers. Simple and easy It’s a simple plan. Regardless of your role or where you are based, it’s always 5% over three years. Once you sign up, your contribution will be automatically deducted from your base (gross) salary every payroll for three years.


LOGO

How does AbShare work? Base salary: £30,000 It’s simple Payroll deduction: £1,500 (5%) Employee Award Abcam Award There are two parts to AbShare: £12 £1.5k/£12 = Share Price 10 X 125 (employee award) = 12 5 shares 1, 25 0 shares Your contribution (the 1 Employee award) and Three-year period, after which: That of the company Subject to continuous Subject to continuous employment employment, profitability & growth 2 (the Abcam award) Employee share purchase – your payroll Abcam award – 50% of the award will be deductions over the three-year period will be £14 released with no restriction, with the other Under the plan, you contribute 5% of your base used to pay the share acquisition price and 50% released with a restriction on sale for a Share Price (gross) salary over three years (1.67% per year) the shares will be released from the plan. further 12-months. to buy Abcam shares subject to one condition. In return, you will receive a x10 match from Employee Award released Abcam Award released Abcam, subject to satisfaction of performance 125 shares 1,25 0 shares conditions. It’s a simple plan – 5% over three years Total shares: 1,375* regardless of your role or where you’re based – Gross value: £19,250 and if you choose to join, once you sign up, *subject to achievement of performance conditions. your contribution will be automatically (After three years you own all of the shares. If you choose to deducted from your base salary every payroll sell, you can sell up to 50% of your Abcam award straight for three years. away. You can sell the remaining 50% one year later.)


LOGO

How do I participate? Joining is easy Decide. Who is eligible to join AbShare? Before you can decide if AbShare is for you, it’s important that you read all the information we’ve provided on this site. You should do your own research The opportunity to become an specific to your personal circumstances before making any decisions. Abcam shareholder through AbShare is open to all permanent Abcam Enrol. employees, globally. If you choose to If you choose to participate, the enrolment window for current permanent participate, the enrolment window employees will be open from 12th September to 12th October 2018. This is the will be open from 12th September to only chance for current employees to join. To enrol, visit the AbShare hub and 12th October 2018. This is the only click on enrol. chance for current employees to join. Invest. New joiners commencing permanent You invest 1.67% of your base (gross) salary a year, split into monthly employment with Abcam before 1st October 2020 (and those moving instalments, for three years. This is a total of 5% of your base (gross) salary, over three years. Your investment purchases the equivalent value in Abcam from temporary to permanent shares at an agreed price at the end of the three-year period. contracts) will be eligible to participate in AbShare on a pro-rated Award. basis. Abcam matches your shares x10 subject to satisfaction of performance Employees commencing permanent conditions. employment with the company after Benefit. 1st October 2020 will not be eligible You benefit from any increase in share price over the three-year period and to participate in AbShare. beyond. Remember the share price can go down as well as up.


LOGO

Conditions Conditions of AbShare If you leave Abcam, the treatment of your Employee Award award depends on the circumstances of your The Employee award will be released to you if you remain employed by departure: Abcam for the three-year period. § Resignation and dismissals: If you leave Abcam by resignation or dismissal during the Abcam Award three-year period, you leave AbShare. You will be refunded your contributions to date. The Abcam award will be released subject to the following conditions: § Redundancy (‘layoffs’ in the US), retirement, You need to be continuously employed by Abcam, from when ill health or death: You (or your dependants in the case of death) will still participate on 1 you join the plan to the end of the three-year period – i.e. the a pro-rated basis. employee award conditions have been met. If you are on maternity, paternity or long-term Abcam must remain profitable over the three financial years from sick leave during the period of participation, 2 1st July 2018 to 30th June 2021. you are still employed by Abcam and therefore your contributions and participation in the plan continue as normal. If your reduced pay does Abcam must see revenue growth over the three financial years not cover your contributions, Abcam will fund 3 from 1st July 2018 to 30th June 2021. the difference for you. Find out more about profit & revenue growth in our Performance Conditions summary.


LOGO

Timeline and dates to remember 12th Sep 2018 Nov 2018 Nov 2021 Enrolment window opens Awards granted Performance conditions assessed and shares released Restriction period (50% of Abcam award) commences Ongoing Continue being a shareholder Enrolment window closes Sale restriction period ends th (remaining 50% of Abcam award) 12 Oct 2018 Nov 2022 Meet Simone, and try our Share Plan calculator See our example employee, Simone, and how her contributions might look with three different market conditions applied in our Scenarios document. You can also enter your own salary into our AbShare Calculator.


LOGO

Ready to go? Once you have read all the information on our AbShare hub and carried out your own research as necessary specific to your personal What are the tax circumstances, if you decide to participate you can enrol by visiting the implications of AbShare? AbShare hub and clicking on enrol. Your AbShare awards will be The enrolment window for current permanent employees will be open from subject to the local tax and 12th September to 12th October 2018. This is the only chance for current social security legislation of employees to join. your jurisdiction. Abcam will withhold tax and social security New to Abcam? as required under local law. New joiners – i.e. permanent employees – who join Abcam between 12th You can find out more about October 2018 and 31st October 2020, will be given the opportunity to this in the tax guide, available participate on a pro-rated basis when they join Abcam. on the AbShare Hub. You should explore your own situation. Questions All questions should be directed to ##.####@#####.###


LOGO

Participation in AbShare is entirely voluntary and you are under no obligation to join. Before making the decision to join please ensure that you have read the relevant information. If you decide to participate in AbShare, it is a three year commitment. Changes in the Abcam share price and foreign exchange rates (for those outside the UK) may affect the amount you ultimately receive, as well as the performance of the company as tested by the performance condition. AbShare is governed by the rules of the plan, and if there is any conflict between the information on this site and the plan rules, then the plan rules shall prevail. For Chinese nationals, participation is subject to approval from the regulatory authorities (SAFE) which has not yet been confirmed. The tax information in this website is intended as general guidance only. It is assumed that you are a national of and domiciled and resident in one country for tax purposes and have been/will be at all material times. It is also assumed that you are an employee of Abcam in each relevant country and have been/will be at all material times. The precise tax implications of participation in AbShare may vary depending on your personal circumstances and if you have any doubts or concerns about your personal tax position you should contact a professional financial adviser.

Exhibit 10.3

Abcam plc

Share Incentive Plan

Date of Adoption by Company:

Approved by Shareholders at General Meeting:

HMRC Reference: A103032

Date of Self- Certification: TBC


Index

 

1

  

Definitions

     1  

2

  

Purpose Of The Plan

     4  

3

  

Eligibility of Individuals

     4  

4

  

Participation On Same Terms

     5  

5

  

Award Of Free Shares

     5  

6

  

Awards Of Partnership Shares

     6  

7

  

Awards Of Matching Shares

     8  

8

  

Awards Of Dividend Shares

     8  

9

  

Contributions To Be Made By Participating Companies

     9  

10

  

Acquisition Of Free Shares and Matching Shares

     10  

11

  

Shares To Be Appropriated Or Acquired

     10  

12

  

Company Reconstructions

     10  

13

  

Rights Issues

     10  

14

  

Cessation of Employment

     11  

15

  

The Issue Of Shares and Costs

     11  

16

  

Employee Rights

     11  

17

  

Amendments

     11  

18

  

Transfer Of Legal Title

     12  

19

  

Notices

     12  

20

  

Termination

     12  

21

  

Miscellaneous

     14  

22

  

Sub-Plans

     14  

23

  

Governing Law

     14  


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

1

Definitions

 

1.1

In these Rules the following words and expressions shall have the following meanings:-

 

“Accumulation Period”

   in relation to Partnership Shares, the period during which the Trustees accumulate a Qualifying Employee’s Partnership Share Money before acquiring Partnership Shares or repaying it to such Qualifying Employee

“Acquisition Date”

   (a) in relation to Partnership Shares where there is no Accumulation Period, the meaning given by paragraph 50(4) of the Schedule;
   (b) in relation to Partnership Shares where there is an Accumulation Period, the meaning given by paragraph 52(5) of the Schedule; and
   (c) in relation to Dividend Shares, the meaning given by paragraph 66(4) of the Schedule

“Associated Company”

   shall have the same meaning as in paragraph 94 of the Schedule

“Award Date”

   in relation to Free Shares or Matching Shares, the date on which such Shares are awarded

“Award”

   (a) in relation to Free Shares and Matching Shares, the appropriation of Free Shares and Matching Shares in accordance with the Plan; and
   (b) in relation to Partnership Shares, the acquisition of Partnership Shares on behalf of Qualifying Employees in accordance with the Plan

“Board”

   the board of directors of the Company or the directors present at a duly convened meeting of the directors of the Company at which a quorum is present or a duly authorised committee thereof

“Capital Receipt”

   shall have the same meaning as in section 502 of ITEPA

“Close Company”

   shall have the same meaning as in section 414 of ICTA as modified by paragraph 20 (4) of the Schedule

“Company”

   Abcam plc (registered number 03509322)

“Connected Company”

   shall have the same meaning as in paragraph 18(3) of the Schedule

“Control”

   shall have the same meaning as in section 840 ICTA

“Dealing Day”

   a day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for the transaction of business

“Deed”

   Abcam plc UK Employee Benefit Trust which is the the deed on the terms set out in Appendix C which established the Plan

“Disqualifying Event”

   shall have the meaning given in paragraph 84 of the Schedule

“Dividend Shares”

   Shares acquired on behalf of a Participant from reinvestment of dividends under Rule 8

“Free Share Agreement”

   an agreement in the terms set out in Appendix A referred to as a Bonus Share Agreement for the purpose of employee communications

 

 

Pg.1


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

“Free Shares”

   Shares awarded under Rule 5 of the Plan

“Group Plan”

   the Plan if the Plan is extended to the Company’s subsidiaries which are Participating Companies.

“Holding Period”

   (a) in relation to Free Shares, the period specified by the Company as described more fully in Rule 5.10;
   (b) in relation to Matching Shares, the period specified by the Company as described more fully in Rule 7.6; and
   (c) in relation to Dividend Shares, the period of three years from the Acquisition Date

“ICTA”

   the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988

“Initial Market Value”

   the Market Value of a Share on an Award Date and where the Share is subject to a restriction or risk of forfeiture, the Market Value shall be determined without reference to that restriction or risk

“ITEPA”

   the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003

“ITTOIA”

   the Income Tax (Trading and Other Income) Act 2005

“Market Value”

   (a) on any day when the Shares have not been admitted to the Daily Official List of, and to trading on the main market, the London Stock Exchange the market value of a Share determined in accordance with the provisions of Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992 and agreed for the purposes of the Plan with HM Revenue & Customs Shares and Asset Valuation on or before that day; or
   (b) on any day when the Shares have been admitted to the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange:-
   (i)    where all of the Shares are purchased and awarded by the Trustees on the Acquisition or Award Date, the price at which such Shares are purchased. Where Shares are purchased at different times during the Acquisition Date or Award Date and at different prices, the average of the prices paid by the Trustees in the purchase of the Shares; or
   (ii)    where all of the Shares are purchased by the Trustees on different days, the middle market quotation for shares of the class as derived from the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange on the Dealing Day immediately preceding the day when the Shares are awarded; or

“Matching Shares”

   Shares awarded under Rule 7 of the Plan

“Material Interest”

   shall have the same meaning as in paragraph 20 of the Schedule

“NICs”

   employees’ National Insurance Contributions

“Participant”

   an individual who has received under the Plan an Award of Free Shares, Matching Shares or Partnership Shares, or on whose behalf Dividend Shares have been     acquired

 

 

Pg.2


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

“Participating Company”

   the Company and such of its Subsidiaries as have executed deeds of adherence to the Plan under clause 18 of the Deed

“Partnership Shares”

   Shares awarded under Rule 6 of the Plan

“Partnership Share Agreement ”

   An agreement in the terms set out in Appendix B which shall, inter alia, contain a notice under paragraph 48 of the Schedule referred to in employee communications as an Investment Share Agreement

“Partnership Share Money”

   This is money deducted from a Participant’s Salary pursuant to a Partnership Share Agreement and held by the Trustees who may either use such money to acquire Partnership Shares or return such money to such Participant .

“Performance Allowances”

   the criteria attached to an Award of Free Shares where:-
   (a)    whether Shares are awarded; or
  

(b)    the number or value of Shares awarded,

is conditional on the satisfaction of performance targets set by the Board

“Performance Period”

   shall have the meaning given in Rule 5.5(a)

“Plan”

   the Abcam plc Share Incentive Plan

“Plan Shares”

   (a) Free Shares, Matching Shares or Partnership Shares awarded to Participants;
   (b) Dividend Shares acquired on behalf of Participants, and
   (c) shares in relation to which paragraph 87(1) (company reconstructions: new shares) of the Schedule applies that remain subject to the Plan

“Plan Termination Notice”

   a notice issued under paragraph 89 of the Schedule

“Plan Dividends”

   shall have the meaning given in Rule 8.2

“Qualifying Corporate Bond”

   shall have the same meaning as in section 117 of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992

“Qualifying Employee”

   an employee who must be invited to participate in an Award in accordance with Rule 3.5 and any employee who the Company has invited to participate in an Award in accordance with Rule 3.6

“Qualifying Period”

   (a) in the case of Free Shares such period of time ending on the Award Date as is determined by the Board which shall not exceed 18 months
   (b) in the case of Partnership Shares and Matching Shares where there is an Accumulation Period such period of time ending on the start of the Accumulation Period as is determined by the Board which shall not exceed 6 months
   (c) in the case of Partnership Shares and Matching Shares where there is no Accumulation Period such period of time ending on the date on which Partnership Share Money relating to such Award is deducted as is determined by the Board which shall not exceed 18 months

 

 

Pg.3


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

“Redundancy”

   the same meaning as in the Employment Rights Act 1996

“Relevant Employment”

   employment by the Company or any Associated Company

“Rules”

   the rules of the Plan as amended from time to time

“Salary”

   the same meaning as in paragraph 43(4) of the Schedule

“Schedule”

   Schedule 2 to ITEPA

“Shares”

   ordinary shares in the capital of the Company which comply with the conditions set out in paragraph 25 of the Schedule

“Subsidiary”

   any company which is for the time being under the Control of the Company

“Tax Year”

   a year beginning on 6 April and ending on the following 5 April

“Treasury Shares”

   Shares qualifying as treasury shares in accordance with section 162 of the Companies Act 1985

“Trustees”

   the trustees or trustee of the Plan

“Trust Fund”

   all assets transferred to the Trustees to be held on the terms of the Deed and the assets from time to time representing such assets, including any accumulations of income

“Trust Period”

   the period of 80 years beginning with the date of the Deed

 

1.2

References to any act, part, chapter, or section (including ICTA and ITEPA) shall include any statutory modification, amendment or re-enactment of that act, for the time being in force.

 

1.3

Where the context so admits or requires, words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa, and words importing the masculine shall include the feminine.

 

1.4

Headings, notes and footnotes to these Rules are included for convenience only and shall not affect the interpretation or construction of these Rules.

 

1.5

References to a “company” shall be construed so as to include any company, corporation or other body corporate, wherever and however incorporated or established.

 

1.6

References to a “person” shall be construed so as to include any individual, firm, company, government, state or agency of a state, local or municipal authority or government body or any joint venture, association or partnership (whether or not having a separate legal personality).

 

2

Purpose Of The Plan

 

2.1

The purpose of the Plan is to enable employees of Participating Companies to acquire shares in a company which give them a continuing stake in that company.

 

3

Eligibility of Individuals

 

3.1

Individuals are eligible to participate in an Award only if:-

 

  (a)

they are employees of a Participating Company;

 

 

Pg.4


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

  (b)

they have been employees of a qualifying company within the meaning of paragraph 17 of the Schedule at all times during any Qualifying Period;

 

  (c)

they are eligible to participate on the date(s) set out in paragraph 14 of the Schedule; and

 

  (d)

they do not fail to be eligible under Rule 3.2 or Rule 3.3.

 

3.2

Individuals are not eligible to participate in an Award if they have, or within the preceding twelve months have had, a Material Interest in:-

 

  (a)

a Close Company whose shares may be appropriated or acquired under the Plan; or

 

  (b)

a company which has Control of such a company or is a member of a consortium which owns such a company.

 

3.3

Individuals are not eligible to participate in an Award of Free Shares, Partnership Shares or Matching Shares in any Tax Year under the Plan if in that Tax Year they are at the same time participating in an award of shares under another share incentive plan (“Other Plan”) established by the Company or a Connected Company and approved under the Schedule or if they would have received such an award but for their failure to meet a Performance Allowance (see Rule 5.5).

 

3.4

If an individual participates in an Award of Shares under the Plan in a Tax Year in which he has already participated in other approved Share Incentive Plan(s) under the Schedule the limits set out in paragraphs 35 (Rule 5.3) and 46 (Rule 6.2) of the Schedule apply as if the Plan and any other approved Share Incentive Plan(s) under the Schedule are a single plan.

 

3.5

All individuals who meet the requirements in Rule 3.1 and are UK resident taxpayers (within the meaning of paragraph 8 (2) of the Schedule) shall be eligible to receive an Award and shall also be invited to participate in any Awards granted.

 

3.6

The Company may also invite any employee who meets the requirements in Rule 3.1 but is not a UK taxpayer (as defined in 3.5 above) to participate in an Award.

 

4

Participation On Same Terms

 

4.1

Subject to Rule 4.2, every Qualifying Employee shall be invited to participate in an Award on the same terms and all Qualifying Employees who do participate in an Award shall do so on the same terms.

 

4.2

Notwithstanding Rule 4.1, the Company may make an Award of Free Shares to Qualifying Employees by reference to:-

 

  (a)

their remuneration;

 

  (b)

their length of service;

 

  (c)

the hours they work; and/or

 

  (d)

the satisfaction of Performance Allowances.

 

5

Award Of Free Shares

 

5.1

Every Qualifying Employee that wishes to be granted an Award of Free Shares shall enter into a Free Share Agreement with the Company.

 

5.2

The Trustees may from time to time award Free Shares to Qualifying Employees.

 

5.3

The number of Free Shares to be awarded by the Trustees to a Qualifying Employee on an Award Date shall be determined by the Board save that the Initial Market Value of Free Shares awarded to a Qualifying Employee in any Tax Year shall not exceed the prescribed limit specified in the Schedule.

 

5.4

The Board may stipulate that the number of Free Shares (if any and subject to Rule 5.3) to be awarded to each Qualifying Employee on a given Award Date shall be determined by reference to Performance Allowances.

 

5.5

If Performance Allowances are used in connection with a particular Award of Free Shares, Performance Allowances shall apply to that entire Award of Free Shares to all Qualifying Employees and must satisfy the following conditions:-

 

  (a)

they shall be determined by reference to such fair and objective criteria relating to business results as the Board shall determine and over such period as the Board shall specify (the “Performance Period”);

 

  (b)

the criteria must be set for performance units consisting of one or more employees; and

 

  (c)

a Qualifying Employee must not be a member of more than one performance unit.

 

5.6

Where the Board determines to use Performance Allowances in connection with an Award of Free Shares it shall, as soon as reasonably practicable:-

 

  (a)

notify each Qualifying Employee participating in the Award of the criteria which shall be used to determine the number or value of Free Shares awarded to such Qualifying Employee; and

 

 

Pg.5


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

  (b)

notify all Qualifying Employees of the Company or, in the case of a Group Plan, of any Participating Company, in general terms, of the criteria to be used to determine the number or value of Free Shares to be awarded to each Qualifying Employee in the Award.

 

5.7

Without prejudice to Rule 5.5, the Board shall determine the number of Free Shares (if any) to be awarded to each Qualifying Employee by reference to performance using either “Method 1” or “Method 2” (as such terms are described more fully in Rules 5.8 and 5.9 respectively). The same method shall be used for all Qualifying Employees for each Award of Free Shares.

 

5.8

If the Board determines to use Method 1:-

 

  (a)

at least 20% of Free Shares awarded in any Performance Period shall be awarded without reference to performance;

 

  (b)

the remaining Free Shares shall be awarded by reference to performance;

 

  (c)

the greatest number of Free Shares awarded to a Qualifying Employee by reference to performance (Rule 5.8(b)) shall be no more than four times the greatest number of Free Shares awarded to a Qualifying Employee without reference to performance(Rule 5.8(a)); and

 

  (d)

the Board shall determine the number of Free Shares awarded to a Qualifying Employee without reference to performance (Rule 5.8(a)) in accordance with Rule 4.

 

5.9

If the Board determines to use Method 2:-

 

  (a)

some or all Free Shares shall be awarded by reference to performance;

 

  (b)

the Award of Free Shares to Qualifying Employees who are members of the same performance unit shall be made on the same terms in accordance with Rule 4;

  (c)

the Board shall determine the number of Shares awarded to a Qualifying Employee without reference to performance (Rule 5.9) in accordance with Rule 4; and

  (d)

Free Shares awarded for each performance unit shall be treated as separate Awards.

Holding Period

 

5.10

The Company shall, in relation to each Award of Free Shares, specify the Holding Period in relation to such Award throughout which a Participant shall be bound by the terms of the Free Share Agreement which shall commence on the Award Date and which shall be no less than three years and no more than five years.

 

5.11

The Holding Period specified pursuant to Rule 5.10 shall be the same for all Participants who receive an Award of Free Shares at the same time and may not be increased following the Award Date.

 

5.12

A Participant may during the Holding Period direct the Trustees:-

 

  (a)

to accept an offer for any of his Free Shares if the acceptance or agreement shall result in a new holding being equated with those Shares for the purposes of capital gains tax; or

 

  (b)

to accept an offer of a Qualifying Corporate Bond (whether alone or with other assets or cash or both) for his Free Shares if the offer forms part of such a general offer as is mentioned in paragraph (c); or

 

  (c)

to accept an offer of cash, with or without other assets, for his Free Shares if the offer forms part of a general offer which is made to holders of shares of the same class as his shares, or to holders of shares in the same company and which is made in the first instance on a condition such that if it is satisfied the person making the offer shall have control of that company, within the meaning of section 416 ICTA; or

 

  (d)

to agree to a transaction affecting his Free Shares or such of them as are of a particular class, if the transaction would be entered into pursuant to a compromise, arrangement or scheme applicable to or affecting:-

 

  (i)

all of the ordinary share capital of the Company or, as the case may be, all the shares of the class in question; or

 

  (ii)

all the shares, or all the shares of the class in question, which are held by a class of shareholders identified otherwise than by reference to their employment or their participation in a share incentive plan approved under the Schedule.

 

6

Awards Of Partnership Shares

 

6.1

The Company may at any time invite every Qualifying Employee to enter into a Partnership Share Agreement with the Company. For the avoidance of doubt, the Partnership Share Agreement shall contain no provision pursuant to which Partnership Shares may be forfeited.

 

6.2

The Partnership Share Agreement shall prescribe, inter alia, the amount of Partnership Share Money that is to be deducted from a Qualifying Employee’s Salary save that:-

 

 

Pg.6


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

  (a)

if the deduction is made annually it may not exceed the prescribed limit specified in the Schedule in a Tax Year; and

 

  (b)

if the deduction is made monthly it may not exceed the monthly proportion of the prescribed limit specified in the Schedule in any month. If the Qualifying Employee’s salary is not paid at monthly intervals the prescribed limit should be calculated proportionately; and

 

  (c)

the amount of Partnership Share Money deducted from an employee’s Salary in a Tax Year shall not exceed 10% of the employee’s Salary in that Tax Year.

 

6.3

Any amount of Salary deducted in excess of the limits set out in Rule 6.2 shall be paid over to the Qualifying Employee, subject to both deduction of income tax under PAYE and NICs, as soon as practicable after such deduction is made.

 

6.4

The minimum amount to be deducted under the Partnership Share Agreement on any occasion shall be determined by the Board save that this amount shall be the same for all Qualifying Employees and shall not exceed £10.

 

6.5

The Company may specify the maximum number of Shares to be included in an Award of Partnership Shares provided that any relevant Partnership Share Agreement in respect of which this maximum number of Shares relates shall contain an undertaking by the Company to notify each Qualifying Employee of such maximum.

 

6.6

The notification that the Company undertakes to give pursuant to Rule 6.5 shall be given:-

 

  (a)

if there is no Accumulation Period relating to the Award, before the deduction of the Partnership Share Money relating to the Award; and

 

  (b)

if there is an Accumulation Period relating to the Award, before the beginning of such Accumulation Period.

No Accumulation Period

 

6.7

If there is no Accumulation Period relating to the Award, the Trustees shall acquire Shares on behalf of the Qualifying Employee using the Partnership Share Money on the Acquisition Date. The number of Shares acquired on behalf of each Participant shall be determined by dividing the relevant amount of Partnership Share Money by the Market Value of a Share on the Acquisition Date.

Accumulation Period

 

6.8

If there is an Accumulation Period relating to the Award, the Trustees shall acquire Shares on behalf of the Qualifying Employee using Partnership Share Money on the Acquisition Date. The number of Shares acquired on behalf of each Participant shall be determined by dividing the relevant amount of Partnership Share Money by the lower of:-

 

  (a)

the Market Value of a Share at the beginning of the Accumulation Period; and

 

  (b)

the Market Value of a Share on the Acquisition Date.

In the event that the Partnership Share Money is insufficient to acquire on the Acquisition Date the number of Shares determined under this Rule 6.8, the Company shall procure that the necessary funds are provided to the Trustees either by itself or by the Participating Companies to enable the Trustees to acquire the necessary number of Shares on behalf of the Qualifying Employee.

 

6.9

If a transaction occurs during an Accumulation Period which results in a new holding of shares being equated for the purposes of capital gains tax with any of the shares to be acquired under the Partnership Share Agreement, the Qualifying Employee may agree that the Partnership Share Agreement shall have effect after the time of that transaction as if it were an agreement for the purchase of shares comprised in the new holding.

 

6.10

Any surplus Partnership Share Money remaining after the acquisition of Shares by the Trustees pursuant to Rules 6.7 or 6.8:-

 

  (a)

may, with the agreement of the Participant, either be:-

 

  (i)

carried forward to the next Accumulation Period (if there is an Accumulation Period relating to the next Award), or

 

  (ii)

carried forward and added to the next deduction (if there is no Accumulation Period relating to the next Award); and

 

  (b)

in any other case, shall be paid over to the Participant, subject to the deduction of both income tax under PAYE and NICs, as soon as practicable after the Acquisition Date.

 

6.11

If the Company receives applications for Partnership Shares exceeding the Award maximum determined in accordance with Rule 6.5 the following steps shall be taken in the order set out below until such excess is eliminated:-

 

  (a)

the excess of the monthly or annual deduction chosen by each applicant over £10 shall be reduced pro rata;

 

  (b)

all monthly or annual deductions shall be reduced to £10;

 

  (c)

applications shall be selected by lot, each based on a monthly or annual deduction of £10.

 

 

Pg.7


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

6.12

Each application shall be deemed to have been modified or withdrawn in accordance with Rule 6.11 and each Qualifying Employee who has applied for Partnership Shares shall be notified of the change as soon as is reasonably practicable after such change is made.

 

6.13

A Participant may withdraw from a Partnership Share Agreement at any time by notice in writing to the Company. Unless a later date is specified in the notice, such notice shall take effect 30 days after it is received by the Company. Any Partnership Share Money then held on behalf of an employee shall be paid over to that employee as soon as practicable following the date on which such notice takes effect, subject to the deduction of both income tax under PAYE and NICs.

 

6.14

If approval to the Plan is withdrawn by HM Revenue & Customs or a Plan Termination Notice is issued in respect of the Plan, any Partnership Share Money held on behalf of Participants shall be repaid to them as soon as practicable, subject to the deduction of income tax under PAYE and NICs.

 

7

Awards Of Matching Shares

 

7.1

The Partnership Share Agreement shall, inter alia, set out the basis on which a Participant is entitled to an Award of Matching Shares in accordance with this Rule 7.

 

7.2

Matching Shares shall:-

 

  (a)

be Shares of the same class and carrying the same rights as the Partnership Shares to which they relate;

 

  (b)

subject to Rule 7.5, be awarded on the same day as the Partnership Shares to which they relate are acquired on behalf of the Participant; and

 

  (c)

be awarded to all Participants on exactly the same basis.

 

7.3

The Partnership Share Agreement, inter alia, shall specify (subject to Rule 7.4) the ratio of Matching Shares that are to be awarded to a Participant in respect of Partnership Shares acquired on behalf of a Participant for the time being provided that the ratio shall not exceed two Matching Shares to one Partnership Share.

 

7.4

The Company may vary the ratio determined pursuant to Rule 7.3 before Partnership Shares are acquired. Should the Company so vary the ratio Qualifying Employees shall be notified of the terms of such variation before the Partnership Shares are awarded under the relevant Partnership Share Agreement.

 

7.5

Should the number of Partnership Shares acquired on behalf of a Participant on the relevant Acquisition Date be insufficient to require the Company to make an Award of Matching Shares, such Award of Matching Shares shall be made when sufficient Partnership Shares have been acquired to allow at least one Matching Share to be appropriated to the Participant.

Holding Period

 

7.6

Rules 5.10 to 5.12 relating to the Holding Period that shall apply to an Award of Free Shares shall apply mutatis mutandis to any Award of Matching Shares.

 

8

Awards Of Dividend Shares

 

8.1

The Free Share Agreement and/or Partnership Share Agreement shall, inter alia, set out the terms which (together with the Rules) shall govern the Award (if any) of Dividend Shares. In exercising their powers in relation to the acquisition of Dividend Shares the Trustees must treat Participants fairly and equally.

 

8.2

The Company may direct that any cash dividend in respect of Plan Shares held on behalf of Participants (“Plan Dividends”) may be applied in acquiring Dividend Shares on their behalf.

 

8.3

Dividend Shares shall be Shares:-

 

  (a)

of the same class and carrying the same rights as the Shares in respect of which the Plan Dividend is paid; and

 

  (b)

which are not subject to any provision for forfeiture.

 

8.4

Subject to Rule 8.5, the Company may determine to either:-

 

  (a)

apply all Plan Dividends to acquire Dividend Shares;

 

  (b)

pay all Plan Dividends in cash to all Participants; or

 

  (c)

offer Participants the choice of electing for the Company to apply their Plan Dividends in accordance with either Rule 8.4(a) or (b).

 

8.5

The Company may revoke any direction for reinvestment of Plan Dividends into Dividend Shares.

 

 

Pg.8


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

8.6

Should it be determined that Plan Dividends be applied pursuant to Rule 8.4(a), the Trustees shall apply such Plan Dividends to acquire Dividend Shares on behalf of the Participant on the Acquisition Date. The number of Dividend Shares acquired on behalf of each Participant shall be determined by dividing the relevant amount of Plan Dividends by the Market Value of a Share on the Acquisition Date.

 

8.7

Any amount of Plan Dividends that would, but for the following reasons:-

 

  (a)

because the amount of the Plan Dividend is insufficient to acquire a Dividend Share; or

 

  (b)

because there is a portion of the Plan Dividend remaining after the acquisition of Dividend Shares,

be applied pursuant to Rule 8.4(a) may be retained by the Trustees and carried forward to be added to the amount of the next Plan Dividend that is to be applied pursuant to Rule 8.4(a).

 

8.8

If:

 

  (a)

the Participant ceases to be in Relevant Employment; or

 

  (b)

a Plan Termination Notice is issued,

the amount referred to in rule 8.7 will be repaid to the Participant as soon as practicable.

 

8.9

The Holding Period shall be a period of three years commencing on the Acquisition Date. Rules 5.10 to 5.12 relating to a Participant’s rights during the Holding Period that shall apply to an Award of Free Shares shall apply mutatis mutandis to any Award of Dividend Shares.

 

8.10

Where a Participant is charged to tax in the event of their Dividend Shares ceasing to be subject to the Plan, they shall be provided with the information specified in paragraph 80 (4) of the Schedule.

 

9

Contributions To Be Made By Participating Companies

 

9.1

Contributions to be made by the Company and each Participating Company to the Trustees to support any acquisition of Free Shares or Matching Shares by the Trustees for appropriation on any Award Date shall be paid prior to the relevant Award Date.

 

9.2

A Participating Company shall only contribute to the Trustees such sums as are required in connection with the acquisition of Shares by the Trustees for appropriation to Qualifying Employees who are for the time being employees of that Participating Company.

 

 

Pg.9


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

10

Acquisition Of Free Shares and Matching Shares

 

10.1

The Trustees, if so directed by the Board, shall acquire Shares for appropriation under the Plan as Free Shares or Matching Shares by purchase on the Stock Exchange or privately (provided that any private purchase made at a time when shares in the Company are listed is made at a price not materially more or less than their Market Value on the day on which they are acquired).

 

10.2

The Trustees, if so directed by the Board, shall subscribe for Shares or procure the transfer of Treasury Shares by the Company pursuant to section 162D(1)(b) of the Companies Act 1985 for appropriation under the Plan as Free Shares or Matching Shares

 

10.3

Shares that are issued shall not be subscribed for by the Trustees, at less than their nominal value at the date of subscription.

 

11

Shares To Be Appropriated Or Acquired

 

11.1

Shares subscribed for by the Trustees (whether or not appropriated or acquired on behalf of Participants pursuant to the Plan) shall rank pari passu in all respects with the Shares then in issue except they will not rank for any rights attaching to Shares by reference to a record date preceding the date of issue.

 

11.2

If and so long as Shares are listed by the Financial Services Authority acting as the UK Listing Authority, the Company shall apply for a listing for any Shares issued pursuant to the Plan as soon as practicable after the allotment thereof.

 

12

Company Reconstructions

 

12.1

This Rule 12 applies if there occurs in relation to any of a Participant’s Plan Shares (referred to in this Rule 12 as the “Original Holding”):-

 

  (a)

a transaction which results in a new holding (referred to in this Rule as “the New Holding”) being equated with the Original Holding for the purposes of capital gains tax; or

 

  (b)

a transaction which would have that result but for the fact that what would be the New Holding consists of or includes a Qualifying Corporate Bond.

 

12.2

If an issue of shares of any of the following description and in respect of which a charge to income tax arises is made as part of a company reconstruction, these shares shall be treated for the purposes of this Rule as not forming part of the New Holding:-

 

  (a)

redeemable shares or securities issued as mentioned in section 209(2)(c) of ICTA;

 

  (b)

share capital issued in circumstances such that section 210(1) of ICTA applies; or

 

  (c)

share capital to which section 249 of ICTA applies.

 

12.3

Subject to the following provisions of this Rule, references in this Plan to a Participant’s Plan Shares shall be respectively construed, after the time of the company reconstruction, as being or, as the case may be, as including references to any New Shares.

 

12.4

For the purposes of the Plan:-

 

  (a)

a company reconstruction shall be treated as not involving a disposal of Shares comprised in the Original Holding; and

 

  (b)

the date on which any New Shares are to be treated as having been appropriated to or acquired on behalf of the Participant shall be the date on which Corresponding Shares were so appropriated or acquired,

where “Corresponding Shares” in relation to any New Shares means the Shares in respect of which the New Shares are issued or which the New Shares otherwise represent and “New Shares” means shares comprised in the New Holding which were issued in respect of, or otherwise represent, shares comprised in the Original Holding.

 

12.5

In the context of a New Holding, any reference in this Rule 12 to shares includes securities and rights of any description which form part of the New Holding for the purposes of Chapter II of Part IV of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992.

 

13

Rights Issues

 

13.1

Any shares or securities allotted under clause 15 of the Deed shall be treated as Plan Shares identical to the Shares in respect of which the rights were conferred and shall be treated as if they were awarded to or acquired on behalf of the Participant under the Plan in the same way and at the same time as those Shares.

 

13.2

Rule 13.1 does not apply:-

 

  (a)

to shares and securities allotted as the result of taking up a rights issue where the funds to exercise those rights were obtained otherwise than by virtue of the Trustees disposing of rights in accordance with this Rule 13; or

 

  (b)

where the rights to a share issue attributed to Plan Shares are different from the rights attributed to other ordinary shares of the Company.

 

 

Pg.10


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

14

Cessation of Employment

 

14.1

Subject to Rule 14.2, if a Qualifying Employee and/or Participant ceases to be in Relevant Employment:-

 

  (a)

any Plan Shares held on his behalf shall be removed from the Plan; and

 

  (b)

subject to paragraph 97(2) of the Schedule, any Partnership Share Money that has been deducted in the Accumulation Period in which a Participant ceases to be so employed shall be paid over to such individual as soon as is practicable after the date of such cessation.

 

14.2

Notwithstanding Rule 14.1 but without prejudice to Rule 14.3, if a Qualifying Employee and/or Participant ceases to be in Relevant Employment before the expiry of a three year period commencing on the Award Date, any Free Shares and Matching Shares held on behalf of such individual shall be forfeited, unless the relevant Partnership Share Agreement and/or Free Share Agreement determines otherwise.

 

14.3

No Free or Matching Shares shall be forfeited as a consequence of a Participant ceasing to be in Relevant Employment if such cessation is as a result of:-

 

  (a)

injury or disability;

 

  (b)

being dismissed by reason of “redundancy” (as such term is defined in the Employment Rights Act 1996);

 

  (c)

a transfer to which the Transfer of Undertakings Regulations (Protection of Employment) Regulations 1981 apply;

 

  (d)

a change of control or other circumstances ending the Associated Company status of the company by which the individual is employed;

 

  (e)

his retirement ; or

 

  (f)

his death.

 

15

The Issue Of Shares and Costs

 

15.1

Subject to Rule 15.2, in any ten year period, not more than 10 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company from time to time may be issued or issuable under the Plan and any other employee share scheme adopted by the Company. For the purposes of this Rule 15.1 there shall be ignored awards, options and other rights to subscribe for Shares which were granted prior to admission on the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange or any awards, options and other rights that have lapsed, become void, been cancelled, or which otherwise become incapable of being released or exercised.

 

15.2

Treasury Shares shall be treated as Shares issued for the purposes of Rule 15.1.

 

15.3

The Company shall bear the costs of establishing and administering the Plan and shall maintain or cause to be maintained all necessary accounts and records relating to the Plan.

 

16

Employee Rights

 

16.1

Save as where required by law, no account shall be taken of actual or prospective grants of Awards or rights in prospect under them for the purposes of any redundancy payments or severance scheme operating within the Group or for the purpose of a Participant’s rights under any pension scheme or arrangement.

 

16.2

Nothing in this Plan or in any document issued pursuant to the Plan shall confer upon any person any right to continue in the employ of the Company or any Associated Company or shall affect the right of any such company to terminate the employment of any person, or shall impose upon any such company, Trustee or their respective agents and employees any liability for the loss of any rights under the Plan which may result if that person’s employment is so terminated. In no circumstances shall any Participant, by reason of ceasing to be employed by such company (whether such cessation is in accordance with the contract of employment of such Participant or otherwise), or any part of the Plan ceasing or failing to have a particular tax treatment or to be approved by HM Revenue & Customs or any other revenue authority, be entitled to any compensation for any loss of any actual or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which he might otherwise have enjoyed, whether such compensation is claimed by way of damages for wrongful or unfair dismissal or other breach of contract or by way of compensation for loss of office or otherwise.

 

17

Amendments

 

17.1

The Board shall have the power from time to time to make and amend the Plan Rules (including the appendices) and the Abcam plc UK Employee Benefit Trust Deed for the implementation and administration of the Plan in a manner consistent with the Plan as it thinks fit and to make any amendments to these Rules provided that:-

 

 

Pg.11


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

  (a)

no alteration shall be made which would materially affect any subsisting rights of Participants granted prior to the date of alteration without the prior consent or sanction of the majority of that number of Participants who responded to the notification by the Company of such proposed alteration;

 

  (b)

no alteration or any amendment to a “key feature” (as defined in paragraph 84(6) of the Schedule) of the Plan shall have effect unless and until the written approval of HM Revenue & Customs has been obtained in accordance with paragraph 81 of the Schedule;

 

  (c)

no alteration or addition may be made where the alteration or addition would cause the Plan to cease to be a share incentive plan capable of approval under the Schedule; and

 

  (d)

no alteration or addition may be made where the alteration or addition would offend the rule against perpetuities.

 

17.2

Any matters pertaining or pursuant to the Plan which are not dealt with by these Rules and any uncertainty or dispute as to the meaning of these Rules shall be determined or resolved by decision of the Board which shall be binding on every Participating Company and all Participants and/or Qualifying Employees.

 

18

Transfer Of Legal Title

 

18.1

The Trustees shall transfer the legal title to any Plan Shares into the name of the relevant Participant or to another person as soon as reasonably practicable after the Participant gives the Trustees any written direction to that effect in accordance with the Rules.

 

19

Notices

 

19.1

The Trustees shall not be bound to act upon any instructions given by or on behalf of a Participant or any person in whom the beneficial interest in his Plan Shares is for the time being vested pursuant to the Plan unless such instructions are received by the Trustees in writing signed by the relevant person.

 

19.2

Any notice which the Trustees are required or may desire to give to any Qualifying Employee or Participant pursuant to the Plan shall be in writing and sufficiently given if delivered to him personally or sent first class through the post pre-paid addressed to the Qualifying Employee or Participant at his address last known to the Trustees (including any address supplied by the relevant Participating Company or any Subsidiary as being his address) or if sent through the Company’s internal postal service, and if so sent by post shall be deemed to have been duly given on the day following the date the notice is posted and if sent through the Company’s internal postal service shall be deemed to have been duly given three working days after the date of posting. Any document so sent to a Participant shall be deemed to have been duly delivered notwithstanding that he be then deceased (and whether or not the Trustees have notice of his death) except where his personal representatives have established their title to the satisfaction of the Trustees and supplied to the Trustees an address to which documents are to be sent.

 

20

Termination

 

20.1

Subject to Rule 20.2, the Plan shall terminate on the earlier of the following dates:-

 

  (a)

the date on which a Plan Termination Notice is deemed to have effect;

 

  (b)

if HM Revenue & Customs so determine, the date on which a Disqualifying Event occurs (or such later date as HM Revenue & Customs may determine).

 

20.2

If the Company issues a Plan Termination Notice a copy of such notice must be given without delay to:-

 

  (a)

HM Revenue & Customs;

 

  (b)

the Trustees;

 

  (c)

each Participant; and

 

  (d)

each Qualifying Employee who has entered into a Partnership Share Agreement which was in force immediately before the Plan Termination Notice was issued.

 

20.3

Following termination of the Plan pursuant to this Rule 20:-

 

  (a)

no further Awards may be made;

 

  (b)

the Trustees must remove all Plan Shares from the Plan as soon as practicable after the later of:-

 

  (i)

the end of the period of three months beginning with the date on which the Company complies with its obligations pursuant to Rule 20.2; and

 

  (ii)

the first date on which Plan Shares may be removed from the Plan without giving rise to a tax charge under Sections 501-507 ITEPA;

 

 

Pg.12


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

  (c)

save that the Trustees may remove a Participant’s Plan Shares from the Plan at an earlier date with the Participant’s consent; and

 

  (d)

the Trustees must pay to every Participant any money held on his behalf.

 

 

Pg.13


Abcam plc    Share Incentive Plan  

 

21

Miscellaneous

 

21.1

No Award shall be made which shall breach the provisions of the Model Code as contained in the Listing Rules of the Stock Exchange or any such other code relating to share dealings as may be relevant from time to time.

 

21.2

Subject to Rule 21.3, a Participant may not assign, charge or otherwise dispose of his beneficial interest in his Free Shares, Matching Shares or Dividend Shares during the respective Holding Period.

 

21.3

A Participant may assign, charge or otherwise dispose of his beneficial interest in his Free Shares, Matching Shares or Dividend Shares during the respective Holding Period in accordance with paragraph 37 of the Schedule.

 

21.4

A Participant may assign, charge or otherwise dispose of:-

 

  (a)

any of his Partnership Shares at any time; and

 

  (b)

any of his Free Shares, Matching Shares or Dividend Shares on or after the expiry of the respective Holding Period.

 

22

Sub-Plans

 

22.1

The Board shall have the power from time to time to adopt sub-plans to the Plan for employees outside the United Kingdom. The terms of these sub-plans shall be no more advantageous than the terms of the Plan but may differ from the terms of the Plan to take account of inter alia any securities, exchange control or taxation laws, regulations, practice or other laws of any territory. Any such sub-plan shall not form part of the Plan for the purposes of the Schedule. Any Shares made available under such sub-plans will be counted against the limits set out in Rule 15.1.

 

23

Governing Law

 

23.1

The Rules and the operation of the Plan shall be governed and construed in accordance with English Law.

 

 

Pg.14

Exhibit 10.4

Abcam plc

 

The Abcam plc

Annual Bonus Plan

 

Adoption Date: 18th September 2012

Amendment Date: 22nd November 2013

Amendment Date: 25th July 2014

Amendment Date: 3rd November 2014

Amendment Date: 11th September 2015


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

Table of Contents

 

1  

Making of Awards at the start of the Annual Bonus Plan

     1  
1.1  

Awards made by Remuneration Committee

     1  
1.2  

Terms of Awards

     1  
1.3  

Procedure for making of Awards and Award Date

     1  
1.4  

Contents of Award Certificate

     1  
1.5  

When Awards can be made

     1  
1.6  

Who can be made Awards

     1  
1.7  

Maximum Bonus Potential

     1  
2  

Performance Target

     2  
2.1  

Setting of Performance Target

     2  
2.2  

Statement of Performance Target

     2  
3  

Testing of Performance Target and Vesting of Awards after the end of the Financial Year

     2  
3.1  

Testing of Performance Target

     2  
3.2  

Determination of Award capable of Vesting

     2  
3.3  

Vesting of Cash Award

     3  
3.4  

Grant of Deferred Share Award

     3  
3.5  

Vesting of Deferred Share Award

     3  
3.6  

Exercise of Nil Cost Option

     3  
3.7  

No Vesting or Exercise while Dealing Restrictions apply

     3  
3.8  

Effect of Cessation of Relevant Employment

     4  
3.9  

Issue or transfer of Plan Shares

     4  
3.10  

Cash Settling

     4  
4  

Plan Limits

     4  
5  

Malus and Clawback

     5  
6  

Vesting of Awards in Special Circumstances

     5  
7  

Takeover, Reconstruction, Amalgamation or Winding-up of Company

     6  
7.1  

Takeover

     6  
7.2  

Compulsory acquisition of Company

     6  
7.3  

Reconstruction or amalgamation of Company

     6  
7.4  

Winding-up of Company

     6  
7.5  

Demergers and Other Events

     6  
7.6  

Meaning of “obtains Control of the Company”

     6  
7.7  

Notification of Award Holders

     6  
7.8  

Vesting of Deferred Share Awards and corporation tax deduction

     7  


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

8  

Exchange of Deferred Share Awards

     7  
8.1  

Where Exchange applies

     7  
8.2  

Terms of Exchange

     7  
9  

Adjustment of Deferred Share Awards on Reorganisation

     7  
9.1  

Power to adjust Deferred Share Awards

     7  
9.2  

Notification of Award Holders

     7  
10  

Issue and Listing of Plan Shares

     8  
10.1  

Rights attaching to Plan Shares

     8  
10.2  

Listing of Plan Shares

     8  
11  

Accounting for Taxes and Other Statutory Costs and Deductions

     8  
11.1  

Deductions

     8  
11.2  

Execution of Document by Award Holder

     8  
12  

Relationship of Plan to Contract of Employment

     8  
12.1  

Contractual Provisions

     8  
12.2  

Deemed Agreement

     9  
12.3  

Meaning of ceasing to be in Relevant Employment

     9  
13  

Lapse of Awards

     9  
14  

Administration of Plan

     9  
14.1  

Awards non-transferable

     9  
14.2  

Responsibility for administration

     9  
14.3  

Remuneration Committee’s decision final and binding

     9  
14.4  

Discretionary nature of Awards

     9  
14.5  

Provision of information

     10  
14.6  

Cost of Plan

     10  
14.7  

Data protection

     10  
14.8  

Third party rights

     10  
15  

Amendment of Plan

     10  
15.1  

Power to amend Plan

     10  
15.2  

Rights of existing Award Holders

     10  
16  

Notices

     10  
16.1  

Notice by Company

     10  
16.2  

Notice to Company

     10  
17  

Governing Law and Jurisdiction

     11  


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

17.1  

Plan governed by English law

     11  
17.2  

English courts to have jurisdiction

     11  
17.3  

Jurisdiction agreement for benefit of Company

     11  
17.4  

Award Holder deemed to submit to such jurisdiction

     11  
18  

Interpretation

     11  
18.1  

Definitions

     11  
18.2  

Interpretation

     13  


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

1

Making of Awards at the start of the Annual Bonus Plan

 

1.1

Awards made by Remuneration Committee

Subject to Rules 1.5 and 1.6, the Remuneration Committee may from time to time make Awards to Eligible Employees.

 

1.2

Terms of Awards

Subject to the Rules, the Remuneration Committee will in its absolute discretion decide whether or not any Awards are made at any particular time and, if they are, who they are made to and the terms of such Awards.

 

1.3

Procedure for making of Awards and Award Date

An Award shall be made by the Remuneration Committee passing a resolution. The Award Date shall be the date on which the Remuneration Committee passes the resolution or such later date as specified in the resolution and allowed by Rule 1.5. An Award Certificate shall be issued to each Award Holder as soon as practicable following the making of the Award.

 

1.4

Contents of Award Certificate

An Award Certificate shall state:

 

  1.

the proportion of the Award that is a Cash Award and the proportion of the Award that is a Provisional Deferred Share Award;

 

  2.

the Maximum Bonus Potential;

 

  3.

the Performance Target; and

 

  4.

any further conditions of the Award.

 

1.5

When Awards can be made

The Remuneration Committee may make Awards at any time but not more than ten years of the date the Plan is adopted by the Board of directors of the Company. For the avoidance of doubt, the Remuneration Committee may make Awards on more than one occasion in the Financial Year.

 

1.6

Who can be made Awards

An Award may not be made to an individual who is not an Eligible Employee at the Award Date. Unless the Remuneration Committee decides otherwise, an Award will not be made to an Eligible Employee who on or before the Award Date has given or received notice of termination of employment (whether or not lawful).

 

1.7

Maximum Bonus Potential

For Eligible Employees the Cash Award and Deferred Share Award shall be at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee, however the total award shall not exceed 150% of Annual Remuneration.

 

1


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

2

Performance Target

 

2.1

Setting of Performance Target

The Vesting of an Award and the extent to which it Vests will be subject to the satisfaction of the Performance Target and any other conditions set by the Remuneration Committee. The Performance Target shall be set before or as soon as practicable after the beginning of the Financial Year and must be measured in relation to the Financial Year, based where appropriate on the audited financial results.

 

2.2

Statement of Performance Target

The Performance Target and any further condition imposed under Rule 2.1 shall be set out in, or attached in the form of a schedule to, the Award Certificate.

 

3

Testing of Performance Target and Vesting of Awards after the end of the Financial Year

 

3.1

Testing of Performance Target

As soon as practicable after the end of the Financial Year, the Remuneration Committee shall determine whether and the extent to which the Performance Target and any further condition imposed under Rule 2.1 have been satisfied, and accordingly the proportion of the Award that is capable of Vesting.

 

3.2

Determination of Award capable of Vesting

In determining the proportion of the Award which is capable of Vesting, the Remuneration Committee will have regard to the following:

 

 

the outcome of the determination referred to in Rule 3.1;

 

 

whether the payment due under a Cash Award is affordable without threatening the Group’s ability to fund its operations.

Where the Remuneration Committee is of the opinion that the Group is facing severe cashflow restraints that threaten the Group’s ability to fund its operations, it can reduce the proportion of a Cash Award which is capable of Vesting or determine that the Cash Award may be settled in Plan Shares, in whole or in part.

In exceptional circumstances, the Remuneration Committee can, in its discretion, determine that the proportion of the Award which is capable of Vesting should be reduced if it reasonably considers that there is a significant misalignment between the attainment of the Performance Target and the underlying sustainable performance improvement of the Company in the period.

Furthermore, in relation to any Award granted following 1 July 2015, the Remuneration Committee can, in its discretion, determine that the proportion of the Award which is capable of Vesting should be reduced (including to nil) if it reasonably considers that there has been serious under-performance of any constituent element of the Performance Target, and/or that there has been under-performance on the part of the Award-Holder, during the period.

Following these determinations the Remuneration Committee shall notify Award Holders of the proportion of the Award which is capable of Vesting (if any), which shall not be more than 100% of the Maximum Bonus Potential.

 

2


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

3.3

Vesting of Cash Award

Following the Remuneration Committee’s determinations under Rules 3.1 and 3.2 and subject to Rule 11, the

Vested Cash Award shall be paid in cash to the Award Holder as soon as practicable through the payroll following deductions of employee taxes and other statutory deductions.

 

3.4

Grant of Deferred Share Award

Following their determinations under Rules 3.1 and 3.2, the Remuneration Committee shall take the following steps:

 

1.

Take the proportion of the Provisional Deferred Share Award that is capable of Vesting, and divide by the Closing Market Value (Closing Market Value meaning the average Market Value of a Plan Share over the Pricing Period) ;

 

2.

Grant a Deferred Share Award over that number of Plan Shares;

 

3.

Determine whether the Deferred Share Award should take the form of a Conditional Share Award or a Nil Cost Option;

 

4.

In relation to a Nil Cost Option, determine the price (if any) that the Award Holder must pay in order to exercise it and the date on which it will lapse (which must not be later than the ninth anniversary of the end of the Financial Year in which it is granted);

 

5.

Issue a revised Award Certificate for the Conditional Share Award or a Nil Cost Option as the case may be, stating the matters referred to in this Rule.

 

3.5

Vesting of Deferred Share Award

Subject to Rules 3.7, 5, 6 and 7, a Deferred Share Award shall Vest, if at all, on the second anniversary of the Dealing Day immediately following the period of ten Dealing Days beginning on the day on which the Company announces its preliminary results for a particular Financial Year.

Subject to the Rules, and in particular subject to Rule 11, the effect of a Deferred Share Award Vesting shall be that:

If the Deferred Share Award is a Conditional Share Award, the Award Holder shall become entitled to a transfer of the Plan Shares or If the Deferred Share Award is a Nil Cost Option, the Award Holder shall become entitled to exercise the Nil Cost Option.

 

3.6

Exercise of Nil Cost Option

A Nil Cost Option shall be exercised by the Award Holder delivering to the Company a duly completed notice of exercise in the form from time to time prescribed by the Company, specifying the number of Plan Shares in respect of which the Nil Cost Option is being exercised, and either accompanied by such price (if any) as is stated in the Award Certificate or confirmation of arrangements satisfactory to the Company for the payment of such price, together with any payment and/or documentation required under Rule 11 and, if required, the Award Certificate.

 

3.7

No Vesting or Exercise while Dealing Restrictions apply

During a period in which Dealing Restrictions apply, the Award Holder may not exercise a Nil Cost Option, and Plan Shares may not be issued or transferred to an Award Holder under a Conditional Share Award. Where the application of Dealing Restrictions affects the exercise or settlement of a Deferred Share Award, subject to Rule 3.9, such event shall take place as soon as reasonably practicable after the lifting of the Dealing Restriction.

 

3


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

3.8

Effect of Cessation of Relevant Employment

Subject to Rule 6, an Award shall Vest (and a Nil Cost Option may be exercised) only while the Award Holder is in Relevant Employment. If an Award Holder ceases to be in Relevant Employment, any Unvested Award or unexercised Nil Cost Option granted to him shall lapse on cessation. This Rule 3.8 shall apply where the Award Holder ceases to be in Relevant Employment in any circumstances (including, in particular, but not by way of limitation, where the Award Holder is dismissed unfairly, wrongfully, in breach of contract or otherwise).

Subject to Rule 6, an Award held by an Award Holder who has given or received notice of termination of employment (whether or not lawful) shall not Vest during any period when the notice is effective.

 

3.9

Issue or transfer of Plan Shares

Subject to Rules 3.10 and 11 and to any necessary consent and to compliance by the Award Holder with the Rules, the Remuneration Committee shall, as soon as practicable and in any event not later than thirty days after the Vesting of a Conditional Share Award or the exercise of a Nil Cost Option, arrange for the issue or transfer to the Award Holder of the number of Plan Shares subject to the Deferred Share Award.

 

3.10

Cash Settling

Subject to Rule 11, the Remuneration Committee may on the Vesting of a Conditional Share Award or exercise of a Nil Cost Option make a cash payment to the Award Holder equal to the Market Value of the Plan Shares in respect of which the Conditional Share Award has Vested or the Nil Cost Option is exercised.

Where the Remuneration Committee settles a Deferred Share Award in the manner described in this Rule 3.10, this shall be in full and final satisfaction of the Award Holder’s rights under the Deferred Share Award.

 

4

Plan Limits

An Award may not be made if the result of making the Award would be that the aggregate number of Plan Shares issued or committed to be issued in the preceding ten year period under

 

 

Awards under the Plan; or

 

 

options or awards granted under any other Employees’ Share Scheme (whether or not discretionary) operated by the Group

would exceed ten per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital at that time.

For the purpose of this limit:

 

 

for as long as required by the Investment Association treasury shares shall be included in the limit as if they were new issue shares;

 

 

there shall be disregarded any Plan Shares where the right to acquire the Plan Shares has lapsed or been renounced or is incapable of Vesting.

 

 

there shall be disregarded any Plan Shares which the Trustees have purchased, or determined that they will purchase, in order to satisfy an Award or the exercise of an option or the vesting of other rights of an employee under any other employees’ share scheme operated by the Group; and

 

 

any Plan Shares issued in relation to an Award, or on the exercise of an option or the vesting of other rights of an employee under any other employees’ share scheme operated by the Group shall be taken into account once only (when the Award is made or the option is granted or the right awarded) and shall not fall out of account when the Award Vests, the option is exercised or other rights vest.

 

4


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

5

Malus and Clawback

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Rules, the Remuneration Committee may:

 

   

require an Award Holder to forfeit the whole or part of any Cash Award not yet paid; or

 

   

reduce or cancel any Unvested Deferred Share Award or any unexercised Vested Nil Cost Option, or, in relation to any Award granted following 1 July 2015, any exercised Vested Nil Cost Option or Vested Conditional Share Award in respect of which Plan Shares have not yet been transferred to the Award Holder

if:

 

 

there has been a material adverse adjustment to the audited consolidated accounts of the Company for any accounting period ending before the Vesting of the Award; and/or

 

 

there is reasonable evidence of fraud or other gross misconduct and, in relation to any Award granted following 1 July 2015, material dishonesty, material failure of risk management, and/or material wrongdoing on the part of or by the Award Holder.

When taking any step under this Rule 5, the Remuneration Committee shall act in good faith and treat all Award Holders fairly, reasonably and equitably and shall notify any affected Award Holder as soon as possible.

The Remuneration Committee may in its discretion make any alteration or amendment to this Rule 5 as is necessary or desirable to take account of local laws affecting any Group Member or any Award Holder .

 

6

Vesting of Awards in Special Circumstances

If an Award Holder dies or ceases to be in Relevant Employment by reason of:

 

 

ill health or permanent disability;

 

 

redundancy within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996;

 

 

retirement by agreement with the company by which he is employed;

 

 

the Award Holder being employed by a company which ceases to be a Group Member;

 

 

the Award Holder being employed in an undertaking or part of an undertaking which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member; or

 

 

any other circumstances if the Remuneration Committee decides in any particular case;

 

   

any Deferred Share Award shall not lapse but shall (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5) Vest in full in accordance with Rule 3.5 on the second anniversary of the date of grant, unless the Remuneration Committee determines that his Deferred Share Award shall Vest in full as soon as practicable after the date on which he ceases to be in Relevant Employment. Where Vested Deferred Share Awards are in the form of Nil Cost Options, the Award Holder shall become entitled to exercise the Nil Cost Options for a period of 12 months from the date on which his Award Vests, after which time any unexercised Nil Cost Options shall lapse. For the avoidance of doubt, the Award Holder’s right to exercise is subject to Rule 3.7 (No Vesting or Exercise while Dealing Restrictions apply); and

 

   

the Remuneration Committee may, in its absolute discretion, determine that any Award which has not yet been subject to its determination in accordance with Rule 3.2 shall not lapse in accordance with Rule 3.8, but instead shall continue. Where such a determination is made, the proportion of the Award which is capable of Vesting shall still be determined pursuant to Rule 3.2 but be reduced by the Remuneration Committee to reflect the period of time that the Award Holder has been in Relevant Employment during the particular Financial Year (or such shorter period as the Remuneration Committee determines).

 

5


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

The Remuneration Committee may determine that only the Cash Award shall Vest in accordance with Rule 3.3 and no Deferred Share Award shall be granted. Alternatively the Remuneration Committee may determine that a Deferred Share Award shall be granted pursuant to Rule 3.4, in which case paragraph (0) shall apply.

 

7

Takeover, Reconstruction, Amalgamation or Winding-up of Company

 

7.1

Takeover

Subject to Rule 8, where a person obtains Control of the Company, Deferred Share Awards shall (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5) Vest in full on the date the person obtains Control.

 

7.2

Compulsory acquisition of Company

Subject to Rule 8, if a person becomes entitled or bound to acquire shares in the Company under section 979 of the Companies Act 2006, the Deferred Share Awards shall (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5) Vest in full.

 

7.3

Reconstruction or amalgamation of Company

Subject to Rule 8, if a person proposes to obtain Control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under section 899 of the Companies Act 2006, Deferred Share Awards will (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5) Vest in full on the date of the court sanction.

 

7.4

Winding-up of Company

Subject to Rule 8, if notice is given of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up of the Company Deferred Share Awards will (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5) Vest in full on the date notice is given.

 

7.5

Demergers and Other Events

Subject to Rule 8, the Remuneration Committee may determine that Deferred Share Awards Vest, and the proportion which does (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5) Vest, if it becomes aware that the Company will be affected by a demerger, distribution (which is not an ordinary dividend) or other transaction not otherwise covered by the Rules.

 

7.6

Meaning of “obtains Control of the Company”

For the purpose of Rule 7 a person shall be deemed to have obtained Control of the Company if he and others Acting In Concert with him have together obtained Control of it.

 

7.7

Notification of Award Holders

The Remuneration Committee shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Award Holder of the occurrence of any of the events referred to in this Rule 7 and explain how this affects their position under the Plan.

 

6


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

7.8

Vesting of Deferred Share Awards and corporation tax deduction

Where the Remuneration Committee is aware that an event is likely to occur under Rule 7 in respect of which Deferred Share Awards will Vest in circumstances where the conditions for relief under Part 12 of the Corporation Tax Act 2009 may not be satisfied, the Remuneration Committee may determine that the Deferred Share Awards Vest (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5), in accordance with Rule 7, immediately prior to the event taking place.

Where Vested Deferred Share Awards are in the form of a Nil Cost Options, the Award Holder shall become entitled to exercise the Nil Cost Options for a period of three months from the date of the occurrence of the relevant event after which any unexercised Nil Cost Options shall lapse. For the avoidance of doubt, the Award Holder’s right to exercise is subject to Rule 3.7 (No Vesting or Exercise while Dealing Restrictions apply).

 

8

Exchange of Deferred Share Awards

 

8.1

Where Exchange applies

A Deferred Share Award will not Vest under Rule 7 but will be exchanged for a new award (“New Award”) under this Rule to the extent that:

 

 

an offer to exchange the Deferred Share Award for a New Award is made and accepted by the Award Holder; or

 

 

the Remuneration Committee, if relevant, with the consent of the persons acquiring Control, decide that Deferred Share Awards will be automatically exchanged for New Awards.

 

8.2

Terms of Exchange

The following applies in respect of the New Award:

 

 

The Award Date of the New Award shall be deemed to be the same as the Award Date of the Deferred Share Award.

 

 

The New Award will be in respect of the shares in a company determined by the Remuneration Committee.

 

 

In the application of the Plan to the New Award, where appropriate, references to “Company” and “Plan Shares” shall be read as if they were references to the company to whose shares the New Award relates.

 

 

The New Award must be equivalent to the Deferred Share Award and it will (subject to any adjustment pursuant to Rule 5)Vest at the same time and in the same manner as the Deferred Share Award.

 

9

Adjustment of Deferred Share Awards on Reorganisation

 

9.1

Power to adjust Deferred Share Awards

In the event of a Reorganisation, the number of Plan Shares subject to a Deferred Share Award, the description of the Plan Shares, or any one or both of these, shall be adjusted in such manner as the Remuneration Committee shall determine.

 

9.2

Notification of Award Holders

The Remuneration Committee shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Award Holder of any adjustment made under this Rule 9 and explain how this affects their position under the Plan.

 

7


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

10

Issue and Listing of Plan Shares

 

10.1

Rights attaching to Plan Shares

All Plan Shares issued and/or transferred under the Plan shall, as to voting, dividend, transfer and other rights, including those arising on a liquidation of the Company, rank equally in all respects and as one class with the shares of the same class in issue at the date of issue or transfer save as regards any rights attaching to such Plan Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of such issue or transfer.

 

10.2

Listing of Plan Shares

If and so long as Plan Shares are listed on the Official List and traded on the London Stock Exchange, or are traded on the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange, the Company will apply for the listing or admission to trading of any Plan Shares issued under the Plan as soon as practicable.

 

11

Accounting for Taxes and Other Statutory Costs and Deductions

 

11.1

Deductions

The Company or any Group Member (as the case may be) may withhold such amount, or make such other arrangements as it may determine appropriate, for example to sell or withhold Plan Shares, to meet any employer or employee liability to taxes or other statutory costs in respect of Awards.

 

11.2

Execution of Document by Award Holder

The Remuneration Committee may require an Award Holder to execute a document in order to bind himself contractually to any such arrangement as is referred to in Rule 11.1 and return the executed document to the Company by a specified date. It shall be a condition of Vesting of the Award that the executed document be returned by the specified date unless the Remuneration Committee determines otherwise.

 

12

Relationship of Plan to Contract of Employment

 

12.1

Contractual Provisions

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan:

 

 

the Plan shall not form part of any contract of employment between any Group Company and an Eligible Employee;

 

 

unless expressly so provided in his contract of employment, an Eligible Employee has no right to be made an Award and the receipt of an Award in one year is no indication that the Award Holder will be made any subsequent Awards;

 

 

the Plan does not entitle any Award Holder to the exercise of any discretion in their favour;

 

 

the benefit to an Eligible Employee of participation in the Plan (including, in particular but not by way of limitation, any Awards held by him) shall not form any part of his remuneration or count as his remuneration for any purpose other than for tax purposes and shall not be pensionable; and

 

 

if an Eligible Employee ceases to be in Relevant Employment for any reason, he shall not be entitled to compensation for the loss or diminution in value of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan (including, in particular but not by way of limitation, any Awards held by him which lapse by reason of his ceasing to be in Relevant Employment) whether by way of damages for unfair dismissal, wrongful dismissal, breach of contract or otherwise.

 

8


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

12.2

Deemed Agreement

By accepting the making of an Award, an Award Holder is deemed to have agreed to the provisions of these Rules, including this Rule 12.

 

12.3

Meaning of ceasing to be in Relevant Employment

For the purposes of the Plan, an Award Holder shall not be treated as ceasing to be in Relevant Employment until he no longer holds any office or employment with any Group Member.

 

13

Lapse of Awards

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Rules, an Award shall lapse on the earliest of:

 

 

the Remuneration Committee determining that the Performance Target or any further condition imposed under Rule 2.1 has not been satisfied either in whole nor in part in respect of the Award and can no longer be satisfied in whole or in part in which case the Award shall lapse either in whole or as to such part in relation to which the Performance Target or other conditions imposed under Rule 2.1 can no longer be satisfied;

 

 

subject to Rule 6, the Award Holder ceasing to be in Relevant Employment;

 

 

the cancellation of the (whole or any part of the) Award under Rule 5;

 

 

in relation to a Nil Cost Option, the date determined in accordance with paragraph 4 of Rule 3.4;

 

 

any date provided for under these Rules; or

 

 

the date on which the Award Holder becomes bankrupt or enters into a compromise with his creditors generally.

 

14

Administration of Plan

 

14.1

Awards non-transferable

An Award shall be personal to the Award Holder and, except in the case of the death of an Award Holder, shall not be capable of being transferred, charged or otherwise alienated and shall lapse immediately if the Award Holder purports to transfer, charge or otherwise alienate the Award.

 

14.2

Responsibility for administration

The Remuneration Committee shall be responsible for, and shall have the conduct of, the administration of the Plan. The Remuneration Committee may from time to time make, amend or rescind regulations for the administration of the Plan provided that such regulations shall not be inconsistent with the Rules.

 

14.3

Remuneration Committee’s decision final and binding

The decision of the Remuneration Committee shall be final and binding in all matters relating to the Plan, including but not limited to the resolution of any dispute concerning, or any inconsistency or ambiguity in the Rules or any document used in connection with the Plan.

 

14.4

Discretionary nature of Awards

All Awards shall be made entirely at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

 

9


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

14.5

Provision of information

The Award Holder shall provide to the Company as soon as reasonably practicable such information as the Company reasonably requests for the purpose of complying with its obligations under section 421J of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 or other similar legislation in other jurisdictions.

 

14.6

Cost of Plan

The cost of introducing and administering the Plan shall be met by the Company. The Company shall be entitled, if it wishes, to charge an appropriate part of such cost to a Subsidiary.

 

14.7

Data protection

By accepting the making of an Award, an Award Holder is deemed to consent to the holding, processing and transfer of personal data in relation to the Award Holder by or to the Company, any Group Member, any third party broker, registrar or administrator or any future purchaser of the Company or relevant Group Member employing the Award Holder for all purposes relating to the operation of the Plan.

 

14.8

Third party rights

Nothing in these Rules confers any benefit, right or expectation on a person who is not an Award Holder. No such third party has any rights under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any terms of these Rules.

 

15

Amendment of Plan

 

15.1

Power to amend Plan

The Remuneration Committee may from time to time amend the Rules (including, for the purposes of establishing a sub-plan for the benefit of employees located overseas).

 

15.2

Rights of existing Award Holders

An amendment may not adversely affect the rights of an existing Award Holder except where the Award Holder has approved the amendment.

 

16

Notices

 

16.1

Notice by Company

Save as provided for by law, any notice, document or other communication given by, or on behalf of, the Remuneration Committee to any person in connection with the Plan shall be deemed to have been duly given if delivered to him at his place of work, if he is in Relevant Employment if sent by e-mail to such e-mail address as may be specified by him from time to time, or sent through the post in a pre-paid envelope to the postal address last known to the Company to be his address and, if so sent, shall be deemed to have been duly given on the date of posting.

 

16.2

Notice to Company

Save as provided for by law any notice, document or other communication given to the Company in connection with the Plan shall be delivered by hand or sent by email, fax or post to the Company Secretary at the Company’s registered office or such other e-mail or postal address as may from time to time be notified to Award Holders but shall not in any event be duly given unless it is actually received at the registered office or such e-mail or postal address.

 

10


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

17

Governing Law and Jurisdiction

 

17.1

Plan governed by English law

The formation, existence, construction, performance, validity and all aspects whatsoever of the Plan, any term of the Plan and any Award made under it shall be governed by English law.

 

17.2

English courts to have jurisdiction

The English courts shall have jurisdiction to settle any dispute which may arise out of, or in connection with, the Plan.

 

17.3

Jurisdiction agreement for benefit of Company

The jurisdiction agreement contained in this Rule 17 is made for the benefit of the Company only, which accordingly retains the right to bring proceedings in any other court of competent jurisdiction.

 

17.4

Award Holder deemed to submit to such jurisdiction

By accepting the making of an Award, an Award Holder is deemed to have agreed to submit to such jurisdiction.

 

18

Interpretation

 

18.1

Definitions

In this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires, the following words and expressions have the following meanings:

Acting In Concert has the meaning given to that expression in The City Code on Takeovers and Mergers in its present form or as amended from time to time;

Annual Remuneration means the higher of:

(a) the basic salary excluding any election for salary sacrifice made by an Eligible Employee paid by the Group expressed as an annual rate as at the Award Date;

(b) basic salary excluding any election for salary sacrifice made by an Eligible Employee paid by the Group for the period of 12 months ending on the last day of the month immediately preceding the month in which the Award is made;

Award means an Award granted under the Plan being either a Cash Award or a Deferred Share Award;

Award Certificate means a statement in a form determined by the Company setting out details of the Award as set out in Rule 1.4;

Award Date means the date on which an Award is made in accordance with Rule 1.3;

Award Holder means an individual who holds an Award or, where the context permits, his legal personal representatives;

Cash Award means, subject to Rule 3.2, a right to receive a cash amount subject to the satisfaction of the Performance Target;

 

11


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

Company means Abcam plc incorporated in England and Wales under company number 3509322;

Conditional Share Award means a conditional right under the Plan to acquire Plan Shares;

Control has the meaning given to it by section 995 of ITA 2007;

Dealing Day means any day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for the transaction of business;

Dealing Restrictions means restrictions on dealings imposed by statute, order or regulation or Government directive, or by the Model Code or any code adopted by the Company based on the Model Code;

Deferred Share Award means a Conditional Share Award or a Nil Cost Option;

Eligible Employee means an individual who at the Award Date devotes substantially the whole of his or her working hours to the business of the Group and is either an Executive Director or an employee of a Group Member;

Executive Director means a director of the Company who is employed under a contract of employment;

Financial Year means the accounting reference period of the Company as defined in section 391 of the Companies Act 2006;

Group means the Company and its Subsidiaries from time to time and Group Member shall be interpreted accordingly;

ITA 2007 means the Income Tax Act 2007;

London Stock Exchange means the London Stock Exchange plc or any successor body;

Market Value on any day means

if at the relevant time Plan Shares are listed in the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange (or any other recognised stock exchange within the meaning of section 1005 of ITA 2007 or the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange),the middle market quotation (as derived from that List) on the preceding Dealing Day; or where Plan Shares are not so listed, the market value of a Plan Share calculated as described in the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992.

Maximum Bonus Potential means the maximum amount payable pursuant to an Award expressed as a percentage of Annual Remuneration;

Model Code means the Model Code on directors’ dealings in securities as set out in Listing Rule 9, Annex 1 of the Listing Rules issued by the Financial Conduct Authority in its present form and as amended from time to time;

Nil Cost Option means a right to acquire Plan Shares for no payment or (if so determined by the Remuneration Committee and stated in the Award Certificate, for payment of the nominal value of the Plan Shares subject to the Nil Cost Option);

Performance Target means a performance target, which may be made up of one or more constituent elements (for example, but not exclusively, financial, strategic and personal criteria) imposed as a condition of the Vesting of an Award under Rule 2.1;

Plan means the Abcam plc Annual Bonus Plan as amended from time to time;

Plan Shares means ordinary shares in the capital of the Company (or any shares representing them);

 

12


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

Pricing Period means the ten Dealing Days beginning on the Dealing Day on which the Company announces its preliminary results for a particular Financial Year, save where the Company announces its results during a period in which Dealing Restrictions apply, in which case the Pricing Period will be the ten Dealing Days beginning on the day on which such Dealing Restrictions are lifted;

Provisional Deferred Share Award means a Deferred Share Award that has been granted in accordance with Rule 1.1 but where the number of Plan Shares has not yet been calculated in accordance with Rule 3.4;

Relevant Employment means employment with any Group Member;

Remuneration Committee means the duly appointed Remuneration Committee of the Board of directors of the Company;

Reorganisation means any variation in the share capital of the Company, including but without limitation a capitalisation issue, rights issue, demerger or other distribution, a special dividend or distribution, rights offer or bonus issue and a sub-division, consolidation or reduction in the capital of the Company;

Rules mean the rules of the Plan;

Subsidiary has the meaning set out in section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006;

Trustees means the trustees of any trust created by a Group Member; and

Vest means an Award Holder becoming entitled to receive a cash payment in respect of a Cash Award and an Award Holder becoming entitled to have Plan Shares transferred to him in relation to a Deferred Share Award.

 

18.2

Interpretation

In the Plan, unless otherwise specified:

 

 

save as provided for by law a reference to writing includes any mode of reproducing words in a legible form and reduced to paper or electronic format or communication including, for the avoidance of doubt, correspondence via e-mail;

 

 

references to the male gender include the female gender; and

 

 

the Interpretation Act 1978 applies to the Plan in the same way as it applies to an enactment.

 

13


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

SCHEDULE 1

The rules of the Abcam plc Annual Bonus (“Plan”) will apply to Awards held by Participants, who are or who may become, subject to any US tax or social security contributions liability in connection with an Award, except as set out in this Schedule 1. Where there is any conflict between the rules of the Plan and this Schedule 1, the terms of this Schedule 1 will prevail.

 

1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

  1.1

Deferred Share Award means a Conditional Share Award and the rules of the Plan, as amended by this Schedule 1, will be construed accordingly;

 

2

PROCEDURE FOR MAKING AWARDS AND AWARD DATE

 

  2.1

The following wording will be added to the end of Rule 1.3:

“The proportion of the Award that is a Cash Award and the proportion of the Award that is a Provisional Deferred Share Award referred to in paragraph 1 of rule 1.4 must be decided at least 6 months before the end of the Financial Year to which the Performance Target relates.”

 

3

SETTING OF PERFORMANCE TARGET

 

  3.1

Rule 2.1 will be deleted and replaced with the following wording:

The Vesting of an Award and the extent to which it Vests will be subject to the satisfaction of the Performance Target and any other conditions set by the Remuneration Committee. The Performance Target shall be set before or as soon as practicable after the beginning of the Financial Year, and in any event no later than 90 days beginning on the first day of the Financial Year to which they relate, and must be measured in relation to the Financial Year, based where appropriate on the audited financial results.

 

4

VESTING OF CASH AWARD

 

  4.1

The following wording will be added after the words “as soon as practicable” in Rule 3.3:

“,and in any event not later than 15th March following the end of the calendar year in which the Cash Award Vests,”

 

5

ISSUE OR TRANSFER OF PLAN SHARES

 

  5.1

Rule 3.9 will be deleted and replaced with the following wording:

Subject to Rules 3.7, 3.10 and 11 and to any necessary consent and to compliance by the Award Holder with the Rules, the Remuneration Committee shall, as soon as practicable, and in any event, by the later of:

 

  i.

31 December of the calendar year in which the Conditional Share Award Vests; and

 

14


THE ABCAM PLC ANNUAL BONUS PLAN

 

  ii.

the 15th day of the third month of the Financial Year following the Financial Year in which the Conditional Share Award Vests1

transfer (or arrange for the transfer) to the Award Holder the number of Plan Shares subject to the Deferred Share Award.

 

6

VESTING OF AWARDS IN SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES

 

  6.1

Rule 6 will be deleted and replaced with the following wording:

“If an Award Holder dies or ceases to be in Relevant Employment by reason of:

 

   

ill health or permanent disability;

 

   

redundancy within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996;

 

   

the Award Holder being employed by a company which ceases to be a Group Member;

 

   

the Award Holder being employed in an undertaking or part of an undertaking which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member; or

 

   

any other circumstances if the Remuneration Committee decides in any particular case;

 

   

any Deferred Share Award shall not lapse but shall Vest in full in accordance with Rule 3.5 as soon as practicable after the date on which he ceases to be in Relevant Employment; and

the Remuneration Committee may, in its absolute discretion, determine that any Award which has not yet been subject to its determination in accordance with Rule 3.2 shall not lapse in accordance with Rule 3.8, but instead shall continue. Where such a determination is made, the proportion of the Award which is capable of Vesting shall still be determined pursuant to Rule 3.2 but be reduced by the Remuneration Committee to reflect the period of time that the Award Holder has been in Relevant Employment during the particular Financial Year (or such shorter period as the Remuneration Committee determines).

The Remuneration Committee may determine that only the Cash Award shall Vest in accordance with Rule 3.3 and no Deferred Share Award shall be granted. Alternatively the Remuneration Committee may determine that a Deferred Share Award shall be granted pursuant to Rule 3.4, in which case paragraph (a) shall apply.”

 

 

1 

For example if the Conditional Share Award is granted in 1 October 2015 then it would normally vest on the 2nd anniversary of grant, being 1 October 2017, The Plan Shares would need to be transferred to the Award Holder by 15 September 2018 (September being the 3rd month of the Financial Year).

 

15

Exhibit 10.5

ABCAM PLC

RULES

OF

THE ABCAM PLC COMPANY SHARE OPTION PLAN 2009

Approved by a board on: 5th November 2009

Approved by HM Revenue & Customs on: 6th November 2009

HM Revenue & Customs reference no: X105353

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

1 Embankment Place

London WC2N 6RH

Tel: 020 7583 5000

Fax: 020 7822 4652

Ref: MP/OA/SH/EP6


CONTENTS

 

Rule

       Page
Number
 

1.

    INTERPRETATION      1  
  1.1.  

Definitions

     1  
  1.2.  

Interpretation

     4  
2.     GRANT OF OPTIONS      4  
  2.1.  

Options granted by Company

     4  
  2.2.  

Grant of Options determined by Board

     4  
  2.3.  

Procedure for grant of Options and Grant Date

     4  
  2.4.  

Contents of Option Certificate

     4  
  2.5.  

Duration of Plan

     5  
  2.6.  

Persons to whom Options may be granted

     5  
  2.7.  

Right to renounce Options

     5  
  2.8.  

Options non-transferable

     5  
3.     LIMIT ON AGGREGATE NUMBER OF PLAN SHARES PLACED UNDER OPTION      5  
  3.1.  

General

     5  
  3.2.  

Computation

     5  
  3.3.  

Scaling down

     6  
4.     LIMIT ON NUMBER OF PLAN SHARES OVER WHICH OPTIONS MAY BE GRANTED TO ELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE      6  
  4.1.  

HM Revenue & Customs limit (£30,000)

     6  
  4.2.  

Computation

     6  
  4.3.  

Scaling down

     6  
5.     EXERCISE PRICE      6  
6.     PERFORMANCE TARGET      7  
  6.1.  

Imposition of Performance Target

     7  
  6.2.  

Nature of Performance Target

     7  
  6.3.  

Performance Target can no longer be satisfied

     7  
  6.4.  

Substitution, variation or waiver of Performance Target

     7  
  6.5.  

Notification of Option Holders

     7  
7.     EXERCISE OF OPTIONS      7  
  7.1.  

Earliest date for exercise of Options

     7  
  7.2.  

Latest date for exercise of Options

     8  
  7.3.  

Persons who may exercise Options

     8  
  7.4.  

Options may not be exercised during Close Period

     8  
  7.5.  

Material Interest

     8  
  7.6.  

Options may be exercised in whole or in part

     8  
  7.7.  

Procedure for exercise of Options

     8  
  7.8.  

Issue or transfer of Plan Shares on exercise of Options

     9  
8.     EXERCISE OF OPTIONS IN SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES      9  
  8.1.  

Death

     9  
  8.2.  

Ill-health redundancy, retirement etc

     9  
  8.3.  

Other special circumstances

     10  
  8.4.  

Meaning of ceasing to be in Relevant Employment

     10  
  8.5.  

Interaction of Rules

     10  
9.     TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION, AMALGAMATION OR WINDING-UP      11  
  9.1.  

General offer for, or acquisition of Company

     11  
  9.2.  

Compulsory acquisition of Company

     11  
  9.3.  

Power to declare Options exercisable

     11  
  9.4.  

Reconstruction or amalgamation of Company

     12  
  9.5.  

Winding-up of Company

     12  
  9.6.  

Shares subject to Options ceasing to be Plan Shares

     13  
  9.7.  

Meaning of “obtains Control of the Company”

     13  
  9.8.  

Notification of Option Holders

     13  


10.

   

EXCHANGE OF OPTIONS

     13  
 

10.1.

 

Circumstances in which Exchange can occur

     13  
 

10.2.

 

Period allowed for exchange of Options

     14  
 

10.3.

 

Meaning of “equivalent”

     14  
 

10.4.

 

Grant Date of New Option

     14  
 

10.5.

 

Application of Plan to New Option

     14  

11.

   

LAPSE OF OPTIONS

     14  

12.

   

ADJUSTMENT OF OPTIONS ON REORGANISATION

     15  
 

12.1.

 

Power to adjust Options

     15  
 

12.2.

 

Exercise Price

     15  
 

12.3.

 

Capitalisation of reserves

     15  
 

12.4.

 

HM Revenue & Customs approval

     15  
 

12.5.

 

Notification of Option Holders

     16  

13.

   

ACCOUNTING FOR PAYE AND NATIONAL INSURANCE CONTRIBUTIONS

     16  
 

13.1.

 

Deductions

     16  
 

13.2.

 

Transfer of Employer’s NIC

     16  
 

13.3.

 

Execution of Option Certificate by Option Holder

     16  

14.

   

ISSUE AND AVAILABILITY OF PLAN SHARES

     17  
 

14.1.

 

Rights attaching to Plan Shares

     17  

15.

   

RELATIONSHIP OF PLAN TO CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT

     17  
 

15.1.

 

Contractual Provisions

     17  
 

15.2.

 

Deemed Agreement

     17  

16.

   

ADMINISTRATION OF PLAN

     17  
 

16.1.

 

Responsibility for administration

     17  
 

16.2.

 

Board’s decision final and binding

     17  
 

16.3.

 

Discretionary nature of grant of Options

     18  
 

16.4.

 

Provision of information

     18  
 

16.5.

 

Cost of Plan

     18  

17.

   

AMENDMENT OF PLAN

     18  
 

17.1.

 

Power to amend Plan prior to HM Revenue & Customs approval

     18  
 

17.2.

 

Power to amend Plan

     18  
 

17.3.

 

HM Revenue & Customs approval of amendments

     18  
 

17.4.

 

Rights of existing Option Holders

     18  
 

17.5.

 

Notification of Option Holders

     18  

18.

   

NOTICES

     19  
 

18.1.

 

Notice by Board

     19  
 

18.2.

 

Deceased Option Holders

     19  
 

18.3.

 

Notice to Board

     19  
 

18.4.

 

Option Certificate

     19  

19.

   

GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

     19  
 

19.1.

 

Plan governed by English law

     19  
 

19.2.

 

English courts to have jurisdiction

     19  
 

19.3.

 

Jurisdiction agreement for benefit of Company

     19  
 

19.4.

 

Option Holder deemed to submit to such jurisdiction

     20  


1.

INTERPRETATION

 

1.1.

Definitions

In this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires, the following words and expressions have the following meanings:

 

1.1.1.

Acquiring Company means a company (including a New Holding Company) which obtains Control of the Company in the circumstances referred to in Rule 9.1, 9.2 or 9.4 (reading the reference in Rule 9.4 to “proposes to obtain” as “obtains”);

 

1.1.2.

Acting In Concert has the meaning given to that expression in The City Code on Takeovers and Mergers in its present form or as amended from time to time;

 

1.1.3.

Adoption Date means the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board;

 

1.1.4.

Any Other Share Scheme means any Employees’ Share Scheme” (other than this Plan) which provides for the subscription of Shares by or on behalf of employees of the Company, or any Associated Company (within the meaning of Section 416 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988);

 

1.1.5.

Approval Date means the date on which the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4;

 

1.1.6.

Associated Company has the meaning given to that expression by paragraph 35(1) of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.7.

Board means the board of directors of the Company or a duly authorised committee thereof;

 

1.1.8.

Close Company has the meaning given to that expression by section 989 of ITA 2007, and paragraph 9(4) of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.9.

Close Period means such time as Eligible Employees of the Company are prohibited from dealing in Plan Shares for whatever reason, in accordance with the rule 21 of the Alternative Investment Market Rules or the relevant provision in any regulations governing an Exchange (as replaced, amended or re-enacted from time to time) and/or such code as the Company may have established from time to time or such other statutory, regulatory or other prohibition from dealing in Plan Shares or rights over Plan Shares;

 

1.1.10.

Company means Abcam plc incorporated in England and Wales under company number 03509322, being the scheme organiser for the purposes of paragraph 2(2) of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.11.

Consortium has the meaning given to that word by paragraph 36(2) of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.12.

Constituent Company means the Company or a company which is a Subsidiary and which has been nominated by the Board to participate in the Plan from time to time;

 

1.1.13.

Control has the meaning given to that word by section 719 of ITEPA 2003;

 

1.1.14.

Eligible Employee means an individual who is:

 

  (a)

an employee (other than a director) of a Constituent Company; or

 

1


  (b)

a director of a Constituent Company who is contracted to work at least 25 hours per week for the Group (exclusive of meal breaks);

and who, in either case:

 

  (i)

is not eligible solely by reason that he is a non-executive director of a Constituent Company;

 

  (ii)

has earnings in respect of his office or employment which are (or would be if there were any) general earnings to which section 15, 22 or 26 of ITEPA 2003 applies;

 

  (iv)

has not given or been given notice to terminate his employment within the Group; and

 

  (v)

does not have at the Grant Date, and has not had during the preceding twelve months, a Material Interest in a Close Company which is the Company or a company which has Control of the Company or a member of a Consortium which owns the Company;

 

1.1.15.

Employees’ Share Scheme has the meaning set out in section 1166 of the Companies Act 2006;

 

1.1.16.

Employer Company means the Group Member which employs the Option Holder;

 

1.1.17.

Employer’s NIC means employer’s national insurance contributions liability;

 

1.1.18.

Exchange means the Alternative Investment Market or any other recognised exchange on which the Company’s Share are listed from time to time ;

 

1.1.19.

Exercise Price means the amount per Plan Share payable on the exercise of an Option determined in accordance with Rule 5;

 

1.1.20.

Grant Date means the date on which an Option is granted to an Eligible Employee determined in accordance with Rule 2.3;

 

1.1.21.

Group means the Company and all Subsidiaries and Associated Companies of the Company and “Group Member” shall be construed accordingly;

 

1.1.22.

ITA 2007 means the Income Tax Act 2007;

 

1.1.23.

ITEPA 2003 means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003;

 

1.1.24.

Key Feature means a provision of the Plan which is necessary in order to meet the requirements of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.25.

Market Value means

 

  (a)

in respect of a listed Share on any dealing day means an amount equal to the middle market quotation on the Exchange;

 

  (b)

in respect of an unlisted share on any day, the market value of such Share determined in accordance with the provisions of Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992 and agreed in advance with Shares and Assets Valuation of HM Revenue & Customs; or

 

  (c)

in the case of an option granted or award made under any other Employees’ Share Scheme, the market value of an ordinary share in the capital of the Company determined under the rules of such scheme for the purpose of the grant of the option or the making of the award

 

2


1.1.26.

Material Interest has the meaning given to that expression by paragraphs 9 to 14 of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.27.

New Holding Company means a company which obtains Control of the Company where 90% or more of the New Holding Company’s ordinary shares are held in substantially the same proportions by substantially the same persons who previously held the Company’s ordinary shares;

 

1.1.28.

New Option means an option granted by way of exchange under Rule 10.1;

 

1.1.29.

New Plan Shares means the shares subject to a New Option;

 

1.1.30.

Notice of Exercise means the notice given in respect of the exercise of an Option under Rule 7.7;

 

1.1.31.

Option means a right to acquire Plan Shares granted under the Plan;

 

1.1.32.

Option Certificate means the deed or statement under which an Option is granted in accordance with Rule 2.3;

 

1.1.33.

Option Holder means an individual who holds an Option or, where the context permits, his legal personal representatives;

 

1.1.34.

Participating Company means the Company or a Subsidiary;

 

1.1.35.

Performance Target means a performance target imposed as a condition of the exercise of an Option under Rule 6.1 and as substituted or varied in accordance with Rule 6.4;

 

1.1.36.

Plan means The Abcam plc Company Share Option Plan 2009 in its present form or as amended from time to time;

 

1.1.37.

Plan Shares means ordinary shares in the capital of the Company which satisfy the conditions in paragraphs 16 to 20 of Schedule 4;

 

1.1.38.

Qualifying Option means an option which satisfies the requirements of Schedule 5 of ITEPA 2003;

 

1.1.39.

Relevant Employment means employment with any Group Member;

 

1.1.40.

Reorganisation means any variation in the share capital of the Company, including but without limitation a capitalisation issue, rights issue, rights offer or bonus issue and a sub-division, consolidation or reduction in the capital of the Company but excluding a capitalisation issue in substitution for or as an alternative to a cash dividend;

 

1.1.41.

Rules mean the rules of the Plan;

 

1.1.42.

Schedule 4 means Schedule 4 to ITEPA 2003;

 

1.1.43.

Specified Age means 60 years; and

 

1.1.44.

Subsidiary means a company which is a subsidiary of the Company within the meaning of section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006 over which the Company has Control.

 

3


1.2.

Interpretation

In the Plan, unless otherwise specified:

 

1.2.1.

the contents and rule headings are inserted for ease of reference only and do not affect the interpretation of the Plan;

 

1.2.2.

a reference to a Rule is a reference to a rule of the Plan;

 

1.2.3.

save as provided for by law and subject to Rule 18.4 a reference to writing includes any mode of reproducing words in a legible form and reduced to paper or electronic format or communication including, for the avoidance of doubt, correspondence via e-mail;

 

1.2.4.

the singular includes the plural and vice versa and the masculine includes the feminine;

 

1.2.5.

a reference to a statutory provision includes any statutory modification, amendment or re-enactment thereof; and

 

1.2.6.

the Interpretation Act 1978 applies to the Plan in the same way as it applies to an enactment.

 

2.

GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

2.1.

Options granted by Company

The Board may from time to time grant Options to Eligible Employees at any time except during a Close Period.

 

2.2.

Grant of Options determined by Board

Subject to the Rules, the Eligible Employees to whom Options are granted and the terms of such Options shall be determined by the Board in its absolute discretion.

 

2.3.

Procedure for grant of Options and Grant Date

The Board shall grant an Option by passing a resolution. The Grant Date shall be the date on which the Board passes the resolution or such later date as is specified in the resolution. The grant of an Option or Options shall be evidenced by a deed executed by or on behalf of the Board. The deed or a statement providing details of the grant shall be issued to each Eligible Employee who has been granted an Option as soon as reasonably practicable following the grant of the Option.

 

2.4.

Contents of Option Certificate

An Option Certificate shall be in such form of document as the Board may determine from time to time, and shall state all of the following:

 

  (a)

the Grant Date;

 

  (b)

the number of Plan Shares subject to the Option or how that number may be calculated;

 

4


  (c)

the Exercise Price or the method by which the Exercise Price will be determined;

 

  (d)

when the Option will ordinarily become exercisable, and the number of Plan Shares over which the Option may then be exercised;

 

  (e)

how the Option may be exercised;

 

  (f)

any Performance Target or other conditions applicable to the Option.

 

2.5.

Duration of Plan

An Option may not be granted

 

2.5.1.

earlier than the Approval Date; nor

 

2.5.2.

more than ten years after the Adoption Date.

 

2.6.

Persons to whom Options may be granted

No Option may be granted to an individual who is not an Eligible Employee on the Grant Date.

 

2.7.

Right to renounce Options

An Eligible Employee to whom an Option is granted may, by notice in writing to the Board at any time prior to exercise of an Option and, if available, accompanied by the Option Certificate, renounce in whole or in part his rights under the Option. In such a case, the Option shall to that extent be treated, for the purpose of the Plan, as never having been granted. No consideration shall be due from the Company for any such renunciation.

 

2.8.

Options non-transferable

An Option shall be personal to the Eligible Employee to whom it is granted and, subject to Rule 8.1, shall not be capable of being transferred, charged or otherwise alienated and shall lapse immediately if the Option Holder purports to transfer, charge or otherwise alienate the Option.

 

3.

LIMIT ON AGGREGATE NUMBER OF PLAN SHARES PLACED UNDER OPTION

 

3.1.

General

The aggregate number of Plan Shares which may be placed under Option under the Plan shall be limited as agreed from time to time.

 

3.2.

Computation

For the purpose of the limits contained in this Rule 3:

 

3.2.1.

there shall be disregarded any ordinary shares subject to an option or other rights of an employee under the Plan and/or any other Employees’ Share Scheme operated by the Group which have lapsed, been renounced or otherwise become incapable of being exercised or vesting;

 

5


3.2.2.

any ordinary shares issued on the exercise of an option or the vesting of other rights of an employee under the Plan and/or any other Employees’ Share Scheme operated by the Group shall be taken into account once only (when the option is granted or the right awarded) and shall not fall out of account when the option is exercised or other rights vest.

 

3.3.

Scaling down

If the grant of an Option would cause the limit in this Rule 3 to be exceeded, such Option shall take effect as an Option over the maximum number of Plan Shares which does not cause the limit to be exceeded. If more than one Option is granted on the same Grant Date, the number of Plan Shares which would otherwise be subject to each Option shall be reduced pro rata.

 

4.

LIMIT ON NUMBER OF PLAN SHARES OVER WHICH OPTIONS MAY BE GRANTED TO ELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE

 

4.1.

HM Revenue & Customs limit (£30,000)

An Option may not be granted to an Eligible Employee if the result of granting the Option would be that the aggregate Market Value of the shares subject to all outstanding Qualifying Options granted by the Company, an Associated Company or Subsidiary or outstanding options granted to him under the Plan or any other share option scheme established by the Company, an Associated Company or Subsidiary and approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4 would exceed £30,000 or such other limit as may from time to time be specified in paragraph 6 of Schedule 4.

 

4.2.

Computation

For the purpose of the limit contained in Rule 4.1, Plan Shares subject to an Option which has been exercised, lapsed, renounced or otherwise become incapable of being exercised shall be disregarded.

 

4.3.

Scaling down

If the grant of an Option would cause the limit in this Rule 4 to be exceeded, such Option shall take effect as an Option over the maximum number of Plan Shares which does not cause the limit to be exceeded. If more than one Option is granted on the same Grant Date, the number of Plan Shares which would otherwise be subject to each Option shall be reduced pro rata.

 

5.

EXERCISE PRICE

The Exercise Price shall be determined by the Board and may be any price but shall not be less than the higher of:

 

(a)

the Market Value of a Plan Share on the Grant Date; or

 

(b)

in the case of any Option which the Board has determined will be satisfied by the issue of new shares directly to the Option Holder, the nominal value of a Plan Share.

 

6


6.

PERFORMANCE TARGET

 

6.1.

Imposition of Performance Target

On the grant of an Option, the Board may impose a Performance Target and may impose any further condition on the exercise of the Option that the Board determines to be appropriate.

 

6.2.

Nature of Performance Target

A Performance Target and any further condition imposed under Rule 6.1 shall be:

 

6.2.1.

objective;

 

6.2.2.

capable of being fulfilled within the period of ten years from the Grant Date; and

 

6.2.3.

such that, once satisfied, the exercise of the Option is not subject to the discretion of any person; and

 

6.2.4.

set out in, or attached in the form of a schedule to, the Option Certificate.

 

6.3.

Performance Target can no longer be satisfied

If the Board determines that the Performance Target or any further condition imposed under Rule 6.1 has not been satisfied either in whole or in part in relation to an Option and can no longer be satisfied either in whole or in part, the Option shall lapse immediately as to the proportion in relation to which the Performance Target has not been satisfied.

 

6.4.

Substitution, variation or waiver of Performance Target

If an event occurs which causes the Board to consider that the Performance Target or any further condition imposed under Rule 6.1 subject to which an Option has been granted is no longer appropriate, the Board may substitute, vary or waive the Performance Target or the condition in such manner as:

 

6.4.1.

is reasonable in the circumstances; and

 

6.4.2.

except in the case of waiver, produces a fairer measure of performance and is not materially more nor less difficult to satisfy

and the Option shall then take effect subject to the Performance Target or the condition as so substituted, varied or waived.

 

6.5.

Notification of Option Holders

The Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Option Holder concerned of any substitution, variation or waiver of the Performance Target or a condition made by it under Rule 6.4 and explain how it affects his position under the Plan.

 

7.

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

7.1.

Earliest date for exercise of Options

Subject to Rules 8 and 9, an Option may not be exercised earlier than the later of:

 

7


7.1.1.

in relation to the Plan Shares in respect of which the Option is being exercised, the relevant date specified in the Option Certificate under Rule 2.4; and

 

7.1.2.

the date on which the Board determines that any Performance Target and any further condition imposed under Rule 6.1, in their original form or as substituted or varied from time to time, have been satisfied or waived.

 

7.2.

Latest date for exercise of Options

Notwithstanding any other provision in the Rules, an Option may not be exercised later than the tenth anniversary of the Grant Date and, to the extent not exercised by that time, the Option shall lapse immediately.

 

7.3.

Persons who may exercise Options

Subject to Rule 8, an Option may be exercised only while the Option Holder is in Relevant Employment and if an Option Holder ceases to be in Relevant Employment, any Option granted to him shall lapse immediately. This Rule 7.3 shall apply where the Option Holder ceases to be in Relevant Employment in any circumstances (including, in particular, but not by way of limitation, where the Option Holder is dismissed unfairly, wrongfully, in breach of contract or otherwise).

An Option Holder may not exercise an Option if he has given or been given notice of termination of employment such that he will cease to be in Relevant Employment at the end of the notice period.

 

7.4.

Options may not be exercised during Close Period

An Option may not be exercised during a Close Period except in circumstances where this is permitted under the the Company’s own code on insider dealing or other such code as the Company may have established from time to time

 

7.5.

Material Interest

An Option may not be exercised if the Option Holder then has, or has had within the preceding twelve months, a Material Interest in a Close Company which is the Company or which is a company which has Control of the Company or which is a member of a Consortium which owns the Company.

 

7.6.

Options may be exercised in whole or in part

An Option may, to the extent it has become exercisable, be exercised in whole or in part. If exercised in part, the unexercised part of the Option shall not lapse and shall remain exercisable unless the Rules specify otherwise except that where exercised in part, such exercise shall be in respect of a minimum of 100 shares or the remaining balance of the Option if less.

 

7.7.

Procedure for exercise of Options

 

7.7.1.

An Option shall be exercised by the Option Holder delivering to the Board a duly completed Notice of Exercise in the form from time to time prescribed by the Board, specifying the number of Plan Shares in respect of which the Option is being exercised, together with any payment or documentation required under Rule 13 and accompanied by payment in full for the Plan Shares and, if available, the Option Certificate.

 

8


7.7.2.

For the avoidance of doubt, the date of exercise of an Option shall be determined in accordance with Rule 18.3. If payment is made by cheque and the cheque fails to clear the Option shall be deemed never to have been exercised.

 

7.8.

Issue or transfer of Plan Shares on exercise of Options

Subject to Rule 13, and to any necessary consents and to compliance by the Option Holder with the Rules, the Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable and in any event not later than thirty days after the date of exercise of the Option, issue or transfer to the Option Holder, or procure the issue or transfer to the Option Holder of, the number of Plan Shares specified in the Notice of Exercise and shall deliver or procure the delivery to the Option Holder of a definitive share certificate in respect of such Plan Shares.

 

8.

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS IN SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES

 

8.1.

Death

 

8.1.1.

Notwithstanding Rules 7.1.1 and 7.3, if an Option Holder dies his personal representatives shall be entitled to exercise his Option during the period determined in accordance with Rule 8.1.3.

 

8.1.2.

The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised shall be calculated as follows :

8.1.2.1. on the period of time elapsed from the Grant Date and the date of death in proportion to the time from the Grant Date and the normal Vesting Date at the end of the third anniversary of the Grant Date; and;

8.1.2.2. on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

8.1.3.

The period during which the personal representatives shall be entitled to exercise the Options shall end no later than the earlier of the first anniversary of his death or the tenth anniversary of the Grant Date. To the extent not exercised, the Options shall lapse at the expiry of such period.

 

8.2.

Ill-health redundancy, retirement etc

 

8.2.1.

Notwithstanding Rules 7.1.1 and 7.3, if an Option Holder ceases to be in Relevant Employment by reason of:

 

  8.2.1.1.

injury, ill-health or disability provided that the Board is satisfied, on production of such evidence as it may reasonably require, that (a) the Option Holder has ceased to exercise and, by reason of injury, ill health or disability, is incapable of exercising that employment; and (b) the Option Holder is likely to remain so incapable for the foreseeable future;

 

  8.2.1.2.

redundancy within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996;

 

  8.2.1.3.

retirement on reaching the Specified Age;

 

  8.2.1.4.

the Option Holder being employed by a company which ceases to be a Group Member; or

 

9


  8.2.1.5.

the Option Holder being employed in an undertaking or part of an undertaking which is transferred to a person who is not a Group Member

 

 

the provisions of Rule 8.2.2 shall apply and shall be exercisable in accordance with 8.2.3.

 

8.2.2.

The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised shall be calculated as follows :

8.2.2.1. on the period of time elapsed from the Grant Date and the date when Relevant Employment ceases in proportion to the time from the Grant Date and the normal Vesting Date at the end of the third anniversary of the Grant Date; and;

8.2.2.2. on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

8.2.3.

The period during which he may exercise his Options shall end six months after the date on which Relevant Employment ceases or if earlier the tenth anniversary of the Grant Date. To the extent not exercised, the Options shall lapse at the expiry of such period.

 

8.3.

Other special circumstances

Notwithstanding Rules 7.1.1 and 7.3, if an Option Holder ceases to be in Relevant Employment the Board may, at its discretion, after the date the Option Holder ceased to be in Relevant Employment (and in a fair and reasonable manner), allow an Option Holder who has ceased to be in Relevant Employment for a reason other than those referred to in Rules 8.1 and 8.2 to exercise his Options at any time during such period and on such basis as the Board determines. To the extent not so exercised, or if such exercise is not permitted the Options shall lapse at the expiry of such period.

 

8.4.

Meaning of ceasing to be in Relevant Employment

For the purposes of the Plan, an Option Holder shall not be treated as ceasing to be in Relevant Employment until he no longer holds any office or employment with any Group Member.

 

8.5.

Interaction of Rules

 

8.5.1.

If an Option has become exercisable under Rule 8.2 and, during the period allowed for the exercise of the Option under Rule 8.2, the Option Holder dies, the period allowed for the exercise of the Option shall be the period allowed by Rule 8.1.

 

8.5.2.

If an Option has become exercisable under Rule 8 and, during the period allowed for the exercise of the Option under Rule 8, the Option becomes exercisable under Rule 9 also (or vice versa), the period allowed for the exercise of the Option shall be the first to determine of the period allowed by Rule 8 and the period allowed by Rule 9.

 

10


9.

TAKEOVER, RECONSTRUCTION, AMALGAMATION OR WINDING-UP

 

9.1.

General offer for, or acquisition of Company

Notwithstanding Rule 7.1.1, if a person other than a New Holding Company obtains Control of the Company as a result of:

 

9.1.1.

making a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company which is made on a condition such that if it is satisfied the person making the offer will have Control of the Company; or

 

9.1.2.

making a general offer to acquire all the shares in the Company of the same class as the Plan Shares

(in either case, other than any shares already held by him or a person Acting In Concert with him)

Options may be exercised, subject to Rule 9.2, at any time during the period of six months beginning with the time when the person making the offer or proposed acquisition (as the case may be) has obtained Control of the Company and any condition subject to which the offer or proposed acquisition is made has been satisfied. If not so exercised, the Options shall lapse at the expiry of the six month period unless the Board, acting fairly and reasonably, determines otherwise, when the Options shall continue to exist until such time as they lapse in accordance with the Rules.

The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised is dependent on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

9.2.

Compulsory acquisition of Company

Notwithstanding Rule 7.1.1, if a person other than a New Holding Company becomes entitled or bound to acquire shares in the Company before the tenth anniversary of the Grant Date under sections 979 to 982 of the Companies Act 2006, Options may be exercised at any time during the period beginning with the date the person serves a notice under section 979 and ending seven clear days before the date on which the person ceases to be entitled to serve such a notice. If not so exercised, the Options shall cease to be exercisable and shall lapse when the person ceases to be entitled to serve such a notice unless the Board, acting fairly and reasonably, determines otherwise before the Options have lapsed, when the Options shall continue to exist.

The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised is dependent on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

9.3.

Power to declare Options exercisable

Notwithstanding Rule 7.1.1, if a person makes such an offer or proposes such an acquisition (as the case may be) as is referred to in Rule 9.1 or makes an offer to acquire the whole or substantially the whole of the business of the Company, the Board, acting fairly and reasonably may, by notice in writing to all Option Holders, declare outstanding Options to be exercisable during a limited period specified by the Board in the notice and subject to such conditions as the Board may require. If the Board so declares, such outstanding Options may be exercised at any time during such period. If not exercised, the Options shall lapse at the expiry of such period unless the Board revokes the declaration before the Options have been exercised in which case such Options shall not lapse but shall continue in force in accordance with the rules of the Plan.

 

11


The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised is dependent on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

9.4.

Reconstruction or amalgamation of Company

Notwithstanding Rule 7.1.1, if a person other than a New Holding Company proposes to obtain Control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under section 899 of the Companies Act 2006:

 

9.4.1.

Options (including, at the election of the Option Holder, an Option which has already become exercisable) may be exercised, conditionally on the compromise or arrangement being sanctioned by the court, at any time during the period beginning with the date of the meeting of the members of the Company ordered by the court and ending on the earlier of six months thereafter and seven clear days before the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement;

 

9.4.2.

if the compromise or arrangement becomes effective, any Options not so exercised pursuant to a notice given under this Rule 9.4 by the earlier of those dates shall cease to be exercisable and shall lapse at the end of such six month period and seven clear days before the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement;

 

9.4.3.

if the compromise or arrangement does not become effective within such six month period, any notice to exercise an Option given under this Rule 9.4 shall be of no effect and the Option shall continue to exist and seven clear days before the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement;

 

9.4.4.

the date of exercise of all Options exercised conditionally under this Rule 9.4 shall be immediately prior to the date on which the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement; and

 

9.4.5.

an Option which has already become exercisable may be exercised unconditionally before the earlier of those dates. Any Option not so exercised shall cease to be exercisable and shall lapse at the end of such six month period.

The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised is dependent on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

9.5.

Winding-up of Company

Notwithstanding Rule 7.1.1, if notice is given of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up of the Company:

 

9.5.1.

Options (including, at the election of the Option Holder, an Option which has already become exercisable) may be exercised, conditionally on the passing of the resolution, at any time during the period beginning with the date the notice is given and ending seven clear days before the resolution is passed or defeated or the general meeting is concluded or adjourned sine die;

 

9.5.2.

if the resolution is passed, any Options not so exercised shall lapse immediately;

 

9.5.3.

if the resolution is not passed, any notice to exercise an Option under this Rule 9.5 shall be of no effect and the Option shall continue to exist;

 

12


9.5.4.

the date of exercise of all Options exercised conditionally under this Rule 9.5 shall be the date on which the resolution is passed; and

 

9.5.5.

an Option which has already become exercisable may be exercised unconditionally during such period. Any Option not so exercised shall cease to be exercisable and shall lapse immediately following the passing of the resolution.

The number of Plan Shares subject to the Option that may be exercised is dependent on the proportionate satisfaction of the relevant Performance Targets on such date.

 

9.6.

Shares subject to Options ceasing to be Plan Shares

If the shares subject to an Option cease to satisfy the conditions in paragraphs 16 to 20 of Schedule 4:

 

9.6.1.

the Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify HM Revenue & Customs;

 

9.6.2.

the Option shall lapse;

 

9.6.3.

The Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Option Holder of the lapse of the Option and explain how this affects his position under the Plan: and

 

9.6.4.

the Plan shall not continue to exist and no further Options shall be granted.

 

9.7.

Meaning of “obtains Control of the Company”

For the purpose of Rule 9, a person shall be deemed to have obtained Control of the Company if he and others Acting In Concert with him have together obtained Control of it.

 

9.8.

Notification of Option Holders

The Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Option Holder of the occurrence of any of the events referred to in this Rule and explain how this affects his position under the Plan.

 

10.

EXCHANGE OF OPTIONS

 

10.1.

Circumstances in which Exchange can occur

If the person referred to in Rules 9.1, 9.2 or 9.4, (reading the reference in Rule 9.4 to “proposes to obtain” as “obtains”) is a company including a New Holding Company, and the Acquiring Company obtains Control of the Company then an Option Holder may, at any time during the period set out in Rule 10.2, by agreement with the Acquiring Company, release his Option in whole or in part in consideration of the grant to him of a new option which is equivalent to the Option but which relates to shares in:

 

10.1.1.

the Acquiring Company; or

 

10.1.2.

a company which has Control of the Acquiring Company; or

 

10.1.3.

a company which either is, or has Control of, a company which is a member of a Consortium which owns either the Acquiring Company or a company having Control of the Acquiring Company.

 

13


10.2.

Period allowed for exchange of Options

The period referred to in Rule 10.1 is:

 

10.2.1.

where Rule 9.1 applies or would apply if the reference in that Rule to “person” was read as “person including a New Holding Company”, the period referred to in that Rule;

 

10.2.2.

where Rule 9.2 applies, the period during which the Acquiring Company remains so entitled or bound; and

 

10.2.3.

where Rule 9.4 applies, the period of six months beginning with the time when the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement.

If the Option Holder does not release the Option within the relevant period referred to in this Rule 10.2, the Option shall lapse at the expiry of such relevant period.

 

10.3.

Meaning of “equivalent”

The New Option shall not be regarded for the purpose of this Rule 10 as equivalent to the Option unless:

 

10.3.1.

subject to the discretion of the Board as to whether the Performance Target or any further condition imposed under Rule 6.1 should continue to apply to the New Option or be substituted, varied or waived under Rule 6.4, the New Option will be exercisable in the same manner as the Option and subject to the provisions of the Plan as it had effect immediately before the release of the Option;

 

10.3.2.

the New Plan Shares satisfy the conditions in paragraphs 16 to 20 of Schedule 4; and

 

10.3.3.

the total market value, immediately before the release of the Option, of the Plan Shares which were subject to the Option is as nearly as may be equal to the total market value, immediately after the grant of the New Option, of the New Plan Shares subject to the New Option (market value being determined for this purpose in accordance with Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992); and

 

10.3.4.

the total amount payable by the Option Holder for the acquisition of the New Plan Shares under the New Option is as nearly as may be equal to the total amount that would have been payable by the Option Holder for the acquisition of the Plan Shares under the Option.

 

10.4.

Grant Date of New Option

The Grant Date of the New Option shall be deemed to be the same as the Grant Date of the Option.

 

10.5.

Application of Plan to New Option

In the application of the Plan to the New Option, where appropriate, references to “Company” and “Plan Shares” shall be read as if they were references to the company to whose shares the New Option relates and the New Plan Shares, respectively, save that in the definition of “Board” the reference to “Company” shall be read as if it were a reference to Abcam plc.

 

11.

LAPSE OF OPTIONS

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Rules, an Option shall lapse on the earliest of:

 

14


11.1.

the tenth anniversary of the Grant Date;

 

11.2.

the Board determining that any Performance Target or any further condition imposed under Rule 6.1 has been satisfied neither in whole nor in part in relation to the Option and can no longer be satisfied in whole or in part;

 

11.3.

the Option Holder ceasing to be in Relevant Employment, except where

 

11.3.1.

this arises for any of the reasons set out in Rules 8.1 to 8.2; or

 

11.3.2.

during any of the periods set out in Rules 9.1 to 9.5 other than for an act or omission of the Option Holder entitling his employer to terminate without notice his office or employment or where the Option Holder gives notice to terminate;

 

11.4.

the date on which it is provided that the Option shall lapse under Rules 8.1 to 8.2, 9.1 to 9.5 and 10.2;

 

11.5.

the date on which a resolution is passed or an order is made by the court for the compulsory winding-up of the Company;

 

11.6.

the date on which the Option Holder becomes bankrupt or enters into a compromise with his creditors generally;

 

11.7.

the date on which the Option Holder purports to transfer, charge or otherwise alienate the Option.

 

12.

ADJUSTMENT OF OPTIONS ON REORGANISATION

 

12.1.

Power to adjust Options

In the event of a Reorganisation, the number of Plan Shares subject to an Option, the description of the Plan Shares, the Exercise Price, or any one or more of these, may be adjusted in such manner as the Board determines.

 

12.2.

Exercise Price

Subject to Rule 12.3, no adjustment shall be made to the Exercise Price which would result in the Plan Shares subject to an Option being issued directly to the Option Holder at a price per Plan Share lower than the nominal value of a Plan Share and, if an adjustment would so result, the Exercise Price shall be the nominal value of a Plan Share.

 

12.3.

Capitalisation of reserves

Notwithstanding Rule 12.2, an adjustment may be made which would result in the Plan Shares subject to an Option being issued at a price per Plan Share lower than the nominal value of a Plan Share if and to the extent that the Board is authorised to capitalise from the Company’s reserves a sum equal to the amount by which the aggregate nominal value of the Plan Shares subject to the Options which are adjusted exceeds the aggregate adjusted Exercise Price under such Options. If such an adjustment is made, on the subsequent exercise of the Option, the Board shall capitalise such sum and apply the sum in paying up such excess.

 

12.4.

HM Revenue & Customs approval

An adjustment shall not have effect until the adjustment has been approved by HM Revenue & Customs.

 

15


12.5.

Notification of Option Holders

The Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Option Holder of any adjustment made under this Rule 12 and explain how this affects his position under the Plan. The Board may call in for endorsement or cancellation and re-issue any Option Certificate in order to take account of such adjustment.

 

13.

ACCOUNTING FOR PAYE AND NATIONAL INSURANCE CONTRIBUTIONS

 

13.1.

Deductions

Where, directly or indirectly in relation to the exercise of an Option granted under the Plan, the Company or any Group Member (as the case may be) is liable, or is in accordance with current practice believed by the Board to be likely to become liable, to account to any revenue or other authority for any sum in respect of any tax or social security liability of the Option Holder, the Option may not be exercised unless the Option Holder has beforehand paid to the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be) an amount sufficient to discharge the liability. Alternatively, the Option Holder may, by agreement with the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be), enter into some other arrangement to ensure that such amount is available to them or it (whether by authorising the sale of some or all of the Plan Shares subject to his Option and the payment to the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be) of the requisite amount out of the proceeds of sale or otherwise). Where this is the case the Option shall not be treated as exercised until the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be) determine that such arrangements are satisfactory to it.

 

13.2.

Transfer of Employer’s NIC

The Board may, at its discretion, impose requirements for the payment by the Option Holder of all or any part of the Employer’s NIC which may arise as a result of the exercise of his Option. Such requirements shall be specified on the Grant Date and shall be a condition of exercise of the Option, provided that the Board (acting fairly and reasonably) may waive these requirements. They may include in particular, but not by way of limitation, a determination that the Option may not be exercised unless the Option Holder has beforehand paid to the Company (or the Group Member which employs the Option Holder, if different) an amount sufficient to discharge all or any part of the Employer’s NIC. Alternatively, the Option Holder may, by agreement with the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be), enter into some other arrangement to ensure that such amount is available to them or it (whether by authorising the sale of some or all of the Plan Shares subject to his Option and the payment to the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be) of the requisite amount out of the proceeds of sale or otherwise). Where this is the case the Option shall not be treated as exercised until the Company or the Group Member (as the case may be) determine that such arrangements are satisfactory to it.

 

13.3.

Execution of Option Certificate by Option Holder

The Board may require an Option Holder to execute a copy of the Option Certificate or some other document in order to bind himself contractually to any such arrangement as is referred to in Rules 13.1 to 13.2 and return the executed document to the Board by a specified date being no more than 30 days after the Grant Date. Failure to return the executed document by the specified date shall cause the Award to lapse.

 

16


14.

ISSUE AND AVAILABILITY OF PLAN SHARES

 

14.1.

Rights attaching to Plan Shares

All Plan Shares issued in respect of exercise of an Option shall, as to voting, dividend, transfer and other rights, including those arising on a liquidation of the Company, rank equally in all respects and as one class with the Plan Shares in issue at the date of such issue save as regards any rights attaching to such Plan Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of such issue.

 

15.

RELATIONSHIP OF PLAN TO CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT

 

15.1.

Contractual Provisions

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan:

 

15.1.1.

the Plan shall not form part of any contract of employment between any Group Member and an Eligible Employee;

 

15.1.2.

unless expressly so provided in his contract of employment, an Eligible Employee has no right to be granted an Option;

 

15.1.3.

the benefit to an Eligible Employee of participation in the Plan (including, in particular but not by way of limitation, any Options held by him) shall not form any part of his remuneration or count as his remuneration for any purpose and, for the purposes of his contract of employment, shall not be pensionable; and

 

15.1.4.

if an Eligible Employee ceases to be in Relevant Employment, he shall not be entitled to compensation for the loss of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan (including, in particular but not by way of limitation, any Options held by him which lapse by reason of his ceasing to be in Relevant Employment) whether by way of damages for unfair dismissal, wrongful dismissal, breach of contract or otherwise.

15.2. Deemed Agreement

By accepting the grant of an Option, an Option Holder is deemed to have agreed to the provisions of this Rule 15.

 

16.

ADMINISTRATION OF PLAN

 

16.1.

Responsibility for administration

The Company, and the Board where appropriate, shall be responsible for, and shall have the conduct of, the administration of the Plan. The Board may from time to time make, amend or rescind regulations for the administration of the Plan provided that such regulations shall be consistent with the Rules and not cause any of the provisions of Schedule 4 which are relevant to the Plan to cease to be satisfied.

 

16.2.

Board’s decision final and binding

The decision of the Board shall be final and binding in all matters relating to the administration of the Plan, including but not limited to the resolution of any dispute concerning, or any inconsistency or ambiguity in the Rules or any document used in connection with the Plan.

 

17


16.3.

Discretionary nature of grant of Options

All Options under the Plan are granted entirely at the discretion of the Board.

 

16.4.

Provision of information

An Option Holder shall provide to the Company as soon as reasonably practicable such information as the Company reasonably requests for the purpose of complying with its obligations under paragraph 33 of Schedule 4.

 

16.5.

Cost of Plan

The cost of introducing and administering the Plan shall be met by the Company. The Company shall be entitled, if it wishes, to charge an appropriate part of such cost to a Subsidiary. The Company shall also be entitled, if it wishes, to charge to a Subsidiary the opportunity cost of issuing Plan Shares to an Option Holder employed by the Subsidiary in relation to his exercise of an Option.

 

17.

AMENDMENT OF PLAN

 

17.1.

Power to amend Plan prior to HM Revenue & Customs approval

Prior to HM Revenue & Customs approval of the Plan under Schedule 4, the Board may make such amendments to the Rules as may be necessary or desirable in order to obtain such approval.

 

17.2.

Power to amend Plan

Subject to Rules 17.3 to 17.4, the Board may from time to time amend the rules of the Plan.

 

17.3.

HM Revenue & Customs approval of amendments

Save for an amendment pursuant to Rule 9.6 an amendment to a Key Feature of the Plan shall not have effect at a time when the Plan is approved by HM Revenue & Customs, until the amendment has been approved by HM Revenue & Customs under Schedule 4.

 

17.4.

Rights of existing Option Holders

An amendment may not adversely affect the rights of an existing Option Holder except where the amendment has been approved by those existing Option Holders who would be adversely affected by the amendment in such manner as would be required by the Company’s articles of association (with appropriate changes) if the Plan Shares subject to those Options which would be so adversely affected had been issued or transferred to them (so that they had become shareholders in the Company) and constituted a separate class of shares.

 

17.5.

Notification of Option Holders

The Board shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, notify each Option Holder of any amendment to the Rules under this Rule 17 and explain how it affects his position under the Plan.

 

18


18.

NOTICES

 

18.1.

Notice by Board

Save as provided for by law and subject to Rule 18.4, any notice, document or other communication given by, or on behalf of, the Board or to any person in connection with the Plan shall be deemed to have been duly given if delivered to him at his place of work, if he is in Relevant Employment if sent by e-mail to such e-mail address as may be specified by him from time to time, or sent through the post in a pre-paid envelope to the postal address last known to the Company to be his address and, if so sent, shall be deemed to have been duly given on the date of posting.

 

18.2.

Deceased Option Holders

Save as provided for by law and subject to Rule 18.4, any notice, document or other communication so sent to an Option Holder shall be deemed to have been duly given notwithstanding that such Option Holder is then deceased (and whether or not the Board has notice of his death) except where his personal representatives have established their title to the satisfaction of the Board and supplied to the Board an e-mail or postal address to which notices, documents and other communications are to be sent.

 

18.3.

Notice to Board

Save as provided for by law and subject to Rule 18.4, any notice, document or other communication given to the Board in connection with the Plan shall be delivered or sent by post to the Company Secretary at the Company’s registered office or such other e-mail or postal address as may from time to time be notified to Option Holders but shall not in any event be duly given unless and until it is actually received at the registered office or such e-mail or postal address and shall be deemed to have been duly given on the date of such receipt.

 

18.4.

Option Certificate

For the avoidance of doubt, the Option Certificate may not be executed or delivered by e-mail or other such similar electronic communication.

 

19.

GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

19.1.

Plan governed by English law

The formation, existence, construction, performance, validity and all aspects whatsoever of the Plan, any term of the Plan and any Option granted under it shall be governed by English law.

 

19.2.

English courts to have jurisdiction

The English courts shall have jurisdiction to settle any dispute which may arise out of, or in connection with, the Plan.

 

19.3.

Jurisdiction agreement for benefit of Company

The jurisdiction agreement contained in this Rule 19 is made for the benefit of the Company only, which accordingly retains the right to bring proceedings in any other court of competent jurisdiction.

 

19


19.4.

Option Holder deemed to submit to such jurisdiction

By accepting the Option, an Option Holder is deemed to have agreed to submit to such jurisdiction.

 

20

Exhibit 10.6

Abcam PLC

 

 

R U L E S

 

 

of the

Abcam 2005 Share Option Scheme

(Adopted by the Board on 31st October 2005 amended at

the AGM November 2008 and at the AGM November 2012)

Eversheds LLP

One Wood Street

London

EC2V 7WS

Tel + 44 (0) 20 7919 4500

Fax + 44 (0) 20 7919 4919


CONTENTS

 

1

 

INTERPRETATION

     1  

2

 

COMMITTEE MAY GRANT OPTIONS

     7  

3

 

RESTRICTIONS ON THE GRANTING OF OPTIONS

     7  

4

 

GRANT OF OPTIONS

     8  

5

 

ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT INCENTIVES

     10  

6

 

PERFORMANCE CONDITION

     10  

7

 

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

     11  

8

 

RESTRICTIONS UPON THE EXERCISE OF OPTIONS AND LAPSE OF OPTIONS

     15  

9

 

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     16  

10

 

CHANGE IN CONTROL, LIQUIDATION AND DEMERGER

     17  

11

 

EXCHANGE OF OPTIONS

     20  

12

 

ADJUSTMENT OF OPTIONS

     22  

13

 

COSTS

     22  

14

 

ADMINISTRATION

     22  

15

 

GENERAL

     23  

16

 

AMENDMENTS TO THESE RULES

     24  

17

 

OVERSEAS EMPLOYEES

     25  

 


Rules

of the

Abcam 2005 Share Option Scheme

(Adopted on October 2005)

 

1.

INTERPRETATION

In these Rules:

 

1.1

the following expressions have the following meanings unless inconsistent with the context:

 

           “Acquiring Company”    a company which obtains Control of the Company in the circumstances referred to in Rule 11.1
  “Acquisition Price”    in respect of any Option the Option Price multiplied by the number of Shares over which such Option is exercised
  “Admission”    admission of the Shares of the Company to trading on AIM
  “AIM”    the Alternative Investment Market regulated by the London Stock Exchange
  “the AIM Rules”    the AIM Rules for Companies as published by the London Stock Exchange
  “the Board”    the board of directors for the time being of the Company or the directors present at a duly convened meeting of the directors or a duly appointed committee of the board of directors at which a quorum is present
  “the Committee”    the remuneration committee of the Board comprised of non-executive directors of the Company
  “the Company”    Abcam PLC (registered number 03509322)

 

1


           “Control”    the meaning given to that expression by section 840 of the Taxes Act and “Controlled” shall be construed accordingly
  “Date of Grant”    in respect of any Option the date upon which that Option is granted by the Company, being the date upon which the Option Certificate in respect of that Option is delivered by the Company as a deed as provided in Rule 4.4
  “Dealing Day”    a day on which The London Stock Exchange is open for transaction of business
  “Excluded Change of Control”    A transaction where Control of the Company is acquired by a company which is Controlled by persons who, taken together, Controlled the Company immediately before such change of Control
  “Eligible Employee”    any person who devotes substantially the whole of his working hours to the business of the Group and is either an executive director (who is employed under a contract of employment) or an employee of any company which is at the relevant date a member of the Group
  “General Offer”    a general offer to acquire the whole or part of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company (or such part of such capital as is not then owned by the offeror or any company Controlled by the offeror and/or any persons acting In Concert with the offeror), but not, for the avoidance of doubt, an Excluded Change of Control
  “the Group”    the Company and all of the Subsidiaries for the time being or where the context so requires any one or more of them
  “HMRC”    HM Revenue & Customs

 

2


           “In Concert”    the meaning given to that term in The City Code on Takeovers and Mergers as amended from time to time
  “Issue or Reorganisation”    any capitalisation issue or rights issue (other than an issue of shares pursuant to the exercise of an option given to the shareholders of the Company to receive shares in lieu of dividend) or rights offer or any other variation in the share capital of the Company including (without limitation) any consolidation, sub-division or reduction of capital of the Company
  “Market Value”    in respect of an Option:
    

(a)   if the Shares are for the time being admitted for trading on AIM the closing price of the Shares on the Dealing Day preceding the Date of Grant in respect of an Option; or

    

(b)   if the condition referred to in (a) above is not satisfied the value of a Share over which such Option is granted as determined in accordance with Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992 as at the Date of Grant

  “Option”    a right to acquire Shares granted to an Eligible Employee in pursuance of the Scheme and for the time being subsisting or, where the context so requires, a right to acquire Shares so to be granted, and “Options” shall be construed accordingly
  “Option Certificate”    a certificate issued pursuant to Rule 4.4 or an agreement between the Company and the Option Holder pursuant to Rule 5
  “Option Holder”    a person holding an Option and where the context so requires the legal personal representatives of such person and “Option Holders” shall be construed accordingly

 

3


           “Option Period”    in respect of an Option, a period commencing on the day immediately after the Vesting Date in respect of such Option and ending on the day immediately before the tenth such anniversary
  “Option Price”    in respect of an Option the price payable by the Option Holder for each Share over which such Option is granted as determined in accordance with Rule 4 (subject to adjustment pursuant to Rule 12) which shall not be less than the Market Value of each such Share on the Date of Grant provided that where an Option is to subscribe for Shares the price shall not be less than the greater of the nominal value of a Share at any time (subject as provided in Rule 12.2) and the Market Value of each such Share on the Date of Grant
  “Other Relevant Scheme”    any employees’ share scheme (within the meaning of section 743 of the Companies Act 1985) enabling directors or employees of any company in the Group or trustees on their behalf to acquire Shares other than SAYE option schemes approved by HMRC pursuant to schedule 3 to the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 or any other share option schemes of the Company which are linked to contractual savings schemes or employee share incentive plans approved by the HMRC under Schedule 2 to the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003
  “Permitted Grant Period”   

the period of 38 days commencing on any of the following:

 

(c)   the fourth Dealing Day immediately following the date of the preliminary announcement of the annual results of the Company in any year or the date of the announcement of the half-year results of the Company in any year;

 

4


             

(d)   the Dealing Day immediately following the date on which the AIM Rules or any statute or any regulation or order made thereunder or any governmental directive effective for the time being to prevent the grant of Options shall cease to have effect; or

    

(e)   any other time fixed by the Committee where in the absolute discretion of the Committee circumstances are considered to be exceptional so as to justify the grant of an Option

  “Retirement”    retirement means cessation of employment in circumstances determined by the Committee (in its reasonable discretion provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, the Committee shall not be obliged to exercise its discretion in favour of the Eligible Employee) to be retirement
  “Rules”    the rules of the Scheme as amended from time to time and Rule shall be construed accordingly
  “the Scheme”    the Abcam 2005 Share Option Scheme established by the adoption of these Rules and as from time to time amended in accordance with the provisions of these Rules
  “Securities Act”    the US Securities Act of 1933 (as amended) and the Rules and regulations promulgated thereunder
  “Shares”    fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company or, as the context may require, shares for the time being representing the same in consequence of any Issue or Reorganisation and “Share” shall be construed accordingly

 

5


           “Share Sale”    the making of one or more agreements (whether conditional or not) for the acquisition by one or more purchasers of the whole or part of the issued share capital of the Company (excluding any ordinary share capital held at the date of such agreement by the purchaser or any of the purchasers) but not for the avoidance of doubt an Excluded Change of Control
  “Subsidiary”    any subsidiary of the Company in the United Kingdom within the meaning of section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 over which the Company has Control and any subsidiary of the Company in the US
  “Taxes Act”    the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988
  “The London Stock Exchange”    the London Stock Exchange plc
  “Treasury Shares”    qualifying shares to which sections 162A to 162G of the Companies Act 1985 apply
  “US”    the United States of America
  “US Person”    the meaning given by Rule 902(k) promulgated under the Securities Act and to include any US taxpayer, regardless of whether he or she is a natural person resident in the US
  “Vesting Date”    the date or dates determined by the Committee in accordance with Rule 4.2Error! Reference source not found., when part or all of an Option shall Vest providing any additional conditions pursuant to Rule 6 are satisfied
  “Vest”    means an Option Holder becoming entitled to exercise an Option

 

1.2

references to any statutory provisions will be construed as including references to any earlier or subsequent statutory provisions in force at any time prior to the relevant date which they have, or by which they have been, directly or indirectly amended or replaced;

 

6


1.3

any reference to a Rule is a reference to one of these Rules; and

 

1.4

any reference to the masculine shall include the feminine as the context shall admit or require.

 

2.

COMMITTEE MAY GRANT OPTIONS

The Committee is empowered with effect from the date of adoption of the Scheme by the Company to authorise the grant of Options by the Company to Eligible Employees in accordance with these Rules.

 

3.

RESTRICTIONS ON THE GRANTING OF OPTIONS

 

3.1

No Option shall be granted to an Eligible Employee except during a Permitted Grant Period.

 

3.2

No Option shall in any circumstances be granted more than ten years after the date of adoption of the Scheme.

 

3.3

Subject to Rule 3.5, no Option shall be granted if immediately following the grant of such Option the aggregate nominal value of ordinary shares in the Company:

 

  3.3.1

issued or then capable of being issued pursuant to Options granted under the Scheme within the immediately preceding period of ten years; and

 

  3.3.2

issued or then capable of being issued pursuant to options granted or rights obtained in such ten year period under any other share option or profit sharing scheme or employee share ownership plan approved by the Company in general meeting,

would exceed 15% of the nominal value of the ordinary share capital of the Company at that time in issue.

 

3.4

Subject to Rule 3.5, no Option shall be granted if immediately following the grant of such Option the aggregate nominal value of ordinary shares in the Company:

 

  3.4.1

issued or then capable of being issued pursuant to Options granted under the Scheme within the immediately preceding period of ten years; and

 

  3.4.2

issued or then capable of being issued pursuant to options granted or rights obtained in such ten year period under any Other Relevant Scheme, would exceed 10% of the nominal value of the ordinary share capital of the Company at that time in issue.

 

7


3.5

For the purposes of Rules 3.3 and 3.4:

 

  3.5.1

Shares issued or then capable of issue pursuant to options granted prior to the date of Admission shall not count towards the limits set out in Rules 3.3 and 3.4; and

 

  3.5.2

Shares which were the subject of an Option which has lapsed in the accordance with these Rules shall not count towards the limits set out in Rules 3.3 and 3.4.

 

3.6

No Option shall be granted to an Eligible Employee at a time when such grant would be in breach of the AIM Rules.

 

4.

GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

4.1

Subject to Rule 3 the Committee may if in its absolute discretion it so decides authorise the Company to grant an Option during a Permitted Grant Period to an Eligible Employee.

 

4.2

Subject as otherwise provided in these Rules the Committee shall have an absolute discretion in determining (inter alia):

 

  4.2.1

when to grant Options;

 

  4.2.2

to whom to grant Options;

 

  4.2.3

the number of Shares over which the Option is to subsist;

 

  4.2.4

the Option Price in relation to each Option; and

 

  4.2.5

the Vesting Date or Dates for part or all of the Option.

 

4.3

No person shall be entitled as of right to be granted any Option.

 

4.4

Subject to Rule 5, each Option shall be granted by the execution and delivery by the Company as a deed of an Option Certificate in respect of that Option. No consideration shall be payable by any Eligible Employee in respect of the grant of an Option to him. Each Option Certificate shall as soon as reasonably practicable after execution and delivery by the Company (and in any event within fourteen days thereafter) be issued to the relevant Option Holder and shall be in such form as the Committee may from time to time determine, specifying (inter alia) the following:

 

8


  4.4.1

the Date of Grant of the Option;

 

  4.4.2

the number of Shares over which the Option subsists;

 

  4.4.3

the Option Price in relation to the Option;

 

  4.4.4

the Vesting Date(s) on which part or all of each Option shall Vest;

 

  4.4.5

the number of Shares subject to the Option that will Vest on each Vesting Date;

 

  4.4.6

that the exercise of the Option is subject to additional conditions pursuant to Rule 6 (and a copy of the performance conditions must accompany the Option Certificate); and

 

  4.4.7

the fact that the Option may be renounced as provided in Rule 4.5.

 

4.5

Any Eligible Employee to whom an Option is granted may, by notice in writing to the Company given within 30 days after the Date of Grant, renounce in whole or in part his rights under the Option. In such a case, the Option shall to the extent renounced be treated, for all purposes of the Scheme as never having been granted and (if already issued) an Option Certificate shall be returned to the Company for cancellation or (in the case of renunciation in part) for amendment. No consideration shall be payable by the Company for any such renunciation.

 

4.6

An Option shall be personal to the Eligible Employee to whom it is granted and shall not be transferable or assignable. An Option shall not be charged, pledged or otherwise encumbered and any purported assignment, charge, disposal or dealing with the rights and interest of the Option Holder under the Scheme shall render the Option void.

 

4.7

In the event of any Option Holder losing his Option Certificate the Committee shall as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt of notice of such loss together, if it so requires, with an indemnity from the Option Holder in respect of any liability of the Company arising as a consequence of such loss (in such form as the Committee may request) issue to the Option Holder a duplicate of such Option Certificate and any reference in these Rules to an Option Certificate shall include a reference to such a duplicate. Where an Option is exercised in part the Committee shall, at its discretion, endorse the Option Certificate as to such partial exercise or issue a new Option Certificate in respect of the balance of the Option.

 

9


5.

ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT INCENTIVES

The Committee may require the grant of an Option to be in the form of an agreement between the Company and the Option Holder provided that such agreement shall contain all the information that would have been contained in an Option Certificate. Such agreement shall state that the Option is granted under the provisions of Schedule 5 (Enterprise Management Incentives) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 and set out the Rules of the Scheme, any conditions (such as the performance condition imposed pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 6) affecting the terms or extent of the Option Holder’s entitlement and details of any restrictions attaching to the Shares the subject of the Option. Such an agreement shall for the purposes of the Scheme be taken to be an Option Certificate. The date of the agreement shall for the purposes of the Scheme be taken as being the Date of Grant of the Option.

 

6.

PERFORMANCE CONDITION

 

6.1

Options shall be granted subject to such other objective conditions (which are additional to any conditions in any of these Rules) as the Committee may determine. Such other objective conditions may relate to the achievement of a target by the Company or by any other member of the Group and/or may relate to the performance of a personal task by the relevant Eligible Employee or the achievement of a personal target by the relevant Eligible Employee provided that:

 

  6.1.1

the determination of whether or not any target has been achieved or any task performed (as the case may be) must be on an objective basis; and

 

  6.1.2

where such objective conditions relate to the performance of a personal task by the relevant Eligible Employee or the achievement of a personal target by the relevant Eligible Employee (as the case may be) such conditions may only be imposed if the Committee reasonably considers the performance of the personal task or the achievement of the personal target (as the case may be) to be a fair measure of the performance of the relevant Eligible Employee.

 

6.2

Any condition imposed pursuant to Rule 6.1 on the grant of an Option may unless otherwise provided for in these Rules only be waived or amended by the Committee:

 

10


  6.2.1

on the occurrence of a specific event or events which are fixed by the Committee on the grant of such Option and which were set out in the copy of the performance conditions that accompanied the relevant Option Certificate issued pursuant to Rule 4.4; or

 

  6.2.2

on the occurrence of any other event or events which causes the Committee to reasonably consider that a different or amended condition would be a fairer measure of the performance of the Company or any other member of the Group or the relevant Option Holder (as the case may be),

provided that any conditions amended pursuant to this Rule 6.2 may not cause the performance of a task or the achievement of a target to be more difficult to perform or harder to achieve than the original task or target prior to such amendment.

 

7.

EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

7.1

Subject to the satisfaction of any conditions imposed pursuant to Rule 6, an Option may be exercised in whole or in part at any time during the relevant Option Period provided that where the Option Holder wishes to exercise an Option in part, such exercise must be in respect of a minimum of 100 Shares unless the Option subsists over less than 100 Shares in which case it shall be for not less than the remaining number of Shares which are subject to that Option. This Rule 7.1 is subject to the provisions of Rules 7.16, 8, 9 and 10.

 

7.2

In order to exercise an Option in whole or in part the Option Holder shall deliver to the Secretary of the Company a notice in writing in a form approved by the Board specifying the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is being exercised and accompanied by payment in full (by cash or cheque made payable to the Company) of the Acquisition Price for those shares. Such notice shall take effect on the day it is actually delivered and such day shall constitute for all purposes, except solely for the purposes of Rule 10.5 below, the date of exercise of such Option. The relevant Option Certificate shall also be lodged with the Company, but failure so to do shall not invalidate the exercise of the Option provided it is delivered within a reasonable time thereafter. The Company shall keep and make available to Option Holders upon request copies of a form of notice that is suitable for the purpose of exercising an Option.

 

7.3

An Option may be exercised in whole or in part and if exercised in part shall continue to subsist to the extent that it has not been exercised and may be further exercised in whole or in part in accordance with these Rules. The Company shall, following exercise of an Option in part, deliver to the Option Holder the endorsed Option Certificate, or a new Option Certificate, in accordance with Rule 4.4.

 

11


7.4

Subject to Rule 7.16, all allotments, issues and transfers of Shares (and the issue of a definitive share certificate) shall be made within 30 days of the date of exercise of the relevant Option and will be subject (if applicable) to such Shares being admitted to trading on AIM and to all (if any) necessary consents of HM Treasury or other authorities under enactments or regulations for the time being in force and it shall be the responsibility of the Option Holder to comply with any requirements to be fulfilled in order to obtain or obviate the necessity for any such consent. At the request of an Option Holder the Board may in its absolute discretion resolve to allot and issue or transfer (as the case may be) some or all of the Shares to be acquired on the exercise of an Option to such other person or persons as may be nominated by the Option Holder.

 

7.5

Shares issued on the exercise of an Option shall be issued subject to the Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company as from time to time amended and shall rank in full for all dividends or other distributions payable to holders of Shares by reference to a record date occurring on or after the date of allotment and for any rights to be granted to such holders by reference to such a record date. In all other respects the Shares so to be issued shall be identical and rank pari passu with the fully paid registered Shares in issue on the date of such exercise. Shares transferred on the exercise of an Option shall be transferred without the benefit of any rights attaching to the Shares by reference to a record date preceding the date of such exercise.

 

7.6

The Company will (if applicable) make application to the London Stock Exchange so that upon the issue of Shares upon the exercise of an Option (or as soon thereafter as reasonably practicable) such Shares shall be admitted to trading on AIM.

 

7.7

While any Option remains unexercised in whole or in part and has not lapsed the Company shall keep available sufficient unissued Shares and/or ensure that it has made arrangements to procure the transfer of sufficient issued Shares and/or ensure that it holds sufficient Treasury Shares (as the case may be) to satisfy in full all such Options to the extent they have not been exercised.

 

12


7.8

An Option shall be treated as being an Option to subscribe for the relevant number of Shares over which the Option subsists unless and until the Committee determines in its absolute discretion at any time before resolving to allot Shares upon the exercise of such Option that in substitution for the allotment and issue of Shares either that it shall procure the transfer of some or all of the Shares over which such Option subsists, or that it shall transfer Treasury Shares, to the relevant Option Holder (or to a person nominated by the relevant Option Holder in accordance with Rule 7.4). Upon the Committee making such a determination the Option (either in whole or in part as the case may be) shall be treated as having been at all times an Option to purchase (and not subscribe for) the relevant number of Shares as so determined by the Committee or to receive Treasury Shares as so determined by the Committee (as the case may be). If the Committee determines to procure the transfer of the relevant number of Shares or to transfer Treasury Shares to an Option Holder upon exercise of an Option the obligation to pay stamp duty (if any) on the transfer shall be a liability of the Company.

 

7.9

In the event of a determination pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 7.8, the Shares comprised in the relevant Option shall not be taken into account for the purposes of the limits contained in Rules 3.3 and 3.4 unless such Shares are Treasury Shares. Treasury Shares that are transferred or to be transferred to satisfy the exercise of Options are to be regarded as issued or capable of being issued for the purposes of the limits contained in Rules 3.3 and 3.4. The Committee may only reverse such a determination to procure the transfer of shares other than Treasury Shares in the event that the grant of the relevant Option at that time on the basis that the exercise of the Option would be satisfied by the issue of new Shares or the transfer of Treasury Shares would not have caused a breach of any of the limits contained in Rules 3.3 and 3.4.

 

7.10

Prior to a determination or proposed determination pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 7.8, the Committee may establish a trust for the benefit of some or all of the persons referred to in section 743 of the Companies Act 1985 on such terms as it shall approve, provided that the deed which establishes such trust shall not permit the trustee(s) of the trust (“the Trustee”) to hold an aggregate nominal value of ordinary shares in the Company which exceeds 5% of the nominal value of the ordinary share capital of the Company in issue at any time.

 

7.11

Prior to a determination or proposed determination pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 7.8, the Committee shall from time to time consider whether it should make arrangements with the Trustee for the Trustee to acquire Shares for the purpose of satisfying the exercise of the relevant Option or if the Company should make a purchase of shares to be held as Treasury Shares. In the event that any Option in respect of which such a determination has been made becomes exerciseable, the Company shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, make arrangements with the Trustee or purchase shares as Treasury Shares to ensure that sufficient Shares are available for transfer to the relevant Option Holder upon exercise of that Option.

 

13


7.12

In the event that the Committee wishes to make a transfer of Shares pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 7.8 in respect of an Option which is exerciseable, the Committee must ensure prior to such determination that either (in a case where the Company is to procure the transfer of Shares) the Trustee holds sufficient Shares to satisfy the exercise of such Option and that arrangements are in place under which the Trustee agrees to transfer such Shares to the Option Holder in the event that the Option is exercised or (in the case where Treasury Shares are to be used to satisfy the exercise of an Option) that the Company holds sufficient Treasury Shares for that purpose.

 

7.13

The Option Holder will indemnify the Company, his employer and any other person in respect of any amounts for which the Company, his employer or any other person is obliged to account or withhold in respect of income tax, social security taxes, or other applicable taxes (including, for US Persons, the Option Holder’s FICA obligation), whether in the UK or elsewhere (howsoever such liability to income tax or social security is imposed, whether under the Pay-As-You-Earn system or otherwise) and in respect of employee’s National Insurance contributions arising from the exercise of his Option in such form as the Company may reasonably require. The Committee may determine that it is a condition of the exercise of an Option that the Option Holder is responsible for paying any secondary Class 1 National Insurance contributions (otherwise known as employer’s National Insurance contributions) arising from the exercise of the Option. The Board, as appropriate, may make such regulations as they consider desirable to ensure the receipt of such amounts including, but not limited to, in appropriate circumstances retaining the power to sell sufficient of the relevant Shares which would otherwise have been received by the Option Holder in order to discharge the relevant liability (after deduction of reasonable expenses).

 

7.14

The Option Holder will indemnify the Company, his employer and any other person in respect of any amounts for which the Company, his employer or any other person is obliged to account under the Pay-As-You-Earn system or in respect of employee’s National Insurance contributions, and where the Committee has determined in accordance with Rule 7.13 to be responsible for paying any secondary Class 1 National Insurance contributions (otherwise known as employer’s National Insurance contributions), arising from the exercise of his Option in such form as the Company may reasonably require arising pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2 or Chapter 3 of Part VII of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 from or in connection with:

 

14


  7.14.1

the holding or disposal of the Shares acquired pursuant to the exercise of the Option by the Option Holder or by another person associated with the Option Holder (within the meaning of section 421C Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003); or

 

  7.14.2

the conversion of the Shares acquired pursuant to the Option into securities of another description at a time when such Shares are held by the Option Holder or by another person associated with the Option Holder (within the meaning of section 421C Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003);

and the Board may make such regulations as they consider desirable to ensure the receipt of such amounts including, but not limited to, in appropriate circumstances retaining the power to sell sufficient of the relevant Shares which would otherwise have been received by the Option Holder in order to discharge the relevant liability (after deduction of reasonable expenses).

 

7.15

It is a condition of the exercise of an Option that, if so requested by the Company at the time of exercise, an Option Holder will enter into an election in a form approved by the Company under section 431 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (relating to the acquisition of “restricted shares”) in respect of all the Shares that result or shall result from the exercise of an Option.

 

7.16

As a condition to the exercise of an Option by a US Person, the Company may require the person exercising such Option to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise that the shares are being acquired only for investment and without any present intention to sell or distribute such shares.

 

8.

RESTRICTIONS UPON THE EXERCISE OF OPTIONS AND LAPSE OF OPTIONS

 

8.1

No Option Holder shall in any circumstances be entitled to exercise an Option either in whole or in part at any time when such exercise would be in breach of the AIM Rules or would violate applicable laws or regulations.

 

8.2

An Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable upon the earliest of:

 

  8.2.1

notwithstanding any other Rule the expiry of the Option Period relating to that Option;

 

15


  8.2.2

the end of any of the periods specified in Rule 9;

 

  8.2.3

the end of any of the periods specified in Rule 10;

 

  8.2.4

subject as provided in Rules 10.3 and 10.4, on the commencement of the winding-up of the Company; and

 

  8.2.5

upon a bankruptcy order being made in respect of the Option Holder.

 

9.

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

9.1

Any condition imposed pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 6 on the grant of an Option shall apply to the exercise of an Option in accordance with the provisions of this Rule 9 with the proviso that the extent to which any such condition has been satisfied at the date of a cessation of employment in any of the circumstance described in this Rule 9 will determine the number of Shares in respect of which an Option may be exercised as further set out in the relevant condition.

 

9.2

If an Option Holder ceases to be an Eligible Employee by reason of his death his legal personal representatives may, subject as provided in Rule 8, exercise any Options held by him on the date of his death during the period commencing on the date of his death and expiring one year from the day before the date of his death. If not so exercised, any such Options shall lapse immediately.

 

9.3

If an Option Holder ceases to be an Eligible Employee by reason of pregnancy, ill-health, injury or disability such that the individual is permanently incapacitated from working (all evidenced to the satisfaction of the Committee) he may, subject as provided in Rule 8, exercise any Options then held by him during the period commencing on the date of such cessation and expiring 40 days from the date of such cessation. Subject to Rule 9.7, if not so exercised, any such Options shall lapse immediately.

 

9.4

If an Option Holder ceases to be an Eligible Employee by reason of Retirement he may, subject as provided in Rule 8 exercise any Options then held by him during the period commencing on the date of such cessation and expiring 40 days from the date of such cessation. Subject to Rule 9.7, if not so exercised, any such Options shall lapse immediately.

 

16


9.5

If an Option Holder ceases to be an Eligible Employee for the sole reason that the company by which he is for the time being employed ceases to be Controlled by the Company or by reason of a sale by such company of its assets and undertaking in circumstances to which the Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 1981 apply to transfer his employment to a purchaser from such company, he may, subject as provided in Rule 8, exercise any Options then held by him during the period commencing on the date on which such company ceases to be so Controlled or the date of transfer (as the case may be) and expiring 40 days from the date on which such company ceases to be so Controlled or the date of transfer (as the case may be). Subject to Rule 9.7, if not so exercised, any such Options shall lapse immediately.

 

9.6

If an Option Holder ceases to be an Eligible Employee in any circumstance not mentioned in Rules 9.2, 9.3, 9.4 and 9.5 all the Options then held by him shall lapse on the date of such cessation except that, subject as provided in Rule 8, the Committee may in its absolute discretion (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, the Committee shall not be obliged to exercise such discretion in favour of the Option Holder) and subject to such conditions as it may determine, allow the Option Holder to exercise his Options within a period to be determined by the Committee.

Any Option not so exercised during such period shall lapse immediately.

 

9.7

If an Option Holder ceases to be an Eligible Employee in any of the circumstances mentioned in Rules 9.3, 9.4 and 9.5 then, subject as provided in Rule 8, within a period of 30 days from the date of such cessation the Committee may in its absolute discretion (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, the Committee shall not be obliged to exercise such discretion in favour of the Option Holder) extend the period during which such Option Holder may exercise his Options. Any Option not so exercised during such extended period shall lapse immediately.

 

9.8

For the purposes of this Rule 9, an Option Holder shall not be treated as ceasing to be employed by the Company or any Subsidiary until he ceases to hold employment in the Company or any Subsidiary or by a female employee who is absent from work wholly because of pregnancy or confinement, she ceases to be entitled to exercise her right to return to work.

 

10.

CHANGE IN CONTROL, LIQUIDATION AND DEMERGER

 

10.1

 

  10.1.1

Any condition imposed pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 6 on the grant of an Option shall apply to the exercise of an Option in accordance with the provisions of this Rule 10 with the proviso that the extent to which any such condition has been satisfied at the date of any of the circumstances described in this Rule 10 will determine the number of Shares in respect of which an Option may be exercised as further set out in the relevant condition.

 

17


  10.1.2

Subject to Rule 10.1.1, in relation to any Option which is to be exercised in accordance with the provisions of this Rule 10 prior to the Vesting Date relating to that Option, the number of Shares in respect of which such Option could otherwise have been exercised shall be reduced to the number of Shares (rounded down to the nearest whole number of Shares) given by the formula:

 

        

 

x  *  y

  
 

z

  

where:

x” is the number of Shares in respect of which such Option could otherwise have been exercised (after taking into account any condition imposed pursuant to Rule 6, as such condition is applied pursuant to Rule 10.1.1);

y” is the number of days in the period from the Date of Grant until the date of the relevant event as described in this Rule 10 (inclusive); and

z” is the number of days in the period from the Date of Grant until the Vesting Date (inclusive),

provided that the Committee may in its absolute discretion (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, the Committee shall not be obliged in any circumstances to exercise such discretion in favour of the Option Holder) waive the application of this Rule 10.1.2 in such circumstances as the Committee considers appropriate.

 

10.2

If a General Offer is made as a result of which the offeror (or any such companies and/or persons as aforesaid) may gain Control of the Company or the holders of ordinary shares in the capital of the Company enter into negotiations with any persons or persons which will or may give rise to a Share Sale under which the purchaser or purchasers may obtain Control of the Company, the Company shall notify Option Holders of such General Offer or potential Share Sale and:

 

18


  10.2.1

an Option Holder may, subject as provided in Rules 8 and 9, exercise any Options then held by him during the period commencing on the date of receipt of such notification and expiring six calendar months from the date on which Control of the Company passes (“the Takeover Date”) provided that any Option exercised before the Takeover Date shall be conditional upon and shall not take effect until immediately before the Takeover Date and if the Takeover Date does not arise the exercise of Options pursuant to this Rule 10.2.1 shall be null and void and all such Options shall remain in force and may be subsequently exercised in accordance with and subject to these Rules. If not so exercised, any such Options shall lapse immediately; and

 

  10.2.2

the Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to procure that if an Option Holder is allotted Shares, which are not the subject of the said offer or Share Sale, pursuant to an exercise of Options in accordance with Rule 10.2.1 the offeror shall offer to acquire from the Option Holder all such Shares upon the same terms as the terms on which the offeror or purchaser as the case may be acquired Shares the subject of the General Offer or Share Sale.

 

10.3

If a person becomes entitled to acquire Shares under sections 428 to 430F inclusive of the Companies Act 1985 the Committee shall notify each Option Holder of such circumstances as soon as it becomes aware of them and an Option Holder may exercise any Options then held by him at any time up to the seventh day before the last day on which that person remains entitled to serve notice under section 429 of the Companies Act 1985. Any Option not exercised within that period shall lapse immediately.

 

10.4

If the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement under section 425 of the Companies Act 1985 proposed for the purpose of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company an Option Holder may, subject as provided in Rules 8 and 9, exercise any Options then held by him during the period commencing on the date on which the compromise or arrangement is sanctioned by the Court and expiring six calendar months from the date of such sanctioning. Any such Options not exercised at the end of such period will lapse immediately.

 

10.5

In the event of a resolution being passed by the Company for the voluntary winding- up of the Company (except for the purposes of a reconstruction or amalgamation sanctioned by the Court under section 425 of the Companies Act 1985) an Option Holder may, subject as provided in Rules 8 and 9, exercise any Options then held by him during the period of six calendar months commencing on the date of the passing of the resolution for such winding-up and such Options shall be deemed for the purpose of determining the right of such Option Holder to participate in any distribution to shareholders (but for no other purpose whatsoever) to have been exercised immediately before the passing of the said resolution. Any such Options not so exercised at the end of such period will lapse immediately.

 

19


10.6

In the event of a resolution being proposed by the Company for the demerger of the Company by means of an exempt distribution (within the meaning of section 213 of the Taxes Act), the Board acting fairly and reasonably may, subject as provided in Rules 8 and 9, permit any one or more Option Holders to exercise their Options for a limited period prior to the exempt distribution, provided that any exercise of an Option pursuant to this Rule 10.6 shall be conditional upon and shall not take effect until immediately before the exempt distribution is effected and if the exempt distribution is not effected the exercise of an Option pursuant to this Rule 10.6 shall be null and void and such Options shall remain in full force and may be subsequently exercised in accordance with and subject to these Rules. Any Option not so exercised by the end of such period shall lapse immediately.

 

11.

EXCHANGE OF OPTIONS

 

11.1

If a company:

 

  11.1.1

obtains Control of the Company as a result of making a General Offer or following a Share Sale such that the Acquiring Company will have Control of the Company; or

 

  11.1.2

obtains Control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the Court under section 425 of the Companies Act 1985; or

 

  11.1.3

becomes bound or entitled to acquire Shares under sections 428 to 430F inclusive of the Companies Act 1985,

an Option Holder may, subject as provided in Rule 8, at any time during the appropriate period (as defined in Rule 11.2), by agreement with the Acquiring Company, release his rights under the Scheme in consideration of the grant to him of rights (“the new rights”) which are equivalent to the rights released (“the old rights”) but relate to shares (“the new shares”) in the Acquiring Company and any Options not so released at the expiry of the appropriate period shall lapse. Any condition imposed on an Option pursuant to Rule 6 shall cease to apply immediately before the release of the old rights and shall therefore not form part of the new rights.

 

20


11.2

For the purposes of Rule 11.1 “the appropriate period” shall mean:

 

  11.2.1

in the circumstance mentioned in Rule 11.1.1 the period of six calendar months beginning on the later of the date on which Control of the Company passes to the Acquiring Company and the date on which any condition subject to which the offer is made has been satisfied;

 

  11.2.2

in the circumstance mentioned in Rule 11.1.2 the period of six calendar months beginning on the date on which the compromise or arrangement is sanctioned by the Court; and

 

  11.2.3

in the circumstances mentioned in Rule 11.1.3 the period during which the Acquiring Company remains bound or entitled as mentioned in such Rule.

 

11.3

For the purposes of Rule 11.1 the new rights shall not be deemed to be equivalent to the old rights unless:

 

  11.3.1

the new shares satisfy the conditions specified in Part 6 of Schedule 5 Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003;

 

  11.3.2

the new rights will be exercisable in the same manner as the old rights and subject to the provisions of the Scheme as in effect immediately prior to the release of the old rights;

 

  11.3.3

the total market value (as determined in accordance with Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992), immediately before the release, of the Shares which were subject to the relevant Option Holder’s old rights equals the total market value (as so determined), immediately after the grant, of the new shares in respect of which the new rights are granted to that Option Holder; and

 

  11.3.4

the total amount payable by that Option Holder for the acquisition of new shares in pursuance of the new rights equals the total amount that would have been payable for the acquisition of Shares in pursuance of the old rights.

 

11.4

For the purposes of the Scheme, and in respect only of Options the rights comprised in which have been released in accordance with Rule 11.1, following the grant of the new rights the term “Shares” shall have the same meaning as ascribed to the term “the new shares” in this Rule 11 and the term “Company” shall, for the purposes only of the definition of “Issue or Reorganisation” and Rules 7, 10, 11, 12 and 15, mean the Acquiring Company.

 

21


11.5

Upon a transaction in accordance with Rule 11.1 the event by virtue of which such transaction was effective shall, following such transaction, be deemed not to have occurred for the purposes of whichever is relevant of Rules 10.1, 10.2 or 10.3.

 

12.

ADJUSTMENT OF OPTIONS

 

12.1

Upon the occurrence of an Issue or Reorganisation the number and/or nominal value of Shares comprised in each Option and/or the Option Price thereunder may be adjusted in such manner as the Board may deem appropriate. Subject as provided in Rule 12.2 where the Option is to subscribe for Shares the adjusted Option Price for a Share shall never be less than its nominal value.

 

12.2

Where an Option is to subscribe for Shares an adjustment may be made pursuant to Rule 12.1 which would result in the Option Price being less than the nominal value of a Share provided that at the date of such adjustment the Board has authority to capitalise from the reserves of the Company a sum equal to the amount by which the aggregate nominal value of the Shares subject to such Option exceeds the adjusted Acquisition Price. On exercise of such Option the Board shall capitalise such sum and apply it in paying up such amount.

 

12.3

Notice of any adjustments made pursuant to Rule 12.1 shall be given to the Option Holders by the Board, which may call in Option Certificates for endorsement or replacement.

 

13.

COSTS

Any costs relating to the introduction and administration of the Scheme shall be payable by the Company.

 

14.

ADMINISTRATION

 

14.1

The Committee shall have power from time to time to make and vary such regulations (not being inconsistent with these Rules) for the implementation and administration of the Scheme as it thinks fit.

 

14.2

Any notice given by an Eligible Employee or an Option Holder to the Company in pursuance of the Scheme must be given in writing and signed by the Eligible Employee or Option Holder as the case may be and shall be acted upon by the Company as soon as practicable after receipt provided that the Company may in its absolute discretion act on instructions given or purporting to be given by telex message or facsimile or telecopier transmission and shall not be responsible for any loss whatsoever occasioned by so acting. Any such notice shall be properly given if sent by post to or delivered to the Secretary of the Company at its registered office.

 

22


14.3

Any notification or other notice which the Company is required to give or may desire to give to any Option Holder in pursuance of the Scheme shall be sufficiently given if delivered to him in person or if sent through the post in a prepaid cover addressed to such Option Holder at his address last known to the Company.

 

14.4

Any notice sent by post shall (save as provided by Rule 7.2) be deemed to be properly served 48 hours after an envelope containing such notice and properly addressed has been posted by first class post.

 

14.5

The Company shall make returns of all Options granted and exercised and shall provide such other information relating to Option Holders as may be from time to time required by HMRC.

 

15.

GENERAL

 

15.1

The decision of the Committee in any dispute or question concerning the construction or effect of the Scheme or any other questions arising in connection with the Scheme shall be final and conclusive.

 

15.2

The Board may at any time resolve to terminate the Scheme in which event no further Options shall be granted but the provisions of the Scheme shall in relation to Options then subsisting continue in full force and effect.

 

15.3

Notwithstanding any other provision of these Rules:

 

  15.3.1

the Scheme shall not form any part of any contract of employment between the Company or any Subsidiary and any employees of any of those companies, and it shall not confer on any such employees any legal or equitable rights (other than those constituting the Options themselves) against the Company or any Subsidiary, directly or indirectly, or give rise to any cause of action in law or in equity against the Company or any Subsidiary;

 

  15.3.2

the benefits to Eligible Employees under the Scheme shall not form any part of their wages or remuneration or count as pay or remuneration for pension fund or other purposes;

 

23


  15.3.3

in no circumstances shall any Eligible Employee on ceasing to hold the office or employment by virtue of which he is or may be eligible to participate in the Scheme be entitled to any compensation for any loss of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Scheme which he might otherwise have enjoyed whether such compensation is claimed by way of damages for wrongful dismissal or other breach of contract or by way of compensation for loss of office or otherwise.

 

15.4

By accepting the grant of an Option and not renouncing it, an Option Holder shall be deemed to have agreed to the foregoing provisions of this Rule 15.

 

16.

AMENDMENTS TO THESE RULES

These Rules may be amended by resolution of the Board from time to time in any manner subject to the following provisions:

 

16.1

Subject as provided in Rule 16.2 no amendments shall be made to the following provisions of this Scheme which are to the advantage of Option Holders (present or future) without the prior approval of shareholders in general meeting:

 

  16.1.1

the persons to whom Shares are provided under the Scheme;

 

  16.1.2

the limitations on the number or amount of Shares subject to the Scheme;

 

  16.1.3

the basis for determining an Eligible Employee’s entitlement to Shares or Options and for the adjustment thereof in the event of a capitalisation issue, rights issue or open offer, sub-division or consolidation of shares or reduction of capital or any other variation of capital of the Company; and

 

  16.1.4

Rules 16.1 and 16.2.

 

16.2

The Board may make minor amendments to benefit the administration of the Scheme or to take account of a change in tax, securities or other legislation (whether in the United Kingdom or in the US) or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, securities law, exchange control, or regulatory treatment for option holders or for the Company or any other member of the Group).

 

16.3

Subject to Rule 16.2, no amendments shall be effective materially to abrogate or alter adversely any rights then subsisting of Option Holders except with such consent or sanction on the part of the Option Holders as would be required under the provisions of the Company’s Articles of Association if the Options constituted a single class of capital (or, where the Board deems it appropriate, two or more classes of capital according to the periods, as determined by the Board, in which the Dates of Grant fall) and as if such provisions applied mutatis mutandis thereto.

 

24


16.4

These Rules may be amended by resolution of the Board to provide for the collection or re-imbursement of amounts in respect of which Option Holders are obliged to account to the Company or their employer(s) under the terms of the indemnity contained in Rules 7.13 and 7.14, provided that any such amendment shall apply equally to Options granted but not exercised prior to the date of such amendment as to Options granted after that date.

 

17.

OVERSEAS EMPLOYEES

Notwithstanding any other provisions of these Rules the Committee may, in respect of an Option granted to an Eligible Employee who is or who may become primarily subject to taxation on his remuneration outside the United Kingdom, amend or alter the provisions of any Option to take account of relevant overseas taxation or securities law provided that the Committee shall not make any such amendment or alteration which would result in an Eligible Employee being granted an Option upon terms more favourable than the terms upon which the Option could have been granted if the Eligible Employee was subject to taxation on his remuneration primarily within the United Kingdom.

APPENDIX A

The following provisions shall apply with respect to any Option granted to a U.S. Person that is designated by its terms to be intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option under Section 422 of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and all rules and regulations thereunder (the “Code”). All other applicable provisions of the Scheme shall continue to apply to such Options, to the extent not inconsistent with the following.

 

  A.

The maximum number of Shares which shall be available for Incentive Stock Options pursuant to this Scheme shall be 500,000 subject to adjustment in accordance with Paragraph 12 of the Scheme.

 

  B.

Incentive Stock Options may be granted only to persons who are employees of the Company or an Affiliate. “Affiliate” for purposes of this Appendix means a corporation which, for purposes of Section 424 of the Code, is a parent or subsidiary of the Company, direct or indirect.

 

  C.

Option Price: Immediately before the Option is granted, if the Participant owns, directly or by reason of the applicable attribution rules in Section 424(d) of the Code:

 

25


  1.

Ten percent (10%) or less of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, the Option price per share of the Shares covered by each Option shall not be less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value per share of the Shares on the date of the grant of the Option as determined in accordance with Section 422 of the Code.

 

  2.

More than ten percent (10%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, the Option price per share of the Shares covered by each Option shall not be less than one hundred and ten percent (110%) of the said Fair Market Value on the date of grant.

 

  D.

Term of Option: For Participants who own:

 

  1.

Ten percent (10%) or less of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, each Option shall terminate not more than ten (10) years from the date of the grant or at such earlier time as the Option Agreement may provide.

 

  2.

More than ten percent (10%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, each Option shall terminate not more than five (5) years from the date of the grant or at such earlier time as the Option Agreement may provide.

 

  E.

Limitation on Yearly Exercise: The Option Agreements shall restrict the amount of Options which may be exercisable in any calendar year (under this or any other Incentive Stock Option plan of the Company or an Affiliate) so that the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined at the time each Incentive Stock Option is granted) of the stock with respect to which Incentive Stock Options are exercisable for the first time by the Participant in any calendar year does not exceed one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000). The Administrator shall have the right to accelerate the date of exercise of any instalment of any Option; provided that any such amendment of an Incentive Stock Option shall be effective only after the Administrator, after consulting the counsel for the Company, determines whether such amendment would constitute a “modification” of any Option which is an Incentive Stock Option (as that term is defined in Section 424(h) of the Code).

 

26


  F.

Post-Termination Exercise: An Option that is exercisable and is exercised more than three (3) months after the Participant’s termination of employment shall not be considered an Incentive Stock Option, unless (i) the Participant terminates employment due to Disability or becomes Disabled within three (3) months after termination of employment and exercises the Option within one (1) year after the date of the Participant’s termination of employment, but in no event after the date of expiration of the term of the Option, or (ii) terminates employment due to death or dies within three (3) months after termination of employment. “Disability” or “Disabled” for purposes of this Appendix means permanent and total disability as defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code.

 

  G.

Each Employee who receives an Incentive Stock Option must agree to notify the Company in writing immediately after the Employee makes a Disqualifying Disposition of any shares acquired pursuant to the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option. A Disqualifying Disposition is any disposition (including any sale) of such shares before the later of (a) two years after the date the Employee was granted the Incentive Stock Option, or (b) one year after the date the Employee acquired Shares by exercising the Incentive Stock Option. If the Employee has died before such stock is sold, these holding period requirements do not apply and no Disqualifying Disposition can occur thereafter.

 

  H.

No Incentive Stock Option granted under the Scheme may be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned, encumbered or otherwise alienated or hypothecated, other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution. Further, all Incentive Stock Options granted to a Participant under the Scheme shall be exercisable during such Participant’s lifetime only by such Participant.

All interpretations, rules, determinations, terms and conditions shall be made and prescribed in the context of preserving the tax status under Section 422 of the Code of those Options which are designated as Incentive Stock Options.

 

27

Exhibit 10.7

ABCAM PLC

 

 

RULES OF

THE ABCAM 2015 SHARE OPTION PLAN

 

 


THE ABCAM 2015 SHARE OPTION PLAN

Contents

 

Part A: Interpretation and Administration

   Rules 1 – 2

Part B: Grant of Options

   Rules 3 – 12

Part C: Exercise of Options

   Rules 13 – 22

Part D: Corporate Transactions

   Rules 23 – 29

Part E: Amendments

   Rules 30 – 31

Part F: Miscellaneous

   Rules 32 – 36

Schedule 1: US Incentive Stock Options

  

Schedule 2: California Schedule

  


THE ABCAM 2015 SHARE OPTION PLAN

Contents

 

          Page  
1   

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

     1  
2   

ADMINISTRATION

     5  
3   

ELIGIBILITY

     6  
4   

TIMING OF GRANT OF AN OPTION

     6  
5   

GRANT EFFECTED BY EXECUTION OF A DEED

     6  
6   

EXERCISE PRICE

     7  
7   

ACCEPTANCE OF AN OPTION

     7  
8   

DATA PROTECTION

     7  
9   

RELATIONSHIP WITH CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT

     8  
10   

NON-TRANSFERABILITY OF OPTIONS

     8  
11   

COMPANY LIMIT (INSTITUTIONAL) ON THE GRANTING OF SUBSCRIPTION OPTIONS

     9  
12   

INDIVIDUAL LIMITS

     9  
13   

GENERAL RULES

     10  
14   

PERFORMANCE TARGET

     10  
15   

TIME OF EXERCISE – GENERAL RULES

     11  
16   

LEAVING EMPLOYMENT

     11  
17   

LEAVING FOR OTHER REASONS

     12  
18   

DEATH OF AN OPTIONHOLDER

     12  
19   

TIME OF LEAVING

     12  
20   

MANNER OF EXERCISE OF AN OPTION

     13  
21   

RECOVERY OF TAX

     13  
22   

ISSUE OR TRANSFER OF SHARES

     13  
23   

EXCHANGE OF OPTIONS ON AN INTERNAL RECONSTRUCTION

     15  
24   

APPLICATION OF PERFORMANCE TARGET

     15  
25   

DEMERGER OR STATUTORY COMPROMISE OR ARRANGEMENT

     15  
26   

WINDING UP

     16  
27   

CHANGE OF CONTROL

     16  


28   

OPTION ROLLOVER

     16  
29   

EXERCISE PRIOR TO LOSS OF CORPORATION TAX RELIEF

     17  
30   

VARIATION OF SHARE CAPITAL

     18  
31   

ALTERATION OF THE PLAN

     18  
32   

SERVICE OF DOCUMENTS

     20  
33   

OBLIGATION TO ENSURE SUFFICIENT AVAILABLE SHARES

     20  
34   

STAMP DUTY

     21  
35   

JURISDICTION

     21  
36   

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

     21  

SCHEDULE 1 – US INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS

     22  


PART A: INTERPRETATION AND ADMINISTRATION

 

1.

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Plan:

 

“AIM”    means the Alternative Investment Market of the London Stock Exchange
“AIM Rules”    means the rules published by the London Stock Exchange governing the admission to, and operation of, AIM
“Acquiring Company”    means a company which has acquired Control of the Company
“Announcement”    means the announcement to the London Stock Exchange of the results of the Company for any period
“Associated Company”    means any company which, in relation to the Company, is an associated company as that term is defined in section 449 of the CTA 2010 except that, for the purposes of this Plan, the section shall have effect with the omission of the words “or at any other time within the preceding 12 months”
“Committee”    means the Remuneration Committee of the Directors, or such other committee of the Directors comprising a majority of non-executive directors of the Company to which the Directors delegate responsibility for the operation of this Plan or, following a change of Control of the Company, those persons who comprised the Remuneration Committee or other committee of the Directors immediately before the change of Control
“Companies Act”    means the Companies Act 2006
“Company”    means Abcam plc (registered in England no. 03509322)
“Control”    has the meaning given in section 719 of ITEPA
“CTA 2010”    means the Corporation Tax Act 2010
“Daily Official List”    means the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange
“Date of Approval”    means the date on which this Plan is approved by shareholders of the Company
“Date of Grant”    means the date on which an Option is granted in accordance with Rule 5.1
“Dealing Day”    means a day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for business
“Directors”    means the board of directors of the Company or a duly authorised committee of the directors
“Eligible Employee”    means an executive director or employee of any member of the Group
“Employer’s NICs”    means secondary class I NICs for which the Optionholder’s Employer is primarily liable to account

 

1


“Exchange of Options”    means the grant to an Optionholder, in consideration of the release of an Option, of rights to acquire Shares in an Acquiring Company or a company which has Control of an Acquiring Company or either is, or has Control of, a company which is a member of a consortium owning either an Acquiring Company or a company having Control of an Acquiring Company, being rights which are:
  

(a)   in the case of a change of Control, as agreed by the Committee with the Acquiring Company; or

 

(b)   in the case of an internal reorganisation as referred to in Rule 23, in the opinion of the Committee, substantially equivalent in value to the value of the original Option and otherwise on terms approved by the Committee.

“Exercise Price”    means the price per Share payable upon the exercise of an Option
“FCA”    means the Financial Conduct Authority
“Form of Acceptance”    means a form of acceptance of an Option as mentioned in Rule 7
“Grantor”    means the Company or such other person (including a Trustee) as intends to grant or has granted an Option
“Group”    means the Company and any company which is for the time being a Subsidiary
“HMRC”    means Her Majesty’s Revenue & Customs
“ITEPA”    means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003
“London Stock Exchange”    means the London Stock Exchange plc
“Market Value”    means the closing price of a Share as derived from the Daily Official List on the Dealing Day immediately preceding the Date of Grant
“NICs”    means National Insurance contributions
“NIC Option Gain”    means a gain realised on the exercise or release of, or acquisition of Shares pursuant to an Option, being a gain treated as remuneration derived from the Optionholder’s employment by virtue of section 4(4)(a) of the SSCBA
“N.I. Regulations”    means the laws, regulations and practices currently in force relating to liability for, and the collection of, NICs
“Notice of Exercise”    means a notice of exercise of an Option given in accordance with Rule 20
“Option”    means a right to acquire Shares granted in accordance with, and subject to, the rules of this Plan

 

2


“Option Certificate”    means a certificate evidencing the grant of an Option as mentioned in Rule 5.2
“Optionholder”    means a person who has been granted an Option or, if that person has died and where the context requires, his Personal Representatives
“Optionholder’s Employer”    means such member of the Group as is an Optionholder’s employer or, if he has ceased to be employed within the Group, was his employer or such other member of the Group, or such other person as, under the PAYE Regulations or, as the case may be, the N.I. Regulations, or any other statutory or regulatory enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or otherwise) is obliged to account for any Option Tax Liability
“Option Shares”    means the Shares over which an Option subsists
“Option Tax Liability”    means in relation to an Optionholder, any liability of an Optionholder’s Employer to account to HMRC or other tax authority for any amount of, or representing, income tax or NICs (which shall, to the extent provided for in Rule 5.2.9, include Employer’s NICs) or any equivalent charge in the nature of tax or social security contributions (whether under the laws of the United Kingdom or of any other jurisdiction) which may arise upon the vesting, exercise or release of, or the acquisition of Shares pursuant to, an Option
“Ordinary Share Capital”    means the issued ordinary share capital of the Company, other than fixed-rate preference shares
“PAYE Regulations”    means the regulations made under section 684 of ITEPA
“Performance Period”    means the period over which performance is to be measured for the purpose of determining whether, and to what extent, a Performance Target is met
“Performance Target”    means any condition or conditions imposed on the exercise of an Option pursuant to Rule 14, as amended from time to time
“Personal Data”    means the name, home address, telephone number, email address, date of birth and National Insurance number or other individual reference number of an Optionholder or other employee information, including details of all rights to acquire Shares or other securities granted to the Optionholder and of Shares or other securities issued or transferred to the Optionholder pursuant to this Plan and any other personal information which could identify the Optionholder and is necessary for the administration of this Plan
“Personal Representatives”    means the personal representatives of an Optionholder, being either:
  

(a)   the executors of his will; or

  

(b)   if he dies intestate, the duly appointed administrator(s) of his estate, who have produced to the Company evidence of their appointment as such

 

3


“Plan”    means the Abcam 2015 Share Option Plan as set out in these rules and amended from time to time pursuant to Rule 31
“Relevant Proportion”    means a proportion corresponding to such proportion of the Vesting Period as fell before:
  

(a)   the date on which the Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment within the Group, in the case of Rule 16 and subject to Rule 19.1;

  

(b)   the date of an Optionholder’s death in the case of Rule 18;

  

(c)   the date when notice is given to shareholders of a proposed demerger of the Company or of any Subsidiary in the case of Rule 25.2;

  

(d)   the date when a compromise or arrangement becomes effective (or the date of the court sanction if the Committee so determines) in the case of Rule 25.3;

  

(e)   the date when notice is given to shareholders of a resolution for the voluntary winding up of the Company in the case of Rule 26;

  

(f)   the date when Control is obtained in the case of Rule 27; and

  

(g)   in the case of Rule 29, the last date as determined and notified by the Committee on which an Option may be exercised in accordance with that Rule

“Shares”    means fully-paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company (or, following a reconstruction, demerger or reorganisation of the Company, or a change of Control in accordance with Rule 27, shares or other securities representing such shares)
“SSCBA”    means the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992
“Subscription Option”    means a right to subscribe for new Shares granted in accordance with, and subject to, the rules of this Plan
“Subsidiary”    means any company which is for the time being a subsidiary (as defined in section 1159 of the Companies Act) of the Company and under the Control of the Company
“Trust”    means an employees’ share trust established by the Company for the benefit of employees of members of the Group
“Trustee”    means the trustee(s) for the time being of a Trust
“Vested Shares”    means Shares in respect of which an Option is or becomes exercisable either:

 

4


  

(a)   in consequence of the Vesting Date having passed and, in the case of an Option which is subject to a Performance Target, determined and notified to Optionholders that the applicable Performance Target has been satisfied; or

  

(b)   at such earlier time as is mentioned in Rules 16, 17, 18 or Part D, and in the case of an Option which is subject to a Performance Target, the Committee having made a determination pursuant to Rule 14.5 that the applicable Performance Target shall be deemed to be satisfied to any extent

“Vesting Date”    means the third anniversary of the Date of Grant, or such other date or dates as may be specified by the Grantor in the Option Certificate
“Vesting Period”    means, for any Option, the period from the Date of Grant to the Vesting Date

 

1.2

References to Shares in respect of which an Option subsists at any time are to be read and construed as references to the Shares over which the Option is then held (and in respect of which it has not then lapsed and ceased to be exercisable).

 

1.3

Words and expressions used in this Plan and in the ancillary documents which are not defined in this Rule 1 have the meanings they bear for the purposes of ITEPA.

 

1.4

Any reference to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified, extended or re-enacted.

 

1.5

Words denoting the masculine gender shall include the feminine.

 

1.6

Words denoting the singular shall include the plural and vice versa.

 

1.7

References to rules are to the rules of this Plan and no account should be taken of the rule headings which are for ease of reference only.

 

2.

ADMINISTRATION

 

2.1

The Committee may from time to time make and vary such rules and regulations consistent with the rules of this Plan and establish such procedures for its administration and implementation as it thinks fit.

 

2.2

If any question, dispute or disagreement arises as to the interpretation of this Plan or of any rules, regulations or procedures relating to it or as to any question or right arising from or related to this Plan, the decision of the Committee shall be final and binding upon all persons.

 

2.3

The Company shall bear the costs of the implementation and administration of this Plan.

 

5


PART B: GRANT OF OPTIONS

 

3.

ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

Subject to the following provisions of this Rule 3, the Committee shall have absolute discretion as to the selection of persons to whom Options may be granted.

 

3.2

An Option may only be granted to an Eligible Employee.

 

3.3

An Option shall not be granted by any person other than the Company without the prior approval of the Committee.

 

4.

TIMING OF GRANT OF AN OPTION

 

4.1

Options may be granted during the periods of:

 

  4.1.1

42 days following the Date of Approval;

 

  4.1.2

42 days beginning with the Dealing Day following an Announcement; or

 

  4.1.3

28 days immediately after the person to whom it is granted first becomes an Eligible Employee;

 

  or

at any other time but only if, in the opinion of the Committee, the circumstances are exceptional.

 

4.2

If the Grantor is restricted by statute, order or regulation (including any regulation, order or requirement imposed on the Company by the London Stock Exchange, the FCA or any other regulatory authority) from granting an Option within any period as mentioned in Rule 4.1, the Grantor may grant an Option at any time during the period of 42 days (or, in the circumstances referred to in Rule 4.1.3, 28 days) beginning with the date on which all such restrictions are removed.

 

4.3

No Option may be granted in breach of the AIM Rules.

 

4.4

No Option may be granted after the tenth anniversary of the Date of Approval, but any rights of Optionholders then subsisting shall remain in force.

 

5.

GRANT EFFECTED BY EXECUTION OF A DEED

 

5.1

An Option shall be granted by the Grantor executing a deed in such form as the Grantor specifies from time to time.

 

5.2

As soon as practicable after an Option has been granted the Company shall procure the issue to the Optionholder of an Option Certificate (which may be in electronic form) which specifies:

 

  5.2.1

the Grantor;

 

  5.2.2

the Date of Grant;

 

  5.2.3

the number of Option Shares;

 

  5.2.4

the Exercise Price;

 

  5.2.5

whether a Performance Target will apply, and if so the details of the Performance Target;

 

  5.2.6

the Vesting Date;

 

  5.2.7

the last date on which the Option may be exercised;

 

6


  5.2.8

that it is a condition of exercise of the Option that the Optionholder indemnifies the Grantor and the Optionholder’s Employer in respect of any Option Tax Liability; and

 

  5.2.9

if the Committee, acting fairly and reasonably, determines that it is a condition of exercise of the Option that the Optionholder shall:

 

  (a)

agree with and undertake to the Company and any other company which is the Optionholder’s Employer that the Optionholder’s Employer may recover from the Optionholder, as mentioned in Rule 21.1, the whole or any part of any Employer’s NICs payable in respect of any NIC Option Gain; and/or

 

  (b)

enter into a joint election with the Optionholder’s Employer (in a form approved by HMRC) for the transfer to the Optionholder of the whole, or such part as the Company may determine, of any liability of the Optionholder’s Employer to Employer’s NICs on any NIC Option Gain

and is in such form as the Grantor specifies from time to time.

 

6.

EXERCISE PRICE

 

6.1

Subject to Rule 6.2 and any adjustment being made pursuant to Rule 30, the Exercise Price shall be determined by the Committee (with the prior consent of the Grantor, if appropriate) but shall be not less than Market Value.

 

6.2

The Exercise Price in respect of a Subscription Option shall not (except as mentioned in sub- paragraph (a) of Rule 30.1) be less than the nominal value of a Share.

 

7.

ACCEPTANCE OF AN OPTION

 

7.1

Unless the Grantor otherwise determines for the grant of any Option, it shall be a condition of exercise that the Optionholder must notify the Grantor that he accepts the Option.

 

7.2

To accept the Option, the Optionholder must execute, as a deed, and deliver to the Grantor a duly completed Form of Acceptance in such form as the Grantor specifies from time to time and notifies to the Optionholder.

 

7.3

The Form of Acceptance, if required, shall be returned to the Grantor within 30 days following the Date of Grant (or such other time as the Grantor notifies to the Optionholder at the Date of Grant), and may be returned in electronic format.

 

7.4

The Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable if the Form of Acceptance is not returned by the specified date.

 

8.

DATA PROTECTION

 

8.1

In accepting the grant of an Option, the Optionholder shall agree and consent to:

 

  8.1.1

the collection, use, processing and transfer of his Personal Data by any member of the Group, any Associated Company, a Trustee, any third party administrator of this Plan or the Company’s brokers or registrars and, if it is not the Company, the Grantor;

 

  8.1.2

any member of the Group, any Associated Company, a Trustee, any third party administrator of this Plan or the Company’s brokers or registrars and, if it is not the Company, the Grantor, transferring the Optionholder’s Personal Data amongst themselves for the purposes of implementing, administering and managing this Plan and the grant of Options and the acquisition of Shares pursuant to Options;

 

  8.1.3

the use of Personal Data by any such person for any such purposes; and

 

7


  8.1.4

the transfer to and retention of Personal Data by third parties (whether or not any such third party is situated outside the European Economic Area) for, or in connection with, such purposes.

 

9.

RELATIONSHIP WITH CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT

 

9.1

The grant of an Option does not form part of the Optionholder’s entitlement to remuneration or benefits pursuant to his contract of employment.

 

9.2

The existence of a contract of employment between any person and the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company does not give that person any right or entitlement to have an Option granted to him in respect of any number of Shares nor any expectation that an Option might be granted, whether subject to any conditions or at all.

 

9.3

The rights and obligations of an Optionholder under the terms of his contract of employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company shall not be affected by the grant of an Option or his participation in this Plan.

 

9.4

Neither the existence of this Plan nor the fact that an individual has on any occasion been granted an Option shall give such individual any right, entitlement or expectation that he has or will in future have any such right, entitlement or expectation to participate in this Plan by being granted an Option on any other occasion.

 

9.5

The rights or opportunity granted to an Optionholder on the grant of an Option shall not give the Optionholder any rights or additional rights to compensation or damages in consequence of either:

 

  9.5.1

the Optionholder giving or receiving notice of termination of his office or employment; or

 

  9.5.2

the loss or termination of his office or employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company for any reason whatsoever,

whether or not the termination (and/or giving of notice) is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair.

 

9.6

An Optionholder shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for any loss or potential loss which he may suffer by reason of being unable to acquire or retain Shares, or any interest in Shares, pursuant to the exercise of an Option in consequence of:

 

  9.6.1

the Optionholder giving or receiving notice of termination of his office or employment (whether or not the termination (and/or giving of notice) is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair);

 

  9.6.2

the loss or termination of his office or employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not the termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair);

 

  9.6.3

the exercise (or non-exercise) by the Committee of any discretion in accordance with any Rule of this Plan; or

 

  9.6.4

for any other reason.

 

10.

NON-TRANSFERABILITY OF OPTIONS

 

10.1

During his lifetime, only the person to whom an Option is granted may exercise that Option.

 

8


10.2

An Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable if the Optionholder:

 

  10.2.1

transfers or assigns it (other than to his Personal Representatives), mortgages, charges or otherwise disposes of it;

 
  10.2.2

is adjudged bankrupt or an interim order is made because he intends to propose a voluntary arrangement to his creditors under the Insolvency Act 1986;

 
  10.2.3

makes or proposes a voluntary arrangement under the Insolvency Act 1986, or any other scheme or arrangement in relation to his debts, with his creditors or any section of them; or

 
  10.2.4

is not, or ceases for any other reason (except on death) to be the legal or beneficial owner of the Option.

 

11.

COMPANY LIMIT (INSTITUTIONAL) ON THE GRANTING OF SUBSCRIPTION OPTIONS

 

11.1

The number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options may be granted on any day, when added to the number of Shares issued or which remain issuable pursuant to rights to subscribe for Shares granted under this Plan and any other employees’ share scheme in the period of 10 years preceding that day, shall not exceed 10 per cent of the ordinary shares in issue on that day.

 

11.2

For the purposes of this Rule 11, references to rights to subscribe for Shares shall:

 

  11.2.1

exclude any rights to subscribe for Shares or other awards over new issue Shares granted under any other employees’ share scheme of the Company prior to the admission of the Shares to trading on AIM;

 

  11.2.2

exclude any Options or rights to subscribe for Shares which have in fact been, or will be, satisfied by the transfer of Shares by the Trustee or any other existing shareholder (other than the Company itself); and

 

  11.2.3

if required in accordance with guidance issued from time to time as part of the Principles of Remuneration by the Investment Association, include references to rights to acquire Shares issued or to be issued out of treasury.

 

11.3

In determining the above limits, “year” means a calendar year.

 

11.4

To avoid double counting, if new Shares have been issued to a Trustee for the purpose of satisfying Options (or rights to acquire Shares or awards over Shares under any other employees’ share scheme of the Company), such Shares shall be taken into account for these purposes only when they are made subject to, or used to satisfy, an Option (or a right to acquire Shares or award made under any other employees’ share scheme of the Company).

 

12.

INDIVIDUAL LIMITS

The aggregate market value of Shares in respect of which Options may be granted to an Eligible Employee at any time shall be determined by the Committee (acting in its sole discretion).

 

9


PART C: EXERCISE OF OPTIONS

 

13.

GENERAL RULES

 

13.1

During his lifetime, only the individual to whom an Option is granted may exercise that Option.

 

13.2

An Option may not be exercised on any occasion if the exercise would not be in compliance with the AIM Rules.

 

13.3

An Option may not be exercised if, having been required to do so by the Grantor, the Optionholder has failed to enter into a joint election (as mentioned in Rule 5.2.9(b)).

 

14.

PERFORMANCE TARGET

 

14.1

Exercise of an Option may be conditional on the performance of any one or more of the Company, a Subsidiary, division and the Optionholder, and/or subject to any other performance target measured over such period and measured against such objective criteria determined by the Committee when the Option is granted.

 

14.2

A Performance Target may provide that a given number or proportion of Option Shares shall become Vested Shares according to whether, and the extent to which, any specified levels of performance are met or exceeded.

 

14.3

After an Option has been granted, the Committee acting fairly and reasonably may, in appropriate circumstances, amend a Performance Target provided that:

 

  14.3.1

no such amendment shall be made unless an event has occurred or events have occurred in consequence of which the Committee reasonably considers that the existing Performance Target should be amended to ensure that:

 

  (a)

the objective criteria against which performance will then be measured will be a fairer measure of performance; and/or

 

  (b)

any amended Performance Target will afford a more effective incentive to the Optionholder; and

 

  14.3.2

any such amended Performance Target shall be no more difficult to satisfy than was the original Performance Target when first set.

 

14.4

If, in consequence of a Performance Target being met (or being deemed to be met), some, but not all, of the Option Shares become Vested Shares, the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable in respect of the balance of the Option Shares.

 

14.5

If, before the end of a Performance Period:

 

  14.5.1

an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment within the Group; or

 

  14.5.2

circumstances arise as mentioned in Rules 25 (“Demerger or Statutory Compromise or Arrangement”), 26 (“Winding Up”), 27 (“Change of Control”) or 29 (“Exercise Prior to Loss of Corporation Tax Relief”) the Committee acting fairly and reasonably may determine whether and to what extent the Performance Target shall be deemed to be satisfied.

 

14.6

If, at the end of a Performance Period or at such earlier time as mentioned in Rules 16, 17, 18 or Part D, a Performance Target is not (and/or has not been deemed to be) satisfied to any extent, the Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable to that extent.

 

14.7

The Company shall, as soon as practicable after the end of a Performance Period or at such earlier time as mentioned in Rules 16, 17, 18 or Part D, notify Optionholders of the number or proportion of the Option Shares which have (or have been deemed to) become Vested Shares.

 

10


14.8

The Committee may, in exceptional circumstances and before the end of a Performance Period, waive a Performance Target as it applies to any Option and, in this event, all of the Option Shares shall become Vested Shares provided that no waiver shall be made unless an event has occurred or events have occurred in consequence of which the Committee reasonably considers that the Performance Target should be waived.

 

15.

TIME OF EXERCISE – GENERAL RULES

 

15.1

Subject to the following provisions of this Plan, an Option may only be exercised after the Vesting Date.

 

15.2

An Option may not in any event be exercised after the tenth anniversary of the Date of Grant or such earlier time as the Grantor specifies in the Option Certificate.

 

15.3

An Option may only be exercised in respect of Vested Shares.

 

15.4

Except as mentioned in Rules 16 to 18 (inclusive), an Option may not be exercised at any time unless the Optionholder then holds office or employment with a member of the Group or an Associated Company.

 

16.

LEAVING EMPLOYMENT

 

16.1

The provisions of this Rule 16 shall apply if an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment within the Group by reason of:

 

  16.1.1

injury, ill-health or disability (evidenced to the satisfaction of the Committee);

 

  16.1.2

the fact that the office or employment by virtue of which he is eligible to participate in this Plan relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is neither an Associated Company nor a member of the Group; or

 

  16.1.3

the fact that the company with which he holds the office or employment by virtue of which he is eligible to participate in this Plan is no longer a member of the Group or an Associated Company.

 

16.2

If such cessation occurs after the Vesting Date, the Optionholder may exercise an Option in respect of Vested Shares, within the period of 6 months beginning with the date of such cessation.

 

16.3

If such cessation occurs before the Vesting Date, then either:

 

  16.3.1

the Optionholder may retain the benefit of an Option granted to him and exercise such Option within the period of 6 months beginning with the Vesting Date in respect of the Relevant Proportion of the Vested Shares; or

 

  16.3.2

if the Committee, acting in its discretion, so determines, an Option granted to him may be exercised within the period of 6 months beginning with the date of such cessation, in respect of the Relevant Proportion of the Option Shares (if any) which then become Vested Shares.

 

16.4

For the purposes of Rule 16.3, the Committee may determine and notify an Optionholder that an Option shall be exercisable in respect of a number of the Option Shares which is different from the number determined under Rule 16.3 where it considers, in its discretion, that is appropriate.

 

11


16.5

If or insofar as an Option is not exercised within the relevant period of 6 months mentioned in Rules 16.2 and 16.3, the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such period.

 

17.

LEAVING FOR OTHER REASONS

 

17.1

If an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment within the Group or gives or receives notice to terminate any office or employment with any member of the Group for any reason other than those set out in Rules 16.1 or 18, an Option granted to him may only be exercised (if at all) in relation to such proportion of the Option Shares (whether Vested Shares or otherwise), and (subject to Rule 15.2) within such period, as the Committee shall, within 3 months following the cessation, determine and notify to the Optionholder and shall otherwise lapse and cease to be exercisable.

 

17.2

Unless the Committee makes a determination as mentioned in Rule 17.1, an Optionholder who ceases to hold office or employment within the Group for any such other reason shall not be entitled to exercise an Option after the date of such cessation.

 

18.

DEATH OF AN OPTIONHOLDER

 

18.1

If an Optionholder dies an Option granted to him may be exercised by his Personal Representatives (if at all) only within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of his death, and only in respect of such of the Option Shares as are determined in accordance with the following provisions of this Rule 18. If and insofar as the Option is not exercised within that period, it shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period.

 

18.2

If an Optionholder dies in service after the Vesting Date (or the occurrence of any of the circumstances mentioned in Part D), an Option granted to him may only be exercised in respect of Option Shares which are, or become, Vested Shares.

 

18.3

If an Optionholder dies in service before the Vesting Date, an Option granted to him may be exercised only in respect of the Relevant Proportion of the Option Shares (if any) which then become Vested Shares.

 

18.4

For the purposes of Rule 18.3, the Committee may determine and notify to the Optionholder’s Personal Representatives that an Option shall be exercisable in respect of a number of the Option Shares which is different from the number determined under Rule 18.3 where it considers, in its discretion, that is appropriate.

 

18.5

If the Optionholder dies after having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group as mentioned in Rule 16.1 but before his Option lapses, an Option granted to him may be exercised over such proportion of the Option Shares as set out in Rules 16.2 and 16.3.

 

18.6

If the Optionholder dies after having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group for any other reason, an Option granted to him may be exercised (if at all) only in respect of such proportion of the Option Shares as the Committee may determine and notify to the Personal Representatives as mentioned in Rule 17.

 

19.

TIME OF LEAVING

 

19.1

For the purposes of this Plan, an Optionholder shall be treated as having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group only when he no longer holds any office or employment with any member of the Group or with any Associated Company.

 

12


19.2

An Optionholder shall not be treated as having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group unless he no longer has a right to return to work with any member of the Group.

 

20.

MANNER OF EXERCISE OF AN OPTION

 

20.1

To exercise an Option, the Optionholder shall serve a written notice (which may be in electronic form) on the Grantor which:

 

  20.1.1

specifies the number of Option Shares over which the Option is exercised on that occasion which shall not exceed the number of Vested Shares;

 

  20.1.2

unless the Optionholder has entered into arrangements approved by the Company for procuring payment to the Company of the aggregate Exercise Price, is accompanied by payment of the Exercise Price;

 

  20.1.3

unless the Grantor otherwise permits, is accompanied by the Option Certificate;

 

  20.1.4

is accompanied by evidence, satisfactory to the Company, of the arrangements that the Optionholder has made to satisfy the Option Tax Liability,

and is in such form as the Grantor specifies from time to time and notifies to the Optionholder.

 

21.

RECOVERY OF TAX

 

21.1

If an Option Tax Liability arises in any jurisdiction then, unless:

 

  21.1.1

the Optionholder’s Employer is able to withhold the amount of the Option Tax Liability from payment of the Optionholder’s remuneration within the PAYE period in which the Option Tax Liability arises;

 

  21.1.2

the Optionholder has indicated (either in the Notice of Exercise or other manner as the Company may specify) that he will pay to the Company the amount of the Option Tax Liability and the Optionholder does, within 14 days of being notified by the Company of that amount, make the payment to the Company; or

 

  21.1.3

the Optionholder has authorised (either in the Notice of Exercise or such other manner as the Company may specify) the Grantor to sell (including by instructing a duly authorised third party such as an administrator or broker), as agent for the Optionholder (at the best price which can reasonably be expected to be obtained at the time of sale), such number of the Shares acquired on exercise of the Option as is necessary to enable the Grantor to procure payment to the Optionholder’s Employer out of the net proceeds of sale of the Shares (after deducting fees, commissions and expenses incurred in relation to the sale) an amount sufficient to satisfy the Optionholder’s indemnity provided by Rule 5.2.8

the Grantor shall have the right to sell (as mentioned in Rule 21.1.3) such number of the Shares acquired on exercise of the Option as is necessary to enable the Grantor to pay to the Optionholder’s Employer out of the net proceeds of sale of the Shares (after deducting fees, commissions and expenses incurred in relation to the sale) an amount sufficient to satisfy the Optionholder’s indemnity provided by Rule 5.2.8.

 

22.

ISSUE OR TRANSFER OF SHARES

 

22.1

Subject to Rules 21.1 and 22.2, within the period of 30 days beginning with the date on which the Grantor receives a Notice of Exercise the Grantor shall issue, transfer or procure the issue or transfer of, the number of Shares specified in the Notice to the Optionholder. For the avoidance of doubt, Options may be satisfied by the issue of new Shares or of Shares out of treasury, or by the transfer of existing Shares (whether by the Trustee or otherwise).

 

13


22.2

Shares may not be issued or transferred pursuant to the exercise of an Option on any occasion if such issue or transfer would not be in compliance with the AIM Rules.

 

22.3

If the Grantor is restricted from issuing, transferring or procuring the issue or transfer of Shares on the exercise of an Option by reason of any statutory, regulatory or other legal provision or rule or any other requirement or guidance issued by the London Stock Exchange, or on behalf of institutional investors in the Company or any other body and which relates to dealings in Shares by directors or employees of any member of the Group, the Grantor shall not be obliged to issue, transfer or procure the issue or transfer of the Shares until after all such restrictions are lifted and shall then do so within 30 days.

 

22.4

Subject to Rule 22.5, as soon as reasonably practicable after the allotment or transfer of any Shares pursuant to Rules 22.1 or 22.3, the Grantor shall procure:

 

  22.4.1

the issue of a definitive share certificate or such other acknowledgement of shareholding as is prescribed from time to time for the Shares allotted or transferred to the Optionholder; and

 

  22.4.2

if Shares are to be allotted and, on the date of allotment, Shares of the same class are listed on AIM, that any Shares so allotted are admitted to AIM.

 

22.5

If the Optionholder requests, some or all of the Shares he acquires on the exercise of an Option may be issued or transferred to a nominee of the Optionholder, provided that beneficial ownership of the Shares vests in the Optionholder.

 

22.6

The allotment or transfer of any Shares under this Plan shall be subject to the Company’s Articles of Association and to any necessary consents of any governmental or other authorities (whether in the United Kingdom or otherwise) under any enactments or regulations from time to time in force. It shall be the responsibility of the Optionholder to comply with any requirements to be fulfilled in order to obtain or obviate the necessity of any such consent.

 

22.7

Shares allotted or transferred under this Plan shall be equal in all respects to other Shares then issued except for any rights attaching to the other Shares by reference to a record date preceding the date of the allotment or transfer of the Shares acquired on the exercise of the Option.

 

14


PART D: CORPORATE TRANSACTIONS

 

23.

EXCHANGE OF OPTIONS ON AN INTERNAL RECONSTRUCTION

 

23.1

The Committee may invite an Optionholder to accept an Exchange of Options. The invitation shall be open for a period of at least 14 days following its issue. The Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of the invitation period.

 

23.2

Rule 23.1 shall apply only if, immediately after the Company has come under the Control of an Acquiring Company, the Company would nevertheless remain or remains under the Control of the person who, or persons who together, had Control of the Company immediately before the Company comes or came under the Control of the Acquiring Company.

 

23.3

The following provisions of Part D shall have effect subject to this Rule 23.

 

24.

APPLICATION OF PERFORMANCE TARGET AND TIME PRO RATING

 

24.1

If Options which are subject to Performance Targets become exercisable pursuant to this Part D, an Optionholder may only exercise an Option granted to him in respect of such of the Option Shares (if any) which are Vested Shares or then become Vested Shares as a result of the application of Rule 14.5.

 

24.2

If Options become exercisable pursuant to this Part D, an Optionholder may only exercise an Option in respect of the Relevant Proportion of the Vested Shares, unless the Committee, in exceptional circumstances, determines otherwise.

 

25.

DEMERGER OR STATUTORY COMPROMISE OR ARRANGEMENT

 

25.1

The provisions of this Rule 25 are subject to Rule 23.

 

25.2

If the Company’s shareholders are notified of a proposed demerger of the Company or of any Subsidiary, the Committee may, as soon as practicable, notify Optionholders that Options may then be exercised, within one month (or such other period as may be specified in such notice). No such notice shall be given unless the Committee determines that (disregarding any Performance Target subject to which any Option is then exercisable) the interests of Optionholders would or might be substantially prejudiced if, before the proposed demerger has effect, Optionholders could not exercise their Options and be registered as the holders of the Shares so acquired. Options will lapse and cease to be exercisable, to the extent not exercised, at the end of the relevant period.

 

25.3

If the court sanctions a compromise or arrangement in relation to the Company pursuant to section 899 of the Companies Act, Options may be exercised, within the period of one month (or such other period as the Committee may determine and notify to Optionholders) commencing on the date on which the compromise or arrangement becomes effective (or, if the Committee so determines, the earlier date when the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement). Options will lapse and cease to be exercisable, to the extent not exercised, at the end of the relevant period.

 

25.4

In addition to Rule 25.3, the Committee may permit Options to be exercised conditionally on the court sanction. This means that the exercise will take effect immediately prior to the compromise or arrangement becoming effective. In this case, the Committee shall notify Optionholders of the period (of at least 14 days, ending no more than 14 days before the date on which the court is expected to sanction the proposals) during which they may exercise their Options if they wish the exercise to take effect conditionally. Any ability to exercise under this Rule 25.4 is in addition to the Optionholders’ rights under Rule 25.3.

 

25.5

In making any determination as mentioned in Rules 25.2 to 25.4 (inclusive), the Committee shall act fairly and reasonably, applying the same criteria to all Options granted on the same Date of Grant.

 

15


26.

WINDING UP

 

If

the Company’s shareholders are notified of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up of the Company, an Option may be exercised at any time before the commencement of the winding up or within such other period as the Grantor notifies to Optionholders. Options will lapse and cease to be exercisable, to the extent not exercised, at the end of the relevant period.

 

27.

CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

27.1

Subject to Rule 23, if as a result of either:

 

  27.1.1

a general offer to acquire the whole of the Ordinary Share Capital which is made on a condition which, if satisfied or waived, the person making the offer will have Control of the Company; or

 

  27.1.2

a general offer to acquire all the shares in the Company of the same class as the Shares

the Company shall come under the Control of another person or persons, Options may be exercised, within the period of one month (or such other period, not exceeding 6 months, as the Committee may determine and notify to Optionholders) of the date when the person making the offer has obtained Control of the Company and any condition subject to which the offer is made has then been satisfied or waived. Options will lapse and cease to be exercisable, to the extent not exercised, at the end of such period.

 

27.2

If at any time any person becomes entitled or bound to acquire shares in the Company under sections 979 to 985 of the Companies Act, Options may be exercised at any time when that person remains so entitled or bound. Options will lapse and cease to be exercisable, to the extent not exercised, when that person no longer remains so entitled or bound.

 

27.3

For the purposes of this Rule 27, a person shall be deemed to have Control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained Control of it.

 

27.4

For the purposes of Rule 27.1.1, the reference to the whole of the Ordinary Share Capital does not include any capital already held by the person making the offer or a person connected with that person and in Rule 27.1.2 the reference to all the shares in the Company does not include any shares already held by the person making the offer or a person connected with that person. For the purposes of Rule 27.1 it does not matter if the general offer is made to different shareholders by different means.

 

28.

OPTION ROLLOVER

 

28.1

If any Acquiring Company:

 

  28.1.1

obtains Control of the Company as mentioned in Rule 27.1; or

  28.1.2

obtains Control of the Company pursuant to a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under section 899 of the Companies Act as mentioned in Rule 25.3; or

  28.1.3

becomes bound or entitled to acquire shares under sections 979 to 985 of the Companies Act as mentioned in Rule 27.2

the Committee and the Acquiring Company may agree that an Exchange of Options will be offered to Optionholders in which case Rules 25.3, 27.1 and 27.2 shall have effect subject to this Rule.

 

16


29.

EXERCISE PRIOR TO LOSS OF CORPORATION TAX RELIEF

 

29.1

If the Committee becomes aware of any circumstances which may result in corporation tax relief under Part 12 of the Corporation Tax Act 2009 no longer being available when an Option is exercised, then the Committee may, as soon as practicable after becoming aware of such circumstances notify Optionholders that Options may then be exercised, within such period as may be specified in such notice, in respect of the Relevant Proportion of the Option Shares (if any) which are Vested Shares or then become Vested Shares.

 

29.2

An Option which is not exercised within the period specified in Rule 29.1 shall, if the Committee so determines and specifies in the notice given to Optionholders, lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period.

 

17


PART E: AMENDMENTS

 

30.

VARIATION OF SHARE CAPITAL

 

30.1

If the Ordinary Share Capital is altered by way of capitalisation or rights issue, sub-division, consolidation or reduction or there is any other variation in the share capital of the Company, the Committee (on behalf of the Grantor, if appropriate) may make such adjustment as it considers appropriate:

 

  30.1.1

to the aggregate number, amount or description of Shares subject to any Option; and/or

 

  30.1.2

to the Exercise Price; and/or

 

  30.1.3

if an Option has been exercised but no Shares have been allotted or transferred in accordance with Rules 22.1 or 22.3, to the number of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the price payable for each Share

provided that:

 

  (a)

except insofar as the Directors (on behalf of the Company) agree to capitalise the Company’s reserves and apply the same at the time of exercise in paying up the difference between the Exercise Price and the nominal value of the Shares, the Exercise Price of any Subscription Option shall not be reduced below a Share’s nominal value;

 

  (b)

the number of Shares as so adjusted has been rounded down to the nearest whole number; and

 

  (c)

if the Grantor is not the Company, no such adjustment shall be made without the Grantor’s consent.

 

30.2

The Committee (on behalf of the Grantor) shall notify every Optionholder affected by an adjustment under Rule 30.1 as soon as reasonably practicable after making the adjustment.

 

30.3

The Committee shall deliver, or procure the delivery of, a revised Option Certificate to any Optionholder who asks for an amended Option Certificate.

 

31.

ALTERATION OF THE PLAN

 

31.1

The Committee may at any time alter or add to any of the provisions of this Plan in any respect provided that:

 

  31.1.1

no alteration or addition shall be made to the advantage of existing or new Optionholders to the provisions relating to eligibility to participate, the overall limitations on the issue of new Shares, the basis for determining Optionholders’ rights to acquire Shares, the adjustment of such rights in the event of variation of the Ordinary Share Capital or this Rule 31 without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the shareholders of the Company except that the provisions of this Rule 31.1.1 shall not apply to the extent that the alteration or addition is in the opinion of the Committee:

 

  (a)

a minor amendment which is necessary or appropriate to benefit the administration of this Plan;

 

  (b)

to take account of any change in legislation; or

 

  (c)

to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for existing or new Optionholders, any member of the Group or any Associated Company; and

 

18


  31.1.2

if, in relation to any Options, the Grantor is not the Company, no alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of the Options without the approval of the Grantor.

 

31.2

Details of any alteration or addition shall be given to any affected Optionholder as soon as reasonably practicable.

 

19


PART F: MISCELLANEOUS

 

32.

SERVICE OF DOCUMENTS

 

32.1

Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, any notice or document to be given by, or on behalf of, the Company or other Grantor, a Trustee, the Committee or any administrator of this Plan to any Eligible Employee or Optionholder in accordance or in connection with this Plan shall be duly given:

 

  32.1.1

by sending it through the post in a pre-paid envelope to the address last known to the Company to be his address and, if so sent, it shall be deemed to have been duly given on the date of posting; or

 

  32.1.2

if he holds office or employment with any member of the Group or any Associated Company, by delivering it to him at his place of work or by sending an email addressed to him at his place of work and, if so sent, it shall be deemed to have been duly given at the time of transmission.

 

32.2

A notice or document shall not be duly given by email unless the intended recipient is known by his employer company to have personal access during his normal business hours to information sent to him by email.

 

32.3

Any notice or document so sent to an Eligible Employee or Optionholder shall be deemed to have been duly given notwithstanding that the Eligible Employee or Optionholder is then deceased (and whether or not the Company or other Grantor has notice of his death) except where his Personal Representatives have supplied an alternative address to which documents are to be sent to the Company.

 

32.4

Any written notice or document to be submitted or given to the Grantor, the Company, a Trustee, the Committee or any administrator of this Plan in accordance or in connection with this Plan may be delivered, sent by post or email but shall not in any event be duly given unless:

 

  32.4.1

it is actually received (or, in the case of an email, opened) by the individual at the relevant recipient from time to time nominated for the purpose of receiving notices or documents under this Plan and whose name and address is notified to Optionholders; and

 

  32.4.2

if given by email (and if required by the Company), it includes a digitally encrypted signature of the Optionholder.

 

32.5

For the purposes of this Plan, an email shall be treated as not having been duly sent or received if the recipient of the email notifies the sender that it has not been opened because it contains, or is accompanied by a warning or caution that it could contain or be subject to, a virus or other computer programme which could alter, damage or interfere with any computer software or email.

 

33.

OBLIGATION TO ENSURE SUFFICIENT AVAILABLE SHARES

 

33.1

The Company shall ensure that any necessary authorisations are or will be in place at the relevant time to allow the issue of sufficient Shares to satisfy the exercise in full of all Subscription Options for the time being remaining capable of being exercised.

 

33.2

No Option to purchase existing Shares shall be granted by any person unless the Directors are satisfied that sufficient Shares will be made available to satisfy the exercise in full of that Option.

 

20


33.3

The Company may issue Shares, and grant rights to subscribe for Shares, to a Trustee for the purpose of enabling the Trustee, in the exercise of its powers to:

 

  33.3.1

grant Options; and/or

 

  33.3.2

transfer or procure the issue or transfer of Shares on the exercise of Options (whether granted by the Trustee or otherwise)

provided that any Shares issued or in respect of which rights to subscribe are granted by the Company (and which, if not exercised, do not lapse) shall count in applying the overall limitations on the issue of Shares imposed by Rule 11.

 

34.

STAMP DUTY

Any stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax payable in respect of a transfer of Shares to, or at the direction or, an Optionholder (other than stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax payable on a sale of Shares at the direction of the Optionholder) shall be paid by the Company.

 

35.

JURISDICTION

 

35.1

This Plan and any Option shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, English law.

 

35.2

The courts of England shall have exclusive jurisdiction in relation to any claim, dispute or difference concerning an Option and any matter arising from, or in relation to, this Plan.

 

36.

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

Except as otherwise expressly stated to the contrary, neither this Plan nor the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall have the effect of giving any third party rights under this Plan or any Option, and that Act shall not apply to this Plan nor to any Option.

 

21


Schedule 1

US INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS

 

1.

INTRODUCTION

 

1.1

This Schedule 1 shall apply to Options granted to Eligible Employees who are or who become US tax resident.

 

1.2

Options granted under this Schedule 1 are intended to qualify as “Incentive Stock Options” under section 422 of the Code (as defined below), provided, however, that the Company does not warrant that any Option will qualify as an Incentive Stock Option.

 

1.3

Unless stated otherwise in this Schedule 1, the main body of the rules of the Plan will apply to Options granted to US Employees.

 

1.4

Nothing contained in this Schedule 1 shall prohibit the Company from granting to any US Employee an Option under the main Rules of the Plan that is not intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option.

 

2.

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

“Affiliate”    means a corporation which, for the purposes of section 424 of the Code, is a parent or subsidiary of the Company, direct or indirect
“Code”    means the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986
“Disability”    means permanent and total disability as defined under section 22(e)(3) of the Code, and “Disabled” shall be construed accordingly
“Option”    means an Incentive Stock Option as defined in clause 1.2 of this Schedule 1
“US Employee”    means an Eligible Employee who is or who becomes US tax resident and who is employed by the Company or an Affiliate

 

3.

ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

Rule 3.2 will be deleted and replaced with the following:

“Incentive Stock Options may only be granted to US Employees.”

 

4.

TIMING OF GRANT OF AN OPTION

 

4.1

Rule 4.4 will be deleted and replaced with the following:

“No Option may be granted after the date that is the earlier of (i) the tenth anniversary of the Date of Approval; or (ii) the tenth anniversary of the date that the Plan is approved by the Board of Directors of the Company, but any rights of Optionholders then subsisting shall remain in effect.”

 

5.

EXERCISE PRICE

 

5.1

Rules 6.1 and 6.2 will be deleted and replaced with the following:

 

22


“6.1 Immediately before an Option is granted, if the US Employee owns, directly or by reason of the applicable attribution rules in section 424(d) of the Code:

6.1.1 ten per cent. (10%) or less of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, the Exercise Price shall not be less than one hundred per cent. (100%) of the Market Value on the Date of Grant as determined in accordance with section 422 of the Code; or

6.1.2 more than ten per cent. (10%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate, the Exercise Price shall not be less than one hundred and ten per cent. (110%) of the Market Value on the Date of Grant.”

 

6.

COMPANY LIMIT (INSTITUTIONAL) ON THE GRANTING OF SUBSCRIPTION OPTIONS

 

6.1

The following new Rule 11.5 will be added to Rule 11:

“11.5 The maximum number of Shares which will be available for Options granted pursuant to this Schedule 1 will be 5,000,000 subject to adjustment in accordance with Rule 30.

 

7.

TIME OF EXERCISE – GENERAL RULES

 

7.1

Rule 15.2 will be deleted and replaced with the following:

“15.2 An Option will expire and may not in any event be exercised after:

15.2.1 the tenth anniversary of the Date of Grant, where the US Employee owns ten per cent. (10%) or less than the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate; or

15.2.2 the fifth anniversary of the Date of Grant, where the US Employee owns more than ten per cent. (10%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or an Affiliate

or such earlier time as the Grantor specifies in the Option Certificate.

 

7.2

The following new Rules 15.5 and 15.6 will be added to Rule 15:

“15.5 The aggregate Market Value (determined at the time each Option is granted) of Option Shares in respect of which an Option may be exercised for the first time by a US Employee in any calendar year (under all plans of the Company and its Affiliates) must not exceed USD 100,000.

15.6 The Committee may accelerate the exercise of any part of an Option, provided that such acceleration (and subsequent exercise) shall only be effective if it would not constitute a “modification” of the Option (as that term is defined under section 424(h) of the Code), or the Committee determines in its sole discretion that any modification is in the best interests of the Company.”

 

8.

LEAVING EMPLOYMENT

 

8.1

The following new Rule 16.6 will be added to Rule 16:

“16.6 An Option that is exercisable and is exercised more than three months after a US Employee’s termination of employment shall not be considered an Incentive Stock Option, unless (i) the US Employee terminates employment due to Disability or becomes Disabled within three months after termination of employment and exercises his Option within one year after the date of his termination of employment, but in no event after the date of expiration of the term of the Option, or (ii) terminates employment due to death or dies within three months after termination of employment.”

 

23


9.

RECOVERY OF TAX

 

9.1

The following new Rule 21.2 will be added to Rule 21:

“21.2 Each US Employee must agree to notify the Company in writing immediately after he makes a Disqualifying Disposition of any Shares acquired pursuant to the exercise of an Option. A Disqualifying Disposition is any disposition (including any sale) of such Shares before the later of (i) two years after the Date of Grant, or (ii) one year after the date the US Employee acquired Shares by exercising his Option. If the US Employee has died before such Shares are sold, these requirements do not apply and no Disqualifying Disposition can occur. “

 

10.

ALTERATION OF THE PLAN

 

10.1

The following new Rule 31.3 will be added to Rule 31:

“31.3 “Notwithstanding the provisions of this Rule 31, any such alteration will only be effective to the extent that it complies with section 422 of the Code, as amended from time to time, or the Committee determines in its sole discretion that any such alteration is in the best interest of the Company.”

 

11.

CONFLICT

If there is any conflict between the terms of this Schedule 1 and the other rules of the Plan, the terms set out in this Schedule 1 will prevail.

 

24


Schedule 2

CALIFORNIA SCHEDULE

 

1.

INTRODUCTION

 

1.1

This Schedule 2 shall apply to California Options granted to Eligible Employees who are resident in the state of California.

 

1.2

Unless stated otherwise in this Schedule 2, the main body of the Plan will apply to California Options granted to Eligible Employees under this Schedule 2.

 

2.

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

“California Option”    means a combination of a Market Value Option and a Matching Option granted in accordance with the Matching Option Ratio;
“Eligible California Employee”    means an employee of any member of the Group, other than the executive director, who resides in California;
“Exercise Price”    the price payable to acquire the Shares which are subject to the Market Value Option;
“Grantor”    means the Company;
“Option”    means a California Option;
“Optionholder”    means a person who has been granted a California Option or, if that person has died and where the context requires, his estate;
“Market Value Option”    a right to acquire Shares granted in accordance with, and subject to, the rules of this Plan on payment of the Exercise Price;
“Matching Option”    a right to acquire Shares granted in accordance with, and subject to, the rules of this Plan at no cost to the Optionholder;
“Matching Option Ratio”    the ratio of Shares comprised in the Matching Option relative to the number of Shares comprised in the related Market Value Option;
“Monthly Contributions”    the payments made by or on behalf of a Participant in US dollars to be applied to fund the Exercise Price;
“Performance Condition”    a condition or conditions imposed under Rule 5.2.5 provided that references in this Plan to Performance Target shall read as Performance Condition;
“Savings Period “    a period, determined by the Board, over which Monthly Contributions are made by an Optionholder.

 

25


3.

ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

Rule 3.2 is amended to replace “Eligible Employee” with “Eligible California Employee”.

 

4.

TIMING OF GRANT OF AN OPTION

 

4.1

Rules 4.1 and 4.2 shall not apply.

 

4.2

Rule 4.4 will be deleted and replaced with the following:

“No Option may be granted after the date that is the earlier of (i) the tenth anniversary of the Date of Approval with respect to this Schedule 2; or (ii) the tenth anniversary of the date that this Schedule 2 is approved by the Board of Directors of the Company, but any rights of Optionholders then subsisting shall remain in effect.”

 

5.

GRANT EFFECTED BY EXECUTION OF DEED

 

5.1

Rule 5.1 is amended by adding the words at the end of the current sentence:

“to any Eligible California Employee who has agreed to make Monthly Contributions during the Savings Period to fund the Exercise Price of the Market Value Option component of the California Option”

 

5.2

Rule 5.2 shall be amended by the addition of the following new Rule 5.2:

“5.2.10 any Holding Period to which Shares acquired on the exercise of a Matching Option will be applicable.”

 

5.3

A new Rule is inserted as:

 

  “5.2.11

that save as set out in this rule 5.2.11, the Optionholder may not withdraw from the Plan prior to the end of the Savings Period:

 

  (a)

If an Optionholder is suffering from extreme hardship, they may apply to the Committee, in such form as the Committee may determine from time to time, to withdraw from the Plan;

 

  (b)

Within 14 days of receipt of an application pursuant to Rule 5.2.10(a), the Committee will consider the Optionholder’s application and determine whether or not they may withdraw from the Plan. The Committee will then communicate the outcome of such determination to the Optionholder;

 

  (c)

Where the Committee has determined that the Optionholder is not suffering from extreme hardship, the Committee will communicate the rationale for its determination to the Optionholder and the Optionholder’s Monthly Contributions will continue;

 

  (d)

Where the Committee has determined that the Optionholder is suffering from extreme hardship, the Committee will communicate its decision to the Optionholder as soon as reasonably practicable and the Optionholder’s Option will lapse immediately. The Optionholder will cease to make Monthly Contributions and the Optionholder’s aggregate Monthly Contributions will be returned to them as soon as reasonably practicable.”

 

6.

EXERCISE PRICE

 

6.1

Rule 6.2 is amended to replace the words “Subscription Option” with “Market Value Option”.

 

26


7.

ACCEPTANCE OF AN OPTION

 

7.1

Rule 7.1 is amended to replace the words “Unless the Grantor otherwise” with “If the Grantor”.

 

7.2

Rule 7.2 is amended to replace the words “execute, as a deed,” with “sign”.

 

8.

COMPANY LIMIT (INSTITUTIONAL) ON THE GRANTING OF SUBSCRIPTION OPTIONS

 

8.1

Rule 11.1 is amended to replace the words “Subscription Options” with “Options to be satisfied by the issue of new Shares”.

 

8.2

The following new rule 11.5 will be added to Rule 11:

The maximum number of Shares that will be available for Options granted pursuant to this Schedule 2 will be 5,000,000 subject to adjustment in accordance with Rule 30.

 

9.

GENERAL RULES

 

9.1

Rule 13.3 shall not apply.

 

10.

PERFORMANCE TARGET

 

10.1

Rule 14 shall not apply and will be replaced with new Rule 14:

 

  “14.1

Unless the Committee determines otherwise, Matching Share Options will be subject to the satisfaction of a Performance Condition and subject to Rules 16 and 24, the Performance Condition will be measured over the Performance Period;

 

  14.2

the Committee may amend or substitute a Performance Condition if one or more events occur which cause the Committee to consider that a substituted or amended Performance Condition would be more appropriate and would not be materially less difficult to satisfy.”

 

11.

EXERCISE – GENERAL RULES

 

11.1

Rule 15.1 is amended by the addition of the words “and Market Value Options must be exercised within a period of 30 days, provided that Optionholders who cease employment after the Vesting Date will have 30 days from the date of cessation to exercise, after which they will lapse. Matching Options will be deemed to be exercised when they are no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture or such later date as may be specified in the Option Certificate.”

 

11.2

Rule 15.2 shall be deleted.

 

11.3

Rule 15.3 is amended by the addition of the words after Shares “and by the application of the Optionholder’s aggregate Matching Contributions at the time of exercise to fund the Exercise Price of the Market Value Option.”

 

11.4

A new Rule is inserted as:

 

  “15.5

Subject to Rule 16, when a California Option is exercised, both component parts of the California Option (being the Market Value Option and the Matching Option) are exercised simultaneously and in respect of all the Vested Shares to which they relate and it is not possible to exercise them separately or in part.”

 

11.5

A new Rule is inserted as:

 

  “15.6

To exercise a California Option, the Optionholder shall notify the Company in such form as manner as the Company shall specify.”

 

27


12.

LEAVING EMPLOYMENT

 

12.1

Rule 16 will be deleted and replaced with:

 

  “16.1

Subject to rule 16.3, where an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment with the Group before the Vesting Date, their Option will lapse.

 

  16.2

Where Options lapse pursuant to rule 16.1, an Optionholder’s aggregate Monthly Contributions will be returned to them as soon as practicable after the date of such cessation.

 

  16.3

Where an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment with the Group before the Vesting Date as a result of:

 

  16.3.1

death, ill-health, injury, retirement or disability as established to the satisfaction of the Board;

 

  16.3.2

redundancy; or

 

  16.3.3

the Optionholder’s employing company ceasing to be a member of the Group or the transfer of an undertaking or part of an undertaking (in which the Participant is employed) to a person who is not a member of the Group

 

  16.3.4

any other reason, except where an Optionholder is summarily dismissed

the Optionholder’s Options will not lapse.

Instead:

 

  16.3.5

the Optionholder will make no further Monthly Contributions to the Plan;

 

  16.3.6

the California Option will subsist until the Vesting Date when it will be exercisable in accordance with Rules 16.3.7 – 16.3.11;

 

  16.3.7

the number of Shares in respect of which the Market Value Option will be exercisable (the “Pro-rated Number of Shares”) will be reduced in proportion to the number of Monthly Contributions made by the Optionholder relative to the total number of Monthly Contributions to be made in the Savings Period;

 

  16.3.8

the maximum number of Shares in respect of which the Matching Option wil be exercisable will be reduced so that it is equal to the number determined by applying the Matching Option Ratio to the Pro-rated Number of Shares (the “Pro-rated Number of Matching Shares”);

 

  16.3.9

following the end of the Performance Period, the Committee will determine the extent to which the Performance Condition has been met and the extent to which the Matching Option will Vest in respect of the Pro-rated Number of Matching Shares to which it relates;

 

  16.3.10

to the extent that a Market Value Option is exercisable it must be exercised within 30 days of the Vesting Date after which it will lapse provided that where an Optionholder ceases employment by reason of death or disability a Market Value Option will remain exercisable (by the deceased Optionholder’s estate in the case of death) until or at least six months from cessation of employment, after which the Option will lapse.

 

28


  16.3.11

to the extent that an Option is not exercisable under this Rule 16 it will lapse immediately.”

 

13.

LEAVING FOR OTHER REASONS

 

13.1

Rule 17 will be deleted.

 

14.

DEATH OF AN OPTION HOLDER

Rule 18.1 will be deleted.

 

15.

18.2.2     MANNER OF EXERCISE OF AN OPTION

 

15.1

Rule 20.1 will be deleted.

 

16.

RECOVERY OF TAX

 

16.1

Rule 21.1.1 is amended by the deletion of “PAYE”.

 

16.2

Rule 21.2.1 is amended by deleting “14” before days and inserting “7” in its place.

 

17.

ISSUE OR TRANSFER OF SHARES

 

17.1

Rule 22.1 is amended by the addition of the words “subject to Rule 23” after the word “Optionholder”.

 

17.2

Rule 22.4.1 is amended by the addition of the words “provided that the Committee may determine that such certificate or other form of acknowledgement shall not be provided to the Optionholder until after the expiry of any applicable Holding Period in respect of any Shares to which the Holding Period applies.

 

18.

HOLDING PERIOD

 

18.1

A new Rule 23 is inserted (and subsequent Rules are re-numbered) as:

 

23.

HOLDING PERIOD

 

23.1

Fifty per cent (or such other percentage as the Committee may determine at the Date of Grant) of the Vested Shares comprised in a Matching Option after sufficient Shares comprised in that fifty per cent have been sold to meet Option Tax Liability applicable to the Matching Option (or would have been sold had the Optionholder not paid such liability to the Company) will be subject to a Holding Period beginning on the Vesting Date.”

 

19.

PART D: CORPORATE TRANSACTIONS

 

19.1

For the purposes of this Part D, no Option may be exercised or exchanged unless the “corporate transaction” constitutes a change of ownership or effective control, as provided in s.409A(a)(2)(v).

 

20.

APPLICATION OF PERFORMANCE TARGET AND TIME PRO RATING

 

20.1

Rule 24 is deleted and replaced with:

 

  “24.1

Where any of the events described in this Part D occur, all Options which have not yet Vested will Vest at the time of such event:

 

29


  24.1.1

in respect of the Market Value Options, on a pro-rata basis to reflect the number of Monthly Contributions that have been made by the Optionholder at the date of the event relative to the total number of Monthly Contributions to be made in the Savings Period; and

 
  24.1.2

in respect of the Matching Option in full, unless the Committee determines that Matching Options will Vest to a lesser extent (if at all), in which case the Committee shall determine the level of Vesting, taking into account the extent to which it considers that the Performance Condition has been satisfied at the time of the event and such other factors, including at what point during the Savings Period the event occurred and the underlying performance of the Company as it considers appropriate.”

 

21.

PART E: AMENDMENTS

 

21.1

For the purposes of this Part E, no amendment will be effective unless it complies with s.409A.

 

22.

VARIATION OF SHARE CAPITAL

 

22.1

The words “capitalisation or rights issue, sub-division, consolidation or reduction or there is any other variation in the share capital of the Company the Committee (on behalf of the Grantor, if appropriate)” in Rule 30.1 will be replaced with the words “a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, recapitalisation, combination, reclassification or other distribution (without any receipt of consideration by the Company the Committee will”.

 

23.

OBLIGATION TO ENSURE SUFFICIENT AVAILABLE SHARES

 

23.1

The following new rule 33.4 will be added to rule 33:

 

  “33.4

Where Vested Shares to be delivered in respect of an Option under this Schedule 2 are delivered via the Trustee:-

 

  33.4.1

Vesting Date; and the Optionholder will not have any interest in those Shares until the

 

  33.4.2

the Trustee will not allocate any Shares or other trust assets in favour of the Optionholder until the Vesting Date.”

 

30

Exhibit 21.1

Subsidiaries of the Registrant

 

Legal Name of Subsidiary

 

Jurisdiction of Organization

Abcam (US) Ltd.

  United Kingdom

Abcam US Group Holdings Inc.

  United States

Abcam Trading (Shanghai) Co. Ltd.

  China

Epitomics Inc.

  United States

Exhibit 23.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We hereby consent to the use in this Registration Statement on Form F-1 of Abcam plc of our report dated September 16, 2020 relating to the financial statements of Abcam plc, which appears in this Registration Statement. We also consent to the reference to us under the heading “Experts” in such Registration Statement.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Cambridge, United Kingdom

October 2, 2020